^no*n  tltB  j£.iM^usA4f 
^Ue.  R.e4*.  ^^ed&Uch  Cdwa^xli, 
3iea*t  afj 

St.  Pauti.  QcUU^<PuU, 

Tbet^oit,  MlclU(f<i*t 
mUa  cUed  OctoLen.  i-i/TcHt, 


DUKE 

UNIVERSITY 

LIBRARY 


FRIENDS  OF 
DUKE  UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARY 

GIFT  OF 

Dr.  J.  B.  Rhine 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2018  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


https://archive.org/details/dawnofawakenedmi01king 


\ 


THE  AUTHOR— JOHN  S.  KING,  M.  D. 
(At  the  Age  of  70  Years) 


DAWN  OF  THE 
'  AWAKENED 
MIND 


BY 

JOHN  S.^ING,  M.D. 

Founder  and  President  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Piychical 
Research  for  the  eight  years  of  its  existence 


NEW  YORK 

THE  JAMES  A.  McCANN  COMPANY 

1920 


Copyright,  1920,  by 

JAMES  POOLE 


i23,  ? 


TO  THOSE  WHO  SEE  AND  KNOW  THE  TRUTH,  AND  SUFFER 
FOR  ITS  SAKE,  THIS  BOOK  IS  DEDICATED  BY  THE  AUTHOR. 


"MY  SON,  BE  THOU  OF  THOSE  WHO  SEEK  AND  FIND  THE 
WONDERS  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND.  I,  THY  GUIDE, 
HYPATIA.  OFTEN  CALLED  MOST  WISE  OF  WOMANKIND,  LEAD 
THEE  IN  WHAT  YOU  NOW  ENDEAVOR  TO  DO.  I  LEAD  YOU 
AND  I  FOLLOW  YOU;  OR  I  DO  ALL  1  CAN  TO  BE  AN  AIDER 
AND  A  GUIDE;  AND  EVEN  ROYALTY  MUST  BOW  TO  THOSE 
WHO  SOLVE  THIS  PROBLEM.” 


HYPATIA. 


“FACE  THOU  A  LION,  AND  IT  COWERS  BEFORE  THE  POWER 
OF  MIND;  SO  THY  ENEMIES  SO  COWER,  BEFORE  THY  FACE 
OF  HONEST  POWER  TO  PROVE  THAT  IT  IS  TRUE,  THAT  I  — 
MAY  KING  —  MAY  COME  TO  YOU." 


MAY. 


"I  AM  WITH  THEE  ALWAYS.  AND  FROM  THY  BIRTH  I  FOL¬ 
LOWED  THEE;  AND  AT  THE  SEANCE  OF  MRS.  MOSS  I  SHOWED 
MY  FACE  TO  THEE.  MY  FORM  MATERIALIZED  WILL  SHOW 
TO  THEE  AGAIN.  MY  WHOLE  WISH  IS  TO  HAVE  THIS  BOOK 
SUCCESSFUL  IN  EVERY  DEGREE.  IT  IS  MY  SOUL  WISH  THAT 
IT  BLOSSOM  FORTH  FROM  EAST  TO  WEST,  FROM  SOUTH  TO 
NORTH,  UNTIL  ALL  THINKING  MEN  SHALL  SAY,  THIS  IS 
THE  TRUTH  THIS  MAN  DOES  SAY.”’ 


EGYPTIA. 


"HORATIO.  AT  THE  BRIDGE  ARE  YOU,  AND  NOT  ANOTHER 
MAN  MAY  COME  ACROSS  THE  NARROW  SPAN.” 


ELECTRA. 


"MEN  ARE  AS  GROWING  PLANTS,  AND  EVERY  WIND  THAT 
BLOWS  MAY  BRING  TO  ONE  A  BENEFIT  THAT  LAY  ANOTHER 
LOW.  THIS  BOOK  YOU  WRITE  IS  WATER  PURE  AND  GOOD, 
AND  MANY  HUNGRY  MINDS  THERE  BE  THAT  GRASP  ITS 
TREASURES  HUNGRILY;  AND  OVER  ALL  LANDS  OF  LIGHT  OR 
ENLIGHTENMENT,  THIS  BOOK  WILL  SHINE  A  TORCH  FROM 
GOD,  WHERE  EACH  MAY  LIGHT  HIS  FLARING  LAMP  ANEW, 
AND  SPEND  DECLINING  YEARS  IN  BLESSING  YOU  WHO  HAVE 
SHOWN  THEM  THE  TRUTH  OF  HEAVEN’S  DOOR;  AND  THAT 
THEY  HAVE  THE  POWER  TO  MEET  THEIR  FRIENDS  ONCE 
MORE.” 

ASIA  (Of  the  ancient  people  loct  in  the  present  age). 


PREFACE 


IT  WAS  in  truth  the  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind”  to  me, 
when  I  first  received  and  realized  the  truth,  made  known 
and  proved  to  me  through  psychic  revelations. 

The  Testaments,  both  Old  and  New,  contain  much  recorded 
evidence  of  spirit  return  and  communication ;  and  of  numerous 
psychical  phenomena,  not  miraculous,  but  as  spirits  themselves 
demonstrate  and  tell  us,  under  the  operation  of  natural  laws,  not 
yet  fully  understood.  But  as  natural  law  may  and  does  repeat 
itself  today,  why  argue  against  the  possibility  of  psychical 
phenomena?  Surely  no  grander  truth  could  ever  be  established 
by  proofs,  than  communication  between  the  two  worlds.  Beliefs 
are  mostly  hereditary,  and  may  be  right,  or  may  sometimes  be 
wrong,  as  I  have  illustrated  in  Chapter  X. 

So  I  reasoned,  and  determined  to  investigate ;  and  in  this  book 
are  recorded  a  few  of  the  results  among  many  hundreds  I  have 
had  in  the  way  of  experiences,  and  evidences  obtained  in  my 
devious,  intricate  and  I  may  add  unpopular  pathway  of  psychical 
research,  consuming  a  period  of  about  twenty-five  years.  Like 
an  explorer  in  an  unknown  country,  without  mortal  guide ;  and 
fully  realizing  various  dangers,  and  possibilities  of  attack  by 
certain  claimants  of  the  territory,  I  followed  no  beaten  path  of 
investigation  to  reach  the  truth.  Having  a  mental  compass  of 
impression  or  intuition  pointing  steadily  in  one  direction,  I  trav¬ 
elled  on  my  solitary  way,  ever  hoping  to  reach  the  destination 
which  I  strove  to  attain,  examining  here  and  there  at  long  or 
short  intervals  and  minutely,  what  to  me  was  new,  or  evidential 
of  communication  between  the  two  worlds. 

I  found  —  by  extensive  travelling  in  quest  of  psychics,  by 
patience,  perseverance,  and  constant  thoughtful  and  careful  in¬ 
vestigation,  regardless  of  opinions,  criticism,  time  or  expense  — 
that  with  each  psychic  my  experience  varied.  I  found  individual 
psychics  different  from  others  in  their  phases,  and  differences 
between  those  of  the  same  phase  of  mediumship,  in  distantly  sep- 

xvii 


PREFACE 


xviii 

arated  places,  at  any  time  I  visited  them.  Some  of  them  were 
as  widely  different  in  their  modus  operandi  as  is  found  to  be 
the  case  with  man’s  invented  instruments  for  transmitting 
messages,  in  the  forms  of  telegrams,  marconigrams,  phonograms, 
and  other  devices,  through  each  of  which  when  the  message  came, 
I  could  gather  thought  expressions  of  certain  personalities,  of 
the  intelligences  using  the  psychic;  and  found  coming  through 
these  different  channels,  varied  expressions  physical,  mental  and 
psychical  in  character,  voices  from  visible  and  invisible  intel¬ 
ligences,  automatic  writing  and  talking,  yet  intellectual  and  con¬ 
sistent  throughout  the  conversation  in  each  case,  yet  collated  them 
into  definite  compilation  of  thought  expressions,  which  had  origin 
of  different  phase,  until  the  corroborations  became  so  wonderful, 
and  so  convincing,  that  my  mind  seemed  to  be  washed  clear  of 
all  uncertainty;  and  truths  flashed  upon  my  consciousness  and 
attached  themselves  to  me  as  knowledge  my  own. 

In  psychical  seances  I  sometimes  employed  professional  stenog¬ 
raphers  to  make  exact  records  for  me ;  and  such  records  were 
sworn  to  by  them  as  correct,  as  will  hereafter  appear ;  while  scores 
of  intelligent  sitters  have  shared  with  me  some  of  these  wonderful 
seances ;  and  were  willing  when  called  upon  to  swear  to  the  truth 
of  the  records  of  what  several  on  each  occasion,  in  different 
seances  saw  and  heard,  in  conjunction  one  with  another. 

Mortals  have  various  devices  for  intercommunicating  which  I 
have  referred  to,  and  none  will  presume  to  deny  their  existence, 
for  they  are  employed  day  by  day,  all  the  time,  throughout  the 
so-called  civilized  nations  of  the  world,  and  every  section  of  their 
people.  They  are  employed  to  encourage  acquisition  of  knowledge, 
record  the  world’s  progress,  facilitate  business,  engender  fellow¬ 
ship,  and  are  utilized  to  promote  the  interests  of  each  and  all. 

On  going  to  the  spirit  world,  our  loved  ones  and  friends  leave 
behind  them  all  they  possessed  of  the  physical,  and  like  the  mortal, 
they  claim  to  have  yearnings  for  their  earth  loves,  as  have  mortals 
for  them ;  and  like  mortals  they  try  to  discover  or  design  a  means 
of  communicating. 

This  little  earth  of  ours,  among  the  stars  of  God’s  great 
universe,  contains  as  compared  with  it,  but  few  souls;  while  in 


PREFACE 


XIX 


the  realms  beyond,  or  “Over  There,”  are  countless  myriads  of 
spirits,  once  embodied  as  are  present  mortals  but  now  free.  Surely 
they  have  succeeded  in  finding  but  a  few,  among  the  many  millions 
of  mortal  beings  who  contain  in  their  make-up,  a  peculiar  psychic 
element,  while  their  body  and  mind  are  but  the  channels  through 
which  the  element  operates,  as  does  electricity  in  the  wire,  and 
power  in  the  wavelets  or  vibrations  we  utilize ;  and  the  spirit 
intelligence,  through  the,  to  us,  unseen  power  speaks,  writes,  or 
demonstrates,  to  convey  to  us  their  thoughts ;  and  who  thus  can, 
and  do  commune  with  us,  in  our  presence,  when  conditions,  not 
yet  made  plain,  are  favorable. 

I  may  here  premise  for  your  guidance,  that  you  can  no  more 
reach  a  correct  conclusion  as  to  what  the  book  proves,  by  picking 
out  sentences,  or  even  chapters  isolated  here  and  there,  and  thus 
prejudge,  than  a  youth  at  college,  who  will  assuredly  fail  to  solve 
a  problem  in  the  third  book  of  Euclid,  before  having  first  suc¬ 
ceeded  in  solving  those  in  books  one  and  two. 

It  will  prove  more  satisfactory,  therefore,  to  peruse  each  page 
carefully  as  you  find  it,  in  order  of  its  number,  and  long  before 
you  have  finished,  you  will  realize  it  embraces  a  cobweb  of  corre¬ 
lated  and  corroborative  evidence.  Propositions,  predictions  or 
promises  made  through  a  psychic  of  one  phase,  at  a  given  time 
and  place,  may  be  answered  or  fulfilled  through  another  psychic 
of  a  different  phase,  at  a  different  date  and  place  absolutely  in 
some  instances  continuing  a  prior  conversation,  or  making  a 
promised  demonstration,  for  no  medium  can  truthfully  claim  to 
be  the  only  avenue  of  communication  for  our  spirit  friend,  or 
friends.  Such  attitude  suggests  ignorance  of  facts,  or  the  alter¬ 
native,  jealousy  of  other  psychics.  Spirit  friends  say  they  are 
constantly  seeking  open  doors,  through  which  to  commune  with 
mortals ;  and  use  psychics  irrespective  of  their  sex,  age,  character, 
nationality  or  sphere  in  the  mortal  life,  through  whom  to  commune 
with  those  they  desire  to  reach.  This  I  have  found  to  be  very 
frequently  true,  as  the  reader  will  observe  in  different  chapters. 
So  also,  do  not  allow  your  bias  of  former,  or  existing  belief,  to 
influence  your  investigations.  This  is  the  best  course  to  follow 
when  in  pursuit  of  truth.  I  did  not  assume  the  attitude  of 


XX 


PREFACE 


"seeking,  hoping  not  to  find,”  for  that  very  attitude  creates  a 
barrier  by  disturbing  harmony,  obstructs  one’s  pathway  of 
progress,  and  dims  the  dawning  light,  which  might  otherwise 
enlighten  the  understanding,  and  enable  the  investigator  to  grasp 
the  truth,  as  a  golden  nugget  of  absolute  knowledge,  his  own. 

One  enigma  which  frequently  presents  for  solution  is  to  prove 
the  spirit’s  human  personality ;  and  this  requires  the  exercise  of 
tact  to  accomplish,  to  one’s  own  satisfaction,  at  the  same  time 
avoiding  the  presentation  of  a  clue,  or  suggestion,  which  the 
spirit,  or  the  medium,  might  discern,  and  consciously  or  uncon¬ 
sciously  utilize  in  framing  a  response  to  our  question  or  wish. 

In  many  instances  of  written  messages  spirits  alleging  them¬ 
selves  to  be  ancient,  or  modern,  strangers  or  former  friends,  or 
relatives,  it  would  at  the  time  appear  difficult  to  accept  their  state¬ 
ments  as  those  from  their  asserted  personalities,  yet  some  of  them 
have  later  returned  to  me  several  times  at  seances  held  by  mediums 
of  other  phases ;  and  in  various  ways  have  established  their 
identity  as  the  one  who  came  at  the  original  seance,  or  first  com¬ 
municated.  The  reader  will  readily  understand  that  in  any  event 
a  psychical  researcher’s  detailed  records  attain  to  such  voluminous 
proportions  as  to  render  it  practically  impossible  to  publish  them 
in  their  entirety,  for  general  reading. 

It  appears  to  be  a  fact  that  some  spirits  have  but  a  rare  oppor¬ 
tunity  to  use  a  psychic ;  and  when  such  opportunity  presents, 
readily  embrace  it,  even  when  the  sitter  is  unknown  to  it ;  and  in 
answer  to  the  question,  “Who  is  speaking  now?”  replies,  “It 
matters  not,  you  never  knew  me,  I  do  this  as  an  experiment  now 
that  I  have  the  opportunity.”  Or  some  similar  reply.  So  too  spirits 
humorously  inclined,  seek  to  promote  good  feeling,  and  secure 
harmony,  by  language  inducing  laughter ;  or  by  singing  something 
familiar,  to  aid  in  producing  harmonious  conditions. 

The  limitations  of  my  records  as  presented  in  the  present 
volume,  are  to  the  very  few  selected  physical,  mental  and  automatic 
mediums,  though  I  have  interviewed  many  scores  of  psychics,  and 
have  attended  many  hundreds  of  seances.  The  reason  for  this 
selection  is  that  in  each  case  I  have  repeatedly  and  critically 
observed  them,  and  studied  their  occult  demonstrations  for  years, 


PREFACE 


XXI 


one  at  intervals  for  eig^hteen  years,  and  the  others  for  at  least  eight 
years  each;  and  by  such  course  had  my  assurance  on  the  one 
hand,  against  fraud  or  deception ;  and  on  the  other,  a  more 
experienced,  and  therefore  a  more  perfect  accuracy  of  attainment 
of  detaijed  observation;  and  probably  a  more  skilled  detection  of 
idiosyncrasies,  or  that  of  hypnotic,  hysterical,  perverted  or  dis¬ 
ordered  mind  conditions,  than  I  could  have  had  if  I  divided  my 
investigations  among  the  many  psychics,  and  the  numerous  phases. 

My  conclusions  were  that  there  is  more  advantage  in  constant 
and  consecutive  observation,  with  changes  in  mode  or  degree  of 
investigation,  than  in  alternate  or  disconnected  order,  and  un¬ 
expected  at  times,  thus  disconcerting  possible  premeditations. 

Psychics  or  mediums,  like  other  people,  greatly  differ  in  their 
capabilities  and  attainments;  and  like  pupils  are  instructed  or 
trained,  but  unconsciously  (through  the  subjective  self)  by  differ¬ 
ent  spirit  teachers,  and  controls,  whose  purposes  and  modes 
widely  vary,  as  does  the  character  of  the  attainment  of  the  vehicle 
or  instrument  (the  medium)  ;  and  the  mode  of  attunement 
employed,  before  the  communicating  spirit  can  demonstrate 
through  or  in  the  presence  of  the  psychic.  Results  at  times  are 
most  peculiar.  I  have  conversed  with  the  alleged  controls  of 
these  mediums  many  times  through  their  own  instrument  as  well 
as  through  psychics  of  other  phases,  such  as  voicing  through 
trumpets,  and  talking  with  their  own  vocal  organs  when  material¬ 
ized  ;  and  have  received  explanations,  and  other  valued  informa¬ 
tion,  some  of  which  is  noted  here  and  there  in  different  chapters. 
One  example  I  may  give  here  in  the  case  of  the  automatic  writing 
and  rhyming  psychic,  who  from  the  first  was  an  unwilling  instru¬ 
ment  ;  and  was  made  to  suffer  mental  punishment,  yet  by  her  spirit 
control  is  still  compelled  to  translate  spirit  messages  in  a  rhyming 
manner  (as  set  forth  in  the  chapter  devoted  to  herself),  though 
truthfully  conveying  the  thoughts  of  the  spirit  communicating. 
This  constitutes  a  veto  to  absolute  independence  of  the  subjective 
mind,  and  at  the  same  time  preserves  the  objective  mind  in  full 
normality,  and  thus  protects  the  reasoning  faculty. 

In  the  very  few  cases  selected  from  among  the  many  for  critical 
study,  they  were  representative  among  the  available  psychics  of 


XXll 


PREFACE 


their  class,  in  America  at  least.  I  feel,  therefore,  after  com¬ 
pleting  my  critical  study  of  them,  that  it  is  due  to  not  only  the 
readers  of  the  results  obtained  through  these  psychics,  but  to 
the  psychics  themselves,  to  here  give  credit  due,  and  say  I  have 
generally  had  entire  satisfaction  with  their  honesty ;  and  found 
them  as  instruments  void  of  both  conscious  and  unconscious 
fraud ;  and  do  so  the  more  freely  as  I  am  under  no  obligation 
to  favor  them,  not  even  in  slight  degree. 

In  addition  to  the  records  already  indicated,  chapters  are  inter¬ 
spersed  containing  further  features  of  physical  phenomena,  in¬ 
cluding  the  phase  of  materialization  in  the  presence  of  a  conscious 
medium,  where  the  spirit  visitors  produce  their  own  light,  illum¬ 
inating  themselves  in  a  previously  darkened  room.  Clairvoyance 
and  Clairaudience  are  briefly  dealt  with.  There  is  a  chapter  on 
Hypnotic-psychic-phenomena;  and  one  chiefly  devoted  to  a  crit¬ 
icism  of  “The  Mind  Hypothesis.”  Conditions  in  relation  to 
results  are  also  dealt  with ;  and  the  conclusion  of  my  argument 
on  the  evidence  submitted. 

Fearless  of  either  public  or  personal  opinion,  and  with  every 
regard  for  the  sacred  privilege  accorded  all,  of  individual  faith 
and  belief,  I  began  my  work.  Nothing  will  be  found  throughout 
the  volume  which  to  any  degree,  either  by  direct  statement  or  by 
innuendo,  attacks  any  man’s  church,  religious  belief,  creed 
or  philosophy,  the  State’s  power  or  authority,  or  the  collective 
community.  My  resolve,  from  first  to  last,  has  been,  irrespective 
of  beliefs,  and  with  an  open  mind,  to  “seek,  prove  and  declare 
the  truth.*’ 

In  presenting  my  acquired  experiences,  evidences  and  knowl¬ 
edge,  I  do  so  in  a  narrative  or  descriptive  style,  suited  to  the 
general  reader,  hoping  that  what  the  book’s  pages  contain,  may 
to  some  extent  at  least,  render  the  task  of  investigating  easier; 
and  thus  aid  other  belated  investigators  to  attain  to  a  positive 
knowledge,  infinitely  more  self-satisfying,  and  more  valuable, 
than  any  belief  not  so  founded. 

I  reached  my  final  conclusions,  and  first  made  them  public 
verbally,  in  my  “pronunciamento”  on  April  26,  1913,  at  Toronto, 
Canada ;  and  now  in  1920,  publish  them  to  the  world. 


CONTENTS 


Chapteb  I . 

Introduction  to  Psychical  Research.  The  author’s  earlier  atti¬ 
tude  towards  it.  His  estimate  of  its  importance.  The  legitimacy 
of  Psychical  Research. 

Chapter  II . 

First  experience  with  the  occult.  A  Washington,  D.  C.,  seance. 
The  author’s  introducer  —  Dr.  B.  L.  W.  Theodor  Hansmann,  a 
nonagenarian  at  his  passing  to  spirit  realms.  The  medium  Mary 
A.  Keeler. 

Chapter  III . 

A  second  experience  with  the  occult.  The  Effie  Moss  Series  of 
Seances,  held  at  the  MacRoberts’  home  in  London,  Ontario.  Inter¬ 
viewing  the  medium;  and  critically  examining  the  cabinet  and 
room. 

Chapter  IV . 

Strange  psychical  phenomena.  First  of  the  Moss  Series  of 
seances.  Materialized  human  forms  appear.  Seven  recorded 
cases.  First  evidential  matter.  Author’s  mother  proves  her 
human  personality.  Dr.  King’s  alleged  guardian-spirit  Egyptia 
rises  out  of  carpet,  a  pace  from  him. 

Chapter  V . 

Varied  phenomena  presenting.  Author’s  father  appears.  More 
evidence  of  personality,  by  matters  physical  as  well  as  words  — 
Credibility  of  testimony  —  Absent  critics.  Disturbing  element 
breaks  up  seance. 

Chapter  VI . 

Third  and  concluding  seance.  New  psychical  phenomena. 
Synopsis  of  recorded  presentations.  More  circumstantial  evidence. 
The  author’s  mother,  as  was  her  will  in  life,  takes  his  right  arm ; 
and  thus  walks  to  and  talks  with  every  sitter.  She  is  recognized 
by  an  old-time  friend.  A  spirit  teacher  —  Egyptia,  the  alleged 
guardian-spirit,  again  appears.  A  special  occult  seance. 

Chapter  VII . 

What  hypothesis  best  accounts  for  the  phenomena?  Oppor¬ 
tunity  and  conditions!  Work  of  research.  Review  of  evidence. 
Comments  of  Author  on  results  obtained. 

Chapter  VIII  . 

Trans- Atlantic  spiritistic  communication.  First  experiment. 
Important  evidential  matter.  Transmitter  the  author  in  Toronto, 
the  receiver  W.  T.  Stead  in  London,  England.  The  Herald 
Hypatia.  Second  experiment  —  The  third  experiment  between 
Toronto  and  Toledo  a  perfect  success. 

xxiii 


XXIV 


CONTENTS 


Chapter  IX . 47 

Hypnosis  and  some  of  its  psychical  phenomena.  Why  consid¬ 
ered  in  this  connection.  Extracts  from  a  talk  given  before  the 
members  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  by 
their  President. 


Chapter  X  . 54 

The  author’s  firm  attitude  on  psychical  research  —  Charged 
with  obliquity  at  the  start.  Integrity  of  motive.  Consistency  of 
endeavor.  Hypnotic  experience  an  incentive.  Investigation 
justified  by  results.  Knowledge  versus  beliefs. 

Chapter  XI . 66 

Relationship  between  conditions  and  results.  Natural  Law  is 
Universal  Spirit’s  Fiat.  Psychic  forces  require  special  conditions 
for  occult  demonstrations. 

Chapter  XII . 73 

The  key  that  unlocked  the  mystery.  The  ante-mortem  agree¬ 
ment  between  Author  and  wife.  Conditions  that  favored  psychic 
results.  A  general  understanding  as  to  evidential  matter. 

Chapter  XIII . 80 


The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  First  of  series,  a 
trumpet  seance.  Medium  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt.  Author  and  medium 
first  met  in  a  Moss  Seance  in  1894.  May’s  ante-mortem  promise 
fulfilled  on  the  first  opportunity.  She  talked  with  her  husband 
through  the  trumpet. 

Chapter  XIV . 87 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Second  of  series,  a 
trumpet  seance.  “May”  again  holds  converse  with  her  husband. 

He  tests  her  with  successful  results.  He  solicits  information. 
Spirit  of  MacRoberts  calls  on  him. 

Chapter  XV . . . 92 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Third  of  series.  First 
materializing  seance.  Medium  J.  B.  Jonson.  Examining  the 
cabinet.  Wife  again  fulfills  her  promise  to  husband.  An  infant 
baby  brother  materializes  as  a  man.  Also  spirit  baby  daughter 
comes  back  as  a  young  woman.  A  Toronto  man  comes  back. 
Direct  evidence  multiplies.  Predictions  made,  by  more  than  one, 
on  different  days,  are  fulfilled  at  Jonson’s. 

Chapter  XVI . ..102 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Fourth  of  Series. 
Second  materializing  seance  at  J.  B.  Jonson’s.  The  Sunflower 
private  class,  and  Guide  Celeste.  Author  present  by  invitation. 

An  important  seance.  Promises  of  Spirit  Guide  Hypatia,  Spirit 
wife  “May,”  and  spirit  daughter  “May  Donna,”  as  well  as  Dr. 
Sharp  all  fulfilled.  The  official  stenographer’s  sworn  record  of 
nineteen  manifestations.  Direct  evidence  accumulating.  Wonder¬ 
ful  demonstrations  and  testimony. 


CONTENTS 


XXV 


Chapter  XVII . 112 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Fifth  of  Series. 
Third  materializing  seance,  at  J.  B.  Jonson’s.  The  seance  a  public 
one.  The  speechless  man  returns  and  talks.  “May"  and  “May 
Donna"  come  again.  An  alleged  ancient  guide  of  author.  Auto¬ 
biography  of  Jonson,  and  his  photo. 


Chapter  XVIII . 117 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Sixth  of  Series. 
Third  Etta  Wriedt  Trumpet  Seance.  A  circle  of  seven.  Acknowl¬ 
edged  fulfillment  of  Dr.  Sharp’s  promise.  He  materialized  for 
author  and  wife  in  1910.  Gray  Feather,  Jonson’s  Control,  calls. 

Two  spirits  sing  for  sitters.  Asia,  an  alleged  ancient  spirit  guide, 
speaks.  Maggie  Gaul’s  cabinet  guide  Pansy  entertains  sitters. 

The  telepathic  and  mind-reading  'hypotheses  analyzed. 


Chapter  XIX . 133 

The  November,  1911,  Series  of  Seances.  Seventh  and  last  of 
series.  Fourth  Etta  Wriedt  trumpet  seance.  The  author  is  the 
single  sitter.  Guides  and  loved  ones  there.  Family  and  personal 
affairs  discussed.  Later  corroborative  evidence  reported  by 
friends. 


Chapter  XX . 140 

Continuity  of  life  proclaimed  as  proven.  Communication  be¬ 
tween  earth  and  spirit  realms  maintained.  The  problem  solved 
by  aid  of  Author’s  wife.  Strong  evidence  submitted.  The 
Author’s  argument  presented.  These  claims  sustained  as  truth. 


Chapter  XXI  i  .-  i  153 

“The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  with  automatic  action,  in¬ 
cluding  movement,  writing,  speech.  Her  objective  and  subjective 
minds  have  a  general  independent  action.  A  mental  curiosity. 

_  Sketch  of  her  psychic  power.  Resemblance  to  public  ’phone. 

The  Author’s  conclusions. 


Chapter  XXII . 166 

Hypatia,  the  Neoplatonic  Philosopher.  Daughter  of  Theon. 
Alleged  Spirit  Guide  of  the  Author.  Has  proved  to  be  a  great 
Teacher.  This  book  her  own  suggestion.  She  aided  in  securing 
evidence  for  it.  She  brought  relatives,  friends,  strangers,  seers, 
philosophers  and  researchers  to  commune  with  the  Author.  She 
spent  hours  at  a  time  in  answering  his  questions.  Fulfilled  her 
promise  to  aid  him  to  secure  her  spirit  portrait.  She  wrote 
through  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  and  other  automatic 
writers.  Also  spoke  through  trumpets.  Has  held  converse  with 
the  Author,  and  with  other  people  while  present  in  her  transient 
body. 


xxvi  CONTENTS 

Chapter  XXIII . 18S 


Hypatia  establishes  her  claim  to  having  been  the  Neoplatonic 
Philosopher;  and  the  Author’s  spirit  teacher,  aider  and  guide. 

She  communed  with  him  regarding  mind  and  soul  or  spirit,  and 
their  relation  to  Deity.  She  likewise  outlined  her  philosophy, 
and  the  tenets  of  her  creed,  and  wh&t  she  had  taught  the  people. 

She  dealt  also  with  psychic  phenomena  in  the  seance  room;  and 
concluded  with  a  brief  autobiography,  and  reference  to  her 
martyrdom.  The  answers  to  questions  submitted  and  some  state¬ 
ments  added,  were  transmitted  by  speaking  them  into  the  tele¬ 
phone  receiver,  the  subjective  mind  of  the  instrument,  which 
controlled  the  automatic  hand  to  reproduce  them  in  writing.  The 
instrument  named  as  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone.’’ 

Chapter  XXIV . 209 

Practical  psychology  of  profound  interest.  Alleged  spirits  of 
Socrates,  Plato,  and  Aristotle  gave  immediate  answer  to  each 
question  which  the  author  proposed.  They  defined  composition, 
form  and  attributes  of  soul  —  and  the  relation  of  the  human 
Ego  to  Deity.  Otelleo,  an  Ancient  Egyptian,  at  the  close  of  the 
interview  complimented  the  Author  on  the  quality  of  his  work. 

Chapter  XXV . 224 

The  April,  1912,  Series  of  Seances,  with  J.  B.  Jonson.  The 
first  a  public  one.  Jonson  sits  out  in  the  circle.  Many  forms  • 
come  to  sitters.  The  Author’s  Spirit  wife  and  daughter  material¬ 
ize  and  talk  with  him.  Hypatia,  advanced  spirit,  wise  and 
beautiful,  walks  into  the  room  and  greets  the  sitters.  Dr.  Sharp, 
the  Control  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  the  trumpet  medium,  calls  and 
greets  the  author. 

Chapter  XXVI . 234 

The  April,  1912,  Series  of  Seances,  with  J.  B.  Jonson.  Second 
seance,  seven  sitters  besides  Jonson  and  his  wife.  All  sitters 
have  good  results.  The  Author’s  Spirit  wife  and  daughter,  and 
also  father  present.  Strong  evidential  matter. 

Chapter  XXVII . .  .  238 

The  April,  1912,  Series  of  Seances,  with  J.  B.  Jonson.  Third 
seance,  twelve  sitters  present.  Eight  spirit  forms  come  to  the 
Author.  He  hands  his  loved  ones  roses.  A  boy  unrecognized, 
who  could  not  speak,  appeared  to  him.  Hill  received  written 
message  and  promised  answer,  if  possible. 

Chapter  XXVIII . 242 

The  April,  1912,  Series  of  Seances,  with  J.  B.  Jonson.  Fourth 
seance  the  concluding  one,  and  marked  by  special  features. 
Demonstrations  most  convincing.  The  Author’s  daughter  fulfills 
a  promise.  She  walks  into  the  circle  and  most  sweetly  sings. 
Seance  concludes  with  a  grand  surprise  by  Wm,  T.  Stead.  Cor¬ 
roborative  testimony, 


CONTENTS  xxvii 

Chapter  XXIX . 250 


Author’s  wife  the  key  that  unlocked  the  mystery.  She  fulfilled 
her  ante-mortem  promise.  Also  post-mortem  one  to  write  a 
chapter.  In  doing  so  proves  her  human  personality.  And  up¬ 
holds  life’s  continuity.  Proves  spirits  return  and  commune  with 
mortals.  A  wonderful  production  through  “The  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone,’’  of  rhyming  tendency. 


Chapter  XXX . 255 

Does  the  spirit  of  Wm.  T.  Stead  commune  with  the  Author : 

By  automatic  psychic’s  written  messages?  By  independent  writ¬ 
ing  on  slates  ?  By  speaking  through  trumpets  ?  By  talking  through 
trance  mediums?  By  dictating?  Through  clairaudients ?  And 
by  talking  with  the  vocal  organs  of  his  transient  body,  a  duplicate 
of  his  earthly  body  expression,  all  of  which  claim  to  be  him? 
Look  at  the  picture  of  him,  as  he  first  came  and  materialized  at 
the  Jonson  seance  —  and  was  reproduced,  nine  days  later,  on 
canvas,  by  spirit  artist  Rembrandt,  aided  by  Hermes,  ruler  of 
the  power  of  levitation.  Stead’s  claim  of,  and  comment  on,  the 
picture.  Does  not  all  the  varied  evidence  sustain  the  claim? 
Several  spirits  confirm  it. 


Chapter  XXXI . .  275 

An  evidential  chapter  of  strong  testimony. 

A  long  list  of  volunteer  witnesses. 

Evidence  for  truth  of  life’s  continuity. 

Return  and  communication,  in  perpetuity. 

Arc  not  my  loved  ones,  who  have  proved  to  me, 

And  my  spirit  guides,  and  others  near. 

Including  noted  ones  who  no  longer  fear, 

Bringing  to  mankind  good  cheer? 

Are  not  work  and  book  endorsed  by  them. 

As  coming  from  the  spirit  sphere? 

The  evidence  bids  strong  for  coming  change. 

From  base  desire,  and  sordid  greeds, 

From  selfish  wants,  and  warring  creeds, 

To  waking  minds  to  truth,  and  human  needs. 

From  war,  distrust,  unrighteousness, 

To  peace  with  knowledge,  and  pure  happiness. 

To  trust  in  God’s  own  fatherhood. 

To  faith  in  man’s  true  brotherhood; 

When  all  humanity  will  know  and  realize. 

Immortal  life  awaits  them  in  the  skies. 


Chapter  XXXII . 343 

Trumpet  Seances  at  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt’s.  Four  in  December, 

1912,  series.  Spirit  voices.  Light  and  Power.  A  few  of  the  many 
features.  Very  strong  and  confirmatory  evidence.  What  spirit 
power  can  bring  about.  Fulfillment  of  a  spirit’s  prophecy. 


CONTENTS 


XXVlll 


Chapter  XXXIII 


354 


Two  seances  for  materialization  at  Jonson’s  on  23rd  and  26th 
December,  1912,  of  evidential  character.  An  extraordinary 
materializing  seance  December  24th,  with  a  private  lady  psychic 
in  conscious  state.  No  artificial  light  used.  Spirit  callers 
illuminate  the  room  during  their  presence.  They  approach  and 
depart  regardless  of  walls,  floor  and  ceiling,  some  quickly,  some 
slowly.  About  a  score  conversed  with  the  Author,  Demonstra¬ 
tions  were  both  strong  and  new.  A  clairaudient  doctor  writes. 
Evidential  matter  as  he  hears  the  spoken  words. 


Chapter  XXXIV 


368 


Psychical  Research  Records  ending  with  the  year  1912.  Inter¬ 
esting  seances  with  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone.  Alleged 
communings  with  Professor  James,  Frederick  Myers,  Hon. 
George  Brown,  Wm.  T,  Stead,  Queen  Victoria,  King  Solomon, 
and  others.  Clegg  Wright,  once  famous  medium,  explained  the 
difference  between  unconscious  trance  state,  and  conscious 
knowledge  of  the  spirit,  when  it  withdraws  from  the  body. 


385 


Chapter  XXXV 


Conclusion  of  evidence.  Author’s  argument.  Knowledge 
gained  from  spirit.  Spirit  definition  of  the  only  God.  New 
Era  is  approaching.  Minds  of  men  are  awakening.  Mind 
functioning  in  hypnotic  state.  Astral  flights.  Hypatia  suggested 
this  book;  also  its  title,  contributed  much  to  it,  and  wrote  its 
concluding  sentences. 

Addenda . .  t  . . . . 423 

Details  of  the  Author’s  unparalleled  experiences.  Accom¬ 
plished  by  the  co-operation  of  Hypatia.  The  evidence  of  inde¬ 
pendent  writing  on  the  slates,  reproduced  in  the  book  by  photo¬ 
engraving  process.  The  writers  claim  the  writing  as  their  own, 
as  well  as  the  signatures. 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


The  Author,  at  the  age  of  70 . Frontispiece 

Symbolical  Picture  and  Pronunciamento ....  Opposite  Page  iv 
Author’s  Wife,  “The  Key  That  Unlocked  the 


Mystery’’ . 

tt 

“  74 

J.  B.  Jonson,  Materializing  Medium . . 

ft 

“  1 14 

Miss  M.  V.  Gates,  The  “Human-Psychic- 

Telephone’’  . 

ft 

“  156 

Hypatia,  The  Neoplatonic  Philosopher. 

ft 

“  166 

Slate  Writing  No.  i . 

it 

“  180 

Slate  Writing  No.  2 . 

it 

“  182 

William  T.  Stead . 

it 

“  256 

The  Author,  at  the  age  of  65 . 

ti 

“  274 

The  Author,  at  the  age  of  60. 

it 

“  274 

Slate  Writing — First  Sitting- 

—Second 

Slate 

tt 

“  434 

(t  it  (f  (( 

Third 

if 

tt 

“  434 

ii  {{  <(  ii 

Fourth 

ti 

tt 

“  434 

i(  it  it  fi 

Fifth 

tt 

tt 

“  434 

“  “  Second  “ 

First 

it 

tt 

“  438 

ft  tt  ft  ti 

Second 

tt 

tt 

“  438 

it  tt  ft  if 

Third 

tt 

ti 

"  438 

“  “  Third  “ 

Second 

tt 

ti 

“  444 

ft  it  tt  tt 

Third 

it 

ii 

“  444 

if  it  it  it 

Fourth 

ti 

ii 

“  444 

XXIX 


>. 


CHAPTER  I 


IN  another  place  I  will  deal  with  the  attitude  of  the  public 
toward  Psychical  Research,  and  the  many  barriers  to  sur¬ 
mount  in  the  very  best  endeavor  to  obtain  a  vantage 
ground.  I  ask,  in  all  sincerity  and  in  a  spirit  of  humility,  the 
reader  to  approach  with  an  open  mind  what  is  offered  in  this 
book,  as  being  at  least  worthy  of  earnest  consideration,  by  the 
ablest  and  most  fairminded  thinkers,  who  can  engage  them¬ 
selves  to  enter  upon  such  consideration  without  bias,  preju¬ 
dice,  or  distrust  of  misrepresentation.  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say 
that  almost  universally  there  is  strong  objection  raised  by  the 
individualized  public  against  being  asked  to  admit  that  they 
have  witnessed  occult  phenomena;  or  that  they  can  believe  in 
the  possibility  of  its  existence;  and  apparently  are  in  great 
fear  of  being  classified  as  unorthodox.  In  the  case  of  most  of 
the  more  important  phenomena  to  which  I  allude,  there  are 
many  living  witnesses  to  confirm  what  is  recorded  herein,  as 
having  well  demonstrated  existence.  I  have  yet  to  add  to  the 
foregoing,  that  the  earliest  record,  which  with  the  preceding 
declaration  ofi  my  attitude,  as  herewith  follows,  was  constructed 
and  entered  as  a  record,  in  the  year  1894.  The  record  of  occur¬ 
rences  and  phenomena  was  made  in  each  instance,  immediately 
after  each  seance,  from  notes  taken  during  the  seance ;  and  is 
the  plain  unvarnished  narrative  of  an  earnest  truth  seeker, 
who  attended  the  seances,  individual  and  collective,  with  an 
open  mind,  determined  at  all  hazards  to  make  a  truthful 
record. 

I  am  free  to  state  that  from  the  hour  of  my  birth,  and 
through  the  subsequent  years  of  life  spent  upon  this  mundane 
sphere,  I  have  been  blessed  with  good  mental  and  physical 
health,  with  two  or  three  brief  exceptions ;  and  since  my  early 
boyhood  days  have  lived  a  life  of  self-dependence;  have  had 
a  reasonably  successful  career ;  have  endeavored  to  make 
the  best  use  of  my  opportunities;  and  unaided,  financially  at 

1 


2 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


least,  obtained  for  myself  an  education  as  a  professional  man; 
and  I  believe  a  fair  status  as  a  citizen. 

This  much  I  state,  not  to  any  extent  in  an  egotistical  spirit, 
but  with  a  view  to  support  the  claim  that  I  have  at  least  a 
fair  share  of  common  sense,  intelligence,  and  discernment; 
and  am  not  more  liable  to  be  deceived  than  the  average  intel¬ 
ligent  man.  I  have  never  professed,  nor  laid  claim  in  a  re¬ 
ligious  sense,  to  being  very  devout  or  holy ;  but  have  always 
entertained  a  respectful,  though  not  unquestioning  attitude 
toward  the  orthodoxies  of  the  church  in  which  I  was  reared 
(Presbyterian).  I  have  never  recognized  any  inclination  to 
materialism;  but  on  the  contrary  have  always  cherished  the 
conviction,  almost  as  an  intuition,  that  the  few  short  years  of 
physical  existence  on  this  terrestrial  sphere,  varied  with  its 
trials,  and  temptations,  joys  and  sorrows,  successes  and  fail¬ 
ures,  growth  and  decay,  were  but  an  incident,  in  the  continued 
existence  of  the  individual  creation  called  man ;  and  that  an 
All-powerful,  All-seeing,  everywhere  present.  All-wise  Intelli¬ 
gence,  and  Infinite  Power  and  Governor  of  the  universe  —  of 
which  this  earth  is  but  an  infinitesimal  speck,  in  a  boundless 
expanse  of  worlds,  of  planetary  systems,  and  of  space  —  had  a 
system  of  development  with  a  purpose,  by  which  mankind  was 
to  attain  to  higher  intelligence,  nobler  conditions  of  being,  and 
purer  realms  of  existence.  The  earnest  orthodoxical  exposi¬ 
tions  of  heaven  and  hell ;  and  the  familiar  pulpit  references  to 
man  as  a  body,  soul,  and  spirit,  destined  either  for  eternal 
happiness  or  eternal  misery,  with  deviations  at  the  starting' 
point  in  earth  life  not  discernible  by  human  judges  while  in¬ 
teresting,  fell  far  short  of  being  to  me  at  least,  perfectly  lucid 
and  satisfactory. 

“Constant  and  persistent  assertion  naturally  has  a  tendency  to 
create  conviction ;  and  conviction  crystallized  becomes  belief. 
Belief  is  not  necessarily  knowledge,  though  many  assume  that 
it  is.  How  can  we  reconcile  the  many  religious  beliefs,  though 
we  may  be  prepared  to  admit  the  sincerity  of  the  many  believers  ? 
Not  only  is  there  diversity  of  belief,  but  equal  diversity  in  the 
intensity  of  belief;  and  does  not  intensity  of  belief  develop 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


3 


bigotry,  and  bigotry  result  in  illiberality,  misrepresentation,  and 
even  persecution?  The  man  who  ventures  an  opinion  at  variance 
with  popular  belief  is  placed  in  the  category  of  antagonists  of 
truth,  though  he  may  be  much  nearer  the  truth  than  those  who 
uncharitably  judge  him.  Christ,  according  to  testamentary  evi¬ 
dence,  was  persecuted  by  the  priesthood  and  people  because  he 
taught  that  which  was  different  from  their  cherished  orthodoxies 
and  beliefs.”  * 

Who  is  more  to  be  pitied  than  the  reverend  minister  or  priest 
( whose  designation  means  entitled  to  reverence,  which  latter 
means  fear  mingled  with  respect  and  affection)  who  is  so 
egotistical  in  his  belief,  and  at  the  same  time  uncharitable,  that 
he  presumes  to  pass  condemnation  upon  his  fellow  man  who 
differs  from  that  belief ;  and  withal  so  Pharisaical,  as  he  thanks 
God  he  is  not  the  dupe  his  neighbor  is?  And  what  must  be  said 
of  those  who  blindly  adopt  a  belief,  the  result  of  circumstantial 
surroundings,  or  hereditary  family  belief,  or  by  an  assertion  oft 
repeated,  yet  deny  others  the  attainment  of  a  satisfactory  knowl¬ 
edge,  from  careful  and  continued  study  and  investigation? 

“Most  men  by  education  are  misled; 

They  so  believe  because  they  are  so  bred. 

The  priest  continues  what  the  nurse  began, 

And  so  the  child  imposes  on  the  man.” 

Have  we  not  been  taught  from  childhood  up  that  he  who 
preaches  and  teaches  from  the  orthodox  pulpit  is  a  minister  or 
ambassador  from  God,  or,  as  some  say,  “called  of  God”  to  teach 
and  preach  the  truth,  and  we  must  not  question  it?  Orthodoxy 
asks  us  to  have  faith  and  believe.  It  demands  acceptance  of  the 
statements  by  faith  and  belief,  and  promises  salvation ;  or  doubt, 
and  it  promises  damnation. 

In  business,  men  exercise  what  is  known  as  “common  sense.” 
Why  should  not  man  exercise  common  sense  in  other  matters, 
such  as  belief?  Why  shut  their  eyes  to  self-evident  truth?  Will 
W  it  be  denied  that  mankind  of  today  knows,  or  ought  to  know  more 
of  the  Infinite  Spirit  or  Universal  Spirit  God,  the  fount  of  creation 

♦The  above  portion  included  in  quotation  marks  has  had  previous  pub¬ 
licity  but  was  nevertheless  strictly  a  portion  of  the  original  writing,  connected 
with  my  psychic  records. 


4 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  of  all  spirit  power,  and  of  His  laws,  and  their  operation,  than 
was  known  in  bygone  centuries?  If  they  do  not,  is  it  not  a  sad 
reflection,  not  only  upon  man’s  development  and  intelligence,  but 
also  upon  the  teachers  and  priests  who  claim  to  be  “chosen  of 
God’’  to  enlighten  His  people?  Humanity  appears  at  all  times  to 
be  hungry  for  information  and  knowledge ;  and  naturally  selfish 
as  to  its  being  advantageous  to  the  individual  self.  It  is  because 
of  inquiring,  examining,  and  analyzing  minds  that  fresh  knowl¬ 
edge  is  being  gained  from  century  to  century,  from  year  to  year, 
and  from  day  to  day ;  as  appertains  to  all  things  mundane  in 
character,  as  well  as  to  the  invisible  forces,  physical  and  spiritual ; 
and  who  will  deny  that  mankind  is  the  gainer  thereby  ?  In  things 
material  and  physical,  investigation  seems  to  antedate  discovery; 
and  discovery  antedates  utilization.  This  order  seems  to  meet 
with  general  approbation  or  commendation.  Is  not  the  spiritual 
part  of  man  paramount  in  interest  to  the  physical  ?  And  if  so  are 
not  all  men  warranted  in  seeking  further  Spiritual  Knowledge? 
Did  not  Job  (in  Chapter  XIV,  Verse  XIV)  ask,  “If  a  man  die 
shall  he  live  again?”  It  is  a  question  which  has  doubtless  sug¬ 
gested  itself  to  the  mind  of  nearly  every  individual  member  of 
the  human  race.  It  would  appear  not  inconsistent  that  to  pursue 
the  study  of  life  one  must  not  stop  with  the  death  of  the  physical 
part  of  man,  but  follow  after  the  spirit.  The  beginning  and  the 
ending  of  physical  life,  whether  animal  or  vegetable,  is  but  a 
change  of  elements  in  arrangement  or  in  composition.  The  body 
returns  to  dust  or  its  elements,  while  the  spirit  returns  to  the 
kingdom  of  spirit,  from  which  it  originally  came.  Eternal  natural 
law  rules  the  universe. 

I  am  in  accord  with  the  declaration  that  we  have  no  right  to 
question  or  deny  the  existence  of  anything,  or  any  condition,  if 
we  cannot  disprove  it.  Actuated  by  this  conviction,  and  feeling 
deeply  interested  in  some  features  of  psychical  investigation,  I 
have  during  the  past  few  years  become  an  investigator  of  the 
critical  kind  known  as  a  psychical  researcher;  and  lately  found 
myself  in  contact  with  some  new  occult  force,  as  mysterious  as  it 
was  interesting.  Of  psychic  or  occult  phenomena,  though  I  have 
but  recent  knowledge,  and  as  that  knowledge  is  so  new,  so  sur- 


CK' —  m-o  d-.^AJui^'  Cr 

ii^4>^JUA4^  o#  ■H.<rr^  ,-A^^ 

C<mAA*CA4-'KA,<^^  (Vvc  cL^.J'l^^tJi.-VxJr  <^4y^i£\JLO  y 

(,  •'^>vo-^ttb  ^\^auO  i^«e^  <wv-cC-  ,/i^X^Xt.  *4-0 

fetc-'^A^y^o^AoC  -m-o-mt 

^  (1-^  Ot  *»>V<^  0'T‘^''l^,*A>%<..‘S<Xl>^^  /t444>s 

C<r^AA!^  ^- 

/  ^o<AA*A3^er4  O-M-  ^ 

^ce/;  J^vto^A>'  •xi^'HloaO' ^<^£c  ^  — 

0-0  Ca-h^^\Xt^iL  "Kc^ 

iic  CO  -C-O-C^  <2o->^ 

9  uA'f^  AjCjCk^  O-^AOi- 

yX^a^AHoJ-  /b  ^ 

"Vn^Atj  o-tf  *H.£tH^  i-t<,  ^^-C- 

j^dj'  AamJJL  "^VtX^  <a-<X3^  OOxa-OI^A-OAX^  ,H-t£U*U^ 

OC^/Xfitc^L  0-*VCO 

/ij2Ai4  '<M4£/  Co  (VvA^'4'AiW^ 

(20vv/^v^'  A^.  OO^Y^At-'-AAvc/ 

Srt£iiSr&^!r:r^ 

&t.  u-j^W-t  ^  c^M.  oiw-  4W,- 

Jijthu..AjLfi,~  /OWjBe  -><1^!.  oLsLrCtS 

*fl“^-<§t(uUill^ 


Symbolical  of 

“DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


5 


prising,  so  convincing,  and  yet  so  entirely  confirmatory  of  the 
intuitions  and  convictions  of  my  boyhood  life,  I  ask  the  reader 
to  withhold  judgment  until  I  have  narrated  in  detail  the  precau¬ 
tions  taken,  conditions  found,  and  environments  existing  together 
with  a  description  and  analysis  of  a  few  of  the  phenomena;  and 
until  he  or  she  adopts  an  hypothesis  which  can  withstand  all 
criticism,  as  accounting  satisfactorily  for  the  production  of  the 
phenomena  now  most  generally  classified  as  psychic  or  occult  in 
character. 


CHAPTER  II 


All  things  have  their  beginnings,  even  the  great  city  of 
Washington,  D.  C.  As  the  Capital  of  the  United  States 
of  America  it  has  long  been  a  centre  of  interest ;  and 
that  interest  has  chiefly  been  owing  to  its  official  character.  How¬ 
ever,  it  fell  to  my  lot  to  visit  that  city  for  the  first  time  in  the 
year  1894  and  in  the  early  part  of  the  month  of  September  of 
that  year.  On  that  occasion  I  was  brought  into  contact  with  Dr. 
B.  L.  W.  Theodor  Hansmann,  who  had  at  one  time  been  not  only  a 
medical  adviser  to  the  late  President  Abraham  Lincoln,  but  like¬ 
wise  a  personal  friend ;  and  was  popularly  known  to  the  citizens 
of  high  degree  in  that  great  city;  and  enjoyed  not  only  a  reputa¬ 
tion  in  his  professional  capacity,  but  an  individual  popularity 
that  anyone  might  well  envy.  The  penalty  which  attached  to  an 
avowal  of  his  convictions,  and  of  his  belief  in  the  continuity  of 
life,  spirit  return  and  spirit  communion,  cost  him  the  loss  of  these 
social  as  well  as  professional  standings,  nevertheless  a  happier 
or  more  contented  man  I  have  never  met.  One  whose  very 
presence  seemed  aglow  with  all  the  finer  qualities  of  manhood ; 
and  in  his  expressions  and  sentiments  of  the  right  cast,  he  evolved 
many  in  ordinary  conversations.  Such  for  instance  as  “The 
friends  I  once  did  love,  I  will  love  them  forever;”  and  again  “I 
love  my  friends  and  never  hated  my  enemies.”  This  noble-hearted 
man  sent  me  a  communication  as  late  as  January,  1912;  and  then 
was  hale  at  his  advanced  age  of  91  years.  On  the  occasion  of  our 
first  meeting,  he  engaged  me  in  conversation  regarding  matters 
of  present  and  future  existence,  which  to  me  was  the  most  vital 
question  of  all  questions ;  and  which  I  have  since  appreciated  as 
being  equally  the  most  important  question,  for  the  consideration 
of  every  man,  no  matter  what  his  status  in  life  may  be,  nor  where 
his  lot  be  cast,  nor  howsoever  important,  or  humble  his  individual 
existence  may  be  in  the  community.  He  seemed  enthusiastic  upon 
the  matter,  and  gave  my  wife  and  myself  a  very  cordial  invitation 
to  be  present  at  a  psychical  seance,  which  was  to  be  held  at  a 

6 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


7 


neighbor’s  residence  the  following  evening,  with  the  presence  of 
the  medium  Mrs.  Mary  A.  Keeler,  —  wife  of  Dr.  Wm.  M.  Keeler, 
—  who  had  for  some  time  been  ill,  but  had  recovered ;  and  the 
seance  in  question  would  be  the  first  held  after  the  lapse  of  many 
weeks,  and  would  be  well  attended.  Without  hesitation,  so  favor¬ 
able  an  opportunity  presenting,  I  required  no  persuasion  in  accept¬ 
ing  the  invitation.  As  I  was  not  as  yet  a  full-fledged  psychical 
researcher,  I  tvas  not  prepared  for  critical  investigation,  but 
rather  made  myself  an  individual  of  receptive  disposition ;  and 
was  quite  content  to  allow  myself  to  be  an  “initiate  neophyte.’’ 
wherein  my  duties  and  privileges  were  limited  simply  to  observa¬ 
tion  of  what  might  present  in  an  occult  seance,  and  ready  to  comply 
with  the  proffered  conditions  which  were  suggested  by  the  white- 
headed  old  doctor,  who  was  especially  desirous  that  I  should  have 
every  opportunity  to  see  and  realize,  outside  and  inside  of  the 
Cabinet,  everything  that  could  be  observable,  or  realized  by  the 
ordinary  senses.  I  was  introduced  to  this  lady  who  was  designated 
as  a  materializing  medium.  I  held  a  short  conversation  with  her, 
found  her  barely  convalescent  from  severe  illness ;  and  according 
to  her  own  statement  not  yet  in  normal  condition.  I  was  im¬ 
pressed  with  the  fairness  of  the  medium  in  granting  me  the 
privilege  of  entering  the  Cabinet  (which  was  constructed  in  one 
corner  of  a  small  room  adjoining  a  much  larger  room),  not  only 
before  and  after  the  seance,  but  during  the  same ;  and  as  circum¬ 
stances  developed  during  the  seance,  an  opportunity  seemed  to 
have  been  especially  provided  for  me  to  occupy  a  position  which 
I  so  very  much  desired  to  have,  and  which  I  did  not  even  have 
to  ask  for.  Owing  to  a  weakened  state  physically,  the  medium 
sat  for  some  considerable  time  before  manifestations  were  pro¬ 
duced,  when  a  strong  voice,  which  was  claimed  to  be  a  spirit 
voice,  called  out  “Reservoir,’’  but  with  no  name  mentioned ;  and 
consequently  some  time  was  lost  by  appealing  to  one  and  another 
in  the  room  to  know  what  was  meant  by  “Reservoir,”  when  the 
explanation  was  vouchsafed  by  my  being  pointed  out,  at  the  most 
extreme  point  of  the  circle  formation,  as  being  no  less  than  the 
desirable  “Reservoir;”  and  I  was  invited  to  visit  the  medium 
where  she  sat  that  a  supply  of  animal  magnetism  or  psychic  power 


8 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


from  myself,  might  be  contributed  to  the  now  entranced  woman, 
which  the  reader  will  understand  is  not  my  claim,  but  the  claim 
made  why  my  presence  near  medium  was  required.  I  had  not 
long  to  wait,  for  I  stood  at  her  side  as  she  sat  with  her  back  to 
the  corner,  when  I  distinctly  saw  the  formations  rising  before 
us  and  passing  toward  the  curtains  which  opened  immediately  in 
front  of  her.  I  then  resumed  my  own  seat  and  became  witness 
to  a  variety  of  forms  as  they  entered  the  larger  room,  from  the 
smaller  one,  which  was  designated  “the  Cabinet and  heard  the 
voices  of  what  appeared  to  be  men,  women  and  children,  as  they 
advanced  into  the  room  and  up  to  individual  sitters  in  the  circle. 
As  the  room  was  rather  dimly  lighted,  and  as  the  circle  was  a 
large  one,  and  I  at  the  greatest  distance  from  the  medium,  and 
as  I  could  not  distinguish  their  features  plainly,  nor  identify  their 
individuality,  from  where  I  viewed  them,  to  me  it  was  not  con¬ 
clusively  convincing  of  anything,  but  it,  however,  determined  my 
future  course  should  a  similar  opportunity  present  itself. 

I  had  not  long  to  wait,  for  returning  home  and  learning  that 
the  late  Efifie  Moss,  an  alleged  celebrated  materializing  medium, 
was  to  visit  the  City  of  London,  Ontario,  I  sought  to  seeure 
another  opportunity  of  investigating  the  phenomena  of  so-called 
materialization,  and  of  endeavoring  faithfully  to  prove  the  truth 
or  falsehood  of  the  claim  that  there  is  at  this  day,  as  well  as  in 
Bible  history  times,  possibility  of  spirit  communion  by  return  of 
spirits  to  earth  clothed  in  spiritual  or  transient  and  visible  bodies. 


CHAPTER  III 


I  HAD  twice  before  met  Mr.  MacRoberts,  the  Chairman  of 
the  London  School  Board  (now  deceased).  Through  him 
I  obtained  the  privilege  of  attending  four  seances,  held 
during  a  week  in  December,  1894,  three  of  which  were  in  his 
own  home,  and  the  fourth  and  last  one  in  a  room  of  an  entirely 
empty  new  house.  The  medium  and  all  the  parties  met  at  the 
series  of  seances  were,  with  the  single  exception  of  Mr.  Mac¬ 
Roberts,  entire  strangers  to  me.  Never  to  my  knowledge  had 
I  met  any  of  them  before  the  visit  in  question.  One  of  the  four 
seances  was  designated  a  typewriting  seance,  of  which  but  few 
records  were  made  by  me. 

Before  my  interview  with  the  medium,  I  determined  upon  a 
course  of  utter  silence,  as  to  all  knowledge  regarding  myself, 
relatives  or  friends,  so  as  to  afford  no  suggestion  or  clue  for  an 
apt  medium  to  work  upon.  I  sought  and  obtained  during  my 
first  afternoon  a  lengthy  interview  with  Mrs.  Moss,  the  self- 
designated  “materializing  medium,”  or  “materialization  medium.” 
Her  physical  form  was  very  portly,  and  abnormally  abundant 
was  her  adipose  tissue,  and  her  movements  slow,  while  her 
manner  was  meek  and  retiring,  and  her  demeanor  modest.  I  was 
favorably  impressed  as  I  scanned  her  features,  noted  her  action, 
gauged  her  mentality,  gave  critical  observation  to  every  move¬ 
ment,  mannerism  and  expression,  lent  attentive  ear  to  each  and 
every  utterance  that  fell  from  her  lips ;  and  had  no  reason  to 
doubt  the  sincerity  of  the  woman.  On  the  other  hand  I  was  in 
quest  of  knowledge  and  asked  a  great  many  questions,  to  which 
she  unreservedly  gave  answer.  For  the  courtesy  thus  extended 
me,  and  the  information  given  me,  I  desire  to  make  grateful 
acknowledgment  (though  she  has  passed  the  so-called  portals 
of  death  since  this  record  was  made).  I  further  desire  to  here 
place  on  record,  that  contrary  to  my  expectations  in  my  interviews 
with  this  medium,  I  was  not  questioned  by  her  at  all.  She  claimed 
that  when  the  circle  formed  with  positive  and  negative  forces 

9 


10 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


equalized,  and  harmony  prevailed,  and  the  vibrations  were  right 
as  induced  by  instrumental  music,  or  singing,  she  would  become 
entranced  or  controlled,  and  unconscious  of  what  was  transpiring 
in  either  the  cabinet  or  circle ;  and  that  usually  the  trance  con¬ 
dition  prevailed  throughout  the  entire  seance.  She  granted  me 
a  similar  privilege  to  that  granted  me  by  medium  Keeler  in 
Washington,  namely,  that  of  entrance  into  the  cabinet  during 
the  seance.  This  privilege  I  utilized  on  two  separate  occasions, 
to  one  of  which  I  make  a  detailed  reference  later  on ;  and  on  both 
occasions  the  medium  preserved  her  trance  state,  and  sat  unmoved 
on  her  wooden  chair. 

Investigating  the  Cabinet  and  Seance  Room 
On  the  evening  of  the  day  of  the  foregoing  interview,  I  attended 
a  seance  which  was  held  in  the  back  parlor  of  the  MacRoberts 
residence.  Owing  to  misrepresentation  made  in  a  portion  of  the 
public  press,  and  on  account  of  deliberate  personal  misrepresenta¬ 
tion  of  facts,  by  illiberal,  unfair,  and  prejudiced  opponents  of 
the  spiritual  philosophy,  I  was  determined  to  free  myself  as  much 
as  possible  from  all  bias,  and  approach  my  work  of  investigation 
with  an  open  mind.  I  took  the  precaution  to  note  details,  and 
am  therefore  able  to  give  herewith  a  faithful  and  conscien¬ 
tious  report  thereof,  as  becomes  the  character  of  an  impartial 
searcher  after  truth.  The  front  and  back  parlors  were  sep¬ 
arated,  partially  by  sliding  partition  doors ;  and  partially  by 
heavy  curtains  hanging  from  a  pole.  In  the  front  parlor,  next 
to  the  street,  lights  were  burning  and  rays  were  cast  into 
the  back  parlor  to  the  south,  until  they  were  excluded  by  the 
drawing  together  of  these  curtains.  A  dozen  men  and  women 
and  three  little  girls  were  seated  around  the  room  in  a  semicircle 
form  or  horseshoe-shaped  arrangement  of  chairs,  facing  towards 
the  cabinet  formed  in  the  bay  window  on  the  east  side  of  the 
south  parlor.  I  asked  for  and  was  granted,  the  favor  of  having 
the  second  seat  from  the  cabinet  on  the  south  side  of  the  circle. 
From  being  so  close  to  the  opening  of  the  curtains  of  the  cabinet, 
I  had  during  the  seance  every  advantage  and  saw  these  mani¬ 
festations  front  view,  side  view  and  back  view,  from  close  quarters 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


11 


—  so  close  that  I  was  able  to  discern  color  of  the  hair,  and  of 
the  eyes,  see  the  texture  of  the  garments  worn,  or  draperies  cast 
about  the  forms.  The  bay  window  recess  from  the  eastern  wall 
of  the  south  parlor,  had  an  opening  9  feet  in  length,  on  a  line 
with  the  wall,  and  a  width  or  depth  of  about  30  inches  at  the 
centre,  with  the  base  of  the  window  15  to  18  inches  from  the 
floor.  The  view  from  the  window  was  open  lawn,  beyond  which 
was  a  low  fence,  and  beyond  the  fence  a  passage-way  and  an 
adjoining  residence.  On  the  inner  aspect  of  the  window  was 
stretched  a  thick  texture  dark  in  color,  to  cover  the  glass  some 
distance  up  and  thus  exclude  light  from  without.  The  window 
was  securely  fastened  to  the  sill.  The  floor  was  like  the  rest  of 
the  room,  covered  with  carpet  tacked  down  and  continuous  with 
that  covering  the  room.  On  the  northern  side  of  this  cabinet 
recess  (or  bay  window  space)  was  placed  an  ordinary  chair  and 
a  footstool.  To  the  front  of  the  recess  and  at  the  height  of 
7  or  8  feet  was  a  pole  suspending  heavy  curtains,  which  met  about 
the  middle  thereof..  A  single  light  was  burning  on  the  west  side 
of  the  room  opposite  the  cabinet  recess,  which  light  was  gently 
dimmed  by  a  Chinese  or  Japanese  parasol,  or  sunshade  of  light 
red  color,  placed  before  it.  This  light  was  during  the  seance 
regulated  by  a  cord  passing  from  it  to  the  cabinet  recess,  which 
as  there  alleged,  was  managed  by  a  Cabinet  spirit  worker,  and 
at  times  increased  or  decreased  as  desired,  by  or  for  the  different 
manifestations,  so  it  was  claimed.  When  all  was  in  readiness 
these  curtains  were  examined,  then  drawn  over  the  pole,  while 
all  present  had  the  opportunity  to  scrutinize  this  temporized 
cabinet,  which,  as  the  reader  will  conclude  from  the  foregoing, 
I  did  in  detail,  during  the  time  prior  to  the  hour  named  for  the 
seance. 

I  have  already  stated,  that  the  seances  were  held  in  the  back 
parlor  of  a  private  residence ;  and  having  described  the  cabinet 
which  the  medium  occupied  on  the  east  side  of  this  room,  will 
now  describe  the  arrangement  of  the  sitters  for  the  seance.  The 
chairs  for  the  sitters  were  placed  in  horseshoe  form,  so  that  the 
toe  of  the  shoe  would  come  under  the  light  and  a  little  east  of  the 
wall  on  the  western  side;  while  the  open  end  of  the  horseshoe 


12 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


exactly  corresponded  to  the  open  cabinet  on  both  the  north  and 
south  end  of  the  latter.  The  cabinet  was  closed  by  the  two 
curtains  hanging  from  the  pole  in  such  a  way  that  they  were 
even  with  the  eastern  wall  of  the  back  parlor  or  temporized  seance 
room,  and  met  at  the  centre  of  the  pole.  While  these  hanging 
curtains  formed  the  western  boundary  of  the  Cabinet,  they  also 
formed  the  closure  of  the  open  end  of  the  horseshoe  circle.  The 
chairs  of  the  end  sitters  were  placed  so  that  if  the  curtains  were 
lifted  the  side  of  the  cabinet  would  be  continuous  with  the  sides 
of  the  horseshoe  circle,  with  no  space  to  get  past  the  end  chairs, 
except  between  them,  where  the  curtains  hung,  a  space  of  not 
more  than  6  feet.  Before  the  seance  was  held,  as  I  have  already 
intimated,  I  had  made  a  most  careful  and  minute  examination 
of  every  square  foot  of  surface,  not  only  of  the  entire  carpet 
and  walls  of  the  back  parlor,  including  the  ceiling,  as  well  as  all 
woodwork,  but  included  also  the  improvised  cabinet  in  the  bay 
window  space;  and  saw  that  strong  nails  (which  I  hammered  in) 
held  down  heavy-sashed  windows,  and  that  every  one  of  the  large 
panes  of  glass  was  secured  in  position  by  seasoned  and  hardened 
putty,  while  I  took  part  in  covering  the  glass  with  heavy  dark 
opaque  material,  to  exclude  light  from  outside  them,  and  create 
a  dark  background.  After  being  minutely  careful  in  my  examina¬ 
tion,  there  appeared  to  me  absolutely  no  possible  trap  door  or 
aperture,  or  other  means  of  access,  to  the  cabinet  for  a  very 
small  child,  much  less  an  adult  or  young  person,  from',  any  point 
east  of  the  hanging  curtains  forming  the  west  border  or  front 
of  the  cabinet  neither  through  window,  walls,  floor,  or  ceiling; 
and  as  I  had  permission  to  enter  the  cabinet  when  I  desired,  I 
had  opportunity  to  satisfy  myself,  during,  as  well  as  before  and 
after  the  seance,  that  no  aperture  had  been  created.  The  only 
evidential  access  to  the  cabinet  was  between  the  terminal  chairs 
of  the  horseshoe  circle  and  by  separating  the  two  curtains.  All 
through  the  seance  the  lamp  continued  burning  on  the  western 
wall  of  the  room,  so  at  all  times  there  was  light  enough  for  any 
of  the  sitters  to  pick  out  from  their  seat  any  man  or  woman  in 
the  circle;  and  if  acquainted  could  distinguish  one  friend  from 
another.  With  this  condition  of  subdued  rays  of  light,  it  would 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


13 


seem  absolutely  impossible,  for  a  man,  woman  or  child  accomplice 
to  pass  from  the  room  to  the  cabinet,  without  being  seen  by  all 
in  the  circle,  and  distinctly  seen  by  those  seated  near  the  cabinet, 
a  position  which  I  occupied,  and  I  give  it  as  evidence  of  my 
senses,  and  will  be  prepared  to  make  declaration  that  to  the  best 
of  my  knowledge  and  belief,  after  a  minute  and  most  careful 
investigation,  that  neither  trap  doors  nor  any  other  opening  existed 
through  which  entry  could  be  made  by  accomplices,  in  fact  the 
cabinet  could  not  possibly  hold  at  once  one-half  of  the  forms, 
whatever  they  were,  that  came  out  of  the  cabinet,  even  if  they 
were  packed  like  herrings.  Then  there  were  many  forms  which 
materialized  to  all  appearances  in  the  circle,  which  neither  entered 
nor  departed  from  the  cabinet,  so  far  as  the  sitters  were  able  to 
judge.  All  the  chairs  in  the  horseshoe  circle  were  side  by  side 
and  touching,  and  occupied  by  sitters,  so  that  no  person  could 
ordinarily  pass  between  any  two  sitters  in  the  circle,  and  the 
doors  leading  into  the  front  and  back  parlors  were  locked.  No 
person  was  standing  and  no  person  was  permitted  to  enter  the 
room  after  the  seance  opened,  and  had  one  entered,  sitters  in 
the  circle  would  have  known  it ;  but  if  a  person  had  entered  the 
door,  he  or  she  would  still  have  been  on  the  outside  of  the  horse¬ 
shoe  circle,  and  I  feel  I  have  made  it  clear  that  no  one  could  enter 
the  cabinet  except  from  the  inside  of  the  horseshoe  circle  of 
sitters ;  nor  could  anyone  get  on  the  inside  of  that  circle,  by  pass¬ 
ing  between  sitters,  as  they  sat  close  side  by  side;  and  if  they 
could  have  come  over  the  heads  of  sitters,  or  under  the  chairs 
without  their  being  seen  and  noticed  by  sitters,  would  it  not  have 
been  as  phenomenal  as  the  cases  I  shall  narrate?  The  conductor 
or  manager  of  the  seance  was  rather  above  the  average  size  of 
man,  and  was  acting  very  much  in  the  capacity  of  a  church  usher, 
with  this  difference,  that  he  summoned  individual  sitters  to  rise 
and  meet  the  forms  that  expressed  a  desire  to  meet  them,  and 
to  make  announcements  of  the  names  of  spirit  forms,  and  names 
of  sitters  wanted. 


CHAPTER  IV 


I  NEXT  come  to  the  record  of  some  of  the  more  interesting 
phenomena  witnessed  in  the  Moss  seances,  which  I  was 
privileged  to  attend,  and  shall  number  them  consecutively, 
for  convenience  sake  in  subsequent  examination  or  analysis  of 
them.  Someone  has  said  that  “those  who  deny  the  existence  of 
occult  phenomena  are  simply  ignorant,  for  they  have  been  scien¬ 
tifically  proven  repeatedly  to  have  occurred.”  One  has  only  to 
read  the  writings  of  Sir  William  Crookes  of  England,  as  well 
as  other  scientific  men  to  be  convinced  of  the  truth  of  the  fore¬ 
going  statement.  The  selection  and  maintenance  of  an  hypothesis 
to  account  for  the  phenomena  will  give  rise  to  a  greater  difference 
of  opinions. 

With  those  who  attended  these  seances  with  me  as  investigators, 
as  well  as  in  my  own  case,  no  question  existed  after  the  first 
seance,  as  to  the  presentation  of  phenomena,  however  much  we 
might  be  at  sea  in  accounting  for  them.  Though  I  have  passed 
the  meridian  of  my  physical  life,  I  am  free  to  confess,  that  I 
have  not  yet  attained  intuitive  or  any  other  kind  of  knowledge, 
warranting  my  denial  of  the  possibility  of  occult  phenomena.  In 
fact  I  am  not  prepared  to  deny  the  possibility  of  anything  that 
I  cannot  disprove. 

The  reader,  while  perusing  the  narration  of  the  facts  herein 
recorded,  will  have  his  or  her  own  theory  or  hypothesis  to  account 
for  the  phenomena  in  individual  cases.  Whatever  hypothesis  may 
be  adopted,  it  would  seem  that  it  must  be  one  which,  while  im¬ 
pervious  to  the  shafts  of  criticism,  will  account  for  the  existence 
of  some  natural  law,  not  fully  comprehended,  though  possibly 
conjectured.  The  phenomena  continue  to  present  here  and  there, 
and  intelligent  inquiring  minds  will  continue  to  desire  to  solve  the 
problem,  which  will  account  for  them,  and  lay  bare  the  truth. 

After  all  who  wished  to  do  so  had  examined  the  window, 
ceiling,  floor,  walls,  and  curtains  constituting  the  improvised 
cabinet  without  contents,  except  one  plain  wooden  chair  for  the 

14 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


15 


medium,  they  assumed  a  position  in  the  horseshoe  circle,  as 
already  explained  in  detail.  The  medium,  who  was  dressed  in  a 
plain  dark  dress,  without  anything  superfluous  on  the  outside, 
next  raised  from  a  seat  in  the  circle,  adjoining  the  cabinet  space, 
where  she  had  been  constantly  under  the  close  scrutiny  of  every 
sitter  from  the  first  opportunity  she  gave  them,  until  she  stepped 
inside  the  cabinet  which  I  have  described  in  detail,  and  took  her 
seat  on  the  plain  wooden  chair,  at  the  north  end  of  the  cabinet 
space.  All  being  seated,  the  conductor  pulled  down  the  curtains, 
and  took  his  seat  in  the  circle.  Those  present  then  joined  in 
singing  familiar  hymns,  and  shortly  after  the  manifestations 
began.  It  is  not  my  purpose  to  refer  to  all  the  manifestations, 
but  to  such  only  as  made  a  marked  impression  on  my  mind. 
A  few  apparently  human  forms  appeared,  one  at  a  time  at  the 
opening  of  the  curtains,  and  were  presently  recognized  by  one 
or  another  of  the  sitters,  as  purporting  to  be  that  of  near  relatives 
or  friends ;  and  would  engage  in  conversation  in  some  instances 
in  a  whisper,  in  others  audible  to  all  present.  Some  of  these 
advanced  either  alone,  or  by  the  hand  of  some  one  from  the  circle, 
out  in  the  room  and  up  to  individual  sitters,  myself  among  the 
number. 

(1)  In  one  instance  what  appeared  to  be  a  brisk  young  girl, 
who  came  out  of  the  cabinet,  called  one  of  the  little  girl  sitters 
from  the  circle,  and  standing  adjacent  to  where  I  sat,  asked  me 
to  examine  the  little  girl’s  hair  and  face,  which  I  did.  The 
former  (the  girl  from  the  cabinet)  then  asked  me  to  take  her 
own  hand  in  mine,  which  I  likewise  did,  after  which  she  placed 
my  hand  upon  her  head  and  asked  me  to  examine  the  hair,  which 
I  found  to  be  long,  black,  coarse  in  fibre  and  the  quantity 
abundant.  This  apparition,  materialized  form,  or  actual  human 
girl,  whichever  she  was,  claimed  to  be  the  spirit  of  an  Indian 
girl.  She  next  permitted  me  to  feel  her  feet,  which  were  encased 
in  a  pair  of  moccasins ;  and  while  I  was  observing  her  stature, 
features,  eyes  and  mouth,  she  chatted  pleasantly ;  and  gave  all 
present  an  evidence  of  her  agility,  by  running  and  jumping  upon 
the  floor,  finishing  by  asking  me  if  I  thought  the  big  medium 
could  make  herself  up  like  a  little  Indian  girl,  with  small  hands 


16 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  feet  like  those  I  felt.  I  had  to  admit  my  disbelief  in  the 
possibility  of  the  large  and  heavy  medium  diminishing  her  size 
and  weight  in  that  manner,  or  to  such  a  degree.  This  form 
disappeared  by  way  of  the  cabinet. 

(2)  Another  manifestation  or  apparition  was  that  of  a  little 
girl  dressed  in  white,  at  the  opening  of  the  curtains,  who  wanted 
to  know  if  the  sitters  thought  she  was  the  medium,  when  almost 
immediately  the  medium  appeared  at  her  side,  having  the  same 
appearance  she  had  when  first  entering  the  cabinet,  and  the  two 
stood  side  by  side  before  the  curtains,  the  medium  being  appar¬ 
ently  in  a  trance  state.  This  little  girl  in  white  retired  into  the 
cabinet,  as  did  the  medium  also.  We  were  informed  that  the 
medium  claimed  that  this  was  Lily,  one  of  her  band  of  spirits 
that  helped  to  build  up  the  so-called  materialized  forms. 

This  same  little  cabinet  spirit  Lily,  pretty  as  a  Christmas  doll, 
said  to  me  in  the  presence  and  hearing  of  all  the  sitters  in  that 
seance:  “Dr.  King,  when  Mrs.  Moss  passes  over  to  spirit  side 
of  life,  then  I’ll  come  and  join  your  band.”  Chapter  XXXIII, 
December  24,  1912,  contains  the  record  of  the  fulfillment  of  the 
promise,  after  eighteen  years’  time. 

(3)  Another  manifestation  of  peculiar  interest  was  the  appear¬ 
ance  of  a  form  which  was  recognized  by  sitters  as  a  perfect 
duplication  in  physique  and  manner  of  speech,  of  a  well-known 
citizen,  who  had  passed  out  of  the  body  after  having  been  for 
some  time  an  editor  of  a  farmers’  paper  published  in  the  same 
city  of  London,  Ontario.  I  was  invited  to  approach  the  cabinet, 
but  I  did  not  recognize  the  form  or  features,  for  I  had  never 
seen  or  known  the  said  editor  in  the  physical  life;  and  conse¬ 
quently  would  not  recognize  this  materialized  representation  of 
him ;  but  he  claimed  brotherhood  and  designated  my  status  in 
the  brotherhood.  I  had  not  made  myself  known  fraternally  to 
any  one  present,  nor  had  I  any  insignia  or  symbols,  or  anything 
about  me  to  indicate  that  I  was  a  fraternity  man  or  brother.  In 
response  to  his  invitation  I  entered  with  him  into  the  cabinet, 
and  to  my  astonishment  he  did  certainly  prove  himself  a  brother. 
I  may  add  that  while  this  testing  and  proving  was  in  process  in 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


17 


the  cabinet  with  curtains  closed,  I  could  see  the  medium  seated 
on  the  chair,  her  eyes  closed,  and  apparently  in  a  deep  trance 
state,  as  was  her  usual  condition  during  a  seance.  The  form, 
which  proved  itself  to  be  a  brother,  was  surrounded  by  a  certain 
degree  of  illumination,  which  made  the  cabinet  as  well  as  the 
form  of  the  medium,  distinctly  visible  to  me.  Coming  to  the 
outside  of  the  cabinet  again  with  me,  this  form’s  grip  was  strong, 
substantial,  and  real,  yet  seemed  to  melt  away  while  still  I  held 
it,  and  after  first  taking  three  irregular  steps  from  the  cabinet, 
gradually  dissolved  from  view  as  white  or  grayish  smoke  or 
vapor,  entering  the  carpet  at  that  point. 

(4)  Another  manifestation  alleged  to  be  that  of  a  minister, 
having  a  portly  and  easily  recognized  form,  was  claimed  by 
several  of  those  who  knew  him  in  the  physical  form,  to  be  a 
preacher  who  formerly  preached  in  South  London  Methodist 
church.  The  form  appeared  in  the  black  clothing,  as  was  the 
custom  of  the  minister  in  the  physical  form,  and  addressed  those 
present  in  a  manner  familiar  to  those  who  had  listened  to  his 
pulpit  utterances ;  but  added  that  had  he  known  what  he  now 
knew  he  would  have  been  enabled  to  teach  and  preach  with  a 
much  clearer  knowledge  of  the  truth.  I  was  privileged  to  take 
the  ghost’s  hand  and  look  well  into  his  countenance,  and  witness 

-  the  movement  of  his  lips  and  of  his  eyes,  and  hear  the  breath 
movements  of  his  speech.  He  disappeared  by  way  of  the  cabinet 
from  which  he  came. 

(5)  Another  of  the  many  manifestations  at  this  seance  was 
that  of  an  alleged  actress,  suitably  clad  in  garments  of  a  creamy 
white  color,  who  claimed  to  have  passed  out  of  the  physical  form 
in  Brooklyn  one  hour  after  completing  her  part  in  an  act  or  play 
at  the  theatre.  Her  stature  was  taller  than  that  of  the  medium 
and  much  more  spare.  Her  voice  was  strong  and  sweet.  She 
addressed  those  present  for  several  minutes,  exhorting  them  to 
a  proper  life  and  good  deeds  for  humanity.  After  concluding 
her  address  she  favored  the  company  by  singing  in  a  magnificent 
manner  a  song  which  would  have  required  great  natural  capability, 
and  much  culture  for  so  fine  a  rendition,  on  the  part  of  a  human 


18 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


singer.  Had  the  window  been  open,  the  singing  could  have  been 
heard  easily  a  block  away.  I  was  also  permitted  to  approach 
this  manifestation,  and  shake  hands  with  it,  and  saw  its  features 
most  distinctly.  This  form  disappeared  into  the  cabinet  from 
which  it  had  made  its  first  appearance. 

(6)  During  one  portion  of  the  seance,  when  all  was  quiet,  the 
room  hitherto  dimly  lit  suddenly  became  darker.  Almost  im¬ 
mediately  after,  within  the  circle  of  the  sitters,  and  about  one 
yard  from  my  chair,  I  noticed  a  light  upon  the  carpet,  phosphor¬ 
escent  in  appearance,  about  the  size  of  a  25-cent  piece  or  English 
shilling,  which  soon  became  more  extensive,  and  apparently  rose 
as  a  vapor  from  which  evolved  curling  flame  like  white  and  purple 
light,  until  suddenly  it  took  on  tangible  form,  and  developed  what 
all  the  sitters  agreed  upon,  as  being  beyond  doubt  a  beautiful 
young  woman,  clad  in  draperies  of  creamy  white,  bearing  sup¬ 
ported  or.  suspended  above  her  head  a  purple  ball  of  light,  which, 
however,  seemed  physically  separate  from  any  connection  with 
the  head ;  and  which  illumined  the  entire  room,  and  simultaneously 
the  air  was  impregnated  with  odor  of  a  most  delicate  and  agree¬ 
able  perfume,  resembling  nothing  I  had  ever  before  inhaled.  All 
over  the  draperies  and  coverings  of  this  apparition  were  small 
star-spangles  as  if  they  were  most  brilliant  electric  star  lights. 
This  manifestation  differed  in  appearance  from  the  others  preced¬ 
ing,  inasmuch  as  they  had  a  substantial,  every-day,  solid,  life-like 
physical  body  and  raiment,  such  as  we  are  accustomed  to  look 
upon  in  our  every-day  experience;  while  this  female  materializa¬ 
tion,  perfect  in  physical  form,  seemed  attired  in  vestures  and 
draperies  most  unusual,  but  in  themselves  beautiful  and  well- 
adapted  in  their  application,  giving  an  angelic  cast  to  the  entire 
figure.  She  took  my  hand  as  if  for  salutation,  held  it  firmly  as 
if  for  support,  for  perhaps  half  a  minute,  and  apparently  until 
fully  materialized,  and  explained  that  she  had  the  power  to 
appropriate  material  from  the  medium,  and  from  my  own  and 
other  sitters’  composition,  to  form  a  body  to  occupy ;  and  by  aid 
of  other  spirits  likewise  formed  the  vestures,  and  draperies  worn, 
of  thought  creation  from  particles  of  matter  in  textures  in  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


19 


room,  and  also  from  the  air.  The  hand  appeared  natural  to  the 
sight,  and  the  touch  or  grip  revealed  feeling,  solidity,  and  motion. 
Her  stay  was  brief,  and  her  departure  was  as  if  she  had  dissolved 
into  mist  or  white  smoke,  and  was  drawn  downwards  and  ab¬ 
sorbed  into  the  carpet.  This  particular  form,  materialization,  or 
apparition  neither  entered-  nor  approached  the  cabinet.  Some  of 
the  more  experienced  sitters  explained  that  this  form  was  that 
of  an  advanced  spirit,  and  one  long  since  passed  to  spirit  life ; 
but  none  there  were  who  claimed  to  have  ever  seen  her  before ; 
nor  did  she  give  any  indication  at  this  sitting  as  to  her  human 
personality  or  her  angelic  home.  (This  was  Egyptia,  my  alleged 
guardian  spirit,  as  I  subsequently  learned  from  her.) 

I  may  here  remark  that  I  shook  hands  and  conversed  with  the 
majority  of  the  forms  appearing  at  this  s&nce,  listened  to  the 
messages  conveyed  to  individual  friends  in  the  room,  or  to  the 
more  general  exhortations  and  advice  regarding  the  real  objects 
and  purposes  of  life.  All  this  to  me  was  passing  strange,  and 
unaccountable  on  ordinary  or  natural  lines  of  investigation,  as  I 
shall  attempt  to  show  in  discussing  the  various  hypotheses. 

Being  acquainted  with  the  existence  of  the  phenomena  of 
hypnotism,  which  I  had  for  several  years  been  able  to  induce  and 
utilize  for  physiological,  therapeutical,  and  psychical  purposes,  I 
naturally  sought  to  satisfy  myself  that  this  was  not  sufficient  to 
account  for  all  the  phenomena  heard  and  witnessed  by  all  alike. 
The  more  personally  interesting  manifestations  to  which  I  could 
apply  critical  tests  as  being  more  conclusive,  and  more  evidential 
in  character  to  me  at  least,  I  will  allude  to  in  detail. 

PHENOMENA  EVIDENTIAL  IN  CHARACTER  TO  ME 

(7)  The  event  in  this  seance  and  in  a  subsequent  one,  of  the 
deepest  personal  interest  to  me,  as  affording  not  only  more 
support,  but  in  my  judgment  the  strongest  evidential  support 
of  the  spiritual  hypothesis,  as  contrasted  with  any  other  hypo¬ 
thesis  that  I  have  considered  or  that  can  be  offered,  I  shall 
now  describe.  I  have  said  this  case  engaged  my  deepest  interest ; 
but  I  may  add  that  the  most  conclusively  convincing  tests  possible 
were  presented  to  my  judgment,  as  I  shall  presently  show.  Among 


20 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


the  forms  to  appear  at  the  parting  of  the  curtains  of  the  im¬ 
provised  cabinet,  was  that  of  an  apparently  old  lady,  above  medium 
height,  build  and  weight,  slightly  bent  forward,  whose  hair  was 
silvery  white,  whose  face  was  directed  towards  myself,  to  whom 
she  seemed  to  beckon,  but  in  no  single  particular  resembling  the 
medium.  Several  remarked  to  me,  “You  are  wanted.  Doctor,” 
and  I  arose  and  advanced  close  to  the  form,  my  face  being  within 
a  few  inches  of  the  face  presented,  which  appeared  illuminated 
so  clearly  and  distinctly  that  I  could  see  individual  hairs  hanging 
across  the  temple.  I  beheld  the  form  and  features,  the  perfect 
physical  resemblance,  and  physiognomy  of  my  own  mother,  who 
passed  out  of  the  physical  life,  as  the  result  of  an  accident  in  my 
own  and  her  own  home,  some  nine  years  previously.  So  natural, 
so  human  and  life-like  was  the  apparition  that  it  formed  a  perfect 
duplicate  of  my  mother  —  as  perfect  a  view  as  her  mirrored 
reflection  in  life,  while  it  possessed  tangibility,  solidity,  weight, 
moved  the  eyes  as  if  looking  into  mine,  grasped  my  hand  as 
really  as  ever  it  was  grasped,  and  used  the  mouth  to  speak  and  I 
heard  her  breathe.  I  stood  a  few  moments  to  test  myself,  as  to 
whether  I  was  awake  or  dreaming,  or  in  a  hypnotized  state.  Up 
to  this  point,  though  I  had  recognized  what  I  have  stated,  I  had 
said  nothing.  I  then  spoke  aloud  in  the  hearing  of  all  present 
and  said  “Who  is  this?”  The  form  then  stepped  forward  from 
the  cabinet  and  in  a  similar  characteristic  and  affectionate  manner 
to  that  of  my  mother  when  in  my  home  said,  so  that  all  present 
could  hear  what  she  said,  “My  dear  boy,  do  you  recognize  me?” 
I  replied  by  asking  “Is  this  the  one  I  am  thinking  of?”  The 
apparition  before  me  said:  “Yes,  I  am  still  alive,  and  am  pleased 
to  see  you  here,  and  I  bring  you  proof  of  my  existence.”  The 
form  patted  me  on  my  cheek,  kissed  me,  and  said,  “Your  Pa  is 
here  with  me.  He  only  recently  .came  to  me  out  of  the  body, 
and  was  extremely  weak.”  The  form  then  explained  that  he,  the 
father,  was  not  yet  able  to  gather  the  forces  necessary  to  manifest 
himself,  but  would  do  so  at  another  seance  if  I  would  remain. 
All  this  was  heard  by  the  others  present,  as  all  assented  when 
asked  if  they  heard  distinctly.  I  at  this  point  explained  to  the 
sitters  in  this  seance,  that  my  mother  passed  out  of  the  physical 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


21 


between  eight  and  nine  years  previously,  while  my  father  had  only 
passed  out  about  two  months  anterior  to  this  occasion;  and  as 
I  was  a  stranger  to  them  all,  as  well  as  to  the  medium,  with  the 
single  exception  of  the  gentleman  in  whose  house  we  were  meet¬ 
ing —  that  of  Mr.  MacRoberts  (and  I  had  only  twice  before 
met  him,  many  miles  from  my  home)  —  and  therefore  all  were 
ignorant  of  the  dates  of  death  of  my  mother  and  father,  and  of 
any  other  data  concerning  them.  The  materialized  manifestation 
claiming  to  be  that  of  my  mother,  also  spoke  to  me  in  a  whisper, 
and  the  utterances  were  those  peculiarly  characteristic  of  my 
mother,  and  such  as  no  other  human  being  could  imitate  or  know 
and  use  them.  She  took  my  hand,  stepped  out  into  the  circle, 
and  was  seen  and  heard  by  all  therein,  and  spoken  with  by  several. 
As  one  or  two  among  the  many  evidential  tests  of  personal 
physical  identity,  or  duplication  thereof,  I  give  the  following. 

My  mother  had  for  many  years  carried  the  evidence  of  rheu¬ 
matic  arthritis  in  the  lower  two  rows  of  the!  joints  of  her  fingers 
on  both  hands,  they  being,  as  she  used  to  term  them,  “hickory-nut 
joints,”  and  her  habit  was,  when  not  specially  using  her  hands, 
or  when  she  had  company  or  went  out,  —  to  wear  thin  silk  gloves 
or  mitts  over  them,  a  size  or  two  larger  than  would  otherwise  be 
necessary,  on  account  of  large  joints,  to  prevent  their  being  notice¬ 
able  by  others.  My  mother  was  also  accustomed  to  wear  about 
the  shoulders  a  light  comforter  or  shawl  of  old-fashioned  pattern 
and  size,  to  prevent  chills  from  the  draughts,  she  claimed.  On 
this  occasion,  exact  duplications  of  the  old-fashioned  silk  gloves 
and  shawl  were  worn  by  this  manifestation,  apparently  as  real 
as  I  had  ever  seen  them,  and  further,  and  even  yet  more  con¬ 
clusively  convincing,  myself  and  others  looked  for  the  hickory-nut 
jointed  fingers,  and  sure  enough  the  evidence  was  convincing, 
tested  by  sight  and  touch  of  more  than  one-half  of  the  sitters 
present.  Corroborative  inspection  likewise  demonstrated  the 
existence  in  the  eye  of  a  brown  spot  on  the  white  of  the  globe  of 
the  left  eye ;  and  a  cluster  or  cord  of  silvery  hair  hanging  over 
the  left  temple  to  the  left  ear,  from  the  upper  part  of  the  forehead 
of  the  demonstrating  apparition,  which  stood  before  us  and  talked 
with  us.  Both  of  these  latter  features  were  distinctly  noticeable, 


22 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  had  in  my  mother’s  life-time  been  examined  and  commented 
upon,  by  those  who  knew  her,  and  to  myself  they  were  in  this 
instance  a  perfect  duplication  or  reflection  in  the  animated  appari¬ 
tion  which  I  am  now  describing. 

Space  forbids  my  speaking  in  further  detail.  As  the  manifesta¬ 
tion  was  about  to  go  it  gave  me  a  parting  kiss,  and  said  “Good¬ 
bye”  in  a  precisely  similar  manner  to  that  which  my  mother 
always  adopted,  when  we  parted  with  each  other  during  her 
physical  existence. 


CHAPTER  V 


The  next  succeeding  seance  of  this  series  was  held  a  few 
evenings  later,  in  the  same  room  as  the  first  seance ; 
and  under  an  arrangement  similar  to  the  former  one. 
There  were  twenty-seven  persons  of  both  sexes  and  varied  ages 
present,  including  spiritualists,  skeptics,  and  investigators  irreg¬ 
ular  and  regular,  so  that  the  company  was  not  as  harmonious, 
or  the  conditions  as  favorable  as  might  have  been  desired,  nor 
so  conducive  to  good  results,  though  to  me  they  were  not  only 
as  interesting  but  quite  as  instructive.  I  occupied  the  same 
advantageous  position  I  previously  occupied,  with  the  fullest 
possible  advantages  for  seeing  and  hearing,  which  fact  I  fully 
appreciated,  owing  to  the  unsatisfactory  situation  I  had,  in  the 
remotest  portion  of  the  circle,  at  the  seance  held  under  the 
mediumship  of  Mrs.  Keeler  in  the  city  of  Washington,  D.  C.  (my 
initiatory  seance),  when  I  neither  saw  nor  heard  anything  dis¬ 
tinctly,  nor  anything  evidentially  convincing,  to  a  person  skeptical 
of  these  phenomena,  as  I  confess  I  was  at  that  time,  it  being  the 
first  materializing  seance  I  ever  attended.  I  mention  this  here, 
on  account  of  the  expressions  I  heard  during  Mrs.  Moss’  seance 
on  this  occasion,  on  the  part  of  some  in  the  remote  portion  of 
the  circle,  owing  to  their  inability  to  see  clearly ;  while  others 
could  in  the  nearer  situation  see  distinctly.  The  room,  as  on  the 
former  occasion,  was  in  different  degrees  of  darkness  with  differ¬ 
ent  manifestations.  The  one  partially  shaded  lamp  was  kept 
burning.  The  darkness  was  not  sufficient  to  prevent  me  from 
counting  the  people  in  the  circle,  and  distinguishing  the  ladies 
from  the  gentlemen,  the  men  with  whiskers  or  beards  from  those 
who  had  neither,  except  just  prior  to  the  appearance  of  an  appari¬ 
tion  alleged  to  be  an  advanced  spirit,  when  the  light  of  the  lamp 
was  very  much  diminished.  This  form  of  apparition  usually  made 
its  appearance  by  rising  from  the  carpet  or  floor,  within  the  area 
of  the  circle;  and  at  a  distance  of  two  or  three  paces  from  the 
front  of  the  cabinet,  and  increased  by  its  own  presence  the  amount 

23 


24 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  light  in  the  room.  At  this  and  the  succeeding  seance  many 
of  the  same  and  other  similar  apparitions,  etherializations  or 
materialized  manifestations  were  present  that  had  presented  on 
a  former  occasion,  while  other  new  ones  announced  themselves. 
While  not  desirous  of  registering  all  the  phenomena,  as  there  is 
to  the  casual  observer  a  difference  only  in  forms  (with  many 
of  them),  I  desire  to  make  truthful  record  of  those,  which 
appeared  to  me  as  an  investigator,  to  merit  my  own  recognition, 
as  evidential  in  character,  and  as  presenting  to  me  at  least,  a 
genuineness  of  existence  alike  surprising  and  convincing, 

(8)  As  will  be  remembered,  I  received  an  intimation  at  the 
former  seance,  that  my  father  would  probably  be  able  to  manifest 
himself  to  me,  and  consequently  I  had  remained ;  and  was  prepared 
for  this  particular  event,  and  cogitated  in  my  own  mind  as  to 
what  tests  I  could  apply  to  prove  the  personal  identity.  I  had  not 
long  to  wait  before  I  saw  this  manifestation,  in  a  sitting  posture; 
or  as  if  trying  to  rise  from  a  low  seat  on  the  floor,  and  beckoning 
me.  As  I  neared  the  manifestation,  its  hands  were  slowly  lifted, 
backs  upwards,  as  my  father  was  wont  to  do,  when  any  one 
sought  to  assist  him  to  rise,  for  some  time  previous  to  his  physical 
death.  His  hands  were  plump  and  fat ;  and  when  the  fingers  were 
extended  there  were  depressions  or  dimples  opposite  the  knuckles 
of  the  fingers,  and  his  hands  felt  soft  to  the  touch.  His  weakness 
was  primarily  due,  to  the  results  of  a  severe  injury  received 
nearly  a  year  and  a  half  before  his  death,  which  combined  with 
heart  disease  at  the  advanced  age  of  four  score  years,  ended  his 
physical  existence  about  two  months  prior  to  the  date  of  this 
seance.  The  apparition  presenting  at  this  particular  time,  after 
its  formation  assumed,  what  to  my  physical  senses  was  a  solid 
physical  materialized  form,  as  patent  to  the  senses  of  touch,  sight 
and  hearing  as  any  human  terrestrial  man  I  ever  saw  and  heard 
speak.  It  extended  the  two  hands,  and  I  clasped  them.  They 
had  the  similar  appearance  and  soft  touch,  with  all  the  tremulous 
movement  that  I  was  familiar  with  in  the  physical  form  of  rny 
father.  Not  that  alone,  but  the  quickened  l^reathing  so  character¬ 
istic  of  my  father’s  condition,  the  last  few  weeks  of  his  sojourn 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


25 


on  earth,  was  present  in  the  case  of  this  apparition,  and  could  be 
distinctly  heard.  As  if  by  touch  of  me  this  form  gained  strength, 
by  magnetism  or  other  unseen  force  from  me  (as  was  claimed 
by  some),  it  gradually  rose  to  a  man’s  natural  height;  and  its 
countenance  brightened  up  as  distinctly  as  I  saw  the  delineation 
of  my  mother’s  form  and  features.  The  paralleling  of  forms, 
features  and  conditions  of  this  material  phantom  (if  I  may  use 
the  expression),  and  of  my  father,  were  to  say  the  least  both 
astounding  and  perplexing.  I  then  in  the  presence  and  hearing 
of  all  the  sitters  asked  “Who  is  it?”  And  the  response  came 
promptly,  as  well  as  loud  and  distinct,  “I  am  your  father,  Stephen 
King.”  I  turned  to  those  present  and  said,  “Friends,  did  you 
hear  what  he  said?”  and  several  replied  “Yes,  he  said  he  was 
your  father,  Stephen  King.”  This  occult  development  then  patted 
me  on  my  cheek,  and  spoke  to  me.  I  took  the  following  note  at 
the  time,  “I  still  live  and  am  able  to  bring  to  you  proof  of  my 
continued  existence.  I  found  your  mother  awaiting  me  on  my 
awakening  into  spirit  life,  and  there  are  many  of  our  relatives 
and  friends  there,  who  have  gone  over  before  us.  We  have 
learned  that  God  in  his  goodness  has  not  condemned  us  to 
destruction,  but  has  afforded  us  the  opportunity  of  working  out 
our  own  salvation.  I  want  to  say  to  you  before  I  go,  that  we 
are  always  near  you,  and  try  to  use  our  influence  with  you.” 
This  form  also  gave  me  vocally  and  audibly  this  message,  “Tell 
Robbie  that  Grandpa  still  lives.”  (Robbie  was  my  father’s  favor¬ 
ite  grandson).  The  talking  was  concluded  by  some  information 
of  a  personal  nature  for  myself,  and  a  “Good-bye,”  and  this 
materialized  life-like  physical  form  resembling  my  father  in  form, 
features  and  mannerisms,  began  dissolving  from  my  view  into 
the  carpet  before  the  eyes  of  all ;  who  likewise  with  myself  heard 
the  voice,  and  those  who  were  near  the  very  language  spoken, 
as  above  recorded.  I  would  ask  the  reader  what  hypothesis 
best  accounts  for  the  facts  related  in  the  preceding  record? 

Can  fraud  substitute  a  duplicate  dead  or  alive,  of  the  reader’s 
father,  in  every  feature,  whether  physical,  mental  or  moral, 
natural  or  artificial,  with  endowments,  knowledge,  habits  and 
desires  that  would  command  your  recognition,  and  acceptance 


26 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


by  your  senses,  your  life’s  knowledge  of  him,  and  the  exercise 
of  your  reason  ?  I  leave  you  to  accept  the  substitute,  or  to  prefer 
the  original.  I  am  forced  to  adopt  the  evidence,  as  proving  the 
original. 

At  the  foregoing  seance  circumstances  occurred  which  have 
been  ventilated  in  the  press  and  in  court,  namely,  the  creation  of 
a  disturbance  to  break  up  the  seance,  the  outcome  of  the  admission 
thereto  of  a  peregrinating  actor,  seeking  some  notoriety,  by  a 
professed  exposure,  which  was  in  no  sense  an  exposure,  but  a 
contemptible  misbehavior  of  himself  and  a  companion,  and  thus 
the  seance  was  broken  up,  and  the  majesty  of  the  law  was  after¬ 
wards  administered  by  a  judge  whose  eyes  were  not  bound,  and 
hence  justice  could  see  that  the  doings  at  the  seance  were 
nefarious  and  the  mischief-makers  were  protected  while  the  so- 
called  nefarious  manager  was  sentenced  to  prison  or  else  pay 
a  fine  of  $100.00  with  costs,  in  order  to  be  free,  with  advice  to 
leave  the  country. 

This  is  one  example  of  a  person  “who  could  see  and  know 
the  truth  and  suffer  for  its  sake/’ 


CHAPTER  VI 


The  third  and  concluding  seance  of  the  series,  which  I 
was  privileged  to  attend,  under  the  mediumship  of  Mrs. 
Moss,  was  held  in  a  house  taken  for  the  purpose  on  this 
occasion,  by  the  London  (Ont.)  Spiritual  Society,  or  by  some  of 
its  members.  The  personnel  of  the  Society  were  well  known 
citizens  of  good  repute,  several  of  whom  are  still  living  in  Lon¬ 
don,  and  can  verify  the  facts  contained  in  the  records  of  these 
seances.  I  believe  that  with  the  exception  of  the  medium,  Mr. 
Randall  Sunderland  (her  manager)  and  myself,  all  present  at 
this  seance  were  members  of  that  society ;  and  hence  as  the  sitters 
were  harmonious,  I  was  assured  that  the  conditions  were  most 
favorable  for  satisfactory  results.  As  nearly  as  my  memory 
serves  me,  for  I  did  not  count  them,  there  were  about  a  dozen 
sitters  present.  The  portion  of  the  empty  house  used  consisted 
of  two  rooms,  front  and  rear,  with  a  division  similar  to  that 
described  at  the  MacRoberts  residence,  only  the  house  and  its 
compartments  were  smaller.  There  was  absence  of  everything 
in  the  way  of  carpets  and  furniture,  except  what  chairs  were 
actually  necessary  to  accommodate  the  sitters,  and  were  brought 
there  for  that  special  occasion.  The  back  room  was  by  curtains 
separated  from  the  front  room  and  thereby  converted  into  a 
cabinet. 

The  seance  began  immediately  after  my  arrival  and  was  un¬ 
questionably  much  better  than  preceding  ones  in  the  matter  of 
distinctness  of  manifestations;  but  I  was  fortunate  in  having  new 
features,  and  additional  evidence  of  personal  identity.  I  was  also 
especially  favored,  by  having  an  opportunity  of  seeing  a  mani¬ 
festation  which  was  in  the  form  of  a  woman  who  was  alleged 
to  be  related  to  the  medium.  It  showed  me  how  the  textures  for 
the  spirit  garments  were  woven  or  made,  and  I  also  received 
a  special  visit  from  what  was  termed  a  visitor  from  the  higher 
spheres,  or  an  advanced  spirit.  Aside  from  the  repetition  of  some 
forms  seen  at  previous  seances  and  some  new  ones,  the  nature 

27 


28 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  which  I  have  already  explained,  my  interest  centered  in  those 
which  I  am  about  to  describe. 

(9)  The  form  which  appeared  phenomenally  to  be  the  very 
personality  of  my  mother  in  the  physical  form,  but  with  presence- 
of  tangibility,  voice  and  motion,  again  manifested  at  this  seance, 
and  with  some  clinging  doubts  in  my  mind,  as  to  the  possibility 
or  probability  of  her  return  to  earth  in  physical  form,  I  determined 
to  be  more  bold  in  my  requests,  and  said,  “if  you  are  my  mother, 
will  you  prove  yourself  to  me  and  those  present  by  coming  from 
the  cabinet  (which  was  simply  the  back  room  empty)  and  speak 
with  each  of  the  friends  present.  The  phantom,  materialization, 
apparition,  angel,  or  spirit,  or  whatever  it  was,  acceded  to  my 
request,  and  I  offered  my  left  arm  for  support,  but  it  immediately 
took  my  right  arm  (the  arm  my  mother  preferred  in  life  to  take 
for  the  reason  that  it  left  her  right  arm  free),  and  she  walked 
with  me  around  the  entire  circle  of  sitters,  shaking  hands  or 
speaking  with  each  and  every  one  of  those  present  in  the  circle. 
One  old  gentleman,  the  first  and  only  person  in  the  circle  outside 
of  myself,  to  recognize  the  features,  did  so,  as  those  of  an  old 
friend  who  used  to  worship  at  the  same  church  as  himself,  in 
Toronto  nine  or  ten  years  previously,  remarking  while  conversing 
with  her,  “Why,  Mrs.  King,  I  used  to  know  you  at  Bond  Street 
Congregational  Church,  Toronto,  where  we  worshipped  together 
under  the  Rev.  Dr.  Joseph  Wyld.”  “Yes,”  she  replied,  “that  was 
years  ago.”  He  commented  upon  the  recognition,  and  added  that 
he  did  not  know  before  now  that  she  was  the  Doctor’s  mother. 
After  giving  me  some  information  of  a  personally  interesting 
character,  and  convincing  as  a  test,  she  said  “good-bye,”  kissed 
me,  and  hurried  back  to  the  cabinet. 

Where  am  I  at,  or  am  I  dreaming?  Am  I  realizing  that  truth 
is  truly  stranger  than  fiction?  The  room  was  well  lighted,  so 
well  that  we  could  read  a  newspaper,  or  tell  the  time  by  our  watch. 
Well,  these  phenomena  are  so  strange,  so  new,  so  natural,  what 
hypothesis  do  you,  my  reader  friend,  adopt  to  account  for  them, 
and  the  accuracy  of  description,  the  truth  of  statement,  the 
naturalness  of  voice,  the  perfection  of  duplication,  of  tangibility. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


29 


form,  features  and  mannerisms?  I  can  narrate  and  describe  in 
detail  the  phenomena,  but  I  ask  you  to  simply  account  for  them. 
Are  they  spiritual  phenomena,  such  as  are  recorded  in  history, 
and  in  the  Bible  and  Testament;  and  if  not  what  are  they,  and 
what  hypothesis  will  fit  better  than  the  spiritual  hypothesis? 

(10)  Another  manifestation  unknown  to  me,  or  unfamiliar,  but 
whose  name  was  given,  approached  me,  and  informed  me  that  I 
was  being  prepared  for  special  work,  and  that  she,  this  female 
angelic  form  (resembling  at  least  to  some  extent,  the  pictures 
of  angels)  would  avail  herself  of  this  opportunity  to  give  in¬ 
formation,  and  to  show  me  something  I  had  not  hitherto  been 
privileged  to  see.  She  held  up  her  hands  and  arms  for  me  to 
examine  them,  and  they  looked  and  felt  like  the  arms  and  hands 
of  women,  such  as  we  meet  in  our  daily  experiences,  in  fact  she 
claimed  to  be  —  or  some  one  in  the  circle  stated  that  she  was  — 
in  earth  life  the  sister  of  the  medium.  She,  the  apparition,  said 
to  me,  “You  notice  that  my  arms  are  bared,  and  my  draperies 
are  only  such  as  are  required  to  cover  my  body.”  She  then 
explained  that  by  the  knowledge  of  chemical  combination  not 
known  on  the  earth  plane,  selection  was  made  of  particles  of 
matter,  with  which  were  built  up  not  only  the  bodies,  but  the 
apparel  worn  upon  the  bodies ;  and  the  spirit  material  to  do  this 
was  not  confined  alone  to  what  could  be  seen  and  recognized 
by  mortals ;  but  was  also  drawn  from  the  air  and  from  the  sur¬ 
roundings.  She  then,  with  my  white  linen  handkerchief  as  a 
starting  point,  began  her  work.  I  placed  it  on  her  extended 
hands  in  the  well-lighted  room  and  in  the  presence  of  all  the 
sitters  and  at  arm’s  length,  she  rolled  it  and  fingered  it,  when 
it  suddenly  seemed  to  break  up  into  fibres  and  gradually  changed 
from  white  to  a  creamy  tint,  and  from  close  texture  to  open  net 
work ;  and  increased  in  bulk  and  volume,  until  it  began  to  hang 
down  nearly  to  the  floor,  when  she  requested  a  lady  present  to 
hold  two  corners  with  outstretched  arms,  and  slowly  walk  back¬ 
wards  until  she  reached  the  limit  of  the  room,  while  the  manifesta¬ 
tion  held  the  other  end  in  a  similar  manner.  The  fabric  then 
would  be,  I  should  judge,  about  5  feet  wide  and  10  or  12  feet 


30 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


long.  All  in  the  room  examined  it  and  pronounced  it  a  fine  slight 
fabric,  and  compared  it  with  that  worn  by  the  producer  of  it. 
It  was  dematerialized  subsequently. 

This  surely  is  evidential,  that  the  apparition  was  more  than 
an  appearance,  and  had  a  tangible  existence,  with  form,  power 
and  voice.  She  also  gave  me  information  as  to  what  I  should 
yet  be  permitted  to  learn  and  to  witness ;  and  among  other  things 
said  that  in  the  years  to  come,  that  spirits  would  materialize  upon 
the  public  platform  in  day  light,  with  some  speakers.  She  like 
the  others  dematerialized  from  solid  form  into  vapor  before  our 
eyes,  and  thus  disappeared. 

Of  all  I  had  seen  and  heard  at  the  various  seances,  the  most 
startling  and  wonderful  manifestation  to  me  was  that  of  the 
female  form  which  appeared,  and  is  described  as  number  six, 
(Egyptia).  This  same  form  reappeared  a  second  time,  in  the 
last  of  this  series  of  seances,  again  coming  in  the  midst  of  a 
splendid  evolution  of  sparkling  lights,  colors,  and  odors.  The 
form  and  appearance  was  like  that  of  an  Egyptian  lady  of  rank, 
a-nd  her  name  was  spoken  by  herself  as  Egyptia.  Her  features 
were  pleasing  and  intellectual,  and  she  was  about  my  own  height, 
but  medium  build,  and  was  clad  in  the  peculiarly  created  draperies. 
She  was  again  covered  with  bright  stars  glittering  like  large 
diamonds  or  small  electric  lights.  She  placed  her  hands  upon 
my  head,  and  said  she  had  been  with  me  as  my  guardian  spirit 
from  the  moment  of  my  birth,  and  would  again  appear  to  and 
commune  with  me  in  the  future.  As  this  was  her  second  appear¬ 
ance  at  the  Moss  series  I  had  favorable  opportunity,  and  saw  her 
form  and  features  distinctly,  and  conversed  with  her.  I  may  add 
that  when  she  dematerialized  at  this  the  final  seance,  she  dis¬ 
appeared  into  the  curtains  separating  the  two  rooms,  as  would 
white  smoke  or  steam. 

There  were  other  features  which  to  the  other  sitters,  as  well 
as  to  myself,  were  very  interesting,  but  space  will  not  permit 
my  referring  to  them  at  this  time.  All  I  saw,  felt  and  heard  at 
this  and  the  other  seances  appeared  real;  and  as  far  as  my  ob¬ 
jective  senses  were  concerned,  had  palpable  existence. 

Conversations  were  conducted  in  the  room,  between  the  sitters. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


31 


one  with  another,  the  same  as  in  any  drawing  room  with  a  like 
number,  and  also  between  the  sitters  and  their  transient  visitors ; 
and  during  the  time  of  this  select  Levee,  there  was  no  discernible 
evidence  of  the  presence  or  existence  of  hypnotic  influence, 
somnambulism,  insanity  or  fraud, 


A  Special  Occult  S^:ance 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  series  of  materializing  seances, 
I  was  also  present  at  a  special  one  for  a  select  number,  which 
proved  to  be  one  of  occult  wonders  not  a  few,  which  I  will  briefly 
indicate. 

A  black  texture  of  close  fibre,  about  three  feet  high,  when 
stretched  as  a  partition,  reached  across  the  centre  of  a  well  lighted 
room.  On  one  side  of  it  were  eight  or  ten  ladies  and  gentlemen. 
On  the  other  side  was  placed  a  typewriting  instrument  of  well- 
known  design,  with  nothing  else  visible.  Presently  we  all  saw 
hands  and  wrists  reaching  through  the  texture  towards  those 
who  were  present,  as  if  to  shake  with  them ;  and  v/hen  taken  hold 
of  seemed  like  as  human  hands ;  and  when  withdrawn  no  opening 
in  the  fibre  was  found.  Then  articles  of  small  size,  such  as 
gloves  and  kerchiefs,  were  tossed  by  sitters  over  the  top,  and 
immediately  returned  through  the  texture,  to  the  side  from  which 
thrown.  It  seemed  as  if  it  mattered  not  whether  soft  or  hard,  for 
a  purse,  knife  or  ring  came  quite  as  freely,  as  a  lady’s  small 
handkerchief,  or  kid  glove. 

Presently  the  typewriter,  which  stood  in  full  view,  began  to 
operate  by  unseen  power,  using  those  hands  and  wrists  before 
mentioned.  All  reeeived  typewritten  messages,  as  fast  as  com¬ 
pleted,  and  dropped  over  the  top  of  the  texture  to  each  of  the 
several  sitters.  The  following  message  was  printed  on  the  type¬ 
writing  instrument,  in  my  presence,  in  a  well  lighted  room,  by 
two  hands  unattached  to  visible  arms  or  body,  in  a  fraction  of 
the  time  it  could  be  done  by  an  ordinary  operator,  and  nothing 
nearer  to  it,  than  two  paces  away. 


32 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  Message  for  the  Writer 
"My  Dear  John:" 

“Is  it  not  delightful  to  be  enabled  to  once  again  visit  each 
“other  in  the  material  life,  and  bring  you  such  glorious  proof 
“of  the  life  beyond,  that  life  that  you  have  always  had  so 
“strong  a  conviction  must  exist,  and  yet  could  not  quite 
"explain  ?  O  how  can  I  find  words  to  explain  the  joy  that 
"filled  my  soul,  when  on  my  awakening  in  spirit  life,  I  found 
“your  dear  mother,  my  own  dear  companion,  waiting  to  give 
“me  welcome  home ;  and  gradually  in  her  own  loving  way 
“make  me  realize  that  though  dead,  I  was  yet  living;  and 
“that  the  Infinite  had  indeed  planned  all  things  well,  and 
“that  instead  of  being  condemned  for  our  misdeeds,  He,  in 
"His  great  love,  had  provided  a  way  whereby  we  might  work 
"out  our  own  redemption.  As  you  know  there  are  none 
“perfect,  no,  not  one,  all  of  us,  no  matter  how  much  we  try, 
“are  sure  to  make  mistakes,  for  ‘man  is  prone  to  evil,’  has 
“ever  been  found  a  true  saying. 

"My  son,  as  I  come  into  a  clearer  conception  of  the  truth, 
"I  can  more  ftdly  realise  how  great  a  need  there  is  that  we 
"should  pass  through  all  conditions  that  the  earth  plane  can 
"furnish;  and  have  even  learned  to  bless  the  hearts  and 
"hands  that  at  times  made  me  suffer  in  the  mortal,  both 
"mental  and  spiritual  agony,  as  I  find  it  is  really  for  our 
"good.  May  God  and  his  ministering  angels  bless  you  and 
"yours." 

“Father." 

(My  father  officiated  as  a  Presbyterian  Minister  at  Pelham, 
Lincoln  County;  and  at  Barton,  Wentworth  County,  in  Ontario, 
when  I  was  a  child,  and  left  earth  life  aged  80  years. — ^J.  S.  K.) 


CHAPTER  VII 


There  are  those,  who  having  never  seen  or  experienced 
psychic  phenomena,  briefly  dispose  of  them,  by  asserting 
that  such  phenomena  do  not  present  themselves;  or  if 
they  admit  their  appearance,  account  for  them  by  designating 
them  as  an  hallucination  of  the  mind;  or  vision  under  hypnotic 
influence,  or  while  in  somnambulistic  state ;  or  possibly  the  opera¬ 
tion  of  the  sub-conscious  self,  or  perhaps  a  trick  of  conjuring, 
or  fraud.  And  some  there  are  who  assert,  “It  is  the  work  of 
the  Devil.”  While  I  am  prepared  to  admit,  that  hallucinations  in 
some  instances  are  due  to  a  disordered  mind,  it  were  nevertheless 
presumptions  to  claim,  that  a  given  number  of  people  constituting 
a  circle,  must  of  necessity  be  all  of  disordered  mind,  because  they 
all  agree  in  their  recognition  of  precisely  the  same  phenomena ; 
and  this  claim  is  reduced  to  an  absurdity,  to  account  for  hundreds 
of  thousands  of  people  in  all  parts  of  the  world,  singly  and  in 
groups  of  five,  ten,  twenty,  thirty  or  more,  in  each  instance  simul¬ 
taneously  seeing,  hearing,  feeling  in  unison,  and  corroborating 
each  the  other’s  account  of  what  has  presented  to  their  recognition. 

As  an  hypothesis,  can  hypnosis  without  audible  suggestion, 
silently  and  simultaneously  afifect  each  and  every  person  in  the 
seance  room  exactly  alike,  so  that  all  hear  the  suggested  sentences 
rolling  from  the  lips  of  the  hypnotically  materialized  forms,  which 
the  sitters  in  their  own  hypnotized  condition  are  looking  at?  Will 
such  hypothesis  sustain  itself,  long  enough  for  a  person  to  give  it 
second  or  serious  thought  ? 

As  an  hypothesis,  can  the  sub-conscious  or  subjective  self,  the 
ego,  or  within  the  Astral,  as  designated  by  some,  externalize  itself 
and  then  exercise  a  constructive  faculty,  or  power  sufficiently 
perfect  to  operate  through  its  creation,  and  make  results  visible 
to  the  sight,  and  audible  to  the  hearing  of  all  alike ;  and  exercise 
volition  or  reason,  and  interchange  of  knowledge  ?  As  well  might 
one  argue  that  black  is  white,  as  to  expect  a  convert  to  that  belief. 
We  have  now  come  to  another  hypothesis  of  the  skeptic’s  list, 

33 


34 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


viz.,  fraud  and  trickery  or  conjuring.  Here  we  begin  with  a 
very  large  handicap,  for  we  must  admit  it  has  in  the  past,  as  well 
as  at  the  present  time  played,  and  gives  promise  in  the  future  of 
playing  a  most  important  part,  in  deceiving  the  so-designated 
“gullibles.”  But,  is  it  a  reasonable  thing,  and  can  it  be  depended 
upon  as  a  fact,  that  it  is  always  and  invariably,  an  imposition  of 
trickery  or  conjuring?  Will  the  reader  deny,  and  can  the  skeptic 
honestly  deny,  as  Barnum  or  Lincoln  said,  that  “You  can  deceive 
some  of  the  people  all  of  the  time ;  and  all  of  the  people  some  of 
the  time ;  but  you  cannot  deceive  all  of  the  people  all  of  the  time,” 
everywhere,  nor  anywhere? 

The  hypothesis  of  Spirit  power  giving  rise  to  the  phenomena, 
is  not  on  the  skeptic’s  list ;  but  it  most  certainly  must  be  examined, 
repeatedly  tested,  and  well  considered  if  it  be  found,  that  after 
the  fullest,  keenest,  most  exacting  investigation  by  clear-headed 
investigators,  approaching  the  work  of  investigation  with  an  open 
mind,  and  proceeding  according  to  scientific  methods,  that  the 
other  hypothesis  cannot  account  for  the  phenomena. 

I  am  compelled  to  admit  the  existence  of  the  phenomena  of 
materialization ;  and  many  other  apparently  psychic  manifesta¬ 
tions.  I  cannot  deny  their  existence,  if  I  am  to  depend  upon  my 
ordinary  physical  senses,  and  I  have  no  proof  that  any  one  of  my 
senses  is  unreliable.  To  me,  therefore,  the  phenomena  I  have 
recorded  and  investigated  are  unaccountable,  on  the  ordinary 
plea  of  deception  of  the  physical  senses,  by  fraud  or  conjuring  of 
the  skeptic’s  hypothesis.  Those  present  with  me  in  the  many 
seances  confirmed  my  senses  and  experiences.  They  admitted  to 
me  that  they  saw  what  I  saw,  heard  what  I  heard,  felt  what  I 
felt,  inhaled  some  of  the  strange  perfume  that  I  inhaled  and 
described.  How  then  shall  these  occurrences  be  accounted  for? 
And  if  not  accounted  for  in  ordinary  or  evident  ways,  why  should 
a  person  who  had  not  seen  or  experienced  them,  assert  that  they 
did  not  occur?  I  have  great  sympathy  for  unbelievers  in  spiritual 
phenomena ;  for  such  unbelievers,  whether  avowed  Christians,  or 
outside  of  the  church  membership,  place  themselves  in  antagonism 
to  the  continued  and  repeated  narratives  of  spirit  return,  and 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


35 


spirit  communion,  recorded  as  truth  in  the  book  best  known  as 
the  Holy  Bible. 

As  an  investigator  among  strangers,  I  had  and  have  no  reason 
to  either  court  favors  or  fear  frowns  of  any  one  who  was  present ; 
and  after  recording  facts,  leave  my  readers  to  construct  their  own 
hypothesis  to  account  for  these  phenomena,  and  form  their  own 
conclusions. 

The  foregoing  is  submitted  as  my  testimony,  as  to  the  psychical 
conditions  and  environment  of  the  medium,  before,  during  and 
after  the  first  and  other  seances.  I  feel  that  I  can  fairly  presume, 
that  if  I  gave  evidence  in  a  criminal  court,  before  judge  and  jury 
in  a  murder  trial,  or  in  any  other  court,  with  any  other  case,  my 
credibility  as  witness  of  the  facts,  would  go  unchallenged,  nor 
would  doubt  be  cast  upon  me,  as  to  the  reliability  of  my  physical 
senses  employed  in  compiling  the  facts  as  evidence.  If  so,  the 
same  credibility  and  reliability  should  hold  good  here,  in  the  fore¬ 
going  evidence  presented  to  the  reader. 

Along  with  me'  were  others  watching,  who  were  suspicious 
sitters.  And  now  I  ask  the  reader  here  to  note  a  fact  or  two.  All 
the  seances  but  one,  were  held  in  the  private  home,  of  one  of  the 
members  of  the  local  society,  where  strangers  or  accomplices 
could  not  be,  except  by  invitation. 

As  a  true  investigator  I  put  my  trust  in  none,  but  spent  an 
hour  in  most  critical  examination  of  the  seance  room,  and  con¬ 
sidered  well,  not  only  all  conditions,  but  devised  in  several  ways 
precautions,  for  example,  against  accomplices,  trap  doors  and 
secret  entrances,  movable  windows,  and  unlocked  doors.  So  we 
locked  the  various  doors,  and  we  nailed  the  windows  down,  and 
felt  ourselves  secure  from  imposition  there.  And  further,  this 
feature  or  phase  of  mediumship  was  to  some  of  us  quite  new, 
and  therefore  we  were  inclined  to  be  quite  skeptical,  and  but  few 
if  any  of  us  could  be  called  credulous. 

Now  there  are  many  men,  who  exist  here  and  there,  and  every¬ 
where,  and  some  of  these  I’ve  met,  who  are  ready,  and  can  stay 
at  home  and  tell  you  all  about  a  seance,  and  who  never  yet  have 
made  investigation  for  evidence,  nor  had  a  personal  experience, 
and  yet  presume  to  pronounce  it  all  deception,  and  fraudulent. 


36 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  take  delight  in  saying  it.  To  such  I  say,  ^‘you  are  a  'barrack’ 
soldier,  and  out  of  sight,  and  know  not  the  duties  of  a  sentinel 
or  scout ;  and  I(  now  ask  you,  for  once  be  good  enough  to  now 
account  for  the  phenomena  I  have  described,  and  tell  me  truly 
just  how  it  could  be  done,  notwithstanding  the  existence  of  the 
various  conditions  I  have  narrated  in  detail;  and  also  explain 
how  fifteen  to  thirty  different  accomplices  could  get  into  the 
cabinet  in  the  first  place ;  or  how  they  could  individually  get 
there  later,  if  human,  and  out  and  away  after  doing  their  stunt, 
as  in  a  play,  without  leaving  a  trace  of  their  belongings  behind 
them;  and  without  a  single  sitter,  of  the  ten  to  twenty  at  the 
different  seances  (who  were  up  to  average  intelligent  citizenship, 
of  as  many  well  informed  citizens  anywhere)  being  able  to  discern 
how  they  entered  or  departed  from  the  cabinet ;  or  not  be  able  to 
distinguish  either  of  the  men,  women  or  children  with  incarnate 
spirits,  if  such  they  believe  they  were,  even  if  they  could  not  quite 
understand  the  difference  between  such,  and  those  which  are  dis- 
carnate?  But  it  must  be  remembered,  that  all  the  figures,  male 
and  female,  talked  and  walked  among  us,  and  were  well  seen  by 
us.  They  took  their  departure,  apparently  one  portion  by  way  of 
the  cabinet  disappearing  and  nothing  left  behind  at  the  close ;  the 
other  portion  did  so  by  slowly  dissolving  into  vapor,  before  our 
very  eyes,  while  descending  towards  the  carpet,  and  became 
invisible  by  dissolution  into  their  elements,  which  would  be 
impossible  for  accomplices. 


These  are  my  quotations  from  early  records  ending  with 
December,  1894;  and  this  their  first  publication. 

End  of  Early  Records 


CHAPTER  VIII 


A  TRANS- ATLANTIC  communication  from  myself,  John 
S.  King,  M.D.,  as  President  of  the  Canadian  Society 
for  Psychical  Research,  to  W.  T.  Stead,  Editor  "Review 
of  Reviews,"  Bank  Buildings,  Kingsway,  London,  W.  C.,  Eng¬ 
land  ;  per  favor  of  an  intelligence  claiming  to  be  Hypatia,  known 
in  history  of  the  fifth  century,  as  the  daughter  of  Theon;  and 
who  made  for  herself  a  great  and  lasting  reputation,  as  a  Neo¬ 
platonic  philosopher,  and  as  the  wisest  woman  of  her  time;  and 
came  to  her  death  by  being  murdered  at  Alexandria,  A.  D.  415. 

She  also  claims  to  be  the  Author’s  spirit  guide,  who  can  and 
will  assist  him  in  demonstrating  to  the  world  the  truth  of  the 
continuity  of  life,  and  that  of  spirit  return,  and  communication 
between  discarnate  spirits  and  humanity,  on  the  earth  plane. 

On  Wednesday,  May  3,  1911,  I  received  a  letter  written  by 
Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt,  “Trumpet  Medium,”  on  Monday,  May  1,  1911, 
at  her  home  in  Detroit,  Michigan. 

In  the  letter  she  (Mrs.  Wriedt)  said  she  was  going  to  sail  for 
England,  to  fill  an  engagement  with  W.  T.  Stead  at  Julia's 
Bureau,  London. 

On  Saturday,  May  6,  1911,  in  the  afternoon,  I  had  a  sitting 
with  Mrs.  Ripley,  a  trance  medium  in  Toronto,  who  was  entranced 
by  Hypatia,  the  alleged  spirit  intelligence. 

To  her  (Hypatia)  I  addressed  myself  and  asked  if  she  herself 
would  be  able  and  zvilling  to  help  me  with  a  test  which  would 
be  evidential  of  spirit  communion  between  discarnate  spirits  and 
humanity?  The  intelligence  replying  through  Mrs.  Ripley’s  vocal 
organs  said,  "I  will  try  to  do  so,  and  hope  to  succeed." 

I  then  made  the  following  proposition,  viz. :  I  want  to  send  a 
letter  and  message  to  W.  T.  Stead  through  you,  speaking  through 
Mrs.  Wriedt’s  trumpet,  before  Mr.  Stead  opens  my  sealed  en¬ 
velope,  containing  the  written  message  signed  by  myself  as  Presi¬ 
dent  of  The  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research.  If  this 
can  be  carried  out  it  will  be  valuable  as  evidential  matter. 

37 


38 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Hypatia  then  said,  “I  will  he  with  you  as  you  write  the  message.” 
The  following  under  its  own  date  is  a  copy  of  the  original 
letter  containing  the  specified  message,  which  I  mailed  to  England. 

(Copy) 


“Toronto,  7th  May,  1911.' 


“W.  T.  Stead, 

Dear  Sir:  —  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt,  trumpet  medium,  of  Detroit, 
Michigan,  wrote  me  from  that  address.  May  1,  1911,  that  she 
was  going  to  sail  for  England,  to  take  part  as  a  psychic  in  Julia’s 
Bureau.  I  received  her  letter  the  3rd  May,  1911.  I  have  neither 
seen  her  since,  nor  heard  from  her  directly  or  indirectly,  and 
presume  therefore  she  is  now  on  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

I  have  known  her  many  years  as  a  psychic,  and  have  on  various 
occasions  had  sittings  with  her,  with  facilities  for  detecting  fraud¬ 
ulent  acts ;  and  am  free  to  say  that  up  to  the  present  moment,  I 
have  never  been  able  to  detect  any  fraudulent  act  on  her  part,  nor 
have  I  learned  of  any  member  of  our  Society  who  has,  but  on  the 
contrary,  up  to  date,  they  consider  her  to  be  an  honest  psychic. 

The  fact  that  she  will  now  be  a  factor,  or  instrument  in  Julia’s 
Bureau,  will  afford  me  the  opportunity  of  attempting  to  prove, 
under  test  conditions,  the  reality  of  spiritual  intercourse,  provid¬ 
ing  you  are  willing  to  assist  me,  as  herein  indicated. 

I  am  alone  in  my  office  at  this  time  while  writing;  and  not  a 
living  human  being  is  even  cognizant  of  my  intention ;  and  I 
have  had  no  suggestion  given,  out  to  Mrs.  Wriedt  of  my  intention ; 
and  I  presume  she  sailed  some  days  ago. 

In  this  letter  you  will  find  a  sealed  envelope.  It  contains  a 
test  message  to  you  written  by  myself  this  afternoon.  It  is  not 
to  be  opened  until  after  the  spirit  intelligence  claiming  to  he  that 
of  Hypatia,  has  spoken  through  Mrs.  Wriedt’ s  trumpet.  You  are 
then  requested  to  open  it,  and  compare  the  language  of  the 
message  with  the  recorded  language  as  expressed  through  the 
trumpet  by  Hypatia,  If  you  will  allow  me,  I  will  suggest  that 
you  form  a  circle  of  three  or  four  harmonious  friends  'including 
yourself,  and  I  feel  certain  you  will  be  greatly  pleased  with  results. 

I  shall  be  glad  to  be  informed  of  the  outcome  of  the  test,  which, 
if  carried  out  as  I  have  here  suggested,  I  fully  expect  will  develop 
in  a  more  or  less  satisfactory  way.” 

(The  test  message  is  enclosed  in  sealed  envelope.) 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


39 


'Toronto,  7th  May,  1911. 

W.  T.  Stead. 

‘Waatdoaga’. 

John  S.  King,  M.D., 
Presdt.  C.  S.  P.  R.” 

Can  Hypatia  deliver  the  message  ? 

[Note:  —  W.  T.  Stead  did  not  adopt  my  suggestion  of  a  circle 
of  three- or  four  harmonious  friends,  and  Hypatia  did  not  find 
conditions  therefore,  in  the  public  seance,  as  favorable  as  desired 
or  necessary.  J.  S.  K.] 

The  test  of  exact  message  is  promised  later,  hence  not  given  out 
at  this  time. 

I  had  a  sitting  with  medium  Ripley  on  Sunday,  4th  June,  1911, 
between  10  and  11  A.  M.  The  medium  was  again  entranced  and 
I  held  converse  with  the  same  intelligence  Hypatia,  who  asked 
me  to  note  this  fact. 

“Mrs.  Wriedt  will  hold  a  trumpet  seance  on  Wednesday  night, 
“7th  inst.  It  will  not  be  at  Julia’s  Bureau,  nor  yet  a  public  seance, 
“but  in  a  private  home  of  an  interested  party,  and  W.  T.  Stead 
“will  be  there,  and  so  will  a  goodly  number.”  Hypatia  assured 
me  that  she  will  be  there,  and  that  if  permitted  to  do  so,  will  try 
to  deliver  my  message  through  the  trumpet. 

I  had  a  sitting  with  medium  Ripley  on  Sunday,  11th  June,  1911, 
from  10.40  a.  m.  to  11.30  a.  m.  While  the  medium  was  again  en¬ 
tranced,  the  intelligence  Hypatia  told  me  she  was  present  at  the 
seance  Wednesday  evening  last,  1th  inst.  as  previously  indi¬ 
cated,  and  saw  W.  T.  'Stead  there,  hut  the  vibrations  of  the  seance 
or  circle,  were  not  such  as  zvould  enable  her  to  complete  her  task. 
There  were  about  twenty  present. 

My  next  sitting  with  medium  Ripley  was  on  Sunday,  June  18, 
1911,  from  10  to  11  a.  m. 

After  a  very  brief  preliminary  talk,  Hypatia  said,  “You  are 
anxiously  waiting  to  hear,  if  I  have  been  able  to  deliver  your 
message  as  yet,  or  whether  I  have  made  my  presence  realized. 
1  have  met  with  partial  success  only.  I  have  not  yet  delivered 
the  test  message  though  I  have  met  and  spoken  with  Mr.  Stead, 


40 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  told  him  who  I  was,  and  that  I  came  to  him  at  your  request. 
Yes,  he  was  told  you  were  President  of  the  Psychical  Research 
Society.  I  hope  to  give  the  message  as  you  wrote  it  very  shortly. 
Conditions  are  improving ;  and  when  just  right,  I  will  have  very 
little  difficulty  in  giving  it  correctly.” 

All  the  foregoing  evidential  matter  has  been  on  this  side  of  the 
Atlantic,  or  this  end  of  the  new  line.  Now  remembering  evidence 
and  dates  already  presenting,  let  us  note  what  comes  to  us  through 
the  post  from  the  other  end  of  the  line. 


"THE  REVIEW  OF  REVIEWS, 

Edited  by  W.  T.  Stead, 

Bank  Buildings,  Kingsway, 
London  W.  C,  England,  June  17,  1911. 

"Dear  Doctor  King: 

You  will  be  interested  to  know  the  result  of  the  test  which  you 
kindly  proposed.  I  forgot  all  about  your  message.  They  (the 
Bureau)  have  been  very  crowded,  since  Mrs.  Wriedt  arrived, 
and  it  was  not  until  we  had  had  nearly  three  weeks’  sittings,  that 
on  Wednesday  night  (14th  inst.)  to  my  surprise,  I  was  hailed 
through  the  trumpet  by  Hypatia,  who  said  she  had  a  message 
from  you  to  give  me,  mentioning  your  name.  I  had  at  that  time 
not  opened  your  sealed  envelope,  and  I  was  therefore  not  aware 
what  the  message  was  which  she  had  been  given.  I  enclose  you 
a  copy  of  a  shorthand  note  of  what  actually  was  said  in  this 
connection  at  this  seance.  (He  had  not  complied  with  my  sug¬ 
gestion  as  to  three  or  four  friends  present  including  himself, 
which  was  by  me  intended  to  be  a  special  circle  while  this  was 
not  such  an  one,  J.  S.  K.).  At  the  time  when  Hypatia  came,  I 
had  completely  forgotten  her  name,  and  connection  with  you,  but 
on  looking  up  the  correspondence  from  you  afterwards,  I  found 
everything  exactly  as  it  was  said.  This  is  very  good,  although  it 
has  not  been  quite  the  success  that  you  had  hoped  for.  Will  you 
write  again  and  tell  Hypatia  to  give  another  message,  and  send 
it  to  me  in  a  sealed  envelope?  I  will  say  nothing  to  Mrs.  Wriedt 
about  it. 

Thanking  you  for  your  kindness,  I  am. 

Yours  sincerely. 


W.  T.  Stead. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


41 


Enclosure, 

Extract  from  minutes  of 
Julia’s  Circle,  14th  June,  1911,” 

“Extract  from  Shorthand  Reported  Minutes 
OF  Julia's  Circle  of  14th  June,  1911.” 

W.  T.  Stead.  “Hypatia,  this  is  the  first  time  you  have  ever 
come  to  us.  Thank  you  very  much  indeed.  Do  you  wish  to  speak 
to  me  privately  —  I  mean  personally  ?” 

Hypatia.  “I  come  to  you  this  evening,  and  I  have  a  message 
for  you,  I  come  to  you  from  my  medium  who  so  kindly  wanted 
you  to  hear  from  me  —  Dr.  King  of  Toronto  —  (to  Mrs.  Wriedt) 
and  he  wrote  to  Mr,  Stead.” 

Mrs.  Wriedt.  “He  is  President  of  the  Psychical  Research 
Society  of  Canada.” 

Hypatia.  Addressing  W.  T.  Stead.  “And  you  tell  him  I  am 
doing  all  I  can  to  help  his  wife,  and  also  to  help  him.” 

W.  T.  Stead.  “Did  he  request  you  to  come  ?” 

Hypatia.  “He  did.  Tell  him  I  am  so  happy  to  see  dear  old 
Julia  again  in  her  tabernacle  of  spirit  communion.  I  am  very  glad 
to  be  here  tonight,  and  wish  your  Mr.  King  success.”  (To  Mr.  K.) 
“You  are  a  namesake  of  my  medium  in  Toronto.  I  am  most  happy 
to  congratulate  you  upon  being  a  member  of  this  Bureau,  also 
the  good  gentleman  (Mr.  Peters)  who  will  travel  far  and  near. 
I  wish  you  all  success!  and  God  bless  you.”  (To  W.  T.  Stead.) 
“The  interview  you  had  this  morning  will  not  be  a  useless  one. 
It  will  be  a  very  interesting  one  in  the  future.” 

W.  T.  Stead.  “Which  interview  do  you  refer  to  ?” 

Hypatia.  “Sir  Wilfred  Laurier !  Something  good  will  develop.” 

W.  T.  Stead.  “It  was  a  very  pleasant  talk.” 

Voice.  “God  bless  you  —  Good  night.” 

W.  T.  Stead  was  handed  roses. 

Voice.  “Conditions  are  very  nice.” 

W.  T.  Stead.  “I  will  look  up  the  letter  from  Dr,  King  of 
Toronto.  He  wrote  to  me  some  time  ago.” 

Note  taken  from  a  letter  to  Dr.  King  from  W.  T.  Stead. 

“The  conversation  about  Sir  Wilfrid  Laurier  was  very  interest¬ 
ing.  I  had  breakfasted  with  him  that  morning  and  had  had  a 
very  interesting  conversation  with  him,  and  I  think  that  Hypatia 
is  quite  right  in  expecting  that  something  good  will  develop.” 

In  compliance  with  the  request  of  W.  T.  Stead,  I  have  inaugur¬ 
ated  a  second  test  experiment  of  Transatlantic  Spiritualistic  Com- 


42 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


munication,  the  outcome  of  which  will  be  made  known  when 
completed. 


Second  Experiment 

[Note:  —  The  second  communication  in  this  series  from  John 
S.  King,  M.D.,  President  of  the  C.  S.  for  P.  R.  to  W.  T.  Stead, 
is  a  reply  to  Stead’s  letter.] 


“The  Elliott  House, 

Toronto,  28th  June,  1911. 

My  Dear  Mr.  Stead: 

Your  letter  and  enclosure  of  17th  June  reached  me  on  Monday, 
26th  June,  8  a.  m.,  postal  delivery.  Though  everything  promised 
or  attempted  had  not  up  to  date  been  delivered,  nevertheless  there 
was  encouraging  evidential  matter.  By  a  reference  to  my  first 
letter,  you  will  perceive  I  made  a  suggestion  regarding  a  special 
circle  to  receive  my  test  message.  Hypatia  states  that  she  was 
present  before,  on  more  than  one  occasion ;  and  told  me  you  were 
present  at  one  large  circle  where  there  were  mostly  men  (a 
majority  being  men).  She  could  not  get  conditions  to  suit  her, 
nor  proper  opportunity  on  that  occasion..  She  told  me  about  the 
matter  on  Sunday,  18th  June,  and  I  think  I  sent  you  a  copy  of 
that  record  some  time  ago. 

Hypatia’s  reference  to  your  interview  with  Laurier  is,  under 
existing  circumstances,  quite  evidential  in  quality.  Later  on  I 
may  be  able  to  confirm  from  my  records  in  the  past,  other  in¬ 
formation,  and  will  be  glad  in  the  interest  of  truth,  to  do  so  on 
request  by  you.  I  shall  await  with  deep  interest  the  developments. 

Yours  sincerely, 

John  S.  King.” 

[Note:  —  The  sealed  letter  and  message,  were  enclosed  with 
foregoing  letter;  and  were  not  to  be  opened,  until  after  Hypatia 
had  communicated  with  W.  T.  Stead  through  a  trumpet  or  other¬ 
wise.  They  immediately  follow  this  note.  J.  S.  K.] 

“The  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research, 

John  S.  King,  M.D.,  Presdt., 

Elliott  House,  Toronto. 

Office  Phone  M.  235.  Toronto,  5.  15  p.  m., 

28th  June,  1911. 

To  Those  Whom  It  May  Concern,  Greeting: 

To  establish  the  validity  of  the  claim  that  discarnate  spirits 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


43 


can  and  do  return  to  converse  with  mortals,  (intercommunion  of 
spirits  carnate  and  discarnate)  I  am  making  a  strong  and  earnest 
request  of  Hypatia  —  (who  claims  she  was  the  daughter  of  Theon 
of  Alexandria,  and  therefore  the  veritable  Neoplatonic  philos¬ 
opher,  who  was  cruelly  murdered  by  a  mob  at  Alexandria ;  and 
she  also  claims  that  she  was  and  is  to  me  a  Spirit  Guide),  —  to 
be  good  and  kind  enough  to  help  to  prove  beyond  all  cavil,  not 
only  the  continuity  of  life,  but  also  the  intercommunion  between 
spirit  and  earth  spheres ;  and  demonstrate  her  ability  to  not  only 
commune  with  me,  but  likewise,  conditions  being  favorable,  to 
give  audibly  to  W.  T.  Stead,  Editor  of  “The  Review  of  Reviews/" 
London,  England,  through  a  trumpet  or  otherwise,  a  synopsis  of 
the  contents  of  this  pronouncement,  together  with  the  test  sentence 
in  full,  which  I  have  written  in  red  ink,  before  he  (Mr.  Stead) 
opens  the  envelope  containing  them;  and  if  possible  before  he 
receives  my  letter  containing  the  sealed  envelope  and  test  message. 

This  entire  statement  is  written  by  myself  while  absolutely 
alone  in  my  office ;  and  without  the  knowledge  of  any  living  human 
being.  On  a  previous  occasion  Hypatia  consented  and  did  make 
an  effort,  which  I  learn  was  partially  successful,  and  which  en¬ 
couraged  the  promise  of  success  in  the  end.  Hence  this  second 
trial.  It  does  seem  obvious  that  aside  from  the  postal  route  of 
the  message  from  my  pen  to  W.  T.  Stead’s  hand,  there  are  only 
two  other  modes  by  which  the  message  can  be  carried  to  Mr. 
Stead  in  London.  One  is  by  the  discarnate  spirit  Hypatia,  the 
other  by  the  incarnate  spirit  of  myself.  (The  sub-conscious  or 
subjective  mind  of  my  own  incarnate  spirit.) 

The  completed  message  together  with  this  statement,  will  bear 
the  date,  hour  and  minute,  Toronto  time,  of  sealing  up  of  both 
the  envelopes,  and  their  deposit  in  the  post  box.  Being  therefore 
in  care  of  the  postal  authorities,  it  doubtless  would  not  be  opened 
before  reaching  Mr.  W.  T.  Stead’s  hand,  and  therefore  no  chance 
would  exist  for  the  perpetration  of  fraud.  If  the  test  proves  suc¬ 
cessful,  I  think  the  spiritual  hypothesis  will  be  the  only  hypothesis 
that  will  correctly  account  for  the  success  of  the  test. 

My  first  message  was  ‘W  a  a  t  d  o  a 
g  a. 

[Note:  —  The  above  message  is  not  made  out  for  the  test  is 
not  completed.  It  was  in  full  in  sealed  envelope.  J.  S.  K.] 

“The  second  message  will  fit  into  the  first  one,  and  is  attached 
herewith. 

This  test  is  made  in  all  sincerity  in  the  interests  of  truth. 

John  S.  King.” 


44 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Second  Spirit  Test  Message 

"Toronto,  5.15  p.  m.,  28th  June,  1911. 

W.  T.  Stead, 

London,  England. 

‘A  g  r  a  p  t  d.’ 

John  S.  King.” 

[Note:  —  The  above  message  is  not  made  out  for  the  test  is 
not  completed.  It  was  in  full  in  the  sealed  envelope.  J.  S.  K.] 

This  second  message  will  fit  into  the  first  or  preceding  one. 

The  Two  Test  Messages  Combined,  Form  One  Complete 
“W  a  a  t  d  o  a  g  a  a  g  r 
apt  d.” 

I  had  a  sitting  with  medium  Ripley  on  the  2nd  July,  1911, 
10.15  to  11.15  A.  M.,  at  which  the  intelligence  Hypatia  spoke 
through  the  vocal  organs  of  the  entranced  medium,  and  she 
claimed  to  have  been  with  me  when  I  was  alone  writing  to  Stead, 
and  knew  all  I  wrote  in  the  letter,  and  influenced  me  to  make 
certain  statements,  more  particularly  in  deciding  on  the  second 
test  message  in  the  make-up  of  the  double  test  message;  and  will 
do  her  best  to  deliver  it  by  the  trumpet  or  in  some  other  way  as 
soon  as  she  can. 

Subsequent  to  above  date,  I  learned  Mrs.  Wriedt  left  England 
—  that  she  went  to  Scotland  and  Wales  —  that  she  left  for  Amer¬ 
ica  and  therefore  presumably  Hypatia  will  have  to  use  some  other 
medium  to  get  her  message  to  W.  T.  Stead. 

I  await  in  confidence  the  realization  of  her  success  in  what  she 
has  undertaken  to  accomplish. 

This  now  completes  the  efforts  made  at  this  end  of  the  line. 

[The  Titanic  disaster  put  an  end  to  further  effort,  J.  S.  K.] 

Third  Experiment,  This  Side  of  the  Atlantic 

(A) 

Copy  of  a  letter  sent  to  Col.  J.  L.  H.  N - of  Province  of 

Quebec  (Canada),  while  in  Toledo,  Ohio. 

"Dear  Col.  N - ; 

I  am  sending  you  herewith  an  enclosed  and  sealed  envelope,  a 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


45 


copy  of  a  letter,  or  special  request  addressed  to  my  Guide ;  and 
left  open  on  my  table  during  the  night,  for  her  to  peruse  before 
I  sealed  and  mailed  it  in  my  letter  to  you,  thus  to  remain  sealed 
until  after  Hypatia  has  spoken  with  or  to  you,  with  the  purpose  of 
creating  evidence  to  prove  the  continuity  of  life,  and  the  inter¬ 
communion  between  discamate  spirits  and  the  human. 

I  hope  the  conditions  will  prove  satisfactory,  and  nothing  hinder 
the  existence  of  favorable  intercommunion. 

Yours  sincerely, 

John  S.  King. 

Toronto,  Monday  night, 

4th  September,  1911.” 


(B) 

This  is  a  copy  from  a  draft  of  my  request  to  my  alleged  Guide 
Hypatia,  as  written  in  my  home  in  Toronto,  Monday  night,  4th 
September,  191 1 ;  and  left  on  my  office  table  during  the  night. 

“Hypatia, 

Dear  One:  —  Kindly  convey  to  Colonel  N - ,  my  Quebec 

friend  who  called  on  me  last  evening  (Sunday,  September  3rd), 
my  best  wishes  for  a  successful  season  with  his  Guide,  at  Brother 
Jonson’s,  while  you  assume  your  materialized  form,  letting  him 
know  you  do  so  at  my  request,  as  a  test. 

Sincerely, 

John  S.  King.” 


(C) 

Following  is  a  copy  of  a  letter  written  by  Colonel  N.  to  me 
on  the  8th  September,  1911,  and  which,  reached  me  the  follow¬ 
ing  day. 

"Toledo,  8th  September,  1911. 

Dear  Dr.  King: 

Just  a  line  to  say  that  last  night  at  a  public  seance  at  Jonson’s, 
I  was  favored  by  a  visit  of  Hypatia  as  you  predicted.  What  a 
magnificent  and  impressive  presence !  I  was  so  overcome  that  I 
cannot  well  recall  her  exact  words :  —  I  think  a  promise  made  to 
you,  a  desire  to  apprise  you  of  her  visit  to  me.  A  loving  message 
to  you,  and  the  assurance  of  her  continued  assistance. 

She  was  beautifully  gowned,  on  her  head  a  species  of  diadem. 
She  walked  toward  me  from  the  cabinet  as  a  queen.  As  I  per¬ 
ceived  she  was  coming  to  me,  I  rose  to  meet  her.  She  raised 


46 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


her  hands  signifying  she  could  not  be  touched.  She  then  spoke 
the  measured  sentences,  which  I  imperfectly  send  you. 

*  ********* 

Yours  sincerely  and  fraternally, 

J.  L.  H.  N - .’ 

[Note:  —  He  was  a  frequent  contributor  to  “Light,”  over  an 
assumed  name  before  this  event;  and  was  known  by  the  Editor. 

J.S.K.] 


CHAPTER  IX 


The  reader  may  question  the  context  of  hypnosis  and 
psychical  research  phenomena  proper;  but  be  assured 
it  is  appropriate,  as  knowledge  of  hypnosis  greatly 
simplifies  the  understanding  of  both  mental  and  psychical 
phenomena,  and  in  some  instances  makes  clear  the  distinguishing 
feature  between  a  psychologized  person,  and  one  controlled  in 
trance  state  by  discarnate  spirit  from  the  realms,  and  doubtless 
all  psychical  researchers  sometimes  come  into  contact  with  pseudo 
mediums,  and  psychologized  persons,  as  well  as  genuine  psychics. 
Want  of  space  will  not  permit  of  my  dealing  in  detail  with  hyp¬ 
nosis,  though  I  will  again  refer  briefly  to  it  in  a  later  chapter; 
but  for  the  present  will  illustrate  with  a  special  feature  case, 
differing  from  those  usually  met  with,  in  that  there  is  a  similarity 
in  some  respects  only,  in  the  speaking  phenomena,  to  that  of  a 
psychic  controlled  by  a  spirit,  which  may  aid  readers  in  their  dif¬ 
ferential  diagnosis  between  the  two  conditions  of  trance  with 
spirit  control,  and  unusual  mental  operation  as  a  result  of  hypnotic 
suggestion. 

Mind  functioning  is  by  an  objective  portion  of  the  mind,  to¬ 
gether  with  a  subjective  portion,  acting  in  unison,  yet  each  with 
its  own  purpose  to  accomplish ;  and  mind  as  a  whole  being  an 
attribute  of  the  spirit  ego  which  is  encompassed  by  an  astral  body 
of  the  same  dimensions  as  the  physical,  and  continues  to  serve  the 
ego  after  it  withdraws,  which  in  some  cases  it  may  do  temporarily ; 
but  finally,  or  at  the  death  of  the  physical  body  must  do 
permanently. 

In  the  state  of  hypnotized  subject,  when  the  activities  of  the 
objective  portion  of  the  mind  are  made  subjective,  or  cease  func¬ 
tioning,  the  possibility  develops  for  man’s  communion  with  the 
incarnate  spirit  of  his  subject  through  the  subjective  portion  of 
the  mind,  and  in  that  way,  and  by  suggestion  it  —  the  spirit  ego  — 
,may  travel  far  or  near  in  quest  of  certain  definite  knowledge 
asked  for.  This  proven  so,  then  may  it  not  be  true  that  centered 

47 


48 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


thought  or  strong  desire,  or  prayer,  may  be  sent  forth  from 
human,  and  reach  by  harmonious  vibration  or  attunement,  a 
desired  discarnate  ego,  no  matter  howsoever  far  or  near,  for  the 
soul  or  ego  has  the  ability  to  acquire  from  external  sources  of 
available  knowledge,  entirely  outside  of  present  knowledge,  at 
a  distance  near  or  far,  as  may  be  related  to  the  physical  body 
of  that  particular  spirit  ego. 

The  evidence  in  support  of  this  I  present  here. 

I  introduce  Case  3  of  my  record  of  hypnotic  psychical  phenom¬ 
ena,  extracted  from  a  talk  given,  as  president,  to  the  members  of 
the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research.  I  cite  it  as  a  case 
of  incarnate  spirit  communion  of  my  patient,  with  me,  and  by 
such  spirit,  power  obtained,  as  the  body  sat  on  the  same  chair, 
with  both  eyes  closed  all  the  time,  from  my  entrance  till  I  secured 
exact  and  truthful  information  from  her  home  in  Massachusetts, 
hundreds  of  miles  distant,  and  subsequently  verified  in  detail  in 
writing  by  her  aunt  in  the  home.  The  spirit  being  the  incarnate 

spirit  or  ego  of  the  living  young  woman  E.  B - then  serving 

time  in  a  public  institution. 

Following  is  the  text  of  the  recorded  history  of  the  case. 

Case  3.  Hypnotic  Psychical  Phenomena. 

“A  woman  in  a  Toronto  institution,  about  26  years  of  age,  under 

suggestion  while  in  hypnosis,  told  me  what  her  Aunt  H - was 

doing  on  that  very  day  and  at  the  very  hour,  and  for  a  period 
of  nearly  fifteen  minutes,  in  her  own  home  in  a  town  in  a  far 
off  state  of  the  American  Union,  talking  rapidly  and  assigning 
reasons  for  preferring  a  different  arrangement  of  the  pictures, 

which  her  Aunt  H - was  having  cleaned  and  rearranged.  She 

spoke  as  if  addressing  her  Aunt  and  said,  “Do  be  careful,  or 
you  will  fall  off  that  stepladder.”  She  spoke  of  Annie,  a  little 
girl  who  came  into  the  room  where  Aunt  H - was.  She  men¬ 

tioned  a  variety  of  changes  that  had  been  made  or  were  being 
made  in  the  arrangement  of  pictures  on  the  wall,  and  of  furniture 
in  the  rooms,  while  she  was  talking.  A  letter  was  immediately 
sent  to  her  aunt,  requesting  a  description  in  detail  of  what  she 
was  doing  during  the  time  specified,  while  her  niece  was  in  hypnotic 
state,  who  was  there  beside  herself,  and  a  variety  of  details  of 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


49 


family  or  private  nature.  The  letter  received  in  reply  confirmed 
what  the  niece  had  told  us.  I  may  say  the  woman  in  this  case 
was  constantly  under  supervision  in  the  institution,  and  that  the 

official  lady  who  wrote  to  Aunt  H -  and  received  her  reply 

was  the  party  who  was  present  and  made  record  of  the  facts  as 
they  occurred,  or  as  the  words  fell  from  the  lips  of  the  subject. 
All  correspondence  from  or  to  the  residents  of  the  institution,  had 
to  pass  through  this  lady  and  she  affirms  that  none  passed  at  that 

time  except  her  own,  and  the  girl’s  Aunt  H - ’s  reply.  In  the 

reply  letter  received  from  the  Aunt  by  this  lady,  the  confirmation 
of  what  was  recorded  and  the  happenings  as  given  in  the  Aunt’s 
own  words,  were  confirmed,  the  concluding  portion  of  which  is 
as  follows:  "I  want  to  tell  you  that  I  was  at  the  very  time  she 
told  you,  hanging  pictures,  and  using  a  stepladder.  I  hung  a  lot 
of  them  and  among  them  one  of  her,  and  I  sat  down  and  looked 
at  it,  and  thought  of  her;  and  little  Annie  was  out  and  in,  while 
I  was  at  work.” 

It  would  require  several  hours  for  me  to  give  every  detail  of 
interest  in  this  case,  and  to  clearly  illustrate  the  various  features 
which  present,  suffice  it  to  say  that  the  two  conditions,  which  for 
the  present  I  will  designate  hypnotic  clairvoyance  and  clair- 
audience,  were  distinctly  established.  I  am  not  convinced  that 
these  terms  best  convey  the  true  idea.  It  may  be  that  while  the 
natural,  or  rather  physical  senses,  are  in  bondage  as  a  result  of 
the  operation  of  hypnosis,  the  spiritual  senses  (or  operations  of 
the  subjective  mind)  are  liberated  or  unrestricted,  or  operate  as 
a  result  of  ego  power,  or  the  incarnate  spirit ;  or  possibly  by  the 
use  of  an  ordinary  latent  sense,  which  may  become  active  as  the 
others  become  passive  ;  or  fully  exercised  by  the  ego,  when  becom¬ 
ing  discarnate,  either  alone  or  in  connection  with  other  new  found 
faculties ;  or  lastly,  and  quite  probably  the  information  was  secured 
by  the  flight  of  the  spirit  or  ego  to  the  home,  aided  by  spirit 
guides,  which  has  been  proved  to  have  been  accomplished  in  some 
cases. 

Fuller  particulars  and  some  other  features  of  this  peculiarly 
interesting  case  I  will  now  give  as  a  conclusion  to  my  talk  on 
hypnosis.  In  preserving  the  facts  for  record,  I  must  protect  the 


50 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


identity  of  the  individual  personality,  and  she  the  subject  shall 
therefore  receive,  or  be  known  by,  the  fictitious  initials  of  E —  B — . 

E -  B - was  of  fine  figure,  intellectual  countenance,  well 

educated,  peculiar  temperament,  self-willed,  strong-minded,  some¬ 
what  reckless,  and  had  wandered  from  the  path  of  propriety,  and 
had  met  with  kindred  companionship  in  Canada;  and  ended  that 
particular  career  by  entering  an  educational  and  industrial  institu¬ 
tion.  It  was  while  there  I  treated  her  for  insomnia  and  other 
nervous  conditions.  This  was  done  by  placing  her  in  hypnotic 
trance.  It  was  by  her  own  solicitation,  endorsed  by  the  strong 
request  made  to  me,  by  her  brother  —  a  professional  man  —  and 

her  Aunt  H -  and  with  the  cognizance  and  approval  of  her 

mother,  and  with  the  presence  and  consent  of  the  official  lady 
who  had  her  in  charge  in  the  institution,  that  I  undertook  to 
bring  about  a  reformation  of  character.  Her  condition  at  times 
suggested  a  double  personality.  The  chief  point  sought,  aside 
from  treating  her  by  suggestive  therapeutics,  for  insomnia  and 
nervousness,  was  to  eradicate  the  vicious  tendency  of  her  normal 
character ;  and  to  establish  a  fixedness  or  stability  of  character  on 
a  higher  plane  of  morality  by  psychical  treatment. 

On  the  8th  of  May,  1907,  having  with  no  loss  of  time  placed 
E.  B.  in  the  somnambulistic  stage  of  hypnosis,  I  addressed  her  as 
she  sat  before  me  in  a  chair  near  the  official  lady,  who  made 
record  of  her  statements. 

I  said,  “You  are  shortly  to  leave  us  for  your  distant  home. 
This  change  can  be  made  an  important  epoch  in  your  life ;  anterior 
to  this  time  and  this  event,  there  is  much  that  is  regretable ;  and 
much  that  you  fain  would  forget  if  you  could.  Before  you  is 
a  life  of  credit  and  honor,  or  otherwise,  as  you  choose  to  make  it. 
The  decision  rests  with  yourself,  and  I  shall  be  pleased  if  you 
will  commit  to  writing  your  own  resolution  with  reference  thereto 
before  we  separate.” 

No  other  suggestion  was  given  on  that  occasion  and  no  further 
word  spoken  at  that  time.  Paper  and  pencil  were  on  the  desk  at 
hand,  and  without  any  hesitancy,  and  without  even  opening  her 
eyes  even  momentarily,  she  reached  for  the  pencil  and  began 
writing  at  once  the  following,  which  was  copied  from  the  original 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND  51 

which  was  given  to  her  when  leaving  the  institution  with  her 
aunt  who  came  to  meet  her,  and  escort  her  home. 

“I  do  faithfully  promise  through  or  by  the  help  of  the 
Unseen  yet  Guiding  Force  that  we  call  God,  to  hereafter 
refrain  from  doing  or  saying  anything  debasing,  or  grievous 
to  any  of  my  family  or  friends ;  that  the  kind  advice  given 

me  by  Dr.  King  and  Mrs. - I  will  remember  and  adhere 

to,  and  be  a  help  and  comfort  to  my  family  and  friends,  and 
earn  by  so  doing  the  respect  and  confidence  of  family,  friends, 
and  humanity.” 

Signed  E -  B - . 

The  foregoing  “decision”  was  written  rapidly  and  in  a  very 
fine  style,  the  eyes  meanwhile  remaining  closed. 

On  the  9th  May,  1907,  we  sat  again  and  when  in  a  similar 
hypnotic  state  she  spoke  as  if  inspired.  Her  remarks  were  as  if 
delivered  to  people  everywhere,  that  is  in  general,  and  her  quota¬ 
tions  from  various  writers  and  authors,  and  distinguished  literary 
men,  such  as  one  would  expect  only  from  a  scholar  or  literary 
character,  and  that  they  were  accompanied  by  emotion  was 
apparent  as  her  face  reddened,  and  the  tears  rolled  down  her 
cheeks. 

The  official  lady  having  E.  B.  in  charge  wrote  to  the  aunt 
after  my  third  treatment  and  in  the  course  of  her  letter  said: 
“You  would  have  been  greatly  edified  by  everything  E.  said  in 
her  trance  state.  Her  thoughts  were  beautiful  and  beautifully 
expressed.  Among  other  things  she  then  spoke  of  the  great  debt 
she  owes  all  of  you,  speaking  thus,  ‘Up  to  now,  or  quite  recently, 
you  could  write  across  my  life  “failure.”  While  I  have  failed 
with  empty  pockets,  I  have  been  benefited  in  experience.  I  feel 
like  calling  my  creditors  together  and  trying  to  pay  back.  I  owe 
you.  Mother,  more  than  I  can  ever  repay.  You  are  the  heaviest 
Creditor.  I  shall  liquidate  that  debt.  Don’t  press.  Mother,  don’t 
foreclose.  I’ll  be  such  a  comfort.  Mother,  I’ll  pay  your  debt. 

M - ’s.  I’ll  be  companionable,  I  will  make  home  so  happy  for 

him;  when  he  has  a  home  of  his  own,  he  can  look  back  on  the 
happy  home  here.  Aunt  H - ,  our  debt  is  too  great  to  tackle  I 


52 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


fear  at  all ;  but  I  will  devote  my  life  to  you  and  Mother.’  ” 

Our  next  sitting  was  on  the  12th  June,  1907,  I  had  said  to  her 
that  today’s  sitting  might  be  the  last  we  would  have  together. 
It  was  a  short  sitting;  and  while  E.  B.  was  in  a  deep  stage  of 
hypnosis,  both  eyes  being  closed,  I  asked  her  if  there  was  any¬ 
thing  she  would  like  to  say  or  write,  when  she  reached  for  the 
paper  and  pencil  and  wrote  what  follows  —  “The  cross-roads 
are  before  me,  and  I  stand  to  choose  my  path.  Strange  to  say  I 
do  not  hesitate,  for  I  can  clearly  discern  the  best  road  to  walk 
upon.  May  be  it’s  the  narrowest,  thereby  not  permitting  any 
useless  luggage  of  the  past  to  accompany  me.  From  this  time 
forward  I  am  going  to  walk  that  road,  cost  what  it  will,  and 
when  I  return  to  those  nearest  and  dearest  to  me,  it  well  be  with 
that  resolution  almost  a  reality,  which  will  I  trust  in  time  become 
part  of  myself.  I  cannot  do  this  in  myself,  yet  I  feel  after  seeing 
Dr.  King  that  I  could  move  mountains  almost,  and  I  feel  sure 

that  the  good  helpful  influence  he  and  Mrs - have  had  over 

me  will  tell  for  good.” 

Signed  E,  B - , 

It  was  only  on  the  day  of  departure  from  the  Institution  that 
E.  B.  was  made  aware  of  the  resolutions  she  had  made  and  signed, 
they  being  handed  to  her  as  she  left 

Five  years  later,  or  in  January,  1912,  those  in  blood  relationship 
with  E.  B.  are  inclined  to  the  belief,  that  there  is  a  permanent 
change  in  her  character  and  habits,  in  accordance  with  the  high 
ideals  she  herself  had  enunciated  and  signed  on  the  foregoing 
occasions. 

Now  I  submit  that  had  that  woman  been  heard  speaking  as 
she  did  on  the  rostrum  of  a  spiritual  meeting  in  one  of  the  halls 
or  meeting  places  in  this  city,  or  any  other  place,  she  would  have 
been  designated  by  a  large  proportion  of  her  auditors,  sympa¬ 
thetically  in  accord  with  the  spiritual  philosophy,  as  a  medium 
speaking  under  the  inspiration  of  a  discarnate  spirit.  It  was 
simply  her  own  inspiration,  acting  on  a  well-timed  gentle  sugges¬ 
tion,  made  to  or  through  her  subjective  mind,  and  set  in  motion 
by  her  own  incarnate  spirit. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


53 


In  this  connection  I  may  say  I  have  the  strong  conviction  that 
both  clairvoyance  or  discernment  of  things  in  most  persons,  in¬ 
visible  to  the  human  eye,  and  clairaudience  or  hearing  what  is 
in  most  persons,  inaudible  to  the  human  ear,  are  spirit  senses  still 
belonging  to  the  ego,  when  it  becomes  discarnate ;  and  that  they 
must  be  recognized,  as  subconscious  in  the  human.  Though  all 
possess  these  senses  subjectively  in  human  life,  they  are  not 
usually  recognized  by  the  physical  objectively;  but  really  are  a 
part  of  the  outfit  of  the  incarnate  spirit  self,  and  ready  for  utility 
when  it  becomes  discarnate.  Its  development  in  man  is  but  a 
springing  up  from  spirit  in  the  subconscious  self.  This  is  evident 
but  relatively  rarely  in  normal  life,  and  sometimes  also  happens 
as  evidence  in  a  deathbed  declaration,  just  before  the  separation 
of  spirit  body  from  the  earthly  one. 


CHAPTER  X 


I  MAY  premise  for  general  information,  that  when  I  began 
my  investigations  of  hypnotism,  and  hypnotic  phenomena, 
some  thirty  years  ago,  I  met  with  difficulties  and  discourage¬ 
ments  which  no  longer  exist.  Fear  of  heterodoxical  classification, 
by  members  of  the  medical  profession,  held  back  several  of  my 
confreres,  who  with  myself  desired  to  investigate,  with  a  view 
to  demonstrate  its  therapeutical  advantages.  For  a  few  years 
there  were  none  of  my  professional  brethren  with  whom  I  could 
exchange  experiences.  At  that  time  many  persons  asserted  that 
hypnotism  was  either  an  hysterical  condition,  or  more  probably 
humbug;  and  that  a  medical  man  was  in  bad  form,  having  any¬ 
thing  to  do  with  it;  and  that  I  was  credulous  enough  to  be 
deceived.  I  held  a-  quiet  tongue,  and  continued  my  investigations, 
and  soon  realized  that  I  was  well  repaid  for  all  the  time  spent  in 
this  unpopular  line  of  research  work,  by  the  knowledge  I  was 
acquiring.  But  witness  the  wonderful  change  in  individual  and 
wide-spread  knowledge ;  and  the  strides  made  by  science ;  and  the 
great  advancement  of  public  opinion,  that  has  taken  place  during 
these  years.  Many  members  of  my  own  profession,  as  well  as 
the  public,  have  come  to  the  recognition  of  the  truth  or  verity 
of  hypnosis,  and  the  momentous  force  and  power  of  suggestion; 
and  realize  from  becoming  more  or  less  familiar  with  either  its 
physiological,  therapeutical,  or  psychical  phenomena,  that  it  has 
important  uses  and  that  they  are  able  to  give  answer  to  the 
question  “What  good  is  it?”  By  study  and  experience  they  have 
demonstrated  some  of  its  practical  utilities,  as  well  as  marked  out 
new  features  for  investigation. 

At  the  time  above  referred  to,  I  rested  under  an  obliquity, 
because  I  did  believe,  and  desired  to  satisfy  myself  of  the  truth 
of  my  belief,  by  investigating  the  phenomena  of  hypnotism  and 
power  of  suggestion.  The  psychical  features  of  hypnosis  a  few 
years  later,  led  me  to  other  newer  and  more  important  investiga¬ 
tions  into  the  psychical  phenomena  of  spiritistic  power;  and  study 

54 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


55 


of  the  spiritual  philosophy ;  and  consequently  following  close  upon 
the  obliquity  which  by  my  previous  venture,  I  had  brought  upon 
myself,  I  found  that  not  only  strangers,  but  acquaintances,  friends, 
and  relations  were  alike  in  their  attitude  towards  me ;  and  each 
and  all,  including  my  professional  brethren,  continued  heaping 
further  and  greater  manifestations  of  disapproval  upon  me.  Sug¬ 
gestions  were  not  infrequent  that  I  was  showing  some  indications 
of  a  disordered  mind,  due  to  my  proclivities  for  “ghost  hunting.” 
Others  who  had  ventured  to  make  investigations  as  to  both  of 
these  classes  of  phenomena,  feared  for  their  reputations,  and 
discontinued  them ;  while  some  of  the  self-wise  ones,  or  members 
of  the  clan,  would  sneeringly  allude  to  me,  and  were  guilty  of 
pseudology.  So  I  soon  found  myself  comparatively  alone;  but 
became  more  determined  than  ever  to  demonstrate  the  truth  or 
falsity  of  those  varied  hypnotic  and  spiritistic  phenomena  which 
were  claimed  by  the  few  to  be  verities,  which  my  intuitions  en¬ 
dorsed,  while  the  masses  who  embraced  orthodox  views  zvithout 
proof,  demonstration  or  even  enquiry,  as  true,  passed  judgment 
and  affirmed  that  such  phenomena  were  not  real,  and  were  im¬ 
possible,  or  else  creatures  of  imagination,  or  the  production  of 
fraud.  From  first  to  last  I  endeavored  to  be  consistent,  acting 
from  self-satisfying  integrity  of  motive.  I  felt  competent  to’ 
thwart  the  shafts  of  obliquity  aimed  from  all  sides  at  me.  I  was' 
honest  with  myself,  in  the  undertaking  I  had  engaged  in,  to  this 
extent  at  least,  that  while  not  discarding  the  faith  and  belief  of 
my  parents  and  ancestry,  which  I  still  possessed,  nevertheless 
with  hope  and  confidence,  I  sought  for  a  confirmation  of  the 
evidences,  which  presented  in  the  past,  and  are  recorded  among 
the  other  evidences  found  in  the  authoritatively  accepted  records 
of  the  old  and  new  Testaments. 

The  discovery  of  my  ability  to  commune  zvith  the  incarnate 
spirit  of  my  fellow  human  being,  an  instance  of  zvhich  is  found 
in  the  chapter  on  hypnotic  psychic  phenomena  (see  preceding 
chapter)  ;  and  the  establishment  in  my  mind  of  the  reasonable 
conjecture  or  intuition,  that  the  same  spirit  continued  in  existence 
after  dissolution  of  the  body  unimpaired,  became  one  of  my 
strongest  incentives  to  prosecute  my  investigations  after  the  spirit. 


56 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Ignoring  all  discouragements,  and  mostly  singly  and  alone  (save 
the  last  brief  years  when  my  wife  joined  me),  and  without  either 
donation,  endowment,  or  co-operation,  I  continued  my  investiga¬ 
tions  until  rewarded  by  the  spirit  guides,  that  led  me  to  discover 
the  brilliant  and  most  valued  “gem  of  truth,”  that  so  long  had 
been  hid  from  my  view. 

I  feel  that  this  is  the  right  place  to  recognize  all  those  who  have 
in  the  past  so  charitably  bestowed  their  sympathy  and  pity  upon 
their  brother,  (myself)  who  unlike  themselves,  was  not  content 
to  profit  solely  by  the  results  produced  by  the  physical  and  mental 
activity  of  others ;  and  who  having  accomplished  something  by 
his  investigations,  feels  amply  recompensed,  for  the  time  and 
energy  bestowed,  and  money  expended ;  and  thanks  them  for  the 
stimulus  which  their  attitude  towards  him  supplied;  and  in 
acknowledgement  of  its  influence  reciprocates,  by  first  demon¬ 
strating  what  he  has  accomplished ;  and  secondly  thanking  them 
for  the  undesigned  aid,  their  attitude  gave  him,  in  strengthening 
his  resolution  and  purpose. 

Upon  reflection  I  believe  it  will  be  found,  that  most  people  who 
are  in  search  of  new  or  primary  knowledge,  have  a  lonely  journey, 
and  often  a  long  one ;  but  above  all  an  unsympathetic  and  unaided 
one.  Some  there  are  ready  to  belittle  the  project;  others  will  dis¬ 
credit  the  projector;  while  the  many  exhibit  indifference,  or  ques¬ 
tion  the  wisdom  of  it.  “What  good  is  it?”  or  “What  good  will 
it  be?”  are  the  questions  one  frequently  hears.  Each  individual 
questioner  considering  it  from  his  own  point  of  view,  as  to 
whether  or  not  of  advantage  to  himself  personally. 

The  uninformed,  if  sincere  in  their  inquiry,  are  entitled  to  know 
something  of  the  purpose  of  psychical  research,  and  whether  or 
not  it  be  like  the  finger  post  on  the  highway  to  indicate  the  direc¬ 
tion  to  be  taken.  When  traveling  we  naturally  want  to  know 
something  of  the  terminus  from  the  finger  board ;  the  direction 
and  nature  of  the  road  may  be  indicated,  still  we  look  for  some 
one  who  is  familiar  with  the  locality,  and  can  inform  us  as  to 
details,  or  give  us  information  that  we  feel  is  necessary  to  guide 
us.  So  when  the  question  of  “What  good  is  it  all?”  was  pro¬ 
pounded  to  the  earliest  astronomer,  who  through  his  instruments 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


57 


and  various  devices  to  be  used,  was  peering  into  the  great  and 
boundless  ethereal  immensity  overhead ;  and  who  found  in  that  as 
yet  unknown  distant  location  bright  orbs,  planets  and  myriads  of 
stars,  he  could  only  say  he  was  investigating ;  and  after  lapse  of 
time  he  was  doubtless  asked  by  his  halting  fellow  men  “Now 
that  you  have  discovered  these,  what  good  is  it?”  He  probably 
looked  upon  his  interrogator,  and  answered  with  humility,  “I 
cannot  yet  inform  you.  I  am  only  started  in  my  investigations ; 
but  my  intuitions  and  hopes  are  meeting  with  encouragement, 
that  lead  to  a  belief  that  I  will  yet  reveal  the  answer  to  your 
question.”  We  have  lived  to  learn  in  our  school  day  acquirement 
of  knowledge,  that  the  relationship  of  those  orbs  or  suns,  even  | 
the  distant  planetary  systems,  have  not  only  their  local  uses,  but 
are  parts  of  one  stupendous  whole,  and  may  contribute  in  some 
measure  at  least,  to  the  conditions  of  existence  upon  our  little 
grain  of  earth,  designated  world,  which  is  a  mere  speck  among 
the  myriads  that  exist. 

Again  Christopher  Columbus,  the  great  explorer,  who  in  response 
to  his  intuitions  and  convictions,  sought  to  demonstrate  their 
reality,  at  first  met  with  great  opposition,  and  doubtless  the  ques¬ 
tion  oft’  repeated  “What  good  is  it?”  or  “You  don’t  know  where 
you’re  going,  or  where  you’ll  land”  was  offered  to  discourage 
his  proposed  undertaking  to  sail  out  upon  the  unknown  waters, 
in  search  of  unknown  land,  hoping  to  meet  unknown  people. 
Nevertheless,  in  his  isolation,  with  a  select  few  helpers  and  follow¬ 
ers,  he  started  with  intrepid  mien  upon  a  sea  whose  extent  he 
did  not  know,  but  craved  to  know,  until  his  reward  came,  after 
earnest  investigation,  in  the  discovery  of  a  mighty  continent, 
peopled  with  another  class  of  incarnate  spirits ;  and  doubtless 
with  a  soul-felt  satisfaction  to  himself,  on  his  return  proclaimed 
his  discoveries  for  the  benefit  of  his  fellow  men,  and  the  “good  of 
it”  has  since  developed. 

In  more  recent  times  it  may  be  noted  that  Franklin,  the  kite¬ 
flying  investigator  of  the  air,  discovered  within  the  limits  of  his 
kite  line,  the  existence  of  electricity.  Those  who  were  his  ques¬ 
tioners  then,  as  some  would  be  today  with  their  self-limited  wis¬ 
dom,  inquired  “Now  that  you  have  found  out  by  your  kite  flying 


5S 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


that  there  is  electricity  in  the  air,  what  good  is  it  ?  —  God  created 
it  for  some  purpose  of  His  own,  and  you  should  not  try  to  find 
out  God’s  secrets.”  The  epoch  of  time  —  limited  on  the  one  hand 
by  Franklin  and  his  experimental  investigations,  and  on  the  other 
by  the  electrical  wizard  Edison,  and  Marconi  the  incarnate  spirit, 
who  not  only  sends  invisible  messages  from  continent  to  con¬ 
tinent,  from  a  distributor  to  a  receiver,  but  sends  them  through 
an  invisible  medium,  capable  of  various  degrees  of  vibrating 
motion,  the  possibility  of  which  was  questioned  only  a  very  few 
years  ago  by  men  of  science, — is  but  brief.  Co-existent  with  these 
are  other  almost  equally  notable  electrical  wizards,  who  are  still 
engaged  in  the  work  of  investigation ;  and  who  have  developed 
the  vast  treasures  of  utility,  not  only  in  the  air,  but  everywhere 
in  creation,  a  power  which  is  universally  recognized  and 
appreciated. 

Whatsoever  the  position  and  place  assigned  to  individualized 
humanity  on  the  earth  plane,  to  each  and  all  the  question  of  the 
soul’s  future  state,  as  being  applicable  to  all,  is  the  greatest  ques¬ 
tion,  and  of  the  first  and  most  momentous  importance  to  the 
individual,  of  any  question  hitherto  presented  to  the  human  mind, 
for  the  reason  that  its  individual  creation  is  the  result  of  the 
Infinite’s  design,  and  for  a  purpose. 

The  question  of  salvation,  irrespective  of  plan  or  source  of 
exposition,  is  one  which  mortal  man  is  naturally  directly  interested 
in,  has  belief  in,  and  has  faith  that  provision  exists  for  his  in¬ 
clusion.  Then  what  more  natural  to  man  than  a  desire  to  be 
absolutely  sure  without  any  misgivings,  that  his  belief  and  faith 
are  well  founded?  What  more  natural  and  what  more  justifiable 
than  to  think  of  the  hereafter,  and  to  question  within  one’s  own 
conscious  self  whether  his  faith  and  belief  fully  coincide  with  the 
occasional  intuitions  which  appear  to  have  contact  with  his  reason, 
and  from  time  to  time  impress  it.  And  further,  what  more  natural 
when  placing  the  lifeless  remains  of  parents,  brothers,  sisters, 
husband,  wife,  children,  one  by  one,  in  their  tenement  of  cold 
clay,  than  to  raise  the  thoughts  from  the  perishable,  now  deposited, 
to  the  imperishable  ego,  the  individual  personality  or  soul  con¬ 
taining  life,  which  has  taken  departure  from  the  physical  to  — 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


59 


where?  And  to  question  self  whether  that  is  the  final  parting 
from  our  loved  ones,  or  whether  we  shall  again  meet  them  in  the 
“sweet  bye-and-bye  ?”  Or  whether  it  be  true  that  they  are  the  angels 
hovering  'round;  or  whether  there  be  continuity  of  family  life, 
and  association  in  spirit  realms? 

The  limitation  yean  of  the  allotted  span  of  three  score  years 
and  ten,  together  with  added  years  by  reason  of  strength,  covering 
infancy,  childhood,  youth  and  manhood,  should  be  a  period  of 
life  offering  vantage  ground,  physically,  mentally,  and  spiritually, 
to  one  in  the  fullest  enjoyment  of  physical  and  mental  health  and 
strength,  for  investigation,  weighing  of  evidence,  reflection,  and 
self-preparation  for  that  approaching  time,  be  the  years  few  or 
many,  when  we  shall  know  our  destiny.  It  should  at  least  prevent 
a  thoughtless  indifferent  attitude,  on  any  question  pertaining  to 
each  individual  unit  in  the  universe,  and  more  especially  on  the 
most  important  question  to  which  any  human  being  can  give  con¬ 
templation,  the  question  of  final  destination,  and  the  purpose  or 
object  of  his  individual  existence. 

If  scientists  and  learned  men  are  justified  in  their  inquiry  into 
the  origin,  growth  and  development  of  human  life,  and  who  can 
deny  their  right,  then  am  I  and  others  not  also  as  fully  justified 
in  our  enquiry  into  life’s  continuity,  and  true  destination? 

In  other  words  it  is  recognized  as  legitimate  to  study  conditions 
past,  present  and  future,  of  earth,  air  and  sea;  and  so  I  claim 
it  is  quite  as  legitimate  to  learn  what  we  can  of  man  in  both  time 
and  eternity.  It  would  seem  unreasonable,  useless,  and  folly  that 
I  should  have  ever  had  an  individual  existence  if  death  of  the 
body  ends  all. 

If  there  be  no  other  answer  to  the  question  of  “What  is  the 
good  of  psychic  investigation?”  or  more  properly  speaking  “What 
is  the  good  or  benefit  of  finding  out  that  you  can  commune  with 
spirits?”  I  affirm  that  if  for  no  other  reason,  this  is  not  only 
my  answer,  but  my  justification.  .  .  .  After  I  had  proved  by 
my  investigations,  that  my  loved  ones,  who  are  discarnate  spirits, 
can  come  to  me  on  thought  waves,  or  by  soul  power,  and  by  the 
aid  of  mediums,  and  have  come,  as  sworn  testimony  declares  in 
following  pages  of  the  book,  not  once  but  repeatedly  by  aid  of 


60 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


guides  and  different  mediums  or  instruments,  not  in  a  single 
instance,  but  through  one  phase  and  instrument  (or  medium),  viz. : 
a  trumpet  phase  and  medium  in  one  place ;  a  materializing  phase 
and  medium  in  another;  and  through  a  human-psychic-telephone 
and  automatic  medium  in  a  third ;  and  proved  and  doubly  proved 
their  identity,  and  established  their  personality  in  each  case  by 
tests  agreed  upon  during  life,  thus  proving  the  truth;  it  must 
needs  be  to  me  and  to  others  a  solace  and  a  comfort,  and  enhance 
my  personal  happiness  during  my  remaining  years,  to  know  I 
can  reunite  with  those  loved  ones  who  have  passed  out  of  the 
physical  body,  and  into  higher,  purer,  nobler  realms  where  they 
claim  they  have  found  themselves  in  a  more  perfect  condition  of 
being,  with  environment  and  occupation  best  suited  to  their  sev¬ 
eral  existences ;  where  harmony  and  progression  are  stated  to  be 
of  Heaven’s  eternal  laws,  and  can  and  do,  with  favorable  condi¬ 
tions  existing,  commune  with  me ;  and  we  will  be  enabled,  each 
one  of  us,  eventually  to  fulfil  the  future  mission  of  our  continued 
existence  as  a  unit  ego,  in  the  great  illimitable  universe. 

It  is  my  desire  to  have  it  well  understood  that  I  am.  not  taking 
issue  with,  nor  trying  to  controvert  the  attitude  assumed  by,  nor 
discriminate  against  those  who  are  wholly  satisfied  with  faith  and 
belief  alone,  however  much  they  fail  to  agree  in  details ;  but  that 
I  clearly  and  definitely  state  that  my  investigations  have  been 
pursued  for  fully  twenty-five  years,  with  a  view  to  demonstrating 
my  intuitions  and  belief  to  be  true.  I  have  presented  circum¬ 
stantial  evidence  in  the  foregoing  chapters ;  and  am  presenting 
direct  evidence  as  addressed  to  the  senses  and  conscious  under¬ 
standing,  in  the  chapters  to  follow,  which  I  claim  established  their 
personality  in  each  case  by  tests  agreed  upon  in  life,  thus  proving 
beyond  all  cavil  in  the  special  individual  cases  at  least,  not  only 
continuity  of  life,  but  spirit  return  and  spirit  communion;  and 
these  special  cases  establish  the  probability  of  a  general  applica¬ 
tion  of  the  claim.  In  this  connection  I  may  say  the  combination 
of  the  old  and  new  Testament,  commonly  known  as  the  Bible, 
apparently  abounds  in  records  of  all  phases  of  psychical  phenom¬ 
ena.  These  evidences  are  either  true  or  false.  Old  orthodoxy  in 
its  several  organizations  affirms  and  proclaims  them  all  to  have 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


61 


been  true  at  the  time.  If  biblical  psychic  manifestations  are 
accepted  now  by  faith  and  belief  as  facts,  why  should  not  psychic 
manifestations  at  the  present  time  be  so  accepted?  And  if  not, 
what  reason  exists  for  objecting  to  psychical  research  or  investiga¬ 
tion  to  ascertain  the  truth?  If  these  manifestations  were  facts  in 
bible  times  ( and  I  do  not  take  issue  with  orthodoxy  on  that  con¬ 
tention)  how  can  orthodoxy  deny  the  possibility  in  our  day  and 
generation  of  similar  natural  psychic  occurrences  as  those  of  by¬ 
gone  times  ?  Natural  law  does  not  cease  to  exist  at  the  dictum  of 
Ecclesiastical  or  any  other  earthly  authority,  and  hence  still  exists, 
and  is  quite  as  real  now  as  it  could  have  been  then.  It  would 
almost  seem  as  if  some  persons  were  fearful  lest  some  alleged 
facts  should  be  proven  by  research  methods  to  be  true;  or  on  the 
other  hand  that  other  alleged  facts  shoidd  be  disproven. 

On  entering  upon  my  investigation  I  determined  that  I  could, 
as  any  careful  discerning  person  could,  detect  and  expose  fraud 
if  it  existed.  The  more  minutely  careful  I  became  in  the  Moss 
series  of  investigations,  the  more  I  was  baffled.  I  always  had  a 
belief  or  conviction,  that  spirits  might  still  return,  but  spirit  com¬ 
munion  with  earth  folk  appeared  to  be  more  or  less  improbable. 
My  belief  in  the  last  respect  was  wrong,  as  has  many  a  time  been 
proved,  not  only  in  my  case,  but  in  the  case  of  very  many  others. 

Knowledge  More  Valuable  Than  Belief 

Where  is  the  man  or  woman  who  having  attained  maturity  has 
not  often  noted  the  death  and  burial  of  a  belief  long  cherished? 
Let  any  one  look  back  over  their  life’s  record.  They  will  find 
in  it  many,  very  many  changes  of  opinion  or  belief ;  and  in  some 
instances  direct  reversals  of  former  beliefs.  What  has  brought 
it  about  ?  Knowledge  gained.  Let  me  give  illustrations  applicable 
to  a  generation  or  two  ago.  What  would  our  grandparents  have 
said  if  they  had  been  told  that  by  the  aid  of  electricity  messages 
would  be  sent  from  Washington  to  Paris,  France;  or  from 
Toronto  to  London,  England,  after  breakfast;  and  an  answer 
received  back  before  dinner ;  when  it  had  taken  these  same  grand¬ 
parents  six  to  eight  weeks  to  make  their  trip  across  the  Atlantic  in 


62 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


a  sailing  vessel?  If  we  had  heard  their  reply,  would  it  not  most 
likely  have  been,  “ridiculous,  because  it  is  impossible.’’ 

In  my  own  mundane  experiences,  like  others  whom  I  have 
known,  early  beliefs  or  disbeliefs  have  later  been  proven  wrong 
by  knowledge  gained.  The  cable  and  telegraph  enable  us  at  the 
present  time  to  communicate  with  others  successfully ;  yet  time 
and  demonstration  were  required  by  their  discoverers  and  pro¬ 
moters,  before  they  were  able  to  overcome  disbelief  in  their  possi¬ 
bilities,  with  absolute  knowledge. 

So  also  in  the  case  of  Stephenson  the  Engineer,  who  first 
harnessed  steam.  Disbelief  and  ridicule  were  expressed  freely  by 
his  countrymen,  when  he  claimed  he  had  invented  an  engine  and 
discovered  how  he  could  propel  it  by  steam.  But  he  proved  his 
assertions  to  be  true.  The  present  day  universality  of  its  applica¬ 
tion  as  a  world-wide  utility,  in  a  great  variety  of  ways,  truly 
demonstrates  it,  for  steam  as  a  wonderful  power,  on  a  small  scale, 
as  well  as  in  the  stupendous  engines,  and  mighty  machinery 
operating  in  all  civilized  lands,  or  in  the  floating  fortresses,  or 
superdreadnoughts  on  all  seas,  thus  proves  the  original,  or  former 
existing  belief  unreliable,  when  knowledge,  from  demonstration 
and  observation,  was  in  the  same  countrymen’s  possession. 

Many  a  person  a  few  years  ago*,  hearing  it  said  that  they  could 
stand  at  one  end  of  a  wire,  fifty,  a  hundred,  or  five  hundred  miles 
in  length,  and  speak  into  an  instrument  attached  to  the  wire,  called 
a  telephone,  ask  for  and  directly  hold  converse  with  an  acquaintance 
or  friend  at  the  other  end  of  the  wire,  and  clearly  distinguish, 
not  only  the  language,  but  the  very  characteristics  of  the  voice  and 
peculiarity  of  expression  beyond  any  doubt,  would  have  shaken 
his  wise  head,  indicating  his  ripe  unbelief  of  the  assertion,  and 
had  a  clear  conviction  or  belief  that  such  a  result  was  certainly 
impossible  for  many  reasons,  which  were  readily  offered.  Time 
brought  with  it  practical  experience.  Investigation  established 
the  truth,  hence  that  belief  has  had,  along  with  many  other  beliefs, 
its  death  and  burial.  What  caused  its  death?  Knowledge. 

In  more  recent  years  marconigrams  were  pronounced  by  scien¬ 
tists  as  impracticable  or  impossible,  for  they  considered  it  quite 
impossible  to  send  messages  across  the  ocean  without  a  wire ;  but 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


63 


that  belief  has  also  been  disposed  of  by  the  succeeding  universal 
knowledge  that  wireless  messages  are  passing  to  and  fro  in  all 
directions,  over  both  land  and  sea. 

Well  and  truly  has  Edison  been  designated  “wizard,”  because 
of  the  various  electrical  accomplishments  he  brought  into  existence. 
How  could  anyone  previously  thereto  conceive  it  possible  to  per¬ 
fectly  reproduce  a  “record”  for  preservation  and  future  rendition 
of  the  human  voice,  in  the  speech  of  a  great  statesman,  or  the 
song  of  a  vocal  artist,  when  no  person  as  yet  had  been  able  with 
the  best  endeavor  to  perfectly  repeat  or  duplicate  either,  with  like 
voice,  tone  and  rendition,  for  even  a  brief  few  minutes,  in  the 
presence  and  judgment  of  a  competent  critic ;  and  would  not 
such  disbelief  seem  well  founded  until  knowledge  of  Edison’s 
demonstration  disproved  that  attitude? 

Likewise  in  the  case  of  wireless  telephone,  moving  pictures 
and  many  other  discoveries,  how  easily  knowledge  dethrones 
previous  belief,  or  disbelief. 

If  we  examine 'ourselves  wo  find  that  our  thoughts  and  beliefs 
have  undergone  wonderful  change,  from  our  childhood  beliefs 
to  our  adult  knowledge,  in  very  many  instances,  as  for  example 
the  toy  balloon,  held  captive  by  a  string  in  our  youth,  if  allowed 
to  escape,  was  carried  higher  in  the  air,  and  blown  far  away  by 
the  wind ;  but  then  we  believed  its  only  use  was  for  amusement, 
and  could  never  be  of  practical  utility,  for  air-ships  could  never 
carry  passengers  and  navigate  the  air  as  ships  upon  the  water  do ; 
and  yet  only  a  little  while  ago  a  score  or  more  people  in  a  single 
airship  are  reported  as  riding  through  the  air.  Knowledge  brought 
that  airship  to  a  perfection  which  enabled  it  to  go  hundreds  of 
miles  at  a  velocity  doubling  the  speed  of  a  railway  train.  When 
the  youth  reached  manhood  his  thoughts  and  beliefs  became 
altogether  changed,  for  from  the  toy  has  been  developed  airships 
propelled  by  machinery,  while  some  of  them  have  changed  to 
dreadnoughts  and  other  warships  comprising  fleets,  which  engage 
in  warfare  with  other  fleets  in  the  air,  or  on  the  sea  as  well  as 
with  earth’s  armies  below  them.  So  also  knowledge,  the  outcome 
of  investigation,  has  enabled  men  to  construct  boats  for  warfare 
of  such  utility  that  their  destructive  power  can  be  employed  by 


64 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


trained  men  within  them,  while  in  action  on  the  surface  of  the 
ocean,  or  to  escape  destruction  by  the  enemy,  by  diving  beneath 
the  surface  for  a  definite  time  and  escape  pursuit,  or  even  pursue 
the  small  boat,  or  that  laden  with  human  freight,  and  even  attack 
the  greatest  dreadnought  of  war,  and  from  its  own  submarine 
nearness  deal  that  monster  a  wound  sufficient  to  sink  it. 

These  foregoing  phenomenal  demonstrations  of  fact  have  been 
given  during  the  world’s  greatest  war.  Belief  in  their  possibility 
would  have  been  discredited  or  considered  chimerical,  not  many 
years  ago,  but  at  present  day  everybody  knows  it  is  so.  Here 
again  present  knowledge  supersedes  in  value  previous  belief  enter¬ 
tained  in  the  same  human  lifetime. 

In  this  volume  is  presented  some  of  the  many  evidences  which 
I  have  discovered  and  which  I  present  as  absolutely  true,  after 
many  exacting  and  repeated  tests  and  confirmations  through  dif¬ 
ferent  mediums  of  varied  phases ;  and  I  am  able  therefore  to  claim 
with  full  confidence,  that  notwithstading  any  or  many  disbeliefs 
or  declarations  that  what  I  offer  the  reader  as  truth  is  fiction, 
imagination,  deception,  fraudulent  or  impossible  of  realization,  I 
am  quite  as  sure  of  the  results  attained  alone,  and  also  in  the 
presence  of  credible  witnesses,  from  knowledge  secured  that 
continuity  of  the  life  of  the  human  spirit  ego,  return  of  the  same 
to  earth,  and  communication  with  those  in  attunement  with  them 
is  all  true,  as  I  am  of  my  own  existence.  From  past  personal 
experience  I  now  can  state  that  it  is  easy  for  self-wise  men,  yet 
ignorant  of  psychic  facts,  to  refer  to  those  who  know  the  truth 
and  credit  them  with  suspected  gullibility  in  entertaining  as 
feasible  communication  between  spirits  and  humans.  Doubting 
Thomases  still  continue  numerous,  even  though  scientists  and 
psychical  investigators  in  all  lands  are  establishing  psychic  facts 
as  truly  as  any  other  natural  law.  Psychical  phenomena  were  com¬ 
mon  in  ancient  times,  and  were  recorded  in  the  sacred  book,  and 
accepted  as  true;  though  modern  creedists  exclude  them  from 
their  present  teachings  without  endorsing  or  condemning  them 
or  even  admitting  their  modern  existence. 

I  am  one,  however,  who  dares  to  proclaim  the  "Dawn  of  the 
Awakened  Mind” ;  and  am  convinced  we  are  at  the  beginning  of 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


65 


a  New  Era,  when  spiritual  knowledge  will  prevail,  and  spiritual 
power  and  influence  will  reign  supreme;  then  error  and  false 
belief  will  give  place  to  knowledge. 


CHAPTER  XI 


Critics  of  every  kind  and  grade,  find  it  almost  impossible 
to  approach  the  question  of  psychic  demonstration  with¬ 
out  bias ;  and  hence  their  mental  sight  is  impaired,  and 
their  judgment  perverted,  when  they  encounter  truth  which  they 
do  not  want  to  find.  Psychics  by  inference  as  well  as  by  affirma¬ 
tion  are  classified  by  unbelievers  as  fraudulent  or  hysterical,  and 
darkness  aids  their  deception.  Critics  ask,  “Why  are  conditions 
made  to  favor  the  fraudulent?”  “Why  are  they  not  such,  and  so?” 
I  am  prepared  to  admit  that  fraud  or  deceit  seeks  to  pass  as 
genuine  sometimes  in  a  seance  room ;  and  sometimes  in  nearly 
every  other  group  of  persons ;  but  even  so,  it  gives  value  to  the 
genuine. 

One  must  of  necessity,  when  proceeding  with  an  analysis  of 
any  particular  phenomenon,  and  more  especially  when  attempting 
to  account  for  its  existence  by  some  definite  hypothesis,  well 
consider  certain  features  in  each  case,  which  attain  to  a  position 
demanding  at  least  the  best  thought  of  the  unbiased  and  impartial 
investigator.  This  holds  good  in  the  highest  degree,  especially 
in  considering  the  spiritual  hypothesis,  as  we  cannot  readily  cite 
acceptable  examples  outside  of  those  recorded  in  the  Bible  and 
Testament  writings,  which  by  general  consent  as  well  as  by 
authority,  are  designated  inspired  writings. 

Is  it  not  somewhat  presumptuous  for  a  man,  whose  capabilities 
are  very  limited,  and  whose  powers  at  best  are  small,  to  formulate 
conditions  for  spirit  communication,  and  expect  spirit  forces  to 
act  in  harmony  in  producing  the  best  results,  while  thus  prevented 
through  the  ignorance  of  the  human,  from  demonstrating  in  the 
best,  or  perhaps  the  only  way  ?  As  well  might  one  expect  to  hear 
the  choicest  music  from  an  instrument,  capable  in  the  highest 
degree  of  producing  perfect  harmony  of  sounds,  for  the  cultured 
ear,  after  a  mechanic  had  changed  the  keys,  wires  or  tubes,  with 
a  desire  to  test  the  player,  and  hear  whether  he  could  now  so 
play,  as  to  prove  himself  a  music  artist. 

66 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


67 


The  difficulty  in  dealing  with  the  spiritualistic  hypothesis  is  due 
to  our  lack  of  knowledge  of  the  conditions  necessary  to  the  pro¬ 
duction  of  what  is  designated  spiritual  phenomena.  When  con¬ 
ditions  necessary  are  present,  the  phenomena  are  successfully 
presented.  If  the  necessary  conditions  are  not  present,  there  will 
be  no  spiritistic  phenomena.  The  conditions  essential  must  in  the 
natural  order  of  things  be  harmonious.  In  a  seance  a  skeptic,  or 
strong  opponent  of  spiritualism,  or  one  who  asserts  that  the  in¬ 
habitants  of  the  spirit  realms  cannot  by  spirit  form  or  in  any  other 
way,  present  themselves  to  a  single  individual,  in  the  seance, 
composed  of  few  or  many,  by  such  attitude  supplies  the  ingredient 
called  discord,  which  destroys  harmony,  and  likewise  destroys  all 
chance  of  contributing  conditions  so  essential  to  the  production 
of  successful  phenomena.  To  illustrate  my  meaning,  take  the 
perfect  or  phenomenal  production  of  Verdi’s  Requiem  by  the  two 
hundred  and  thirty  members  of  the  Toronto  Mendelssohn  Choir 
in  New  York  City,  which  a  representative  musician  considered 
so  successful,  that  no  chorus  in  that  city  at  that  time  could  hope 
to  rival  its  achievement;  and  allow  that  only  two  per  cent,  of 
discordant  voices  were  heard  in  that  same  choir,  still  it  would 
have  destroyed  all  possibility  of  such  a  result  as  was  demonstrated 
according  to  the  witness  who  spoke  his  authoritative  judgment. 

But  no  matter  what  hypothesis  we  may  select  to  account  for  the 
production  of  the  phenomena,  we  must  in  all  fairness  admit  that 
certain  conditions  must  exist  in  order  to  obtain  certain  results. 
The  importance  of  giving  further  consideration  to  this  question 
will  doubtless  be  recognized.  The  relations  existing  between 
conditions  and  results  is  that  of  a  permanent  equation.  No  matter 
what  the  equation  represents,  it  will  be  found  that  its  parts  bear 
harmonious  and  perfect  relationship  the  one  to  the  other.  Let 
us  both  reflect  and  investigate,  that  we  may  intelligently  establish 
the  verity  or  falsity  of  this  claim. 

Will  it  not  be  admitted  that  the  success  or  failure  of  everything 
in  our  everyday  human  experience  of  results,  is  conceded  to  be 
dependent  upon  conditions?  Everything  in  nature  and  in  art, 
presents  different  results,  or  different  aspects,  under  different  con¬ 
ditions.  An  abundant  harvest  of  grain  is  conditional  upo»  richness 


68 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  soil,  suitable  cultivation,  good  healthy  matured  seed,  sown  or 
planted  at  a  favorable  time  in  advantageous  location,  with  soil 
suitably  drained,  sufficient  heat  and  moisture,  sunshine  and  dark¬ 
ness.  If  the  conditions  are  not  favorable,  poor  crops  or  no  crops 
is  the  result.  A  grain  of  corn  or  wheat  may  have  remained  a 
century  or  longer  in  an  hermetically  sealed  jar,  —  and  it  would 
neither  grow  nor  decay.  Take  such  a  grain  out,  and  plant  it  in 
the  soil,  so  that  it  may  have  the  advantages  of  the  already  named 
conditions,  and  in  the  course  of  a  very  short  time,  “In  the  silence” 
and  “in  the  dark,”  its.  spirit  energy  promotes  its  physical  unfold- 
ment,  and  it  begins  the  attainment  of  certain  results,  which  were 
unattainable  without  the  favorable  conditions.  It  reaches  for 
sustenance,  and  growth  is  attained,  and  reproduction  follows. 
In  the  air-tight  jar  there  were  no  conditions  favorable  to  growth, 
and  hence  no  results  of  growth.  The  conditions  have  everything 
to  do  with  results,  in  the  quality  or  perfection  sought,  by  the 
careful  selection  and  mate-ing  in  the  inbreeding  for  perfec¬ 
tion  of  animals.  Favorable  conditions,  under  natural  laws,  are 
essential  in  every  chemical  action.  In  such  action  when  certain 
results  are  desired,  certain  conditions  must  exist.  If  the  strings 
or  wires  of  a  musical  instrument  are  not  properly  attuned,  discord 
of  sounds  rather  than  music  results.  All  the  conditions  must  be 
favorable  to  insure  success.  In  the  case  of  anticipated  conversa¬ 
tion  with  a  friend  far  or  near,  by  means  of  a  telephone,  the 
slightest  impairment  of  the  essential  conditions,  prevents  the  result 
naturally  desired.  Specific  knowledge,  therefore,  is  necessary  to 
provide  the  essential  conditions,  to  secure  the  favorable,  or  in 
this  instance,  the  desired  results.  In  many  cases,  given  the  con¬ 
ditions  fully,  our  experience  will  enable  us  to  predict  results ; 
and  vice  versa,  the  results  being  known  to  us,  we  may  from  our 
habits  of  investigation,  premise  what  the  conditions  were. 
While  this  is  true  to  a  limited  extent,  and  with  reference  to 
matters  pertaining  to  the  limitations  of  practical  experience,  it  is 
because  man  has  learned  the  operation  of  many  natural  laws ; 
and  works  along  the  line  of  his  knowledge  of,  and  experience 
with  such  natural  law.  When  man  runs  counter  to  such  laws 
or  seeks  to  create  results  by  attempting  to  make  conditions  which 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


69 


are  out  of  harmony  with  natural  law,  he  fails  to  create  or  produce 
the  results. 

We  may  fairly  assume  that  although  physical  life  has  a  beginning 
and  an  ending  on  the  physical  plane,  that  individualized  spiritual  life 
begins  cotemporaneously  with  the  physical,  as  an  evolvement  from 
the  Infinite  Spirit  energy,  and  varies  in  degree  of  unfoldment  of 
abilities  in  not  only  races  of  men,  but  in  the  individuals  of  any 
race,  which  unfoldment  is  progressive  and  ever  continuous;  and 
hence  the  individual  accumulates  knowledge  from  experience  in 
the  physical  body ;  and  subsequently  from  spiritual  sources  when 
disembodied. 

Now  with  reference  to  spiritual  phenomena,  or  results  of  cer¬ 
tain  first  causes  and  favorable  conditions,  man  who  is  still  in 
bondage  to  ecclesiasticism,  naturally  denies  their  origin  and  insists 
upon  making  his  own  conditions ;  and  with  an  absence  of  the 
results,  proves  to  his  own  satisfaction,  that  he  has  definitely 
established  the  existence  of  fraud  or  deceit ;  or  on  the  other  hand, 
shown  what  was  claimed  as  fact,  to  be  impossible.  As  well  might 
we  expect  rapturous,  soul-stirring  music  from  a  large  choir,  which 
included  a  few  voices  ignorant  of  the  music,  and  wholly  out  of 
harmony  with  the  others,  as  to  expect  successful  spiritual  phenom¬ 
ena  to  present  to  a  circle  of  friends,  in  whose  midst  there  were 
several  .who  objected  to  the  existing  conditions,  who  charged  the 
medium  with  trying  to  practice  fraud,  and  who  put  themselves  in 
an  antagonistic  frame  of  mind,  thus  contributing  discord,  which 
would  break  up  harmonious  vibrations. 

The  skeptics’  questions  have  been  so  long  utilized  that  they 
are  universally  familar,  viz. :  Why  do  these  phenomena  occur  in 
the  dark?  Why  don’t  they  occur  in  a  well  lighted  room,  or  in 
daylight,  anywhere,  at  any  time,  whether  there  is  a  medium  or 
not?  The  inference  sought  to  be  established  is  that  darkness'  is 
preferred  to  enable  deception  to  be  practised.  Well  and  profitably 
might  the  skeptical  questioners!  take  time  to  reflect,  to  ascertain 
whether  it  may  not  be,  and  probably  is  a  fact,  that  darkness  con¬ 
tributes  most  advantageously  to  conditions  favoring  the  operation 
of  natural  laws;  and  that  this  is  almost,  if  not  quite  universally 
true  in  nature;  and  that  investigation  will  lead  to  the  discovery. 


70 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


that  it  is  a  law  of  nature  that  conception,  occurs  in  the  stillness 
or  quietude  and  in  darkness ;  and  the  young  of  the  human  race 
and  of  animals,  have  their  beginning,  formation,  development  and 
spirit  influx,  in  the  stillness  and  darkness  of  the  womb  till  ripe 
for  birth.  The  same  conditions  and  stillness  are  included  among 
the  necessary  conditions  for  the  grain  and  seed  to  result  in  growth 
and  reproduction  of  their  kind,  as  I  have  already  pointed  out. 
The  conditions  of  life,  whether  animal  or  vegetable,  would  fail 
to  be  perpetuated,  were  it  not  a  law  of  Infinite  Wisdom,  which  is 
another  name  for  Law  of  Nature,  to  permit  rest  in  order  to 
recuperate  energy.  Continuous  condition  of  sunshine,  or  con¬ 
tinuous  condition  of  darkness,  without  interruption,  would  pro¬ 
duce  disastrous  results ;  as  much  so  as  would  continuous  heat,  or 
continuous  cold ;  continuous  drouth,  or  continuous  rain.  With  a 
multiplicity  of  human  experiences  in  the  darkness  and  in  the  light, 
with  every  known  precaution  against  fraud,  by  the  clear-headed, 
cautious,  intelligent  investigators,  as  well  as  scientists  of  the 
highest  standing,  to  prevent  fraud,  to  discover  truth,  the  most 
wonderful  phenomena  continue  to  be  recorded  from  time  to  time; 
and  still  the  skeptic  enquires,  “Why  can’t  these  phenomena  be 
produced  without  the  presence  of  a  medium?”  Our  answer  is, 
for  the  same  reason  that  electricity  cannot  be  utilized  without 
suitable  conditions  and  a  medium ;  or  the  heat  and  light  from  the 
sun  cannot  be  received  and  appropriated  by  our  earth  except  there 
be  essential  conditions,  and  a  medium  of  communication ;  or  the 
daily  events  of  the  civilized  world  cannot  be  collated  and  spread 
before  our  eyes  in  the  daily  newspaper,  without  a  variety  of 
essential  conditions,  and  a  medium,  —  the  printing  press.  Neither 
can  you  use  your  ‘phone  successfully  without  a  central!  office,  to 
connect  you  with  the  ’phone  you  want. 

While  human  beings  may  seem  ordinarily  able  to  control  the 
conditions,  in  order  to  bring  about  certain  results,  it  must  not  be 
forgotten,  that  all  conditions  must  have  for  their  existence,  and 
all  results  for  their  attainment,  some  governing  influence;  and 
that  everything  that  is,  even  life  itself,  and  its  continuance,  must 
be  in  accord  with  the  intention  and  will  of  the  Infinite  Spirit  or 
first  cause,  which  is  an  All-seeing,  All-wise,  Everywhere  present. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


71 


All-powerful  energy,  and  utilizes  its  own  conditions  for  producing 
spiritual  phenomena.  And  is  it  not  a  reasonable  conclusion  that 
the  Infinite  form  and  existence  is  Universal  Spirit,  permeating 
all  things,  developing  its  innumerable  conditions,  and  manifesta¬ 
tions  of  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  and  more  or  less 
latent,  so  far  as  we  can  judge  in  the  mineral  kingdom ;  in  fact, 
in  all  matter  of  whatsoever  kind  and  form?  How  else  can  it  be 
that  regularity  is  everywhere  constant  in  the  various  processes  of 
nature,  even  in  the  molecular  arrangement  of  so-termed  inanimate 
matter?  Latent  energy  has  a  source.  Does  not  the  molecular 
action  in  chemical  changes  prove  the  presence  of  a  hitherto  latent 
energy,  or  force  dependent  on  something  more  than  mere  chance 
for  its  manifestation?  It  is  a  calculable  condition,  with  an  effect 
or  result,  of  something  regular  in  its  purpose,  and  so  regular  as 
to  be  termed  a  natural  law?  And  if  it  be  a  law,  there  must  be  a 
law-maker ;  and  the  power  of  the  law-maker  must  be  in  contact 
with  every  ultimate  molecular  portion  of  that  which  is  effected 
by  it.  Does  it  not  occur  to  the  mind  that  it  is  probably  the  correct 
conclusion,  that  in  the  molecular  disposition  of  power,  primitive 
power,  we  have  the  Universal  Spirit  or  Infinite  Intelligent  Energy? 
Where  else  shall  we  look  for  the  power?  And  is  not  our  spirit 
entity,  a  partaker  in  some  measure  of  the  attributes  of  the  Infinite 
and  Universal  Spirit?  Is  not  the  spirit  portion'of  our  individual 
existence  working  upon  every  molecular  portion  of  our  physical 
personality  an  understandable  condition  ?  How  else  shall  we  com¬ 
prehend  the  physical  functions  of  the  body,  such  as  digestion, 
assimilation,  secretion,  circulation,  development  or  growth  and 
decay,  none  of  which  are  under  the  control  of  the  organism,  nor 
amenable  to  the  objective  or  physical  senses?  If  the  brain  organ¬ 
ism  or  machine  operates,  it  does  so  as  the  result  of  some  power, 
in  the  same  way  that  the  engine  propels  the  machinery  of  a  large 
factory,  but  only  when  the  power,  whether  electricity  or  steam, 
(in  man  the  incarnate  spirit  acting  through  the  objective  or  sub¬ 
jective  mind),  is  applied  to  its  working.  And  is  it  not  a  reasonable 
conclusion  to  arrive  at,  that  the  spiritual  part  of  our  existence 
is  from  the  Infinite  ?  And  a  portion  of  his  Universal  Spirit ,  and 
should  have,  to  some  extent  at  least,  the  attribute  of  ability  to 


72 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


utilize  the  physical  part  of  our  existence  for  its  present  purposes, 
though  not  able  by  the  physical  senses  tO'  comprehend,  or  at  least 
to  control,  such  as  I  have  mentioned  ?  INIost  pheiromena  ultimately 
come  to  be  viewed  as  the  result  of  the  operation  of  natural  laws, 
and  it  appears  reasonably  probable,  and  at  least  undeniable,  that 
all  operations  in  nature,  animate  and  inanimate,  as  ordinarily 
classified,  are  in  accord  with  natural  laws ;  if  we  had  the  knowl¬ 
edge  and  wisdom  to  understand  them.  If  our  spirit  entity  has 
the  power  to  control,  through  the  subjective  mind,  outside  of 
our  ordinary  consciousness,  the  various  functions  and  processes 
above  alluded  to  in  the  body  in  which  it  governs,  why  should  it 
be  difficult  for  that  same  spirit,  when  freed  from  the  confines  of 
the  physical  body,  to  control  molecules  of  matter  and  accumulate 
energy,  and  form  a  likeness  to  that  body ;  and  to  utilize  for  the 
time  being  the  body  so  formed?  Or  again,  what  is  to  prevent 
that  disembodied  spirit  exerting  influence  on  the  embodied  spirit 
of  another?  In  those  suggested  conditions,  we  have  what 
spiritualists  term  materialization  and  spirit  control. 

The  human  mind  can  comprehend  that  evolution  of  man  as  a 
duality  (body  and  spirit)  is  for  somd  wise  purpose;  and  that  the 
embodiment  of  the  spirit,  for  a  term  of  earthly  experience,  the 
better  fits  the  spirit  for  its  subsequent  development  and  participa¬ 
tion  in  some  of  the  attributes  of  the  universal  and  All-wise  Spirit 
power.  Where  there  is  life  there  is  evolution,  and  in  the  case  of 
the  human  life  there  is  continuity  of  life  for  the  real  ego;  and 
the  Infinite  utilizes  the  spirit  egos  as  angels.  He  gives  them 
charge  concerning  men.  He  employs  ministering  angels.  He 
sends  angel  visitants  to  man.  All  of  which,  in  His  infinite  wisdom, 
and  by  His  all-wise  power,  may  be  done  now  as  in  the  past,  for 
the  instruction  and  guidance  of  members  of  the  human  race.  His 
ways  and  means  of  convincing  men  by  signs  and  wonders,  and 
physical,  mental  and  spiritual  phenomena  are  not  necessarily  new, 
but  in  keeping  with  scriptural  records ;  though  ecclesiastical  in¬ 
fluence  will  seek  to  establish  a  human  made  gateway  of  entrance 
to  Heaven,  the  Orthodox  Church. 


CHAPTER  XII 


[Note  :  —  The  Author  feels  that  each  reader,  to  appreciate  their 
full  import,  should  most  carefully  read  chapters  twelve  and 
twenty-nine  consecutively.  Chapter  twelve  must  of  necessity  be 
read  for  proper  understanding  of  all  succeeding  chapters  in  which 
“May”  expresses  her  thoughts ;  but  may,  with  advantage,  be  read 
a  second  time,  before  beginning  to  read  chapter  twenty-nine.  The 
former  is  written  by  the  Author ;  and  the  latter  —  the  reply,  is 
by  his  spirit  wife.  The  rhyming,  grammar,  words  and  sentences 
of  the  reply  are  shaped,  by  the  instrument  (the  medium),  but  not 
by  her  normal  self.  The  reason  for  this  is  stated  elsewhere.  It 
matters  not  what  personality  makes  use  of  her,  it  rhymes  in  places 
when  read,  and  is  euphonious.] 

These  chapters  are  essential  to  the  book,  and  will  be 
found  to  be  a  guide  in  the  consideration  of  the  evidential 
matter,  not  only  in  the  November  1911  series  of  seances, 
including  both  trumpet  and  materialization,  but  also,  and  most 
generally  since,  and  with  the  addition  of  the  new  instrument.  Miss 
Maud  Venice  Gates,  “the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  as  well  as 
in  the  April  series  of  1912,  at  J.  B.  Jonson’s,  and  on  other  occa¬ 
sions,  for  reasons  that  will  be  obvious  to  the  reader.  I  feel  sure, 
that  owing  to  thel  exceptional  nature  of  their  contents,  they  will 
be  accepted  as  a  justification  for  their  presentation;  and  at  the 
same  time,  will  be  considered  as  a  memorial  acknowledgment  of 
proof  offered  by  my  spirit  wife ;  and  that  she  kept  a  momentous 
promise,  and  thus  has  aided  me  in  proving  true,  the  hope  of 
human  life,  its  continuity,  and  the  further  fact  established,  of 
•  terrestrial  and  celestial  communion,  by  strong  evidence  presented 
in  many  chapters  of  the  book. 

May  E.  King,  my  beloved  wife,  my  ever  kind  and  affectionate 
life  partner,  my  daily  and  almost  hourly  companion,  for  a  quarter 
of  a  century,  my  true  love  and  pal,  in  whom  I  could  and  did 
confide,  passed  from  the  physical  to  spirit  realms  on  the  29th  of 
September,  1911,  in  her  47th  year.  Hereafter  in  the  chapters  to 
follow  this  one,  I  shall  use  her  daily  name  “May,”  (by  her 

73 


74 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


approval),  as  I  was  wont  to  do  when  she  was  with  me  in  physical 
life;  and  as  her"  intimates  and  relatives  were  accustomed  to  call 
her.  Her  home  private  pet  name  during  her  last  illness  was 
“Babe,”  —  which  I  fondly  bestowed  upon  her  while  she  was  in 
a  dependent  condition  during  her  frequent  illnesses,  at  intervals 
w  hich  extended  over  a  period  of  nearly  four  years,  —  while 
officiating  in  my  triple  capacity  of  physician,  nurse  and  husband, 
until  the  closing  days  of  her  suffering  and  sickness. 

When  I  returned  from  my  London,  Ontario,  spiritistic  inves¬ 
tigations  in  1894,  I  found  my  wife  nearly  distracted,  from  the 
number  and  variety  of  the  questions  received  by  her  over  the 
’phone,  by  personal  calls,  and  by  letters  from  her  own  and  my 
acquaintances,  as  well  as  by  representatives  of  the  press ;  and 
some,  among  all  of  them,  of  course  were  most  desirous  of  know¬ 
ing,  if  I  were  really  “going  insane,”  extended  their  sympathy  to 
her,  and  hoped  that  I  could  be  prevailed  upon  to  have  nothing 
more  to  do  with  such  unnatural  things,  as  no  good  could  come 
out  of  it.  The  press  reporters  also  wanted  all  they  could'  get  for 
news,  or  for  sensational  reading,  from  one  who  was  so  well  known 
as  a  professional  man,  and  as  a  former  newspaper  man.  Nights 
without  sleep,  and  days  without  food,  and  the  threatened  loss  of 
my  prestige  and  our  means  of  livelihood,  well-nigh  wrecked  her 
physical  and  mental  health  at  that  time ;  and  seemingly  created 
a  chronic  uneasiness,  and  want  of  confidence  for  a  time ;  but  an 
extended  recess  in  the  research  work  resulted  in  the  bringing 
about  of  a  period  of  calm  and  contentment. 

In  the  year  1905,  some  eleven  years  later,  sufficient  change  had 
been  wrought  in  her  mind,  that  she  could  admit  to  me  that  there 
had  been  much  change  in  personal  and  public  sentiment ;  and  raised 
no  objection  to  my  visiting  the  famous  resort  of  the  spiritualists, 
Lily  Dale,  which  I  did  in  August  of  that  year.  Two  years  later 
she  designed  a  trip  to  that  same  place  with  me,  and  though  I  had 
carefully  refrained  from  inviting  her,  I  expressed  my  pleasure 
when  she  intimated  her  desire  of  going  with  me.  Opportunity 
was  presented  to  attend  several  seances  with  a  party  of  a  dozen 
of  our  relatives  and  friends.  She  saw  and  talked  (at  two  separate 
seances,  and  two  different  mediums)  with  the  materialized  form 


THE  AUTHOR’S  WIFE,  MAY  E.  KING, 

(At  the  Age  of  47.) 

“THE  KEY  THAT  UNLOCKED  THE  MYSTER^■." 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


75 


of  Egyptia,  who  alleged  to  me  in  London  thirteen  years  previously, 
that  she  was  my  guardian  spirit ;  and  she  also  on  many  different 
occasions  there  and  at  other  places  saw  and  conversed  with  that 
beautiful  embodied  guiding  spirit  Hypatia,  who  succeeded  in 
winning  her  to  a  thorough  conviction  of  new  realities;  and  satis¬ 
fied  her,  that  there,  were  more  verities  than  fictions  or  illusions, 
in  these  seances. 

When  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research  was 
organized,  under  a  charter  obtained  from  the  Government  in 
March,  1908,  my  wife  willingly  consented  to  my  acceptance  of 
the  office  and  responsibilities  of  President,  while  she  identified 
herself  with  full  membership  by  undergoing  the  ballot,  and  being 
regularly  and  legally  accepted ;  and  from  that  time  on,  so  far  as 
her  health  would  permit,  took  an  active  interest  in  its  meetings, 
which  as  the  membership  could  testify,  she  much  appreciated  as 
long  as  its  activities  lasted,  which  was  until  her  own  passing  to 
spirit  realm. 

With  the  knowledge  of  the;  truth  gained  by  us  both,  through 
spiritual  teachings  by  the  angelic  messengers,  our  guides  and 
aiders,  who  came  to  us  in  reality  of  form  and  voice ;  and  which 
we  had  repeated  experiences  of,  and  profited  by,  as  psychical 
researchers,  with  our  motto  ever  in  mind  “Search,  prove,  and 
declare  the  truth,”  and  therefore  we  knew  that  wherever  and 
whenever  the  door  (or  way)  is  opened  by  earth  friends,  and 
welcome  extended  the  spirit  loved  ones,  they  will  enter.  We  like¬ 
wise  knew  that  in  earth  life  of  whatsoever  grade,  class  or  attain¬ 
ment;  whether  the  personnel  of  governments  and  parliaments, 
churches  and  assemblies,  societies  and  groups  of  individuals  and 
alleged  friends,  we  are  liable  sooner  or  later  to  be  deceived  by 
them.  No  mentally  well  balanced  person  will  extend  full  confidence 
to  anyone,  and  fully  accept  and  welcome  such  as  a  friend,  until 
he  or  she  has  had  time  to  ‘try  the  man’.  So  too  the  advice  long 
since  given  is  good,  “try  the  spirit,”  it  is  the  proper  thing  to  do. 

There  existed  a  strong  bond  of  affection  between  my  wife  and 
myself,  and  the  lasting  impression  made  upon  her  by  the  minister¬ 
ing  spirit  Hypatia,  gave  her  full  confidence  that  once  in  spirit 


76 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


sphere  it  is  possible  to  return  to  earth,  when  an  interest  is  centered 
on  loved  ones  still  remaining  there. 

My  wife  and  I  frequently  discussed,  among  the  very  many 
interesting  matters  of  psychic  character,  how  best  we  could  estab¬ 
lish  for  each  other’s  personal  advantage  and  satisfaction,  the 
proof  of  our  individual  human  personality,  which  would  be  un¬ 
assailable  and  convincing.  Some  weeks  before  her  very  last 
illness,  we  again  seriously  considered  and  decided,  what  her  in¬ 
dividual  test,  and  my  individual  test,  would  be. 

“May,”  my  wife,  had  acquired  the  habit  of  always  calling  me 
(whether  in  company  or  in  privacy),  “Doctor.”  A  few  short 
years  ago  she  adopted  a  variety  of  nicknames,  which  she  invariably 
humorously  interpreted  and  applied  in  good-natured  way,  which 
were  adapted  tO'  certain  conditions ;  or  bearing  relations  to  some 
of  my  habits,  that  for  instance  of  smoking.  She  would  exclaim, 
“Oh  Johnnie  Smoker!  you  make  the  curtains  black;  and  you 
perfume  the  house  with  your  tobacco.”  And  so  with  other  names 
for  other  habits,  but  always  spoken  good-naturedly.  Some  years 
ago  or  at  the  end  of  the  year  1907,  I  ceased  to  use  tobacco,  and 
had  not  smoked  even  once  after  (until  left  without  a  companion). 
Her  practice  when  alone,  of  calling  me  ‘Johnnie  Smoker’  when 
she  wanted  me  had  become  so  strongly  a  habit,  that  thoughtlessly 
she  would  call  me  ‘Johnnie  Smoker,’  even  after  my  cessation 
of  the  indulgence.  Having  told  her  that  was  not  my  name 
any  more,  as  I  did  not  smoke  now,  she  dropped  the  word 
“Smoker”  and  called  me  “Johnnie,”  only  however  when  we  were 
alone. 

On  the  other  hand  I  simultaneously  and  humorously  responded 
to  her  initiative,  and  adopted  various  names  or  appellations  for 
her,  suggested  by  some  habit,  peculiarity,  faculty,  condition  or 
association.  I  also  had  pet  names  for  her,  as  she  had  for  me, 
which  we  only  used  when  with  each  other  alone.  She  was  out 
of  health  as  I  have  said,  more  or  less  for  the  last  four  years  of 
her  earth  life ;  and  had  passed  through  two  serious  illnesses  before 
the  last  one,  which  resulted  in  the  final  dissolution.  During  her 
last  illness,  I  officiated  more  fully  as  nurse  than  I  did  as  doctor, 
scarcely  leaving  her ;  and)  in  lifting  or  changing  her,  or  administer- 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


77 


ing  to  her  suffering  or  wants,  would  call  her  by  endearing  designa¬ 
tions,  such  as  “Dear,”  “Darling”  or  “Babe.”  What  then  more 
natural,  because  it  would  be  more  specific  and  convincing,  in 
selecting  some  discarnate  test,  than  to  adopt  some  such  private 
or  personal  expression  peculiarly  our  own,  in  home  life  only, 
and  unknown  to  others  ?  So  it  was  easily  decided  what  our  test 
names  were  to  be  after  separation  by  dissolution  of  the  body,  of 
either  of  us;  if  it  should  be  we  continued  to  live  on  in  spirit 
realms,  and  were  permitted  and  found  ourselves  able  to  return. 

If  I  passed  away  first  and  returned,  I  was  to  partially  prove 
my  human  personality,  by  speaking  her  test  name  “Babe” ;  and 
partially  by  private  or  personal  matters,  unknown  to  those  outside 
of  ourselves. 

If  she  passed  away  first  and  returned,  she  was  to  partially 
prove  her  human  personality  by  speaking  my  test  name  “Johnnie,” 
and  partially  by  private  or  personal  matters,  unknown  to  those 
outside  of  ourselves. 

These  appellations  or  designations  were  unknown  to  other 
parties.  It  was  likewise  understood,  that  the  personal  or  private 
matter,  was  to  be  taken  in  connection  with  some  event  of  a  per¬ 
sonal  or  individual  character;  or  an  act  or  interest,  that  was 
known  to  us  both,  but  not  known  to  others,  and  would  in  such 
way  strengthen  the  evidence  in  favor  of  the  personality  of  the 
one  returning,  its  value  depending  upon  its  truthfulness,  or  its 
existence  as  a  fact,  and  a  matter  of  exclusive  knowledge  to  our¬ 
selves  alone.  At  the  same  time  the  selection  thereof  must  not 
in  either  case  be  agreed  upon  in  earth)  life ;  and  must  be  chosen 
from  facts  or  circumstances,  which  may  have  occurred  before  the 
incarnate  spirit  became  discarnate ;  or  something  that  had 
occurred  since,  and  which  the  returning  discarnate  spirit  could 
not  possibly  have  known  as  an  incarnate  spirit  on  that  account ; 
and  which  was  known  only  to  the  survivor  of  the  two,  the  sole 
idea  being,  that  to  prove  the  identity  in  the  return  of  the  in¬ 
dividual  spirit,  something  should  be  stated  that  could  not  be 
stated,  by  any  other  person,  from  that  other  person’s  knowledge, 
nor  in  accord  with  the  habit  or  manner  of  expression ;  and  con¬ 
sistent  with  the  general  line  of  action  and  character,  of  the  partner 


78 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


first  becoming  discarnate.  These  shades  of  differences  in  modes 
of  tests  have  their  values  in  evidence  secured. 

In  the  case  of  an  etherealization  or  materialization,  then  acts 
as  well  as  words  would  be  considered  evidential,  on  the  one  hand 
to  establish  the  verity  and  personality  of  the  individual  existence ; 
while  on  the  other  hand  each  act,  look,  and  word  would  form 
evidence  for  or  against  the  claimant  for  recognition,  to  which  in 
each  instance  would  be  added,  if  in  materialized  form,  that  exact¬ 
ness  of  appearance,  voice,  and  language,  which  could  no  more  be 
doubted,  than  it  could  in  human  life,  in  the  home  association; 
and  where  lives  the  husband  or  the  wife,  who  could  be  accused 
of  making  a  mistake  in  the  personality  of  their  life  partner,  while 
looking  at  and  talking  with  the  form  presenting  as  that  life 
partner,  if  it  was  not  that  partner? 

I  venture  to  say  that  psychical  researchers  would  never  as 
readily  accept  as  evidence  of  returning  spirit,  or  of  a  particular 
human  form  or  personality  in  a  communicating  intelligence  seen 
or  unseen,  as  would  be  accepted  by  an  ordinary  police  magistrate, 
or  presiding  judge.  In  a  Court  of  Justice,  —  or  rather  a  court  of 
law  —  a  witness  swears  that  such  or  so,  as  he  asserts,  is  the  case, 
and  his  statement  is  presumably  evidential ;  while  researchers 
demand  proof  to  convince  that  it  cannot  possibly  by  mistake  or 
otherwise,  be  anything  else,  or  any  other  person,  or  any  other 
case  or  fact  than  as  stated ;  and  let  it  not  be  forgotten  the  public 
will  accept  on  statement  or  publication  generally,  when  the  source 
or  origin  is  respectable,  —  yes  and  are  satisfied  to  accept  by  faith 
and  belief  alone,  yet  will  deny  that  privilege  to  psychical 
researchers,  when  psychic  presentations  or  demonstrations  of 
great  or  small  extent  are  considered,  and  even  deny  the  truth 
of  their  evidence,  if  it  does  not  harmonize  with,  or  become  parallel 
to  their  own  existing  beliefs. 

This  is  not  to  be  wondered  at  when  we  reflect  upon  the  fact, 
that  almost  universally  young  children  have  implicit  faith  and 
belief  in  everything  their  parents  say  or  do,  as  being  so ;  and  their 
unbounded  faith  in  their  parents’  ability  to  do  almost  anything. 
Do  they  not  retire  on  Christmas  Eve,  in  the  full  belief,  that  Santa 
Claus,  a  non-resident  of  their  home,  who  comes  from  where  they 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


79 


do  not  know,  will  call  and  leave  them  a  present  during  their 
slumbers,  if  they  have  “tried  to  bo  good,”  because  their  parents 
told  them  so  ?  And  as  they  became  older  children,  did  not  they  grow 
up  Protestants,  because  their  parents  were  Protestants ;  or  became 
Catholics,  because  their  parents  were,  and  most  generally  followed 
in  the  political  footsteps  of  their  father,  and  in  the  exercise  of 
their  franchise?  The  exceptions  to  this  only  prove  the  rule. 

After  a  number  of  discussions  along  the  foregoing  lines,  we 
each  jointly  and  individually  adopted  our  proof  tests,  as  specially 
indicated  in  this  same  chapter,  to  enable  us  to  establish  our  human 
personality,  little  thinking  that  only  a  few  short  weeks  would 
elapse,  ere  one  of  us  would  have  our  opportunity  present  for 
identification,  by  establishing  our  own  personality,  and  making 
the  proofs  of  our  continued  existence  so  strong,  as  to  defy  any 
effort  to  destroy  them. 

After  twenty  years  of  my  own  and  four  years  of  my  wife’s 
earnest,  patient,  critical  research  work,  our  reward  has  come  at 
last,  though  it  was  not  consummated  until  she  who  had  been  my 
most  devoted  and  zealous  co-worker,  had  passed  to  that  sphere 
where  spiritual  discernment  gave  her  the  opportunity  which  had 
long  been  previously  discussed,  to  comprehend  and  bring  about, 
she  in  the  spirit,  and  I  in  the  earth  sphere,  the  conclusive  proofs 
such  as  are  presented  in  the  following  chapters,  which  we  stood 
in  need  of,  and  which  but  seldom  are  arranged  for  in  detail,  as 
in  our  case,  before  it  is  too  late,  by  which  to  establish  without  a 
single  lingering  doubt,  1st,  Continuity  of  life;  2nd,  Spirit  return; 
and  3rd,  Spirit  communion. 


CHAPTER  XIII 


AS  AN  introduction  to  the  medium  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt,  I 
may  say  that  I  first  met  her  at  a  Moss  seance,  in  London, 
Ontario,  in  1894,  and  since  then,  have  had  very  many 
sittings  with  her  for  investigation ;  as  well  as  communicating  with 
guides,  relatives  and  friends.  I  had  hoped  to  print  the  medium’s 
picture  in  my  book,  and  along  with  it,  a  short  sketch  of  her  life ; 
but  she  informed  me,  in  reply  to  my  request,  that  “I  never  had 
a  photo  taken;  since  I  was  a  little  girl;  and  as  to  my  life  being 
printed,  I  don’t  really  care  for  it.  Let  people  remember  me  as 
they  knew  me.  My  life  is  of  no.  interest  to  investigators.  My 
work  speaks  for  itself.  I  was  born  in  New  York  State,  but  lived 
most  of  my  life  in  Ohio,  and  am  now  here.”  (In  Detroit,  Mich.) 

To  revert  to  the  object  of  my  visit,  I  will  here  state  that  a  few 
weeks  after  the  passing  over  of  my  wife,  my  guide  Hypatia  — 
speaking  through  the  entranced  medium  Mrs.  Ripley,  utilized 
previously  (see  Chapter  VIII),  told  me  to  go  to  Mrs.  Wriedt  in 
Detroit,  Michigan,  on  November  11,  1911;  and  (prediction)  she 
would  bring  to  me.  May  my  spirit  wife,  whO'  would  be  able  to 
speak  with  me  through  the  trumpet;  and  to  also  go  to  Jonson’s 
in  Toledo,  Ohio,  where  she  hoped  by  then,  to  have  May  show 
herself  there  in  a  materialized  body,  and  converse  with  me.  I 
acted  accordingly,  and  have  made  record  of  it.  I  was  fortunate 
in  having  in  this  series  no  less  than  seven  seances,  in  two  different 
states,  and  of  two  different  phases,  which  were  closely  connected 
in  the  features  of  time,  and  of  their  joint  production,  of  strong 
evidential  matter;  as  also  the  advantage  of  alternation,  and  ex¬ 
clusion  of  opportunity,  for  co-operation  between  the  instruments. 
I  may  here  say,  by  way  of  explanation,  that  of  the  seven  seances, 
comprising  the  November  series,  the  first  and  second  held  on  the 
twelfth  and  thirteenth,  as  well  as  the  sixth  and  seventh  held  on 
the  eighteenth  and  nineteenth  of  the  month,  were  trumpet  seances ; 
and  were  held  in  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt’s  seance  room,  in  the  city  of 
Detroit,  and  State  of  Michigan.  Three  of  the  series,  viz.*  the 


80 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


81 


third,  fourth  and  fifth,  were  materializing  seances  with  conversa¬ 
tions,  and  were  held  in  Mr.  J.  B.  Jonson’s  seance  room,  in  Toledo, 
State  of  Ohio,  on  the  thirteenth,  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  of  Novem¬ 
ber.  In  this  manner,  and  by  this  plan,  results  are  more  convincing ; 
and  as  a  consequence,  there  was  a  remarkable  connection  of  direct 
evidence,  first  developed  in  the  two  sittings  with  Mrs.  Wriedt  in 
Detroit,  followed  by  a  continuance  of  that  evidence,  and  some 
entirely  new,  at  the  three  succeeding  seances,  at  Jonson’s  in 
Toledo,  and  then  concluded  at  the  remaining  two  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s. 

I  had  my  first  sitting,  of  about  forty-five  minutes,  on  Sunday, 
12th  November,  1911,  begining  at  2.45  p.  M.,  and  with,  to  me, 
direct  and  most  convincing  evidence,  that  May’s  ante-mortem 
promises  were  being,  on  this  her  first  opportunity,  most  faithfully 
fulfilled,  and  In  a  manner  wholly  satisfactory  44  days  after  death 
of  her  body ;  and  consider  it  to  be,  both  the  strongest  and  most 
conclusive  I  could  get  —  which  would  endorse  our  agreement  — 
from  May,  my  lately  departed  wife,  who  passed  to  spirit  realms 
on  the  29th  September,  1911,  after  an  unconscious  state  lasting 
nine  days.  She  talked  with  me  for  fully  fifteen  minutes  in  this 
sitting. 

The  first  intelligence  to  address  me  in  the  seance  was  the  alleged 
Guide  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  viz. :  Dr.  Sharp  who  referred  to  my  loss, 
and  my  wife’s  gain.  He  pointed  out  that  I  could  not  do  much 
for  the  departed  spirit,  but  that  it  could  do  much  for  me;  that 
my  worrying  and  fretting,  or  sorrowing,  would  only  tend  to 
hinder  or  delay  her  progress  or  advancement.  He  also  advised 
rrie  to  take  care  of  myself,  told  me  that  Hypatia,  my  spirit  guide, 
was  here  with  her,  and  would  speak  with  me.  (Prediction.) 

The  next  voice  claimed  to  be  that  of  Dr.  McC - ,  who  passed 

out  of  the  flesh  at  Toronto  some  years  ago.  I  said  I  remembered 

that  there  was  a  Dr.  McC - ,  but  that  I  was  not  personally 

acquainted  with  him.  He  replied  “I  was  about  your  age,  and 
about  your  time.  You  are  Dr.  J.  S.  King  of  Church  Street, 
ain’t  you?”  My  reply  was  “Yes.” 

The  third  intelligence  that  spoke  said  ‘YVell,  Uncle  John,  how 
are  you?” 

Instead  of  answering  him  directly  I  enquired: 


82 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“Who  are  you?” 

The  Voice:  “I  am  your  nephew.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “Which  nephew?” 

The  Voice:  “Jesse.” 

Mrs.  Wriedt:  “Dr.,  is  that  your  brother’s  son?” 

J.  S.  K. :  “My  brother  had  a  son  Jesse.” 

Mrs.  Wriedt:  “Jesse,  how  does  the  Hamilton  Spiritual  Society 
progress  ?” 

Jesse:  “Not  very  well,  there  is  too  much  wrangling  among 
the  membership.” 

Jesse:  “Say  Uncle  John,  your  worry  makes  Auntie  May  worry. 

I  want  to  tell  you  that  the  party . you  know  who  I 

mean,  don’t  you?” 

J.  S.  K.:  “Yes,  Jesse.” 

Jesse:  “Well,  he  expected  that  you  would  die  before  Auntie 
would,  and  then;  there  might  have  been  a  chance  to  try  and  get 

. but  he  was  disappointed  and  wonders  what  you  are 

going  to  do.  Auntie  wants  me  to  tell  you  not  to  give . 

your  money,  nor  the  other  party  your . or  money,  but 

take  care  of  them  and  of  yourself.  Strangers  think  more  of  you, 
and  will  do  more  for  you,  than  some  of  your  relatives  who  want 

what  you’ve  got.  Now  Uncle  John,  don’t  tell . anything 

you  know,  or  anything  I  tell  you . ” 

[Note:  —  For  reasons  which  will  be  readily  apparent  the  very 
convincing  evidential  matter,  which  directly  connects  with  per¬ 
sonal,  private,  and  family  events,  I  am  unable  to  make  public  by 
recording  all  the  conversation.  —  The  Author.] 

Jesse  went  on  talking,  the  synopsis  of  it  being  that  his  Auntie 
May  wished  me  not  to  give  her  rings  and  trinkets  away,  till  she 
told  me  what  to  do  with  them,  and  the  other  things  that  I  kept. 
He  said  she  would  try  and  talk  with  me  if  she  could,  but  as  her 
tongue  and  throat  were  paralyzed  before  she  passed  out  (a  fact), 
she  might  find  it  a  little  difficult  to  speak  as  yet,  clearly  enough 
for  me  to  hear  her  distinctly ;  and  she  had  asked  him,  to  tell  me 
those  things  in  case  she  could  not  make  me  understand. 

The  fourth  intelligence  announced  herself  as  Hypatia,  the  one 
who  at  my  request  visited  and  conversed  with  Wm.  T.  Stead, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


83 


in  London  (see  Chap.  VIII),  and  to  those  who  read  the  succeed¬ 
ing  chapters  the  name  will  become  familiar.  She  has  for  years 
alleged  that  she  is  my  spirit  guide.  She  announced  that  she  had 
brought  May  with  her,  and  that  May  would  herself  speak  with 
me.  Hypatia,  as  usual,  gave  me  advice  and  instruction ;  and 
informed  me  that  May  and  she  would  also  meet  me  at  Jonson’s 
seance  in  Toledo;  and  that  she,  Hypatia,  would  return  to  me 
at  Jonson’s  seance,  the  rose  I  gave  her  nearly  two  years  ago 
(prediction),  to  be  kept  by  her  for  a  good  period  of  time,  and 
returned  to  me;  and  said  I  would  also  receive  while  at  Mr.  Jon¬ 
son’s  home  a  great  surprise.  (Prediction.) 

The  fifth  and  last  voice  communicating  at  this  seance,  was 
alleged  to  be,  and  I  need  no  longer  say  alleged,  for  I  believe  it 
was  my  wife,  for  I  now  know:  for  a  truth,  it  was  the  one  who 
has  been  the  nearest  and  dearest  to  me,  the  one  who  had  promised 
that  if  ever  she  could,  and  if  permitted,  would  according  to  our 
mutual  agreement  of  a  few  weeks  ago,  help  to  prove  her  person¬ 
ality,  and  thereby  the  continuity  of  life,  spirit  return,  and  com¬ 
munion  between  her  spirit  discarnate,  and  myself.  It  proved  to 
be  my  own  May,  whom  I  had  not  expected  to  do  much  in  the 
way  of  talking  after  what  Jesse  had  said,  but  as  she  proceeded 
her  voice  assumed  a  human  naturalness,  increased  in  volume 
and  in  strength,  and  soon  was  adjusted  in  pitch  or  tone,  until  it 
sounded  as  familiar,  and  life-like  to  me,  as  I  had  been  accustomed 
to  hear  it  when  she  spoke  with  me,  in  life,  in  our  home,  or  over 
the  ’phone.  (A  fulfillment.) 

True  to  her  ante-mortem  promise,  her  momentous  test  of  her 
human  personality,  came  with  force,  power,  and  evident  satisfac¬ 
tion,  her  first  utterances  being  “Johnnie!”  “Oh  Johnnie!”  “My 
dear  Johnnie!”  “It’s  I!”  “It’s  May!”  “It’s  your  ‘Babe’!”  “I  am 
not  dead,  I  am  alive.”  “I  told  you  I  would  come  if  I  could,  and 
I  am  here.”  (Fulfillment.) 

From  what  Jesse  had  said  I  expected  to  hear  a  weak  voice. 
My  joy  and  satisfaction  therefore  at  her  success,  and  my  ex¬ 
pression  of  appreciation  of  her  effort,  seemed  to  give  her  strength 
and  encouragement,  and  throughout  the  fifteen  or  more  minutes, 
occupied  with  our  conversation,  she  frequently  repeated  the  name 


84 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“Johnnie”  both  with  and  without  the  qualifying  adjective,  inter¬ 
mingled  with  various  endearing,  and  pet  names,  that  she  was 
accustomed  to  use  in  her  every-day  life;  still  “Johnnie”  was 
evidently  so  often  repeated  to  impress  me  deeply,  with  the  fact 
that  it  was  the  test  name  previously  selected,  by  which  to  identify 
herself.  (A  fulfillment.)  She  told  me  that  she  could  not  alone  have 
succeeded  in  coming,  and  talking  with  me,  but  Hypatia  had  helped 
her  very  much,  and  so  had  Jesse  helped  her.  She  was  glad  that 
by  the  help  of  others,  she  could  speak  with  me,  and  said  among 
other  expressions,  “Oh  my  dear,  I  miss  you  so  much ;  you  were  so 
kind  to  me  always,  and  I  loved  you  so  much.  I  cannot  help  my 
feelings,  I  miss  you  sO'  much.  Yes,  I  know  now  that  it  was  all 
for  the  best  for  me  to  go  first.  I  am  happy ;  I  am  free  from  pain 
and  suffering  now,  ^.nd  I  can  be  near  you  still.  It  was  better  than 
for  me  to  be  left.  I  want  you  to  stay  on  independently  where 
you  are.  I  don’t  want  you  to  be  beholding  to  anybody,  but  attend 
to  your  engagements  as  usual ;  and  spend  your  money  in  caring 
for  yourself.  I  am  satisfied  with  the  way  you  disposed  of  my 
things.  (Evidential.)  Don’t  part  with  my  watch,  diamonds,  rings, 
jewelry,  and  things  that  you  put  in  the  safety  deposit  vault  at  the 
hank.”  (Strong  evidence.)  (I  had  only  placed  them  there  on 
Friday,  as  I  left  the  city  on  Saturday  morning,  and  held  this 
conversation  on  Sunday  afternoon.)  “Don’t  give  my  diamond 

earrings  to  E -  (a  relative)  as  she  is  careless  and  would  lose 

them  (good  evidence).  I  will  tell  you  from  time  to  time  how  to 
dispose  of  those  things.  When  you  go  home  I  want  you  to  get 
my  single  diamond  ring  out  of  the  vault.  You  can  take  the  stone 
out,  and  have  it  set  in  a  safety  scarf  pin,  so  you  can  wear  it 
without  losing  it,  and  get  the  good  of  it.  '  Be  careful  to  take  the 
diamond  to  an  honest  jeweler,  for  it  would  be  easy  to  slip  a  less 
valuable  stone  in  its  place,  and  you  could  hardly  tell  the  dif¬ 
ference.”  (Strong  evidence  connecting  with  more  about  the  pin 
in  Chapter  XXVI.  J.  S'.  K.)  She  then  became  more  earnest  and 
said,  “Don’t  make  a  will.  Give  away  whatever  you  wish  to  give 
away  of  what  you  possess,  and  to  the  persons  whom  you  wish  to 
have  it,  and  the  same  with  your  money  during  your  life ;  and  do 
not  let  anybody  have  a  claim  on  anything,  except  what  you  gave 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


85 


them  in  your  life  time  as  a  clear  gift ;  and  put  away  or  leave 
enough  of  your  money  to  provide  for  yourself  in  your  old  age, 
and  set  aside  enough  to  give  you  burial.  I  cannot  keep  house 
for  you  any  more,  my  darling,  but  I  can  be,  and  I  will  be,  with 
you  to  help  you  all  the  time.”  (All  good  evidence.) 

She  asked  me  to  send  word  to  her  mother,  that  she  was  able 
to  come  back  and  talk.  I  asked  her  if  she  would  like  her  mother 
to  come  and  speak  with  her  some  time,  and  she  replied  “Yes,” 
which  was  followed  twice  by  the  sound  of  kissing. 

She  also  asked  me  to  give  her  thanks  to  M — ^ —  for  the  part 
she  took  in  preparing  her  body  for  the  casket  (true).  She  talked 
as  naturally  about  these  things  as  she  ever  conversed  with  me 
in  her  home  life,  and  she  was  always  known  as  a  shrewd  business 
woman.  When  I  said  that  her  efiforts  had  exceeded  my  fondest, 
and  most  sanguine  expectations,  she  said  encouragingly,  “I  will 
materialize  for  you  at  Toledo,  and  I  will  speak  with  you  there, 
while  in  my  materialized  body.  (Prediction.)  Good-bye!” 

I  give  to  readers  the  foregoing  details,  as  being  a  sample  of 
the  evidence  I  got,  and  all  she  said  appealed  to-  me  as  true.  T  do 
not  hesitate,  but  say  this  is  the  kind  of  evidence,  “the  home-life 
kind,”  which  brings  conviction  home  to  man,  and  makes  hini 
know  it’s  true ;  and  that  no  criticism  can  upset  it,  nor  hypothesis 
account  for  it,  except  the  one.  Readers  may  watch  for  future 
evidence,  and  for  fulfillment  of  predictions,  for  there  is  much 
more  to  come. 

I  felt  sure  that  May’s  earthly  promise  would  be  fulfilled,  and 
further  that  when  accomplished,  the  proof  of  the  truth  in  that 
single  instance,  would  establish  the  probability  of  its  general 
application  to  the  human  race,  and  if  so,  the  wholesale  and  retail 
dealers  in  every  variety  of  hypotheses,  save  and  except  the 
Spiritual  hypothesis,  would  have  to  sacrifice  their  entire  stock  in 
trade,  and  re-invest  in  what  must  needs  be  the  source  and  supply 
for  all  nations,  tongues,  and  peoples,  which  will  satisfy  the  soul’s 
hunger,  development,  and  perfection,  and  change  humanity’s  in¬ 
harmonious  vibrations,  into  one  grand  and  universal  harmonious 
vibration  of  peace  and  good  will  among  mankind,  and  all  shall 


86 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


then  recognize  the  fatherhood  of  God,  and  the  true  brotherhood 
of  man,  and  live  the  life  thafj  they  profess. 

Before  the  seance  was  over  Hypatia  again  spoke,  and  said, 
“I  will  give  you  back  the  rose  at  Toledo  (prediction)  ;  but  we 
will  have  a  surprise  in  store  for  you  besides.”  (Prediction.) 

Dr.  Sharp,  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  Guide,  in  reply  to  my  invitation, 
that  he  call  and  see  me  on  the  occasion  to  which  Hypatia  and 
May  alluded,  said,  “I  will  materialize  in  the  cabinet,  step  out, 
and  put  my  hand  on  your  head  to  let  you  know  that  it  is  me.” 
(  Prediction. ) 

This  seance  lasted  for  three-quarters  of  an  hour,  and  I  can  no 
longer  doubt,  for  I  am  confident  without  a  remaining  shade  of 
doubt,  that  I  have  established  by  strong  evidence  the  truth  of 
the  continuity  of  life,  spirit  return,  and  spirit  communication. 

This  report  and  chapter  were  completed  as  soon  as  seance  was 
ended,  from  notes  taken  during  the  seance. 

My  comment  and  my  argument  upon  the  evidence  in  this,  and 
in  each  of  the  seven  seances  embraced  in  the  November,  1911, 
series  are  here  deferred,  and  will  appear  after  the  seventh  seance 
in  a  chapter  wholly  devoted  tol  that  purpose. 

[Before  leaving  this  chapter,  I  will  ask  the  reader  to  carefully 
examine  the  evidence  of  May,  so  far  as  it  is  recorded,  and  also 
from  time  to  time,  and  see  if  it  be  not  truly  in  accord  with  the 
plan  mutually  agreed  upon,  (and  as  embraced  in  Chapter  XH, 
which  I  claim  to  be  the  psychic  key,  that  enabled  us  together,  to 
unlock  the  mystery.] 


CHAPTER  XIV 


My  second  sitting  of  this  series,  with  Mrs.  Wriedt  in 
Detroit,  was  held  on  Monday,  13th  November,  1911, 
between  9  and  10  a.  m.  in  the  same  seance  room  as  on 
the  previous  occasion.  As  I  sat  expecting  to  hear  the  voice  of 
Dr.  Sharp,  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  guide,  who  usually  opens  and  closes 
the  seance,  I  had  the  unexpected  view  of  an  old  grey-haired  lady 
wearing  a  black  cap.  She  looked  at  me  but  did  not  speak.  She 
bore  some  resemblance  in  features  to  my  own  mother ;  but  I  could 
not  declare  it  a  true  likeness ;  but  it  was  almost  as  clear  to  vision 
as  in  an  ordinarily  lighted  room.  The  creation  showed  the  head 
and  face  and  very  little  more,  the  black  darkness  of  the  room 
made  it  stand  out  very  distinctly.  The  same  face  appeared  later 
in  the  evening.  Mrs.  Wriedt  considered  it  anj  etherialized  face, 
though  she  said  she  could  not  see  it,  the  first  time  it  appeared, 
nor  when  Jesse  appeared ;  and  claimed  it  might  be  a  clairvoyant 
vision,  as  I  saw  it,  and  she  could  not,  when  I  spoke  of  seeing  it 
so  distinctly.  The  view  wasi  not  held  for  more  than  a  full  half 
minute  I  should  judge,  and  presented  on  my  front  and  right,  the 
opposite  side  to  the  medium. 

The  second  personality  to  present  showed  the  face  of  a  young 
man,  a  few  feet  to  the  front  of  me,  while  he  (Jesse)  spoke 
through  the  trumpet,  and  said,  “Good  Morning,  Uncle  John,  it’s 
Jesse.”  He  referred  to  a  statement  of  five  pages  I  had  written, 
after  making  my  record  of  the  first  seance ;  and  which  I  had 
designated  by  the  headings  or  jottings  after  the  seance,  in  which 
I  addressed  it  to  May,  selecting  what  I  considered  proofs  of 
May’s  human  personality.  It  was  written  with  lead  pencil,  and 
left  exposed  on  the  table,  separated  so  that  each  written  page  was 
uncovered,  and  in  fulU  view  in  the  parlor  below.  Jesse  told  me 
that  Auntie  May  had  seen  and  read  it,  and  didn’t  want  family 
or  private  matters  made  public.  I  assured  him  that  I  would 
respect  her  wish ;  and  no  names  would  be  mentioned,  and  that 
there  would  be  nothing  said  that  would  prove  injudicious,  or 

87 


88 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


worry  anybody.  He  said  he  was  helping  Auntie  all  he  could,  and 
so  was  Hypatia. 

Dr.  Sharp  came  next  and  complimented  me  upon  my  speech 
last  evening,  when  there  was  a  gathering  of  fourteen  persons 
present ;  and  conditions  were  not  favorable  for  the  production  of 
phenomena  (true). 

May  came  again  and  said  for  the  second  time,  “I  am  going  to 
be  with  you,  and  go  with  you  to  Toledo;  and  am  going  to 
materialize  there,  and  speak  to  you  also,  while  in  my  materialized 
body.  (Prediction.)  She  gave  her  kisses  for  me  in  smacks 
through  the  trumpet.  One  instance  here  of  evidential  matter  I 
must  give,  as  follows : 

J.  S.  K. ;  “May,  can  you  tell  Mrs.  Wriedt  what  present  you 
gave  me  last  Christmas  Day?” 

May:  “I  had  a  grip  made  for  the  Doctor's  instruments,  and 
had  his  initials,  J.  S.  K.,  printed  in  gold  letters  on  the  outside; 
and  a  Christmas  card  with  printed  greetings  and  written  on  by 
myself,  which  card  I  placed  on  the  inside  of  the  grip.  He  found 
it  on  his  chair  at  breakfast  time.”  (Absolutely  correct.) 

[Note  :  —  At  this  very  time  I  had  that  card  in  my  pocket  diary, 
though  I  could  not  give  from  memory  what  was  written  on  the 
card.  The  following  is  what  was  upon  it,  viz. :  “With  best  wishes 
for  a  Merry  Christmas”  (in  red  and  black  print)  and  “May  life, 
health  and  happiness  grip  you  for  years  to  come,  so  long  as  a 
shred  of  this  grip  lasts.”  (The  writing  was  by  her  own  hand.) 
J.S.K.] 

It  strikes  me  very  forcibly  and  convincingly  that  this  is  about 
as  strong  circumstantial  evidence,  as  one  is  likely  to  find,  if  it  is 
not  direct  evidence,  in  support  of  the  personality  of  May.,  Another 
query  in  my  mind  was  —  had  May  read  the  memoranda  of  proofs 
on  the  table  downstairs,  as  referred  to  by  Jesse  —  when  she 
gleefully  informed  me  “I  not  only  have  some  of  my  ordinary 
senses  which  have  been  quickened  or  become  more  acute,  but 
I  can  now  read  or  know  your  thoughts,”  and  she  told  me  in 
response  to  the  question  in  my  mind,  and  not  yet  expressed,  that 
she  had  read  what  I  had  written,  and  that  it  was  all  right,  but 
that  she  did  not  want  private  or  family  matters  made  public. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


89 


She  next  made  a  repetition  of  the  promise  or  prediction,  that  she 
would  be  able  to  materialize,  and  talk  also,  at  Jonson’s ;  and  would 
be  with  me  all  the  time,  and  humorously  remarked  that  she  could 
go  as  a  little  parcel  in  my  grip  to  Toledo,  and  laughed.  This 
promise  or  prediction  is  made  the  second  time. 

May  also  told  me  that  she  communicates  ^ with  me  whilel  I  am 
in  bed  sleeping.  This  I  interpret  as  follows: 

[May  is  a  discarnate  spirit;  I  am  an  incarnate  spirit.  During 
sleep  the  objective  portion  of  my  mind  ceases  activity,  and  hence 
the  subjective  portion  of  my  mind,  which  never  ceases  function¬ 
ing,  in  addition  to  its  own  regular  activities  assumes  those  of  the 
objective  portion,  utilizing  the  spirit  senses  instead  of  those 
usually  called  physical,  and  by  so  doing  can  register  the  conversa¬ 
tion-in  my  life  record.] 

May  also  makes  a  promise  or  prediction  that  she  will  again 
commune  with  me,  during  my  wake  state,  and  impress  me,  while 
present  by  spirit  sense  functioning.  And  granted  that  she  fulfills 
her  promise  complete,  then  which  of  all  the  listed  hypotheses 
adopted,  in  any  or  all  lands,  will  account  for  it,  outside  of  the 
spiritual  hypothesis?  Here  I  av^ow  my  knowledge,  and  say  that 
I  not  only  believe  and  have  faith  that  she  will  do  as  she  has 
promised,  but  my  intuitions  endorse  my  faith  and  belief ;  and  I 
await  in  confidence  the  result,  because  I  know,  that  it  is  the  spirit 
of  May  that  speaks. 

It  is  but  right  that  I  should  at  this  time,  premise;  for  the  in¬ 
formation  of  all  concerned,  that  May  was  better  informed  along 
psychical  lines  than  most  women.  She  had  knowledge  acquired 
from  the  many  papers  and  discussions  by  fellow  members  of  the 
Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  practical  experience 
from  her  association  with  my  work  in  that  line,  from  her 
attendance  at  trumpet  seances  —  the  very  first  of  which  was 
under  the  same  medium,  Mrs.  Wriedt,  and  Dr.  Sharp,  her  guide, 
probably  ten  years  previous  to  this  seance  —  as  well  as  other 
similar  experiences ;  at  seances  with  materialization  and  mediums, 
Effie  Moss,  Nichols,  and  J.  B.  Jonson,  at  Lily  Dale  in  1907,  and 
several  times  with  J.  B.  Jonson,  since.  This  experience  had  quali¬ 
fied  her  to  comprehend  her  postmortem  condition,  and  the  oppor- 


90 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


tunities  afforded  her;  and  being  met  at  this  stage,  by  the  very 
spirit  Hypatia,  who  first  brought  conviction  to  her  conscious 
understanding  in  1907 ;  and  met  her  as  she  claims  on  her  entry 
into  spirit  realms,  and  became  for  the  immediate  time  her  guardian 
spirit  and  teacher.  Thus  securing  her  aid,  she  made  close  con¬ 
nection  with  me,  through  the  very  spirit  who  claims  to  be  my 
chief  spirit  guide,  on  the  first  opportunity  presenting.  This  in¬ 
formation,  and  other  as  well,  is  the  assurance  I  have  received 
from  May  herself,  elsewhere  recorded;  and  coming  as  it  does 
confirms  knowledge  similar  in  character,  which  I  received  through 
a  trance  medium,  controlled  by  Hypatia,  it  seems  that  with  that 
knowledge  possessed  by  her,  and  the  knowledge  also  that  she 
passed  away  in  the  belief  that  she  would  be  able  to  find  ways 
and  means  of  returning  to  the  one  from  whom  there  was  enforced 
severance,  but  made  the  desire  all  the  stronger  to  return. 

Returning  now  to  the  seance,  the  very  next  to  greet  me  was 
the  intelligence  Hypatia,  who  has  in  preceding  chapters  established 
her  capabilities,  her  intelligence,  her  loyalty  tO’  truth  and  to 
promise.  On  this  occasion  as  on  many  others  she  bid  me  “Good 
Morning’’  and  next  repeated  two  beautiful  poems  of  her  own 
composition,  one  addressed  to  the  Lilies  of  the  Valley  upon  the 
table  at  my  side,  and  the  other  as  a  toast.  In  addition  to  this 
treat  she  again  intimated  that  I  would  get  a  great  surprise  at 
Toledo. 

I  next  received  a  pleasant  surprise,  in  hearing  the  voice  of  my 
alleged  old-time  friend  MacRoberts,  at  whose  residence  in  Lon¬ 
don,  in  1894,  I  had  my  first  series  of  materializing  phenomena, 
associated  with  the  mediumship  of,  the  late  Mrs.  Effie  Moss,  where 
an  intelligence  claiming  to  be  Egyptia  presented  herself  to  me 
as  an  Egyptian  Princess,  who  also  claimed  then  to  be  my  guardian 
spirit,  and  who  figured  very  prominently  in  connection  with  my 
investigations  at  the  MacRoberts  home,  as  detailed  in  early 
chapters  of  this  book,  and  continuously  ever  since,  embracing  the 
present  time.  On  the  previous  Saturday  evening  an  assemblage 
of  fourteen  had  gathered  in  the  seance  room ;  but  owing  to  the 
absence  of  favorable  conditions,  or  due  to  causes  unknown  to  me, 
there  were  no  communications  or  phenomena.  I  was  requested 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


91 


by  Mrs.  Wriedt  to  address  those  present,  which  I  did.  The 
intelligence  MacRoberts  chanced  to  be  present  while  I  was  speak¬ 
ing,  so  he  subsequently  made  this  call,  and  told  me  he  was  pleased 
with  what  I  said. 

Dr.  Sharp,  a  wonderful  personality,  and  the  guide  for  many 
years  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  intervened  to  close  the  seance,  and  repeated 
his  promise  to  be  at  Jonson’s,  and  would  materialize. 


CHAPTER  XV 


I  LEFT  Detroit  Monday  afternoon,  13th  Novembef,  1911,  by 
trolley,  arriving  on  the  same  day  in  Toledo,  I  called  at  the 
Jonson  residence  soon  after  seven  o’clock  in  the  evening, 
and  chatted  pleasantly  with  Mrs.  and  Mr.  Jonson,  until  the  arrival 

of  Mrs.  H - ,  her  two  daughters,  and  a  gentleman  friend,  which 

four  were  to  have  a  private  seance  with  Mr.  Jonson.  I  was  invited 
to  join  them,  and  I  promptly  accepted  the  invitation. 

Investigation  of  the  Cabinet  and  the  Medium 

On  this  occasion  as  on  every  other  previous  one  that  I  have 
visited  Jonson,  and  participated  in  these  materializing  seances,  all 
present  were  invited  to  investigate  or  examine  the  so-called 
cabinet,  and  approaches  to  or  adjoining  it,  which  I  had  done 
before ;  and  on  two  occasions  did  so  in  connection  with  another 
member  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  these 
latter  seances  the  special  two,  being  conducted  under  test  condi¬ 
tions,  in  a  house  other  than  his  home.  On  ond  occasion  an  officer 
of  our  society  reported  that  he  sat  in  the  cabinet  with  Jonson, 
part  of  the  time  during  the  seance,  and  that  Jonson  was  in  a 
trance  state,  of  lethargy  or  deep  sleep.  On  the  present  occasion 
the  cabinet  consisted  of  one  corner  of  the  upstair  room,  square 
in  shape,  the  height  being  from  floor  to  ceiling,  two  of  the  walls 
the  natural  walls  of  the  room,  and  the  other  two,  temporized 
partitions,  completing  the  cabinet  or  room,  with  two  separating 
curtains  for  doorway  of  entrance  to,  or  exit  from  the  room  or 
cabinet ;  and  no  other  discernible  opening  or  place  for  one,  could 
be  discovered  in  the  walls,  ceiling  or  floor.  On  the  inside  was 
an  ordinary  arm  chair,  a  small  stand  for  flowers,  papered  walls, 
bare  floor,  unbroken  ceiling,  no  window  except  one  in  the  wall 
oflF  to  our  left,  to  which  the  front  wall  or  partition  of  the  cabinet 
extended,  dividing  the  window  from  top  to  bottom,  so  that  a 
section  of  it  a  few  inches  wide,  would  be  on  the  inside  of  the 

92 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


93 


cabinet,  and  a  section  outside  of  the  cabinet  visible  to  the  sitters, 
leaving  a  space  too  narrow  to  permit  a  person  to  crowd  their 
body  through,  and  all  visible  above  the  floor,  so  that  no  one  could 
enter  through  the  window  without  the  sitters  being  aware  of  the 
fact;  and  to  reach  the  window  from  the  outside  a  person  would 
require  a  ladder  long  enough  to  reach  the  second  storey.  Nor 
was  there  a  door  to  the  cabinet,  except  that  improvised  one, 
formed  by  curtains  on  the  side  next  the  sitters. 

As  noticed  at  the  different  seances,  Jonson  spends  a  part  of  the 
sittings  seated  with  the  sitters  in  the  semi-circle  or  curved  row 
of  seats ;  a  part  of  the  time  walking  along  in  front  of  the  sitters ; 
and  a  part  of  the  time  inside  the  cabinet.  Mrs.  Jonson  sat  off 
to  my  right,  when  she  did  sit,  but  she  was  on  the  move  most 
of  the  time,  either  winding  the  movement  of  the  music  box,  or 
tending  the  stove,  answering  questions  of  sitters,  or  meeting  the 
forms  after  they  came  out  of  the  cabinet ;  or  those  which  formed 
outside  of  the  cabinet  and  moved  about  the  room. 

I  had  on  more  than  one  occasion  seen  the  most  wonderful 
results,  after  to  me  satisfactory  test  conditions  had  been  imposed, 
and  Jonson’s  body  found  toi  be  covered  only  by  a  dark  woolen 
shirt,  and  a  dark  pair  of  pants. 

I  cannot  claim  to  be  a  neophyte,  nor  should  I  be  so  classed, 
for  I  have  been  a  researcher  in  hypnotism  and  spiritualism,  for 
many  years ;  and  can  fairly  claim  to  have  discovered  but  one  or 
two  bold  attempts  at  fraudulent  work  in  either  of  the  lines  I  was 
engaged  in. 

I  had  nevertheless  had  more  frequent  occasion  to  regret  the 
premature  appearance  in  public,  of  eager  psychic  aspirants  for 
approbation,  long  before  a  mature  development  of  their  psychic 
qualities.  It  will  not,  I  trust,  be  considered  egotistical  to  claim 
that  I  feel  myself  to  be,  from  long  and  varied  experience,  quite 
competent  to  distinguish  between  the  fraudulent  and  the  genuine ; 
or  to  discern  the  status  or  grade  of  the  individual  psychic  instru¬ 
ment,  for  my  sympathy  is  always  with  the  striving  student,  rather 
than  with  the  acknowledged  graduate. 

Reverting  once  more  to  the  cabinet,  the  medium,  and  the  devel¬ 
opments  at  this  seance,  I  with  the  others  examined  the  room, 


94 


DAWN  OD  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


utilized  as  a  cabinet;  and  had  a  look  at  the  medium  Jonson  in 
ordinary  clothing,  as  he  sat  with  the  rest  of  the  people  in  the 
circle. 

Mrs.  H.,  her  daughters,  and  friend,  and  myself,  together  with 
Mrs.  J.  B.  Jonson,  constituted  a  circle  of  six  people.  Aften  they 
each  had  a  visitor  from  the  cabinet,  the  predicted  event  of  May 
materializing  and  conversing  with  me,  —  as  having  been  definitely 
made,  as  late  as  this  very  morning  in  Detroit,  through  the  trumpet 
in  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  seance,  —  actually  took  place  (fulfillment),  and 
was  not  only  intensely  interesting  and  convincing  to  me,  but  even 
more  so  than  anything  which  had  previously  transpired  in  this 
series.  May  stepped  out  of  the  cabinet  with  a  degree  of  confidence, 
and  greeted  me  in  the  stipulated  manner  (fulfillment),  adding 
“It’s  I,”  “I’m  May,”  “I  told  you  I  would  be  here,”  and  with  that 
joyful  “welcome  home”  look  on  her  countenance,  that  had  oft- 
times  greeted  me  in  her  home  and  mine,  in  days  gone  by,  slapped 
me  on  my  left  shoulder  with  her  right  hand,  put  her  right  arm 
around  my  neck,  pressed  her  left  cheek  against  mine,  and  said, 
“You  will  come  here  oftener  than  you  used  to,  now,  won’t  you? 
Oh  I  am  so  glad  I  can  talk  with  you ;  andl  I  want  you  to  come 
here  oftener,  so  I  can  materialize  and  talk  with  you.  I  am  so 
happy  now  to  find  myself  alive,  and  able  to  talk  with  you  still. 
Hypatia  and  others  help  me  so  much,  and  I  get  stronger  each 
time  I  come.  I  can’t  stay  any  longer  now.”  (Fulfillment  of 
promise  complete.) 

As  I  stood  looking  at  her  she  got  shorter  and  shorter  in  stature, 
and  while  still  looking  me  in  the  face,  she  went  down  and  down, 
in  sight  of  all  the  sitters,  till  she  disappeared  in  the  floor.  Her 
voice  in  this,  her  first  materialization,  was  not  as  strong  as  when 
speaking  through  the  trumpet  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s. 

I  here  desire  to  say  that  May’s  physical  form  as  materialized, 
was  not  as  large  as  her  physical  form  in  life,  in  other  words 
while  perfectly  natural  in  appearance  in  other  respects,  still  it 
was  not  of  full  natural  stature.  This  fault  or  deficiency  may  be 
rectified  in  her  future  appearances,  the  first  of  which  will  be 
according  to  promise  at  Wednesday  night’s  seance,  15th  Novem¬ 
ber.  In  her  natural  size  in  life,  she  stood  about  two  inches  shorter 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


95 


than  myself,  and  her  weight  averaged  about  one  hundred  and 
sixty-five  pounds  before  she  took  to  bed. 

A  third  materialization  came  from  the  cabinet  to  me,  and 
claimed  to  be  David  Williams  King,  my  brother,  who  passed  to 
spirit  life  while  a  baby,  not  more  than  eighteen  months  old.  He 
was  born  three  years  after  my  birth,  and  three  years  before  my 
living  brother’s  birth,  and  in  size  appeared  to  be  an  average 
between  my  living  brother  and  myself.  He  said  he  was  with 
very  many  relatives  and  friends  who  were  present  when  May 
entered  the  spirit  realms.  He  soon  passed  away  from  want  of 
power  to  hold  his  form  together,  but  presently  returned  to  tell 
me  he  knew  that  my  spirit  guide,  Hypatia,  would  be  at  Wednes¬ 
day  night’s  seance. 

Another  manifestation  came  from  the  cabinet  in  the  form  of 
a  young,  beautiful,  and  angelic  female,  which  proved  to  be  im¬ 
portant,  inasmuch  asi  it  was  the  form  of  a  young  woman  about 
twenty  years  of  age,  and  corresponding  size,  who  alleged  she  was 
my  daughter  by  my  spirit  wife  May  and  bore  resemblance  to  us 
both ;  and  had  passed  to  spirit  realms  at  her  physical  birth ;  and 
promised  (prediction)  she  would  be  able  to  speak  more  clearly 
and  distinctly  through  the  trumpet  when  opportunity  presented, 
at  which  time,  unless  she  had  some  other  privilege  sooner,  she 
would  tell  me  (prediction)  the  name  given  her  in  the  spirit 
world.  The  fact  is  that  some  twenty  years  ago  a  female  child 
of  ours  died  at  birth. 

This  occult  demonstration  in  the  seance  presents  to  the  reader’s 
mind  the  problem  of  attained  spiritual  growth,  where  an  infant 
soul  has  passed  on  to  the  other  life,  and  returns  as  an  adult 
demonstration.  The  question*  has  been  submitted  verbally  to  me 
more  than  once,  “Do  you  really  mean  to  say  that  infants  and 
small  children  attain  to  adult  existence  in  spirit  life?”  In  answer 
I  may  say  that  I  have  been  so  informed  by  communicating  in¬ 
telligences  from  the  spirit}  spheres.  But  I  also  think,  and  I  am 
guided  by  that  reason  that  Deity  has  implanted  in  me,  and  so 
realize  the  meaning  of  the  words  that  Christ  used  when  he  said, 
“Suffer  little  children  to  come  unto  me,  for  of  such  is  the  King¬ 
dom  of  heaven.”  I  do  not  take  the  meaning  as  literal,  as  to  size 


96 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


or  stature,  for  it  would  surely  be  unthinkable,  if  after  all  the 
teaching  and  preaching  during  the  past  centuries,  it  were  found 
to  be  true  that  no  souls  of  adults  had  gone  to  heaven ;  or  that 
there  were  no  adult  souls  to  save  ;  but  rather  it  would  seem,  as  it  is 
conveyed  to  my  mind,  that  all  are  as  little  children  in  their  knowl¬ 
edge  of  their  future  state,  and  have  to  be  taught  by  those  who 
have  gained  by  long  experience  “over  there.”  Even  adults,  and 
those  bereft  of  reason,  when  entering  on  the  future  state,  begin 
to  acquire  knowledge,  or  start,  so  to  speak,  at  No.  1,  helpless  as 
babes  bereft  of  mother ;  and  are  cared  for,  and  are  taught,  for 
progression  is  a  law  in  spirit  spheres.  If  it  were  not  so  there 
would  be  stagnation  in  development,  and  souls  would  cease  to 
aspire.  Every  human  being  changes  in  both  soul  and  body  from 
the  cradle  to  the  grave.  All  are  wholly  dependent  at  the  start 
on  a  mother,  real  or  foster ;  and  all  have  a  limitation  of  physical 
development  in  earth  life  for  an  allotted  time;  and  in  accord 
with  the  soul’s  requirement.  Each  infant  child,  and  every  man, 
has  a  soul  which  utilizes  a  body,  which  changes  continually  as 
the  soul  develops  till  the  end  of  mortal  life;  and  when  the  body 
is  no  longer  of  service,  whether  young  or  old,  it  is  discarded, 
and  the  soul  is  set  free ;  and  like  its  former  body,  has  a  limitation 
to  attain,  and  hence  develops  to  its  perfection  by  slow  degrees. 
As  in  a  juvenile  or  ordinary  school,  all  the  while  there  are  little 
children  there,  but  the  same  little  children  are  not  there  all  the 
while;  for  as  mental  development  takes  place,  they  each  pass  on 
through  other  grades  of  mental  and  physical  development  till  they 
reach  man’s  estate  on  earth ;  while  in  the  future  life  each  soul 
attains  its  own  perfected  growth,  and  when  it  adopts  the  human 
form,  that  form  would  simply  be  of  the  dimensions  it  would 
have  been,  had  it  developed  as  did  the  soul,  during  those  selfsame 
years,  or  lived  during  those  added  years. 

From  the  storehouse  of  acquired  evidence  we  take  that  which 
sustains  the  claim  that  human  life  as  spirit  is  a  continuity,  and 
therefore  an  infant  spirit  which  enters  the  spirit  sphere  must  con¬ 
tinue  to  develop  until  it  completes  its  spirit  growth,  and  becomes 
a  perfected  soul.  This  it  will  accomplish  more  rapidly  than  when 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


97 


fettered  or  confined  in  the  environment  of  physical  matter,  its 
first  and  cruder  abode. 

Reverting  again  to  the  seance  and  to  the  phenomena:  Up  to 
this  point  I  felt  I  had  had  a  great  share  of  what  presented,  but 
I  was  destined  to  have  more,  for  a  man  with  auburn  hair,  a 
small  moustache  and  short  beard  of  the  same  color,  a  dark  coat, 
white  turn-down  collar,  black  tie,  advanced  to  me  and  bowed; 
and  put  his  finger  to  his  throat  and  mouth  to  indicate  that  he 
could  not  speak,  for  the  person  he  represented  himself  to  be  could 
not  speak  before  death,  on  account  of  tuberculosis  in  the  throat 
and  lungs.  He  impressed  me  as  being  Mr.  H — ^ — ,  who  a  few 
years  ago  was  the  storekeeper  at  an  Institution  in  Toronto,  at 
which  I  was,  and  am  at  this  writing,  the  medical  officer.  I  identi¬ 
fied  him  as  the  party  mentioned  above. 

I  would  estimate  the  number  of  materializations  at  this  seance 
as  about  twenty. 

Unbelievable  Phenomena,  Become  Believable  by 
Investigation  and  Experience 

How  natural  for  people  of  inexperience  to  judge  or  criticize 
the  experience  of  others,  and  point  out  its  failures.  How  easy 
it  is  for  one  ignorant  of  the  knowledge,  to  assume  that  the 
knowledge  is  deficient  of  genuine  existence.  Supreme  pity  is 
deserved  by  the  ignorant  mortal,  who  cannot  accept  as  true  some¬ 
thing  that  he  docs  not  happen  to  have  knowledge  of  and  how 
prone  individual  humanity  is  to  affirm  the  impossibility  of  such 
phenomena,  as  mentioned  by  those  who  have  knowledge  of  them. 
How  common  a  remark  it  is  that  we  hear,  “I  would  not  believe  it 
unless  I  saw  it,  and  then  I  would  want  to  be  sure  it  was  not  a 
fraud.”  What  a  minute  array  of  humanity  there  would  be,  if  it 
were  to  be  composed  of  people  who  would  not  believe  something, 
unless  they  could  see  it,  and  as  a  matter  of  fact  it  is  substantially 
true,  that  the  great  bulk  of  our  knowledge  comes  from  what 
other  people  tell  us,  what  we  read  in  books,  and  the  public  press ; 
and  what  a  minimum  of  knowledge  we  have  acquired  from  in¬ 
vestigation,  and  individual  observation.  I  remember  reading 
somewhere  of  a  person  who  would  not  believe  what  another  had 


98 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


stated  to  be  a  fact,  unless  he  could  appreciate  it  with  all  his  senses, 
and  having  presented  to  him  the  opportunity  of  being  tested  in 
that  way  regarding  pain,  was  asked  if  he  could  see  it,  hear  it, 
taste  it,  smell  it.  No,  but  he  could  feel  it.  In  brief  he  could 
only  appreciate  it  by  one-fifth  of  his  normal  senses,  and  he  would 
certainly  come  far  short  in  proving  it  to  be  a  truth  by  his  five 
senses,  and  yet  he  accepted  that  pain  as  true  by  sense  of  feeling 
only.  I  am  prepared  to  admit  that  many  phenomena  are  so 
strange,  and  incomprehensible,  that  they  seem  unbelievable  until 
they  have  been  appreciated  or  experienced  by  physical  senses. 
I  mention  some  such  phenomena  that  have  occurred  at  seances, 
and  will  limit  the  examples  to  the  three  Jonson  seances  on  the 
13th,  15th,  and  16th  of  November,  1911,  which  were  appreciated, 
and  can  be  testified  to,  on  those  occasions  by  from  six  to  fifteen 
people  at  each  seance. 

As  examples  of  these  classes  of  phenomena  to  which  I  have 
alluded,  I  was  witness  to  a  form  of  a  full  grown  tall  old  man 
walking  about  the  room,  while  Jonson  sat  with  the  other  sitters 
outside  of  the  cabinet  in  view  of  every  one  present ;  and  that 
form  talked  with  those  who'  claimed  to  be  relatives  and  with 
myself,  and  at  the  request  of  one  of  them  he  picked  up  his 
little  granddaughter  of  seven  years  of  age,  held  her  up  in  his 
arms,  kissed  her,  then  put  her  down  on  the  floor,  in  full  view  of 
everybody,  then  melted,  so  to  speak,  down  into  the  floor,  and 
disappeared  from  view,  several  feet  from  the  cabinet  entrance. 
Now  had  there  been  a  bold  rush  to  catch  the  body  and  it  had 
succeeded,  it  would  not  have  been,  as  we  are  so  often  assured, 
the  medium  in  disguise,  for  Mr.  Jonson  sat  in  an  armchair  on 
my  left,  and  was  neither  near  the  opening  of  the  cabinet,  nor 
near  the  form.  But  even  mosquito  netting,  which  has  been  so 
often  suggested,  by  some  who  never  have  investigated,  as  very 
necessary  or  useful  to  catch  the  fraudulent  persons  who  pretended 
to  be  spirits,  could  not  have  caught  or  held  this  spirit,  for  it  went 
down  into  the  floor  as  vapor  and  disappeared. 

Another  form,  with  long  hair,  like  an  Indian  girl,  reaching  to 
the  knee,  and  holding  Crysanthemums  in  her  hand,  went  down 
at  another  spot,  feet  first,  arm  extended  above  the  head,  holding 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


99 


the  flowers,  down  and  down,  till  nothing  remained  but  hand  and 
flowers,  and  lastly  they  also  disappeared  in  the  floor,  which  pre¬ 
sented  no  evidence  of  an  artificial  opening.  Still  Jonson  sat  on  my 
left,  and  Mrs.  Jonson  away  to  my  right,  when  almost  immediately 
the  flowers  again  appeared  at  the  spot  on  the  floor  where  they  had 
disappeared  a  minute  before  and  began  to  rise,  followed  by  the 
materializing  hand  and  arm  and  head,  neck,  body,  limbs  and  feet ; 
and  all  this  in  view  of  the  sitters  outside  the  cabinet,  and  no  one 
in  close  proximity  to  the  form ;  and  the  Jonsons  at  either  end  of 
the  circle  of  sitters.  Where  does  the  fraud  appear  with  these 
phenomena?  And  the  form  talks  after  it  reappears.  The  existence 
of  these  and  similar  phenomena  can  no  longer  be  denied,  nor  can 
they  be  credited  to  fraud.  Their  cause  may  be  legitimately  dis¬ 
cussed,  however. 

The  majority  of  the  forms  I  saw  in  the  three  seances  in  Novem¬ 
ber  materialized  inside  the  cabinet,  and  returning  towards  the 
cabinet,  disappeared  as  they  got  to  the  opening  of  the  curtains, 
but  without  entering  the  cabinet.  A  few  materialized  outside  of 
the  cabinet,  and  several  were  materialized  inside  the  cabinet,  while 
Jonson  sat  at  one  end  of  the  semi-circle  of  people  part  of  the 
time,  and  another  part  of  the  time  hel  walked  along  in  front  of 
the  line  of  sitters,  drawing  magnetism  from  them  to  build  the 
forms  inside  the  cabinet,  so  Grey  Feather,  his  Indian  spirit  guide, 
explained  through  Jonson’s  vocal  organs ;  and  lastly  a  part  of  the 
time  was  spent  on  the  inside  of  the  cabinet. 

The  presence  of  music,  instrumental  or  vocal,  or  both,  facilitated 
the  appearance  of  the  forms.  Absence  of  music  seems  to  lessen 
the  number  and  efficiency  of  the  forms.  The  higher  developed 
intelligences  appear  to  have  the  power  of  producing  much  more 
light,  or  else  require  less  darkness  to  exhibit  themselves  in 
materialized  form  and  perfect  detail.  I  have  had  opportunities 
for  years  past  to  investigate  Jonson.  I  have  yet  to  discover  the 
first  act  of  fraud  on  his  part,  and  have  no  hesitation  in  saying 
that  after  full  and  satisfactory  investigations,  I  express  my  belief 
and  well  established  knowledge  that  the  phenomena  are  genuine, 
and  the  most  clever  conjurers,  professional  fraud  exposers,  leading 
United  States  detective,  nor  any  of  our  modern  Solomons,  have 


100  ■  DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


so  far  been  able  to  locate  and  establish  as  such,  one  single  act 
of  fraud  on  thd  part  of  J.  B.  Jonson,  sol  far  as  I  have  learned. 

Predictions  of  an  Important  Seance  for  Me 

After  finishing  my  record  of  the  Monday  night  seance,  November 
13,  1911,  I  compiled  the  following  for  comparison  with  Wednes¬ 
day  night’s  record  of  November  15,  1911.  My  alleged  spirit  guide 
Hypatia  has  notified  me  herself  on  dififerent  occasions,  and 
through  a  trumpet  recently  at  Detroit,  that  she  will  be  at  a 
seance  at  Jonson’s  Wednesday  night,  15th  November,  1911;  that 
she  will  not  only  bring  my  spirit  wife,  “May,”  with  her,  but  will 
also  have  a  surprise  in  store  for  me ;  whereas  my  alleged  spirit 
wife.  May,  has  notified  me  through  my  alleged  guide,  Hypatia, 
and  through  my  alleged  nephew,  Jesse,  in  spirit  life,  speaking 
through  a  trumpet ;  and  by  her  own  statement  through  a  trumpet 
in  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  seance  room,  —  and  also  while  in  her  material¬ 
ized  form  this  Monday  night,  13th  November,  1911,  that  she  will 
come  to  the  Wednesday  night,  15th  November,  1911,  seance,  and 
will  be  materialized,  and  will  talk  with  me  ( prediction),  so  I  shall 
have  the  opportunity  of  testing  her,  and  of  asking  her  to  further 
prove  —  if  she  don’t  do  it  voluntarily  —  her  human  personality ; 
and  as  my  alleged  spirit  daughter  (prediction)  has  promised  to 
be  at  that  same  seance ;  and  that  while  there  she  will  tell  me  the 
name  which  was  given  to  her  in  spirit  realms  (prediction)  ;  and 
lastly.  Dr.  Sharp,  the  alleged  spirit  guide  and  control  of  Mrs. 
Wriedt,  told  me  in  Detroit,  he  also  would  be  present  at  the  seance 
above  designated ;  and  would  step  out  of  the  cabinet,  and  place 
his  hand  upon  my  head  (prediction).  I  have  therefore  decided  to 
secure,  if  possible,  a  stenographic  report  of  the  seance,  and  have 
said  report,  when  complete,  sworn  to  as  a  correct  report ;  so  that 
instead  of  an  epitomized  report,  by  myself,  of  the  personally 
interesting  parts,  I  shall  have  a  report  of  everything  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end  of  the  seance,  without  personally  having 
anything  to  do  with  that  report. 

All  those  foregoing  predictions  were  made  to  and  received  by 
me  personally,  from  the  various  intelligences,  at  different  times, 
and  in  a  different  place,  and  through  a  different  channel  of  com- 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


101 


munication  in  their  entirety,  without  my  being  able  to  discover 
error,  or  the  existence  of  fraud,  as  regards  the  main  facts ;  and 
I  leave  fair-minded  people  and  honest  critics,  to  say  whether  on 
the  hypothesis  of  fraud,  or  that  of  any  other  hypothesis  than  the 
natural  one,  “the  spirit  hypothesis,”  such  facts,  explanations, 
conversations  regarding  family  matters ;  and  individual  mutual 
talks,  regarding  articles  that  have  been  put  in  a  place  of  safety ; 
and  something  directed  to  be  done,  with  a  special  article,  which 
was  not  even  entertained  as  a  thought  for  a  single  moment;  or 
advice  given  contrary  to  a  conclusion  reached  in  my  own  mind, 
touching  some  particular  matter  and  whether  what  I  now  note 
and  declare  as  herein  preceding,  is  within  the  bounds  of  possibil¬ 
ity,  to  carry  out,  by  fraudulent  means.  Such  samples  are  to  be 
found  in  my  earlier  trumpet  communications  of  this  series  of 
seven  seances. 


CHAPTER  XVI 


The  fourth  seance  of  the  series  of  seven,  and  the  second 
J.  B.  Jonson  seance,  is  the  only  one  of  the  entire 
November  series,  which  embraces  a  record  of  all  the 
materializations  presenting  during  the  seance ;  and  is  likewise 
exceptional,  in  that  it  is  the  only  one  of  any  series  up  to  date, 
in  which  the  full  record  is  reproduced  in  the  publication ;  and  the 
entire  stenographic  report  of  what  each  and  every  one  presenting 
said ;  also  the  stenographer’s  description  of  their  appearance  and 
acts,  as  well  as  each  event  of  sufficient  interest  tO'  be  described. 
I  had  several  reasons  for  having  not  only  a  full  report  of  every¬ 
thing  of  interest,  but  for  making  sure  of  its  being  an  accurate 
report  in  every  particular.  I  had  been  assured  by  Hypatia  in 
Detroit,  that  a  grand  surprise  would  await  me  at  this  seance 
(November  15,  1911)  ;  and  it  occurred  to  me  that  if  I  made  the 
record,  it  would  not  be  a  stenographic  one,  nor  would  I  be  able 
to  concentrate  my  attention  upon  the  presenting  surprise ;  and  the 
individual  incidents  connected  with  each  and  every  one  of  the 
psychical  phenomena  under  observation ;  and  at  the  same  time 
take  notes  or  make  a  full  report,  and  do  justice  either  to  myself 
or  to  the  report.  Further,  I  desired  the  report  to  be  absolutely 
and  verbally  perfect,  as  only  a  stenographer’s  report  could  be ; 
and  my  own  would  not  be  a  stenographer’s  report.  Lastly  I 
desired  to  place  myself  beyond  the  possibility  of  being  to  any 
extent  chargeable  with  interested  motives,  on  account  of  what 
was  promised,  or  influenced  by  selfish  reason,  or  excited  by  what 
presented  itself  to  my  senses  and  mind ;  or  having  my  personal 
judgment  warped,  so  as  to  influence  the  description  I  might  sub¬ 
sequently  give  to  others  as  evidential  matter ;  and  to  make  it 
obvious  that  I  could  not  possibly  write  up  the  matter  to  suit 
myself,  or  to  give  color  to  the  possibilities  or  probabilities,  which 
might  be  presumed  to  harmonize  with  my  opinions,  hopes  or 
convictions.  In  fact  my  wishes  were  no  less  my  soul’s  desire,  to 
demonstrate  a  truth,  for  I  did  indeed  most  heartily  and  sincerely 

102 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


103 


desire  that  some  one,  possibly  a  member  of  this  select  group  of 
psychical  researchers,  or  some  one  employed  by  the  class,  would 
make  for  me  a  true  and  full  report  of  the,  in  this  instance,  seance 
as  a  whole,  for  me  to  have  and  to  hold  as  evidence  of  what 
occurred  outside  of  my  own  written  or  spoken  description.  I  had 
not  been  at  the  seance  many  minutes,  before  I  found  that  the 
secretary  of  the  club  or  class  was  making  a  stenographic  report 
for  the  class.  When  opportunity  presented  I  bespoke  a  copy  of 
the  record,  and  secured  the  promise  of  it,  and  later  obtained 
possession  of  it,  and  thus  my  wishes,  my  soul’s  desire,  my  true 
prayer  for  a  full  report  —  and  the  said  report  to  bear  the  declara¬ 
tion,  and  sworn  statements  of  the  stenographer  who  made  it,  as 
to  all  the  matter,  including  that  which  pertains  to  my  guide  and 
loved  ones,  as  evidential  records  —  was  truly  answered.  Those 
present  never  saw  me  before.  I  had  only  a  few  minutes  previously 
been  introduced  to  them  as  the  official  representative  of  the 
Canadian  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  and  as  such  was 
admitted  as  the  first  individual  not  a  member,  who  was  permitted 
the  privilege  of  being  present  at  a  seance  with  this  class  of  in¬ 
vestigators,  which  favor  is  hereby  acknowledged.  I  attach  the 
record  as  embracing  all  the  main  features,  and  being  absolutely 
independent  of  even  a  suggestion  on  my  part. 

The  Official  Stenographer’s  Sworn  Record 

“The  seventh  meeting  of  the  Sunflower  Class  was  a  notable  one, 
being  honored  by  the  presence  of  Dr.  John  S.  King  of  Toronto, 
Canada,  who  is  President  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical 
Research,  with  a  charter  from  the  Government.  This  gentleman’s 
long  experience  in  the  work,  and  high  development,  were  a  source 
of  great  benefit  to  the  class,  and  productive  of  marvelously 
beautiful  materializations  most  thoroughly  appreciated  by  the 
Circle.  We  wish  to  thank!  Dr.  King  for  his  words,  attesting  to 
personal  experiences  so  convincing  as  to  impress  more  deeply  on 
our  hearts  and  minds  the  wonderful  possibilities  of  this  great 
work,  stimulating  us  to  strive  together  to  the  attaining  of  results 
with  ever-increasing  earnestness  and  harmonious  co-operation. 


104 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  materializations  recorded  for  this  meeting  are  as  follows: 

1  . JOHN. 

Mrs.  Moore’s  son,  a  boy  of  sixteen,  who  has  been  in  spirit-land 
for  one  year.  This  date  being  that  of  his  birthday,  Mrs.  Moore 
had  provided  beautiful  chrysanthemums  to  be  given  to  each 
materialization  in  honor  of  the  occasion.  John  materialized  most 
beautifully  and  strong,  building  up  in  sight  of  all,  attired  in  his 
vesture,  having  on  earth  been  a  member  of  the  Trinity  Choir. 
Seeing  that  his  mother  held  a  largd  bouquet  to  give  to  him,  he 
entered  the  cabinet,  dematerialized  the  book  which  he  held,  and 
returned  to  receive  the  flowers.  Walking  beside  Mrs.  Jonson, 
John  went  from  one  end  of  the  circle  to  the  other,  carrying  the 
flowers,  thanking  one  and  all  for  their  words  of  greeting  on  this 
his  birthday. 

Returning  to  his  mother,  he  told  her  to  be  patient,  that  it  would 
not  be  long  before  she  would  be  able  to  walk.  Going  to  the  cabinet 
for  more  strength,  John  returned,  stopping  on  his  way  to  take 
a  flower  from  the  case  and  handing  it  to  Sister  Martha,  the 
beautiful  white  sister  who  materialized  with  him.  Standing  beside 
his  mother,  John  said: 

“Now  don’t  sigh,  mother  dear,  nor  be  sad.  It  would  be  much 
worse  if  you  could  not  see  me  at  all,  but  had  to  feel  that  I  was 
lying  in  that  cold  ground.’’ 

Meanwhile  Sister  Martha  was  drawing  strength  from  the 
medium  toward  John  with  indescribably  graceful  movements  of 
her  hands. 

John  continued :  “I  have  to  go  now.  Please  don’t  feel  lonely 
any  more,  will  you,  because  I  am  with  you?’’ 

Kissing  his  mother  and  little  cousin  goodbye,  John  retreated 
toward  the  cabinet,  holding  in  his  hand  the  large  bouquet  of 
chrysanthemums,  and  dematerialized  both  himself  and  the  flowers, 
outside  of  the  cabinet,  in  full  view  of  the  class. 

2  . FLORENCE. 

Mrs.  Russell’s  sister.  This  materialization  is  a  beautiful  young 
woman  who  comes  each  week  to  talk  to  her  sister,  often  giving 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


105 


important  advice.  At  the  close  of  the  conversation  Florence  de- 
materialized  with  her  flower  from  the  birthday  bouquet. 

3  . VIOLA. 

This  is  always  a  beautifully  strong  materialization,  being  Mrs. 
Jonson’s  spirit  guide.  As  is  usual  with  her,  Viola  had  a  bright 
word  for  each  member.  Answering  the  general  greeting  she  said 
gaily:  “Fse  right  here.”  To  Mrs.  Moore:  “Hello  Auntie  Moore,” 
“Told  Mr.  Robleto  that  he  was  too  sober  tonight.”  Accepted  her 
birthday  flower  saying  “Sorry  Auntie  Cleary  is  not  here,”  a 
facetious  remark  which  she  seldom  forgets,  appearing  to  ignore 
the  member’s  invariable  presence.  Going  toward  Mrs.  Cleary, 
Viola  held  her  dress  in  position  to  catch  the  candy  which  Mrs. 
Cleary  had  brought  for  her.  Inquired  about  Mr.  Eyster  as 
“Secretary  No.  2”  and  instructed  the  secretary  to  put  a  long 
line  for  him  way  across  the  page  for  being  absent.  Standing  in 
the  middle  of  the  floor  Viola  said :  “Now  I  cannot  go  until  you 
all  laugh  and  talk  at  once  and  give  me  a  little  brightness.  We 
must  have  conditions,  you  know.” 

Dematerializing  outside  the  cabinet,  Viola  added  as  she  was 
disappearing: 

“Now  don’t  all  get  sober  the  minute  I  quit  talking.” 

Grey  Feather,  who  had  kept  his  medium  outside  of  the  cabinet 
with  the  class  to  show  that  he  could  bring  the  materialization  in 
that  way,  was  magnetizing  some  cards  for  members,  and  the 
sparks  radiated  from  same  in  a  remarkable  manner. 

4  . INEZ. 

This  materialization  is  a  most  beautiful  young  girl  of  about  six¬ 
teen,  and  is  a  guide  of  Mrs.  Cleary’s.  She  always  brings  brightness 
into  the  circle,  and  has  a  merry  word  for  all.  Receiving  her 
birthday  flower  and  thanking  Mrs.  Moore  prettily  for  same,  she 
went  over  to  Grey  Feather  and  held  the  flower  under  his  nose, 
much  to  his  disgust. 

5  . CELIA. 

Mr.  Cleary’s  guide.  This  is  always  a  beautiful  materialization 
of  a  young  woman,  and  Mr.  Cleary  has  received  many  convincing 
proofs  of  her  power  to  assist  him.  Celia  gracefully  acknowledged 


106 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


an  introduction  to  Dr.  King,  and  walking  toward  the  flowers, 
evidently  admiring  them,  remarked  that  flowers  gave  beautiful 
conditions.  After  a  private  conversation  with  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Cleary  in  the  cabinet,  Celia  dematerialized  visibly  to  the  class. 

6  . INEZ. 

Inez  reappeared  and  took  Grey  Feather  into  the  cabinet. 
Returning,  Inez  let  each  member  smell  her  flower,  remarking: 

“They  don’t  smell  very  good,  but,  oh,  aren’t  they  beautiful?” 

Coming  to  Dr.  King,  Inez  let  him  feel  her  beautiful  hair. 
Dancing  merrily  toward  the  cabinet  Inez  also  dematerialized 
visibly. 

7  . CLARA. 

A  young  woman  materialization  whO'  is  a  guide  for  Mrs.  Russell. 
She  says  her  name  is  Clara  Navarre,  and  her  home  on  earth  was 
in  Philadelphia.  Also  that  she  is  in  the  fourth  sphere  and  soon 
to  progress  to  the  fifth.  That  she  will  tell  Mrs.  Russell  when 
the  time  of  her  progression  comes.  Asked  if  she  wore  a  white 
veil  because  of  the  sphere  in  which  she  existed,  she  replied : 

“No,  we  garb  ourselves  in  white  because  it  is  symbolical  of 
purity.” 

8  . DR.  SHARP. 

A  wonderful  materialization  of  a  spirit  guide  of  Mrs.  Etta 
Wriedt  of  Detroit,  and  a  man  whose  venerable  and  striking 
appearance  commanded  the  most  profound  respect.  Responding  to 
Dr.  King,  Dr.  Sharp  said : 

“Yes,  I  told  you  I  would  come.  I  told  you  at  Sister  Wriedt’s 
in  Detroit  I  would  be  here.  Yes,  you  may  tell  them  who  I  am.” 

Having  told  Dr.  King  at  Detroit  that  he  would  place  his  hand 
on  his.  Dr.  King’s,  head,  when  he  visited  Toledo,  he  also  fulfilled 
that  promise,  saying :  “I  am  a  friend  to  all  who  are  friends  of 
the  Cause.”  With  the  words:  “Here  is  your  surprise,”  this  im¬ 
posing  spirit  dematerialized.  (Fulfillment  complete.) 

9  . HYPATIA. 

Dr.  King’s  high  spirit  guide,  who  alleges  she  is  the  daughter 
of  Theon,  next  walked  out  of  the  cabinet  into  full  view^  of  all 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


107 


present.  Words  are  hardly  adequate  to  describe  in  a  fitting 
manner  this  beautiful  materialization.  Tall  and  queenly  with 
brilliant  jewels  scintillating  at  every  movement,  Hypatia  was 
glorious  to  behold.  She  said  to  Dr.  King : 

“This  is  the  rose  you  gave  me  nearly  two  years  ago,  do  you 
remember?  and  here  is  another.  This  is  the  white  ribbon  and 
this  is  the  blue.  The  conditions  here  tonight  are  glorious.  How 
beautiful  that  this  was  all  prepared  ahead  of  time  for  you  all.  I 
am  going  now,  but  I  will  try  to  return.  Just  sit  down.” 

Requested  by  Mrs.  Jonson  to  take  the  birthday  flower  to  Dr. 
Sharp  Hypatia  graciously  accepted  her  own  flower  and  the  one 
for  Dr.  Sharp.  While  waiting  for  Hypatia  to  return,  Dr.  King 
spoke  most  beautifully  of  the  wonderful  qualities  of  his  queenly 
guide,  saying  he  had  always  found  her  the  soul  of  loyalty  and 
truth.  That  she  helps  his  wife  on  the  other  side,  making  her 
rapid  progression  possible.  Also  told  the  class  of  Hypatia’s 
promise  to  bring  to  him  on  this  occasion  his  wife’s  first-born 
child,  who  passed  out  at  birth,  and  who  had  now  grown  to  be  a 
beautiful  young  woman.  When  Dr.  King  had  finished  speaking, 
Hypatia  reappeared  and  said : 

“I  would  do  much  more  tonight  but  it  takes  so  much  power 
from  the  medium,  and  there  are  so  many  yet  to  come  that  it 
would  not  be  right  for  me  to  do  so,  therefore  I  will  bid  yoii 
good  night.” 

Bowing  gracefully  to  all,  this  radiant  spirit  dematerialized 
outside  the  cabinet. 

10 . MAY  DONNA. 

The  promise  of  Hypatia  was  fulfilled  and  Dr.  King  saw  before 
him  his  spirit  daughter,  who  spoke  beautifully  as  follows: 

“Papa,  O  Papa,  I  love  you.  I  came  the  other  evening.  Yes,  I 
am  going  to  tell  you  my]  name.  I  want  to  be  near  to  both  you 
and  Mamma;  so  they  call  me  May  Donna.  The  May  is  for 
Mamma  and  the  Donna  is  for  you.”  Asked  to  spell  the  name. 
May  Donna  did  so  distinctly.  She  continued : 

“You  must  never  feel  sad,  dear  papa,  for  you  never  shall  be 
alone,  so  you  must  not  feel  so  lonesome.  You  will  be,  oh,  so 


108 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


happy  when  mamma  and  I  take  you  with  us.  Don’t  forget,  papa, 
to  tell  all  the  dear  ones  that  I  came.” 

May  Donna  accepted  a  flower  from  her  father,  and  also  took 
the  birthday  flower  from  Mrs.  Moore,  saying: 

“Be  sure  and  tell  grandma  that  I  came.  Good  night,  papa, 
dear,  dear  papa.” 

With  these  loving  words  this  lovely  spirit  dematerialized  in 
view  of  the  class. 

11 . MRS.  JOHN  S.  KING 

(Known  in  the  Records  as  May). 

Beautiful  and  strong,  and  so  convincingfy  natural  as  to  over¬ 
come  a  strong  man’s  self-control,  Dr.  King’s  wife  stood  material¬ 
ized  before  him,  speaking  the  following  comforting  words: 

“Don’t  cry,  dear  Johnnie.  My  dear,  this  life  is  beautiful,  all 
brightness  and  joy.  Oh,  dear  one,  I  love  you  so,  and  the  love  we 
feel  on  earth  only  grows  stronger  and  more  beautiful  on  our  side. 

“Do  just  as  I  said  about  my  things.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
repeat  that.  About  my  jewels,  I  want  them  left  where  they  are 
in  the  safety  deposit  vault  in  the  bank,  I  don’t  want  them  given 
away  for  a  very  long  time,  then  I  will  instruct  you  about  what 
I  want  done  with  them.  The  single  diamond,  I  want  you  as 
soon  as  you  go  home,  to  have  set  as  a  scarf  pin.  Be  careful  and 
watch  where  you  take  it,  do  you  understand  ?  and  when  you  wear 
it,  it  will  make  it  easier  for  me  to  come  near  tq  you. 

“Oh,  my  dear  Johnnie,  I  wish  I  could  stand  here  and  talk  to 
you,  but  I  cannot,  but  as  many  times  as  I  come  it  will  give  me 
more  strength.  Oh,  Johnnie  dear,  I  feel  my  strength  going.  You 
know  I  could  not  speak  when  I  passed  out.  I  want  to  materialize 
to  you  more  often,  dear  Johnnie.” 

Being  asked  what  pet  names  she  called  Dr.  King  besides  “Dear 
Johnnie,”  she  replied  by  mentioning  all  the  terms  of  endearment 
which  she  had  been  accustomed  to  use  to  her  husband. 

Resuming  the  conversation,  Mrs.  King  said: 

“You  were  not  with  me  when  I  passed  out,  Johnnie  dear,  but 
I  could  not  have  spoken  to  you  if  you  had  been  there,  but  now, 
dear  Johnnie,  we  will  make  up  for  lost  time.  I  feel  my  strength 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


109 


leaving  me,  and  I  must  say  good  night,  my  dear,  dear  Johnnie,  I 
love  you  so  much.” 

12.  .  .  .  CONSTANCE  EYSTER. 

A  beautiful  materialization  of  a  child  who  passed  out  at  the 
age  of  eight  years  and  has  been  in  spirit  world  a  year  and  a 
month.  Asked  by  her  mother  how  she  ever  managed  to  get 
through  when  there  were  so  many  great  spirits  there,  she  replied : 

“Well,  you  see,  mamma,  they  sang  a  little  baby  song  and  I  just 
popped  right  in  on  it.”  Being  told  why  her  papa  was  not  present, 
she  replied,  sympathetically: 

“Oh,  poor  daddy.  You  tell  daddy  that  I  am  going  to  help  him 
and  Chrystal  is  going  to  help  him,  and  we  will  make  him  feel 
all  right  again.  And  don’t  feel  sad  so  much,  mamma  dear,  because 
I  am,  oh,  so  happy,  and  I  love  you  and  daddy  more  than  you 
know  that  I  can  love  you.  Chrystal  is  going  to  talk  to  you, 
mamma  dear,  and  now  I  must  go.  Please  say  good  night  to  daddy 
for  me,  and  good  night,  mamma  dear.  I  love  you  so  much.” 

13  . CHRYSTAL. 

Mr.  Eyster’s  beautiful  spirit  guide,  who  always  materializes 
with  strength  and  power.  Giving  a  message  to  be  taken  to  Mr. 
Eyster,  she  said : 

“Tell  the  dear  one  to  push  ahead  in  that  matter.  He  must  get 
hold  of  that.  If  he  has  to  work  day  and  night,  he  must  find  a 
way,  for  in  it  lies  an  end  to  all  worry  for  you  both.  I  see  ahead 
to  great  things  for  you  both.” 

With  a  few  words  of  further  advice  this  powerful  spirit 
dematerialized  outside  of  the  cabinet,  her  silver  crown  resting  on 
the  floor  for  an  instant  before  disappearing. 

14  . MR.  STACK. 

This  is  a  materialization  of  Mrs.  Cleary’s  father,  who  is  always 
convincingly  natural  to  all  who  knew  him  in  life,  even  to  speaking 
with  a  rich  brogue.  When  someone  said  it  was  Mr.  Stack,  he 
replied : 

“Sure  it  is,  but  I  waited  too  long  to  come.  Sure  I  am  happy.” 


no 


DAWN  OF  TFIE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Being  offered  the  birthday  flower  he  took  same  with  the  pleased 
remark,  “Of  course  I’ll  take  it.” 

Mr.  Stack  also  dematerialized  visibly  with  his  flower. 

15 . VIOLA. 

A  beautiful  materialization  of  a  young  girl,  who  is  a  guide  for 
Mrs.  Jonson.  She  seemed  delighted  with  her  birthday  flower,  and 
went  from  one  member  of  the  class  to  the  other  showing  it, 
dematerializing  with  it  in  her  hand. 

16.  .  .  MRS.  MOORE’S  FATHER. 

This  gentleman  materialized  very  distinctly,  and  accepted  his 
flower  from  his  little  grandchild,  who  was  present,  and  kissing  her 
good-bye,  the  little  girl  afterwards  remarking  that  Grandpa’s 
whiskers  tickled  her  mouth. 

17  . MARY.  • 

Mr.  Robleto’s  beautiful  guide,  who  by  referring  to  certain 

happenings  gave  him  positive  proof  that  she  is  always  with  him. 
Sent  a  message  of  love  to  his  family,  and  promised  to  give  him 
proof  of  her  presence  at  a  future  time  by  touching  him  on  the 
head.  Taking  Mr.  Robleto  by  the  hands  Mary  led  him  with  her 
to  the  cabinet,  where,  after  a  short  conversation,  she  dematerialized 
visibly, 

18  . ALBERT. 

This  materialization  is  the  young  son  of  Mrs.  Russell.  He  is 
always  a  beautifully  strong  spirit,  and  talked  for  some  time  with 
his  mother,  also  walking  toward  Dr.  King  for  an  introduction, 
and  expressing  his  pleasure  in  meeting  the  gentleman. 

19  . MINNIE. 

A  beautiful  materialization  of  Mrs.  Moore’s  sister,  who  stood 
during  the  materialization  of  Albert  and  admired  the  flowers, 
removing  from  the  vase  the  one\  of  her  choice.  She  also  told 
Mrs.  Moore  to  be  prepared  for  the  passing  out  of  her  sister, 
which  lies  in  the  near  future.  Saying  good-bye  to  her  little  niece, 
Minnie  and  Albert  dematerialized  almost  simultaneously. 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


111 


This  closed  one  of  the  most  beautiful  and  satisfactory  Circles 
ever  held  by  the  Sunflower  Class. 

Nov.  15, 1911.  (Sgd.)  Katherine  M.  Eyster,  SEC. 

State  of  Ohio,  Lucas  County,  ss : 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  a  Notary  Public  in  and  for 
Lucas  County,  Ohio,  this  18th  day  of  November,  1911. 

(Sgd.)  James  W.  Harbaugh, 
Notary  Public. 

Law  Seal. 


ADDENDA. 

Readers  will,  in  the  foregoing  seance,  find  fulfillment  of  pre¬ 
dictions  made  in  the  Detroit  trumpet  seances,  with  addition  of 
more  new  evidence. 

Dr.  Sharp,  guide  of  Etta  Wriedt,  was  present  as  promised, 
materialized,  placed  his  hand  on  my  head,  and  contributed  to  my 
surprise. 

Hypatia  brought  May  and  our  daughter  to  the  seance  so  they 
could  both  materialize  and  talk  with  me ;  handed  to  me  the  two 
roses  May  and  I  gave  her,  when  May  was  in  earth  life,  nearly 
two  years  before  this,  thus  completing  a  test  of  her  (Hypatia’s) 
capacity,  which  she  had  promised.  This  is  referred  to  at  length 
elsewhere.  She  also  fulfilled  her  promise  to  bring  my  angel 
daughter  to  materialize  and  talk  with  me. 

May  Donna  fulfilled  her  promise  to  tell  me  the  name  the  angels 
gave  to  her. 

May  fulfilled  each  promise  made  at  Detroit.  She  also  gave 
evidence  that  she  was  with  me  and  knew  what  articles  were  in 
the  safety-deposit  vault,  which  I  only  placed  there  on  Friday, 
as  I  left  home  the  next  day,  and  no  living  person  save  myself 
knew  what  I  had  placed  there,  or  when.  She  also  gave  in  response 
to  a  request  of  a  lady  present,  all  the  pet  names  I  called  her  by 
when  in  our  home,  and  did  so  correctly.  She  likewise  made  a 
request  of  me  which  no  one  else  could  comply  with,  the  outcome 
of  which  will  appear  as  completed  and  complied  with,  in  a  future 
chapter.  J.  S.  K. 


CHAPTER  XVII 


This  seance  was, held  on  Thursday  night,  16th  November, 
1911,  following  the  special  seance  of  the  night  before. 
The  Thursday  night  seance  each  week  is  called  the 
public  seance,  inasmuch  as  it  is  open  to  admission  to  those  not 
belonging  to  the  Sunflower  Class,  nor  to  any  special  circle  of 
friends ;  and  it  is  the  circle  to  which  newcomers,  strangers,  and 
personal  friends  of  some  of  those  who  are  more  or  less  familiar 
with  seances,  are  admitted,  or  acquaintances  of  the  Jonsons.  As 
every  opportunity  for  me  counted,  I  availed  myself  of  this  one, 
and  found  myself  present  at  the  appointed  time,  for  the  opening 
of  the  seance.  I  recognized  three  or  four  whom  I  had  met  on 
previous  occasions,  but  the  total  number  present  was  less  than  at 
the  previous  seance.  Of  the  materializations  which  presented,  in 
all  about  twenty,  several  had  presented  at  one  or  other  of  the 
two  preceding  seances. 

The  forms  which  came  to  me  at  this  seance,  and  held  converse, 
were  only  four.  The  first  form  to  come  to  and  speak  with  me 
was  the  man  whom  I  have  described  in  a  previous  chapter,  as  the 
one  who  pointed  to  his  throat  and  mouth  at  the  Monday  night 
seance,  but  who  was  on  that  occasion  unable  to  talk  with  me ;  but 
he  now  walked  right  up  to  me,  so  that  I  could  see  his  every 
feature,  and  every  movement  of  his  eyes  and  lips,  and  hear  the 
words  distinctly,  as  they  passed  through  his  lips.  He  was  dressed 
as  on  the  previous  occasion,  and  a  perfect  reproduction  of  his 
former  self ;  a  man  I  had  known  in  life  as  connected  with  a  public 
institution,  and  as  I  had  often  seen  him  dressed  in  his  Sunday 
clothing  in  my  city.  This  time  his  face  was  radiant  with  smiles, 
and  joy  seemed  to  gleam  in  his  eyes.  He  spoke  as  follows: 
“Doctor,  when  you  return  to  Toronto  I  want  you  to  tell  Mrs. 

O - ,  —  who  thinks  that  I  am  dead,  —  that  I  am  not  dead,  that 

you  saw  me  and  talked  with  me,  and  that  I  asked  you  to  tell 
her  this.  Will  you  do  so?”  And  I  told  him  that  I  would.  (On 
my  return  I  did  as  promised.  J.  S.  K.). 

112 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


113 


May  Donna,  my  alleged  Spifit  daughter,  for  the  third  time 
materialized,  and  seemed  to  have  gained  in  strength  each  time. 
She  said  that  both  she  and  her  mamma  were  with  me  most  of 
the  time,  and  would  accompany  me  back  to  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  in 
Detroit;  and  then  back  to  my  home  in  Toronto,  to  keep  me  from 
becoming  sad;  and  would,  before  long,  be  able  to  talk  with  me, 
and  to  appear  to  me  when  alone. 

Before  sneaking  of  the  next  form  to  appear,  I  may  say  that  a 
single  light  on  the  wall  behind  the  sitters  cast  its  direct  rays  to 
the  point  where  the  cabinet  curtains  were  separated  by  the  forms 
as  they  came  out  and  where  the  investigators’  faces  turned  from 
the  light  toward  the  face  and  form  which  received  the  light  rays, 
while  the  entire  room  was  dimly  lighted,  but  sufficiently  so  that 
one  could  distinguish  the  sitters,  male  or  female,  in  the  chairs, 
and  easily  note  the  difference  in  size  and  feature  of  those 
presenting. 

The  next  form  to  appear  was  that  of  May,  who  evinced  greater 
strength,  and  the  more  natural  developed  physical  appearance, 
than  on  the  first  occasion,  being  normal,  in  size,  voice,  and  the 
various  attributes  already  mentioned  in  previous  chapters.  On 
this  occasion,  while  speaking  affectionately,  she  expressed  the 
pleasure  that  she  realized  in  her  capability  of  materializing,  and 
being  able  to  talk  in  this  organized  but  transient  body,  though 
she  could  speak  better  through  the  trumpet.  She  also  again 
acknowledged  the  wonderful  care  and  assistance  she  had  received 
from  Hypatia.  She  wished  me  to  visit  the  Jonsons  again  before 
long.  She  promised  to  be  with  me  on  my  return  to  Mrs.  Wriedt’s, 
where  she  would  have  opportunity  of  talking  with  me  through  the 
trumpet.  “We  will  all  be  with  you,”  meaning  those  who  had  been 
with  me  when  I  was  there  before. 

There  came  to  me  in  this  seance  in  materialized  form  a  very 
ancient-looking  and  peculiar-visaged  spirit  form,  who  alleged  he 
was  a  spirit  guide  of  mine,  the  most  ancient  of  all  the  guides. 
He  indeed  was  the  strangest-looking  human  I  had  ever  seen, 
differing  so  much  in  features,  and  in  size  and  color  as  well  as 
dress,  from  known  races.  He  spoke,  giving  a  name  so  long,  and 
so  peculiar,  that  I  could  neither  pronounce,  write,  nor  even 


114 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


remember  it ;  and  found  out  what  little  I  did  find  out  then  regard¬ 
ing  him  through  others ;  through  my  own  alleged  guides,  especially 
Otelleo,  and  the  little  cabinet  spirit  worker,  who  said  that  he, 
the  guide,  would  for  the  present  be  designated  des-Asia.  He 
originally  came  from  Thibet  or  Himalaya  mountains,  in  which 
former  place  he  was  one  time  a  priest  in  a  religion  differing  from 
anything  now  in  existence.  The  little  cabinet  spirit  who  claims 
she  helps  to  build  the  forms  in  the  cabinet  at  these  seances,  speak¬ 
ing  out  after  the  ancient  spirit  dematerialized,  said  he  was 
thousands  of  years  old,  and  had  said  four  or  six  thousand  years 
were  not  much,  as  there  was  a  city  buried  in  Mexico,  which  has 
been  buried  for  full  forty  thousand  years,  but  would  soon  be 
discovered.  I  requested  Otelleo  to  find  out  more  concerning  this 
materialization,  and  to  let  me  know,  and  later  requested  Hypatia 
to  let  me  know  the  purport  of  his  visit,  and  his  character,  and 
whether  he  should  be  recognized.  Though  there  is  no  evidential 
matter,  save  what  the  physical  senses  produce.  Still  I  will  maintain 
the  record  and  await  future  developments. 

My  spirit  guide,  Hypatia,  was  reported  to, be  present,  but  did 
not  materialize  at  this  seance. 


Autobiography  of  J.  B.  Jonson 

[Note  : — In  response  to  my  request  for  a  brief  autobiographical 
sketch  of  his  life  for  publication  in  this  book,  Mr.  J.  B.  Jonson 
complied  by  sending  me  the  following  under  date  of  February  28, 
1912.  The  Author.] 

“I  was  born  in  1854  in  Akron,  Ohio.  Father  was  a  native  of 
England,  and  a  lineal  descendant  on  the  paternal  side  of  the  house 
of  the  immortal  Ben  Jonson,  the  British  poet  and  writer.  His 
father’s  mother,  my  great-grandmother,  was  a  Payne,  a  descendant 
of  Tom  Payne,  the  noted  infidel,  so  called.  Ih  my  boyhood  days 
I  remember  attending  a  celebration  of  Payne’s  birthday,  held  in 
Toledo,  in  the  old  Lyceum  Hall,  then  used  by  Spiritualists  and 
Free  Thinkers,  when  they  spoke  with  much  unction  of  his  relation. 
It  seems  that  his  father,  who,  by  the  way,  was  a  very  wealthy  man 
and  an  intensely  religious  individual,  never  spoke  of  Payne  except 
in  tones  of  disparagement  and  deplored  the  relationship.  His  son 


J.  B.  JONSON, 
Rlaterializing  Medium. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


115 


never  agreed  with  him  either  in  his  views  of  religion  or  Payne. 

Father,  being  the  youngest  son,  at  the  decease  of  his  father,  was 
cut  otf  with  the  usual  portion  accorded  in  those  days  to  the 
youngest,  which  he  refused  to  accept,  coming  to  America  in  1851, 
entered  into  business  in  1853,  meeting  the  one  who  was  to  become 
my  mother,  and  after  a  short  courtship  was  married.  Mother’s 
maiden  name  was  Margaret  J.  Dolson,  she  was  also  of  English 
ancestry.  At  the  time  of  my  birth,  October  16,  1854,  my  parents 
were  boarding  with  a  family  in  Akron,  who  were  spiritualists. 
The  evening  previous  to  my  birth  they  held  a  seance  for  physical 
manifestations,  so  being  born  amid  such  surroundings,  is  it  not 
possible  that  prenatal  conditions  had  something  to  do  with  devel¬ 
opments  of  later  years?  My  earliest  recollections  of  anything  of 
a  psychic  nature  date  back  to  the  time  that  I  was  seven  years 
of  age  —  having  a  sister,  Josephine,  five  years  of  age.  Romping 
through  the  house  one  summer  day  in  childish  play,  she  chasing 
me,  I  ran  out  of  the  house,  and  into,  and  through,  a  large,  burly, 
black-whiskered  man  on  the  steps  of  the  house.  On  turning  round 
no  one  was  there.  My  sister  saw  him,  too.  We  ran  to  mother 
in  fear.  While  telling  her,  father  came  home  from  the  store. 
I  remember  father  saying,  “Tut,  tut !  It  is  all  imagination,”  but 
that  did  not  satisfy  us,  and  all  through  my  boyhood  days  we  had 
various  manifestations,  wherever  we  lived,  unexplained  noises, 
Tappings,  sounds  of  footfalls  at  night  through  rooms  where  no 
one  was  visible  to  our  sight,  in  fact  so  many  manifestations  that 
I  have  not  the  time  or  space  to  mention  them. 

My  first  serious  investigation  began  at  the  age  of  18,  as  to  the 
cause  of  these  manifestations.  My  sister,  who  had  passed  away 
shortly  after  the  first  incident  mentioned,  being  the  first  to  mani¬ 
fest  in  my  first  regular  seance  that  I  sat  in.  My  progress  after 
that  was  rapid,  beginning  with  trance  control  in  1876.  Having 
moved  to  Springfield,  Ohio,  I  became  acquainted  with  friends 
interested  in  Spiritualism,  who  formed  a  circle.  I  got  directions 
to  build  a  cabinet,  and  soon  obtained  physical  manifestations 
under  strict  test  conditions,  and  some  materializations  developed. 
There  occurred  many  things  of  an  occult  nature  during  my 
sojourn  of  four  years  among  the  friends  I  met  in  Springfield,  and 
a  decided  development  of  my  mediumship. 

Coming  back  to  Toledo,  Ohio,  in  1880,  my  employment  inter¬ 
fering  with  our  sittings,  I  did  not  devote  so  much  time  to  the 
subject  for  several  years.  In  the  interval  I  found  that  I  possessed 
mediumship  in  the  trumpet  line,  which  I  have  experienced  more 
or  less  from  time  to  time,  up  to  the  present.  We  had  various 
manifestations  in  our  home  circle  of  spirit  power,  until  I  was 


116 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


forced  through  circumstances  to  come  to  the  front  as  a  public 
medium,  my  first  development  being  as  a  trumpet  medium  and  for 
physical  manifestations,  having  materializations  in  the  meantime, 
which  did  not  assume  the  present  stabilities  until  I  married  my 
present  wife  in  1901,  which  I  lay  to  the  fact  of  our  being  both 
born  under  the  same  planet.  Our  birthdays  fall  respectively,  hers 
on  the  9th  and  mine  on  the  16th  of  October,  making  a  strong 
psychic  combination,  as  per  Butler’s  Solar  Biology. 

As  to  the  character  of  our  manifestations  or  rather  description 
of  them,  I  leave  that  to  others,  as  my  friend,  the  author  of  this 
book,  has  requested  me  to  be  brief  in  sketch  of  my  life,  will  leave 
it  with  the  reader,  with  the  statement  that  if  I  in  my  humble  way 
have  been  the  instrument  through  whom  their  friends,  who  have 
passed  to  the  higher  life,  have  been  able  to  again  come  in  touch 
with  them,  with  the  consoling  knowledge  that  if  a  man  dies  he 
does  indeed  live  again,  then  my  work  has  not  been  in  vain,  or  my 
life  without  purpose. 

I  am,  dear  reader,  yours  sincerely. 


(Sgd.)  J,  B.  JoNSON.” 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


This  seance  was  held  on  Saturday  night,  18th  November, 
1911,  in  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  seance  room,  Detroit.  The 
sitters  were  four  women,  a  man,  and  a  little  boy,  who 
together  with  myself  made  a  circle  of  seven.  I  did  not  take 
copious  notes  as  I  usually  did,  but  wrote  my  record  after  my 
return  to  the  hotel.  I  do  not  therefore  record  all  the  facts,  but 
briefly  note  interesting  features  which  I  deem  worthy  of  record 
as  evidential  in  character.  Dr.  Sharp,  the  control  of  Mrs.  Wriedt, 
greeted  me,  and  in  doing  so,  reminded  me  that  he  had  fulfilled 
the  promise  he  had  made  me  in  this  same  seance  room  last  Sunday, 
the  12th  November,  to  visit  the  Jonson  seance  on  the  night  I  would 
have  my  surprise.  He  had  promised  that  he  would  materialize  in 
the  cabinet,  walk  out,  and  place  his  hand  on  my  head,  and  I  would 
know  by  that  act,  that  it  was  he  (Dr.  Sharp).  I  admitted  to 
his  medium,  Mrs.  Wriedt,  and  before  all  the  sitters,  that  Dr. 
Sharp  had  fully  and  successfully  carried  out  his  promise,  exhibit¬ 
ing  much  strength  when  he  placed  his  hand  on  my  head.  That 
occasion  was  the  second  one  where  Dr.  Sharp  appeared  material¬ 
ized  in  my  presence.  In  my  records  of  August  7,  1910,  I  find 
this  entry,  which  mentions  him,  viz. ; 

“At  the  private  seance  this  Saturday  forenoon,  7th  August, 
1910,  Mrs.  Jonson  sat  with  Mrs.  King  (then  in  mortal  life)  and 
myself,  we  three  being  all  in  room  B,  while  Jonson  was  lying  on 
a  couch  in  room  A,  the  other  side  of  the  curtain,  which  filled  the 
space  left  for  a  door.  After  several  forms  had  materialized,  a 
form  claiming  to  be  that  of  Dr.  Sharp,  a  heavy  set,  and  well 
bearded  intelligent-looking  old  man,  called  on  me,  and  said,  while 
he  stood  in  the  materialized  form,  “As  you  are  an  old  friend  of 
my  medium,  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt  of  Detroit,  I  felt  I  would  like  to 
call  on  you.”  We  (my  wife,  then  living,  and  myself)  bade  him 
welcome,  and  after  a  short  conversation  he  withdrew.” 

The  same  seance  which  Dr.  Sharp  attended  in  materialized 
form,  above  recorded,  was  rendered  memorable  to  me  for  several 

117 


118 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


reasons  which  merit  recognition,  and  may  hold  connection  with 
events  of  prior  date,  as  well  as  with  others  of  later  date  in  this 
volume,  which  even  now,  or  probably  in  the  near  future,  will  by 
association  with  other  dates,  events,  facts,  or  statements,  prove 
to  be  circumstantial  evidence,  or  corroborative  testimony,  hence 
will  be  noted  in  the  foregoing  connection. 

“Otelleo,  another  intelligence,  who  has  held  communication  with 
me  for  years,  through  various  mediums,  and  as  varied  phases, 
having  first  materialized  and  conversed  with  me,  through  this 
same  medium  (J.  B.  Jonson)  in  another  place  in  1907,  as  he 
was  about  to  retire  promised  to  return,  and  bring  with  him  a 
distinguished  personality  that  I  would  be  pleased  to  meet.  He 
retired  and  shortly  after  returned  with  an  alleged  friend  and 
brother;  and  introduced  one  alleged  Hiram  Abiff.” 

“My  guide,  Hypatia,  who  has  always  alleged  that  she  was  the 
daughter  of  Theon,  and  consequently  as  such  would  be  known 
as  the  Neoplatonic  philosopher,  visited  us  and  then  retired,  but 
before  doing  so  promised  to  return  and  did  in  a  little  while 
re-enter  with  another  beautiful  angelic  young  woman,  whom 
she  introduced  to  my  wife  as  Saphrona.  This  same  7th  of  August, 
1910,  seance  was  made  memorable,  by  the  conditions  imposed  and 
accepted,  at  the  time  of  our  presentation  to  Hypatia  of  white 
roses,  tied  in  my  case  with  a  bow  of  white  satin  baby  ribbon, 
and  in  the  case  of  my  then  wife.  May,  tied  in  a  bow  with  blue 
satin  baby  ribbon,  and  which  is  more  fully  referred  to  in  two 
other  chapters  covering  the  present  series  of  s&nces,  viz. ;  at 
Detroit  through  the  trumpet,  and  on  Wednesday  night,  the  15th 
November,  1911,  at  Jonson’s,  on  both  occasions  by  Hypatia,  who 
retained  the  roses  one  year,  three  months  and  eight  days  before 
returning  them  to  me,  tied  as  when  she  received  them,  and  looking 
as  fresh,  and  my  wife  as  spirit  was  present  when  she  did  so.” 

The  next  intelligence  to  address  me  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  seance 
of  18th  November,  1911,  was  Grey  Feather,  the  alleged  Indian 
control  of  J.  B.  Jonson,  in  Toledo,  who  gave  me  two  reasons 
for  coming  to  this  seance,  the  first  being,  that  he  promised  me 
he  would  come,  and  he  now  kept  that  promise;  and  the  second 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


119 


being  a  matter  of  solely  personal  and  private  interest,  which 
would  serve  no  useful  purpose  to  make  record  of  here. 

May,  my  spirit  wife,  followed  Grey  Feather,  and  not  only 
endorsed  what  Grey  Feather  said,  but  went  more  into  details. 

Hypatia  spoke  about  the  same  matter  as  did  Grey  Feather,  and 
May,  but  spoke  more  earnestly  and  advisedly  than  was  usual 
with  her. 

The  attitude  and  earnestness  of  these  three  spirit  witnesses  in 
their  several  communications  to  me,  touching  a  matter  of  personal 
interest,  supplied  evidential  matter  of  a  most  convincing  kind,  but 
unavailable  here. 

Another  feature  of  this  seance  was  the  singing  by  two  different 
voices  separately  of  Scotch  melodies,  and  a  few  stanzas  of  well- 
known  hymns. 

One  of  the  sitters  received  very  much  advice  from  some  alleged 
spirit  speaking  through  the  trumpet,  regarding  an  intricate  busi¬ 
ness  matter,  which  became  very  interesting  to  her,  though  of 
no  evidential  value  to  me. 

My  alleged  spirit  daughter’s  name  (May  Donna),  as  I  received 
it  at  the  Jonson  seance,  was  announced,  with  the  addition  “Only 
to  let  you  know  that  I  am  here.  Papa,” 

At  this  seance  the  very  ancient  guide  —  with  a  very  long  name, 
which  I  could  not  write  down  nor  pronounce,  nor  remember  after 
he  had  materialized  at  the  fifth  seance  of  the  series  at  Jonson’s, 
but  who  was  by  me  to  be  designated,  and  known  for  the  present, 
as  des-Asia,  —  came.  As  he  spoke  without  announcing  his  name, 
the  question  asked  was,  “Who  is  this  ?”  After  a  brief  pause  there 
came  in  thundering  tones  the  word  or  name  “Asia.”  He  had 
some  years  ago  made  himself  known  as  an  ancient  spirit  guide 
of  mine.  He  spoke  slowly  in  the  English  language,  and  informed 
me  that  he  had  now  come  to  begin  the  work  that  he  had  on  the 
first  and  only  occasion,  about  six  years  previously,  indicated 
through  another  medium,  and  that  he  would  talk  with  me  again 
when  I  sat  alone. 

The  alleged  spirit  of  a  little  Indian  girl  who  said  her  name 
was  “Pansy,”  and  that  she  came  to  see  Big  Chief,  enlivened 
matters  for  fully  fifteen  minutes,  creating  much  laughter,  which 


120 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


became  more  or  less  contagious  from  her  own.  She  also  created 
some  amusement  at  my  expense,  and  set  me  guessing.  She  said 
she  was  in  my  home,  Toronto,  and  “your  squaw  (meaning  my 
wife’s  photograph)  was  on  your  office  table.”  I  was  at  first 
puzzled  to  know  what  she  meant.  She  apparently  enjoyed  my 
stupidity  for  the  moment,  and  laughed  heartily  and  said,  “Your 
squaw  stands  by  you  now.”  Then  I  realized  that  part,  when  it 
dawned  on  me  that  I  had  left  my  late  wife’s  picture  on  my  table 
with  that  of  a  friend.  So  I  said,  “Now  tell  me  if  she  is  anywhere 
else,”  and  she  told  me  where  three  of  her  pictures  hung  on  walls 
and  a  photograph  picture  on  the  dresser.  She  described  the 
location  of  each  as  I  found  them  on  my  return  home.  They,  with 
all  the  hangings,  had  been  changed  during  my  absence,  and  I  had 
not  absolutely  definite  fixture  of  these  in  my  mind ;  and  though 
I  knew  the  position  of  some  of  them,  before  the  change,  I  could 
not  give  their  relative  positions  with  adjacent  pictures,  after  the 
change,  which  she  had  done. 

I  think  under  the  circumstances,  the  hypothesis  of  thought 
transmission  or  mind  reading  in  this  case  would  be  far-fetched. 
After  my  return  home  I  was  able  to  verify  the  absolutely  correct 
location  and  situation  of  the  pictures,  as  she  had  stated  in  the 
seance ;  and  am  able  therefore  to  include  in  this  connection  my 
acknowledgement  of  the  correctness  of  what  was  described  in 
the  hearing  of  all  who  participated  in  the  seance.  So  that  the 
testimony  given  in  the  seance  was  confirmed  as  correct  from  my 
comparison  of  the  testimony  with  the  existing  facts. 

THE  TELEPATHIC  AND  MIND  READING  HYPOTHESES. 

Here  let  us  analyze  the  mental  hypotheses,  and  prove  if  we 
may,  that  they  cannot  account  for  all  psychic  phenomena,  for 
there  are  some  produced  by  the  carnate  soul,  and  others  when 
it  becomes  discarnate.  The  functioning  of  the  objective  portion 
of  the  mind,  it  is  claimed,  has  to  do  with  the  five  senses,  with 
reason,  and  with  the  acquisition  of  knowledge ;  while  that  of  the 
subjective  portion  of  the  mind  controls  the  organic  functions 
throughout  the  body,  and  is  the  seat  of  all  emotions,  and  the 
storehouse  of  memory.  I  will  even  grant  this  much  of  what  is 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


121 


claimed,  and  further  admit  it  is  harmonious  with  the  incarnate 
spirit,  in  each  individual  man ;  but  while  it  may  be  impressed  to 
do  service  for  a  discarnate  spirit,  is  not  itself  creative  of  physical 
form,  voice,  or  other  psychic  phenomena  outside  of  its  own 
physical  environment  or  human  body  ? 

I  am  not  a  mental  expert,  nor  eminent  psychologist,  but  have 
a  healthy  functioning  of  mind,  and  normal  faculty  of  reasoning 
and  therefore  claim  the  right  to  question  the  assertionist,  who 
says  a  certain  functioning  of  the  subjective  self  will  account  for 
the  so-called  psychic  mysteries.  I  wish  to  say  and  make  my  state¬ 
ment  clear,  that  I  am  not  myself  able,  and  do  not  believe  that 
any  man  is  able,  to  correctly  define  or  demonstrate  all  the  varied 
functions  of  any  mind;  and  I  object  to  the  assumption  of  an 
hypothesis,  without  facts  are  presented  to  sustain  it,  and  therefore 
with  definition  there  must  be  demonstration,  by  the  defender  of 
the  mind  hypothesis.  It  is  the  champion’s  part  to  sustain  it.  I  do 
not,  in  discussing  the  hypothesis  in  question,  claim  to  know,  but 
simply  assume  or  suppose,  for  purpose  of  argument  leaving  onus 
of  proof,  with  the  one  who  uses  the  hypothesis.  Let  us  see  the 
application  of  the  different  mind  hypotheses,  in  the  case  of  the 
testimony,  of  the  alleged  little  Indian  girl.  Can  it  be  accounted 
for  by  any  mind  hypothesis?  Or  was  the  information  she  con¬ 
veyed  compiled  from  facts  and  knowledge  stored  in  my  subjective 
mind?  Or  was  the  voice  a  physical  phenomena  on  that  occasion 
in  the  seance  due  to  mind  reading  or  telepathic  transmission  of 
thought?  I  claim  it  was  neither.  I  must  have  cast  eye  on  each 
one  of  those  pictures  before  they  had  changed  from  their  former 
locations,  and  if  so  I  am  prepared  to  admit  their  former  location 
was  fixed  in  my  subjective  mind,  and  there  retained  for  all  time 
to  come,  in  earth  life  at  any  rate.  I  have  proven,  to  my  own 
satisfaction,  scores  of  times,  that  the  subjective  mind  is  a  store¬ 
house  of  all  our  knowledge,  howsoever  obtained,  from  childhood 
to  old  age,  though  mostly  forgotten  by  the  normal  or  objective 
mind  ;  and  as  I  had  absolutely  no  objective  knowledge,  at  the  time 
the  information  was  telepathically  given  off  from  me,  of  the  location 
of  the  pictures,  it  must  have  been  supplied,  if  that  hypothesis  be 
the  correct  one,  from  my  sub-conscious  or  subjective  mind,  if 


122 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


from  me  at  all,  and  if  that  possibility  is  admitted  (and  I  will 
admit  it  for  argument’s  sake  solely),  then  the  thought  impression, 
or  association  of  thoughts,  having  their  existence  in  or  self- 
evolvement  from  the  human  transmitter  (my  subjective  mind), 
to  the  human  receiver  (Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt’s  subjective  mind),  it  was 
thus  in  her  possession.  Keeping  in  view  the  fact,  that  the  thought 
impression  reaching  the  human  receiver,  must  be  absolutely 'the 
very  thought,  or  perfect  duplicate  or  wavelet  as  from  the  stone 
thrown  in  the  pond,  of  the  thought  leaving  the  human  transmitter, 
my  sub-conscious  self,  which  is  not  supposed  to  be  active  in  that 
way ;  and  is  practically  well  illustrated  by  the  well  known  acts  of 
transmitting  both  telephonic  and  telegraphic  messages,  which 
follow  a  line,  straight  or  circuitous  in  route,  from  the  trans¬ 
mitting  clerk  or  person,  or  instrument  to  ear  of  the  receiver,  or 
the  receiving  instrument ;  and  if  it  be  thus,  the  origin  is  human, 
and  if  the  knowledge  be  not  voluntarily  sent  by  the  sitter  (at 
Mrs.  Wriedt’s,  myself)  then  the  medium,  in  order  to  get  it,  must 
interview  with  her  subjective  mind,  or  peep  into  my  storehouse 
of  memory  (my  subjective  mind),  and  look  and  find  therein,  the 
very  thing  she  wants  by  mind-reading  process ;  and  having  found 
it,  set  to  work  to  dress  it  up  (in  words  or  shape)  and  palm 
it  off  as  original  with  her,  and  by  her  conscious  self  transmit  it 
back  to  my  objective  mind,  but  not  by  telepathy,  but  in  a  different 
way,  by  putting  it  into  a  trumpet,  a  physical  reality,  and  giving 
it  a  voice  to  speak  it,  —  for  all  present  heard  the  voice,  and  what 
it  said  —  so  that  the  thought  is  dressed  in  physical,  and  by  waves 
of  sound  strikes  on  the  drum  of  ear  of  me,  and  through  this 
channel  physical  gains  entrance  in  the  normal  way,  to  my  con¬ 
scious  mind  and  understanding;  and  to  be  consistent,  in  any 
such  contention  of  course  the  information  would  be  first  stolen, 
or  at  least  taken  from  my  subjective  mind,  by  the  so-called  mind¬ 
reading  plan,  for  it  was  not  transmitted,  as  I  will  later  show,  and 
it  was  not  original  with  the  medium,  and  thus  from  first  tO'  last, 
even  if  it  were  possible  —  which  it  was  not,  under  my  super¬ 
vigilance —  it  would  be  nothing  but  hypocrisy,  and  now  I’ll  pin 
the  critic  fast.  There  is  nothing  sent  back  by  telepathic  route, 
nor  yet  by  the  natural  way,  but  what  was  stolen  from  my  sub- 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


123 


conscious  mind,  by  mind-reading  theft,  and  note  this  fact,  that 
if  it  was  not  there  at  first,  it  could  not  he  stolen,  utilized,  received 
or  sent,  and  hence  as  I  got  information  through  “Pansy”  and 
knowledge  of  some  events  new  to  me,  that  never  were  in  stock 
in  store  of  my  subconscious  self,  but  came  from  other  source 
to  me  on  that  occasion,  upsets  entirely,  the  hypothesis  which  critic 
had  adopted;  instead  of  mine,  by  which  he  claimed  the  medium 
(Mrs,  Wriedt)  had  humbugged  me  (as  sitter). 

Let  us  look  at  it  another  way,  as,  for  example,  I  as  sitter  do 
not  think  it,  and  therefore  don’t  transmit  it,  which  is  quite  reason¬ 
able  ;  and  hence  it  is  not  my  telepathy,  nor  my  transmission  of 
thought,  but  on  the  other  hand  the  critic  claims  she  (the  medium) 
reads  my  thoughts  in  mind,  and  hence  “’tis  done  by  mind¬ 
reading,”  and  action  emanates  from  her;  and  she  knows,  by 
copying  it  from  what  is  in  my  storehouse,  or  takes  it  out  of  my 
subjective  mind  by  view,  or  by  theft  from  me,  which  would  be 
mind-reading  theft,  with  intent,  and  sends  it  back  by  route  of 
trumpet,  on  waves  of  ether  or  common  air  to  my  objective  mind, 
through  sense  of  hearing,  all  of  which  is  physical,  and  once  again 
the  copy  goes,  or  else  the  original,  on  the  shelf  of  my  subjective 
storehouse ;  but  even  that  won’t  do,  for  ’tis  not  true,  for  once  on 
shelf  of  subjective  mind,  it  stolen  cannot  be,  nor  lost,  but  always 
there,  and  copied  or  repeated  only,  so  medium  gets  a  photographic 
picture  of  thought  or  thoughts  of  mine,  or  myi  reflected  thoughts, 
in  her  subconscious  or  subjective  mind,  and  there  they’ll  stay, 
and  not  rise  to  the  upper,  or  objective  mind  to  be  forthwith  sent 
back  to  me,  as  she  might  wish  to  so  impress  me  that  it  was  spirit, 
instead  of  her,  so  here  again  the  mind  hypothesis  won’t  fit, 
because  the  ■  knowledge,  or  facts,  are  not  in  mind  to  be  photo¬ 
graphed,  copied,  reflected  or  repeated. 

And  still  I  may  in  other  words  express  it,  and  bring  out  the 
facts  by  reasoning,  and  say  the  receiver  of  the  thoughts  (the 
medium’s  subjective  mind)  becomes  possessed  of  them,  or  their 
reflection  rather,  or  from  the  waves  of  harmony  produced  by 
molecular  vibrations,  or  in  some  other  way,  which  have  origin  in 
thought  creation  or  evolvement,  and  rearranges  them  from  what 
they  were,  and  sends  them  back  by  aid  of  the  physical  to  my 


124 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


objective  mind,  for  the  express  purpose  of  deceiving;  me  into 
believing  it  to  be  what  it  is  represented.  But  here  again  resort 
is  had  to  what  is  physical,  that  is  a  trumpet,  and  a  voice,  which 
are  not  created  by  the  mind,  and  that  hypothesis  will  not  account 
for  them,  for  that  presupposes  prior  existence  of  these  thoughts. 

But  to  carry  out  her  motive  the  medium  assigns  or  designates 
the  duty  to  its  subjective  self,  of  acquiring  thoughts  from  out 
the  storehouse  of  the  subjective  mind  of  me,  which  I  may  grant 
in  argument  as  possible,  if  such  thoughts  are  there,  and  have  them 
passed  up  to  the  assignee,  the  objective  mind  of  medium  (but 
even  this  is  exceptionally  difficult),  and  then  arrange  therewith  a 
likely  story  to  be  sent  back  to  me,  from:  her  objective  mind,  but 
it  would  have  to  be,  if  at  all,  by  telepathy,  for  it  could  not  be  by 
transmission  through  a  trumpet ;  and  through  the  organ  of  hear¬ 
ing  of  myself,  to  my  objective  mind,  what  is  supposed,  or  so 
argued  by  the  defender  of  the  mind  hypothesis,  to  have  been 
obtained  out  of  my  subjective  storehouse,  which,  if  that  be  true, 
belonged  to  me,  which  it  did  not,  under  the  false  pretense  of  its 
being  obtained  from  an  Indian  girl,  which  had  in  fact,  at  least 
so  argued  at  this  time  and  place,  no  real  existence.  This  I  would 
designate  a  very  lame  excuse,  for  a  very  weak  mind  hypothesis. 
But  had  the  thoughts  and  the  knowledge  once  been  there  regard¬ 
ing  Pansy,  they  might  possibly  have  been  telepathically  transmitted 
or  read,  reflected  or  cognized,  soi  they  could  be  utilized,  recon¬ 
structed,  redressed  in  words,  and  sent  back,  in  the  natural  and 
human  way,  but  not  by  trumpet  and  language  spoken,  for  the 
purpose  of  deceiving  me. 

To  me  it  seems  ridiculous,  the  argument  and  reason,  that  the 
medium  gets  it  all  from  me,  even  if  the  thoughts  were  on  the 
shelf  of  my  sub-conscious  mind,  and  hence  I  ask  who  could  devise 
the  deceitful  part  of  it?  or  what  motive  could  prompt  it?  What 
advantage  or  benefit  could  it  be  to  anyone?  The  possibility  and 
actuality  of  mind-reading,  or  telepathy,  have  never  yet  been 
accepted  as  well  established  for  communication,  or  for  practical 
utility.  But  the  thoughts  were  never  mine,  and  therefore  could 
not  be  obtained  from  me,  and  hence  no  thought  or  knowledge 
of  Pansy,  whom  I  never  heard  or  saw  or  identified,  and  never 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


125 


knew  had  an  existence  up  to  then ;  and  consequently  never  had  in 
mind  to  be  transmitted,  read  or  reflected  to  the  subjective  mind 
of  medium,  and  therefore  it  was  mentally  non-existent,  and  no 
attempt  could  be  made  either  mentally  or  in  natural  way,  to 
carry  out  a  fraudulent  deception  by  means  of  mind,  and  hence  no 
mental  hypothesis  could  fit  the  situation. 

As  author  I  aln  now  addressing  an  intelligent  and  very  numerous 
jury  of  thinking  men  and  women.  Perhaps  you  think  my  style 
of  expression,  or  mode  of  illustration  and  likewise  demonstration 
new  and  peculiar,  and  my  language  not  exactly  clear  in  definition ; 
but  I  want  each  and  every  one  to  know,  and  fully  understand, 
that  I  seek  to  solve  and  demonstrate  as  I  would  a  problem  in 
geometry,  and  so  defend  the  spiritual  hypothesis  and  make  pass¬ 
able,  to  honest  critics,  and  true  investigators,  the  pons  asinorum 
of  the  calumniator  of  this  philosophy,  and  argue  on  the  premise, 
that  the  true  hypothesis  which  will  and  does  account  for  the 
phenomena  I  have  recorded  and  the  philosophy  I  have  adopted, 
is  not  a  mental  one,  but  is  the  spiritual  one. 

If  you  bulk  large  in  confidence,  that  I  am  wrong,  and  critic 
right  in  his  selection  of  the  telepathic  transmission  of  thought 
hypothesis,  or  on  the  other  hand  the  mind-reading  one,  then  you 
must  defend  and  prove  it,  if  you  can,  by  demonstration,  that  it 
can  withstand  all  criticism,  but  more  than  this,  you  must  needs 
also  demonstrate  how  such  hypothesis  works  out.  This  I  have 
done  with  the  spiritual  one,  by  demonstrating  in  dififerent  ways 
and  times  and  places,  as  all  must  admit  who  heard  my  former 
lecture.  I  have  yet  to  see  and  fully  comprehend,  how  the  mentat 
operating  hypotheses  do  operate.  As  yet  I  have  not  had  the 
opportunity  to  see, 'or  the  privilege  so  far  to  learn  the  operation 
and  wish  to  be  shown  by  critic  the  solution. 

I  will  call  the'  champion  of  mind  hypotheses  and  examine  him. 
My  previous  criticisms  in  this  same  chapter  do  not  affect  your 
claim,  you  state,  as  it  is  not  the  proper  operation  I  have  indicated, 
nor  have  I  guessed  your  plan.  Well  then  again  you  may  jingle 
your  sweet-sounding  symbols,  or  arguments,  of  mind  hypotheses, 
for  I’ll  make  a  fresh  attack.  I  ask  your  close  attention  to  my 
arguments.  The  thoughts  of  the  subjective  mind  of  sitter 


126 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


(myself)  need  not,  voluntarily  nor  otherwise,  move  from  their 
location  in  the  subjective  storehouse  of  mind,  but  reflect  from 
where  they  are,  upon  the  mind  of  medium,  as  face  of  sitter  reflects 
perfectly  on  the  mirror  in  dressing  room,  and  this  indeed  seems 
true,  as  I  have  proved  (see  case  3  of  hypnotic-psychic-phenomena 
in  Chapter  IX).  As  May  and  my  spirit  guides  have  told  me, 
and  as  I  have  proved  by  thought  attunement  with  them,  and  with 
others  in  spirit  realms,  and  found  by  actual  experiment  oft 
repeated,  my  thought  sent  out  by  me  as  souls  desire  to  ego  ofl 
spirit  of  a  loved  one,  or  friend,  or  desired  one,  impinges  shortly 
on  their  mind,  and  my  desire  brings  back  from  them  through 
a  writing  psychic,  or  other  instrument,  though  absent  from  me, 
a  message,  which  is  an  answer  to  my  true  desire.  But  mind  you, 
my  thoughts  are  recognized,  that  is  they  are  seen  by  spirit  sight, 
or  their  reflection  is  made  manifest,  or  through  vibrations  create 
waves  in  harmony,  as  a  certain  note  in  tuning  fork  vibration 
begets  the  same  in  wire  string  of  piano  at  other  end  of  room ;  and 
also  by  a  sense  of  prescience  or  spirit  sense  of  intuition.  The 
latter  two  are  active  with  the  discarnate  spirit  ego,  while  passive 
with  the  incarnate  one,  and  therefore  not  patent  to  the  incarnate 
ego,  or  at  least  to  his  objective  mind,  especially  an  ordinary  one. 

But  to  admit  that  these  senses  exist  in  the  subjective  mind  for 
discarnate  life  purposes,  does  not  in  any  way  account  for  what 
does  not  exist  in  thought  or  thoughts  of  my  subjective  m.ind,  as 
sitter,  in  the  trumpet  seance,  nor  has  it  been,  nor  can  it  be  shown, 
that  spirit  sight,  nor  intuition,  nor  any  power  of  mind,  has 
creative  power  to  make  or  find,  what  was  not  there  in  my  sub¬ 
jective  mind;  and  if  not  there  in  mind  of  me,  it  could  not  show 
reflection,  on  the  medium’s  mind,  nor  as  apparition  to  her,  nor 
could  the  mind  of  either,  or  these  two  faculties  of  ego  create 
sound,  or  voice,  or  language  in  the  air,  nor  show  the  thing  as 
physical,  beyond  the  normal  self  of  medium ;  and  hence  we  find 
ourselves  again  at  the  blind  end  of  the  lane,  and  this  hypothesis 
along  with  several  others  counts  as  naught. 

“Pansy,”  the  little  Indian  girl,  was  therefore  not  created  from 
a  thought  of  mine,  as  listening  sitter,  along  with  other  six,  nor 
from  a  reflection  of  such  asserted  thought,  nor  was  she  a  creation 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


127 


by  the  thought  of  medium,  nor  was  she  a  reflection  of  a  form 
or  vision,  nor  a  simple  apparition  in  the  medium’s  mind.  “Pansy” 
was  a  spirit,  and  what  I  heard  was  simply  vibratory  sound  waves 
of  harmony  impinging  on  my  drum  of  ear,  and  that  of  the  other 
sitters,  produced  by  spirit  vocal  organs,  operated  by  a  living 
intelligent  entity,  which  then  and  there  asserted  she  was  “Pansy,” 
once  an  Indian  girl.  I  had  no  thought  in  my  mental  storehouse, 
at  any  time  in  all  my  life,  of  such  a  personality  as  “Pansy;”  and 
hence  it  could  not  be  in  my  sub-conscious  storehouse  of  knowl¬ 
edge,  at  the  time  in  question.  And  here  is  an  insurmountable 
obstacle  to  the  adoption  in  this  case  at  any  rate,  of  the  hypothesis 
of  mind-reading,  to  account  for  the  sayings  of  an  intelligence  of 
some  kind,  either  by  the  medium,  or  the  Indian  girl,  no  matter 
which.  I  subsequently  learned  that  she  or  some  other  intelligence, 
representing  itself  as  “Pansy,”  was  a  guide  in  the  seances  of  the 
late  Maggie  Gaul,  medium.  I  have  pointed  out  elsewhere  in 
connection  with  the  expressed  wish  of  May  —  where  my  decision 
as  to  the  proposed  gift  of  a  certain  article  to  a  certain  relative  — 
if  transmitted  to  the  medium,  was  not  in  accord  with  May’s  wish ; 
and  that  was  recognized  and  spoken  of  by  her ;  and  she  adduced 
her  reasons  for  a  different  disposition  of  the  article,  at  Mrs. 
Wriedt’s  trumpet  seance,  in  Detroit.  Again  it  was  not  my  thought 
to  her  or  to  the  medium,  to  withhold  certain  articles  which  I  had 
decided  to  place  with  a  certain  firm  for  sale  (for  the  same  reason 
as  in  previous  instance)  but  accepted  and  decided  to  act  upon 
the  expressed  advice  received  a  day  or  two  later  from  her  at  the 
sitting  at  the  materializing,  seance  at  Jonson’s  in  Toledo,  where 
she  appeared  in  her  transient  body  and  spoke  through  its  vocal 
organs.  This  is  another  insurmountable  obstacle  for  the  claimant 
that  the  mind-reading  hypothesis  will  account  for  it  all,  or  for 
such  part  of  it  at  least. 

The  numerous  readers,  constituting  my  jury  of  thinking  men 
and  women  will  please  excuse  me  if  I  say,  that  if  the  telepathic 
hypothesis,  or  the  mind-reading  one,  or  any  other  mental 
hypothesis  is  adduced  by  an  opponent  of  the  spiritual  hypothesis, 
as  the  true  cause  of  the  “Pansy”  phenomena  for  instance,  I  must 
have  evidence,  for  as  it  stands,  it  is  but  an  assertion,  and  it  seems 


128 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


as  such  ridiculous  to  me,  to  say  the  least,  and  very  intricate  in 
theory ;  and  I  maintain  cannot  be  substantiated,  nor  sustained 
by  proof,  that  my  own  thought  should  be  conveyed  by  any  such 
plan  to  some  other,  to  enable  her,  that  other  one  (the  medium), 
to  practice  deceit  on  me,  for  it  could  not  be  obtained,  as  my 
thought,  if  it  were  not  my  thought,  and  if  it  were  not  there,  and 
therefore  the  one  who  uses  the  argument,  is  too  presumptive,  to 
try  to  use  it  as  a  weapon  against  the  other  argument,,  that  it  is 
a  psychic  truth. 

There  is  another  point  which  may  be  considered  here.  The 
facts  as  conveyed  to  me  in  the  language  of  the  ostensible  Indian 
girl  I  could  not  verify,  until  I  returned  home,  and  then  by  com¬ 
parison  with  my  notes  after  sitting,  I  satisfied  myself  of  the 
absolutely  correct  statements  of  the  alleged  spirit  of  the  Indian 
girl.  There  is  another  feature  that  will  merit  the  best  thought 
of  those  who  so  readily  discredit  the  spiritual  hypothesis,  and 
quite  as  readily  assert  their  belief  in  the  telepathic  transmission 
of  thought,  which  has  never  been  accepted  as  well  established, 
and  the  other  one,  mind-reading,  as  well.  That  feature  is,  that 
to  be  consistent  all  the  way  through,  there  should  on  the  part 
of  the  advocates  of  these  hypotheses,  be  given  us  some  descrip¬ 
tion  or  indication  of  how  an  invisible,  inaudible,  intangible 
thought  is  carried  from  the  “transmitter”  of  one  human  person¬ 
ality  to  the  “receiver”  of  another  human  personality,  over  long 
or  short  distances,  and  some  reason  should  be  assigned  for  the 
necessity  of  a  medium  using  the  foregoing,  or  some  other  mind 
hypothesis,  to  account  for  her  getting  it,  and  then  adopting  a 
different  one  to  account  for  her  using  it,  such  as  for  the  necessity 
of  harnessing  the  thought  in  words,  and  creating  sound  for  their 
expression  when  conveying  them  back  to  the  original  source  from 
which  they  came.  But  for  the  present,  and  for  argument’s  sake 
solely,  it  is  admitted  that  the  language  used  is  the  outcome  of 
transmitted  thought;  then  how  could  that  account,  on  the  one 
hand  for  varieties  of  sound  emanating  from  the  so  claimed 
intelligent  entities;  or  on  the  other  for  psychical  manifestations 
called  etherializations  and  materializations?  But  is  it  realized 
where  we  land,  if  we  adopt  a  mental  hypothesis,  viz.,  the  mind 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


129 


creates  physical  sounds,  and  can  therefore  create  physical  forms. 
Is  it  realized  that  the  incarnate  spirit  acts  through  the  sub¬ 
conscious  or  subjective  mind,  this  being  an  indestructible  occupant, 
of  the  ego  or  soul,  or  more  correctly,  an  attribute  of  soul. 

Now  a  step  further,  and  the  incarnate  spirit  having  a  mind, 
and  living  in  its  soul  or  astral  body,  within  the  ordinary  body 
physical,  has  been  thus  associated  during  infancy,  childhood, 
youth  and  manhood  or  womanhood,  till  advanced  age,  disease 
or  accident  makes  this  physical  habitation  no  longer  tenable,  and 
a  natural  law  lets  the  incarnate  spirit  out,  and  into  the  spirit 
sphere,  and  by  this  transition  it  becomes  discarnate,  and  there¬ 
after  a  spiritual  being  in  contradistinction  to  the  physical  man. 
Does  it  occur  to  you  that  as  discarnate,  the  personality  is  no 
longer  encumbered  with  a  physical  body,  which  held  it  while 
incarnate  in  check ;  and  does  it  not  also  follow  that  the  phenomena 
which  at  best  would  be  only  clumsily  and  imperfectly  performed 
with  a  physical  environment  or  shell,  can  now,  if  at  all,  be 
produced  with  greater  facility  and  effectiveness,  by  the  unfettered 
spirit,  which  has  perfected  more  or  less  in  spiritual  knowledge ; 
and  do  not  the  evidences  in  favor  of  the  latter  greatly  outweigh 
those  of  the  former?  Though  believing  in  the  probability  of 
telepathic  communication  between  incarnate  spirits  through  their 
sub-conscious  minds,  still  of  weightier  importance  are  the  testi¬ 
monies  of  many  discarnate  spirits  who  communicate  with  me, 
through  the  incarnate  spirit  aid,  as  given  in  the  latter  chapters 
of  the  book. 

From  personal  tests  and  observations  in  the  normal,  trance 
and  hypnotic  states,  I  have  yet  to  discover  clear,  unmistakable, 
and  perfect  reproduction  of  the  thought  of  one  person  being 
received  by  the  mind  of  another,  by  telepathy  or  mind-reading, 
to  an  extent  to  be  fairly  considered  as  practicable  among  scores 
of  trials  I  have  made,  during  the  Tong  period  of  my  psychical, 
hypnotic  and  other  investigations.  I  may  have  been  much  less 
successful  in  my  telepathic  tests,  than  most  investigators,  never¬ 
theless  I  have  found  as  a  rule,  where  there  were  any  evidential 
results  at  all,  they  may  be  described  as  “a  general  impression,” 
“an  approximation,”  “an  approach  to  the  real,”  or  impression  that 


130 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


it  was  “a  coincidence,”  rather  than  an  absolutely  perfect  duplica¬ 
tion  in  the  “receiver”  of  the  thought  that  emanated  from  the 
“transmitter.” 

I  have  for  example  written  on  a  slip  of  paper,  folded  the  same, 
handed  it  to  a  lady  sitting  passively,  giving  her  the  suggestion 
to  sit  for  a  minute  or  two,  with  her  mind  not  concentrated  on 
anything,  until  a  clear  thought  came  to  her  mind,  and  then  act 
on  that  thought.  I  had  written  this  note,  “You  will  arise,  walk 
over  to  me  and  pull  my  nose,  as  a  joke.”  She  did  it,  laughing 
from  the  time  she  arose  from  her  chair,  until  she  returned  to  it. 
I  then  asked  her  to  read  the  note  in  the  hearing  of  others  present. 
She  said  the  thought  came  to  her  distinctly  but  not  with  every 
detail  of  words.  I  next  handed  the  lady’s  brother  a  slip  on  which 
I  wrote,  “You  will  rub  the  top  of  your  head  with  your  hand, 
while  sitting,  because  you  don’t  know  what  else  to  do.”  He  sat 
on  his  chair,  and  laughingly  started  rubbing  the  top  of  his  head, 
and  remarked,  “I  don’t  know  what  you  want  me  to  do.”  That 
lady  was  my  wife,  who  with  the  brother  is  now  in  spirit  life. 

My  office  boy,  a  lad  of  sixteen  years,  with  whom  I  conducted 
many  hypnotic  experiments,  could  while  hypnotized  stand  at  a 
distance  from  me,  at  the  opposite  side  of  the  room,  and  tell  me, 
what  figure  or  letter  of  the  alphabet  I  was  then  looking  at.  He 
could  not  do  it  invariably,  but  has  consecutively  sometimes,  with 
occasional  mistakes,  but  he  did  it  while  in  hypnotic  state.  With 
my  own  experience,  of  which  the  foregoing  are  examples,  and 
with  such  knowledge  as  I  acquired  from  the  experience  of  other 
men,  I  cannot  avow  my  conviction  or  belief  in  the  adequacy  of 
the  telepathic  hypothesis,  nor  the  mind-reading  one,  in  the  normal 
state,  and  when  it’s  found  in  trance  condition,  or  hypnotic  state, 
it’s  apt  to  have  its  origin  in  suggestion,  which  may  then  be  word, 
or  act,  or  concentrated  thought. 

I  would  not  expect  the  mind  to  account  for  the  production,  for 
example  of  answers  to  mental  questions  in  the  nature  of  a 
quizzing,  or  a  cross-examination,  or  otherwise  I  would  not  expect 
answers  to  mental  questions,  which  would  necessitate  a  thorough 
and  exact  knowledge  as  to  each  detail,  nor  could  I  transmit  a 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  JAIND  131 

thought  that  would  be  to  me  a  solution  of  a  problem,  or  a  some¬ 
thing  outside  of  the  latitude  and  longitude  of  the  receiver’s 
sphere  of  knowledge,  as  I  do  not  think  such  mind  capable  in 
natural  way,  to  appropriate  what  was  tendered. 

In  the  trumpet  seances  with  Mrs.  Wriedt  I  would  not  expect 
the  opportunity  to  gather  evidences  of  the  sub-coriscious  variety, 
for  the  reason  that  she  is  not  entranced  in  her  sittings. 

Obviously  there  could  be  no  attempt  made  at  using  the  telepathic 
hypothesis  to  account  for  the  various  phases  of  psychical  phenom¬ 
ena  of  the  physical  kind,  such  as  materialization  of  a  transient 
body,  which  uses  its  own  vocal  organs  to  communicate  with ; 
or  the  externalization  of  psychic  power,  when  heavy  bodies  are 
moved  without  visible  contact  with  any  person,  power  or  object. 

I  have  carefully  and  patiently  watched  for  evidence,  which 
might  appear  to  sustain  one  or  other  of  the  mind  hypotheses, 
but  up  to  the  present  time,  have,  watched  in  vain ;  and  to  my 
mind  those  hypotheses  utterly  fail  to  account  for  the  phenomena 
described  in  the  foregoing  pages,  and  among  other  records. 

One  may  theorize,  invent  and  plan,  as  to  how  the  thought 
originates,  and  what  it  is,  and  what  is  mind  in  which  it  is. 
Perhaps  it  is  a  thing  or  body  physical,  for  we  are  told  that 
thoughts  are  things.  Some  one  may  claim  that  it  is  power,  as 
manifest  in  molecular  aggregation  which  may  cause  waves  of 
motion,  and  then  at  other  times  a  dormant  state,  but  still  if  it  be 
power,  quiet  or  in  motion,  then  to  that  extent  at  least,  it  has 
existence,  and  must  be  physical,  and  patent  to  spirit  sight,  and 
also  capable  of  reflection.  But  under  each  and  every  circumstance, 
the  thought  or  thoughts  must  by  this  hypothesis  have  existence 
in  the  mind  of  sitter,  before  seen,  reflected,  read,  realized  or  felt. 

As  thought  or  knowledge  of  an  intelligence  called  “Pansy”  had 
never  habitation  in  my  mind  (the  sitter),  it  clearly  follows  a 
mind  hypothesis  will  not  apply. 

In  this  connection  I  feel  free  to  say,  that  there  be  none  who 
can  truly  describe  the  mind  or  rightly  designate  its  various 
powers,  capabilities  and  functionings.  The  more  I  grope  and 
think,  reflect  and  meditate,  the  more  convinced  am  I  that  mind 


132 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


is  as  deep  a  mystery  as  all  else,  which  pertains  to  the  wonderful 
universe  of  each  individual  man,  which  in  turn  is  but  a  molecule 
of  spirit  personality,  in  the  larger  Universe.  In  its  functioning 
it  would  appear  to  be  an  attribute  of  the  soul. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


The  seventh  and  last  seance  of  the  November,  1911,  series 
was  held  during  the  forenoon  of  November  19th  at  the 
home  of  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt,  and  was  absolutely  private, 
save  and  except  for  the  presence  of  this  very  exceptional  psychic. 
This  seance  proved  to  be,  to  me,  one  of  the  most  important,  if 
not  absolutely  the  most  relatively  important,  of  all  the  seances 
I  have  ever  attended  in  my  life  up  to  the  present  time;  and  at 
the  same  time  most  deeply  interesting,  and  evidentially  con¬ 
vincing  ;  leaving  not  even  a  lingering  doubt  in  my  mind,  as  to 
May  having  kept  her  promise  and  redeemed  her  bond.  Taking 
into  consideration  the  many  evidential  matters  presenting,  from 
the  intercommunion  between  various  members  of  the  family  con¬ 
nections  of  mine,  and  myself ;  and  the  various  attitudes  of 
individual  relatives  one  toward  another,  to  all  intents  and  pur¬ 
poses,  the  private  family  talk,  with  the  attitude  assumed  by  one 
and  another,  regarding  this  or  that  circumstance,  all  so  realistic 
and  true  to  the  knowledge  I  possessed,  even  to  minutiae ;  and  the 
apparently  harmonious  condition,  and  happy  relationship  experi¬ 
enced  by  each  and  everyone ;  as  well  as  the  confirmations  of 
previous  evidential  matter,  facts  and  messages ;  together  with 
the  presentation  of  new  evidential  matter,  and  the  clearing  away 
of  any  fragments  of  ignorance,  and  my  enlightenment  as  to  many 
matters,  while  so  satisfactory  and  convincing  to  me,  cannot  in  the 
very  nature  of  things  be  reproduced  in  this  publication  in  detail, 
but  only  alluded  to  in  the  briefest  outline.  One  reason  for  not 
reproducing  family  affairs  in  this  publication  is  the  fact  that  to 
most  people,  as  well  as  to  myself,  it  would  appear  as  needless 
exposure  of  confidential  knowledge ;  and  another  reason,  as  has 
been  mentioned  elsewhere,  that  May,  my  spirit  wife,  whose 
human  personality  she  has  established  to  my  entire  satisfaction, — 
and  as  I  have  already  said  redeemed  her  bond,  —  expressed  her 
desire  that  I  should  not  use  family  matters  when  I  had  enough 

133 


134 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


other  material  for  my  book.  This  request  I  shall  show  my  respect 
for,  by  a  faithful  compliance  therewith  in  matters  of  detail,  or 
where  it  would  prove  inadvisable  to  repeat  a  message  from  one 
to  another,  or  to  use  language  which  might  be  construed  as 
personal. 

My  alleged  spirit  daughter,  who  not  only  materialized  as  a 
young  woman  of  about  twenty  years,  but  also  spoke  with  me  on 
the  special  occasion  at  Toledo,  when  I  learned  for  the  first  time 
her  name,  as  known  in  spirit  life,  and  which  occasion  is  elsewhere 
recorded  as  being  the  15th  November,  1911,  seance  at  Jonson’s, 
and  who  promised  then,  and  at  the  last  of  the  Jonson  seances, 
to  come  with  her  mamma  and  myself  to  Detroit ;  and  without 
a  doubt  she  has  fulfilled  that  promise ;  and  was  one  of  the  first 
of  the  numerous  intelligences,  to  speak  to  me  through  the  trumpet 
at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s.  She  gave  me  messages  to  be  delivered  to  her 
brother  and  her  sister  (half-brother  and  half-sister)  ;  also  told 
me  that  their  mother  Martha  was  present  at  the  seance  with  her 
mamma.  May. 

The  next  to  converse  with  me  was  Martha  E.  King,  my  first 
wife,  who  passed  to  spirit  realms  about  37  years  ago  now,  and 
who,  on  this  occasion,  talked  with  me,  about  our  children,  and 
also  other  matters. 

Then  May  joined  in  the  conversation  With  Martha  and  me, 
and  both  of  them  were  agreed  and  harmonious ;  and  with  one 
accord  and  single  purpose,  advised  me  as  to  my  future  course. 

Hypatia,  my  ever-present  guide,  joined  in  now,  before  the  loved 
ones  withdrew,  and  her  first  words  were,  “You  wrote  it  correctly, 
‘tia’  is  right.”  To  make  clear  the  relation  of  this  interjected 
sentence,  I  may  say  that  the  stenographer  who  made  the  report 
of  the  second  seance  at  Jonson’s  for  me,  had  in  the  report  spelled 
my  guide’s  name  “Hypacia,”  which  I  corrected  with  my  pen  by 
changing  the  fifth  letter  to  “t,”  thus  making  the  word  “Hypatia.” 
A  few  minutes  before  going  upstairs  to  the  seance  room,  and 
while  waiting  to  be  called,  I  wrote  the  following  on  a  page  of 
my  memo-book,  and  kept  it  exposed  to  her  view  until  I  started 
upstairs,  when  I  put  it  in  my  pocket.  “Hypatia,  the  stenographer 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


135 


spelt  your  name  with  last  syllable  ‘cia,’  while  I  write  it  ‘tia.’ 
Which  is  correct?”  The  first  exclamation  was  Hypatia’s  answer 
to  my  question,  and  was  the  first  expression  which  she  vocally 
gave  in  my  hearing.  This  was  followed  by  advice,  and  instruction 
in  regard  to  certain  business  matters.  A  short  discussion  of  a 
particular  situation  was  had  by  Hypatia,  May  and  Dr.  Sharp, 
the  psychic’s  own  control,  and  conclusion  reached,  that  all  would 
come  out  right  by  my  maintaining  the  attitude  I  had  assumed. 

The  balance  of  the  seance  turned  out  to  be  a  gathering  of  spirit 
guides,  and  many  of  them  gave  their  instructions  to  me.  There 
was  also  some  prediction,  and  caution  meted  out  to  me,  as  well 
as  information  for  me,  and  instruction  what  to  do.  My  life 
was  to  be  a  new  one,  and  still  active  I  would  be ;  for  special 
work,  in  spirit  spheres,  was  planning  for  me.  From  records 
which  I  now  possess,  I  must  select  and  gather  more,  and  print 
a  book.  Then  other  books  to  follow  this  there’ll  be ;  and  other 
work  for  me  to  do,  of  which  I  must  be  close,  and  much  would 
be  done  for  me.  I  cannot  more  than  outline  give,  as  I  have  done 
above.  This  chapter  now  will  conclude  a  series ;  but  still  more 
evidence  I  will  collect,  and  more  truth  I  will  proclaim. 

CORROBORATIVE  TESTIMONY. 

“Reports  by  Herbert  G.  Pauli,  Secretary;  and  by  Rev’d  Canon 
William  Walsh,  member  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical 
Research.  A  deceased  member,  Mrs.  May  E.  King,  zvife  of 
the  President,  visits  a  trumpet  circle,  in  Toronto,  held  by 
Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt,  trumpet  medium,  and  speaks  to  those  tzvo 
members. 

Dr.  John  S.  King,  President  C.  S.  P.  R., 

Dear  Sir: 

I  herewith  hand  you  a  partial  report  of  a  trumpet  seance  held 

at  the  house  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  W - ,  Toronto,  on  the  evening 

of  Monday,  November  27,  1911. 

The  seance  was  held  in  an  attic  room,  with  twenty-five  sitters, 
and  the  medium,  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt.  Among  those  present  were 
the  following  members  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical 
Research,  namely;  Dr.  John  S.  King,  President;  Rev’d  Canon 
Wm.  Walsh,  Professor  E.  B.  Shuttleworth,  Mrs.  Coleman,  and 
the  Secretary,  Herbert  G.  Paul!  (the  writer  of  this  report). 


136 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  circle  was  opened  with  a  repetition  of  the  Lord’s  Prayer 
in  unison,  followed  by  singing  “Nearer  My  God  to  Thee,”  aug¬ 
mented  by  a  powerful  spirit  voice  through  the  trumpet.  After 
a  cordial  introduction  by  the  guide.  Dr.  Sharp,  who  evidently 
was  able  to  give  the  names  and  idiosyncrasies  of  every  sitter 
present,  occasional  whispering  voices  were  heard  and  recognized 
by  friends  present.  Presently  a  strong  and  clear  voice  spoke  out 
near  Canon  Walsh. 

Voice:  Canon  Walsh, 

Canon  Walsh:  Yes,  who  is  it? 

Voice:  It  is  May. 

Canon  Walsh:  What  is  your  name? 

Voice  :  May  E.  King.  I  want  to  thank  you  for  the  kind  and 
beautiful  words  you  spoke  over  my  body  as  it  lay  in  the  casket. 

The  voice  purporting  to  be  that  of  Mrs.  King,  then  continued 
in  a  lengthy,  and  touching  strain,  voicing  her  thanks  and  apprecia¬ 
tion  of  Rev.  Canon  William  Walsh’s  tribute  to  her  memory,  she 
having  been  a  member  of  the  Research  Society,  of  which  Rev. 
Canon  Walsh  is  also  a  member.  Again  the  same  voice  changed 
location  to  where  I  was  sitting,  and  addressed  me. 

May  E.  King  :  And  you,  Mr.  Pauli,  I’m  so  pleased  to  see  you 
here. 

Mr.  Paull:  I  am  delighted  to  hear  you  indeed. 

May  E.  King:  I  am  pleased  to  be  here  tonight.  All  is  beautiful 
and  bright  over  here.  There  is  no  death. 

The  writer  cannot  recall  the  exact  words  of  what  followed, 
but  Mrs.  King  continued  to  speak  cheerily  of  the  spirit  life,  and 
spoke  once  at  least  of  Dr.  King  as  “Johnnie.”  Several  other 
individual  voices  continued  to  speak  through  the  trumpet,  and 
then  a  whispering  voice  said,  while  the  trumpet  was  directed  to 
Dr.  King. 

Voice:  Papa. 

Dr.  King:  Who  is  it  for? 

Voice:  For  you,  papa. 

Dr.  King:  Is  it  you,  my  darling? 

Mr.  Paull:  Tell  us  your  name. 

Voice  :  May  Donna. 

May  Donna:  Papa,_  Hypatia  is  here. 

Dr.  King:  Will  she  sing  for  us  tonight? 

Mr.  Paull:  I  do  not  recollect  the  exact  reply. 

May  Donna  :  Good-bye,  papa. 

Dr.  King:  Good-bye,  darling,  speak  to  us  again. 

The  writer  cannot  set  down  with  exactness  what  further  was 
spoken,  but  subscribes  to  the  above  as  a  faithful  account  as  he 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


137 


recalls  it  after  the  seance,  and  the  conversations  and  communica¬ 
tions  between  the  voices  purporting  (and  evidently  being)  the 
voices  of  Mrs.  May  E.  King  and  her  daughter,  May  Donna,  both 
in  spirit  life. 

(Signed)  Herbert  G.  Paull, 
Secretary  C.  S.  P.  R.” 

'  Dr.  John  S.  King,  President  C.  S.  P.  R., 

Dear  Sir:  I  send  you  my  report  of  Mrs.  Etta  Wriedt’s  seance, 
held  on  the  27th  of  November,  1911,  as  follows”  (corroborative 
testimony)  : 

[The  Author's  Note:  —  Following  is  another  individual 
member’s  report  of  the  same  section  of  the  trumpet  seance  as 
reported  by  the  Secretary,  Mr.  Herbert  G.  Paull,  and  although 
the  report  as  a  whole  was  given  much  more  extendedly,  the  quota¬ 
tion  therefrom  has  a  slightly  different  construction,  though  it  is 
valuable  in  that  there  is  harmony  of  facts  in  the  reports  of  both, 
though  neither  is  a  stenographer.] 

The  Canon  in  his  report  says : 

“I  had  a  small  writing  pad  and  by  feeling  was  guiding  myself 
in  writing,  as  it  was  absolutely  black  darkness  in  the  room,  and 
straining  my  eyes  and  ears ;  almost  unconsciously  I  was  stooping 
forward,  trying  to  catch  some  faint  sight  or  revealing  sound, 
when  this  to  me  new,  unexpected,  and  surprising  episode  took 
place.  Now  I  was  quietly  startled  by  just  a  perceptible  touch  of 
the  trumpet  on  my  left  eyebrow.  At  the  instant  there  was  sug¬ 
gested  to  my  mind  that  it  was  done  caressingly.  From  the  trumpet, 
seemingly,  m  the  centre  of  the  circle,  and  pointing  towards  me, 
came  a  strong  whisper  repeating  my  name.  Then  I  said :  “Who 
is  it?” 

Voice:  May. 

Then  a  voice,  full,  cultured,  and  clear,  and  which  at  once 
recalled  to  me  the  voice  of  Mrs.  King,  said: 

“Canon,  I  want  to  thank  you  for  your  kindness  in  coming  and 
offering  up  a  prayer  before  the  casket  was  closed  that  day.” 

“Then  the  trumpet  seemed  to  move  over  in  the  direction  of 
Dr.  King  and  Mr.  Paull,  who  were  seated  comparatively  near 
together,  and  addressed  them  in  similar  tones,  as  they  by  their 
responses  seemed  to  recognize.  The  words  addressed  to  them 
I  cannot  recall,  as  I  was  so  interested,  excited,  and  thrilled  by 
the  recognition  of  Mrs.  Dr.  King’s  familiar  and  kindly  voice,  that 
I  could  not  concentrate  my  attention  upon  them  and  their 
respective  conversations  with  her.  To  me  it  was  all  the  more 


138 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


startlingly  striking  in  view  of  the  fact  that  not  long  before  I  left 
the  residence  of  Dr.  John  S.  King  (the  President  of  our  Society) 
accompanied  by  him,  he  wrote  in  his  office  on  a  slip  of  paper  and 
showed  it  to  me,  as  a  request  of  his  addressed  to  Mrs.  King, 
using  her  Christian  name,  and  when  the  trumpet  voice  spoke  to 
me  it  was  a  direct  response  to,  and  compliance  with,  the  written 
request  at  that  moment  remaining  spread  out  on  the  table  in  the 
room  we  had  just  left  to  come  to  the  seance,  and  some  of  the 
words  and  phrases  of  the  trumpet  voice  were  identical  with  those 
contained  in  the  request. 

Surely  the  line  of  least  resistance  is  to  follow  the  exercise  of 
our  reasoning  powers,  and  accept  of  the  claimed  fact,  that  the 
spirit  of  Mrs.  Dr.  King  spoke  through  the  trumpet  consciously 
and  intelligently,  touching  that  very  important  episode  —  the 
removal  from  time  to  the  spirit  world,  and  the  bearing  away  of 
the  sacred  body  to  be  laid  in  the  last  resting-place. 

(Signed)  William  Walsh.” 

More  Corroborative  Evidence.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  John  G.  Bain, 
Toronto,  converse  with  Mrs^.  May  E.  King,  while  in  her 
transient  body,  at  a  Jonson  seance  in  Toledo. 

Toronto,  January  27,  1912. 

“Dear  Dr.  King: 

About  the  middle  of  December  last,  we  left  Toronto  on  Sunday 
morning,  and  on  Christmas  night  I  called  up  Mrs.  Jonson  and 
made  an  appointment  for  the  next  morning,  ten  o’clock.  On  meet¬ 
ing  Mr.  Jonson,  he  informed  me  that  Tuesday  evenings  belonged 
to  the  Sun  Flower  Club,  but  he  would  arrange  matters  so  that 
myself  and  wife  might  attend. 

We  were  on  hand  at  eight  o’clock,  December  26th,  and  met 
members  of  the  above  club,  which  on  that  night  consisted  of 
seventeen.  The  room  where  the  sitting  was  held  was  a  large  room 
upstairs ;  the  cabinet  a  small  room  leading  from  the  large  one. 
As  strangers  we  were  taken  into  the  small  room  to  inspect  it. 
There  was  no  outlet  from  this  room  called  cabinet,  except  to  the 
large  room.  Plenty  of  light  was  left  in  the  room  so  that  we  could 
plainly  see  anything  that  might  come  from  the  cabinet.  The 
minutes  of  the  meeting  showed  that  there  were  twenty-one 
materialized  forms  which  came  from  the  cabinet.  I  shook  hands 
with  two  or  three  of  them,  one  an  Indian  girl,  who  came  out 
and  gave  us  a  lively  dance  within  two  feet  of  where  I  was  sitting, 
and  without  the  slightest  sound  or  vibration.  One  came  who 
had  hair  about  four  feet  long.  I  also  shook  hands  with  her,  and 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


139 


by  request  of  Mrs.  Jonson  I  examined  her  hair,  and  let  about  two 
feet  of  it  draw  across  my  hand,  when  she  turned  to  cross  to  the 
other  side  of  the  circle. 

Another  form,  that  of  a  lady  strong  and  most  beautiful  in 
appearance,  came  to  the  cabinet  door.  At  first  it  could  not  be 
ascertained  who  was  wanted,  but  at  last  the  form  spoke,  saying: 
“I  wish  to  speak  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bain.”  We  went  to  the  cabinet 
door,  and  to  our  surprise  and  delight  there  stood  Mrs.  John  S. 
King,  your  wife,  whom  we  had  both  known  well  in  life ;  and 
who  had  passed  out  about  three  months  before.  She  told  us 
she  had  been  attracted  there  by  Mrs.  Bain’s  singing,  which  she 
had  heard  before  while  at  home  in  Toronto.  She  then  gave  us 
this  message  to  give  to  you,  viz. : 

“Tell  Johnnie  that  you  saw  and  talked  with  me.  Hypatia  is 
here ;  and  my  Baby  also.” 

She  was  a  woman  a  little  above  the  average  size,  and  she 
dematerialized  at  our  feet,  which  seemed  quite  as  interesting  and 
wonderful,  as  did  her  appearing. 

After  a  few  more  had  appeared,  a  gentleman  came  to  the  door. 
He  seemed  somewhat  weak,  and  it  was  perhaps  nearly  a  minute 
before  Mrs.  Jonson  could  get  any  information  from  him  that 
would  identify  him.  At  last  he  said,  “I  wish  to  speak  to  John.” 
Mrs.  Jonson  turned  round  and  said,  “Who  is  John?”  I  said  that 
perhaps  it  was  me.  I  went  to  the  door  of  the  cabinet,  and  to  my 
surprise,  there  stood  my  brother,  who  had  passed  out  about  four 
years  ago.  He  seemed  rather  weak  and  became  partly  dematerial¬ 
ized  two  or  three  times ;  and  after  a  few  words  of  welcome  he 
said,  “I  wish  to  speak  to  Katie.”  (No  one  in  the  room  knew  my 
wife’s  name.)  I  called  her  and  he  spoke  to  her.  I  never  saw 
him  more  plainly  in  my  life;  and  his  voice  was  if  possible  more 
convincing  than  his  features.  The  last  few  years  of  his  life  he 
wore  a  beard ;  but  while  in  the  hospital  this  was  shaven  off.  He 
came  with  this  beard  on,  and  the  last  suit  of  clothes  that  he  had 
worn  before  his  illness. 

Itc  He  >l<  >l<  :ti  * 

I  have  given  a  true  account  of  features  of  this  seance  at  Mr. 

Jonson’s,  in  my  simple  way  as-it  occurred. 

Yours  very  truly, 

(Signed)  John  G.  B.ain, 
(for  self  and  wife).” 


CHAPTER  XX. 


This  chapter  is  devoted  to  the  various  trumpet  and 
materializing  seances,  ending  with  the  November  series 
of  1911,  where  communication  was  had  with  the  per¬ 
sonality  alleged  to  be  my  wife ;  and  in  that  connection  I  present 
my  argument  upon  the  evidences  which  brought  me  to  my  final 
and  firm  conviction,  that  I  have  attained  to  a  positive  knowledge, 
of  the  truth  of  spirit  return  and  communion.  The  form  that 
presented  for  me,  was  certainly  neither  a  probable  nor  possible 
fraudulent  creation  to  deceive. 

I  would  say  to  each  reader,  ask  yourself  the  question,  how  do 
I  identify  and  know  my  loved  ones,  friends  and  acquaintances, 
of  the  present  time,  when  I  meet  them  anywhere?  Would  not 
your  mental  answer  be  a  quick  response,  “By  seeing,  hearing  and 
conversing  with  them,  as  we  all  do  constantly  in  our  daily  lives, 
when  we  meet?”  If  you  have  lost  your  sight,  you  utilize  your 
sense  of  hearing,  and  thus  judge  and  recognize  them  by  the  sound 
of  their  voice,  tone  of  speech,  manner  of  expression ;  and  by  the 
nature  of  the  conversation  which  evolves  the  evidential  knowl¬ 
edge.  The  reader  can  best  test  these  matters  in  his  own  home, 
or  among  his  friends  or  relatives ;  for  there  are  no  two  human 
beings  exactly  alike,  not  even  so-called  twins.  No  two  voices 
sound  precisely  the  same,  though  in  the  same  key,  for  nature 
loves  variety  and  produces  some  peculiarity,  which  differentiates 
the  one  from  all  the  others.  There  is  in  the  make-up  of  every 
individual  a  combination  of  variations  which  we  term  human 
personality,  which  is  the  distinguishing  feature  of  each,  and  of 
every  individual. 

Unless  a  man  is  bereft  of  reason,  he  can  identify  a  relative 
or  friend,  or  anyone  whom  he  previously  knew,  by  the  aid  of 
one  or  other  of  his  senses,  and  usually  by  two  of  them,  such  as 
sight  and  observation,  by  hearing  the  voice,  and  the  conversation, 
noting  its  intonation,  and  mode  of  inflection ;  and  by  knowing  his 

140 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


141 


previous  habits,  and  any  peculiarity;  or  from  a  knowledge  of  his 
personal  history,  or  by  enquiry,  in  brief,  though  changing  phys¬ 
ically  as  the  years  roll  by,  he  never  loses  his  personal  identity, 
and  his  personality,  either  here  or  hereafter,  and  constantly  by 
the  securing  of  evidence  from  personal,  family,  business  or  other 
topics  of  conversation.  The  same  faculties,  and  similar  procedure 
as  in  the  case  of  mortals,  will  enable  you  to  identify  the  forms, 
voices  and  individualities  which  present  themselves  to  you  for 
your  recognition,  when  conditions  favorable  for  occult  demonstra¬ 
tions  exist.  Personally  I  can  neither  claim  to  be  easily  deceived, 
nor  can  I  be  charged  with  ignorance  regarding  psychic  matters, 
for  I  have  devoted  many  years  to  investigating  hypnotic  and 
psychic  phenomena ;  and  have  discovered  much  hypnotized  condi¬ 
tion,  and  self-deception,  as  well  as  fraudulent  design  and  practice. 
Furthermore,  as  will  be  seen  in  Chapter  XII  of  this  book,  the 
one  who  has  been  “my  other  self,”  my  true  love,  my  life  partner, 
my  pal,  my  constant  companion  for  more  than  twenty-five  years, 
had  agreed  with  me,  and  I  with  her  in  life,  how  each  should  prove 
to  the  other  his-or  her  human  personality,  no  matter  which  should 
first  pass  out  of  the  body,  and  be  permitted  to  return  from  spirit 
realms,  to  greet  the  other  in  earth  realm ;  and  I  am  able  to  present 
instances  of  fulfillment  of  the  bond.  To  prove  it  was  none  other 
than  my  own  “May,”  who  now  presented,  frequently  in  the  series 
of  occult  seances,  she  wore  that  smile  upon  the  face  which  signi¬ 
fied  the  externalized  joy  she  felt  at  her  ability  to  redeem  in  full 
the  bond ;  and  the  impress  appeared  to  me  as  distinct  in  detail, 
as  the  pictured  face  in  looking-glass  or  on  photographic  plate. 
To  me  she  came  as  tangible,  as  true  to  life,  as  ever  she  had  been; 
her  slap  of  hand  upon  my  shoulder,  the  arm  about  my  neck,  the 
cheek  to  mine,  were  all  in  view  to  those  who  viewed  with  me, 
and  they  too  thought  it  grand  and  true,  and  due  to  her  joyful 
thought,  that  she  could  come  back  to  me. 

“And  did  she  speak  with  you?”  you  ask,  “and  did  the  voice 
sound  natural  ?”  She  spoke,  conversed,  appeared  and  natural  was 
in  all  respects.  Her  voice  was  quite  as  natural  as  it  sounded, 
when  she  spoke  formerly  to  me  in  the  home,  or  through  the 


142 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


telephone ;  and  you  have  had  the  experience  of  hearing  the  voice 
of  your  acquaintance,  friend  or  relative,  who  conversed  over  the 
’phone  with  you  the  other  day.  My  “doubting  Thomas”  friends 
continue  to  ask  me  in  all  earnestness,  “Could  you  be  quite  sure 
that  it  was  she?”  Quite  as  sure  as  you  could  be,  either)  in  your 
home,  or  in  your  own  ’phone  conversation  with  a  loved  one.  “Do 
you  not  think  the  gathering  where  these  manifestations  occurred 
was  the  outcome  of  evil  influence  or  evil  spirits?”  No!  To  me 
it  was  corroborated  in  a  very  marked  degree,  by  the  scriptural 
evidence  —  a  physical  seance,  held  in  a  closed  room,  where  were 
gathered  Christ’s  own  disciples,  at  which  their  late  Lord  and 
Master,  in  materialized  form,  showed  Himself  to  them,  and 
proved  His  personality  to  them,  in  order  to  convince  them, 
exhibiting  to  a  doubting  disciple  the  wounds  in  His  side.  One 
the  other  does  confirm,  whatsoe’er  it  be,  for  there  is  exact 
similarity. 

And  still  you  ask,  “Why  do  you  need  a  medium?”  To  this 
my  answer  is,  for  the  same  reason  that  you  need  a  central  office, 
as  well  as  your  home  ’phone. 

May,  who  at  another  place,  through  the  aid  of  another  medium, 
at  a  previous  time  (at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s,  the  trumpet  medium,  12th, 
13th  November,  1911,  see  Chapters  XHI  and  XIV),  had  promised 
me  to  be  at  Jonson’s  seances,  to  do  the  very  thing  which  she  has 
done,  and  which  I  have  recorded  (see  Chapters  XV,  XVI  and 
XVH)  ;  and  the  reader  is  now  considering;  and  who,  acting  on 
the  suggestion  I  had  given  her  at  a  previous  seance  (see  Chapter 
XV),  that  she  was  not  as  large  as  in  life,  came  to  me  since  then 
in  her  fully  formed  natural  development,  true  to  life  in  form, 
features,  voice,  mannerisms,  action  and  tangibility ;  with  power, 
zeal,  and  other  characteristics,  and  normal  expression,  and  step¬ 
ping  out  and  up  to  see  me,  with  the  agreed  upon  name  greeting 
of  “Johnnie”  patted  me  on  the  cheek  and  head  with  her  hand, 
put  her  cheek  to  mine,  slapped  me  several  times  on  my  left 
shoulder;  and  continuing  said,  “Yes,  my  dear,  dear  Johnnie” 
(which  was  to  be  her  proof  test  name  for  me  after  she  passed 
out),  “I  am  May.  I  am  your  ‘Babe’”  —  what  I  had  agreed  to 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


143 


call  her,  as  a  test  of  my  human  personality,  if  I  passed  to  spirit 
realms  and  returned,  and  “Johnnie”  was  to  be  her  proof  test 
name,  after  she  had  passed  out  and  had  come  back  to  me.  So  that 
in  either  case,  no  matter  which  passed  out  first,  my  name  was  to 
be  “Johnnie,”  and  so  designated  by  her,  as  a  test,  if  she  could 
return;  and  hers  was  to  be  “Babe”  if  I  could  return.  So  here 
came  the  proof  urging  itself  on  me,  viz. :  “Oh  !  my  dear  ‘Johnnie,’ 
I  do  miss  you  so  much,  but  I  am  able  to  be  near  you,  and  each 
time  I  materialize  I  can  be  stronger;  and  I  enjoy  materializing 
so  you  can  see  me,  and  the  oftener  I  do  so,  the  easier  it  will  be 
for  me  to  do  it.”  She  said  also,  “  It  is  easier  for  me  to  speak  to 
you  through  the  trumpet,  than  this  way,  and  I  can  speak  louder 
too,”  which  I  found  to  be  correct.  Her  style  of  speaking, 
language  used,  mode  of  expression,  features,  size,  build,  her  very 
compound  self,  with  her  every  mannerism  most  assuredly  estab¬ 
lished  in  my  mind,  her  individuality  and  personality  at  each  of 
the  seances,  but  particularly  so  at  the  last  of  the  November  seances 
held  with  Jonson. 

Aside  altogether  from  the  foregoing,  there  is  in  addition 
absolutely  strong  and  irrefutable  evidence,  relating  to  family 
matters,  personal  possessions  left  behind  her,  and  her  directions 
as  to  their  disposal ;  and  family  and  personal  business  affairs,  in 
which  her  directions,  in  several  instances,  were  in  direct  conflict 
with  the  decision  I  had  reached  in  my  mind,  thus  entirely  destroy¬ 
ing  the  hypothesis  of  thought  transference  or  telepathy  in  her 
case;  and  her  expressed  desire  to  have  her  gold  watch,  jewelry, 
diamonds  and  other  valuables  retained  in  the  safety  deposit  vault 
of  a  bank,  that  no  person  other  than  the  bank  official  and  myself 
knew ;  and  said  official  did  not  see  or  know  a  single  one  of  the 
several  articles ;  and  there  to  remain  until  she  would  give  me  at 
some  future  time  instructions  as  to  her  desires  regarding  their 
disposal ;  and  in  this  respect  proving  that  there  was  not,  nor  could 
there  be,  any  mental  telepathy  from  others  to  the  medium,  while 
if  telepathic  communication  from  me  to  the  medium,  whether 
Mrs.  Wriedt,  trumpet  medium  of  Detroit,  or  J.  B.  Jonson, 
materializing  medium  of  Toledo,  Ohio;  it  must  certainly,  to  be 


144 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


genuine,  be  my  mental  thought  or  decision,  and  not  the  very 
contrary.  So  that  the  only  hypothesis  that  has  any  sho\v  of 
probability,  or  even  possibility,  outside  of  the  spiritualistic  hypo¬ 
thesis,  viz. :  mental  telepathy  or  thought  transference,  has  already 
been  shown  to  be  in  other  chapters  as  well  as  now  an  absurdity 
as  well  as  untenable,  insufficient  and  useless,  as  an  hypothesis 
to  account  for  the  production.  I  may  here  add  that  much  of 
the  communications  relative  to  family  connections,  domestic 
affairs,  personal  possessions,  and  business  matters,  for  obvious 
reasons  cannot  be  given  publicity ;  and  hence  some  of  the  very 
best  evidences,  to  myself  personally,  cannot  be  utilized  in  the 
record  herein  contained,  which  is  intended  for  publicity. 

In  earth  life.  May  E.  King  used  certain  pertinent,  and  as  I 
thought  sensible  expressions ;  on  occasions  when  they  might 
benefit  those  who  heard  them,  though  not  intended  for  that  pur¬ 
pose.  Her  many  friends  will  recognize  them  when  they  read  them. 
“I  don’t  believe  in  telling  family  or  business  affairs  to  anybody.” 
“I  never  gossip  about  others.”  “I  have  enough  to  do  minding  my 
own  business,”  etc. 

While  she  spoke  with  me  alone  through  the  trumpet  at  Mrs. 
Wriedt’s,  and  gave  advice  about  certain  possessions,  and  the  views 
which  she  had  been  able  to  hear  of  certain  interested  parties,  she 
said  in  her  characteristic  language,  “I  don’t  want  you  to  make 
public  family  or  business  matters.”  This  is  certainly  characteristic 
of  the  personality,  if  it  be  not  of  the  character  that  will  admit 
it  as  circumstantial  evidence  in  favor  of  the  personality. 

Again  at  the  Jonson  seance,  where  others  were  present  with 
myself,  she,  in  materialized  form,  not  only  confirmed  her  predic¬ 
tion  at  Detroit,  that  she  would  materialize  at  Jonson’s  seance, 
and  speak  with  me  there,  but  she  likewise  confirmed,  and  con¬ 
tinued  that  conversation,  and  most  guardedly  avoided  naming  the 
Bank,  which  she  had  done  when  I  was  with  heii  alone,  on  the 
first  occasion ;  and  also  studiously  avoided  naming  any  of  the 
articles  to  be  destributed,  or  the  persons  who  were  considered 
in  that  connection ;  or  the  name  of  any  business  firm  which  had 
on  the  previous  occasion  been  mentioned.  Nor  did  she  allude  to 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


145 


my  removal  of  her  jewels  from  the  home  to  the  bank  on  Friday, 
10th  November,  1911,  as  I  left  for  Detroit  next  morning. 
(Saturday  morning,  11th  November.)  In  addition  to  the  fore¬ 
going,  the  same  intelligence  spoke ;  and  the  records  contain  addi¬ 
tional  evidence,  establishing  the  human  personality  of  May  E. 
King.  (See  No.  11  materialization,  in  Chapter  XVI,  at  Jonson 
seance  on  15th  November,  1911.) 

I  submit  that  the  evidence  is  presented,  which  proves  the  intel¬ 
ligence  to  be  exceedingly  cautious,  a  characteristic  of  the  alleged 
personality.  The  evidence  also  proves  that  the  intelligence  talking 
through  the  trumpet  on  the  12th  November,  and  the  one  talking 
in  materialized  form  on  the  15th  November,  another  time  and 
place  were  one  and  the  same  intelligence,  and  personality.  The 
evidence  also  proves  that  as  the  intelligence  disapproved  of'  some 
things  that  I  had  decided  to  do,  it  could  not  be  accounted  for  by 
telepathic  communication ;  and  could  not  possibly  be  accounted 
for  by  a  coincidence ;  nor  by  fraud ;  nor  as  a  matter  of  fact,  by 
any  other  known  hypothesis ;  it  must  therefore  of  necessity  be, 
as  it  represented  itself  to  be,  the  stated  personality.,  Then  there 
is  the  circumstantial  evidence  of  both  Hypatia  and  Dr.  Sharp, 
promising  me  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  that  they  also  would  visit  the 
Wednesday  night  seance  at  Jonson’s ;  and  both  keeping  that 
promise ;  and  not  only  keeping  it,  but  materialization  of  their 
bodies  was  promised ;  and  this  promise  was  also  kept.  Not  only 
does  their  appearance  at  Jonson’s  in  materialized  form  establish 
the  fulfillment  of  their  prediction,  that  they  would ;  but  becomes 
corroborative  evidence,  that  the  materialization  of  both  wife  and 
daughter  took  place  as  predicted  at  Detroit ;  and  established  as 
a  fact  or  truth  by  the  introduction  by  Hypatia  of  wife  and 
daughter,  which  is  evidence  of  each  of  these  personalities,  that 
the  prediction  made  at  Detroit,  by  May  was,  as  well  as  the 
promises  by  Hypatia  and  Dr.  Sharp,  fulfilled  at  Jonson’s  in 
Toledo,  in  the  sight  and  hearing  of  all  the  members  of  the  Sun¬ 
flower  class,  present  at  the  seance  on  15th  November,  1911.  (See 
Chapter  XVI.) 

I  am  quite  certain,  in  fact  quite  as  certain  as  I  am  of  anything 


146 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  presume  to  know,  such  as  my  friends,  relatives,  acquaintances, 
occupation  and  responsibilities,  that  the  best  professional  delineator 
or  actor  the  world  could  produce  would  ignominiously  fail  to 
present  himself  or  herself,  or  produce  anyone  to!  so  present,  for 
example  at  a  Joason  seance,  as  a  perfect  duplicate  form|  of  my 
life  partner,  and  constant  daily  associate  for  the  last  quarter  of 
a  century;  and  with  similar  natural  development,  form,  feature, 
voice  and  mannerisms,  together  with  similar  action,  tangibility, 
power,  zeal  and  other  normal  indications,  and  thought  expressions, 
so  as  to  deceive  me,  regarding  each  and  all  of  the  foregoing 
characteristics.  And  again,  even  in  one  of  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  trumpet 
seances  conducted  in  the  dark,  for  voice  communication,  how 
could  it  be  possible  for  the  medium,  or  an  accomplice,  to  conduct 
a  conversation,  or  reply  to  my  numerous  interrogations,  or  make 
request  of  me  not  to  dispose  of  each  of  several  of  her  personal 
effects  as  I  had  designed  in  my  mind  to  do ;  and  give  her  reasons 
therefor,  regarding  their  disposal ;  make  use  on  the  one  hand  of 
the  personal  name,  and  in  these  cases  likewise  give  her  reasons. 
And  further,  two  days  later  in  another  State  in  a  Jonson  seance 
with  the  materialized  body  (and  to  be  consistent  it  would  have 
to  be  the  same  personality,  even  if  an  accomplice)  comes,  as  I 
will  show,  into  the  view  and  hearing  of  all  the  sitters;  and  the 
conversation  began  in  Detroit  is  continued  in  Toledo,  and  not 
only  that  but  it  confirms  what  was  said  and  done  at  the  former 
place,  as  witness  the  quotation  from  the  stenographer’s  report, 
which  was  sworn  to :  “Do  just  as  I  said  about  my  things.”  “It 
is  not  necessary  to  repeat  that.  About  my  jewels,  I  want  them 
left  where  they  are,  in  the  safety  deposit  vault  in  the  bank.  I 
don’t  want  them  given  away  for  a  very  long  time.  Then  I  will 
instruct  you  about  what  I  want  done  with  them.  My  single 
diamohd,  I  want  you  as  soon  as  you  go  home,  to  have  it  set  as 
a  scarf  pin.  Be  careful  and  watch  where  you  take  it,  do  you 
understand  ?  And  when  you  wear  it,  it  will  make  it  easier  for  me 
to  come  near  to  you.” 

I  ask  the  reader  to  note  the  facts ;  that  I  placed  watch,  diamonds 
and  jewelry  above  referred  to  in  the  bank  on  Friday  noon,  left 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


147 


my  home  on  Saturday  morning,  and  had  my  first  communication 
from  my  wife  on  Sunday  through  the  trumpet  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s, 
slightly  more  than  forty-eight  hours  after  the  deposit  had  been 
made. 

In  speaking  to  me  at  the  very  first  of  the  November,  1911, 
series,  in  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  seance  room  May  or  “Babe”  employed 
the  test  name  “Johnnie,”  it  being  the  first  opportunity  she  had 
for  so  doing;  and  alluded  to  my  having  placed  her  things  in  the 
safety  deposit  vault  at  the  bank.  I  immediately  asked  her  what 
bank,  and  she  replied  giving  the  name.  I  have  already  twice 
mentioned  our  agreement  in  the  summer  of  1911 ;  but  I  wish  to 
impress  its  importance  on  the  mind  of  the  reader,  and  to  enable 
each  tO'  recognize  the  early  constant  efforts  made  by  May,  for 
not  only  proving  by  test  names  her  personality,  but  by  tests  of 
her  own  design,  to  prove  her  personality  in  many  ways,  some 
of  these  have  already  been  presented,  and  she  has  assured  me 
she,  if  debarred  at  one  door,  will  try  another;  and  if  one  plan 
fails  will  devise  another. 

It  had  been  mutually  agreed  between  us  in  the  summer  of 
1911,  that  after  separation  by  death  of  the  body,  if  should  be 
we  continued  to  be  alive  and  were  permitted  to  return,  if  I  passed 
out  of  body  first  and  returned,  I  was  to  partially  prove  my 
personality  by  speaking  her  test  name,  “Babe,”  and  partially  by 
private  or  personal  matters  unknown  by  those  outside  of  our¬ 
selves.  If  she  passed  out  of  body  first  and  returned,  she  was  to 
partially  prove  her  personality  by  speaking  my  test  name  “Johnnie,” 
and  partially  by  private  or  personal  matters  unknown  by  those 
outside  of  ourselves.  These  names  were  not  known  as  ours  by 
other  persons.  As  she  passed  from  her  physical  body  on  Septem¬ 
ber  29,  1911,  it  was  the  forty-fourth  day  thereafter,  that  she  began 
to  prove  her  personality,  as  outlined  in  the  chapter  dealing  with 
the  first  s&nce  on  November  12,  1911. 

I  now  quote  further  from  the  sworn  statement  of  record  as 
follows:  *‘You  were  not  with  me  when  I  passed  out  (a  fact),  but 
I  couldn’t  have  spoken  to  you  if  you  had  been  there,  but  now, 
dear  ‘Johnnie,’  we  will  make  up  for  lost  time.” 


148 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


In  order  to  rightly  and  understandingly  appreciate  my  con¬ 
clusions,  the  reader  has  only  to  assume  a  similar  relative  position 
to  mine. 

If  you  are  a  man  do  you  really  mean  to  say  it  is  possible  to 
deceive  you  in  either  night  or  day,  by  the  presentation  of  a 
woman  form  to  represent  your  wife,  with  whom  you’ve  lived  most 
happily  for  many  years  of  life,  and  whose  habits  and  conversa¬ 
tions,  acts  and  mannerisms,  as  well  as  knowledge  of  personal 
affairs,  induce  you  to  accept  the  presentation  as  your  wife,  if  it 
were  some  other  woman?  And  I  ask  you  further,  either  man 
or  wife,  if  you  really  did  believe  and  accepted  it  as  a  fact,  how 
long  would  your  acceptance  last?  Now  I  will  also  ask  you,  if 
you  are  not  aware  that  variety  in  all  creation  is  so  vei'y  great, 
that  man  cannot  find  two  apples  in  an  orchard,  or  two  blades 
of  grass,  two  human  beings,  not  even  twins,  nor  two  units  of 
any  natural  thing  which  are  in  each  and  all  respects  a  perfect 
duplicate,  the  one  of  the  other. 

I  feel  justified  in  saying  that,  having  during  many  years  made 
scores  of  individual  private  investigations,  conducted  with  patience, 
perseverance  and  care,  results  have  in  a  large  number  of  them 
proved  unprofitable  and  disappointing ;  and  therefore  the  assump¬ 
tion  by  any  person  that  I  could  be  so  imposed  upon,  by  either  a 
medium  or  their  accompfice,  or  in  any  other  manner,  with  the 
experience  I  have  gained,  would  awaken  my  sympathy  for  them 
in  their  self-delusion. 

I  submit  the  foregoing  group  of  associated  evidence,  which  I 
claim  no  single  hypothesis  or  combination  of  hypotheses  will 
account  for,  other  than  the  spiritual  hypothesis,  which,  even  if 
unsupported  by  any  other  evidence,  clearly  establishes  the  truths 
contended  for. 

I  will  ask  the  man  without  prejudice,  and  with  an  open  mind 
to  consider  the  possibility  of  a  fraudulent  interjection  upon  the 
scene,  at  each  of  the  three  materialization  seances  at  Jonson’s, 
of  some  one,  and  the  same  one  human  being  on  each  occasion, 
claiming  to  be  my  spirit  wife ;  where  the  said  form  would  be 
visible  not  only  to  me,  but  to  all  present ;  and  whose  conversation 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


149 


would  have  to  be  consistently  maintained  throughout  the  three 
occasions  at  Jonson’s,  as  well  as  on  the  first  two  occasions  before 
I  went  to  Jonson’s,  together  with  two  which  were  subsequent 
thereto,  or  total  of  four  trumpet  ones  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  and  a 
grand  total  of  seven.  Three  of  the  four  sittings  had  were  with 
her  alone,  and  door  was  locked,  and  voice  was  strong,  and  more 
clear  than  that  at  Jonson’s,  and  easier  too  with  trumpet  there, 
than  with  the  mouth  at  Jonson’s,  so  the  form  claimed.  The  reader 
will  further  realize  that  these  various  talks  on  subjects  personal 
or  private,  or  in  the  home,  as  held  throughout  the  November 
series  of  seven  seances,  first  two  in  Detroit,  then  three  in  Toledo, 
and  lastly  and  again  two  in  Detroit,  must  all  absolutely  harmonize 
with  the  verities  discussed,  or  realized,  or  which  were  known  to 
have  existence ;  and  close  connection  with  family,  general  and 
business  matters.  I  ask  you  now,  could  I  be  deceived  into  believ¬ 
ing,  or  could  any  one,  by  any  system  of  fraud,  however  cleverly 
devised  or  invented,  succeed  by  both  trumpet,  and  form  presenting 
—  in  either  or  in  both  cases  to  the  area  of  my  mental  conception, 
so  as  to  be  cognized  by  my  physical  senses,  and  accepted  by  con¬ 
viction  as  being  my  wife ;  which  likewise  was  confirmed  by  others, 
as  note  the  stenographic  report  sworn  to  as  correct,  and  supplied 
to  me,  if  it  were  not  her?  And  here  note  further  that  the  said 
form  encompassed  a  detail  of  knowledge,  sufficient  to  converse 
intelligently  upon  personal,  private,  family  and  business  affairs, 
and  at  the  same  time  if  fraudulent  appeared  in  the  duplicate 
physical  form  of  the  genuine,  for  the  presumably  express  purpose 
of  deceiving  me,  and  with  me  all  the  others  at  the  seance.  More¬ 
over,  is  any  reader  of  the  foregoing,  or  could  there  be  any  one  in 
their  normal  senses  anywhere,  ready  to  admit  the  probability, 
much  less  the  possibility  of  my  being  hoaxed  into  accepting  the 
fraudulent  substitute  for  the  genuine?  Such  presumption  cannot 
stand.  Is  it  not  self-evident  that  there  could  never  be  a  fraudulent 
substitute,  that  would  be  the  exact  duplicate  of  the  genuine 
physical  form  and  personality;  and  equally  self-evident,  that  no 
attempted  fraudulent  effort  could  have  been  made,  that  would 
harmonize  fraudulent  and  genuine,  in  natural  voice,  facial  expres- 


150 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


sion,  manner  of  speech,  language  used,  and  personal  character¬ 
istics,  to  say  nothing  of  the  intimate  personal  knowledge  possessed 
of  family  events,  personal  possessions,  casual  knowledge,  local 
in  character,  or  acquired  information.  Where  would  land,  or 
what  would  be  the  fate  of  a  fraudulent  person  seeking  to  duplicate 
the  genuine,  under  my  quizzing  cross-examination,  and  difference 
of  view  or  opinion,  as  held  by  the  genuine  and  myself  before; 
and  between  another  and  myself  since  the  genuine  passed  to  spirit 
life?  Ever  and  always,  remembering  that  events  on  this  occasion, 
as  well  as  on  the  first,  the  fulfillment  at  Detroit  of  a  promise  or 
agreement  made  in  earth  life,  by  the  genuine  and  myself ;  and 
secondly  the  consummation  of  predictions  made  to  me  in  Detroit, 
by  my  alleged  life  partner,  or  a  fraudulent  existence,  that  she 
or  it  would  materialize  and  talk  with  me  at  Toledo,  a  continua¬ 
tion  there,  of  what  was  talked  of  in  Detroit.  No  other  plan  or 
way,  it  seems  to  me,  would  serve  as  well,  to  intercept  a  fraud 
presenting.  The  detailed  instructions  or  requests  for  me  not  to 
do,  what  I  proposed  to  do,  with  certain  things  among  my  wife’s 
possessions,  of  which  no  person,  other  than  myself  and  she,  had 
any  knowledge,  together  with  instructions  as  to  what  she  (this 
form,  my  wife  “May,”  or  “Babe”),  desired  me  to  do  instead, 
with  the  self-same  articles ;  disposes  not  alone  of  the  question 
of  fraud  in  this  instance  at  least ;  but  likewise,  most  effectually, 
disposes  of  the  mind-reading,  or  thought-transference  and  every 
other  faulty  mind  hypothesis;  and  they  need  not,  therefore,  be 
further  entertained  for  even  brief  consideration. 

Throughout  these  chapters,  the  careful  investigator  will  find 
from  beginning  to  the  end,  a  cobweb  connection  of  circumstantial, 
corroborative  and  direct  evidential  matter,  in  support  of  the  claim 
that  the  human  personality  has  been  established,  as  that  of  the 
individualized  materialization,  claiming  to  be  my  spirit  wife  May. 
So  conclusively  convincing  is  the  evidence  to  me,  that  I  am 
sure,  that  the  intelligence  which  formed  up  in  my  presence,  on 
the  three  occasions  at  Jonson’s,  talked  and  walked  with  me,  as 
she  had  done  for  nearly  quarter  of  a  century  in  life,  asked  me 
to  do  certain  things  when  I  returned  home  and  bid  me  “Good- 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


151 


bye,”  then  slowly  dissolved  or  melted  away  as  snow,  passing  down 
into  the  floor,  as  I  leaned  over  towards  her,  my  face  and  my 
eyes  meeting  hers  as  the  smile  and  all  else  melted  into  thin  vapor, 
disappearing  at  my  very  feet,  was  none  other  intelligence  or 
personality  save  what  it  professed  to  be,  viz. :  my  spirit  wife, 
with  manifest  and  tangible  body.  May  E.  King.  What  she  and 
I  had  earnestly,  sincerely,  and  I  might  say  almost  sacredly  agreed 
in  life  to  do,  if  our  existence  continued  in  spirit  realms,  and  it 
were  possible  for  either  of  us,  and  we  were  permitted  to  carry 
out  our  agreement,  that  either  one  would  contribute  their  best 
efforts  in  offering  the  proofs  of  the  truth  as  we  found  it. 

Unless  the  minds  of  readers  are  firmly  set  as  biased,  so  that 
they  will  not  accept  any  evidence  to  be  adduced  to  prove  a  truth, 
but  stubbornly  object  to  acknowledge  it,  then  such  must  stand 
convicted  as  unreasonable.  I  therefore  maintain  that  the  case  as 
herewith  submitted,  along  with  the  evidence,  is  sustained. 

Permit  me,  honest  critic  with  unbiased  mind,  now  to  ask  you, 
was  all  the  foregoing  as  described,  and  further  much  more  of  it, 
in  great  variety  to  come,  simply  a  coincidence,  or  a  strange  yet 
singular  combination  of  hypotheses  to  work  together  as  a  com¬ 
plicated  plan;  and  if  not,  then  what  was  it,  if  it  be  not  spirit  life 
made  manifest  to  man?  If  answer  you  cannot  give  to  me,  and 
have  an  awakened  mind,  I  will  appeal  to  reason,  and  I  answer 
for  you.  My  physical  senses,  my  mental  impressions,  my  soul 
recognition  manifesting  in  my  spiritual  sense  of  intuition,  which 
long  has  slumbered,  but  now  awakens  to  find  resulting  proof, 
from  tests  mutually  agreed  upon,  while  yet  she  lived  with  me 
on  earth ;  and  which  are  further  endorsed  or  supported  by 
numerous  evidences  throughout  the  book,  together  now  confirm 
the  truth,  that  our  spirit  life  or  carnate  spirit  continues  on  after 
the  shell  or  body  dies,  and  can  and  does,  when  it  becomes  dis- 
carnate,  communicate  with  mortals. 

I  frankly  state  that  I  no  longer  doubt,  nor  hold  a  mental 
reservation ;  but  claim  that  May  and  I  have  together  solved  the 
problem,  upon  which  I  have  spent  the  riper  years  of  my  life ; 
and  she  as  a  co-investigator  spent  several  later  years  (four) ; 


152 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  concluded  with  carefully  studied  plans,  and  strong  desire, 
and  with  determined  truthful  operative  demonstration,  are  satis¬ 
fied  that  we  are  by  the  aid  of  mediums  and  spirit  guides  and 
helpers,  able  to  conjointly  present  in  the  chapters  and  records 
of  this  book  facts,  circumstances,  and  evidences,  which  can  be 
substantiated  in  most  cases  on  oath  by  responsible  and  reputable 
witnesses  and  auditors  of  such  evidence.  We  believe  that  the 
evidences  presented  can  withstand  the  storms  of  any  or  all  adverse 
criticism  —  no  matter  where  nor  what  the  point  of  origin;  nor 
the  measure  of  the  force  or  influence  employed ;  and  this  and 
similar  evidence,  which  accumulates  as  the  work  of  compilation 
goes  on,  does  and  will  establish  the  existence  of 

(1)  The  continuity  of  life;  (2)  Spirit  return,  and  (3)  Spirit 
communion  with  mortals  of  earth. 


CHAPTER  XXI 


I  HAVE  already  afforded  the  reader  the  opportunity  of  con¬ 
sidering  two  distinct  phases  of  psychic  mediumship,  viz. : 
That  for  the  trumpet-voices ;  and  that  for  the  physical 
production  of  materialized  but  transient  physical  bodies,  I  will 
now  introduce  a  third  distinct  phase  commonly  designated  auto¬ 
matic  writing  —  but  as  an  exceptional  case  of  that  phase,  differing 
from  all  others  of  the  phase  I  have  met,  in  that  it  is  complicated 
with  other  features  of  a  psychic  character.  The  intelligences 
who  have  written  through  her  hand  have  utilized  one  or  the  other, 
or  both  of  the  other  two  phases,  to  prove  themselves  to  be  the 
identical  personalities  they  alleged  themselves  to  be. 

Miss  Maud  Venice  Gates,  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,” 
is  a  native  of  New  York  State,  and  was  educated,  trained  and 
graduated  as  a  nurse ;  and  has  also  been  teacher,  manager, 
genealogist  and  writer.  She  is  mentally  bright  and  intelligent ; 
statuesque,  robust  in  build,  and  a  maiden  lady.  The  photo  for 
the  plate,  the  last  one  possessed,  was  taken  a  few  years  ago, 
when  as  a  graduate  nurse  she  registered  at  Albany,  New  York 
State.  Her  object  in  view  earlier  in  life  was  to  become  a  physician, 
but  family  changes  and  illness  prevented  its  attainment. 

In  answer  to  my  question  “How  did  you  find  out  about  your 
automatic  writing  gift,  and  when?”  she  replied:  “In  1892,  while 
experimenting  with  a  ouija  board  (a  kind  of  planchette),  I  soon 
learned  that  I  could  not  only  write  with  the  board,  but  could  write 
if  I  placed  a  pencil  in  my  fingers  and  sat  passively.  I  asked  my 
hand  questions  when  I  wished  to  know  things  about  the  future, 
and  about  other  things,  with  as  much  interest  as  girls  ordinarily 
have  in  telling  their  fortunes  by  cards.  The  capacity  to  write 
automatically  has  remained  with  me  ever  since,  but  not  as  per¬ 
fected  as  it  now  is,” 

“The  automatic  speaking  is  in  obedience  to  my  will  or  voluntary 
commands.  This  only  came  to  me  in  1905,  when  I  was  playing 

153 


154 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


different  records  on  a  graphophone.  My  vocal  organs  talked  an 
eloquent  speech,  that  I  had  never  heard.  Without  to  me  apparent 
cause  this  speech  stopped  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  and  refused 
to  continue  in  response  to  my  mentally  expressed  wish.” 

“In  August,  1892,  I  became  ill,  abandoned  a  case  I  was  nursing 
and  went  home.  I  had  what  I  believed  to  be  a  slight  delusion, 
which  I  naturally  ascribed  to  the  effects  of  mercurial  poison  I 
had  inhaled,  while  I  had  sublimated  it  in  course  of  duty.  Soon 
voices  began  talking  to  me  and  told  me  I  was  to  be  a  medium. 
To  this  in  any  form  I  was  strongly  opposed.  However,  on  August 
21,  1892,  a  constant  ring  of  rhyme  began  to  go  through  my  head; 
and  different  intelligences  talked  to  me  on  one  subject  or  another.” 

The  melody  of  rhyming  sentences  in  what  the  psychic  writes 
is  not  more  strange  and  exceptional,  than  are  the  spoken  exclama¬ 
tions  of  trance  mediums  speaking  to  their  audiences.  The 
language  used  in  either  case,  is  not  the  exact  language  of  the 
intelligence  in  every  case  that  communicates,  or  if  so  be,  it  is 
moulded  by  the  instrument  through  which  it  comes,  no  matter 
from  what  source  the  thought  emanates ;  the  thought  itself  is 
really  conveyed.  Rhyming  in  this  case  is  an  unconventional  mode 
of  expression,  some  of  which  may  sound  as  frivolous,  or  meaning¬ 
less  play  with  words,  but  nevertheless  conveys,  both  hidden  and 
plain,  certain  thoughts  and  absolute  facts,  quite  unknown  to  the 
psychic  writer’s  objective  mind,  which  had  existence  in  some 
instances  before  she  was  born ;  and  in  sources  which  she  never 
could  have  reached,  and  which  thoughts  could  not  to  her  be  con¬ 
veyed  in  any  ordinary  way. 

This  woman,  who  had  studied  for  three  years  and  graduated 
as  a  nurse,  and  had  studied  to  become  a  physician,  for  at  least 
a  full  year,  had  some  knowledge  of  the  human  anatomy,  for 
she  said  to  me,  “At  one  time  my  conscious  self  seemed  to  be 
crowded  down  into  my  medulla  oblongata  region  ;  and  the  involun¬ 
tary  talking  power  seemed  to  occupy  my  whole  upper  brain 
region.  Music  seemed  to  ring  through  my  bones  and  muscles, 
as  well  as  my  head.  This  independent  passive  portion  of  my 
ego,  seemed  to  go  through  many  experiences  too  numerous  to 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


155 


mention  now.  This  strange  power  was  attached  to  me.  I  could 
not  escape  it,  and  therefore  must  abide  by  its  possession.  To  be, 
as  you  have  asked  me  to  be,  perfectly  candid,  I  viewed  it  about 
as  you  would  view  a  useful,  perfect  third  arm.  I  resolved  to 
never  wed,  lest  a  husband  would  be  my  guardian,  according  to 
our  laws;  and  in  the  case  as  I  have  mentioned  to  you,  in  every 
detail,  he  might  consider,  and  succeed  in  proving  me  insane,  and 
place  me  in  an  asylum.  So  I  decided  to  treat  this  gift  as  a  third 
arm,  and  keep  it  out  of  sight.” 

She  has  been  looked  upon  as  being  an  unsolved  mental  curiosity. 
As  a  psychic  instrument,  I  have  secured  through  her  most 
wonderful  results.  She  has  given  me  her  full  consent  to  give 
my  definition,  of  the  name  and  functions  of  the  instrument,  which 
I  now  do  this  month  of  April,  1912. 

Miss  Maud  Venice  Gates,  of  New  York  State,  defined  to  be 
"The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  with  automatic  action,  includ¬ 
ing  movement,  writing  and  speech ;  whose  conscious  and  sub¬ 
conscious  min^is,  act  independent  of  each  other,  without  clashing 
or  confusion ;  and  with  both  carnate  and  discarnate  psychic  force 
and  action.  (Though  this  definition  was  made  subsequent  to  many 
of  my  records,  I  did  anticipate,  and  placed  it  here.) 

The  rhyming,  grammar,  words  and  sentences,  are  shaped  by 
the  psychic  instrument,  but  not  the  normal  self,  more  like  the 
mouldboard  of  the  plow  that  shapes  each  furrow,  no  matter  who 
the  plowman  be.  As  even-ness  of  furrows  is  harmonious  to  the 
eye,  so  rhythm  by  the  instrument  makes  words  sound  euphonious 
to  the  ear.  Through  this  peculiar  automatic  instrument  there 
come  expressions  colored,  shaded,  tinted  or  modified  by  her  own 
personality,  but  mysterious  as  a  whole,  on  account  of  its  harmony 
of  sound,  and  its  rhyming  character  when  read  aloud ;  likewise 
directly  confirmatory,  or  circumstantial  and  evidential  in  character ; 
and  is  certainly  a  problem  worthy  of  the  consideration  of  the 
most  experienced  psychologist.  My  experience  with,  and  study 
of  her  extended,  at  long  and  short  intervals,  over  a  period  of 
some  seven  or  eight  years. 

I  give  more  or  less  disconnectedly  a  series  of  my  own  jottings 


156 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  the  operations  of  her  mind,  together  with  her  replies  to  a 
portion  of  my  interrogations  herewith.  She  apparently  is  an  open- 
minded  person,  not  wedded  to  anything,  and  realizes  she  is  dif¬ 
ferent,  mentally  and  psychically,  from  all  others  she  has  met; 
admits  she  has  never  been  anything  but  an  involuntary  psychic 
student,  and  has  not  deeply  studied  any  but  her  own  case.  It  is 
as  easy  she  says  for  her  to  write  letters  as  it  is  to  talk,  and  she 
can  do  both  at  one  and  the  same  time,  which  is  evident  to  me. 
Her  consciousness  remained  with  her  through  all  of  the  peculiar, 
and  often  disagreeable  and  alarming  processes  of  her  develop¬ 
ment,  or  attunement  of  the  conditions  necessary  to  the  power  to 
be  a  sort  of  telephone  instrument,  as  she  alleges,  between  the 
living  and  their  departed  friends.  But  as  her  entire  story  would 
be  too  long  to  include  here,  I  give  it  in  brief,  as  gathered  more 
or  less  consecutively,  and  combine  it  with  my  own  observations. 

As  she  remembered,  its  early  beginning  was  a  strange  sensation 
to  her,  when  she  found  that  if  she  let  herself  settle  into  a  certain 
passive  state,  her  lips  would  talk  themselves,  her  hands  would 
move,  accompanying  the  words ;  and  many  other  easily  noticeable 
peculiarities  would  present ;  and  to  her  own  apprehension  curious 
and  interesting  things  happened  to  her.  She  experimented  and 
learned  that  her  body  and  speech  would  act  independently  of 
her  volition.  All  she  had  to  do  was  to  request  it  to  perform,  and 
it  would  speak,  or  gesture,  or  sing,  or  dance  for  her  own  enter¬ 
tainment,  for  hours  if  she  desired  it  to  do  so ;  and  she  would  not 
feel  tired  as  a  consequence.  Instead  of  being  tired  she  was  more 
likely  to  feel  rested  or  revitalized,  when  she  was  ready  to  command 
it  to  stop. 

She  claims  that  her  father  in  spirit  does  not  stay  with  her, 
but  comes  to  her  soon  after  she  begins  to  write,  with  the  idea 
that  she  wishes  for  his  presence,  and  dictation.  The  automatic 
speaking  came  as  an  added  form  of  the  automatic  action.  She 
told  me  she  never  liked  the  name  medium,  as  in  her  mind  it  was 
associated  with  control  or  dictation,  which  was  not  exactly  true 
in  her  case.  She  had  been  called  an  “automatic  message  bearer,” 
but  even  that  might  indicate  that  the  power  to  do  was  not  under 


MISS  MAUD  VENICE  GATES, 
“The  Human-Psychic-Telephone.” 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


157 


her  own  volition,  which  would  be  untrue.  She  thought  that 
perhaps  the  name  I  gave  her,  “Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  with 
automatic  action  would  be  the  best,  and  after  due  consideration 
accepted  it,  as  a  comprehensive  designation.  She  really  never 
gave  it  a  serious  thought  before,  but  will  henceforth  acknowledge 
it,  as  her  exclusive  right ;  and  she  will  hereafter,  therefore,  be 
better  known,  and  designated.  She  alleges  she  can  hear  clair- 
audiently,  as  if  the  message  is  written  on  a  fine  thread,  and  so 
comes  down  through  her  brain.  This  power  is  interchangeable 
with  the  automatic  writing,  but  she  never  has  them  both  at  the 
same  time.  If  she  is  writing,  or  is  in  a  hurry,  she  will  sometimes 
hear  the  rest  or  balance  of  the  message.  If  she  hears  the  message 
her  hand  does  not  write  it,  and  if  she  then  wishes  it  on  the  paper 
she  must  write  it  voluntarily.  If  she  is  making  an  automatic 
speech,  and  is  disturbed,  so  that  she  herself  talks  about  ordinary 
subjects,  the  speech  waits,  where  she  left  it,  like  water  in  a  tube; 
and  she  can  hitch  on  her  power,  to  let  it  rule  her  speech ;  and  it 
will  continue  from  where  it  left  off,  without  any  break  or  evident 
annoyance.  The  speeches  she  so  makes,  are  far  above  her  normal 
power  of  composition  or  expression  ;  and  as  a  rule  have  a  tendency 
to  rhyme.  Sometimes  her  hand  writes  poems,  and  she  can  talk 
while  the  hand  is  doing  the  writing,  and  not  interfere  in  the 
slightest  with  its  action.  It  will  continue,  easily,  steadily,  like  a 
graphophone  playing  a  tune,  after  it  is  set  in  motion,  and  will 
so  continue  to  do  until  it  is  through.  The  first  conscious  knowl¬ 
edge  she  has,  of  what  it  has  written,  is  when  it  stops  and  she 
reads  it  through. 

She  has  good  health  and  to  exert  this  power  does  not  tire  her. 
She  alleges  that  she  sometimes  has  the  power  to  heal  in  this  same 
automatic  fashion.  She  can  talk  in  several,  to  her  unknown, 
languages.  She  tells  me  that  these  tongues  seem  to  be  ancient, 
and  not  modern  languages.  She  cannot  understand  what  she 
says  unless  she  automatically  translates  it,  which  she  appears  to 
have  the  power  to  do.  This  she  says  in  her  own  words,  “These 
languages  are  not  meaningless  jargon,  for  I  have  experimented, 
and  found  that  this  power  would,  at  my  suggestion,  converse 


158 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


through  my  powers  of  speech,  with  intelligences  speaking  peculiar 
languages,  either  through  entranced  mediums,  or  through  trumpets 
in  seances.”  All  her  different  phases  are  to  her  now  so  habitual, 
that  to  have  them  seems  to  her  to  be  normal,  and  she  would  be 
as  astonished  if  she  should  attempt  to  talk  automatically,  and  no 
talk  came,  as  she  might  be  if  she  attempted  to  move  her  arm 
and  found  it  refused  to  act. 

She  writes,  she  claims,  for  her  father  every  morning  and 
evening.  She  asserts  with  very  candidly  expressed  words  and 
sentiments  that  “the  proceeding  takes  the  place  of  former,  or  is 
now,  our  modernized  family  worship.”  Regarding  the  question 
of  conditions  as  applicable  to  her  phenomena,  she  explained  that 
she  habitually  and  easily,  as  one  would  move  their  hands,  con¬ 
centrates  her  conscious  attention  to  about  the  condition  of  a 
slight  reverie;  but  is  at  the  time  perfectly  conscious,  and  can  stop 
writing,  or  begin  at  any  time;  and  if  she  stops  in  the  middle  of 
a  message,  when  she  returns  to  it  (the  message),  it  will  con¬ 
tinue  perfectly  from  where  she  left  off  before.  All  the  automatic 
messages  are  written  in  her  own  handwriting,  and  do  not  appear 
to  be  impressed  on  her  consciousness,  until  she  reads  them.  If 
she  hears  any  part  of  the  message  clair-audiently,  her  hand  does 
not  write  it ;  and  she  must  then  write  what  she  heard  voluntarily. 
Her  mind  in  the  proper  condition  for  the  automatic  writing  is 
sufficiently  preoccupied,  so  that  when  alone  she  spells  the  words 
written  voluntarily  aloud,  so  as  to  attract  her  conscious  approval. 
She  frequently  writes  whole  pages  purely  automatically,  receiving 
no  mental  impression,  except  from  reading  the  words  after  they 
are  written.  The  messages  come  in  a  continuous  way  without 
capitalization,  and  it  is  necessary  for  her  to  add  those  and  also 
“notice  when  the  individuals  change.” 

I  think  I  have  already  mentioned,  that  the  messages,  as  a  rule, 
are  either  spoken  or  written  rhyme.  I  may  add  that  though  they 
rhyme,  those  I  have  seen  are  rarely,  if  at  all,  in  regular  meter, 
as  .is  usual  in  standard  poetry.  The  rhyming  sentences  however 
sound  euphonious.  One  point  mentioned  by  her,  that  I  find  I 
have  missed  recording  is,  that  when  she  was  alone,  she  used  to 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


159 


experiment  in  many  ways,  and  among  other  things  learned  that 
she  could  stand  passively  and  her  “feet  would  walk  themselves.” 

While  writing  sometimes,  the  messages  run  into  each  other, 
and  two  come  at  once,  one  semi-clairaudiently,  using  part  of  the 
sentence,  or  rather  the  sentence  being  written  by  her  hand  as 
a  part  of  the  thought  they  are  expressing.  Sometimes  they 
double  on  a  phrase.  So  then  she  normally  copies  them  to  make 
them  clear. 

Suffice  it  to  say  that  most  of  the  automatic  written  messages 
to  me  were  written  by  the  hand  of  Miss  Gates  while  holding  my 
own  fountain  pen  —  designated  by  Stead  and  some  others  of  the 
writers  as  my  psychic  pen  —  and  on  pages  of  blank  books,  which 
I  invariably  took  there  for  the  purpose,  and  brought  back  with 
me  when  the  writing  was  completed  each  time.  Such  writings 
as  I  selected  for  publication  were  reproduced  for  printer’s  copy 
in  the  exact  wording  as  received  by  me.  To  have  eliminated  the 
rhythm  by  substitution  of  words  of  mine  —  as  has  been  suggested 
by  a  distinguished  earth  friend,  as  well  as  by  a  valued  spirit  teacher 
and  aider  —  would  surely  have  been,  in  my  judgment,  a  tampering 
with  the  evidence.  Hypatia,  who  has  vouched  for  the  genuineness 
of  each  writer  who  made  use  of  my  pen  in  the  automatic  writing 
seances,  endorses  my  decision  in  this  matter. 

The  Author’s  Conclusions,  Concerning  this  Psychic 
Instrument. 

I  would  ask  the  reader  before  proceeding  further,  to  dispossess 
himself  of  the  error  of  supposing  that  the  written  message  as 
it  comes  to  view,  is  a  facsimile  of  what  the  intelligence  discarnate 
used  to  write,  while  incarnate  as  a  mortal,  for  such  is  not  the 
case;  but  takes  the  form  which  the  instrument’s  normal  hand 
writes,  so  the  intelligence  uses  what  is  already  there,  and  suited 
to  its  purposes.  The  reader  will  then  probably  enquire  in  thought, 
“How  then  can  I  be  assured  that  the  thought  which  suggests  the 
words  so  penned  in  a  kind  of  medley,  and  of  rhyming  character, 
has  not  its  origin  in  the  mind  of  the  instrument?”  As  a  general 
rule,  it  is  not  even  difficult  to  find  corroborative,  or  even  direct 
evidence  in  some  cases,  which  not  only  disproves  it,  but  which 


160 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


easily  establishes  the  view  that  the  psychic  could  not  have  in  her 
own  mind  the  capacity  and  knowledge  which  through  her  is 
imparted  to  the  writing  hand,  while  her  own  objective  mind  is 
otherwise  engaged  in  conversing  with  others  who  are  present. 
Again  messages  are  written  by  her  hand,  bearing  the  signatures 
of  former  mortals,  from  whom  she  had  never  heard,  with  facts, 
dates,  names  and  relationships,  regarding  which  she  could  not 
by  any  possibility  have  the  slightest  knowledge,  -until  after  her 
own  incarnate  spirit  secured  it  from  the  subjective  mind  of  a 
mortal,  or  from  a  discarnate  spirit,  which  already  possessed  it. 

The  psychic  was  from  the  first,  as  she  has  intimated,  an 
unwilling  instrument,  and  was  made  to  suffer  mental  punishment 
by  her  controls,  who  still  compel  her  to  transrnit  spirit  messages 
in  a  rhyming  manner,  which  constitutes  a  veto  to  absolute  or 
total  independence  of  the  subjective  mind,  and  at  the  same  time 
relieves  the  objective  portion  of  the  mind,  and  thereby  protects 
the  reasoning  faculty.  This  faculty  of  writing  in  this  peculiar  way 
is  not  more  wonderful  than  is  that  of  her  automatic  speaking 
capacity,  without  apparent  control  of  her  objective  mind;  for 
many  short  messages  or  essays  are  promulgated  by  her  vocal 
organs,  in  different  languages,  as  noted  by  people  of  various 
nationalities,  though  she  in  normal  state  cannot  speak  in  more 
than  one  language.  In  either  case  no  matter  how  the  thought 
may  be  expressed  it  is  conveyed  in  a  way  to  establish  its  identity. 

At  first  most  spirits  cannot  write  at  all  through  her  hand,  except 
by  aid  of  guides,  but  with  added  experience  can  do  so,  and  write 
freely  through  any  automatic  hand ;  and  also  independently  on 
slates,  or  with  leaden  pencil  nib  on  paper.  This  I  found  true  to 
such  an  extent,  that  the  very  first  written  message  from  my  wife, 
and  from  Wm.  T.  Stead,  certainly  caused  serious  doubt  in  my 
own  mind ;  and  in  that  of  others,  but  after  continued  experience 
these  two  writers’  reference  thereto  became  amusing.  An  erudite 
critic,  and  former  London  friend  of  Stead,  sought  to  cast  ridicule 
upon  it  as  being  done  by  Stead  —  so  too  in  the  case  of  a  certain 
medium  of  renown  who  claimed  that  “Stead  would  only  come 
through  my  mediumship.”  —  While  Stead  informs  me  he  will 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


161 


come  through  any  open  door  (and  Julia  confirms  it) — and  has 
come  through  at  least  fourteen  different  doors  or  mediums,  to 
me  thus  far.  Ask  Stead  himself  when  you  have  opportunity,  and 
he  will  confirm  what  I  have  written  here  as  true. 

The  rhyming  style  of  the  written  communications  is  not  invari¬ 
ably  employed,  and  I  give  one  notable  example  in  the  later  pages 
of  these  records,  where  an  intelligence  alleged  itself  to  be  the 
spirit  of  the  late  Clegg  Wright,  a  former  medium  of  wide  repute 
who  wrote  to  me  through  this  psychic,  in  his  natural  way  describ¬ 
ing  the  difference  between  trance  state  and  when  the  spirit  is  in 
transition ;  and  was  followed  by  his  guide,  who  gave  me  the 
reason,  and  explained  how  it  was  accomplished.  (See  Chapter 
XXXIV.) 

I  will  here  offer  some  evidence  which  sustains  the  psychic’s 
credibility.  Three  distinct  intelligences  spoke  to  me  through  the 
trumpet  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  home  in  Detroit,  Mich.  (See  Chapter 
XIV),  and  told  me  that  they  would  materialize  for  me  at  Jonson’s 
home  in  Toledo,  Ohio;  and  talk  with  me  there,  and  did  so.  (See 
Chapter  XVI.)  After  I  reached  the  home  of  Miss  Gates  at  Lily 
Dale,  New  York,  some  weeks  later,  these  same  three  intelligences, 
viz.:  my  wife  May,  my  guide  Hypatia,  Dr.  Sharp,  the  guide  of 
Mrs.  Wriedt,  also  wrote  through  the  hand  of  this  psychic,  as 
they  have  done  very  many  times  alone,  and  in  company  with 
others.  Such  evidence  cannot  be  set  aside  by  the  critic,  and  must 
certainly  be  accounted  for  in  some  rational  way.  Again  an  intel¬ 
ligence  spoke  audibly  through  a  trumpet  with  me,  in  New  York 
State,  one  day;  and  then  later  wrote  through  the  automatic 
writer,  the  “Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  also  in  New  York 
State,  but  at  another  place,  that  “I  kept  my  promise  to  you  by 
speaking  through  the  trumpet  this  morning,  and  also  gave  you 
my  name,  did  I  not?” 

Another  and  somewhat  similar  proof  was  where  an  intelligence 
communicating  through  the  writing  psychic  promised  to  meet  me 
at  the  home  of  a  trance  medium,  with  whom  I  never  sat  before; 
and  while  there  proved  its  identity,  also  by  giving  its  name  in 
full,  through  the  vocal  organs  of  that  medium. 


162 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


These  examples  fro'ni  among  many  I  submit,  are  to  myself  most 
convincing  proofs  that  the  writing  psychic  is  not  personating,  and 
not  guilty  of  fraud,  for  some  of  the  mediums  through  whom  I 
made  these  tests  were  hundreds  of  miles  apart  from  her. 

The  evidence  above  quoted  is  largely  circumstantial  and  cor¬ 
roborative,  and  yet  establishes  the  genuineness  of  the  automatic 
psychic ;  but  there  is  yet  to  consider  the  strongest  and  most  con¬ 
vincing  kind  of  evidence  to  be  found,  viz. :  direct  evidence  which 
is  voluntarily  presented  in  many  of  the  communications ;  while 
by  cross-examination  as  question  and  answer  direct,  the  intelli¬ 
gence  establishes  its  identity,  and  often  proves  its  human  person¬ 
ality.  I  would  here  ask  each  scholastic  reader,  or  even  the  off-hand 
and  self-wise  critic  —  who  scorns  to  consider  the  matter  seriously 
enough  to  investigate,  and  does  not  hesitate  to  pronounce  it  all 
as  absurd,  ridiculous  and  incredible,  or  simply  to  pronounce  it 
fraud  —  to  stop  and  think  whether  a  student  could  open  the  third 
or  fourth  book  of  Euclid,  and  demonstrate  any  problem  there 
correctly,  without  first  being  possessed  of  all  the  knowledge  con¬ 
tained  in  the  pages  preceding  it;  and  if  not,  will  it  not  be  quite 
as  unreasonable  for  a  critic  to  open  up  this  book  at  a  later  page, 
and  begin  to  criticize  without  knowledge  of  the  contents  of  all 
previous  pages,  lest  he  build  his  opposition  structure  on  a  false 
premise  ? 

Another  thought  I  include  for  the  reader’s  consideration  on 
this  feature  is,  that  no  human  being  is  so  wise  that  they  may 
perchance  know  everything,  or  possess  at  least  all  the  knowledge, 
names,  dates  and  circumstances  that  are  contained  in  each  and 
all  of  the  written  messages  from  first  to  last,  of  the  many  hundreds 
received  through  this  psychic’s  hand,  as  well  as  the  personalities 
of  all  the  writers  of  those  messages,  for  the  hypothesis  of  fraud 
presupposes  that  the  medium  must  possess  all  the  knowledge 
which  she  imparts  through  the  various  messages  she  writes ;  and 
this  an  unbiased  reader  will  not  admit,  nor  even  believe,  for  such 
varied  and  prolific  knowledge  could  never  be  encompassed  by 
any  one  mind,  from  such  diversified  sources,  and  limited  by  years 
exceeding  the  span  of  the  instrument’s  mortal  life. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


163 


In  conclusion  I  give  it  as  my  unbiased  opinion  that  “The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone”  is  the  most  complicated  psychical 
instrument  I  have  ever  met.  She  has  been  subjected  by  me  to 
very  many  and  exacting  tests  of  her  mental,  as  well  as  psychical 
capacity,  and  supplied,  without  a  moment’s  hesitation,  automatic 
answers  in  writing,  which  I  believe  prove  from  their  nature, 
and  from  the  knowledge  conveyed,  that  they  could  only  have  had 
their  source  in  the  intelligences  which  were  credited  with  writing 
them^  many  of  which  appear  in  different  chapters.  These  intelli¬ 
gences  who  write  have  many  of  them  appeared  to  me,  at  one 
or  more  seances  held  by  each  of  four  different  materializing 
mediums ;  six  trumpet  mediums,  either  before  or  after  their 
written  messages,  or  their  own  part  of  the  conversations  held 
with  me ;  and  in  this  manner  I  have  secured  ample  evidence  of 
corroborative  character,  to  establish  their  identity  beyond  a  single 
doubt.  This  fact  alone  must  establish  the  genuineness  of  her 
automatic  faculty,  as  well  as  to  account  for  the  wonderful 
diversity  of  thought  and  knowledge  imparted  to  m.e.  The  reader 
will  find  in  the  chapters  to  follow,  much  of  what  I  promised,  viz. : 
cobweb  or  connecting  evidence,  and  of  sufficient  interest  to  compel 
the  most  careful  investigation. 

In  the  writing  of  messages,  which  feature  I  am  dealing  with, 
Eberling,  the  guide  or  controlling  spirit  of  “The  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone,”  is  assisted  by  elementali  spirits,  with  the  result  that 
rhyming  is  introduced  for  a  purpose  which  I  will  not  attempt  to 
explain,  though  it  may  possibly  be  simple,  and  if  rightly  under¬ 
stood  might  be  quite  acceptable.  A  wise  and  prudent  person  will 
never  deny  the  possibility  of  anything,  unless  prepared  to  dis¬ 
prove  it. 

It  may  prove  of  interest  to  readers  to  learn  the  view  of  some 
of  the  intelligences  who  have  made  use  of  this  rhyming  psychic. 
From  each  communication  I  make  extracts,  for  they  write  at 
greater  length  elsewhere.  (See  Chapter  XXXI.) 

Hypatia:  “It  is  not  difficult  to  make  this  subject  write,  that  is 
“if  she  is  active  in  the  automatic  key ;  but  as  she  of  her  conscious 
“self  does  neither  hear  nor  see,  unless  she  thinks  of  writing,  the 


164 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“door  is  closed  to  me  J  and  as  her  mind  subconscious  is  our  instru- 
“ment  alone,  her  mind  aids  our  suggestion.  If  she  reads  the 
“words  your  own  it  causes  her  to  listen,  and  give  proper  time  to 
“me,  and  then  I  write  to  answer  as  ’tis  written  thee.” 

Dr.  Richard  Hodgson,  in  detail  (in  Chapter  XXXI)  at  greater 
length  than  others  explains  how  very  difficult  he  finds  it  to  fully 
and  properly  convey  in  language  appropriate  the  exact  expression 
of  his  thoughts  through  this  psychic  to  me.  He  writes  clearly : 
“I  wish  I  could  come  near  to  you,  and  talk  without  this  rhyme.” 
He  further  states  that  his  guardian  is  with  him ;  and  that  Eberling, 
her  guide,  is  with  the  psychic.  They  aid  with  changes  seeming 
slight,  but  so  it  does  not  sound  as  if  I  do  it.  In  another  sentence 
he  says:  “Faults  of  complete  control  give  to  us  silence  here  and 
“there,  so  our  best  efforts  are  but  fair,  and  not  to  be  compared 
“to  thel  efforts  we  made  when  here  in  life.” 

Frederick  Myers  in  one  of  his  written  messages  to  me  says: 
“I  communicate  this  message.  It  is  a  peculiar  thing  to  do.  I 
“do  not  govern  this  hand.  I  speak  to  it  and  the  hand  writes  my 
“words.  It  is  governed  by  my  words,  as  was  Mrs.  Piper’s  hand 
“in  long  ago.  You’ve  heard  —  or  else  you  may  not  know  —  that 
“we  spoke  to  the  discarnate  spirits,  by  holding  her  hand  to  our 
“lips.  Now  in  this  case  I  stand  by  and  talk  what  I  wish  to  say, 
“the  mortal  senses  me  not,  though  she  is  in  consciousness  I  am 
“told.  She  only  sees  as  I  see  what  the  hand  writes.  I  see  it  is 
“not  my  handwriting  but  her  own.”  From  another  message  from 
Myers  I  quote  what  follows:  “There  are  other  mentalities  who 
“assist  us  like  to  servants  in  a  well  regulated  home.  In  fact  the 
“tendency  to  rhyme  is  fault  in  some  degree  of  one  of  these  who 
“near  her  (the  psychic)  stand,  and  aid  us  in  our  least  command. 
“Like  to  a  megaphone  they  be  to  my  completed  thought  to  thee. 
“They  confine  and  direct  it  to  its  best  service,  but  suggest  not.” 

Prof.  Thompson  J.  Hudson  says:  “I  like  you  have  studied 

“this  instrument  from  this  side  of  life . She  has  double 

“mental  action ;  or  the  action  of  the  other  portion  of  her  mentality 
“is  similar  to  the  normal  mental  action . This  one  case  is 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


165 


“most  peculiar  of  all,  because  the  two  minds  are  interchangable, 
“and  neither  disturbs  the  other.” 

May  (the  author’s  wife).  In  one  of  her  communications 
through  this  psychic  she  says:  ‘She  is  not  impressed  by  my 
“thoughts,  but  her  hand  is  governed  by  a  mind  that  is  intelligent 
“enough  to  transcribe  what  I  dictate  by  words.  It  seems  to  me, 
“or  to  my  conscious  mind,  very  much  as  if  you  could  step  to  a 
“telephone  and  talk  to  a  friend ;  and  as  you  spoke  the  message, 
“see  a  hand  writing  it  as  if  ruled  by  the  spoken  words.” 

On  another  occasion  I  asked  May  this  question,  viz. :  Why  do 
you  rhyme  like  so  many  others,  who  write  through  Miss  Gates? 
Her  reply  was:  “I  rhyme  because  it  is  easier  so  tO(  do.  If  I  let 
“it  rhyme  it  sort  of  runs  itself  like  to  a  pianola  or  piano-player ; 
“but  in  the  case  of  Mr.  Wright,  John  Shaw  and  Rushton 
“(Wright’s  guides)  served  instead  of  her,  rhyming  guides.” 

Clegg  Wright.  From  this  former  well  known  medium  I 
received  a  most  interesting  communication  which  will  be  found 
in  Chapter  XXXIV.  I  quote  what  he  wrote  through  the  rhyming 
psychic,  so  much  as  refers  to  his  being  an^'  exceptional  case,  and 
the  reason  why.  He  says:  “I  am  just  as  real,  and  just  as  much 
“in  life,  as  when  I  was  a  visitor  at  Lily  Dale  before.  I  see  you 
“too.  I  also  see  why  I  was  shifted.  I  am  nearer  and  beyond  the 
“rhyming  necessity.  Eberling,  the  instrument’s  guide,  in  accord- 
“ance  with  the  expressed  wish  of  my  guides,  permitted  me  to  be 
“shifted  beyond  the  rhyming  zone.” 

With  the  foregoing  information  in  mind  regarding  this  unique 
psychic  instrument,  the  reader  will  be  prepared  to  further  com¬ 
prehend  her  exceptional  capacity  for  repeated  and  prolonged 
psychical  activity,  by  critically  noting  the  results  secured  through 
her  while  perusing  Chapters  XXII,  XXIH,  XXIV,  XXIX, 
XXX,  XXXI,  XXXIV  and  XXXV. 


CHAPTER  XXII 


Hypatia,  the  Neo^platonic  philosopher  —  daughter 
OF  Theon  —  Alleged  Spirit  Guide  of  the  Author  — 
Has  proved  to  be  a  great  teacher  —  This  book  her 

OVi^N  SUGGESTION - She  AIDED  IN  SECURING  EVIDENCE  FOR  IT  — 

She  brought  relatives,  friends,  strangers,  seers,  philoso¬ 
phers  AND  RESEACHERS  TO  COMMUNE  WITH  THE  WRITER — ShE 
SPENT  HOURS  AT  A  TIME  IN  ANSWERING  HIS  QUESTIONS  —  FUL¬ 
FILLED  HER  PROMISE  TO  AID  HIM  TO  SECURE  HER  SPIRIT  PORTRAIT 

—  She  WROTE  through  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone” 

AND  OTHER  AUTOMATIC  WRITERS  —  AlSO  SPOKE  THROUGH  TRUM¬ 
PETS —  Has  held  converse  with  the  author  and  with  other 
PEOPLE  while  present  IN  HER  TRANSIENT  BODY, 

[Hypatia’s  spirit  portrait,  in  natural  colors,  about  three-quarters 
life  size,  made  by  spirit  artists  in  the  presence  of  the  Bangs  Sisters 
in  the  city  of  Chicago,  on  April  27,  1912,  while  under  the  author’s 
inspection,  on  a  basis  selected  by  him ;  and  was  completed  in  ten 
minutes,  immediately  after  that  of  William  T.  Stead.  It  was  sub¬ 
sequently  photographed  by  a  local  photographer  in  Toronto,  from 
which  a  photo-engraving  plate  was  produced,  which  in  turn  was 
used  by  the  printer  to  produce  her  picture  here,  costumed  as  she 
appeared  at  the  Jonson  seance  the  same  night  as  William  T. 
Stead  in  his  first  materialization,  viz.;  10  P.  M.,  April  18,  1912.] 

Hypatia  has  been  designated  the  “most  wise  of  womankind” 
in  the  age  in  which  she  lived.  In  the  prime  of  earthly  life  she 
was  universally  admired  for  her  great  learning,  talents,  eloquence, 
beauty  and  modesty.  She  exercised  marvelous  influence  over  all 
who  heard  her  public  utterances.  Her  life  was  a  distinguished 
one,  yet  had  a  tragic  ending  as  a  martyr.  Of  her  Professor 
Draper  writes:  “Each  day,  before  her  academy,  stood  a  long 
train  of  chariots ;  her  lecture  room  was  crowded  with  the  wealth 
and  fashion  of  Alexandria.  They  came  to  listen  to  her  discourses 
on  those  great  questions  which  man  in  all  ages  has  asked,  but 

166 


HYPATIA,  THE  NEAPL ATONIC’  PHILOSOPHER 
(Born  370  A.  D.;  Murdered  415  A.  D.i 
PcUnting  Made  by  Spirit  Artists  f  ir  t!ie  Autliir. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


167 


which  have  never  yet  been  answered  :  What  am  I  ?  Where  am  I  ? 
What  can  I  do  ?  One  day  as  she  repaired  to  her  academy  she 
was  assaulted  by  Cyril’s  mob  —  a  mob  of  blood-thirsty  monks. 
Stripped  naked  in  the  street,  she  was  dragged  into  a  church  and 
there  killed  with  a  club.  The  corpse  was  cut  in  pieces,  the  flesh 
was  scraped  from  the  bones  with  shells,  and  the  remnants  cast 
into  a  fire.  For  this  frightful  crime  Cyril  (an  Archbishop)  was 
never  called  to  account.  It  seemed  to  be  admitted  that  the  end 
sanctified  the  means.” 

A  record  of  psychical  phenomena  from  which  has  been  elim¬ 
inated  an  important  contributing  element  must  prove  valueless, 
if  it  is  to  form  the  basis  or  foundation  upon  which  to  formulate 
a  permanent  hypothesis;  or  to  construct  a  declaration  of  an 
important  truth ;  or  to  define  a  new,  or  not  well  understood 
natural  law. 

In  all  the  important  research  work  with  which  I  have  the  past 
few  years  been  closely  associated,  I  may  say  always,  under  every 
circumstance,  in  every  location,  and  with  every  true  psychic, 
there  has  been  present  a  dominant  or  controlling  intelligence 
and  influence  which  impressed  my  mentality,  invariably  having 
its  distinct  individuality,  making  known  by  assertion  its  former 
human  identity,  establishing  the  verity  of  the  same  by  accurate 
knowledge  given  when  under  examination  as  to  life’s  history 
and  contemporaneous  events,  together  with  names,  locations  and 
dates  and  other  confirmatory  information. 

The  various  channels  through  which  this  intelligence  has  com¬ 
municated  have  been  somewhat  unlimited,  that  is,  not  confined 
to  any  one  system  or  phase  or  psychic.  It  has  manifested  for 
years  past  by  voice  through  trumpets  in  various  places,  in  the 
presence  of  different  psychics ;  also  by  independent  voice  in  the 
air  whether  trumpet  was  present  or  not ;  through  the  vocal  organs 
of  entranced  mediums ;  appeared  to  view  in  a  semi-transparent 
or  etherialized  formation ;  and  while  materialized  and  gowned  as 
a  lady  held  refined  converse  with  me,  or  sang  songs  of  her  own 
creation,  by  using  the  vocal  organs  of  such  transient,  body ;  and 
many  times  by  utilizing  the  hand  and  pen  of  an  entranced  psychic 


168 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


communicated  information  and  instruction — some  of  geneia) 
character,  some  of  a  specific  personal  and  confidential  nature ;  and 
lastly  by  utilizing  the  new  instrument  I  have  in  the  preceding 
chapter  described  as  the  “Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  with  auto¬ 
matic  action,  and  of  rhyming  tendency.  The  language  used  by 
her,  the  mannerisms  adopted,  and  alleged  name  announced  or 
signed;  as  well  as  predictions  or  confirmations  at  one  place  and 
time  harmonizing  with  those  at  another  place  and  time,  and  with 
other  appearances  on  sundry  occasions,  thus  confirming  the  indi¬ 
viduality  of  the  intelligence  under  separate,  different  or  even 
opposite  conditions;  she  has  so  fully  and  satisfactorily  demon¬ 
strated  her  individuality,  that  she  has  secured  my  confidence, 
approval  and  support,  on  account  of  her  many  capabilities, 
promises,  prophesies  and  fulfillment  of  them,  and  demonstrated 
to  be  of  a  quality  and  character  which  cannot  but  command  my 
regard  and  that  of  those  who  also  know  them ;  and  which  not 
only  have  been  but  continue  to  be  displayed ;  and  added  to  this 
is  her  definite  and  complete  demonstration  of  not  only  wonderful 
mind  and  correct  judgment,  but  the  wonderful  power  she  com¬ 
mands  ;  and  to  me  so  absolutely  consistent  in  promise  and  fulfill¬ 
ment  as  to  win  my  entire  confidence  and  trust,  and  establish  her 
in  truthfulness  and  reliability.  This  intelligence  alleges  herself 
to  be  Hypatia,  the  neoplatonic  philosopher,  the  daughter  of  Theon. 
(See  her  own  statements  near  the  end  of  Chapter'  XXIH.) 

Numbers  of  living  intelligent  citizens  of  Canada  and  of  the 
United  States  have  met  Hypatia  in  her  transient  physical  body 
at  a  Jonson  seance  when  I  was  present;  while  a  much  smaller 
number  have  met  and  conversed  with  her  there,  in  response  to 
my  request  made  to  her,  to  materialize,  meet  and  speak  with 
certain  specified  friends,  though  I  was  absent.  This  request  was 
several  times  complied  with,  while  on  three  different  occasions, 
in  the  case  of  three  close  personal  friends  of  mine  —  unacquainted 
with  each  other  ■ —  and  visiting  the  seance  alone,  or  at  least  not 
with  each  other,  she  dictated  a  message,  intended  for  me,  and 
requested  on  each  occasion  its  deliverance  to  me  in  person.  In 
each  instance  I  received  the  message. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


169 


With  one  instrument  entranced,  and  with  the  automatic  writers, 
as  well  as  other  types  and  phases  of  mediumship,  by  her  aid  I 
am  enabled  to  show  a  connection  of  needed  links  forming  a  chain 
of  strong  evidence  too  convincing  to  be  disconcerted  or  entangled 
by  any  hypothesis  of  either  fraud,  conjuring,  mind-reading, 
telepathy,  hallucination  or  hypnotic  state,  which  may  be  con¬ 
structed  and  applied  by  any  critic,  who  seeks  for  evidence  which 
he  does  not  want  to  find.  Of  this  intelligence,  alleged  by  herself 
to  be  Hypatia,  I  shall  give  as  concisely  as  possible  within  the 
limits  of  this  chapter,  a  few  incidents  chosen  from  the  very  many, 
of  her  association  with  me  and  my  research  efforts  since  1905, 
inasmuch  as  she  enacts  a  most  important  part  in  the  various 
phenomena  which  seem  to  recur  with  frequency,  increasing  inter¬ 
est,  and  importance.  It  will  only  be  necessary  hereafter  for  the 
observant  reader  to  note  events  connected  with  her;  and  the 
frequency  of  confirmatory  or  direct  evidence,  in  almost  every 
chapter. 

Hypatia,  the  angelic  visitor,  was  the  means,  by  materializing 
her  transient  body  and  using  speech  of  convincing  my  late  wife 
that  she,  Hypatia,  is  my  spirit  guide ;  and  her  persuasive  manner 
and  capabilities  made  a  convert  of  her,  and  thereby  a  coworker 
instead  of  an  opponent  of  my  attitude  on  psychic  matters.  With 
reference  to  this  circumstance  I  will  here  include  part  of  a  memo 
made  at  that  time,  viz.:  “In  the  month  of  June,  1907,  Hypatia, 
“speaking  through  an  entranced  medium,  Mrs.  Ripley,  said  that 
“‘May’  (my  wife),  who  had  never  shown  an  inclination  to  the 
“belief  in  spirit  return  and  communion — would  be  influenced  by 
“her  to  desire  to  go  with  me  to  Lily  Dale,  and  see  and  hear  and 
“judge  if  it  were  true  or  no.  Suffice  it  to  say,  I  decided  to  not 
“ask  her  to  go,  nor  even  suggest  that  she  accompany  me  on  the 
“trip;  but  waited  patiently  for  a  time  to  see  if  she  would  be 
“influenced  by  the  spirit  power  of  suggestion.  She  soon  began  to 
“plan,  which  ended  in  the  decision  to  go  with  me,  which  met  my 
“wish  and  I  expressed  myself  as  pleased.  We  reached  there  on 
“Saturday,  the  fourth  of  August,  1907,  and  that  very  night 
"attended  a  Jonson  materializing  seance ;  and  to  her  own  astonish- 


.70 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


"merit,  Hypatia,  in  a  beautiful  angelic  embodiment,  came  and 
"made  of  ‘May’  a  friend  during  our  sojourn  there.” 

These  seances  were  conducted  under  test  conditions  which  were 
intended  to  absolutely  preclude  aid  to  the  medium  from  any 
quarter.  Of  the  sixteen  adults  present,  eight  were  members  of 
our  Research  Society  while  the  remaining  eight  were  our  selected 
friends  (which  included  my  wife).  There  were  three  seances  in 
all,  and  ten  to  fifteen  presentations  at  each.  At  one  of  these 
Otelleo,  another  alleged  guide  of  mine  —  of  Egyptian  nativity, 
B.  C.  8,000  years,  and  associated  with  Hypatia  in  a  band  of  seven 
advanced  spirits,  assigned  to  act  in  unison  —  made  a  brief  call, 
yet  intimated  who  it  was  that  he  called  especially  to  see,  for 
the  first  time.  At  each  seance  Hypatia  presented  herself,  and 
centered  her  interest  chiefly  on  May.  On  the  first  occasion  she 
entered  in  creamy  white  vesture,  her  head,  neck,  chest  and  arms 
bearing  apparently  diamond  bedecked  jewels  and  ornaments,  a 
golden  bracelet  on  her  wrist,  while  on  her  feet  were  sandals ; 
and  she  moved  gracefully  across  the  room  to  where  my  wife  and 
I  sat  in  the  circle,  and  placing  her  hand  on  my  shoulder  spoke 
to  me  —  she  kept  her  promise  that  she  would  come ;  I  arose  and 
she  led  me  to  the  centre  of  the  room,  where  May  was  invited  to 
join  us;  and  while  May  was  engaged  by  Hypatia  in  conversation, 
she  at  first  was  acutely  critical  in  matter  of  detail,  such  as  feeling 
of  muscles  and  gauging  her  solidity,  and  that  of  her  jewels  and 
ornaments,  and  noting  closely  the  color  of  her  hair  and  eyes  and 
the  movements  of  the  mouth  while  speaking,  as  well  as  appreciat¬ 
ing  the  reality  of  the  hands  and  fingers  as  they  were  placed  one 
on  each  cheek,  and  listened  to  the  persuasive  words  she  spoke : 
“I  am  glad  you  are  here,  dear  May ;  I  am  your  husband’s  guide, 
and  I  will  act  as  guide  to  you.”  But  May  could  not  comprehend 
how  Hypatia’s  vestures  had  changed  in  texture  and  design  while 
conversing,  nor  quite  realize  the  gradual  disappearance  from  near 
us  by  a  dissolution  of  all  we  had  been  in  contact  with.  Her 
curiosity  became  a  compelling  power,  and  May  attended  the 
second  and  third  seances,  at  one  of  which  Hypatia  appeared, 
talked  to  May  and  again  disappeared  slowly  by  dissolution  into 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


171 


the  floor.  But  in  the  end  May  began  to  comprehend  and -finally 
acknowledge  that  she  had  seen  and  been  talking  with  an  angel 
visitor. 

During  the  remaining  four  years. of  May’s  earth  life  following 
her  convincing  experience  with  Hypatia  at  the  Lily  Dale  seances, 
she  freely  joined  me  in  psychical  investigations,  and  became 
acquainted  with  Hypatia.  She  also  willingly  became  a  joint 
partner  with  me  in  the  agreement  which  appears  in  Chapter  XII, 
which  since  her  transition  has  been  put  to  the  test  (see  Chapter 
XIII,  and  others  following),  and  strongly  sustains  the  truth  of 
both  continuity  and  communion  between  those  in  the  two  states 
of  existence ;  or  between  those  now  in  the  spirit  world,  and  those 
on  earth. 

I  will  at  this  stage  designate  a  few  out  of  many  tests  of 
Hypatia’s  capability,  each  of  which  she  acquiesced  in  and  success¬ 
fully  accomplished.  Two  of  these  may  be  found  in  Chapter  VIII, 
and  each  has  been  verified  since  —  one  as  a  trumpet  speaking 
test,  in  the  home  of  the  late  Wm.  T.  Stead ;  and  the  other  by 
materializing  her  body  and  holding  an  interview  in  a  specified 
seance  at  Jonson’s  from  or  in  compliance  with  the  written  request, 
as  in  the  preceding  case,  which  lay  on  my  desk  over  night,  and 

was  read  by  Hypatia,  to  meet  Col.  N - ,  a  Canadian  friend 

of  mine,  who  was  then  in  Toledo,  for  the  purpose  of  attending 
a  materializing  seance,  and  tell  him  why  she  introduced  herself 
to  him. 

A  third  and  unusual  test,  with  a  special  condition  attached 
to  it,  I  will  designate  “the  rose  test.’’  This  was  inaugurated  by 
Hypatia  giving  her  assent  to  it,  as  soon  as  I  proposed  it  to  her 
in  a  materializing  seance  had  in  the  home  of  the  Jonsons,  by  my 
wife  and  myself,  with  Mrs.  Jonson,  the  medium’s  wife,  also 
present.  The  date  was  August  10,  1910.  As  other  evidential 
matters  had  some  association  with  this  seance,  I  will  briefly  make 
mention  of  it  as  it  will  come  under  observation  again.  This  test 
was  successfully  completed  November  15,  1911.  (See  Chapter 
XVI,  presentations  8,  9,  10  and  11.)  Following  is  only  a  portion 


172 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  the  record  of  this  seance  as  made  at  the  time  of  inauguration 
of  “the  rose  test.” 

“Three  years,  almost  to  the  very  day,  had  elapsed  since 
“May’s  first  convincing  evidence  had  made  a  convert  of  her  to 
“this  new  truth ;  and  she  had  since  improved  her  opportunities, 
“in  gathering  further  experiences  and  becoming  better  acquainted 
“with  Hypatia.  So  when  we  were  seated  we  felt  satisfied  that 
“the  harmonious  conditions  would  probably  bring  satisfactory 
“results ;  and  as  will  be  seen  we  were  not  in  the  least  disappointed. 
“Our  callers  were  limited  in  numbers,  and  the  first  was  Hypatia, 
“who  looked  as  natural  in  her  thought-created  vestures  as  any 
“lady  in  a  well  lighted  room,  on  ‘calling  day,’  her  whole  presence 
“bright  and  clear  in  detail  of  natural  observation,  so  that  we 
“could  readily  distinguish  the  features,  and  color  of  the  hair, 
“and  eyes,  and  observe  every  ornamentation.  She  gracefully  and 
“in  a  dignified  manner  approached  us  and  gave  us  loving  wel- 
“come,  which  filled  our  souls  with  joy,  and  afforded  us  the  com- 
“forting  assurances  of  the  after-lTTe,  and  the  pleasures  we  would 
“realize  when  we  would  be  met  and  welcomed  by  those  who 
“preceded  us.  Turning  to  me  she  answered  a  mental  question 
“I  had  in  mind ;  and  next  turning  to  my  wife  said,  ‘I  am  glad  to 
“meet  you  again,  dear  May,  and  though  I’m  going  now  I  will 
“return  presently  with  a  lovable  spirit  who  will  be  an  aider  to 
“you.’  After  a  brief  absence  Hypatia  returned,  bringing  with  her 
“another  spirit  somewhat  resembling  herself  in  general  figure, 
“features  and  garb.  This  spirit  walked  over  to  a  vase  containing 
“flowers  and  plucked  one,  and  returned  to  the  side  of  Hypatia, 
“who  then  spoke  and  said,  ‘May,  I  bring  to  you  one  who  will  be 
“a  guide  and  helper  to  you  —  this  is  Saphrona.’  Saphrona  greeted 
“May,  and  handed  her  the  flower  she  had  plucked  from  out  the 
“vase,  and  then  spoke  with  my  wife.  After  we  were  given  an 
“opportunity  for  a  close  scrutiny  of  the  vestures,  forms  and  ^ 
“adornments  of  these  two  spirits  who  were  with  us  at  one  and  * 
“the  same  time,  they  were  each  presented  with  a  fine  white  rose, 
“on  one  long,  leafy  stem.  To  Hypatia  I  presented  mine.  I  said, 

“  ‘While  presenting  this  rose  as  a  token  of  my  appreciation  of 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


173 


“you,  I  desire  it  to  be  at  the  same  time  a  test ;  and  will  ask  you 
“if  you  will  protect  it,  and  somewhere,  and  at  some  time  in  the 
“future  return  it  to  me,  as  you  now  receive  it?’  Hypatia  replied: 
“  ‘I  will  take  care  of  it,  and  return  it  to  you  as  you  wish,  as  a 
“proof  of  my  ability  to  fulfil  my  promise.’  The  stem  and  rose 
“would  be  about  twelve  inches  long,  and  the  stem  was  covered 
“with  leaves  and  thorns,  and  tied  with  a  double  bow  of  white 
“satin  baby  ribbon.  I  thanked  Hypatia,  who  then  placed  it  against 
“the  centre  point  of  the  chest,  withdrew  her  hand  from  it  and 
“there  it  remained  as  if  pinned  fast;  but  there  was  no  evidence 
“of  fastening,  for  it  was  placed,  and  in  a  second  the  hand  with- 
“drew.  My  wife  also  presented  her  guest,  Saphrona,  with  a 
“like  present ;  but  in  her  case  the  stem  was  tied  with  blue  satin 
“baby  ribbon.  Both  of  these  angels  dematerialized  from  before 
“our  presence,  at  the  entrance  to  the  little  room  —  which  served 
“as  a  cabinet  —  bodies,  roses  and  all. 

“Among  the  various  callers  at  this  most  interesting  seance 
“were  two  fraternal  friends,  who  claimed  to  have  lived  in  the 
“very  long  ago  in  the  East,  and  who  came,  remained,  and 
“departed  together,  after  exchanging  greetings  with  us.  One 
“of  these,  Otelleo,  will  be  remembered  as  associated  with  Hypatia 
“in  a  band  of  exalted  spirits.  The  other  spirit  was  introduced 
“to  me  in  a  significant  way  by  Otelleo  as  Hiram  AbiflF. 

“One  of  the  remaining  callers  was  Dr.  Sharp,  who  has  fre- 
“quently  called  on  me  before,  and  will  be  recognized  by  quite  a 
“few  interested  people  as  the  trumpet  control  and  guide  of  Mrs. 
“Etta  Wriedt,  trumpet  medium.  This  gray-haired  and  long- 
“bearded  old  spirit  guide  entertained  both  of  us  with  some  of 
“his  reminiscences,  for  we  both  had  knowledge  of  him  before. 
“One  fact  especially,  which  he  wished  to  impress  upon  our  minds, 
“was  that  he  claimed  to  have  been  the  first  to  introduce  physical 
“phenomena  in  Ontario.” 

May  passed  from  earth  life  to  spirit  realms  on  September  29, 
1911,  and  after  she  had  gone  from  me,  my  thoughts  constantly 
reverted  to  our  ante-mortem  agreement  found  in  Chapter  XH ; 
and  though  hoping  and  believing  it  would  be  successfully  carried 


174 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


out,  yet  these  questions  would  continue  to  arise  in  my  mind; 
When?  where?  and  how?  Oh  that  it  may  soon  be  really  proved 
to  be  an  accomplished  fact,  was  my  constant  soul  desire.  I  had 
not  long  to  wait,  for  Hypatia  so  impressed  me  that  I  went  to 
the  same  psychic  lady  (Mrs.  Ripley)  visited  early  in  the  month 
of  May,  in  the  case  of  my  first  test,  when  Hypatia  agreed  to 
convey  my  wish  to  Wm.  T.  Stead.  If  so  be  you  will  give  your 
consent  to  allow  the  guides  to  utilize  you,  I  told  her,  I  feel  satis¬ 
fied  that  some  spirit  prompts  this  request,  and  I  shall  await  some 
new  development.  The  psychic  gave  immediate  and  harmonious 
consent,  and  evidence  was  apparent  that  some  spirit  was  taking 
control  of  her.  It  proved  to  be  the  same  spirit  —  Mary  Black¬ 
burn  . —  who  took  control  of  her  when  I  sat  with  her  before. 
The  controlling  spirit  greeted  me,  though  her  words  were  few  — 
“I  now  give  place  to  your  guide,  who  wishes  to  talk  with  you,” 
was  all  she  said.  The  psychic  immediately  began  to  lapse  into 
a  deeper  trance  condition,  and  after  perhaps  two  minutes’  wait¬ 
ing,  Hypatia  began  to  use  her  vocal  organs,  and  told  me  she 
wished  me  to  go  on  November  11th  to  Etta  Wriedt,  the  trumpet 
medium,  at  Detroit,  and  that  she,  Hypatia,  would  during  my 
presence  there  bring  May  to  converse  with  me.  This  direction 
I  complied  with,  and  sure  enough  the  prediction  was  fulfilled 
in  a  most  gratifying  manner.  (See  Chapter  XHI.)  The  reader 
doubtless  will  in  some  measure  realize  that  my  interest  in  view 
of  all  the  facts  mentioned,  was  now  profoundly  increased,  and 
my  confidence  in  Hypatia  becoming  most  firmly  established. 

The  reader  will  please  note  that  “the  rose  test”  began  August 
10,  1910.  May  being  then  in  earth  life,  Hypatia  and  Saphrona 
both  being  present  with  her;  and  it  was  concluded  November, 
1911,  May  being  then  in  spirit  realms,  but  returned  with  Hypatia, 
and  was  present  in  the  seance  at  the  successful  conclusion  of 
the  test.  (See  Chapter  XVI,  presentations  8,  9,  10  and  11.)  Dr. 
Sharp  was  present  on  all  these  occasions. 

'In  this  same  November,  as  the  foregoing  incident,  while  in  a 
trumpet  seance  held  in  Toronto,  with  over  a  score  of  its  intelligent 
citizens  present.  Dr.  Sharp  availed  himself  of  the  opportunity, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND  175 

and  my  presence,  to  say  through  the  trumpet,  “Dr.  King,  I  wish 
to  thank  you  for  having  recognized  me  when  I  appeared  in  my 
•materialized  body  at  the  Jonson  s&nce  in  August  last  year.” 
(The  seance  alluded  to,  when  the  rose  test  had  its  origin.) 
Shortly  after  those  words  had  been  spoken,  a  voice  addressed 
Rev.  Canon  William  Walsh,  who  was  present.  It  was  soon 
recognized  by  him  and  others,  as  that  of  May,  who  had  only 
passed  over  to  the  other  life  last  29th  of  September,  and  was 
met  and  cared  for  by  Hypatia  and  Saphrona ;  and  now  was  return¬ 
ing  as  spirit.  She  came  on  this  occasion,  especially  to  thank  her 
personal  friend  Canon  Walsh  for  his  kind  reference  to  her  in 
the  words  he  so  recently  gave  utterance  to  while  addressing  those 
who  were  present  before  her  earthly  remains  —  then  in  view  in  the 
casket  —  were  conveyed  to  their  last  resting-place.  (See  cor¬ 
roborative  testimony  at  conclusion  of  Chapter  XIX.) 

Hypatia’s  exalted  character  and  work  are  being  now  made 
manifest  in  bringing  aid  and  evidence  to  establish  the  truth  of 
continuity  of  life,  and  direct  communion,  beyond  all  doubt, 
between  those  still  of  earth,  and  other  loved  ones  and  friends  in 
spirit  realms.  She  brought  about  communing  between  myself 
and  wife,  also  with  our  daughter,  my  brother,  parents,  and  other 
relatives,  as  well  as  friends,  strangers,  seers,  philosophers  and 
former  psychical  researchers ;  and  most  of  these  through  psychics 
of  different  phases,  some  through  three  or  four  phases.  The 
evidence  is  presented  in  chapters  of  this  book,  which  the  writer 
believes  will  successfully  sustain  the  claim  against  attack  by  any 
skeptic,  scientist,  priest  or  man. 

“The  dawn  has  come  for  a  grand  awakening.  Hypatia.” 
The  foregoing  was  Hypatia’s  first  recognized  written  communica¬ 
tion  to  me,  as  made  in  red  letter  on  a  slate,  and  signed  by  her 
at  5  P.  M.,  August  10,  1905. 

She  wrote  her  second  message  in  red  letter  the  following 
day  on  another  slate.  The  precautions  taken,  and  results  obtained, 
including  their  reproduction  in  this  book,  are  to  be  found  at  the 
end  of  this  chapter,  and  will  give  the  reader  a  clearer  under¬ 
standing  of  this  psychic  demonstration. 


176 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


It  would  be  impossible  for  me  to  prove  in  ordinary  way  her 
human,  earthly  personality ;  though  I  feel  that  I  have  that  of 
her  spirit  identity,  for  this  has  been  possible,  as  she  has  been 
my  constant  teacher,  guide  and  helper  since  the  above  date.  To 
spirit  Hypatia  I  am  indebted  for  much  I  have  learned  of  spirit 
life ;  and  also  to  loved  ones,  and  former  friends  of  earth,  as 
well  as  some  noted  men  of  experience  now  in  spirit  spheres,  whose 
minds  are  active  still,  and  with  added  knowledge  aid  in  furnish¬ 
ing  from  the  spirit  world  much  evidence  to  prove  their  continuity, 
and  ability  to  return  to  the  earth  plane  and  commune  with 
mortals. 

And  now  to  show  that  Hypatia’s  close  association  is  not  alone 
with  me,  but  also  continues  with  my  spirit  wife,  “May,”  I  quote 
a  few  extracts  from  the  records  I  have  secured  while  in  pursuit 
of  further  psychic  knowledge.  Before  doing  so,  however,  I  will 
endeavor  to  make  clear  to  the  reader  that  which  he  does  not 
comprehend,  or  questions  in  his  mind,  the  fact  of  a  spirit  writing 
through  a  human  psychic  hand.  I  will  here  explain  briefly,  as 
I  do  so  more  fully  elsewhere,  how  this  is  done. 

To  illustrate:  —  A  hypnotizer  selects  a  likely  stranger  subject, 
and  diverts  his  objective  mind  from  concentration,  or  attracts 
it  by  anticipation,  and  at  the  psychological  moment  suggests  to 
the  subjective  mind  of  the  one  he  seeks  to  control  that  he  (the 
subject)  is  going  to  write  a  letter  to  a  friend,  sing  a  song,  deliver 
a  short  address,  or  as  a  nurse  girl  will  take  care  of  a  crying  baby ; 
and  in  either  case  the  subject  complies  with  the  general  suggestion 
made  to  his  subjective  mind,  which  has  become  active  without 
detailed  direction,  and  the  objective  part  of  the  mind  immediately 
becomes  passive  or  dormant.  In  the  case  of  the  writing  psychic 
the  spirit  Hypatia  or  May  or  whosoever  controls,  by  consent  of 
the  objective  mind  (and  non-consent  means  locking  the  door) 
speaks  into  the  telephone  receiving  ear  of  her  subjective  mind 
the  dictated  very  words  and  sentences  to  be  written,  and  at  once 
her  subjective  self  writes  them,  with  her  own  physical  hand,  just 
as  naturally  as  when  the  objective  mind  controls  the  hand.  Walk¬ 
ing  or  talking  in  sleep  are  ordinary  examples  resulting  from 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


177 


suggestions,  —  without  detailed  direction,  and  without  exercise 
of  reason,  —  to  the  subjective  mind  by  noises,  voices,  motion, 
physical  contact,  indigestion,  and  other  causes.  Such  undirected 
suggestion  to  the  subjective  mind  of  the  individual  in  question 
thereby  causes  action,  mental  or  physical,  or  both,  such  as  on  the 
one  hand  dreams  of  impossibilities,  or  on  the  other,  physical 
activities  of  no  definite  purpose,  because  of  the  absence  of  detailed 
direction  in  the  suggestion  which  acts  upon  the  subjective  mind. 

I  am  instructed  from  spirit  source,  that  when  any  spirit  intel¬ 
ligence  wishes  to  speak  the  words  of  a  message  to  be  written, 
such  spirit  obtains  consent  to  speak  them  to  the  subjective  mind 
of  the  psychic ;  and  then  Eberling,  her  guide,  takes  control  of 
her,  and  is  assisted  by  elemental  spirits;  and  that  he  considers 
rhyming,  in  her  case,  a  constant  necessity  for  a  definite  purpose. 

With  this  explanation  I  will  now  follow  here  in  this  relation 
by  quotations  from  May’s  own  spirit  communication  of  March  13, 
1912,  as  by  the  hand  of  the  human-psychic-telephone  recorded; 
as  also  in  the  case  of  Hypatia,  viz. : 

May:  “Saphrona  is  like  to  Hypatia;  she  is  so  capable  that 
she  takes  very  loving  care  of  me.” 

I  had  asked  her  if  Saphrona  —  whom  Hypatia  had  brought  to 
her  as  helper  and  protector  when  at  Toledo  in  1910  —  was  seen 
or  met  by  her  in  spirit  life,  and  the  quotation  was  her  answer, 
as  through  the  psychic  instrument. 

J.  S.  K. :  “When  and  where  and  how  did  you  awaken  to  con¬ 
scious  spirit  existence?” 

May:  “I  fell  into  a  restless  sleep,  and  floated  out  of  life. 
*T  realized  it  not  until  I  was  with  the  one  who  so  cares  for  thee. 
“Hypatia  was  the  first  to  say  your  spirit  is  set  free  dear  May, 
“do  not  feel  sad  for  it  is  fate  of  all  mankind  to  die ;  and  we  are 
“all  and  all  to  you,  and  to  your  loving  Johnnie  too;  and  we  will 
“blend  you  into  one  now  that  your  living  here  is  done.  I  also 

“weep . and  wish  I  could  be  here  to  stay;  but  laws 

“of  mind  we  do  not  know  have  brought  me  here  and  willed  it  so. 
“HI  do  each  little  thing  I  may  till  I  have  learned  the  very  way 
"to  come  to  you . Heaven  is  a  state  and  not  a  place. 


178 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“or  I  might  say  more  exact  it  is  an  attunement.  If  light  of  the 
“sun  is  confined  it  will  let  a  man  see  even  in  a  cave.  So  with 
“our  heavenly  necessity  it  may  be  confined  or  held  near  to  us, 
“so  that  we  are  at  ease  even  here  on  earth.  If  I  were  not  in 
“artificial  protection,  I  could  not  remain  as  I  do  with  you  often 
“by  night  and  by  day.  My  spirit  body  is  of  higher  development 
“because  of  Hypatia  and  your  band  who  are  advanced,  so  I 
“receive  vitality  like  to  a  shower  of  power;  but  in  the  lower 
“mental  states  the  human  minds  disembodied  of  earth-bound 
“degree  wish  to  return  and  hear  and  see  and  eat  and  drink 
“because  they  have  not  learned  to  think.” 

“J.  S.  K. :  “Tell  me,  May,  if  you  can,  where  you  were.” 

May:  “I  did  seem  to  be  in  my  bed.  I  thought  now  I  have 
“slept  so  long  I  will  arise  quite  well.  I  felt  a  slight  shock  like 
“to  a  parting  thread ;  and  then  I  seemed  to  float  away ;  and  I 
“thought  I’ve  heard  Jqhnnie  say  he  did  so  (in  astral  flights)  and 
“I  wonder  where  I  shall  go ;  and  later  I  came  back  to  see  it  was 
“all  done,  and  I  was  truly  free,  and  so  I  wept  as  you  did  too. 
“I  am  now  at  ease  and  love  to  study  also,  and  later  I  will  often 
“be  with  you.  Many  were  with  me,  dear,  but  as  I  said  I  was 
“not  prepared  for  the  truth.  I  was  attended  by  Hypatia  who  was 
“the  principal  one.  I  saw  my  babe,  at  first  she  came  like  a  vision 
“and  I  thought  it  was  a  vision  or  a  dream ;  and  then  I  thought 
“how  real  they  seem,  and  how  faint  my  earthly  vision.  It  all 
“comes  gradually  to  me,  and  seems  most  wisely  done  that  way.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “I  thank  you,  ‘babe,’  for  all  you’ve  said ;  and  Hypatia, 
dear  one,  who  so  cares  for  May,  I  desire  to  know  how  you  com¬ 
municate  with  her,  and  with  others  in  spirit  life.” 

Hypatia  (replying  through  the  same  instrument)  :  “We  com¬ 
municate  according  to  our  development  and  capacity  to  use 
advanced  advantages.  With  May,  thy  darling  of  earthly  life,  I 
talk  in  language  earth-like.  It  is  the  English  speech  I  use.  Her 
sense  is  exactly  like  to  clairaudient  power  in  humans  —  and  a 
power  to  hear  without  an  ear.  With  Electra,  or  des-Asia  or 
Otelleo  and  others  like  to  me  I  talk  with  a  directed  focussed 
thought  as  if  I  would  by  earth  photography  convey  the  picture. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


179 


and  the  thought  complete,  without  the  need  of  words  a5  used  by 
men.  Intuition  in  humans  is  this  power  in  rudim.entary  way,  I  it 
know,  is  all  you  can  say.” 

On  other  occasions  —  both  previous  and  subsequent  to  the 
foregoing  questions  to  both  May  and  the  guide  —  I  questioned, 
and  still  continue  to  question  Hypatia  from  time  to  time  to  gain 
knowledge,  and  I  receive  it  in  generous  measure.  At  most  I  give 
but  a  few  examples  in  this  chapter,  while  in  the  one  that  follows, 
the  whole  of  it  is  devoted  to  Hypatia’s  answers  to  my  questions 
relating  to  mind  and  soul  or  spirit,  and  other  matters  of  interest 
to  me. 

J.  S.  K. :  “Can  you  sense  my  wants  or  wishes ;  and  do  you 
read  my  thoughts?” 

Hypatia  :  “I  first  receive  a  call  from  thee  like  to  a  bell  to  you ; 
and  to  my  conscious  self  it  would  convey  the  thought  to  me  —  he 
calls  or  wishes  me.  Then  I  give  to  it  attention,  as  you  would 
open  a  window  by  a  voluntary  act,  and  if  I  do  so,  I  then  see  you, 
and  also  see  the  thing  that  would  result  from  what  your  thoughts 
express  to  me,  that  is  if  you  should  ask  ‘is  this  wise?’  I  would 
not  only  hear  thy  direct  question,  but  I  would  see  like  pictures, 
as  we  say,  from  land  of  ‘sure  to  be,’  the  way  that  it  will  be,  and 
what  is  good  or  bad  for  thee,  for  I  am  finite  too,  in  a  comparison 
of  increased  degree ;  and  I  am  taught  and  led  and  used,  not  as 
are  the  needs  of  men,  but  as  I  need,  a  growing  child  of  Deity.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “When  I  write  on  paper,  and  leave  what  I  have 
written,  on  the  desk  for  you,  as  in  the  case  of  my  communications 
to  Wm.  T.  Stead  of  London,  and  my  Quebec  friend  (see  Chapter 
VHI),  do  you  read  it  from  the  writing,  or  from  my  mind?” 

Hypatia  ;  “If  you  write  it  I  read  it  from  the  writing,  and  by  a 
wireless  repetition  so  convey  it.  If  it  is  typewritten,  it  confuses 
me,  and  I  but  read  thy  thoughts  then,  and  convey  it  in  thought 
only,  and  not  in  exact  English  speech.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “Do  you  think  you  can  deliver  to  Mr.  Stead,  the 
single,  or  better  still  the  compound  message,  as  contained  in  my 
second  communication  to  him  before  my  book  appears?  If  not 
the  test  after  would  not  be  so  convincing.” 


180 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Hypatia  :  “My  intention  is  to  do  it.  I  have  many  aides  with 
me,  among  them  many  masters,  such  as  des-Asia,  known  to  thee ; 
and  we  hold  a  line  together,  and  we  thus  the  thoughts  convey, 
and  will  try  to  do  it  better  if  we  can,  or  the  same  way.  Stead 
is  himself  a  psychic,  therefore  we  to  him  can  say  do  it  thus,  or 
do  it  this  way,  and  he  will  our  wish  obey.  (The  departure  of 
Mrs.  Wriedt,  and  the  subsequent  passing  of  Mr.  Stead  prevented 
its  accomplishment).  You  are  gifted  with  the  heavenly  gift  my 
own  beloved  here ;  and  you  are  growing  steadily  more  than  to 
you  appear;  and  a  little  later,  dear  one,  we  will  cleave  the  outer 
air,  and  you  will  see  us  face  to  face,  and  sense  us  everywhere.” 

Hypatia  it  was  who  first  suggested  the  compilation  of  this 
book,  and  likewise  wrote  its  closing  sentences.  She  volunteered 
to  help  me,  and  became  chief  collaborator  in  securing  the  many 
new  revelations  regarding  the  next  stage  of  existence ;  and 
gathered  and  introduced  to  me  the  many  witnesses  from  spirit 
spheres  to  confirm  the  accumulating  evidences. 

The  records  of  various  chapters  will  show  her  presence,  intel¬ 
ligence,  judgment,  skill  and  labor,  which  will  command  apprecia¬ 
tion  of  her. 

She  likewise  expressed  her  desire  that  I  should  secure  what 
Wm.  T.  Stead  promised  me  in  writing  through  the  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone,  viz. :  his  spirit  picture  for  this  book ;  and  when 
I  wrote  the  Bangs  Sisters  of  Chicago  to  secure  a  sitting  with 
them  for  a  spirit  picture,  their  immediate  reply  came  back  to  me 
that  my  guide,  naming  Hypatia,  had  been  there  and  secured  it 
for  me;  and  she  herself  corroborated  it  while  materialized  at 
Jonson’s  in  Toledo,  and  also  named  the  day  I  was  to  go  there  for 
it;  and  when  I  did  so,  though  no  spirit’s  name  was  mentioned  in 
connection  with  the  sitting  by  or  to  the  sisters,  when  I  sat  I  got 
Stead’s  picture ;  and  unexpectedly  I  got  Hypatia’s  picture  also ; 
and  they  each  appeared  as  they  were  dressed  when  they  both 
presented,  the  same  evening  (18th  April)  in  the  Jonson  seance. 

I  may  here  again  affirm  what  is  stated  elsewhere,  that  when 
May  speaks  to  me  through  any  trumpet,  I  instantly  recognize 


HYPATIA’S  FIRST  WRITTEN  MESSAIIE  TO  THE  AUTHOR. 


■■  '  ^ 


I 


D-AWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


181 


the  voice  as  May’s,  for  it  sounds  in  my  ear  quite  as  familiar 
as  it  did  in  earth  life,  whether  she  spoke  in  my  immediate  presence, 
or  in  an  adjoining  room,  or  from  a  distance,  through  a  telephone. 

The  same  holds  true  in  the  case  of  Hypatia,  to  the  extent  of 
her  psychical  opportunities,  and  the  comparison  of  her  speaking 
efforts,  for  her  familiar  voice  is  at  once  recognizable,  beyond 
any  suggestion  of  doubt,  as  it  comes  from  the  trumpet,  or 
through  the  vocal  organs  of  her  transient  body,  no  matter  where 
or  when  I  hear  it. 

Again  when  either  of  the  two  is  materialized,  or  in  the  transient 
body  and  talking  or  moving  about,  such  one  appears  quite  as 
life-like,  and  real  to  me,  and  to  my  friends,  as  any  person  at  the 
seance,  and  each  voice  is  quite  as  familiar  and  natural  as  that 
of  other  friends  of  mine  who  may  be  present  with  me. 

I  may  also  mention  that  May’s  and  Hypatia’s  communications 
have  quite  as  often  been  by  spoken  language  as  by  the  psychic 
writing.  The  manner  of  speaking  is  characteristic,  though  the 
delivery  and  tone  are  modified  in  some  degree  in  the  cases  when 
using  the  vocal  organs  of  different  entranced  psychics. 

At  times  I  have  utilized  stenographers  to  make  record  of  exact 
spoken  language;  but  in  the  case  of  writing  psychics  such  aid 
is  not  requisite  as  accuracy  is  found  in  such  records,  not  only  in 
the  case  of  the  two  here  mentioned,  but  also  with  others  from 
the  spheres,  and  hence  no  necessity  exists  for  repeating. 

The  rhyming  tendency  has  already  been  accounted  for.  Not¬ 
withstanding  rhyme  and  tone  spirit  writers  claim  their  thoughts 
are(  conveyed  unchanged. 

I  have  spent  hours  at  a  time,  on  more  than  one  occasion,  in 
questioning  Hypatia  to  gain  knowledge,  and  her  responses  thereto 
were  immediately  given  through  the  automatic  writer.  A  few 
selections  from  the  many  are  embodied  in  Chapter  XXIII,  next 
following,  which  I  claim  demonstrate  her  wonderful  knowledge, 
and  her  great  capacity  for  imparting  it.  But  I  need  specify  no 
more,  for  everywhere  throughout  this  book  —  which  she  herself 
named  —  she  has  shown  unlimited  capacity  in  aiding  me  to  secure 
strong  evidence  designed  for  the  benefit  of  humanity.  Through- 


182 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


out  all  her  association  with  me,  she  invariably  courteously 
proffered  wise  suggestions;  and  avoided  the  semblance  of  effort 
to  dethrone  the  majesty  of  individual  will  or  choice.  She  has 
not  only  to  me,  but  to  others  alleged  that  she  is  my  spirit  guide. 
(“The  Voices”  by  Admiral  Moore.)  I  will  conclude  this  descrip¬ 
tion  with  my  estimation  in  regard  to  her,  viz. : 

Her  power  appears  to  be  almost  unlimited ;  her  wisdom 
acknowledged  also;  and  she  will  measure  up  to  any  mind  which 
questions  her  ability.  1  accept  her  in  full  confidence  as  teacher, 
helper  and  guide  to  me ;  and  have  no  doubt  that  she  is  the  one 
she  claims  to  be,  the  one  who  died  a  martyr  to  principle,  at 
Alexandria,  A.  D.  415. 

Hypatia’s  first  written  messages  to  me  came  as  a  surprise. 
Precautions  were  taken  to  guard  against  fraud  or  conjuring. 
They  were  reproduced  for  introduction  with  this  chapter,  by  aid 
of  isochromatic  photography;  and  hence  appear  as  ordinary 
grayish-white,  like  other  slate  writing. 

I  first  met  a  stranger  psychic  in  New  York  State,  and  had  my 
first  experience  with  slate-writing  intelligences.  As  a  precaution 
I  procured  new  slates,  void  of  blemish.  After  I  washed  and 
dried  them,  I  placed  two  of  them  of  equal  dimensions  in  apposi¬ 
tion,  and  securely  bound  them  together.  The  psychic’s  hand 
first  touched  them,  and  I  next  covered  them  with  a  dark  velvet 
texture,  as  they  lay  directly  in  front  af  me  on  the  table.  Almost 
immediately  I  heard  the  sound  of  writing,  which  concluded  with 
a  tap,  signifying  finished.  On  removal  of  the  cloth  with  which 
I  had  covered  them,  I  next  untied  and  separated,  the  two  slates, 
and  found  that  the  surface  of  each  which  was  hidden  from  view 
when  they  were  bound  together,  was  now  covered  with  writing, 
which  differed  one  portion  from  another. 

The  first  message  on  Slate  No.  1  (see  engraving  No.  1) 
appeared  in  deep-red  color,  and  was  the  first  message  signed  by 
“Hypatia,”  and  previously  referred  to  elsewhere. 

The  second  message  appeared  in  soft-yellow  color,  and  was 
signed  “Judge  Rose.”  The  judge,  up  to  a  recent  date,  had  been 
an  acquaintance  and  fellow-citizen  of  mine. 


HYPATIA’S  SECOND  WRITTEN  MESSAGE  TO  THE  AUTHOR. 


T 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


183 


The  third  message,  in  color  white,  was  signed  by  “Electra,” 
another  alleged  guide,  and  a  member  of  the  band  of  seven.  This 
writing  began  at  the  lower  lefthand  corner  of  the  slate,  as  well 
as  covered  in  successive  slightly  curved  lines  all  the  balance  of 
the  surface  of  the  slate,  and,  as  will  be  seen,  is  in  the  inverted 
position  in  relation  to  the  writing  which  precedes  it. 

Next  examining  the  other  slate,  I  found  a  single  message,  in 
the  ordinary  grayish-white  color  of  usual  slate-writing,  and  signed 
“John  King,”  a  name-sake,  who  has  been  seen  and  heard  by  other 
writers  and  investigators,  and  been  particularized  as  the  appari¬ 
tion  with  a  heavy  black  beard. 

At  the  same  hour  on  the  following  day,  during  my  second 
sitting,  Hypatia  wrote  another  message  in  red  color  and  signed 
it  (see  No.  2  photo-engraving).  The  writing  begins  at  the  upper 
right-hand  corner,  and  continues  to  extend  in  very  slightly  curved 
lines  in  a  diagonal  direction  in  relation  to  the  edges  of  the  slate, 
and  covering  about  three-fifths  of  the  surface.  The  other  writer, 
an  alleged  college-mate,  utilized  the  remainder  of  the  surface, 
beginning  at  the  lower  right-hand  corner.  I  may  here  briefly 
state  that  when  I  last  called  on  him,  during  his  earth  life,  he 
was  well  and  lived  on  York  Street,  Hamilton,  Ontario.  I  did  not 
know  until  I  received  the  message  on  this  occasion  that  he  had 
moved  from  where  I  last  spoke  with  him,  to  where  the  message 
says  he  was  living,  nor  did  I  know  until  that  moment  that  he 
had  passed  to  the  spirit  world.  On  subsequent  enquiry  from  a 
reliable  source,  I  received  corroboration  of  the  truth  embodied 
in  these  simple  statements  conveyed  in  the  written  message. 

The  second  slate  bore  on  its  inner  surface  but  one  message 
which  was  likewise  the  writer’s  first  one  on  a  slate,  and  was 
signed  “Egyptia,”  who  has  always  claimed  to  have  been  my 
guardian  angel  from  the  moment  of  my  birth ;  and  has  very 
often  materialized  and  conversed  with  me  through  the  vocal 
organs  of  her  transient  body,  at  seances  of  at  least  three  different 
materializing  mediums  during  the  period  beginning  with  the  year 
1894  (refer  to  Chapter  IV,  presentation  No.  6,  and  also  latter 
part  of  Chapter  VI). 


184 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Egyptia,  Hypatia  and  other  guides  of  spirit  band  of  seven 
have  walked  and  talked  with  me,  while  in  their  transient  bodies ; 
and  also  sang  songs  of  their  own  creation,  as  well  as  utilized 
trumpets  when  occasion  presented  for  communicating  with  me; 
and  these  evidences  have  continued  until  the  present. 

All  the  foregoing  slate  messages  were  written  very  rapidly, 
consuming  but  a  fraction  of  the  time  it  takes  to  read  them. 

The  writing  subsequently  became  blurred  in  the  natural  way, 
by  careless  handling  of  the  slates,  during  a  period  of  years  prior 
to  the  process  of  transferring  them  from  slates  to  engravings. 


CHAPTER  XXIII 


The  present  chapter  will  be  wholly  devoted  to  Hypatia’s 
views  regarding  mind,  thought  and  soul  or  spirit,  and 
their  relation  to  Deity,  together  with  an  outline  of  her 
philosophy,  and  tenets  of  her  creed.  She  briefly  gives  her  auto¬ 
biography,  and  simply  refers  to  her  martyrdom  at  Alexandria. 

My  questions  were  prepared  at  my  home  in  Toronto,  and  placed 
in  my  pocket ;  and  no  human  eye  saw  them  save  my  own,  nor 
did  a  single  mortal,  other  than  myself,  know  their  contents: 
and  yet  she  gave  her  answers,  and  expositions  in  response  to 
my  desires,  as  contained  in  them,  for  further  knowledge,  as  one 
who  proved  herself  to  have  been  unexcelled  as  a  teacher,  in  the 
age  in  which  she  lived.  This  sitting  with  the  psychic  at  Lily  Dale, 
New  York  State,  was  indeed  an  important  and  memorable  one, 
inasmuch  as  it  was  the  occasion  of  a  most  exacting  test  of  the 
genuineness  of  both  the  intelligence  communicating,  and  the 
instrument  or  medium. 

I  may  premise  for  the  reader’s  information,  that  to  Hypa,tia, 
more  than  to  all  else,  am  I  indebted  for  the  aid  I  have  received 
in  the  compilation  of  this  book,  entitled  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind,”  which  name,  I  now  realize  more  than  ever,  best  designates 
the  true  condition  of  the  present  day  mind  development,  and 
presents  to  view  a  new  established  truth  ;  and  while  I  recognize  her 
partnership  of  effort,  her  wisdom  as  my  guide  and  teacher,  her 
power  and  influence  as  a  leader  in  both  spirit  life  and  here,  I 
wish  to  have  her  place  on  record  what  must  stand  as  evidence 
plain  and  clear,  of  her  ability  to  uphold  my  claim,  that  life  is  a 
continuity ;  that  spirits  do  come  back  again  to  men ;  and  beyond 
each  and  every  doubt,  they  do  commune  with  them ;  and  lastly, 
that  the  work  in  which  I  have  engaged,  is  endorsed  by  the  angel 
world,  and  thus  is  affirmed  to  humanity  as  truth. 

As  the  time  for  our  sitting  had  arrived,  and  Hypatia’s  presence 
was  made  known,  I  thus  addressed  her:  “Hypatia,  you  have 

185 


186 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


well  established  your  identity  in  very  many  ways,  such  as  by 
letter,  or  message  writing ;  speaking  with  vocal  organs  of  a 
medium  in  a  trance ;  as  well  as  talking  through  trumpets ;  and 
less  frequently,  your  voice  has  been  heard  in  song;  while  many 
scores  of  sitters,  at  materializing  seances,  have  seen  you  time 
and  again  in  more  than  one  place,  and  heard  your  conversations 
when  meeting  me  there ;  and  most  especially,  when  a  large  circle 
of  interested  researchers  saw  you  bring  for  the  first  time  my 
spirit  wife  and  daughter  to  me,  in  a  Jonson  seance  in  Novem¬ 
ber,  1911.” 

“No  pedantic  critic  need  attempt  to  credit  me  with  seeing  a 
creature  of  imagination,  nor  a  fraudulent  presentation,  for  you 
have  too  often  established  your  identity  to  me,  beyond  all  question, 
as  well  as  to  others  who  saw  you  more  than  once,  and  who  with 
me,  could  frequently  have  the  opportunity  to  view  and  recognize 
your  features  and  your  form,  your  tangibility  and  motion,  your 
mannerisms  and  your  speech,  and  in  many  other  ways ;  as  any 
man  could  recognize  his  mother  or  his  wife,  and  could  swear 
that  she  was  such,  without  a  single  doubt  or  question.” 

“Now  that  Miss  Gates,  the  instrument,  is  ready  and  waiting, 
will  you  please  utilize  her  services  and  answer  these  several 
questions  for  me,  so  that  I  may  have  them  recorded,  and  take 
them  home  with  me.” 

Almost  instantly  the  psychic’s  hand  began  to  write,  and 
“Hypatia”  was  the  single  word  she  wrote,  as  an  indication  that 
she  at  least  was  ready. 

To  lead  the  way  I  first  asked  for  direction. 

J.  S.  K.  “Shall  I  read  all  the  questions  in  the  order  I  have 
them  written  here ;  or  submit  them  one  by  one,  and  receive  your 
answers  ?” 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  “I  prefer  to  receive  them  the  latter  way, 
and  then  proceed  to  answer  them.” 

The  answer  followed  each  question  immediately,  and  continued 
so  to  come,  until  this  chapter  was  concluded. 

Question  1,  by  J.  S.  K.  When  the  spirit  leaves  the  body,  at 
the  so-called  time  of  death,  of  what  does  it,  the  spirit,  consist? 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


187 


Answer,  by  Hypatia.  It  is  the  same  spirit  that  occupied  the 
body,  intangible  to  human  normal  sense,  but  tangible  to  us  as 
spirit.  In  fact  we  don’t  sense  anatomy,  at  all.  It  is  to  us  as  is 
matter,  a  machine  of  static  order,  .that  generates  for  the  growing 
soul,  proper  health  radiation.  After  the  spirit  is  free,  it  is  to 
us  cognizant,  whereas  when  it  is  in  the  body  it  is  inexpressive  or 
dumb.  Body  does  not  exist  and  spirit  is  all.  Your  body  is  made 
up  of  matter  or  moving  particles  of  inert  spirit,  and  God  is  spirit 
or  that  from  which  all  things  come.  If  you  want  me  to  describe 
it  from  your  point  of  view,  I  will  say  it  consists  of  mind,  the 
thinking  part  of  soul,  the  living  or  loving  part,  and  of  a  body 
produced  from  habits  of  thought  added  to  what  it  was  at  first, 
a  spirit  produced  by  process  of  birth.  The  words  may  be  confus¬ 
ing  or  interchangeable.  Your  ideal  is  correct  as  to  the  duality 
of  mind,  the  mind  that  thinks,  and  the  mind  that  produces 
harmony  for  the  thinking  ego  blended  together  make  a  whole  or 
spirit.  If  you  like  the  word  soul  better  so  use  it.  Name  is  limited 
to  express  what  must  be  unknown  quantity  to  a  mortal  or 
limited  mind. 

Question  2,  J.  S.  K.  Is  the  mind  immortal,  does  it  exist  for 
all  time  to  come  ? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  The  mind  is  a  portion  of  the  Deity,  or 
to  describe  it  in  a  picture,  it  is  a  portion  of  the  Deity  at  birth,  but 
like  a  plate  without  markings.  A  human  life-time  engraves  upon 
it  certain  errors  of  judgment  that  give  to  it  an  opalescent  hue, 
and  cause  it  to  be  most  precious  to  all  who  see  and  serve  it.  It 
was  everlasting  at  birth,  and  after  a  human  life-time,  it  is  not 
only  everlasting  but  most  precious  to  those  who  see  its  work  of 
growth  and  attainment.  What  I  specially  wish  to  here  convey  is 
that  the  mind  or  ego,  is  not  only  preserved,  but  the  personality 
is  also  retained,  and  continued. 

Question  3,  J.  S.  K.  Before  we  proceed  further,  I  desire  to 
know  if  I  err?  Or,  am  I  doing  what  I  should  not  do,  irj  asking 
these  questions,  which  of  necessity  are  in  advance  of  the  normal 
knowledge  of  humanity? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  It  is  not  sinful  to  endeavor  to  find  out 


188 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


what  is  beyond  your  comprehension.  If  you  ask  of  what  the 
sun  consists,  you  do  no  harm.  Therefore,  from  my  point  of 
view,  it  is  not  sinful  to  ask  about  that  which  you  do  not  know, 
regarding  intangible  things,  but  to  you  made  real  by  experiences 
and  observation. 

Question  4,  J.  S.  K.  Is  the  whole  of  mind  a  unit,  and  of  what 
does  it  consist? 

Answer  by  Hypatia,  The  whole  of  mind  is  like  to  a  ball  of 
mercury.  It  is  all  of  one  substance  but  may  easily  be  separated 
into  smaller  complete  balls  or  portions  of  the  first  division,  or  in 
immature  infancy  these  portions  are  not  engraved  and  go  back 
easily  to  high  degree,  but  after  life  of  human,  they  become 
individualized  so  that  their  life  is  put  on  record,  like  a  book, 
and  like  a  blossom  beautiful  or  dwarfed  it  stays  forever  in  the 
garden  of  its  God.  When  it  by  more  perfection  of  its  growth 
becomes  completed  in  its  love  and  loses  selfish  greed  of  gain, 
it  goes  at  last  into  a  pool  of  power,  which  like  to  corpuscles 
of  living  blood,  moves  ever  onward  in  a  harmony  of  power  to 
aid  and  power  to  grow,  and  each  one  helps  the  other  so  there  is 
no  clashing  anywhere,  but  different  power  to  do  as  with  wise 
men  in  human  life  of  you. 

Question  5,  J.  S.  K.  Is  mind  compound  or  has  it  parts  objective 
and  subjective? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  It  is  compound  as  you  might  see  but  to 
us  perfect  like  a  tree,  the  sub-conscious  is  the  perfected  mind  of 
animal.  Its  instinct  is  perfect.  It  does  not  reason,  and  it  does 
not  err.  The  other  portion  in  man  developed  is  like  the  blossom 
of  the  fruit.  It  reasons  and  it  errs,  and  yet  is  by  us  believed  to 
be  most  perfect  so,  with  an  unending  power  to  grow. 

Question  6,  J.  S.  K.  Has  mind  at  death  to  be  divided,  and 
some  part  no  longer  used? 

Answer  by  Hypatia,  It  is  sometimes  cut  off  from  memory 
of  this  past  life.  It,  I  mean  the  mind,  as  a  whole  is  at  times 
deprived  of  memory,  and  in  that  state  is  placed  in  circumstances 
like  to  a  second  human  life,  and  so  it  grows  in  even  state,  till 
from  its  vicious  tendency  set  free,  then  it  is  after  shown,  and 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


189 


taught  what  circumstances  caused  it  to  be,  for  man  is  ruled  by 
circumstance  in  large  degree.  Perhaps  a  fault  in  growth  of  brain, 
perhaps  an  evil  moral  tendency  inherited  from  certain  fault  or 
error  of  his  ancestry. 

Question  7,  J.  S.  K.  Does  some  new  element  of  mind  manifest 
when  body  dies? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  New  senses  open  to  the  spirit  view.  It 
is  as  if  you  for  your  life-time  through,  were  of  your  sight  or 
smell  bereft.  You  simply  use  what  you  had  not  the  need  of  while 
your  brain  an  organ  frail  was  being  used  by  you. 

Question  8,  J.  S.  K.  By  what  part  of  mind  is  reason  exercised 
in  spirit  life? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  It  is  the  reasoning  portion  of  the  com¬ 
pleted  mind.  The  mind  is  dual  as  a  tree  above  ground  and 
beneath  would  be,  but  each  dependent  on  the  other  for  perfect 
harmony ;  but  if  either  was  bereft  like  in  the  tree  the  sub-conscious 
or  the  root  is  the  most  substantial  part.  The  reasoning  portion 
is  the  portion  that  develops  as  a  whole  and  glorifies  perfected  soul. 

Question  9,  J.  S.  K.  What  difference,  if  any,  is  there  between 
spirits  carnate  and  discarnate? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  referred  to  that  before.  I  might  give 
your  mind  a  picture  of  it  by  saying  the  living  human  spirit  or 
incarnate  one,  is  as  a  child  compared  to  man.  A  child  might 
have  better  eyes  than  the  father,  but  he  could  not  mentally  use 
the  objects  impressed  on  his  sight,  so  the  incarnate  spirit,  even 
when  awakened  in  spiritual  power  to  sense,  is  not  greatly  bene¬ 
fited  thereby,  but  when  set  free  the  need  of  spirit  senses  then 
exists,  and  they  are  appreciated  indeed. 

Question  10,  J.  S.  K.  By  what  authority  is  discarnate  mind 
controlled? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  Discarnate  mind  is  controlled  on  a  similar 
principle  to  the  incarnate.  It  is  guided  into  paths  for  its  best 
good.  If  it  proceeds  with  good  and  grace,  it  is  allowed  to  stay 
and  advance  rapidly  along  the  way.  If  it  is  slow  or  does  not  wish 
to  go  another  takes  its  place,  and  it  is  left  to  be  taught  privately. 
Like  to  a  school  the  after  life,  if  all  are  in  a  class,  and  do  their 


190 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


best,  they  keep  together  in  a  forward  way,  just  as  a  normal 
human  life  will  grow  in  similar  degree  to  its  perfection  or  com¬ 
pletion  ;  but  if  it,  the  discarnate  spirit,  cannot  be  like  to  the  aver¬ 
age  ones,  'tis  given  private  tutorage  along  the  way,  and  will 
attain  its  growth  at  later  day,  like  to  a  backward  child  at  school, 
but  all  are  forced  to  certain  rule.  As  birth  and  death  to  man  is 
certainty,  so  to  the  spirit  certain  laws  must  be.  If  I  ask  you  what 
makes  a  comet  return  to  a  certain  prophesied  point,  after  a  lapse 
of  years,  you  will  answer,  law,  which  has  been  discovered  by 
observation.  So  in  spirit,  laws  of  exactness  exist,  but  God  or 
Deity  is  all  life,  and  all  love,  and  all  wisdom.  As  perfection 
cannot  err,  so  it  cannot  change.  It  is  modified  to  some  degree 
by  other  spirits,  but  the  good  of  each  individual  is  the  ultimate 
end. 

Question  11,  J.  S.  K.  How  is  mind  of  infant  spirit  developed 
to  adult  state? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  Inherited  tendency,  or  the  impressions 
made  upon  the  minds  of  its  ancestors  are  impressed  upon  its 
mind  at  birth,  on  principle  like  to  photography  after  its  start, 
its  food  and  body  growth,  and  also  its  social  environment,  have 
much  to  do  with  developing  it  toward  good  or  evil  tendencies. 
But  good  is  best  when  it  is  understood,  and  wise  and  loving 
hearts  are  always  good. 

Question  12,  J.  S.  K.  Is  the  ruling  power  in  spirit,  or  is  it 
found  in  mind? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  The  ruling  power  is  spirit,  which  is 
perfect,  and  perfects  all  things  according  to  the  best  of  perfect 
law.  Spirit  is  more  perfect  than  mind.  Spirit  is  the  power  to 
produce  all  things,  and  maybe  complete  to  the  final  etherialized 
state,  finer  than  anything  material.  A  mind  is  an  expression  of 
this  spirit.  Mind  has  limitations,  spirit  has  none.  The  substance 
mind  is  a  creation  of  the  spirit.  It  is  not  easy  for  a  finite  being 
to  comprehend  absolute  capacity  to  do,  to  think  and  reason  are 
attributes  of  the  mind.  The  spirit  is  not  in  this  necessity,  it  knows 
without  effort  or  need  to  attain.  The  Ruling  Power  of  the  Uni¬ 
verse,  the  Spirit,  has  made  an  absolutely  perfect  law.  This  law 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


191 


or  these  laws  are  always  for  the  good  of  the  ones  governed. 
These  laws  are  the  result  of  growth,  and  develop  as  necessities 
of  development  call  for  laws.  Laws  are  a  necessity  to  finite 
minds,  but  to  Infinite  Spirit  there  is  no  need  for  limitation  or 
law.  Law  of  itself  suggests  consequence.  If  you  disobey  a  law, 
you  must  suffer  in  some  way.  So  I  think  I  best  express  it  when 
I  tell  you  that  spirit  is  absolute,  and  pervades  all  matter  and 
mind.  Without  God  or  Deity  no  life  would  be.  So  finite  beings 
are  but  individual  expressions  of  this  general  and  all  pervading 
spirit,  necessary  to  life  in  all  forms.  Death  is  not  possible  to 
spirit.  Death  is  a  gateway  of  change  only.  The  ruling  power 
is,  as  far  as  our  ability  to  comprehend,  perfect  law  modified  by 
loving  united  minds,  who  teach  and  aid  all  lesser  ones.  You  know 
the  heated  stove  will  burn  you,  but  if  a  child  or  idiot  came  near, 
you  would  withhold  his  hand  by  force,  if  ’twas  necessity  to  save 
him.  Pain  you  know  would  be,  and  yet  the  fire  is  a  friend  to 
men.  So  laws  of  force  exist,  and  laws  of  consequence,  but  all 
are  for  the  best  growth  of  all  concerned. 

Question  13,  J.  S.  K.  I  desire  fully  to  comprehend  the  true 
meaning  of  mind,  and  of  the  terms  mind-reading,  telepathy  and 
thought-transference,  and  how  thought  is  recognized  by  me  'in 
another’s  mind,  or  how  thought  may  be  propelled,  or  attracted 
from  one  mind  to  another  one.  Is  telepathy  possible  only  between 
two  minds  in  harmonious  attunement  by  a  process  of  vibration 
similar  in  principle  to  that  necessary  in  transmitting  Marconi- 
grams  from  one  tower  or  station  to  another  one,  or  on  the  other 
hand  do  you  deny  its  real  existence?  In  this  same  connection  I 
would  ask  have  you  knowledge  that  a  thought  which  originally 
belonged  to  the  mind  of  one  person  may  impinge  upon  or  connect 
in  some  way,  with  the  mind  of  another  person  in  harmonious 
attunement  with  herself  like  to  the  note  caused  by  the  bow  of 
a  violin,  drawn  across  the  string,  causing  response  in  a  wire 
which  produces  a  similar  note  in  the  piano  at  the  other  end  of 
the  room? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  may  first  say  I  believe  and  know  it  is 
true,  if  I  had  instrument  like  you,  at  this  end,  I  could  cause  her 


192 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


here  to  sense  and  know,  but  she,  this  one,  (the  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone)  will  not  do  so.  She  says  cut  off  all  of  their  power, 
and  leave  me  silent  free,  and  like  a  person  in  a  room,  her  mental 
door  is  locked  to  me;  but  if  I  see  her  little  maid,  (an  elemental 
spirit)  I  say  call  “Maudie”  to  our  aid,  and  if  it  seems  to  Lala 
Lee  (the  maid)  desirable  she  mention  me,  and  then  this  one  (the 
instrument)  may  listen  if  she  wishes  to,  but  she  is  opposite  to 
you  in  every  way,  apd  does  not  wish  to  know,  or  even  care  if 
it  is  so. 

It  is  somewhat  difficult  to  describe  to  finite  beings,  things 
intangible  to  their  senses,  like  Mind,  Soul,  Spirit,  etc.  Mind  is 
substance  real  to  myself,  real  to  yourself,  but  your  senses  are 
associated  with  the  knowledge  and  belief  in  gravity,  and  to  human 
senses  things  not  governed  by  gravity  are  not  real.  Mind  is  not 
governed  by  gravity  of  planets,  or  gravitation’s  law.  Centrifugal 
and  centripetal  forces  affect  it  not,  but  it  has  length,  breadth  and 
thickness,  and  has  necessity.  It  may  have  comfort  or  discomfort, 
it  may  be  relaxed  or  in  tension.  It  is  of  itself  without  necessary 
form  and  at  birth  would  be  void,  or  without  engravings.  The 
mind  of  each  human  are  at  birth  alike  as  far  as  serious  variations 
are  concerned.  If  I  would  be  most  exact,  I  should  say  that  God 
is  mind,  and  each  individual  of  whatsoever  order,  is  a  chunk  of 
God  in  greater  or  less  size  capacity.  I  might  describe  the  creation 
of  the  universal  universes,  as  having  been-  made  on  the  principles 
of  the  development  of  rudimentary  animal  life,  on  the  plan  of 
fission  or  automatic  division  of  a  cell,  or  an  independent  organism, 
that  is  to  say  each  globule  or  filament  after  elongating  divides 
into  two  segments,  each  of  which  increases  in  its  turn,  to  again 
divide  into  parts  and  so  on.  The  Universes  are  so  produced  by 
growth  from  the  original  oneness  of  Deity,  these  large  or  astro¬ 
nomical  minds  are  in  desire  to  produce  and  protect  lives,  and 
are  taught  how  to  proceed  to  their  perfection  by  ability  to  com¬ 
municate  directly  to  Deity.  These  original  minds  or  individuals 
are  governed  by  exact  laws,  and  matter,  which  is  all  that  is 
cognizant  to  humans,  is  the  result  of  these  laws.  I  from  my 
point  of  view  would  call  all  matter  mind  in  different  degrees  of 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


193 


tension,  or  potential.  Therefore  under  bonds  a  mind  of  advanced 
order  for  the  purpose  of  enlightening  or  teaching  investigating 
men,  may  in  a  small  degree  materialize  or  de-materialize  objects 
to  men  familiar,  on  a  similar  principle  to  that  used  by  a  human 
scientist  when  he  would  cause  heat  waves  to  be  changed  into 
sound  waves.  I  might  perhaps  make  you  understand  the  condi¬ 
tions  of  the  universe,  if  I  should  say  you  are  living  in  the  com¬ 
pleted  universe,  or  the  growing  one,  but  there  are  myriads  of 
complete  or  ripe  universes  or  individual  large  minds,  like  to  the 
Coral  Islands  produced  by  the  living  small  animals,  on  each  of 
these  is  exactly  recorded  every  thing  of  its  experience.  Or  perhaps 
you  would  understand  better  if  I’d  say  a  spirit  after  birth  com¬ 
pletes  itself  according  to  its  best  development,  and  then,  becomes 
a  perfected  “I  am”  like  to  Deity  in  its  desire  to  do  good  to  all, 
and  after  further  development  it  becomes  an  “I  am  not,”  or  a 
positively  negative  force,  from  which  matter  is  made.  This  mind 
then  becomes  like  to  mother  earth  vibrant  with  life,  but  does  not 
act  except  in  a  beneficent  way,  toward  the  myriad  forms  or 
individuals  of  life,  upon  its  surface.  The  spirits  of  men,  and  the 
spirits  of  elementals  are  in  truth  the  only  truly  irresponsible 
individuals  of  the  mind  order.  These  two  orders  belong  as  I 
might  describe  to  you  men,  to  the  conscious  or  inventive  portion 
of  the  God  mind,  and  elementals  to  the  active  sub-conscious 
portion  of  the  God  mind.  An  elemental,  if  not  suggested  to  by 
a  man  spirit,  will  never  make  a  mistake  or  err  in  execution  of 
a  command.  They  are  of  the  recording  and  imitating  order,  and 
whatever  they  do  or  wherever  they  go,  they  follow  the  suggestion 
of  a  mind  either  carnate  or  discarnate.  They  do  not  invent. 
The  body  of  humans  in  life  is  a  static  machine,  that  generates 
through  the  life  process,  the  radiation  and  vibrations  necessary 
for  a  man’s  best  development. 

Question  14,  J.  S.  K.  Will  you  kindly  explain  to  me  what 
thought  is,  where  it  originates,  how  it  is  created,  how  directed 
and  controlled. 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  Thought  is  more  than  a  vibration,  it  is 
an  invention  or  mental  succession  of  pictures,  which  as  you  ask 


194 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


in  previous  question,  may  be  conveyed  to  another  mind  in  attune- 
ment  to  itself,  either  by  natural  or  produced  state.  Telepathy 
has  real  existence,  because  it  is  thought-transference  either  by 
picture  or  word  method.  It  may  be  caught  by  a  disinterested 
piind,  if  that  mind  is  in  line  of  its  conveyance,  or  is  in  harmonious 
attunement  with  itself.  Elementals  may  be  used  to  generate  any 
vibration  which  I  might  describe  to  you  as  colors.  Blue  and 
yellow  will  produce  green.  Suppose  a  “blue”  mind  endeavored 
to  communicate  by  telepathy  with  a  “green”  mind  it  could  not  do 
so  till  a  guide  caused  the  “yellow”  to  be  added  to  the  blue,  till 
they  were  of  the  same  shade.  This  could  be  done  by  additions 
from  this  side,  but  its  success  would  depend  upon  its  exactness. 
Rest  and  fatigue  of  body  have  much  to  do  with  the  condition 
of  a  living  mind,  and  these  conditions  are  dependent  on  circum¬ 
stances,  not  wholly  spiritual.  Thought  is  a  power  of  reason,  a 
power  to  invent,  to  take  things  known  or  observed,  and  make 
new  pictures  from  combining  them  in  different  kaleidoscopic 
ways.  I  know  your  happiness  or  unhappiness  by  intuition,  if  I 
come  in  tune  with  you.  This  is  a  soul  power.  The  power  to  feel 
or  know.  This  is  done  by  intuition  and  power  to  me  known,  but 
with  May  she  cannot  of  her  own  self  unaided  come  into  tune 
with  you.  She  is  a  babe  not  properly  clothed,  and  I  by'  additions 
clothe  her  for  the  occasions,  as  is  best  for  her  and  you. 

Question  15,  J.  S.  K.  If  my  thoughts  are  now  known  to  May 
and  you,  is  it  by  sense  of  sight,  or  feeling  or  is  it  by  spirit  sense 
of  intuition  or  prehension? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  You  are  to  me  a  radiant  being,  and  thus 
bodily  radiation  of  you  is  to  me  as  light.  What  you  think  or 
write  is  recorded,  and  under  proper  conditions  I  can  read  it  as 
you  could  a  book.  I  cannot  always  produce  or  cause  to  be  pro¬ 
duced  these  conditions,  therefore  I  cannot  always  read  your 
thoughts  or  written  words.  These  small  necessities  to  me  are 
like  to  the  pen  or  pencil  and  paper  to  this  writer  if  she  would 
communicate  with  you.  If  you  were  developed  in  mediumship 
your  body  would  be  like  a  house  equipped  with  a  telephone.  I 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


195 


could  use  it,  so  could  a  stranger  spirit  as  well,  except  a  stranger 
would  probably  be  withheld  from  entering  your  house. 

Question  16,  J.  S.  K.  Have  thoughts  once  formed  continuous 
existence? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  Thoughts  once  formed  have  continued 
existence  because  they  are  recorded.  The  Kingdom  of  life,  both 
animal  and  vegetable,  is  on  or  over  a  “carbon  sheet,”  that  exactly 
reproduces  it.  This  is  in  the  Kingdom  called  at  the  present  time, 
or  rather  from  which  the  spirits  of  Levitation  and  Elementals 
come.  I  can,  by  going  through  proper  forms  of  vibration  and 
waiting,  knock  on  any  door  of  record  of  any  type  or  time  and 
find  what  is  therein,  kept  or  treasured.  Or  I  may,  which  I  would 
do  in  ordinary  way,  employ  an  elemental  to  go  to  this  point, 
receive  the  impression  of  what  I  wish  to  know,  and  then  come 
to  me  and  repeat  it  as  a  graphophone  repeats  a  record.  The 
elemental  will  go  in  a  bee  line,  and  the  record  will  be  exact,  if 
it  is  not  interfered  with  in  transmission.  Thought  as  a  rule  goes 
straight  forward  as  in  a  tube  and  does  not  impinge  upon  a  mind 
unless  that  mind  enters  its  ray  by  accident  or  design.  The  thought 
is  complete  like  to  a  picture  created  or  painted.  It  may  be  retraced 
or  copied  or  obtained  again  for  the  hall  of  record,  but  it  does 
not  continue  to  vibrate  on  the  principle  of  waves  on  a  lake  after 
a  stone  is  dropped  therein.  If  it  did  so  one  set  of  pictures  would 
impinge  upon  another  set  of  pictures,  and  tend  to  efface  each 
other.  A  beautiful  thought  like  a  beautiful  song,  may  be  retained 
in  memories  near,  and  repeated  in  a  modified  way,  either  with 
additions  or  subtractions. 

Question  17,  J.  S.  K.  If  thoughts  are  definite  in  form  are 
they  not  physical? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  In  answer  I  would  say  that  thoughts 
are  physical  from  spirit  point  of  view,  but  not  from  that  of 
human.  That  is  they  have  not  weight,  and  are  not  governed 
by  gravity.  They  cannot  be  disturbed  or  delayed  by  physical  sub¬ 
stance.  Other  thoughts  cannot  modify  or  change  their  origin, 
continuance  or  end.  Other  thoughts  cannot  quicken  or  delay 
their  execution.  They  may  impress  mind  and  cause  new  thoughts 


196 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


to  be  invented,  but  each  thought  remains  itself  intact  or 
unchanged. 

Question  18,  J.  S.  K.  Am  I  correct  in  assuming  that  I  am  in 
attunement  with  spirit  realms,  when  while  I  am  in  a  passive  state 
I  send  forth  my  soul’s  desire  to  receive  a  message  from  you  or 
May  or  other  loved  one  or  friend,  or  whoever  I  may,  and  that 
same  one  goes  to  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone  and  communi¬ 
cates  their  thoughts  through  that  instrument  to  me  in  writing? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  All  men  are  in  attunement  with  spirit 
realms  at  all  times,  but  when  you  send  forth  a  true  prayer  or 
soul’s  desire  you  call  to  your  assistance  many  exalted  spirits, 
who  like  to  the  “Jacob’s  Ladder’’  picture  make  the  way  between 
you  and  your  wish  more  smooth.  The  greatest  good  to  the 
greatest  number  is  always  to  be  considered,  and  even  though 
we  wish  earnestly,  we  often  fail  to  win.  But  who  can  say  we 
are  not  benefited  by  the  wishing? 

Question  19,  J.  S.  K.  Hypatia,  will  you  kindly  explain  to  me, 
why  some  former  acquaintances,  some  distant  relatives,  and 
most  of  the  strangers  who  have  sent  the  messages  through  the 
writing  instrument,  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  to  me.  have 
done  so  without  my  request,  and  some  whom  I  had  no  thought 
of,  was  it  a  thought  wave  from  me  to  someone  that  they  sensed, 
(or  by  telepathy)  or  why  was  it  so? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  Myriads  of  spirits  wish  to  communicate 
with  men.  Sometimes  they  serve  us  in  our  work  for  you,  and  so 
earn  the  right  to  have  their  wish  to  communicate  granted.  Many 
observe  all  mediumistic  experiments  and  are  like  onlookers  at 
the  moving  of  a  building,  at  hand  ready  to  assist,  and  afterwards 
deserving  of  reward  in  the  way  of  having  their  wishes  granted 
in  regard  to  personal  communications,  etc. 

Question  20,  J.  S.  K.  If  thought  is  a  creation  of  the  mind, 
and  mind  as  a  whole  is  a  unit,  though  having  parts  as  to  qualities 
or  functionings,  and  has  for  future  advantage  dormant  spiritual 
senses,  then  am  I  to  understand  that  what  still  remains  is  soul 
or  spirit,  the  source  from  which  emanates  love,  emotion,  and 
other  attributes?  And  does  this  combination  form  the  completed 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


197 


individual  whole  of  each  spirit  personality,  with  its  origin  in, 
and  future  final  destination,  the  Universal  and  Infinite  Spirit, 
Deity  or  God?  I  have  thought  and  I  have  reasoned  that  the 
various  parts  having  spirit  origin,  by  their  union  together  con¬ 
stitute  each  individual  carnate  and  discarnate  personality,  an 
immortal  spirit.  As  an  earnest,  honest  student,  I  want  to  learn 
along  these  lines  what  you  can  and  will  teach  me.  Does  the 
spirit  through  its  soul  govern  the  operations  of  the  mind,  and  if 
so,  is  not  the  spirit  entity  the  ruler  of  all  its  parts,  and  a  portion 
of  the  Infinite  Spirit  or  Deity,  but  with  a  limitation  and  adapt¬ 
ability  to  the  physical  body  in  human  life;  but  after  death  without 
an  organized  body  only  as  one  is  assumed  for  some  reason,  such 
for  example  as  recognition,  though  both  physical  and  visible  from 
spirit  point  of  view? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  will  give  answer  to  your  question  as 
well  as  make  response  to  several  others  in  your  mind.  The  mind 
is  a  ball  that  may  either  centralize  or  does  centralize,  until  a 
thought  is  invented,  then  it  focuses  and  sends  that  thought  forth, 
catapults  it  as  it  were.  That  thought  must  be  in  a  way  a  com¬ 
pleted  picture,  expressed  in  words,  or  symbols.  I  would  say 
thought  is  a  creation  of  the  mind.  It,  the  mind,  may  be  active 
or  passive.  When  passive  it  is  easily  impressed  by  thoughts  about 
it,  and  must  come  in  touch  with  it,  through  some  sense  either 
physical  or  spiritual.  The  eye  as  an  organ  is  an  instrument  like 
a  camera  that  produces  agreeable  effects  on  the  mind.  There 
are  spiritual  senses,  in  the  spiritual  body,  which  continue  with 
the  mind  and  soul  of  man,  after  death.  A  man’s  mind  is  like  to 
God’s  mind,  on  the  same  principle  that  the  tree  in  the  seed  is 
just  as  perfect  as  the  grown  tree.  Scientists  contend  that  even 
the  future  blossom  is  in  this  its  primal  state.  But  in  the  primal 
state,  it  is  perfect.  In  real  tree  life,  or  development,  some 
blossoms  will  be  blighted  by  frost  and  circumstance,  and  some 
will  bear  fruit.  The  God  mind  would  be  like  to  the  mind  of 
every  individual  at  birth,  but  without  personalities,  which  are 
attained  by  circumstance  and  growth.  The  key  to  each  condition 
and  sphere  is  in  the  body  and  soul  of  every  man. 


198 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Mind  of  God  is  a  Kingdom  or  sphere  of  wholeness,  like  to 
white  paper  not  engraved  with  personality. 

Soul  of  God  is  a  Kingdom  or  sphere  of  wholeness.  Love  is 
the  principle  thereof. 

Body  of  God  is  the  Universe  as  a  whole,  both  spiritual  and 
physical. 

This  the  “three  in  one’’  incomprehensible  to  many  yet  evident 
in  all  men,  matter  is  an  expression  of  this  (the  body)  part 
thereof.  Severity  of  Justice  without  mercy  that  does  not  deviate 
in  body  or  matter,  in  exactness,  of  all  natural  laws,  like  those 
of  fire,  electricity  and  forces  not  yet  known  to  men,  is  modified 
by  soul,  all  the  way  to  perfection,  both  in  body  and  spirit. 

The  mind  of  each  individual  is  with  that  individual  always. 
Its  capacity  to  think  and  therefore  develop  and  grow  in  human 
life  depends  upon  its  brain  health,  and  development  (circum¬ 
stance.) 

If  it  is  an  idiot  the  brain  cells  are  disturbed  and  cannot  be 
used,  the  mind  remains  in  inability  to  think  until  death  relieves 
it  to  the  freedom  of  its  spiritual  state. 

In  insanity,  the  brain  disease  sets  the  spirit  into  partial  free¬ 
dom,  from  the  body,  so  it  floats,  toy-balloon-like,  between  its 
body  and  its  spiritual  home.  Not  able  to  grow,  or  use  its  brain, 
it  is  acted  on  by  discarnate  minds,  and  also  incorrect  impulses 
or  impressions  caused  by  diseased  brain.  When  it  is  free  spirit, 
it  is  cut  off  from  the  memory  of  this  experience,  and  begins  at 
its  well,  or  child  state,  and  grows  again  complete. 

Soul  is  a  portion  of  man.  It  has  the  power  to  feel,  to  love, 
to  be  attuned  to  the  best  in  ourselves,  and  in  the  Infinite.  It  is 
the  blossom  or  the  fruit  of  the  whole  completed  life  of  man. 
Two  men  may  be  alike  in  mental  power,  but  one  may  be  almost 
wholly  without  moral  sense.  Morality  is  an  attribute  also  of 
the  soul,  as  mentality  is  of  the  mind,  both  aided  by  the  body 
instrument  become  the  completed  man.  Morality  is  the  distinguish¬ 
ing  trait  of  man.  It  may  reverse  and  become  immorality.  These 
attributes  are  of  the  soul,  which  is  not  in  animals.  A  moral  or 
immoral  beast  would  be  incomprehensible. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


199 


All  spirits  are  a  part  of  Deity,  just  as  blood  corpuscles  are  a 
part  of  a  human  body,  red  ones  I  might  describe  as  thinkers,  or 
active  forces,  and  white  ones  as  the  passive,  or  elemental  part, 
yet  all  circulate  forward  to  perfected  degree. 

Each  individual  is  placed  in  his  proper  environment,  for  best 
growth  and  development.  I  have  a  body,  or  a  combination  of  soul, 
mind  and  attributes  in  complete  harmony,  to  produce  a  spirit 
which  is  an  individual  differing  from  all  others.  I  am  advanced 
according  to  my  capacity  to  do,  and  this  advancement  is  a  part 
of  myself,  and  radiates  from  me,  just  as  intelligence  radiates 
from  a  wise  man,  and  shows  abroad  to  distinguish  him  from  a 
fool;  just  as  kindness  shows  abroad. in  a  man  to  distinguish  him 
from  one  who  is  vicious.  I  have  things  I  like  to  do.  I  have  things 
I  wish  to  do.  I  have  limitations,  I  am  taught,  and  in  turn  I  teach 
others.  I  am  not  cut  off  from  individuals  of  any  other  order,  but 
I  have  my  interests  and  they  have  theirs,  like  to  men  of  equal 
intelligence  passing  on  a  city  street.  I  carry  with  me  the  engrav¬ 
ings  of  my  attainment.  I  go  to  what  I  admire,  and  am  attracted 
to  those  who  are  interested  along  the  same  line.  Spirit  life  is 
not  so  different  from  human  life,  except  that  as  we  advance  we 
drop  off  limitations.  We  become  more  intangible  as  it  were. 

A  spirit  of  the  first  sphere  or  order  of  human  existence,  after 
death  is  intangible  to  a  living  human  one. 

A  spirit  of  the  second  sphere  is  intangible  to  those  of  the  first 
order,  except  it  assume  the  first  sphere  conditions  or  limitations, 
and  so  on  to  the  final  perfection  of  exalted  degree,  where  though 
they  retain  their  individuality,  they  are  dissolved  into  the  body 
of  the  spirit  of  God,  as  it  has  been  said,  or  become  so  God-like, 
that  his  wishes  are  their  wishes  in  every  degree.  They  have  not 
limitations  of  actfon,  but  they  have  not  wish  to  act,  except  in 
accordance  with  law,  which  is  and  must  be  perfect.  They  assist 
less  capable  spirits  to  attain,  they  assist  such  as  I  am,  to  aid  living 
mortals,  and  discamate  spirits,  to  their  own  harmony,  etc. 

The  wonders  of  God’s  great  Universe  are  indeed  beyond  finding 
out.  We  have  a  means  of  being  taught,  which  I  might  describe 
as  projected  pictures,  from  the  land  of  the  sure  to  be. 


200 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  ask  any  question,  and  see  the  answer  at  once  thrown  on 
to  the  screen  of  my  consciousness,  in  Symbology.  This  is  a 
universal  language.  Our  power  to  prophesy  or  know  the  future 
depends  on  our  ability  to  read  these  symbols  correctly. 

Clairvoyant  humans  have  power  at  times,  to  sense  these  symbols. 

In  some  of  your  past  letters  of  enquiry,  you  have  asked  me 
in  regard  to  evil  spirits,  etc.  The  deceptive  spirits  are  as  a  rule 
misplaced  spiritual  powers,  as  fire,  which  is  a  blessing  indeed 
to  man  in  artificial  environments,  of  northern  climate,  but  destruc¬ 
tive  without  our  responsibility  if  set  free.  It  is  governed  by  exact 
laws,  that  must  be  followed  or  obeyed  with  care.  Your  lamp 
and  your  stove  are  devils  indeed,  but  waiting  an  opportunity  to 
destroy  your  home  and  you,  one  might  say;  but  if  properly 
managed  they  are  blessings  indeed  to  all  men. 

In  mediumistic  experiments  these  forces  are  not  always  balanced 
properly,  if  so  they  would  revitalize  the  medium,  as  they  do  in 
the  case  of  this  instrument.  (The  Human-Psychic-Telephone.) 
In  the  case  of  J.  B.  Jonson  they  are  exhausting  his  vital  forces ; 
and  if  he  continues  to  give  seances  he  will  die.  Perhaps  a  pro¬ 
tracted  rest  might  enable  his  guides  to  learn  how  to  provide  for 
his  better  protection,  I  do  not  know.  I  do  not  know  so  much 
more  than  I  did,  when  living,  but  I  have  added  capacity  to  sense, 
and  at  my  request  in  any  line,  I  am  kindly  and  carefully  taught 
how  to  proceed.  Sometimes  I  proceed  along  as  a  child  would 
play  a  tune  that  it  had  been  taught.  At  other  times  I  proceed 
by  repeating  a  record  given  to  me,  as  one  would  play  a  pianola. 
In  either  case  it  is  my  act,  but  governed  by  my  capacity  to  do. 
There  are  bands  of  spirits,  like  to  the  bands  about  mediums. 
Sometimes  these  bands  of  discarnate  spirits,  aided  by  elementals, 
invade  weak-minded  people,  and  produce  peculiar  or  evil  acts. 
Thus  in  suicidal  mania,  certain  astronomy,  or  large  spirits  believe 
it  is  sad  that  a  human  soul  or  spirit  must  be  kept  in  the  limita¬ 
tions  of  life.  They  believe  it  desirable  to  set  them  free,  that  they 
may  enjoy  the  broader  life,  and  knowledge  granted  to  discarnate 
spirits.  If  by  accident  or  design,  one  of  these  becomes  attuned 
to  a  weak  or  diseased  mentality,  it  may  suggest  suicide,  but  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


201 


spirit  that  so  does  it  is  not  a  devil,  instead  it  is  a  spirit  that  loves 
living  men  too  much,  etc.  Sometimes  elementals  and  men  become 
fraternal,  and  change  work  as  it  were.  A  severe  power  of  levita¬ 
tion’s  kingdom,  accustomed  to  the  exact  execution  of  an  elemental 
servant,  is  displeased,  when  a  man  is  substituted  in  service,  and 
fails  in  exactness  of  execution  from  his  wish  to  know  what  the 
result  of  so  doing  would  be,  etc.  In  these  cases  the  elementals 
in  their  efforts  to  protect  their  friend,  the  reasoner,  place  him 
in  an  ill  man’s  body,  and  in  trying  to  teach  him,  or  divert  the 
attention  of  the  severe  power  from  him,  sometimes  cause  obsces- 
sion,  and  other  injury  to  humans ;  but  this  is  not  the  result  of 
an  evil  inteation,  but  of  a  good  intention  wrongly  placed. 

A  child  sent  for  a  wire  might  remove  a  wire  from  a  piano  and 
so  do  great  harm  or  damage,  but  it  would  not  be  to  blame,  if 
its  judgment  could  not  comprehend  the  harm  done.  So  guardian¬ 
ship  is  extended  all  along  the  line. 

If  a  heavy  vibration  spirit,  by  artificial  aid,  is  placed  and  left 
in  wrong  environment,  we  produce  its  comfort  and  return  it  to 
its  element. 

Like  to  a  fish  on  land,  it  could  be  kept  in  comfort  in  a  small 
amount  of  water  till  it  could  be  conveyed  to  the  sea,  its  home. 

A  man  could  be  conveyed  through  the  air,  but  could  not  of 
himself  fly  like  a  bird,  etc. 

Elementals  and  men  combined,  produce  evil  effects,  at  times. 
The  law  of  the  elemental  is  that  it  shall  obey  the  commands  of 
men.  It  is  glad  to  serve  men,  in  their  bodies,  and  after  they 
are  freed  by  death.  Its  reward  is  in  the  service,  and  in  being 
allowed  to  imitate  the  thoughts  and  acts  of  its  chosen  charge. 

Attraction  and  repulsion  are  not  law's  of  all  life,  and  all  matter 
is  life  in  a  positively  negative  degree,  or  in  a  proper  state  or 
attunement,  for  growth  and  development  of  individuals,  of 
animal,  and  vegetable  forms,  that  perfect  the  geography  of  each 
sphere. 

As  you  believe  or  think,  I  might  say  that  the  elementals  belong 
to  the  sub-conscious  portion  of  the  God  mind,  and  have  in  them¬ 
selves  only  the  sub-conscious  power  to  think  and  act.  Attempt 


202 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


to  teac.i  a  child  of  three  the  principles  of  Geometry,  and  you 
will  realize  in  some  degree  the  limitations  I  feel  in  trying  to  give 
to  yourself,  a  but  slightly  developed  medium,  an  idea  of  that 
which  is  really  outside  of  your  comprehension. 

Suppose  I  should  describe  the  first  three  spheres  like  to  ocean, 
earth  and  air.  A  fish  to  live  on  the  earth  must  have  water  about 
it  artificially  for  its  comfort.  A  man  might  go  down  to  the  fish, 
but  he  must  have  air  about  him  for  his  comfort.  A  bird  might 
come  to  the  earth  to  stay  with  the  man,  but  to  fly  in  the  air  is 
possible,  while  to  the  man  it  is  not,  etc.  An  imaginary  large 
bird  could  carry  a  man  from  one  point  to  another,  but  it  must 
be  sure  and  deposit  the  man  on  the  ground,  or  in  his  native 
element,  or  the  man  would  be,  if  left  on  a  high  tree,  helpless 
and  in  trouble. 

In  Jonsoh’s  case  of  mediumship,  he  is  not  revitalized  by  his 
guides,  and  his  spirit  cannot  of  itself  go  to  or  gain  this  vital  force. 

I  may  become  like  to  your  wife.  May,  as  like  to  yourself,  but 
neither  of  you  can  become  like  to  me.  The  power  to  do  so  is 
in  each  of  you,  but  it  is  not  yet  developed,  or  grown  to  your 
power  to  use. 

God  is  good.  All  of  the  wonders  of  nature  and  spirit  are  good, 
and  wonderful  to  the  last  degree,  in  utility  and  economy.  We 
are  all  parts  of  the  whole  of  God,  as  plants  are  parts  of  the 
landscape,  but  we  each  retain  our  own  individuality,  and  we  are 
protected  and  aided  in  our  growths,  and  development.  To  die  is 
not  calamity,  but  to  be  cut  off  by  death’s  law  from  loved  faces, 
and  soul  communion,  is  a  calamity  indeed ;  but  you  who  feel 
the  withering  of  this  great  woe,  are  in  a  way  assisted  along  the 
barren  way,  of  these  your  after  years,  by  belief  and  hope  in 
continuity  of  life  beyond  the  grave.  I  believe  that  this  trouble 
is  to  you  as  the  furnace  in  making  the  steel.  It  has  shaped  you 
into  a  proper  instrument,  to  fulfill  God’s  great  purpose,  and  aid 
many  to  see  even  in  slight  degree,  the  smile  of  hope  through  the 
blackness  of  their  woe.  I  like  the  name,  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind,’’  and  am  told  that  good  will  follow  in  the  wake  that  this 
your  book  will  make.  I  love  you  and  your  work,  and  everywhere 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


203 


I  can  I  will  aid  you  to  aid  your  fellow-man.  I  think  the  name 
Human-Psychic-Telephone  is  good.  She  is  in  truth  an  instrument 
of  that  kind.  She  is  peculiar  to  herself  in  her  line  of  power  to  do. 
I  use  her  power  to  write,  and  so  communicate  with  you.  She  is 
to  me  an  instrument,  just  as  the  pen  is  to  her  an  instrument. 
I  cannot  do  without  her  aid,  if  I  could  I  truly  would,  for  I  knew 
you  were  aware  of  this  her  power  to  write.  I  have  at  different 
times,  and  in  different  places,  used  such  instruments  as  were  at 
hand.  I  will  continue  so  to  do.  I  will  also  be  with  you,  your 
life-time  through,  and  after  death  has  set  you  free,  I  still  your 
guardian  will  be,  to  aid  you  to  your  harmony  and  to  your  future 
power  to  do,  in  after-life,  allotted  you. 

Question  21,  J.  S.  K.  I  appreciate  most  fully  this  opportunity 
which  you  have  granted  me,  and  thank  you  heartily  for  all  that 
you,  as  spirit  guide  and  aider,  have  done  for  me  during  the  many 
years  of  your  relationship  to  me,  but  now  and  more  especially  I 
thank  you  as  a  teacher,  for  the  knowledge  you  have  imparted 
regarding  mind  and  thought  and  soul,  and  spirit  and  their 
attributes,  as  well  as  your  special  promises  yet  to  be  fulfilled ; 
and  for  your  permission  to  reproduce  your  views,  as  here  and 
now  expressed,  as  well  as  others  of  deep  interest  which  are  to 
follow  to  complete  this  special  chapter.  I  therefore  accept  the 
privilege  you  afford  me  of  further  questioning,  and  will  ask  you 
to  enlighten  me  regarding  some  psychical  phenomena.  Is  it  a 
transient  body  that  is  seen  when  you  appear  at  a  seance ;  and  is 
it  made  up  for  that  occasion  for  purpose  of  recognition  only? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  It  is  so  done  by  spirit  aids  that  come 
at  wish  of  me.  They  come  from  the  levitation  Kingdom,  or 
from  the  hall  of  record  here.  They  see  the  picture  we  wish  to 
show,  and  aid  us  so  to  do.  At  Jonson’s  they  draw  strength  from 
you,  but  with  this  one  (the  automatic  instrument)  vitality  is 
brought  directly  from  below,  and  in  the  end  she’s  rested  usually, 
instead  of  feeling  tiredness  and  woe.  Much  there  is  indeed,  my 
beloved  one,  that  you  do  not  yet  know,  and  when  I  try  to  teach 
you,  I  feel  at  loss  indeed,  for  I  must  see  the  view  of  you,  and 
limited  my  answer  true  must  be. 


204 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Question  22,  J.  S.  K.  Do  you  and  the  other  guides,  as  well  as 
May,  May  Donna,  and  each  of  the  loved  ones  who  materialize 
and  speak  with  me,  have  any  part  in  producing  individual  transient 
forms  ? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  We  have  a  part  in  large  degree.  It  is 
as  if  a  ball  of  living  clay  was  there,  and  it  could  sense  us  as  free 
spirits,  and  instantly  shape  itself  like  living  car  which  we  propel 
with  ease  as  w'e  would  use  a  medium.  It  has  not  expressed 
personality.  It  simply  makes  itself  to  us  a  useful  part,  and  we 
need  to  do  nothing  with  the  art  of  body-making  or  retaining. 
We  simply  enter  it,  as  easily  as  you  would  enter  an  elevator,  or 
moving  car,  and  instantly  we  see  and  touch,  and  are  ourselves 
again,  but  when  we  disappear,  another  spirit  comes  the  same 
clay  to  serve  its  purpose  in  its  way. 

Question  23,  J.  S.  K.  From  what  material  is  the  transient 
body  formed? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  It  is  produced  from  several  substances 
at  hand,  which  I  cannot  describe,  or  make  you  understand.  Like 
to  radium,  it  is  co-existent  in  common  substances,  and  yet  when 
free  is  powerful  in  a  large  degree.  So  in  all  matter  is  balanced 
force  in  silent  state,  this  is  unbalanced  in  a  proper  way  to  make 
an  image  that  will  stay  upon  the  consciousness  of  any  human 
present.  It  is  your  radiation  that  we  take,  and  like  an  artesian 
well,  you  are  in  ordinary  life,  but  we  with  pump  exhaust  your 
pond  of  power,  which  later  is  developed  for  your  use.  It  does 
no  especial  harm  to  you,  but  aids  us  greatly  in  the  work  we  do. 

Question  24,  J.  S.  K.  I  presume  to  think  the  atoms  of  the 
transient  body  are  all  physical,  but  separate  and  invisible.  If  that 
be  right  how  are  they  summoned  into  regularity,  and  apportioned 
each  its  appropriate  place? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  In  the  case  of  atoms  you  err,  for  atoms 
are  not  physical,  but  are  instead  spirit  or  mind,  that  from  its 
choice  is  negative  or  moves  not  in  the  least  degree,  just  as  you 
in  a  small  degree  would  say,  I  will  not  move  at  all,  but  let  another 
rule  me  all.  This  negative  force  is  not  negative,  instead  it  is 
positive  beyond  all  positive  degree,  by  that  I  mean  it  is  a  posi- 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


205 


lively  negative  force,  that  has  for  its  beginning,  minds  completed 
by  perfected  growth.  If  they  are  ruled,  they  must  be  ruled  by 
living  men,  not  by  discarnate  spirits.  So  in  case  of  materialization 
and  de-materialization.  These  individuals  of  levitations  land 
obedient  are  to  some  one  individual  in  life  like  Jonson,  by  some 
decision  or  decree  they  say  we  will  this  individual  obey,  and  will 
allow  a  slight  digression  of  a  natural  law  to  be,  so  they  record 
it  and  agree,  and  then  if  so  is  best,  you  know  the  rest  and  out 
of  matter,  matter  comes  like  to  the  smoke  upon  a  winter’s  day. 
It  is  not  as  you  seem  to  think.  This  negative  power  to  serve  is 
capable  of  changing  itself  to  a  tube  or  wall  so  that  vibrations 
cannot  go  at  all,  or  may  proceed  in  peace  along  the  way.  The 
minds  I  refer  to,  are  astronomy  powers,  or  developed  mentalities 
perfected  by  ages  of  teaching  and  experience,  they  serve  man’s 
best  development  but  they  think  slowly.  If  a  medium  is  entranced 
it  is  one  of  these  that  requires  it.  It  is  a  complicated  study,  but 
ultimate  good  for  the  whole,  and  for  each  individual  as  well,  is 
their  view  and  intention.  If  the  stove,  chairs  and  piano  would 
persist  in  dematerializing  or  moving  from  your  touch  chaotic 
state  would  be  resultant  in  a. large  degree,  but  law  transgressed 
alone  permits  such  things  to  be,  and  when  it  is  allowed,  a  bonds¬ 
man  strong  is  with  such  action  everywhere,  to  observe  it  in  small 
detail,  and  keep  all  harm  away  if  possible  to  stay.  Now  in  the 
case  of  Jonson  to  be  able  to  cause  forms  to  show  is  his  power, 
but  he  is  exhausted  and  depleted  there  by  it  so  the  balance  of 
power  advises  and  suggests  that  he  cease  to  use  this  peculiar, 
but  not  to  his  best  development  necessary  gift.  What  he  will 
later  do  I  cannot  tell,  but  he  must  for  the  present  cease  if  he 
would  after  live  in  peace. 

Question  25,  J.  S.  K.  I  have  other  questions  which  relate  to 
various  matters  of  interest  to  me,  which  I  may  at  a  future  time 
ask  you,  but  at  present  date  I  will  only  ask  a  few,  to  which  I 
would  like  response  by  you.  What  was  it  that  you  taught  or 
said,  that  created  enmity  and  incensed  the  mob  to  take  your  life 
at  Alexandria? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  As  I  look  back  at  life  of  me,  lighted  by 


206 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


knowledge  here  attained,  I  wonder  at  the  zeal  I  felt,  in  teaching 
those  about  me  to  believe  in  things  that  men,  now  Christians  say 
are  true,  but  then  were  altogether  new,  to  those  not  looking  from 
my  view.  But  one  must  judge  each  mortal  from  his  education, 
and  environments,  as  well  as  from  his  own  mortal  view  of  right. 
I  was  born  and  bred  in  Alexandria,  in  the  atmosphere  of  Art 
and  Culture,  of  the  highest  kind  attainable  in  my  time.  In  the 
museum  or  university  presided  over  by  my  father  Theon,  I  was 
taught  to  believe  in  the  wonders  and  beauties  of  nature,  as  revealed 
to  men  through  astronomy,  aided  by  mathematics.  After,  when  I 
went  to  Athens,  I  became  proficient  in  the  plotonic  philosophy,  or 
rather  the  philosophy  as  taught  by  Plotinus  and  others.  Plotonic 
teachings  were  to  me  acceptable  in  some  degree  only,  so  I  became 
of  the  New  Platonics,  or  Neoplatonic  teachers,  like  the  beliefs 
of  modern  men.  Each  great  teacher,  inculcating  in  his  or  her 
work  new,  or  personal  thoughts,  became  a  practically  new  teacher, 
of  a  new  thought.  I  believed  that  spirits  could  return.  I  was 
not  afraid  to  boldly  affirm,  that  the  spirits  could  supply  themselves 
with  bodies,  and  even  commix  with  frail  mortality.  This  was  my 
belief  and  came  from  my  being  gifted  in  large  degree  with 
mediumistic  power  to  see  and  hear,  and  therefore  know,  that  this 
philosophy  was  so.  I  read  the  works  of  all  the  thinkers  of  that 
early  Christian  day.  I  wished  to  discourage  the  belief  of  a 
personal  God,  and  other  forms  as  then  taught  by  the  early 
Archbishops.  Cyril,  an  Archbishop  of  the  Christian  Church  in 
Alexandria,  in  his  zeal  to  carry  out  the  work  begun  by  his  uncle 
Theophilus,  who  because  of  his  cruelties  was  said  to  be  in  a 
compact  with  the  devil,  left  no  stone  unturned  in  his  efforts  to 
remove  all  teachers  or  leaders  of  other  creeds.  My  popularity 
among  the  students  and  people  aroused  his  jealousy,  and  so  he 
persecuted  and  murdered  me.  It  was  a  severe  and  cruel  age, 
but  it  was  the  same  spirit  that  has  caused  more  modern  people 
to  persecute,  and  execute  the  witches,  or  those  gifted  with  peculiar 
or  psychic  powers.  To  be  severe  and  cruel  was  the  custom  of 
the  age  in  which  I  lived. 

Question  26,  J.  S.  K.  Did  you  teach  a  new  creed  ? 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


207 


Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  did  not  teach  a  new  creed,  but  rather 
a  modification  or  blending  of  those  teachings  that  had  been  given 
forth  by  the  thinkers  who  preceded  me. 

Question  27,  J.  S.  K.  Did  you  secure  disciples  from  among 
the  people  who  had  been  opposed  to  you? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  had  great  influence  over  the  students 
of  the  Museum  or  University  of  Alexandria,  where  my  father 
Theon  was  teacher  of  mathematics,  and  later  I  was  teacher  of 
sciences,  and  philosophy.  Many  new  ideas  I  had  gained  while 
at  Athens. 

Question  28,  J.  S.  K.  Did  you  know  the  contents  of  Kingsley’s 
book  named  after  you? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  I  know  of  the  work  of  fiction  you  refer 
to,  as  Kingsley’s  book.  I  do  not  know  its  exact  contents,  but 
have  been  told  it  is  good,  and  has  done  good  for  the  human  race. 

Question  29,  J.  S.  K.  Will  you  please  define  for  me  the 
foundation  stones  of  your  philosophy? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  The  foundation  stones  of  my  philosophy 
were  that  God  was  unknowable,  and  unapproachable,  and  that 
from  him  proceeded  by  emanations  or  growth  subordinate  indi¬ 
viduals  or  personalities. 

Question  30,  J.  S.  K  .  Is  the  special  work  in  which  I  am 
engaged  designed  by  you,  and  is  it  endorsed  by  the  spirit  world 
as  a  good  to  be,  to  all  humanity,  and  why  am  I  selected  to  be 
your  medium? 

Answer  by  Hypatia.  The  special  work  in  which  you  are 
engaged  is  to  my  taste,  I  alone  did  not  design  it,  but  since  my 
earth  life,  I  have  sent  out  a  continuous  soul  or  spirit  prayer  for 
means  to  be  given  to  me,  of  being  useful  to  the  living  humans. 
You  are  the  one  I  have  selected  in  this  age,  because  old  credal 
prejudices,  to  many  advanced  thinkers  are  inadequate  to  their 
soul  needs;  and  to  you  I  have  now  reached  from  my  advanced 
spirit  plane,  and  am  endeavoring  to  use  you  as  an  instrument 
to  aid  me  in  supplying  this  earth  soul  need.  I  have  planned  to 
use  you,  as  an  instrument,  to  aid  me  and  others  like  to  me,  in 
our  present  attempt  to  supply  this  soul  hunger,  or  thirst  after 


208 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


knowledge,  that  may  in  truth  be  demonstrated  to  their  personal 
cognizance.  Your  work  is  endorsed  by  me,  and  by  the  spirit 
world  about  me,  as  a  stepping  stone  on  the  way  to  more  advanced 
thought,  and  knowledge.  It  is,  I  believe,  needed  in  this  age. 
You  were  selected  because  you  are  capable,  or  adapted  to  the 
work  of  compiling  and  collecting,  and  presenting  the  truth,  as 
gained  by  you  along  the  way  of  your  experiences.  You  have 
proper  personal  education,  and  position  to  command  the  respect 
of  those  who  may  differ  from  your  judgments,  and  conclusions. 
Even  the  thorns  of  criticism  will  blossom  beautiful  indeed  in  this 
life  you  are  in,  and  in  your  after-life,  and  like  a  crown  they  will 
uplift,  not  bear  you  down. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 


[Note:  —  I  wish  here  to  make  an  explanation,  which  may 
prevent  misapprehension  by  the  reader,  in  the  interpretation  of 
certain  statements  found  in  the  pages  of  the  present  chapter,  viz. : 
The  chapter  was  not  included  here  until  much  of  what  fallows 
it  was  completed ;  as  it  was  my  intention  to  assign  it  to  another 
publication ;  while  the  reason  for  the  change  is,  that  I  desired  my 
interview  with  the  philosophers  to  immediately  follow  my  inter¬ 
view  with  Hypatia  —  herself  a  philosopher  of  that  age — upon 
the  same  subjects;  and  because  it  was  due  to  her  intercession, 
in  response  to  my  wish,  that  I  was  fortunate  enough  to  secure  so 
valued  an  opportunity.  J.  S.  K.] 

TO  this  psychological  session  I  brought  with  me  several 
previously  written  questions,  sufficient  to  secure  from 
the  alleged  philosophers  their  present  view  on  the  mind 
and  soul  questions,  should  Hypatia  succeed  in  securing  their 
presence. 

With  the  questions  in  my  pocket,  and  with  grave  doubts  in  my 
mind  as  to  whether  I  could  or  would  have  so  great  a  privilege, 
as  to  secure  their  views,  expressed  as  of  their  present  knowledge; 
and  as  the  first  two  days  of  my  sojourn  were  to  be  occupied 
as  I  had  already  arranged,  I  asked  Hypatia  if  my  wish  could 
be  gratified  on  the  third  day,  by  devoting  it  chiefly  to  the  purpose 
mentioned. 

Hypatia  in  that  gracious  manner  characteristic  of  her  every 
effort  to  meet  my  wish,  wrote  in  reply  to  my  question,  through 
the  automatic  hand,  “I  hope  to  have  them  here,  and  will  do  my 
best  to  accomplish  it.” 

When  the  day  and  hour  selected  had  arrived,  with  the  psychic 
seated  at  the  table,  I  asked  the  question  which  I  had  then  in 
mind. 

J.  S.  K.  Hypatia,  do  the  philosophers  know  anything  regarding 
what  is  contained  in  my  writings  as  to  mind,  soul  and  spirit; 
or  the  other  features  of  the  book  I  am  compiling? 

209 


210 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Hypatia.  Aristotle  is  in  interest  near  to  me,  and  well  informed 
regarding  the  nature  of  your  work ;  and  he  doubtless  communi¬ 
cated  with  the  others,  since  I  requested  them  to  be  present  here. 

J.  S.  K.  Hypatia,  if  Socrates,  Plato  and  Aristotle  are  all  here, 
I  am  indeed  most  grateful  to  them;  and  hope  they  will  forgive 
me,  if  I  questions  ask  each  one  of  them,  during  this  extended 
session,  for  I  have  strong  mental  hunger,  or  “wish  to  know.” 
The  questions  I  will  read  aloud. 

Hypatia.  All  three  are  here.  ’Tis  best  to  so  proceed  as  you 
suggest,  and  we  will  write  for  you. 

Before  I  had  further  time  for  remark  or  for  question,  the 
psychic  began  to  automatically  write  rapidly  without  stop,  the 
following  response  from  Plato,  viz.: 

Plato.  We  see  as  you  now  do,  and  in  regard  to  soul,  we  too 
believe  it  is  the  whole,  and  body  but  machinery,  which  is  result 
of  soul  degree.  One  may  be  tall  or  short,  or  thin  or  stout  to 
some  degree,  no  matter  what  his  thoughts  may  be.  I,  Plato,  was 
a  man  of  power,  and  named  as  broad  in  shoulders  so,  but  I  was 
narrow  in  my  thoughts  as  now  I  see  and  know ;  and  as  you  ask 
me  I  will  do.  I  do  not  think  that  I  am  cognizant  of  all  your 
book;  but  we  are  present  here  today  to  hear  and  see,  and  also 
say  an  answer  back  to  you,  if  you  request  us  so  to  do.  I  idealized 
the  human  life,  and  made  the  soul  of  man  to  be  superior,  or  of 
lasting  quality;  but  what  it  was,  and  where  it  went,  I  could  not 
tell  as  well  as  you ;  and  so  I  listen  here  today,  and  much  approve 
of  what  to  you  is  plain.  The  working  of  the  lower  brain  was 
to  me  not  apparent,  so  I  could  not  teach  what  I  had  not  the  power 
to  know.  We  did  not  know  the  power  of  one  living  mind  over 
another  in  my  day  (hypnotic).  That  study  is  as  modern  new, 
and  is  there  well  described  by  you.  I  had  in  mind  a  wish  to 
know,  and  followed  with  my  teacher  Socrates,  along  each  line 
of  knowledge  or  surmise ;  and  what  we  gained  thereby  was  aided 
by  the  souls  exalted  near,  but  this  I  did  not  know  was  so. 

When  Socrates  was  lifted  from  his  clay,  I  looked  and  wept 
beside  his  bier;  and  prayed  as  you,  that  he  might  be  allowed  to 
follow  through  my  life  with  me.  I  sometimes  saw  him  in  a 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


211 


dream  like  sleep ;  but  he  was  gone,  and  I  alone  to  weep.  It 
has  been  so  for  years  —  two  thousand  now  —  and  you  are  one 
to  make  it  plain  by  arguments,  not  faith  and  hope  alone.  I 
thought  and  wished  it  true,  but  could  not  prove  as  you.  If  I 
could  have  proved  even  one  step,  I  should  have  been  proud  indeed. 
I  had  a  pupil  Aristotle,  he  was  teacher  of  a  king  called  great. 
I  taught  the  King  of  Syracuse,  but  he  rewarded  me  by  slavery; 
and  yet  I  led  the  thought  of  men,  so  they  by  ransom  set  me  free 
to  found  a  University.  So  you  may  arouse  arguments,  and  if 
’tis  so,  ’twill  lead  to  glory,  and  not  to  future  woe.  All  that  you 
do  is ‘brought  to  me  by  those  \vho  love  me  honestly ;  and  I  approve 
of  all  you  do  to  prove  what  I  now  know  is  true.  I  did  not  come 
direct  to  you,  but  learned  from  Aristotle,  what  one  visited  by 
hinx  had  done  for  men,  to  prove  that  spirits  come  again.  If  I 
have  failed  before,  I  will  not  do  so  any  more;  but  will  stand 
ever  ready  here  to  aid  you,  till  you’re  in  the  bier.  I’ll  answer 
the  questions  you  ask. 

J.  S.  K.  What  would  be  your  present  definition  of  soul?  Of 
what  composed?  Have  you  knowledge  of  Reincarnation? 

Plato.  My  present  definition  of  soul  is,  that  which  occupies 
the  body  as  a  whole  in  life,  and  at  death  departs  a  whole  to  be, 
of  what  the  mortal  is  and  was,  and  is  to  be,  a  living  “himself” 
in  capacity  to  use  what  God’s  laws  bring  to  hand,  for  his  best 
powers  to  command.  In  earth  life,  or  physical  body  life,  five 
senses  seem  to  be  sufficient  for  his  need ;  and  out  of  matter  living 
cells  are  taken,  to  replace  the  wear  and  tear  of  the  anatomy, 
which  like  to  a  machinery  generates  forces  needed  to  bring 
harmony  of  soul  till  he  by  death  is  from  the  body  free ;  then 
added  senses  come  to  wakened  state,  and  what  he  needs  in 
forces  wait  for  his  command ;  and  higher  thinkers  teach  him 
how  to  rightly  understand,  or  use  what  is  his  own,  as  in  earth  life 
’tis  also  true,  as  was  the  work  of  me,  or  you.  Hunger  of  soul 
exists,  this  is  twofold  as  I  might  say,  hunger  for  love  or  com¬ 
panionship  ;  and  hunger  for  entertainment  and  knowledge. 
Appetites,  normal  ones,  are  voice  of  God,  or  spirit  which  is  part 


212 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  God,  but  Ego  made  complete  in  individuality,  after  a  mortal 
birth  as  I  now  see. 

To  undergo  reincarnation  is  not  true  from  literal  or  mortal 
view ;  but  minds  deprived  of  proper  growth  in  mortal  state,  will 
be  allowed,  or  forced  to  undergo  a  second  living  like  to  human 
life,  so  they  in  soul  to  proper  state  may  grow.  We  all  assist  in 
work  of  love  for  minds  of  mortal  plan,  just  as  you  work  sad 
and  alone,  to  aid  your  fellow-men,  who  feel  your  woe,  but  do 
not  consolation  know.  Ideas  are  expressed  and  proved  in  this 
new  work  called  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind,”  and  it  will  be 
of  use  to  men,  where  simply  ideality  is  useless  quite  entirely. 

[The  psychic’s  mother  here  intimated  that  “lunch  will  be  ready, 
when  it  suits  your  convenience.”] 

Plato  here  interjected,  through  the  psychic’s  hand,  this  remark, 
“I  will  be  here,  if  you  must  g'o,  you  will  not  thus  disturb  me.” 

[To  the  psychic  —  at  the  moment  objectively  normal  —  the 
author  suggested  a  few  minutes  more,  and  then  it  would  be 
1  P.  M.,  which  might  be  followed  by  a  recess  for  our  spirit 
friends  and  ourselves,  of  one  hour,  which  was  adopted.] 

J.  S.  K.  Have  you  present  belief  in  immortality,  or  have  you 
knowledge  that  a  human  ego  has  immortal  life? 

Pl.a,to.  We  have  not  knowledge  of  tlie  Deity.  As  individual 
I  have  been  allowed  to  meet  men  of  exalted  state,  who  tell  me 
they  are  children  j’et,  and  never  need  to  wait  for  something  new, 
so  I  believe  in  immortality  as  part  of  God  or  Deity  begun.  I  will 
be  so,  no  matter  where  or  how  I  go ;  and  injury  but  sets  me  back, 
as  lightning  jars  the  trunk  of  tree,  but  makes  the  root  more 
strong  to  be,  for  future  growth.  So  I  observe  and  believe  that 
when  a  being  does  his  best,  a  spirit  beautiful  and  good,  will  plan 
and  guide  the  rest. 

J.  S.  K.  Can  }*ou  define  or  demonstrate  your  human  personality, 
to  a  critical  psychologist  of  the  present  day? 

Pl.\to.  I  would  describe  it  as  a  thing  which  has  the  power  to 
hold  past  knowledge ;  and  has  power  to  gain  and  grow  by  added 
knowing  gained  from  sources  new,  no  matter  what  forms  it 
passes  through. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


213 


[The  writing  stopped  at  1  P.  M.,  we  went  and  had  lunch,  and 
were  back  in  our  seats  at  2  P.  M.,  when  the  psychic’s  hand  again 
began  to  write.  J.  S.  K.] 

Plato  continuing.  I  will  add  further  that  it  is  of  form  or 
characteristics,  uniform  or  typical  of  its  own  individuality, 
through  all  these  its  powers  to  do;  and  all  the  changes  it  passes 
through  tend  to,  and  do  cause  it  to  grow,  and  improve,  and 
become  God-like,  or  more  to  its  ideality  of  what  perfected  man 
should  be.  Beneath  a  rod  of  beauty,  of  comparison,  we  spirits 
free  are  here  allowed  to  grow  and  be,  and  as  we  improve,  we 
become  radiant;  and  as  we  retrograde  we  become  darkened  in 
degree. 

J.  S.  K.  Are  my  views  as  recorded  in  my  book  such  as  you 
can  endorse  as  true  ? 

Plato.  I  can  endorse  them  all  as  true,  and  wonder  at  your 
power  to  do  so  well,  regarding  what  is  hard  to  tell ;  or  what  is 
to  the  language  of  all  men,  hard  to  encompass  true,  so  reader 
shall  think  as  you  do. 

J.  S.  K.  Had  you  in  human  life  knowledge  of,  or  the  power 
to  control  the  mind  of  a  fellow  human  by  suggestion  to  the 
subjective  mind,  which  is  now  known  as  hypnotic  power  of 
suggestion ;  by  which  means  you  now  convey  your  thoughts  to 
me  through  the  subjective  mind  of  the  psychic,  who  conforms 
to  your  dictation  to  her  subjective  mind,  to  transcribe  in  writing, 
what  do  you  wish  me  to  know? 

Plato.  I  had  knowledge  of  it  in  a  superficial  way;  but  did 
not  know  its  source,  or  limitations;  or  whether  it  was  natural, 
or  morbid.  No  one  of  my  time  that  I  knew,  had  thought  of  it 
as  false  or  true. 

J.  S.  K.  Will  you  kindly  explain  for  the  benefit  of  readers 
who  may  wish  to  know,  how  it  is  possible  for  me  to  have  attune- 
ment  with  yourself,  or  with  others  in  spirit  life,  such  as  the 
example  I  gave  elsewhere  regarding  my  corresponding  friend 
Wm.  T.  Stead,  then  in  spirit  life,  calling  my  attention  to  the 
interesting  fact  that  he  sensed  my  thoughts  toward  him  at  a 
particular  time,  which  was  mentioned? 


214 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Plato.  An  attunement  is  a  track  unseen,  over  which  thoughts 
and  answerings  may  flow,  like  to  communication  to  and  fro ;  and 
if  no  spirit  sense  in  you  awakened  be,  we  use  your  intuition  key ; 
or  that  which  leads  a  horse  to  drink,  a  wiser  power  than  ’tis  to 
think.  Wise  in  this  sense  means  more  perfect  or  exact;  or  less 
to  be  questioned  than  is  judgment  born  of  reason,  which  starts 
from  the  limited  premises  of  human  power  to  sense. 

[A  break  or  interruption  here  occurs  to  the  writing  of  Plato, 
and  its  place  is  taken  by  the  following  in  explanation.  “It  is  the 
wish  of  the  discarnate  spirits  mentioned  on  your  tablet  page, 
especially  to  do  the  very  things  you  ask  them  to ;  and  so  when  you 
requested  it  to  be,  he,  Wm.  T.  Stead,  brought  to  bear  his  wish 
to  do ;  and  other  guides  assisted  him  to  be  able  to  thus  present 
to  you  the  fact  he  sensed  you ;  and  he  knew  your  wish  to  be  able 
to  thus  express  to  him,  this  truth” — .The  attunement,  between 
author  and  Wm.  T.  Stead.] 

J.  S.  K.  Does  the  evidence  presented  in  my  book  in  your  judg¬ 
ment  sustain  the  claim  I  make  regarding  ,  1st,  Continuity  of  Life; 
2nd,  Spirit  Return ;  and  3rd,  Spirit  Communion  ? 

Plato.  It  is  my  opinion  that  the  evidence  compiled  for  your 
book,  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind,”  is  very  conclusive,  because 
it  takes  up  normal  mentality  from  your  developed  student  view; 
and  distinctly  tells  where  its  powers  end ;  and  so  produces  the 
necessity  of  belief,  that  added  suggestion  must  be  given  to  produce 
the  effects  observed  by  you,  and  nearly  always  others  present 
with  you.  In  your  belief  you  are  candid  and  honest,  and  men 
like  to  you,  will  follow  your  reasonings  with  interest  in  every 
step ;  and  the  how  you  come  to  your  conclusions  is  so  well 
explained,  that  they  will  wish  to  be  able  to  do,  as  you  in  printing 
say,  that  you  have  had  the  power  to  do.  Doubting  Thomases 
will  ever  be,  or  those  who  do  not  wish  to  know;  but  honest  think¬ 
ers  lost  in  mist  of  facts,  mixed  in  with  theory,  will  be  assisted 
by  the  steps  you  make ;  and  what  you  teach  will  aid  them  to  go 
forward,  and  proceed  with  care,  and  learn  much  of  the  “Over 
There.” 

J.  S.  K.  Were  not  the  various  dogmas,  theories  and  plans 
of  all  the  philosophers  speculative  and  idealistic? 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


215 


Plato.  In  our  time  we  had  superstitions  of  peculiar  types  to 
combat,  and  idealism  was  the  basis  of  most  of  my  philosophy. 
Gods,  heroes  and  men  with  mythological  powers,  were  to  the 
generality  of  men  like  to  realities  at  then. 

J.  S.  K.  Is  not  the  soul  the  nucleus  of  the  origin  of  each 
human  activity  of  whatsoever  sort? 

Plato.  Oh  yes,  a  soul  or  ego,  like  to  a  cell  of  a  human  body, 
selects  its  food  from  what  comes  within  its  reach;  and  morbid 
or  unwholesome  food  may  be  taken,  when  it  is  deprived  of  what 
is  wholesome  to  its  state  of  best  development. 

J.  S.  K.  If  you  know  what  my  views  and  thoughts  are  regard¬ 
ing  mind,  soul,  and  spirit,  have  you  also  knowledge  of  the  other 
consecutive  contents  of  the  book  as  it  is  prepared  for  general 
readers  ? 

Plato.  I  have  been  informed  of  the  contents  of  your  book 
by  Aristotle,  as  I  before  have  said.  Hypatia’s  interest  in  my 
teachings,  and  in  the  teachings  of  my  pupil  Aristotle,  have  caused 
us  all  to  be  in  touch  to  her  capacity  to  come  and  go,  and  let 
us  know. 

J.  S.  K.  I  try  to  make  clear  to  reader  that  the  dual  mind 
functions  for  both  soul  and  body  in  the  incarnate  state  in  the 
human;  and  at  the  parting  called  death,  the  mind  still  functions 
for  the  soul  ego;  and  new  senses,  attributes  and  powers  are 
manifest.  Can  you,  friend  Plato,  confirm  this  from  your  own 
experiences,  as  a  solution  of  this  special  psychic  problem? 

Plato.  It  is  difficult  to  define  and  picture  intangible  things, 
but  the  functions  of  each  portion  of  mind  observable  by  man, 
are  in  your  book  well  defined,  it  seems  to  me.  The  mind~and 
soul  are  like  to  the  growing  tree,  the  body  more  like  the  pot  in 
which  it  grows,  but  that  does  not  of  necessity  combat  or  change 
your  definition.  It  is  the  same  in  appearance,  as  what  the  body 
would  be  if  perfect.  Scars,  illness  and  evil  fate  to  body  do  not 
change  appearance  of  the  soul.  The  soul  is  copied  by  matter  in 
the  growth  of  body. 

J.  S.  K.  Have  you  knowledge  and  experience  regarding  the 
flight  of  the  incarnate  Ego.  My  Ego  has  visited  relatives  and 


216 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


friends  at  varying  distances,  and  in  various  directions,  and  has 
been  seen  and  heard  by  them ;  but  I  do  not  wish  it  so  unless  by 
my  own  desire,  except  it  be  for  some  wise  or  important  purpose, 
and  conducted  by  exalted  spirits  connected  with  my  band. 

Plato.  Your  body  is  pervaded  by  a  thing  etherial,  and  of 
certain  habit,  and  of  certain  size,  call  it  what  you  will,  it  is  the 
habitation  of  the  man,  when  death  of  body  comes.  This  body 
may  go  forth,  as  you  so  did,  by  other  ego  in  attunement  —  like 
to  you  —  being  in  space  it  occupied  in  your  anatomy.  This  thing 
I  speak  of  is  not  divisible,  it  cannot  be  abbreviated  or  changed 
in  its  appearance,  or  capacity,  but  it  may  be  limited  in  its  freedom. 

You  yourself,  with  the  body  were,  and  spoke  to  friend  as  you 
now  speak  to  her  (the  psychic),  and  while  Marconi-like  conditions 
existed  between  yourself  and  your  anatomy  you  were  at  ease 
even  though  free,  and  loving  spirit  hands  like  bands  produced 
this  power  to  do  in  you,  and  aided  the  friend  to  be  able  to  hear, 
and  able  to  see.  It  pleases  me,  whatever  you  have  wish  to  do,  I, 
Plato,  am  with  other  two,  and  all  of  us  wish  to  serve  you.  (See 
Hypatia’s  explanation  elsewhere.) 

[Note: — ^The  communications  from  Aristotle  follow  those 
from  Plato.  They  are  the  first  of  extended  length  which  I  have 
received  from  him.] 

Several  years  ago  a  control  speaking  through  the  vocal  organs 
of  a  psychic  while  entranced  claimed  to  be  Aristotle ;  but  only 
a  sentence  or  two  were  spoken  at  the  time,  and  really  no  con¬ 
versation  was  entered  into  to  confirm  an  opinion,  and  hence  no 
evidence  to  my  mind  was  presented  which  would  establish  any 
view. 

Again  through  another  trance  psychic,  a  year  or  two  later,  in 
Hamilton,  Canada,  while  entranced,  some  intelligence  utilized  the 
vocal  organs  to  give  expression  to  thoughts  which  were  philosophic 
in  character  and  claimed  to  be  Aristotle,  and  spoke  a  sentence 
or  two,  as  in  the  former  instance.  A  third  time,  a  call  was  made 
upon  me  in  the  trumpet  seance  held  in  New  York  State,  only  a 
short  time  ago.  The  medium  who  held  the  seance  to  which  I 
refer  was  under  the  control  of  Gray  Feather,  the  strong  Indian 


DAJVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


217 


guide  and  control  of  J.  B.  Jonson,  of  Ohio,  who  took  the  place 
on  two  occasions  of  the  psychic’s  own  guide.  Then  for  the  first 
time,  Aristotle,  as  he  alleged  himself  to  be,  conversed  with  me 
by  the  aid  of  a  trumpet,  the  date  being  the  fourth  of  August, 
1912,  and  his  speech  conveyed  the  impression  that  his  words 
were  those  of  a  wise  man ;  and  one  of  much  experience ;  and 
were  of  a  character  that  made  them  seem  similar  to  those  which 
found  expression  through  two  other  psychics,  who  were  in  the 
trance  state.  As  I  felt  deeply  interested  in  this  personality,  I  in¬ 
vited  him  to  meet  me  at  the  home  of  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone 
that  same  afternoon,  which  he  did ;  and  there  did  write  for  me 
beginning  at  the  hour  of  4.15  P.  M.  and  what  next  follows  is 
what  he  wrote  through  the  automatic  hand,  viz. : 

Aristotle.  I,  a  philosopher  of  long  ago,  worked  on  the  problem 
of  the  power  of  thought,  and  how  the  mind  divine,  and  mind  of 
man,  could  be  so  placed  in  unison  by  certain  laws  of  behavior 
and  speech,  and  so  your  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind”  appeals 
to  me.  I  had  to  shape  each  dart  of  thought,  as  from  my  heart 
it  flew,  and  I  am  interested  in  this  careful  work  you  do.  This 
carving  out  of  stepping  stones  up  cliffs  of  known  degree,  that 
lead  to  flights  above  the  stars,  it  much  appeals  to  me ;  and  so  as 
a  philosopher,  I  came  and  spoke  to  you  in  trumpet  seance  (a  con¬ 
firmation)  ;  and  I  will  aid  you  all  I  can  in  this  work  that  you  do. 

The  present  interview  will  do  more  than  confirm  what  had 
preceded  it,  and  goes  far  to  establish  the  reputation,  and  the 
identity  of  this  famous  philosopher. 

I  may  add  to  the  foregoing,  that  my  questions  all  were  read 
aloud  by  myself,  while  responses  came  immediately,  and  were 
there  and  then  recorded,  in  my  note-book,  by  the  hand  of  my 
psychic,  using  my  fountain  pen ;  and  when  written  and  finished, 
were  handed  to  me  without  copy,  change  or  additions  while  under 
my  sight  from  first  to  last.  Though  the  questions  were  prepared 
by  me,  they  were  offered  viva  voce  or  read  from  the  page  on  which 
they  were  written,  and  the  answers  came  without  hesitation  or 
delay,  and  were  as  written  by  my  own  fountain  pen,  in  the 


218 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


psychic’s  hand ;  which  pen  has  come  to  be  almost  a  psychic  pen, 
for  it  has  had  its  guidance  by  hundreds  of  different  forces,  or 
separate  intelligences. 

But  to  return  to  the  communications.  After  the  assurance  that 
Aristotle  was  present  and  ready  to  write,  I  proceeded  with  my 
questioning. 

J.  S.  K.  Aristotle,  I  desire  to  know  your  views  upon  the 
subjects  I  embraced  in  the  chapters  on  mind  and  the  soul,  in  its 
present  and  future  state.  As  you  have  evinced  an  interest  in  my 
researches,  and  my  proposed  publications,  as  shown  by  your 
communications,  audibly  and  also  through  this  writing  psychic, 
I  feel  a  strong  desire  to  attune  myself  to  you  at  this  time,  and 
request  from  you  your  present  view,  regarding  these  selfsame 
subjects.  With  many  of  your  former  views  no  doubt  changed, 
as  have  my  own,  I  desire  to  learn  from  you  if  what  my  book 
presents  to  mortal  view  regarding  mind  and  soul  or  spirit  is  the 
truth,  as  you  now  know  it. 

Aristotle,  I  agree  with  you  that  what  you  are  at  birth  you 
are  at  every  future  state,  with  modified  degree  of  fate.  A  violet 
in  nature  never  becomes  a  lily  or  a  rose ;  and  men  are  varied  like 
to  flowers,  but  each  a  one  alone,  or  white,  or  pink  or  blue,  as 
he  was  from  the  seed,  but  strong  or  frail,  by  circumstance  of 
fate.  Set  out  a  rose,  and  rose  ’twill  stay,  and  when  a  man’s  soul 
blossoms  in  the  light  of  God,  his  spirit  beautified  by  added  priv¬ 
ileges,  is  still  his  spirit  only  and  alone. 

J,  S.  K.  Do  you  agree  with  what  I  claim  that  the  discarnate 
spirit  or  soul  of  each  human  presents  the  same  personality,  that 
formerly  existed  in  the  incarnate  state? 

Aristotle.  My  present  view  is  like  to  you.  The  garment  body 
as  a  man  is  cast  aside  at  death ;  and  like  to  butterfly,  the  soul 
set  free,  but  uses  what  it  had  in  body  crysalistic  state,  but  for 
its  growth  it  had  no  wait. 

J.  S.  K.  What  would  be  your  present  definition  of  soul? 

Aristotle.  My  definition  of  soul,  if  well  expressed,  would 
mean  the  whole.  The  body,  if  one  could  speak  true,  is  but  its 
tenement  of  clay,  in  which  imprisoned  for  a  day,  it  holds  itself 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


219 


alone  complete,  till  called  or  wafted  to  God’s  throne  it  comes  into 
its  very  own,  or  comes  into  its  power  to  be  complete  in  powers 
men  cannot  see  or  sense  no  matter  how  they  try.  Yourself  is 
taken  to  the  sky,  and  what  remains  is  nought  to  you.  As  to  the 
body  of  yourself,  at  three,  it  is  now  gone  entirely,  and  nothing 
but  your  memory  retains  its  form,  or  semblance.  So  ’tis  with 
life  here  through  which  you  go.  Your  acts  are  all  recorded  where 
they  may  be  found  by  you ;  but  you  have  entered  into  state  that's 
altogether  new,  and  body  has  no  part  with  you. 

J.  S.  K.  Kindly  make  clear  to  my  perception,  what,  in  your 
view,  discarnate  spirit  or  soul  is  composed  of. 

Aristotle.  It  is  composed  of  substances  to  spirits  only  tangible, 
to  man  material  ’tis  nothingness.  If  you  were  able  to  communicate 
with  me,  by  your  latent  spirit  faculty,  I  should  not  have  so  done, 
or  needed  to ;  but  as  it  was  material  I  had  to  be,  to  come  to  earth 
and  talk  to  thee ;  and  so  to  do.  I  take  a  transient  body  like  to 
you,  made  from  substances  of  small  degree,  that  for  the  purpose 
moving  rapidly,  they  impress  man  as  a  reality.  Matter  does  not 
exist,  by  the  way;  but  is  as  scientists  believe  and  know,  made 
up  of  Eons  plus  and  minus  so  they  seem  to  be  to  man  as  a 
reality. 

J.  S.  K.  Have  you  present  belief  in  or  actual  knowledge  of 
Immortality? 

Aristotle.  I  have  present  knowledge  that  it  is  true,  that  I 
am  part  of  God  complete,  and  may  use  matter  as  a  means  to  be 
able  to  so  communicate  with  you,  and  aid  you  in  the  work  you 
do,  which  is  to  teach  the  present  age  to  realize  that  it  has  reached 
a  stage  of  flood  tide  of  experience;  and  you  show  this  flood  or 
current  where  it  is  to  go,  to  reach  its  wish  to  sense  or  know 
that  it  may  find  its  living  dead,  after  their  powers  of  earth 
have  fled. 

J.  S.  K.  Is  re-incamation  of  spirit  a  fact  recognized  by  you, 
or  is  the  word  misapplied,  or  misunderstood? 

Aristotle.  Reincarnation  is  a  fact  recognized  by  me  from  my 
standpoint.  Undeveloped  discarnate  spirits  are  replaced  in  earth 
life  experiences  of  health  and  good,  until  they  grow  to  learn  and 


220 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


know.  But  into  babes  born  on  the  earth  they  never  go,  and  it 
was  not  intended  it  should  be  so  understood ;  but  literal  minds  so 
believed  from  teaching  true  given  by  ancient  psychics  to  the  men 
who  listened  near.- 

Reincarnation  is  not  allowable  in  fact,  but  souls  discarnate  are 
allowed  to  act  as  aids  or  helps  to  men,  who  may  not  ever  be 
informed  that  this  is  true,  that  spirits  may  return  to  you. 

J.  S.  K.  How  can  you  demonstrate  or  define  your  human 
personality  to  me,  or  to  any  critical  psychologist  of  the  present 
day? 

Aristotle.  My  personality  is  made  up  of  my  inherited  traits, 
added  to  by  the  results  of  impressions  made  upon  my  power  to 
sense,  by  my  senses  five,  while  in  body,  and  added  ones  here, 
for  instance,  as  a  babe  I  discovered  light,  and  learned  to  know 
it  through  my  organ  eye,  but  what  I  saw  in  color  or  degree, 
would  not  be  just  what  any  other  eye  would  see.  Each  picturing 
of  my  imagining  is  my  very  own,  for  it  is  made  of  what  I  saw 
or  heard,  or  sensed;  and  as  this  premise  was  a  different  one 
from  every  other  one  in  life,  each  picture  so  created  would  be 
mine  alone.  These  are  retained  in  record,  and  to  me  they  are  my 
worn  geography,  in  which  I  trace  the  way  I  learned  to  know  my 
Master’s  face. 

J.  S.  K.  I  understand,  through  Hypatia,  that  you  are  cognizant 
of  much,  if  not  all  that  I  have  written  for  the  book  I  am  now 
compiling.  Are  my  views  as  there  recorded  such  as  you  can 
endorse  as  true? 

Aristotle.  I  can  endorse  as  true,  that  spirits  may  return  to 
you,  for  I  am  one  of  those  who  do.  I  also  endorse  your  way 
of  seemingly  agreeing  with  a  possible  argument,  and  then  show¬ 
ing  its  weakness  later  in  what  you  say  or  prove.  “Dawn  of  the 
Awakened  Mind’’  is  good  from  many  points  of  view.  It  is  imper¬ 
sonal.  It  treats  of  facts  you  have  experienced ;  of  disappointments 
you  have  been  through ;  and  of  consequent  joy  in  revelations  new, 
and  by  added  observers  certified  to  as  true. 

J.  S.  K.  Does  the  evidence  in  my  book,  in  your  judgment, 
sustain  the  claim  I  make  regarding  1st,  Continuity,  2nd,  Spirit 
Return,  and  3rd,  Spirit  Communion? 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


221 


Aristotle.  The  evidence  of  Indian  girl  (spirit  of  Pansy),  who, 
as  you  say,  described  location  of  pictures  in  your  home  of  which 
you  were  not  aware,  but  later  comprehended  and  confirmed  as 
true.  Your  symbology  is  good,  starting  proof,  afterwards  ful¬ 
fillment  of  promises  through  different  psychics  having  no  acquain¬ 
tance  or  possible  collusion  is  to  me  a  very  positive  proof.  The 
disappointment  of  the  man  Stead  in  not  being  able  to  use  the 
ones  you  hoped  he  would,  and  yet  used  others  strange  to  you. 
The  change  of  heart  or  mind  in  girl  after  messages  were  cor¬ 
roborated.  The  rose  experience,  interesting  and  convincing, 
because  of  success  after  long  lapse  of  time.  Your  wife’s  fulfill¬ 
ment  of  ante-mortem  agreement  is  also  strikingly  convincing. 

J.  S.  K.  Were  not  the  various  dogmas,  theories  and  plans  of 
all  the  philosophers  speculative? 

Aristotle.  All  of  the  dogmas  were  speculative,  but  many  had 
origin  in  some  form  of  supposed  revelation  either  real  or  imag¬ 
ery.  Myths  were  means  of  picturing  desirable  results  from  good 
acts  to  a  primitive  savage  people. 

J.  S.  K.  In  my  human  life  I  have  experienced  great  change 
in  view  from  youth  to  advanced  adult  life ;  and  so  I  presume 
that  your  centuries  of  experience  in  spirit  spheres  enables  you  to 
discern  changes  in  character  and  number  quite  a  few  in  your 
belief  of  then,  your  human  life,  and  what  now  you  know. 

Aristotle.  We  do  not  cast  aside  the  rudiments  of  our  arith¬ 
metic;  so  with  my  teachings,  I  but  attained  the  rudiments  of 
what  to  you  in  wholeness  or  completeness  have  proved  true. 

I  grew  with  added  knowledge  to  see  the  errors  or  incomplete¬ 
ness  of  my  human  theory;  and  yet  to  men  in  my  time,  it  was 
new  and  grand,  and  difficult  for  them  to  understand. 

J.  S.  K.  Is  not  mind  a  necessity  for  the  functioning  of  soul, 
and  like  to  a  highly  skilled  workman,  qualified  to  solve  difficult 
problems  of  construction  or  performance;  whether  on  the  one 
hand  it  be  reasoning  out  or  developing  human  attributes;  or  on 
the  other  classifying  the  memory  records,  and  the  culture  and 
development  of  the  Divine  attributes,  or  those  attuned  to  the 
“Over-soul?” 


222 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Aristotle.  Mind  and  reason  are  necessities  to  the  soul,  but 
mind  is  like  an  organ,  and  reason  what  it  does.  Reason  is  a 
function  of  the  mind,  or  mentality.  Instinct  and  moral  impulse 
are  from  the  soul.  I  entertained  theories  founded  upon  very 
limited  knowledge.  As  my  knowledge  increased  my  belief  was 
changed,  so  that  I  now  believe  as  you,  that  what  is  man  is  God, 
and  so  is  indestructible ;  but  it  may  as  it  advances  become  above 
or  without  the  necessity  of  fixed  apparent  form.  A  body  is  a 
means  of  holding  and  withholding  and  as  spirit  becomes  God¬ 
like,  it  loses  the  need  of  restraint  and  protection.  It  is  true  to 
this  extent,  I  remain  myself  and  on  record  in  my  memory,  and 
recorded  in  fact  are  the  feature  and  form  I  had  in  human  life, 
and  in  after  spirit  state.  If  I  materialize  in  any  sphere.  I’ll  be 
as  I  was  when  I  was  native  there ;  but  when  the  need  of  doing 
ends,  I  leave  my  body  and  proceed  to  be,  as  to  her  now  a  soul 
set  free. 

[Note:  —  At  5  P.  M.  the  interview  with  Aristotle  ended;  and 
in  view  of  all  the  subjects  dealt  with,  and  the  time  consumed,  I 
feel  it  to  be  wise  to  leave  to  Socrates  the  field,  to  speak  upon 
such  matters  as  his  wisdom  and  my  requirements  would  suggest 
to  him  as  of  most  advantage,  in  the  object  sought  by  this  special 
session.  J.  S.  K.] 

Next  following  is  the  deliverance  of  Socrates. 

Socrates.  As  you  wish  to  do  so  do  I.  Socrates  I  am,  and 
also  here,  and  if  when  you’re  away  a  new  thought  comes  to  you 
to  ask  a  question  regarding  it,  write  it,  and  we  will  answer 
automatically.  We  all  shall  linger  with  your  band,  to- aid  you 
in  the  work  you’ve  planned,  and  hemlock  tea  will  not  be  given 
to  thee  as  reward  of  what  you  do  in  sacrifice  to  men.  I  also 
know  that  spirits  come  again,  and  Plato  is  to  me  disciple  dear, 
and  what  he  wrote  to  you,  and  what  you  read  to  him  I  heard, 
for  I  was  near  to  him,  and  also  near  to  you. 

I’ll  try  to  aid  your  wish  to  be  a  speaker  eloquent,  for  to  me 
it  was  like  a  necessity.  I  walked  upon  the  shore  with  pebbles 
in  my  mouth,  to  be  a  means  of  teaching  my  delinquent  tongue 
to  understand  it  must  obey  my  least  command.  Yet  when  I  won 
the  hemlock  tea  was  all  that  fate  awarded  me.  Yes,  I  still  live. 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


223 


and  here  today  I  have  my  influence ;  and  the  words  I  say  show 
thought  and  power.  ’Twas  not  to  me  a  known  fact  that  a  soul 
could  come  and  like  to  brother  help  me  through ;  but  I  had  faith 
and  hope,  and  love  of  all  humanity,  and  I  was  helped  to  bear 
the  load,  and  aid  humanity  out  of  the  rut  of  fixed  belief  in 
idolatry  and  superstition’s  fear,  into  a  way  to  see  more  clear; 
and  later  pupils  taught  it  so,  and  like  to  river  in  its  flow  it 
washed  away  in  large  degree  the  followers  or  beliefs  in  the 
idolatry  of  period  then ;  and  made  a  way  for  souls  of  men  to 
grow,  though  what  I  taught  I  did  not  know. 

Otelleo  (an  Egyptian  of  the  long  ago  and  member  of  my 
spirit  band).  Sift  out  the  gold  some  men  would  do,  but  it  is 
not  the  case  with  you.  You  sift  the  dross  away  from  what  you 
wrote,  and  all  is  gold,  that  you  allow  to  stay.  Like  to  a  crown 
of  gold  buried  for  ages  in  the  halls  of'time,  dust  gathered  clings 
to  it,  and  you  have  made  its  wonders  beautiful  and  true,  and  it 
will  prove  a  crown  to  you. 

Precious  indeed  it  is,  and  we  have  led  you  forward  carefully 
to  this  its  nearly  completed  state ;  and  when  sufficient  time  is 
passed,  no  longer  wait  but  put  it  through,  for  we  in  thoughts 
are  guiding  you,  and  lighting  up  your  veil  of  care,  till  you  can 
see  the  one  is  there.  You  have  selected  well  and  true,  and  good 
will  be  the  completion  of  the  task  for  thee.  I  am  Otelleo  as  you 
believe. 


CHAPTER  XXV 


ONLY  five  short  months  have  gone,  since  the  November 
series  of  1911 ;  and  I  return  wdth  increased  earnestness 
and  zeal  to  prosecute  the  study  of  the  wonderful  occult 
problems,  at  a  Jonson  seance  in  Toledo.  Truly  impressive  and 
important  are  the  demonstrations  of  such  a  seance.  They  mark 
the  possibilities,  and  develop  the  certainties  of  actual  meeting  of 
representatives  of  two  realms  of  existence  —  the  earthly  and  the 
spiritual. 

When  I  remember  that  over  twenty  years  ago,  a  female  babe 
was  born  to  my  then  living  wife  and  me,  but  passed  away  at 
birth  to  spirit  realms,  to  be  from  care  and  trouble  free  —  and 
few  there  be  but  would  agree,  that  it  had  gone  to  heaven.  I  did 
not  then  know,  that  we  should  meet  again  on  earth,  but  I  do 
know  now. 

The  mother.  May,  was  always  of  the  desire  and  strong  belief, 
that  she  would  some  day,  when  she  had  passed  to  spirit  life,  find 
her  angej  daughter. 

For  the  past  few  years  she  had  joined  me  in  this  important 
work  and  earnest  study,  and  with  me  visited  during  passing 
years,  this  wonderful  medium  Jonson,  time  after  time;  and  often 
hoped  as  years  rolled  on  to  see  her  angel  baby.  On  September 
29,  1911,  May  passed  out  of  earth  life  into  spirit  realms.  In 
forty-five  days  after  this  change,  she  returned  in  form,  and 
brought  along  with  her  our  angel  daughter,  on  the  13th,  15th 
and  16th  of  November,  1911;  and  it  was  in  this  same  home, 
where  she  and  I  had  before  investigated,  as  will  be  found  recorded 
in  previous  chapters. 

The  first  seance  of  this  present  April  series,  1912,  which  I  was 
privileged  to  attend,  opened  as  a  public  one,  on  Thursday  night, 
the  11th  of  April. 

I  have  quite  often  there,  and  for  a  long  time  pursued  the 
avocation  of  a  critical  psychical  researcher;  and  not  alone  but 

224 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


225 


aided  by  my  then  mortal  wife,  and  by  an  officer  of  my  Society, 
and  also  by  other  members,  have  tried  and  tried  in  vain,  to 
account  by  every  known  hypothesis,  for  human-like  forms  and 
features,  dress,  voice  and  conversation ;  and  with  many  other 
natural  conditions,  thus  coming  into  close  communion  as  relatives 
and  friends ;  and  in  full  hearing  and  presence  of  all  sitters  for 
a  brief  time,  then  bidding  all  goodnight,  disappeared  as  physical 
through  their  anatomical  dissolution  at  the  floor,  some  time  to 
reappear.  The  only  satisfactory  hypothesis  that  can  account  for 
all  the  demonstrations  here,  is  the  one  which  I  have,  after  twenty 
years  of  earnest,  honesf,  critical  examination  and  careful  study, 
fully  adopted,  viz. :  the  Spiritual  Hypothesis.  I  found  when 
I  first  came  to  this  psychic  Jonson,  I  was  not  a  lone  investigator ; 
but  that  scores  of  others  from  far  and  near,  not  only  on  the 
American  continent,  but  individuals  from  other  countries  too, 
had  also  sought  him  out,  and  have  labored  incessantly  to  solve 
the  problem;  and  had  professed  belief  that  they  could,  each  in 
his  own  way,  and  according  to  his  ideal  hypothesis.  So  each 
as  he  arrived  proceeded  to  unlock  the  mystery,  with  his  own 
magic  key. 

Some  very  zealous  ones  would  proceed  to  seal  the  window, 
and  lock  and  seal  the  door;  and  be  prepared  for  all  designs  of 
trap  doors  and  panels,  and  armed  with  mosquito  netting;  and 
ready  were  for  all  confederates.  The  cabinet  was  in  an  upstair 
room,  within  it  naught  but  a  single  chair;  and  to  the  critic’s 
surprise,  the  medium  was  not  there,  but  sitting  with  the  sitters 
in  the  room  outside  the  cabinet,  in  full  view  during  the  seance ; 
or  while  a  part  thereof  was  held. 

The  whole  most  nearly  resembled  a  friendly  family  circle, 
ready  to  receive  the  callers  from  spirit  land ;  and  thus  time  was 
allowed  the  critics  to  examine  to  their  heart’s  content  the  cabinet 
or  room,  and  all  else.  When  they  were  through  and  seated, 
some  forms  came  by  the  way  of  the  floor,  just  in  front  of  their 
feet,  while  some  came  by  way  of  the  cabinet ;  and  others  from 
the  air  and  room ;  which  was  so  well  lighted  one  could  pick  their 
own  friends  out. 


226 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Just  here  I  wish  to  make  my  statement  plain,  that  of  the  expert 
gentlemen  above  alluded  to  was  one,  a  National  Government 
official  of  credit  and  renown,  possessed  of  well  known  skill  and 
high  integrity.  He  had  been  deputed  by  those  in  authority  to 
make  discovery  of  a  supposed  fraud;  but  was  soon  convinced 
of  the  realty  of  existence,  from  the  most  critical  observation 
and  investigation,  of  a  fact  and  truth  that  would  not  down,  by 
this  among  many  of  his  plans,  viz. :  taking  a  flashlight  picture 
of  an  apparition  standing  near,  he  found  it  was  a  spirit  relative, 
who  there  and  then  conversed  with  him,  and  proved  he  was  his 
spirit  brother;  and  had  a  transient  body  clothed,  and  conversed 
and  answered  questions,  and  proved  his  personality  to  his  living 
brother;  and  gave  testimony  quite  in  conformity  with  what  I 
have  also  given  in  previous  chapters ;  and  hence  hereafter  there 
will  be  no  necessity  for  further  reference  in  any  sense  to  pre¬ 
cautions  taken  l)y  expert  researchers  of  different  classes  in  the 
work  of  investigation  of  J.  B.  Jonson;  and  of  the  phenomena  of 
physical  character,  whenever  present  at  the  seance.  This  much 
and  more  is  commended  to  such  authorities  as  have  in  past  years 
expressed  their  conviction  that  Jonson’s  phenomena  were  not  of 
psychic  origin,  and  who  in  an  official  capacity,  and  with  authori¬ 
tative  tone,  invited  him  to  depart. 

After  many  years  of  close  observation  and  repeated  investiga¬ 
tions,  I  have  secured  much  evidence  —  only  a  portion  of  which 
I  give  in  the  psychic  series  of  my  publications  —  which  will,  I 
am  confident,  sustain  the  hypothesis  I  have  adopted ;  and  which 
I  believe  to  be  quite  strong  enough  to  baffle  and  successfully 
resist  the  ablest  criticism  that  can  be  brought  to  bear  against  it, 
by  the  best  qualified  detective,  conjurer,  scientist,  psychical 
researcher,  priest  or  man. 

A  Public  Jonson,  Seance  April  11th,  1912. 

The  medium  sat  on  a  chair  in  semi-circle  or  horse-shoe  form, 
along  with  all  the  sitters,  for  a  major  portion  of  the  seance. 
After  the  Lord’s  prayer  had  been  offered  in  unison,  and  the 
instrumental  music  began  the  harmonizing,  Jonson  was  seen  to 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


227 


be  in  a  trance  state  sitting.  Nearly  every  sitter  had  one  or  two 
callers,  and  there  were  two  apparently  advanced  spirit  guides, 
one  of  whom  was  Hypatia.  When  advanced  spirit  guides  appear, 
the  room  is  usually  lightened  up  by,  or  during  their  presence. 
There  were  twelve  sitters  in  the  room  besides  the  medium  Jonson, 
and  without  actual  count  I  would  estimate  there  were  some 
twenty  forms  presented. 

The  personality  that  has  frequently  communicated  with  me 
in  broken  English,  through  trumpets  and  through  the  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone  in  New  York  State,  as  will  appear  in  chap¬ 
ters  of  the  book  elsewhere,  proved  then,  and  in  that  way,  to 
have  an  interest  in  my  spirit  wife,  as  well  as  in  myself,  and 
showed  by  the  language  used,  that  he  was  the  selfsame  Indian 
personality,  so  well  and  widely  known  as  chief  control  of  J.  B. 
Jonson,  and  held  him  thus  throughout  the  entire  seance,  in  a 
trance  condition ;  and  did  not  respond  to  the  suggestion  of  Mrs. 
Jonson,  “Had  you  not  better  go  inside.  Gray  Feather?”  to  which 
he  quickly  replied,  “No,”  and  waited  till  after  he  brought  my 
wife  May,  who  had  with  her,  her  angel  daughter,  two  forms  at 
once ;  while  Jonson  was  still,  sitting  outside  of  the  cabinet  as  a  part 
of  the  circle.  After  I  held  my  conversation  with  the  two,  they 
dissolved  into  invisible  state  (which  is  reported  by  the  stenog¬ 
rapher),  and  as  I  returned  to  my  chair  in  the  circle,  he.  Gray 
Feather,  said,  “Me  now  go;  I  stay  till  I  bring  ’em  two  together 
for  you.  Big  Chief.” 

One  circumstance  out  of  the  ordinary  that  I  noticed,  and  in 
which  I  also  participated,  was  this.  I  sat  at  the  toe  of  the  horse¬ 
shoe  circle,  or  form  of  sitting  before  the  curtains  of  the  room 
called  cabinet,  and  at  a  point  fully  ten  feet  from  them,  and  I 
as  well  as  all  the  others,  had  some  candy  placed  in  my  mouth, 
by  the  deft  fingers  of  what  had  the  appearance  of  a  beautiful 
angel  form;  but  without  wings.  (Wings  are  symbolical,  but 
are  not  attached  to  bodies,  nor  made  use  of  in  any  other  way, 
so  my  spirit  guide  Hypatia  informs  me.)  This  angel  form  resorted 
to  a  humorous  tantalizing  manner  with  one  or  two,  who  sought 
to  have  her  place  the  candy  in  their  hand,  so  as  to  take  her  hand 


228 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


as  well.  This  visit  was  near  the  close;  but  she  first  appeared 
when  the  seance  opened  and  was  addressed  by  many  sitters 
familiar  with  her  appearance  as  being  “Viola,”  the  control  of 
Mrs.  Jonson,  who  is  a  trumpet  medium. 

The  Stenographer's  Report. 

Toledo,  11th  April  (evening),  1912. 

(A  report  of  conversations  had,  or  of  words  spoken,  in  indicated 
cases,  at  Jonson’s  Seance.) 

Gray  Feather:  (Who  is  alleged  to  speak  through  the  vocal 
organs  of  Mr.  J.  B.  Jonson)  ....  “Good  evening.” 

Members  of  the  Circle  All:  “Good  evening,  Gray  Feather.” 

Gray  Feather:  “Me  glad  to  see  big  medicine  man  here.  Me 
come  to  help  you  all  me  can.  Me  not  say  anything  just  right. 
Me  only  beginning.” 

Dr.  John  S.  King:  “It  is  all  right.  Gray  Feather,  and  I 
thank  you.” 

The  form  that  now  appears  is  that  of  the  alleged  spirit  guide 
of  Dr.  King.  She  was  pretty  and  was  clothed  in  white  flowing 
garments,  with  bright  bands  about  the  head,  and  sparkling  jewels 
around  her  arms  and  neck.  She  came  to  Dr.  King. 

Dr.  King:  “Hypatia,  have  you  May  with  you  tonight?” 

Hypatia:  “Yes,  she  is  here.” 

Dr.  King:  “Will  you  bring  her  to  speak  to  me?” 

Hypatia:  “Yes.”  ....  “I  want  you  to  press  on  and  finish 
your  book  while  you  have  your  strength.  There  are  many  other 
writings  yet  to  come.”  (She  then  disappeared  from  view.) 

Dr.  King:  “Come  again,  Hypatia.” 

(Two  other  forms  do  now  appear  who  are  announced  as  Mrs. 
King,  the  Doctor’s  wife,  and  his  daughter  May  Donna.) 

Mrs.  King  (patting  the  Doctor  on  his  left  shoulder) :  “Johnnie 
dear,  I  love  you ;  I  love  you  so.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  yes,  I  know  you  do,  and  I  am  so  glad  we  get 
a  chance  to  talk  again.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “Though  I  am  gone  from  earth  life,  yet  I  am  with 
you  all  the  time,  and  will  be  as  long  as  you  live.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


229 


Dr.  King:  “Yes,  yes,  loved  one.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “I  want  you  to  finish  your  book,  and  I  will  give 
you  all  the  information  that  you  want.  I  do  want  you  to  finish 
your  book.” 


(May  Donna  Not  in  Sight.) 

Dr.  King:  “Is  May  Donna  with  you  now?” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes.”  (And  then  May  Donna  appears.) 

May  Donna:  “Yes,  I  come  with  mamma.  We  stay  with  you 
all  we  can.” 

Dr.  King:  “Will  you  sing  for  us  tonight.  May  Donna?” 

May  Donna:  “I  don’t  know  whether  I  can  or  not,  but  will 
sing  for  you  before  you  leave  Toledo.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “I  love  you,  my  dear  one.  I  will  come  again.  May 
Donna  will  sing  for  you  before  you  leave  Toledo.” 

Dr.  King:  “Do  you  ever  see  Mabel,  and  your  sister,  is  she 
with  you?” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes,  I  see  Mabel  often.  They  are  both  with  me.” 

Dr.  King  :  “Will  you  try  and  get  a  message  for  me  from  Mabel 
for  her  father,  or  send  it  to  him?” 

Mrs.  King  (again  patting  the  Doctor  on  the  shoulder)  says, 
“I  love  you,  dear  one.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  I  know  you  do.” 

Mrs.  King:  “Good-bye.” 

Doctor:  “Good-bye,  dear.” 

[Note:  —  May  Donna  was  rather  below  medium  height — had 
golden  hair  and  curls  —  gold  bands  about  head  and  neck,  and 
arms  bare,  and  flowing  draperies  were  worn.] 

(A  form  now  appears  of  an  elderly  man  with  a  long,  heavy 
white  beard,  who  appeared  to  be  familiar  to  all  the  sitters,  and 
was  greeted  by  them  as  Dr.  Sharp,  who  is  the  alleged  control 
of  Mrs.  Wriedt.) 

Dr.  King:  “Good  evening.  Dr.  Sharp,  I’m  pleased  to  meet 
you  again.” 

Dr.  Sharp:  “I’m  glad  to  see  you  here.” 

Dr.  King:  “I’m  always  glad  to  see  and  meet  you.” 

Dr.  Sharp  :  “I  am  the  control  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  who  will  shortly 


230 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


cross  the  ocean  for  a  time,  and  I  will  not  soon  have  the  oppor¬ 
tunity  of  meeting  you  again.  I  wanted  to  call  and  say  that  the 
ones  who  have  passed  away  are  all  in  sympathy  with  your  work ; 
and  they  will  aid  you  all  the  time.” 

Dr.  King:  “I  thank  you  very  much.” 

Dr.  Sharp:  “Mrs.  King  is  a  member  of  my  band,  and  we  all 
work  for  you.” 

Dr.  King:  “I  understand.” 

Dr.  Sharp  :  “There  are  many  others  who  wish  to  appear  so 
I  must  go  now,”  and  he  then  disappeared  from  view. 

Gray  Feather:  “I  do  as  I  said:  I  bring  them  as  I  said  I 
would.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  Gray  Feather,  and  I  thank  you.” 

(Sgd.)  Minnie  Noble, 

Stenographer. 

State  of  Ohio,  Lucas  County,  U.  S. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  a  notary  public  in  and  for 
Lucas  County,  Ohio,  at  Toledo,  this  20th  day  of  April,  1912. 

(Sgd.)  A,  H.  Peiter, 
Notary  Public. 

[Note: — The  foregoing  appearance  of  Dr.  Sharp  is  one  of 
several  referred  to  in  the  attached  article,  which  appeared  in 
“Light,”  of  London,  England,  over  three  years  later.  J.  S.  K.] 

“THE  DIRECT  VOICE. 

A  Correlation. 

By  Vice-Admiral  Usborne  Moore.” 


(From  “Light,”  of  July  10,  1915.) 

“The  best  evidence  that  can  be  put  forward  of  the  existence 
and  identity  of  a  spirit  is  afforded  by  correlations,  i.  e.,  when  a 
spirit  is  able  to  manifest  in  one  place  and  then  tell  someone  in 
another  place,  through  another  medium,  where  he  has  been  and 
what  he  has  said  or  who  was  present.  When  this  takes  place 
in  two  different  countries  with  different  sitters  it  is  more  satis¬ 
factory  than  when  it  occurs  only  in  two  cities  of  the  same  country 
or  to  the  same  sitter.  I  have  experienced  these  correlations  very 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


231 


often  in  the  United  States  and  three  or  four  times  between  the 
United  States  and  England.  I  cannot,  however,  remember  ever 
having  such  a  clean-cut  or  convincing  example  as  that  which  I 
am  now  going  to  relate. 

In  December,  1914,  the  Editor  of  Light  received  a  letter  from 
Dr.  John  S.  King,  the  well-known  physician  and  psychic  investi¬ 
gator  in  Toronto,  Canada,  telling  him  that  “Dr.  Sharp,”  the 
spirit  guide,  or  “control,”  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  had  spoken  to  him 
and  others  at  certain  meetings  in  Toronto  in  November.  No  one 
knows  better  than  Dr.  King  the  rules  of  the  game.  He  does  not 
give  away  details ;  he  only  mentions  one  item  of  “Sharp’s”  talk 
—  that  he  had  first  visited  him  on  a  night  when  he  (Dr.  King) 
had  delivered  an  address,  when  he  “came  over  from  Dover.” 
Enclosed  in  the  letter  was  some  corroborative  evidence  of  one 
of  those  present  at  the  Toronto  seances  and  a  narrative,  also 
testified  to,  a  sitting  with  J.  B.  Jonson  at  Toledo,  Ohio,  on  which 
occasion  “Dr.  Sharp”  had  materialized  and  spoken  to  him.  The 
ladies  of  the  society  at  Toronto  (not  named)  were  much  inter¬ 
ested  and  had  asked  Dr.  King  to  write  to  England  and  ascertain 
if  “Dr.  Sharp”  would  corroborate  the  fact  of  his  having  visited 
their  circle ;  it  was  known  by  some  that  Mrs.  Wriedt  was  in 
England. 

The  Editor  waited  a  few  weeks  for  an  opportunity  of  seeing 
Mrs.  Wriedt.  None  having  occurred  he  wrote  to  me  on  February 
13th,  asking  if  I  would  investigate  the  matter.  I  received  this 
note,  enclosing  Dr.  King’s  letter,  at  breakfast  on  Sunday,  Febru¬ 
ary  14th,  at  my  club,  skimmed  over  it,  put  it  in  my  pocket,  and 
immediately  after  breakfast  went  to  Mrs.  Wriedt,  with  whom 
I  had  an  appointment  at  10.15.  I  did  not  mention  the  letters 
to  Mrs.  Wriedt. 

In  a  few  minutes  we  went  into  the  seance  room.  “Dr.  Sharp” 
soon  made  his  presence  known  and  the  following  colloquy  took 
place :  — 

Question  :  “Have  you  been  over  to  Canada  within  the  last 
three  months?” 

Answer ;  “Do  you  mean  to  ‘Paul’?”  (“Paul”  is  the  pseudonym 
of  a  Canadian  gentleman  who  has  contributed  under  that  name 
to  Light  and  who  is  known  to  me  and  “Dr.  Sharp.”) 

Q. :  “No,  somebody  else.” 

A.:  “I  went  to  Dr.  John  King  at  a  seance  where  there  was  a 
man-medium  for  the  voice.  I  wish  you  to  write  to  Dr.  King 
and  tell  him  from  me  that  medium  is  quite  genuine.  A  number 
of  people  were  there ;  among  them  Mrs.  Calvert  and  Mrs.  Sales 
—(spelling)  CALVERT.” 


232 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Q. :  “How  do  you  spell  ‘Sales’?” 

A.:  “I  forget.  We  went  over  a  bridge  to  get  to  the  seance- 
room.  It  was  Toronto,  Canada.  The  people  asked  after  Mrs. 
Wriedt  and  they  asked  after  you.  They  were  anxious  to  know 
if  it  was  me  speaking  and  wanted  this  to  be  confirmed  in  Eng¬ 
land.  Tell  Dr.  King  his  wife  spoke  to  him,  and  his  little  girl 
was  sitting  on  his  knee.” 

Q. :  “Can  you  give  the  date  ?” 

A.:  “No;  I  can’t  remember  dates.” 

Q. :  “Have  you  manifested  to  Dr.  King  through  J.  B.  Jonson 
at  Toledo?” 

A. :  “I  most  certainly  have,  and  through  other  mediums.  I  am 
very  pleased  to  meet  Dr.  King,  as  he  has  done  so  much  for  the 
cause.  I  wish  you  to  tell  Dr.  King  that  I  was  the  first  person 
to  introduce  phenomenal  mediumship  into  Canada.” 

(“Dr.  Sharp”  did  not  volunteer  anything  about  a  lecture  or 
an  address.) 

On  the  following  morning  I  had  an  opportunity  to  speak  to 
“Dr.  Sharp”  again.  I  said,  “The  paper  from  Toronto  said  that 
you  told  the  people  you  had  come  from  Dover.  What  is  the 
meaning  of  this?  Is  it  a  mistake?”  “No  mistake  at  all,”  he 
replied,  emphatically.  “I  was  at  Dover,  or  near  Dover,  in  a 
hospital  ship,  looking  after  the  wounded.  I  was  hovering  about 
between  Southampton,  Folkestone  and  Dover  in  the  hospital 
ships,  and  I  was  nearest  to  Dover  at  the  time  when  I  left  to  visit 
Canada.” 

All  this  was  sent  to  Dr.  King  at  Toronto,  and  in  course  of 
time  he  sent  me  an  account  of  his  seances.  One  of  them  was  on 
November  18th  when  “Dr.  Sharp”  informed  him  that  he  had 
come  over  for  the  first  time  from  Dover  on  the  night  of  Dr.  King’s 
address,  November  14th.  Dr.  King  goes  on  to  say: 

On  November  19,  1914,  a  seance  was  held  at  the  house  of 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Julian  Sales  in  Rosedale,  a  residential  part  of  the 
city,  by  the  same  medium,  and  twenty-six  sitters  were  present, 
including  Mrs.  Calvert.  In  order  to  go  to  this  seance  we  had 
to  cross  a  ravine,  with  a  roadway  below  at  the  distance  of  120  ft. 
/  inquired  after  Mrs.  Wriedt,  and  you  were  inquired  after  by 
Mrs.  Calvert  and,  I  think,  by  one  other.  (The  italics  are  mine.) 

Want  of  space  prevents  me  from  quoting  the  whole  of  Dr. 
King’s  interesting  letter  to  me,  but  he  mentions  that  his  deceased 
wife  did  speak  to  him  at  this  and  all  his  other  seances;  that  his 
daughter’s  presence  was  felt  by  him,  and  that  the  medium  was  a 
man-medium  for  the  direct  voice,  a  Mr.  Burroughs,  who  was 
placed  under  the  strictest  test  conditions. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


233 


I  have  never  been  to  Toronto.  Though  I  have  heard  of  him 
from  W.  T.  Stead  and  others,  I  have  not  yet  had  the  pleasure  of 
meeting  Dr.  King  and  I  do  not  recollect  ever  hearing  or  seeing 
the  name  of  Calvert,  in  connection  with  Canadian  atfairs,  before 
this  incident.  Mrs.  Wriedt  is  acquainted  with  Toronto  and  knows 
Dr.  King  and  Mrs.  Calvert,  but  she  did  not  hear  of  the  November 
seances  till  my  talk  with  “Dr.  Sharp”  on  February  14th ;  and, 
even  if  she  had,  it  would  not  account  for  “Dr.  Sharp’s”  loud  and 
clear  utterance  on  that  day  in  a  London  flat.  Nothing  is  more 
certain  than  that  “Dr.  Sharp,”  though  working  with  and  assisting 
Mrs.  Wriedt,  is  an  independent  personality.” 


CHAPTER  XXVI 


TO  me  this  seance  was  more  realistic  than  the  previous 
one,  as  I  seemed  to  see  and  hear  much  more  distinctly, 
than  in  the  first  or  public  seance,  though  not  so  well  as 
in  the  November  series.  When  my  spirit  wife  stood  at  the  open¬ 
ing  of  the  curtains,  in  the  doorway  of  the  room,  called  cabinet, 
I  took  my  stand  on  her  left  hand,  and  she  close  to  my  right 
shoulder;  and  I  saw  her  bring  our  spirit  daughter  close  to  her 
right  side.  I  standing  thus,  and  my  stenographer  opposite  to 
me,  enabled  her  to  write  by  the  light  on  the  opposite  wall,  and 
still,  not  prevent  its  slightly  shaded  or  diminished  rays  from  falling 
directly  on  presenting  forms.  'As  our  conversation  proceeded, 
and  seemed  so  true  to  life,  my  thoughts  reverted  to  the  falling 
clods  of  earth  upon  the  coffin  in  the  tomb,  containing  the  corrupt¬ 
ible  body ;  while  I  stood  in  the  living  presence  of  my  loved  one, 
who  had  put  on  the  transient  body  and  exhibited  her  living 
duplicate,  with  mirrored  likeness  of  features  and  familiar  voice, 
for  this  occasion ;  and  then  conversed  with  me,  as  in  the  home, 
to  prove  her  human  personality.  Her  form  all  could  see,  and 
her  voice  all  could  hear ;  and  having  lived  the  mortal  life,  she 
had  entered  upon  the  spiritual  one  and  yet  was  present  here  with 
me.  And  thus  I  find  that  life’s  experience,  as  matured  by  age, 
but  verifies  the  early  intuitions  of  my  boyhood  days.  (See  Chap¬ 
ter  I.) 

The  thought  does  now  present  most  strongly,  that  mortal  life 
is  short,  and  but  a  time  for  preparation  for  the  perfecting  one, 
known  as  the  immortal.  As  I  have  so  recently  dealt  with  her 
presentment  to  my  normal  senses,  as  found  in  Chapter  XX,  I 
will  conclude  this  introduction  to  the  Stenographer’s  report,  by 
directing  special  attention  to  a  very  strong  evidential  matter  of 
more  than  passing  moment.  While  I  stood  listening  to  her 
language,  and  viewing  her  placid  smile  of  satisfaction,  and  also 
speaking  with  my  daughter,  I  felt  May’s  fingers  pulling  at  my 

234 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


235 


scarf-pin;  and  her  eyes  directed  towards  it.  It  seemed  as  if  she 
were  trying  to  test  it,  whether  securely  retained  or  not,  for  last 
12th  of  November,  at  the  first  seance  with  Mrs.  Wriedt,  the 
trumpet  medium,  she  asked  me  most  decidedly  to  have  her  single 
diamond  ring  made  over  into  a  scarf  pin;  but  to  be  sure  and  use 
a  “safety”  pin  so  as  not  to  lose  it.  Again  at  the  fourth  seance 
of  the  series,  held  at  Jonson’s  on  the  15th  of  November,  1911  the 
stenographer  reported  what  here  follows,  viz.;  “The  diamond 
I  want  you,  as  soon  as  you  go  home,  to  have  set  as  a  scarf  pin. 
Be  carefid  and  zuatch  where  you  take  it,  do  you  understand? 
and  zvhen  you  wear  it,  it  will  make  it  easier  for  me  to  come 
near  to  you.”  (See  Chapter  XVI,  No.  11.)  These  facts  she  had 
retained  in  memory  {she  and  none  other)  and  now  sought  to 
satisfy  herself  by  reason,  and  by  examination,  of  the  security  or 
safety  of  the  pin’s  attachment.  When  she  found  it  all  secure, 
and  worn  as  she  had  requested,  she  looked  me  in  the  eyes  and 
said,  “You  used  to  be  so  proud  of  me,  when  I  was  wearing  it, 
and  so  I  am  most  glad  to  know  you  wear  it  now.” 

The  Stenographer's  Report. 

Toledo,  15th  April,  1912. 

(A  report  of  conversations  held,  or  of  words  spoken  in  indicated 
cases  at  Jonson  Seance.) 

Gray  Feather  (who  is  alleged  to  speak  through  the  vocal 
organs  of  Mr.  Jonson),  after  greeting  other  members  of  the 
circle,  says ;  “Me  glad  to  see  big  Medicine  Man  here.” 

Dr.  King  ;  “Thank  you.  Gray  Feather,  I’m  glad  to  be  here,  too.” 

Two  forms  now  appear  which  are  claimed  to  be  the  author’s 
spirit  wife  and  daughter. 

Mrs.  King;  “I  am  so  glad  to  see  you  tonight,  Johnnie  dear.” 

Dr.  King  ;  “My,  you  do  look  so  well ;  and  May  Donna,  you’re 
here,  too!” 

May  Donna;  “Yes,  papa.” 

Mrs.  King;  “It  seems  as  though - ” 

Dr.  King;  “Yes.” 

Mrs.  King:  “It  seems  as  though  my  love  grows  fonder  ever 


236 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


since  we  have  parted,  my  dear  Johnnie.  How  happy  we  will  be 
when  the  time  comes,  when  you  come  with  me.” 

Dr.  King  :  “I  have  missed  you.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “And,  my  dear  Johnnie,  I  want  you  to  have  every¬ 
thing  ready,  so  that  you  will  be  prepared  when  I  come  for  you.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  but  I  have  more  work  to  do  yet?” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes,  that  is  what  I  want  you  to  do.  I  love  you 
so  much.  You  were  so  good  to  me  through  my  sickness.” 

Dr.  King:  “No  more  than  I  ought  to  have  been.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “If  it  had  not  been  for  you  hanging  to  me,  I  never 
would  have  lived  so  long  as  I  did.” 

Dr.  King:  “I  know,  my  dear.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “Never  mind,  my  dear  Johnnie,  there  will  be  one 
time  when  we  will  meet,  never  more  to  part.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes.” 

Mrs.  King  :  “I  am  so  glad  you  have  come.  Doctor.” 

Dr.  King  :  “My  dear  one !  I  am  so  delighted  that  you  are  able 
to  come  so  soon  and  do  so  well.” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes,  I  want  you  to  give  me  strength.” 

Dr.  King  :  “Draw  all  the  strength  that  you  can  from  me.  Tell 
me  how  I  can  help  you.” 

(Here  she  noticed  pin  worn  by  Dr.  King  made  from  Mrs. 
King’s  ring.)  “You  used  to  be  so  proud  of  me  when  I  wore  it.” 

Dr.  King:  “That’s  right,  I  did.  You  will  come  again  before 
I  leave  Toledo,  won’t  you?” 

Mrs.  King  (turning  to  stenographer)  :  “And  I  want  to  thank 
you,  and  I  want  you  (looking  at  the  Doctor)  to  be  good  to  her. 
Do  all  you  can  for  everybody.  You  will  get  a  star  in  your  crown 
for  it,  my  dear  Johnnie.” 

[Note:  —  Before  leaving  the  Doctor  she  showed  her  warm 
affection  by  patting  him  gently  on  his  shoulder,  and  smoothing 
his  hair  with  her  fingers,  and  kissing  him  audibly,  twice  on  his 
right  cheek,  bade  him  good-bye,  and  disappeared  from  sight.] 

The  next  form  appearing  for  the  Doctor  claimed  to  be  that 
of  his  father. 

Dr.  King:  “I  am  so  glad  to  see  you,  father.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


237 


Stephen  King:  “I  have  tried  so  hard  to  talk  to  you,” 

Dr.  King:  “You  are  doing  fine  for  the  first  time.”  (First 
time  with  Jonson.) 

Stephen  King  :  “This  is  not  the  first  time  I  have  tried ;  this 
is  the  first  time  I  have  succeeded,  in  Jonson’s  seance.” 

Dr.  King  :  “I  am  so  proud  of  that.” 

Stephen  King  :  “It  gives  me  more  confidence.” 

Dr.  King  :  “You  will  come  again.” 

Stephen  King:  “I  will  try,” 

Dr.  King:  “Good-bye,  good-bye.” 

(Sgd.)  Minnie  Noble, 
Stenographer. 


State  of  Ohio,  Lucas  County,  U.  S. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  a  notary  public  in  and  for 
Lucas  County,  Ohio,  at  Toledo  this  20th  day  of  April,  1912. 

(Sgd.)  A.  H.  Peiter, 
Notary  Public. 


CHAPTER  XXVII 


JWAS  again  honored  as  in  November  last,  with  an  invitation 
from  the  “Sunflower  Class,”  and  hence  the  third  seance  of 
the  April  series  was  held  with  excellent  conditions.  The 
reason  for  this  courtesy,  as  last  time  explained,  was  due  to  the 
fact  of  my  being  an  officer  of  the  Canadian  Society  for  Psychical 
Research;  and  conditions  certainly  specially  favored  me  at  this 
time,  as  in  addition  to  my  own  guide  Hypatia,  my  spirit  wife  May, 
and  my  daughter,  there  were  also  my  spirit  mother  Margaret  P.; 
who  came  in  company  with  my  father  Stephen  King,  who  formerly 
lived  with  me  in  Toronto.  Besides  these  were  other  three,  a 
Mr.  Hill,  the  silent  boy,  and  a  third  one  called  himself  Mac¬ 
Donald,  and  two  unrecognized.  The  lighted  room  was  changed 
more  frequently,  in  the  degree  of  light,  than  previously,  and 
especially  was  it  observed  when  advanced  spirits  came,  the  more 
advanced  the  brighter  was  the  light,  while  some  required  the 
darker  stage  to  form  their  body  and  to  move  about.  All  seemed 
to  realize  a  fine  condition  of  harmony;  and  it  was  perhaps 
singular,  that  forms  did  appear  for  a  longer  time. 

The  more  important  evidential  matters  that  are  here  noted 
have  reference  to  the  promises  which  have  been  made  by  Hypatia 
and  my  wife  on  various  occasions  regarding  their  appearance 
with  me,  and  with  other  spirit  forms  upon  the  photographic  plates 
which  are  promised  in  the  not  distant  future.  This  was  again 
alluded  to  at  this  appearance,  and  a  strong  desire  expressed,  to 
make  it  all  a  grand  success  for  evidential  purposes. 

The  Stenographer’s  Report. 

Toledo,  16th  April,  1912. 

(A  report  of  conversations  held  or  of  words  spoken  in  indicated 
cases  at  Jonson’s  Seance.) 

Gray  Feather:  Greets  Gathering. 

Sitters:  “How  do  you  do.  Gray  Feather?” 

238 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


239 


Gray  Feather:  “Me  do  all  right.  Me  talk  to  big  Medicine 
Man.  Me  feel  bad  canoe  (Titanic)  went  down.  Me  talk  to  him 
(Stead)  many  times.  Me  often  been  at  his  wigwam.” 

(Refers  to  Titanic  disaster,  and  loss  of  Stead;  and  to  speaking 
through  trumpet  in  Stead’s  home.) 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  Gray  Feather,  that’s  right.” 

Gray  Feather:  “He  comes  over  where  I  am.  That  not  sad. 
There  is  much  work  to  do.  He  not  finish  work.  That  is  what  is 
sad.  It’s  bad  when  you  no  finish  what  you  do.” 

The  next  form  to  appear  announces  herself  as  Mrs.  King,  the 
Doctor’s  wife.  She  strokes  the  Doctor’s  hair,  and  kisses  him. 
He  gives  her  a  rose  and  asks  her  if  she  would  like  some  perfume 
which  he  had  previously  bought  for  her,  but  which  she  had  never 
received  owing  to  her  having  passed  away  at  that  time. 

Mrs.  King:  “Like  you  used  to  give  me?” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes.  Shall  I  bring  it  with  me?  I  have  it  here 
at  the  hotel.” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes . I  want  you  to  have  picture  of  me 

as  I  am,  at  Chicago.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes.” 

Mrs.  King:  “I  will  try  and  come  with  some  of  the  guides.” 

Dr.  King  here  asks  Mrs.  King  if  he  will  send  a  rose  to  May 
Donna,  and  she  replies :  “Let  her  come  and  get  it.  It  teaches 
her  to  larger  grow.  Every  time  that  you  come  it  seems  to  give 
new  force.” 

Two  forms  now  appear  who  claim  to  be  the  father  and  mother 
of  Dr.  King.  The  Doctor  does  not  at  first  recognize  his  father, 
who  keeps  plucking  at  his  coat-sleeve  to  attract  his  attention. 
Not  much  conversation  is  carried  on,  but  the  form  claiming  to 
be  the  Doctor’s  father  intimates  that  he  approves  of  the  work 
upon  which  the  Doctor  is  now  engaged,  and  the  Doctor  thanks 
him.  After  Mrs.  King  (Doctor’s  mother)  had  received  a  pink 
rose  from  the  Doctor  they  disappear  from  view. 

Here  a  form  appears  claiming  to  be  May  Donna,  the  Doctor’s 
daughter.  She  greets  the  Doctor  as  “Papa.” 

Dr.  King  :  “And  you  came  without  your  mother  tonight  ?” 

May  Donna:  “Yes.” 


240 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Dr.  King  presented  her  with  a  rose,  which  after  receiving  she 
holds  out  for  the  stenographer  to  smell. 

Dr.  King:  “Will  you  sing  for  us  tonight?” 

May  Donna:  “I  don’t  think  I  can  tonight,  papa.  I  will  try 
some  time,  but  not  tonight.  I  am  so  happy.  .  .  .  And  this 
little  girl  is  helping  you  so  much”  (turning  to  stenographer). 

Dr.  King  :  “I  was  going  to  ask  your  mamma  to  send  a  message 
to  Minnie,  the  housekeeper  who  looks  after  me.” 

May  Donna:  “Yes . Your  guide  Hypatia  is  here. 

Good-bye,”  and  she  disappears.  She  also  kissed  Dr.  King. 

Form  claiming  to  be  Dr.  King’s  guide  now  appears.  She  is 
dressed  in  white  garments,  low  neck  and  short  sleeves  (Grecian 
costume).  She  walks  out  to  the  middle  of  the  room,  courtesys 
to  all ;  and  retires  behind  the  curtains,  where  she  holds  conversa¬ 
tion  with  the  Doctor.  She  is  accompanied  by  a  somewhat  similar 
form,  who  also  claims  to  be  a  guide. 

Hypatia  :  “I  want  you  to  give  your  dear  wife  all  the  strength 
you  can.” 

Dr.  King  presents  Hypatia  with  rose  which  she  takes  away 
with  her. 

Hypatia:  “With  your  pictures  you  will  have  success.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  yes.” 

Hypatia:  “And  we  will  appear.” 

She  then  disappears  from  view. 

Form  now  appears  who  claims  to  be  MacDonald  by  name. 

MacDonald:  “The  good  book  that  you  are  writing,  I  am 
interested  in.  I  take  a  great  interest  in  all  that  is  good.  I  will 
help  you  all  that  I  can.  I  think  we  can  be  of  great  assistance.” 

A  form  now  comes  who,  when  asked  by  the  Doctor  if  he  is 
Hill,  a  person  known  to  the  Doctor  in  a  business  way,  says  he  is. 

Dr.  King:  “Well,  then  I  have  a  message  for  you.  Can  you 
take  it  and  read  it  and  let  me  have  your  answer  before  I  leave 
Toledo?”  (Hands  him  paper.) 

Mr.  Hill:  “I  will  try  if  possible.” 

In  all  there  were  eight  forms  who  appeared  for  the  Doctor, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


241 


one  of  whom  was  a  little  boy  who  was  not  recognized  by  him. 
(See  Chapters  XII,  XIV  and  XXXL) 

(Sgd.)  Minnie  Noble, 
Stenographer. 


State  of  Ohio,  Lucas  County,  U.  S. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  a  notary  public  in  and  for 
Lucas  County,  Ohio,  at  Toledo,  this  20th  day  of  April,  1912. 

(Sgd.)  A.  H.  Peiter, 
Notary  Public. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 


CONDITIONS  at  this,  the  fourth  and  last  seance  of  the 
April  series,  were  most  harmonious,  and  more  interesting 
and  important  than  any  which  preceded  it  among  the 
series.  There  were  several  guides  of  sitters  present,  and  features 
quite  a  few ;  and  all  of  the  dozen  sitters  seemed  to  have  evidence 
to  them  satisfactory.  Singing  by  my  daughter  was  predicted  on 
20th  February,  1912,  by  her  mother,  May,  in  a  written  message 
through  the  automatic  writing  psychic,  “Our  daughter  has  the 
power  of  song ;  and  I  am  told  that  she  will  later  come  to  you 
....  and  her  voice  to  you  will  be  apparent.”  May  Donna 
herself  likewise  promised  at  the  first  seance  of  the  present  series, 
held  on  the  evening  of  11th  of  April,  as  did  her  mother,  May,  that 
she  would  sing  for  me  before  I  would  leave  Toledo.  During  the 
present  seance,  stenographically  reported,  I  had  joy  and  satisfac¬ 
tion  in  the  fulfillment  of  May’s  prediction,  and  May  Donna’s 
promise,  when  the  latter  walked  out  alone  into  the  circle  from 
the  cabinet,  and  sang  most  sweetly  the  well-known  selection  which 
is  as  reported  by  the  stenographer. 

My  brother,  David  Williams  King,  also  wrote  through  the 
New  York  psychic  on  the  10th  of  April,  1912,  to  say:  “When 
you  are  there  at  Jonsons,  please  look  for  me,  and  father  Stephen 
too;’’  and  when  I  complied  with  the  suggestion,  I  again  found 
fulfillment  of  prediction,  and  this  zvas  what  my  brother,  standing 
in  his  transient  body,  said  to  me:  “It  is  with  great  pleasure  that 
I  return  to  you.  Death  does  not  end  all.’’ 

Though  father  was  present  with  my  brother  —  as  the  latter 
previously  predicted  he  would  be  —  he  consumed  no  time  in  speak¬ 
ing,  evidently  due,  as  after  realized,  to  the  power  being  required 
for  the  singing  by  my  daughter,  the  first  attempt  of  William  T. 
Stead  to  materialize,  and  other  features  for  other  sitters. 

As  to  May,  she  is  all  the  time  in  evidence,  as  anyone  who 
follows  her  throughout  the  various  recent  records,  can  satisfy 
their  curiosity  by  tracing. 


242 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


243 


Again  I  assert,  and  I  fear  no  successful  contradiction,  all  the 
foregoing  is  more  evidence,  presented  to  sustain  my  contention, 
that  continuity  is  a  fact,  and  Spirit  return  can  no  longer  be 
disputed;  and  that  those  who  can  see  and  hear,  can  do  as  I  have 
done,  and  for  themselves  be  as  well  convinced,  as  I  have  been. 

As  usual  I  have  only  retained  for  publication  my  own  cases, 
of  satisfactory  and  continued  evidential  matter,  all  ending  in  a 
most  wonderful  demonstration  of  spirit  power,  which,  though 
belonging  to  this  chapter,  will  be  made  a  continuance  of  the 
seance,  though  incorporated  in  Chapter  XXX,  in  connection  with 
the  associate  communications,  alleged  to  be  signed  and  sent  from 
W.  T.  Stead.  (See  Chapter  XXX,  which  is  wholly  devoted  to 
him.  See  also  Chapter  XXXI,  and  the  remaining  ones.)  This 
seance,  held  on  18th  April,  1912,  closed  with  this  sudden  mani¬ 
festation,  and  its  dissolution. 

The  Stenographer’s  Report. 

Toledo,  April  18,  1912. 

(A  report  of  conversations  held  or  of  words  spoken  in  indicated 
cases  at  Jonson’s  Seance.) 

Gray  Feather  (who  is  alleged  to  speak  through  Jonson’s  vocal 
organs),  greets  gathering. 

Circle:  “How  do  you  do.  Gray  Feather!’’ 

Form  reappears  claiming  to  be  that  of  Dr.  King’s  wife.  He  asks 
her  if  she  will  send  a  message  to  Minnie,  the  housekeeper  at  his 
home  in  Toronto.  She  responds: 

“Give  her  my  love  and  tell  her  how  I  have  come,  and  how  I 
have  talked,  dear  Johnnie.  Tell  her  not  to  worry  about  me,  that  I 
am  happy,  and  it  only  keeps  me  back  for  them  to  worry  about  me.” 

Here  Dr.  King  asks  the  form  presenting  if  she  can  take  his 
ring  and  return  it  to  him  in  the  near  future,  to  which  she  replies : 
“I  will  try.” 

Dr.  King:  “This  is  for  ‘Babe’,”  and  puts  ring  on  finger. 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes,  dear  Johnnie.” 

Dr.  King:  “I  didn’t  bring  the  perfume.  It  was  so  awkward,  I 
thought  I  would  let  you  take  my  ring.  Take  it  and  give  it  to  me 
another  time.” 


244 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Dr.  King:  “Is  May  Donna  going  to  sing  for  us  tonight?” 

Mrs.  King:  “Yes.  (Turning  to  stenographer)  Now  I  want 
you  to  get  every  word  of  it.  She  sings  beautifully.” 

Mrs.  King  (to  Dr.  King) :  “I  don’t  want  you  to  stay  away 
so  long.  I  want  you  to  come,  so  that  we  can  talk.  When  you 
get  your  book  finished,  I  want  you  to  come  so  as  to  give  me  a 
chance  to  develop.  I  want  you  to  come  to  mediums  anywhere 
so  that  I  can  talk  to  you.” 

(Here  says  she  will  come  again  and  with  “Good-bye”  dis¬ 
appears.) 

Here  form  appears  who  claims  to  be  Hypatia,  the  Doctor’s 
guide.  She  walks  out  into  the  circle,  courtesys  and  retires  partially 
behind  the  curtain,  where  she  holds  the  following  conversation : 
“We  have  got  a  certain  portion  of  strength  that  is  necessary  for 
the  pictures,  and  I  think  now  that  the  vibration  is  as  it  is,  this 
would  be  the  best  time  for  you  to  go  for  the  pictures  —  I  think 
about  Saturday,  for  the  strength  is  very  strong  at  present,  and  I 
am  afraid  if  you  sat  in  many  more  circles,  you  would  not  be 
able  to  get  the  results  you  would  just  now.” 

Dr.  King  :  “I  see,  I  want  to  ask  you  one  question.  Will  Mr. 
Stead  be  able  to  come  tonight,  and  talk?” 

Hypatia  intimates  that  she  cannot  tell  for  certain. 

Dr.  King  now  asks  if  he  shall  make  public  messages  which  he 
has  received  from  Mr.  Stead  and  she  replies :  “Say  nothing  until 
it  all  appears  in  the  book.” 

Dr.  King:  “That  is  all  right.” 

Hypatia:  “And  I  want  you  to  give  your  wife  all  the  strength 
you  can,  for  you  know  how  she  and  you  loved  to  be  together.” 

Dr.  King:  “Well,  how  can  I?” 

Hypatia  :  “I  want  you  to  give  her  every  opportunity  to  return, 
for  you  know  that  is  all  she  cares  for.” 

Dr.  King  :  “And  shall  I  leave  on  Saturday  and  go  to  Chicago  ?” 

Hypatia:  “Yes,  yes,  and  all  others  will  be  there.  Everything 
will  be  satisfactory  for  you  when  you  reach  there.” 

Dr.  King  :  “That  is  good.” 

Hypatia:  “For  I  have  things  so  arranged.  ...  I  will  not 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


245 


be  able  to  do  and  explain  things  as  I  will  when  I  reach  Chicago 
with  you.  I  will  have  everything  shown  plainly  there  for  you, 
so  that  you  will  be  able  to  understand  it  and  have  it  all  on  paper 
at  once.” 

Dr.  King:  “Yes,  will  you  show  yourself  to  the  others  once 
more  ?” 

Hypatia  :  “I  will  talk  to  you  or  write  to  you,  and  I  do  not 
want  you  to  stay  away  from  some  medium  of  whom  you  will 
hear;  I  think  that  she  (Mrs.  King)  will  return  again  tonight, 
seeing  that  you  will  not  be  here  again.  Good-night.” 

Here  form  appears  claiming  to  be  May  Donna,  the  Doctor’s 
daughter,  and  greets  the  Doctor  as  “Papa,”  advancing  out  into 
the  circle. 

May  Donna  :  “Mamma  is  here  tonight.” 

Dr.  King;  “Mother  and  daughter.” 

May  Donna,  having  advanced  just  inside  of  the  circle,  now 
sings : 

“Holy,  Holy,  Holy,  Lord  God  Almighty, 

All  Thy  works  shall  praise  Thy  name 
In  earth  and  sky  and  sea,”  etc.  (All  of  the  Anthem.) 

May  Donna:  “Is  this  not  grand  tonight?” 

Dr,  King  here  introduces  Mrs.  King  to  an  acquaintance,  who 
says :  “I  am  glad  to  meet  you.” 

May  Donna  and  Mrs.  King  both  kiss  Doctor  King. 

May  Donna  :  “Mamma  and  I  will  be  right  with  you,  when 
you  go  away,”  and  the  two  forms  disappear. 

Form  now  appears  claiming  to  be  David  (David  Williams 
King),  brother  of  Dr.  King.  Dr.  King  greets  him  and  says: 
“I  will  tell  Sam  that  you  were  here,  and  that  we  talked.” 

Brother:  “Yes,  I  am  your  dear  brother.” 

Dr.  King:  “Will  you  go  on  the  picture?” 

Brother;  “I  will  try.” 

Dr.  King;  “Yes.” 

Brother  ;  “It  is  with  great  pleasure  that  I  return  to  you.  Death 
does  not  end  all.”  (Here  form  disappears  from  view.) 

Just  before  the  closing  of  the  seance  a  form  appeared  who 
advanced  to  the  middle  of  the  room  with  arms  extended.  Several 


246 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  the  sitters  alleged  that  it  was  the  form  of  Mr.  W.  T.  Stead, 
who  was  drowned  recently.  After  coming  to  the  centre  of  the 
room  in  the  direction  of  Dr.  King,  he  slowly  backed  toward  the 
curtains  and  disappeared. 

(During  seance  one  form  appeared  who  was  not  recognized 
by  the  Doctor,  it  being  that  of  a  man.)  See  Chapter  XXXI,  19th 

June,  1912. 

(Sgd.)  Minnie  Noble, 

Stenographer. 

State  of  Ohio,  Lucas  County,  U.  S. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  a  notary  public  in  and  for 
Lucas  County,  Ohio,  at  Toledo,  this  20th  day  of  April,  1912. 

(Sgd.)  A.  H.  Peiter, 
Notary  Public. 

Corroborating  Testimony  Regarding  Author’s  Mother  as 
Received  from  a  Friend. 

“Toronto,  24th  July,  1912. 

“Dear  Doctor  King: 

What  I  am  writing  I  have  given  to  you  before,  and  referred 
to  many  times,  and  spoken  of  with  others,  but  as  you  have  asked 
me  for  my  written  statement  of  facts,  I  give  it  as  it  impressed 
me  deeply  years  ago,  and  was  remembered.  Hoping  you  will 
excuse  my  composition,  and  as  it  is  the  facts  you  want.  I’ll  give 
you  them  correctly. 

While  spending  two  weeks’  vacation,  in  the  month  of  August, 
1901,  at  the  spiritual  camp  meeting,  held  in  Lily  Dale,  New  York 
State,  one  evening  I  attended  one  of  Mrs.  Effie  Moss’  materializa¬ 
tion  seances.  After  several  materialized  forms  had  appeared,  and 
were  recognized  by  their  friends,  I  was  called  up  to  the  cabinet 
and  I  went,  wondering  who  it  could  be  who  wanted  me.  I  waited 
perhaps  a  minute  when  the  curtains  parted,  and  there  stood  a 
stately  lady  whom  I  did  not  recognize.  She  stood  looking  at  me, 
for  several  seconds,  first  stroking  one  hand,  and  then  the  other, 
as  any  person  would  do  when  putting  on  kid  gloves.  I  watched 
her  movements,  and  wondered  why  she  did  not  speak.  I  thought 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


247 


perhaps  she  could  not  speak  until  I  spoke  to  her.  I  then  said, 
is  there  anything  the  matter  with  your  hands?  as  I  could  only 
see  the  tips  of  her  fingers,  as  she  had  white  lace  mitts  on.  She 
said  no,  and  extended  her  hand  to  shake  hands  with  me,  and  said, 
“How  do  you  do.  Miss  Donaldson,  I  am  Mother  King,  mother 
of  Dr.  John  S.  King,  of  Toronto,  Canada.” 

I  then  said,  “Oh,  indeed,  I  am  very  pleased  to  meet  and  welcome 
you  here.”  She  again  spoke  and  said:  “Yes,  I  am  very  pleased 
to  meet  you,  and  I  want  you  to  take  a  good  look  at  me,  so  you 
can  tell  my  boy,  and  he  will  know  it  was  me.” 

She  stroked  one  side  of  her  head  several  times,  which  I  took 
notice  of,  and  saw  a  dark  spot  on  the  side  of  the  forehead,  near 
the  temple. 

She  next  asked  me  this  question:  “Will  you  carry  a  message 
to  my  boy,  for  he  is  hungry  for  this  knowledge  concerning  me.” 
I  told  her  that  I  would  be  very  pleased  to  carry  any  message 
to  him,  she  would  give  me.  She  said,  “Tell  him  that  yesterday, 
after  hearing  that  you  were  in  Lily  Dale,  he  went  in  his  office, 
sat  down  in  his  chair,  and  said,  “Mother,  if  you  are  here  now, 
will  you  please  go  to  Lily  Dale,  and  find  Miss  Donaldson  and 
send  me  a  message  by  her?”  Tell  my  boy  when  you  go  home, 
that  I  was  there,  by  his  side  when  he  spoke,  and  tell  him,  I  started 
right  away  for  Lily  Dale,  and  had  quite  a  time  to  find  you ;  but 
as  I  heard  you  were  going  to  attend  this  circle  tonight,  I  came 
and  here  I  am.” 

She  gave  me  other  messages  to  convey  to  you  on  arriving  home. 
When  I  got  home  I  sent  word  to  you  to  call  and  see  me,  which 
you  did  as  you  doubtless  remember.  This  is  what  you  said  to 
me  when  you  called:  “You  have  been  to  Lily  Dale.  I  wonder  if 
you  have  brought  a  message  to  me?”  I  told  you  I  had  some 
messages  for  you  from  your  mother.  I  first  asked  you  the  ques¬ 
tion  :  “Did  you  on  a  certain  day  send  out  a  thought,  or  ask  your 
mother  to  go  to  Lily  Dale,  and  find  me,  and  send  a  message  by 
me?”  You  said,  “I  did.”  I  then  told  you  how  your  mother  had 
materialized,  and  gave  me  a  message  for  you,  and  that  she  had 
asked  me  to  give  it  to  you. 


248 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  asked  you  if  you  knew  why  your  mother  wore  those  lace 
mitts  on  her  hands.  You  then  exclaimed,  “That  was  Mother  sure, 
for  she  had  rheumatism  in  her  hands,  the  joints  were  swollen, 
she  always  wore  mitts  or  gloves  on  her  hands  when  receiving 
callers,  because  of  unsightly  joints.” 

Then  I  further  asked  you,  what  did  it  mean  about  stroking 
the  side  of  her  head,  and  the  dark  bruise  on  it,  and  you  told  me 
she  had  fallen  down  the  cellar  steps,  striking  her  head  against 
the  stone  wall,  which  was  the  cause  of  her  death,  before  next 
morning,  all  of  which  was  news  to  me,  for  I  had  never  heard 
the  cause  of  her  passing  out. 

Yours  in  truth, 

(Sgd.)  M.  A.  Donaldson.” 

Evidential  Matter  Relating  to  Family  History,  and  All 
Names  and  Relationships  Correctly  Stated. 

In  The  Progressive  Thinker,  published  on  the  20th  July,  1912, 
at  Chicago,  and  for  which  I  am  a  subscriber,  I  found  the  follow¬ 
ing  message  intended  for  me,  in  the  columns  devoted  to  messages, 
which  come  through  the  psychic  Maggie  Waite,  and  are  published 
weekly,  viz. : 

“For  Dr.  John  S.  King,  of  Toronto,  Canada. — am  Grand¬ 
father  Hess,  and  I  am  bringing  his  Grandmother  Alice  Taylor 
King  and  her  husband,  James,  with  me.  He  says  that  she  is 
with  Stephen  and  Margaret  many  times  —  that  is  his  father 
and  mother.  We  visit  you  all  on  earth  as  we  go  to  see  each 
other  in  earth  life.  I  am  glad  that  John  is  engaged  in  the  good 
work  he  is  doing.  He  knew  the  truth  for  many  a  day,  but  he 
had  to  hide  his  light  for  a  long  time  under  a  bushel,  but  every¬ 
thing  is  harmonious  now,  and  I  often  go  into  your  home  with 
the  rest  of  the  friends  that  are  here.  I  just  thought  I  would 
drop  into  this  place  and  send  a  little  word  to  you  all.  Don’t 
think  I  am  idle  in  this  life.  I  am  busier  than  I  was  in  earth 
life,  and  Daddy  Hess  was  always  thought  an  active  and  busy 
person.  Well,  Toronto  has  got  woke  up  the  last  fifteen  years. 
The  truth  will  crawl  in  everywhere  without  asking  anyone’s 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


249 


permission.  The  rest  of  the  folks  are  here  with  me,  but  I  am 
the  spokesman  on  this  occasion  and  the  rest  can  come  some 
other  time  and  do  their  own  talking.  Good-bye  for  this  time, 
but  keep  on  working  for  the  truth.” 

[Note:  —  I  have  acknowledged  to  The  Progressive  Thinker, 
and  now  do  so  to  the  readers  of  my  book,  the  correctness  of  the 
names  and  the  relationships  of  all  who  are  mentioned  in  the 
message.  My  work  to  which  he  alludes  is  evidently  the  prepara¬ 
tion  for  publication  of  this  book.  He  also  speaks  truly  when  he 
says,  I  knew  the  truth  for  many  a  day,  but  had  to  hide  my  light, 
for  a  long  time,  under  the  bushel.  It  is  also  true  that  he  was 
called  Daddy  Hess  by  everybody  over  sixty  years  ago.  He  and 
his  family  connections  were  widely  known  as  U.  E.  Loyalists.  It 
must  be  nearly  sixty  years  since  he  passed  to  spirit  realms,  after 
a  mortal  life  of  97  years.  What  hypothesis  can  best  account  for 
all  the  facts  as  given?  Methinks  it  is  the  spiritual  one,  for  I 
don’t  see  how  one  can  adjust  another  to  fit  the  facts  in  this 
case.  J.  S.  K.] 


CHAPTER  XXIX 


[Note:  —  The  reader,  to  appreciate  their  full  import,  should 
halt,  and  read  Chapters  XII  and  XXIX  consecutively.  The 
former  is  by  the  author ;  and  the  latter,  the  response,  is  by  his 
spirit  wife.  The  rhyming,  grammar,  words  and  sentences  are 
shaped  by  the  instrument  (the  medium),  but  not  by  her  normal 
self.  It  matters  not  what  personality  makes  use  of  her,  it  rhymes 
when  read,  and  is  euphonious.] 

My  beloved  ‘Johnnie.’  —  It  is  to  me  a  delight,  to  be 
able  to  write  my  answer  as  the  Key  that  has  unlocked 
the  mystery. 

As  to  the  Ante-mortem  Agreement  Conditions  that  favored 
psychic  results,  I  have  this  to  say,  I  remember  it  all,  as  I  do  our 
wedding  day;  and  all  the  bliss  of  human  harmony  that  you,  my 
loving  husband,  gave  to  me. 

One  cannot  change  himself  into  a  tone  of  thought,  until  he 
thinks  it  out,  in  his  own  way;  and  I  was  born  with  prejudices 
strong,  that  were  as  part  of  me;  and  like  a  bending  in  a  tree,  I 
had  to  change  these  in  a  gradual  way.  I  thought  of  you  as 
changed,  in  love  for  me,  and  following  a  myth,  and  bringing  to 
the  ground,  the  garments  beautiful  of  scholarly  attainment,  and 
good  repute,  that  you  through  many  years  in  your  town  had 
gained.  It  was  to  me  a  woe,  a  dreadful  woe,  that  you  were  thus 
inclined  to  go  where  deceivers  were,  in  every  key,  as  it  was  talked 
by  others,  and  told  to  me.  I  wished  to  snatch  you  from  the 
burning,  so  I  thought  it  best  to  wish  you  not  to  go,  for  I  believed 
the  love  you  had  for  me,  would  keep  you  from  your  downfall 
permanently.  And  when  you  ceased  to  go,  I  felt  at  rest ;  and  still 
I  wondered  if  I  did  the  right ;  or  was  I  doing  ill,  and  was  it  all 
the  best ;  and  was  it  right  if  it  was  true,  to  thus  withhold  that 
which  you  loved,  from  you.  I  asked  about  the  subject  everywhere, 
and  seeds  that  you  had  planted,  grew  in  me,  till  I  with  my  own 
wish  began  to  wish  tO'  know  if  after  death  we  live,  was  so.  I 
thought  if  it  is  true,  my  Johnnie  boy  and  I  could  both  this  truth 

250 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


251 


enjoy;  and  that  is  why  I  bade  you  go  to  centre  of  the  spiritualistic 
thought;  and  be  able  with  me  to  hear  and  see,  and  in  all  of  it 
feel  quite  free  to  say,  it  is  so,  or  is  not ;  or  I  cannot  it  so  see,  or 
this  thing  thus  appears  to  me.  I  had  a  wish  to  know,  if  from  the 
sky  my  sister  Gertie  and  our  daughter  dear  could  really  come, 
and  to  ourselves  appear.  I  gleaned  with  you  along  this  open  plain, 
and  hoped  with  you  that  I  might  also  gain,  the  very  knowledge 
that  would  be  able  to  bind  us  two  eternally. 

As  ill  health  came,  I  clung  more  strong  to  planks  of  truth, 
that  came  along,  into  my  power  to  touch  ;  and  so  I  gathered  knowl¬ 
edge  here  and  there ;  and  thinking  earnestly  and  honestly,  I  said 
if  ever  I  am  taken  I  will  do  the  things  that  I  have  promised  you  — 
come  back  and  write,  and  speak,  and  be  as  much  as  possible  in 
touch  with  thee. 

My  death  was  like  a  restful  sleep,  I  lay  upon  my  bed  and  hardly 
did  I  realize  that  fate  had  cut  the  thread  that  severed  me  my  one 
love  free,  from  thy  kind  presence  ever  dear,  faithful  and  sweet, 
and  ever  to  me  near.  I  felt  alone,  bereft  upon  a  mountain  bare. 
I  could  not  find  contentment  anywhere.  I  love  my  ‘Johnnie’  only, 
I  would  say.  I  do  not  love  the  beauties  of  this  way  of  living  here. 

Thy  guardian  Electra,  stays  with  me,  Saphrona  and  another 
also  here  Hypatia,  your  mother  aided  by  many  who  are  known 
to  you,  pass  from  me,  dear  one,  now,  to  you,  so  I  have  from  this 
knowledge  comforts  not  a  few,  and  I  have  gained  in  spirit  growth, 
from  seeds  planted  by  you.  If  I  had  not  this  ‘blessed  power,’  I 
don’t  know  what  I’d  do,  to  be  on  this  side  alone  and  not  go  back 
to  you.  But  as  it  is  I’m  happy,  and  patiently  I  wait  till  your 
time  comes  to  join  me  in  this  second  living  state. 

Light  is  my  path,  the  way  is  bright,  and  many  beauties  throng 
my  sight,  and  I  have  much  I  wish  to  do,  but  greatest  pleasure  is 
to  go  to  you. 

When  I  had  learned  that  I  was  really  dead,  that  body  dear  to 
me  lay  silent  ever  more,  that  locked  to  me  was  every  mortal  door, 
and  spirit  ever  more  I  was  to  be.  how  grateful  was  I,  my  beloved, 
then  to  know  that  you  so  "honest  in  your  love  and  true,  were  a 
believer  in  this  truth  now  bright.  What  had  appeared  a  stigma 


252 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


in  my  sight,  was  now  the  door  ajar  to  me;  and  angel  songs  afar 
might  be  if  I  could  go  again  to  thee. 

He  is  prepared  I  told  the  angels  near,  and  he  will  joyful  be 
to  hear  and  see.  Please  therefore  tell  the  how  to  me. 

The  guardians  listened  to  my  prayer,  and  told  me  you  were 
praying  too ;  and  shortly  I  was  then  allowed  to  go  dear  heart  to 
you.  I  grow,  I  lean  upon  this  staff  of  truth,  to  me  it  grows  more 
stable  and  strong  as  time  goes  on ;  and  every  time  I  may  do  so, 
I  do  as  far  as  possible  the  thing  that  I  have  promised  you.  I 
call  you  ‘Jobnnie  Boy,’  I  reach  with  loving  hand  for  every  blossom 
of  this  truth  you  gain ;  and  I  will  be  one  to  rejoice  with  every 
living  mortal  brain,  that  walks  through  critic’s  thorny  path,  and 
prejudices’  bitter  hate,  until  at  last  they  gain  this  height,  that  God 
has  granted  me ;  and  learn  to  know  that  this  is  true,  their  friends 
may  grow  to  be  able  to  come  to  them  again,  and  make  their 
personality  and  loved  forms  of  expression  true,  with  them  to  be. 
When  this  the  truth  is  to  them  known,  and  its  laws  properly 
obeyed,  —  tho  we  cannot  come  without  a  human  aid  —  we  sweep 
the  heavens’  golden  shore  of  every  sand  of  hope,  and  treasure 
it  to  brighten  those  who  still  remain  in  this. 

My  husband  is  to  me  as  dear  as  he  was  in  earth  life.  I 
lived  in  pain  and  woe.  All  that  I  do  is  to  him  dear,  and  I  use 
instruments  whene’er  I  can,  and  try  to  bring  him  cheer.  /  try  to 
ope  his  spirit  eye  and  ear,  so  he  shall  he  though  still  in  life  a 
spirit  free,  able  to  sense  me,  as  I  living  be,  across  the  gulf  of 
death  unfathomed  and  unknown,  to  many  men  a  terror  like  a 
mighty  sea,  that  takes  their  friends  from  them  to  he,  hidden 
forever  in  its  mystery.  Lost  in  the  tomb  in  final  sleep,  in  silence 
ever  more,  how  many  living  loving  dead  would  touch  the  portal 
closed  of  those  who  weep;  'and  lift  the  pall  a  curtain  to  the  heaven 
shore,  and  prove  they  may  come  back  once  more,  if  friends  would 
learn  to  ope  the  door.  But  when  the  bands  of  angel  hands,  aid 
the  enlightened  mind  to  see  that  we  are  but  transplanted  flowers 
which  grow  in  more  perfect  degree ;  when  thoughts  as  things 
completed  be,  and  we  come  back  our  friends  to  see.  When  men 
believe  that  this  is  true,  how  great  the  benefit,  how  new  the  good 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


253 


to  all.  How  shallow  then  will  seem  the  pall,  that  of  the  body, 
covers  all.  I  lift  the  curtain  of  the  dreaded  grave,  and  glancing 
back  across  the  life  of  me,  see  that  it  all  zvas  planned  as  best,  and 
/  am  happy  here,  and  am  in  harmony  and  joy,  because  I  may 
communicate  zvith  my  dear  ‘Johnnie  boy.’  One  may  endeavor 
every  way,  and  gain  but  smallest  crumb  of  hope ;  but  climb  as  I 
in  life  did  do,  till  angels  point  the  way  to  you.  I  kneel  and  pray 
to  Highest  Deity,  to  aid  me  in  my  powers  to  do,  till  I  may  come 
to  our  own  home,  and  show  ‘Johnnie  Boy,’  to  you ;  whatever  is 
the  best  for  me,  I  take  it  as  a  remedy.  I  realize  that  I  am  here, 
that  I  am  loved  by  faces  sweet,  that  I  am  aided  everywhere,  to 
make  my  wishes  here  complete ;  and  though  I  feel  it  when  I 
cannot  do,  I  grateful  am  that  I  was  taught,  before  I  fell  asleep, 
that  life  continues  ever  more;  and  I  may  make  your  last  years 
sweet,  and  aid  you  in  your  efforts  to  bless  other  men,  as  this 
truth  blesses  you  and  myself  too. 

Like  to  photography  each  demonstration  be,  and  if  a  little 
error,  or  a  little  change,  is  made  in  light  or  chemical  upon  the 
plate,  nothing  will  come  into  the  human  view.  Whatever  is  is 
fight,  and  right  in  end  shall  win,  and  after  it  has  won,  the  truth 
triumphant  is  to  stand,  with  wands  of  peace  on  every  hand ;  and 
you  shall  echo  forth  from  every  land,  because  of  this  true  history, 
men  have  unlocked  the  greatest  mystery. 

May  E.  King." 

The  foregoing  was  written  May  4th,  1912. 


To  her  this  was  my  acknowledgement. 

“To  ‘Babe’  :  — 

My  loved  one  now  in  spirit  realm.  While  thanking  you  for 
many  words  of  cheer,  in  many  messages,  through  trumpet  and 
through  automatic  hand,  as  well  as  while  in  your  transient  body, 
many  times  and  dates  at  Jonson’s,  I  truly  now  relieve  you,  for 
you’ve  kept  your  promise,  and  thus  redeemed  your  Bond. 

‘The  Gem  of  Truth’  for  zvhich  zve  searched  together,  has  nozv 
been  found;  and  zve  can  surely  claim  in  fact,  as  zvell  as  name, 


254 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


to  have  demonstrated  to  mankind,  that  there  is  continuity  of  life, 
as  well  as  terrestrial  and  celestial  intercommunication. 

John  S.  King.” 

[Note:  —  Read  November,  1911,  and  April,  1912,  series  and 
Chapter  XX.] 


CHAPTER  XXX 


[Stead’s  picture,  made  by  spirit  artists  in  natural  life  coloring, 
about  three-quarters  life  size,  immediately  before  that  of  Hypatia, 
on  the  27th  of  April,  1912,  in  the  presence  of  the  Bangs  sisters, 
in  the  city  of  Chicago ;  also  in  the  author’s  presence,  on  a  base 
selected  by  him,  was  completed  in  a  trifle  less  than  fifteen  minutes. 
The  figure  was  dressed  as  he  first  appeared  at  the  Jonson  seance, 
soon  after  that  of  Hypatia,  on  the  18th  April,  1912.  The  selection 
of  the  base,  and  the  subsequent  developments,  were  similar  to 
those  in  the  case  of  Hypatia.  J.  S.  K.] 

IT  may  be  mentioned  here,  that  in  the  early  messages  received 
by  me  after  the  Titanic  disaster  —  selections  from  which  will 
be  found  recorded  in  this  chapter  —  that  Hypatia,  an 
advanced  intelligence,  made  known  to  me,  that  she  along  with 
Julia  Ames  and  Stead’s  son,  Otelleo  and  other  guides,  escorted 
Stead’s  spirit  from  the  sea  to  the  psychic  instrument,  in  New  York 
State,  where  he  was  enabled  to  communicate  with  me,  and  he 
(Stead)  also  so  states  to  me. 

To  the  reader’s  mind  the  thought  will  readily  occur,  when  Julia 
Ames,  the  guide  of  Stead,  would  naturally  be  there  on  the  scene, 
why  was  Hypatia  there  as  well? 

Be  it  remembered  from  reading  Chapter  VIII  that  Hypatia 
had  previously  in  Stead’s  own  home,  communicated  with  him,  in 
response  to  my  request.  Be  it  also  remembered  that  Hypatia  con¬ 
stantly  communed  with  me  through  the  “Human-Psychic-Tele¬ 
phone”  (the  New  York  psychic)  ;  and  what  more  natural  then, 
than  for  Hypatia  to  aid  Stead,  to  a  satisfying  state  of  continued 
existence,  and  an  opportunity  to  prove  the  same ;  and  demonstrate 
his  ability  to  communicate  with  the  writer,  his  corresponding  pen 
friend,  for  he  had  in  life  promised  me  to  aid  to  prove  these  very 
conditions  ?  Whatsoe’er  the  view  that  anyone  may  take,  I  hope  to 
prove  it  clear,  by  his  own  evidence,  which  I  have  been  enabled 
to  accumulate,  that  Stead  himself,  in  my  judgment,  well  estab¬ 
lished  continuity,  return  and  communion. 

255 


256 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  never  met  William  T.  Stead  in  life,  nor  did  I  ever  see  him, 
or  hear  him  speak.  However  some  years  ago  I  became  interested 
in  his  attitude  towards  the  spiritual  philosophy;  and  he  having 
learned  of  psychical  research-work,  wrote  requesting  me  to 
endeavor  to  secure  the  consent  of  a  famous  American  psychic 
(Jonson)  to  visit  England,  to  afford  himself  and  others  similar 
opportunity  to  that  which  I  had  enjoyed,  of  studying  the  wonder¬ 
ful  phenomena  of  a  physical  and  psychical  character.  In  my 
effort  I  failed,  but  it  led  to  a  cordial  corresponding  friendship, 
which  existed  up  to  the  time  of  the  Titanic  disaster.  Much  of 
the  evidence  is  too  voluminous  to  find  place  in  this  chapter;  but 
I  may  briefly  refer  to  it,  and  can  produce  it  as  received  by  me 
when  in  writing.  I  will  indicate  briefly  the  evidence  of  various 
kinds.  I  have  in  all  received  over  seventy  written  messages  signed 
by  Stead.  These  came  from  different  sources,  and  are  modified 
in  expression,  by  the  psychic  through  whom  they  are  produced. 
As  the  mould-board  of  a  plow  shapes  each  furrow,  no  matter  what 
man  guides  the  plow ;  so  no  matter  who  the  writer  may  be  that 
uses  a  particular  psychic,  a  certain  characteristic  is  made  manifest. 
This,  however,  does  not  nullify  the  thoughts  conveyed.  We  know 
but  little  of  conditions,  either  here  or  there  required  to  accom¬ 
plish  physical  demonstrations.  We  however  know  men  use  differ¬ 
ent  words  at  different  times,  to  express  the  same  thought.  The 
church  bells  ring  out  the  National  Anthem,  and  all  who  hear  it 
know  it  is  the  prayer  “God  save  the  King.”  So  too  the  same 
anthem  may  be  rendered  through  an  organ,  trumpet,  piano,  cornet, 
flute,  accordeon  or  violin,  even  by  the  same  musical  interpreter; 
still  the  sounds  or  tone  in  each  and  every  case  are  different, 
though  each  may  be  harmonious,  and  convey  the  true  thought  to 
the  listening  ear.  The  listener  not  only  recognizes  the  anthem, 
but  can  readily  distinguish  it,  and  name  the  instrument  by  which 
produced.  Rhyming  messages  through  the  writing  psychic  create 
doubt  of  the  true  origin  from  its  strangeness;  but  the  National 
Anthem  rendered  through  the  bagpipes  is  quite  as  unfamiliar  to 
many  men,  though  they  do  not  impair  the  thought  ^they  render 
for  the  ear  that  is  accustomed  to  them.  Marconigrams  between 


WILLIAM  T.  STEAD. 

(From  Painting:  by  Spirit  Artists  for  the  Author.) 


k 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


257 


sections  of  the  Allies  in  the  war  zone,  are  full  of  information 
and  both  origin  and  destination  are  well  understood.  On  the 
other  hand,  if  one  of  these  same  Marconigrams  reach  the  enemy 
its  origin  and  its  thought  conveyed  is  not  understood,  and  to  such 
enemy  such  a  Marconigram  is  simply  meaningless  jargon.  Because 
a  spirit  has  acquired  a  new  mode  of  speaking,  due  to  his  new 
necessity;  or  because  no  two  instruments  or  psychics  used  are 
alike,  through  which  he  speaks,  by  aid  of  trumpet,  or  writes  by 
aid  of  the  psychic’s  hand,  is  not  sufficient  reason  for  denying 
the  source  of  the  voice,  or  the  thought  conveyed  as  being  that 
of  a  particular  individual  spirit. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact,  that  no  spirit  intelligence  can  write  the 
same  through  one  writing  psychic,  as  through  another ;  nor  speak 
with  the  same  intonation  through  each  trumpet;  and  further 
presents  a  different  aspect  through  different  materializing 
mediums  in  slight  degree;  nor  does  any  photograph  of  a  human 
by  one  photographer  resemble  exactly  that  of  every,  or  any  other. 
It  will  be  further  conceded '  that  the  spirit  cannot  write  at  all 
times  the  same  through  any  one  psychic ;  cannot  always  speak  the 
same  through  the  one  trumpet ;  cannot  always  materialize  the 
same  in  the  presence  of  the  same  materializing  medium,  every¬ 
thing  being  so  absolutely  dependent  upon  the  present  existing 
conditions.  Again  it  is  true  that  specified  spirits,  speaking 
through  different  trance  mediums,  whose  vocal  organs  differ,  do 
not  each  time  speak  in  the  same  key  or  tone ;  nor  does  a  vocalist 
or  pianist  always  sing  or  play  a  selected  song,  in  the  same 
tone  or  key;  nor  do  public  speakers  on  the  platform  always  use 
the  same  words  or  language,  in  expressing  their  thoughts, 
which  alone  are  truly  convincing  to  the  hearers  for  whom 
intended. 

When  a  prediction  or  promise  is  made  through  one  psychic  or 
medium,  and  fulfilled  through  another  of  different  phase,  at  wide 
distance  apart,  and  at  very  different  dates;  and  this  repeated  in 
various  ways,  or  through  several  different  phases  of  psychic 
instruments,  who  know  not  each  other,  and  at  unfixed  dates,  it 
surely  cannot  be  classed  as  fraudulent;  and  would  in  ordinary 
human  events  be  accepted  as  a  corroboration. 


258 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Two  days  after  its  date,  I  received  the  following  message 
from  the  “Human-Psychic-Telephone”  in  New  York  State, 
while  at  Toledo;  but  will  again  remind  the  reader,  that  whether 
I  am  present,  as  in  the  interviews  with  Hypatia,  and  with 
the  philosophers,  and  others  as  recorded  in  preceding  chapters  — 
as  well  as  those  to  follow  —  or  absent  from  her  presence,  all 
messages  which  I  have  received  through  her,  are  more  or  less  of 
a  rhyming  character.  Particulars  regarding  this  psychic  instru¬ 
ment  are  given  in  a  separate  chapter  devoted  entirely  to  her 
(Chapter  XXI),  and  her  peculiar  and  wonderful  gifts. 

445  p.m.  16th  April  1912.  From  William  T.  Stead.  (No.l.) 
“All  of  us  try,  but  when  we  fail,  as  one  in  health  I  tried  to  sail 
to  you  my  friend  for  ever  dear,  I  did  not  land,  I  now  am  here.” 

From  what  I  gathered  from  the  press  at  the  time,  the  great 
ship  “Titanic”  made  its  dive  below,  at  2.20  a.  m.  of  April  15th, 
and  Stead  with  spirit  aid  wrote  his  first  message  from  spirit 
sphere  to  me  38  hours  and  25  minutes  after  that  event. 

Following  are  extracts  from  other  messages. 

5  p.m.  16th  April  1912.  From  William  T.  Stead.  (No  2.) 
“Stead  I  am,  and  it  is  true,  that  I  am  now  cut  off  from  you  my 

friend  of  the  past”  (a  fact) . “My  hand-writing  is  known 

to  you,  (a  truth)  and  I  will  see  what  I  can  do  to  make  it  proved 
beyond  a  doubt,  that  I  a  spirit,  come  again  from  this  side” 

(  prediction). 

8.15  a.  m.  17th  April  1912.  From  William  T.  Stead.  (No.  3.) 
“I  am  of  those  who  are  in  the  higher  life.  I  hope  to  be  able  to 
write  for  you,  and  for  Hypatia,  your  guide,  who  is  with  me  in  this 

my  wish  to  have  this  hand  write  it  for  you”  (prediction) . 

“I  started  on  a  pleasant  way,  and  storm  came  not,  a  sudden  jar, 
and  then  the  grinding,  and  the  crushing  of  the  iceberg  and  the 
sea.  It  all  was  done  suddenly.” 

4.35  p.  m.  17th  April  1912.  From  William  T.  Stead . 

“I  did  not  realize  that  death  was  the  cause  of  my  sudden  harmony. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


259 


.  .  .  .  I  hope  to  be  able  to  prove  identity  (prediction)  in  several 
ways,  not  known  to  the  hand  that  I  use  to  write  to  you.” 

9.45  p.  m.  17th  April  1912.  From  William  T.  Stead.  “My 
name  is  world-wide  in  its  fame  ....  and  yet  with  all  my 

faith,  and  psychic  power,  I  did  not  once  foresee  my  fate . 

It  was  ocean  grave  to  me,  and  my<body  now  lies  beneath  the  sea.” 

4.30  p.  m.  18th  April  1912.  From  Wm.  T.  Stead . 

"Hypatia”  (author’s  guide)  "seems  to  be  away;  but  she  is  to  be 
here.”  (Was  present  later.)  ....  "Oh  very  hard  and  very  slow, 

I  learn  to  leave  my  friends . I  am  so  earth-bound  still. 

....  7  see  by  me  your  loving  wife.  I’ll  go  now,  I  must  learn 

the  way  if  I  am  truly  here  to  stay . I’ll  make  it  so  you’ll 

surely  see  and  know  me,  if  I  can.”  (A  strong  prediction  later 
fulfilled.) 

That  same  night,  while  in  a  materializing  seance  at  Jonson’s 
in  Toledo,  Western  Ohio,  Hypatia  and  my  spirit  wife  “May” 
materialized,  and  conversed  with  me ;  and  while  doing  so  I  asked 
Hypatia  this  question,  “Will  friend  Stead  be  able  to  come  to¬ 
night?”  She  answered  me  in  these  words,  “I  cannot  tell  for 
certain.  I  fear  he  has  not  power  as  yet  to  come  and  talk.” 

May,  my  spirit  wife,  was  pleased  to  say  to  me,  “May  Donna 
(our  daughter)  will  sing  for  you  tonight.”  —  I  placed  my  ring  on 
May’s  finger,  and  she  wore  it  during  the  seance,  returning  it 
before  disappearing  for  the  night.  Our  daughter,  while  material¬ 
ized,  said,  “Mamma  is  here  tonight,”  and  I  responded,  “Mother 
and  daughter.” 

May  Donna  then  advanced  out  among  the  sitters  in  the  circle ; 
and  as  both  her  mother  and  herself  had  previously  promised  me, 
she  would  sing  for  me  before  I  left  Toledo,  now  did  so.  Her 
selection  was  the  anthem 

Holy,  Holy,  Holy,  Lord  God  Almighty, 

All  Thy  works  shall  praise  Thy  name 
In  earth,  and  sky,  and  sea.  Etc. 

Her  singing  was  received  with  surprise,  and  admiration,  by 
those  who  were  assembled  there ;  and  after  bowing  her  acknowl- 


260 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


edgement  of  their  appreciation  of  her  eflfort,  along  with  her 
mamma  then  kissed  me  good-bye,  and  dissolved  from  view. 

As  zue  neared  the  hour  of  closing,  10  o’clock  p.m.  —  zjuhile  all 
in  the  circle  sat  at  case,  and  zvere  quietly  talking  —  the  curtains 
of  the  cabinet  suddenly  parted;  and  out  there  came,  zjuith  arms 
extended,  and  zvith  a  determined,  yet  hopeful  appearance,  a  man 
zjuho  zvalked  straight  over  near  to  me,  and  zvas  proclaimed  by 
those  zjvho  knezv  him,  as  William  T.  Stead.  He  did  not  speak, 
but  retraced  his  steps,  until  near  the  curtain  of  the  cabinet,  and 
melted  —  so  to  speak  —  from  the  viezv  of  all  the  sitters. 

His  predictions  as  expressed  in  the  zvritten  message  through 
the  Human-Psychic-Telephone  at  4.30  that  same  afternoon  near 
Buffalo,  Nezv  York,  zvere  here  fulfilled,  some  five  hours  and 
thirty  minutes  after  they  had  been  made. 

This  appearance  was  shortly  followed  by  another  and  longer 
communication,  signed  by  Wm.  T.  Stead,  as  coming  through  the 
same  automatic  writer ;  and  from  it  I  quote  a  few  brief  extracts, 
viz. : 

"/  zvish  to  say.  Til  often  shozjv  to  you  from  this  time  forth, 
and  help  you  all  I  can  to  prove  the  continuity  of  life”  (prediction). 
.  ...  ”1  am  convinced  at  last,  that  I  am  from  my  body  free, 
and  I  am  grozving  more  content  that  it  zvas  so  to  be.  I  climb  the 
steps  of  God’s  great  outer  throne,  that  every  man,  zvhate’er  his 

fate,  must  climb  alone . /  shozved  myself  to  you  at 

Jonson’s”  (fulfilled  promise),  “that  settles  all  the  questions  in 

my  mind  tonight.  I’ll  visit  you  at  Chicago”  (prediction) . 

‘7  zvill  do  everything  zvhich  is  possible  for  me  to  do,  to  aid  your 
heart  plans  to  come  true”  (prediction).  “After  I  shozved  myself 
to  you,  and  realized  that  I  zvas  knozvn  by  you,  I  thrilled  zvith 
pozver  of  thought,  and  of  desire  to  do;  and  I  am  very  glad  indeed 

you  gave  me  opportunity  to  shozv . I  have  zvith  me  tonight, 

your  mother  Margaret  P.  King.”  (The  P  is  correct,  though  in 
ordinary  signature  she  rarely,  if  ever,  used  it,  in  life)  “and  your 
father  Stephen  King . I  zvill  ally  myself  to  you,”  (predic¬ 

tion)  “for  Julia  loves  Hypatia;  and  I  free  spirit  unallied  to  need 
or  necessity  ....  float  forth  to  be  aider  to  thee,  in  your  heart 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


261 


xvish  to  set  men  free . I  will  hope  to  he  able  if  possible 

to  show  to  thee”  (prediction)  "‘and  on  pictured  page  of  your  book 
too,  if  it  is  wished  dear  friend  by  you”  (prediction). 

He  next  went  by  spirit  route  and  met  me  in  Chicago,  Illinois, 
on  the  27th  April,  1912,  nine  days  after  his  appearance  at  Toledo. 
He  met  me  at  the  psychic  sisters  window,  and  there  his  picture 
was  produced,  as  he  had  appeared  in  the  clothing  worn  when  he 
came  to  me  at  Toledo  (prediction  fulfilled). 

The  Process  of  Spirit  Painting. 

The  day  was  fine  and  beautiful,  that  is  the  sun  shone  bright, 
the  time  between  one  and  two  p.  m.,  the  27th  April,  1912.  The 
twin  houses  of  the  Bangs  sisters  had  undergone  artistic  renova¬ 
tion;  and  paper,  paint  and  varnish  of  human  selection,  had  been 
employed  by  skilled  renovators  and  decorators.  The  room,  a 
southern  one,  had  but  a  single  window,  but  it  was  bare  of  blinds 
and  curtains,  no  pictures  on  the  wall,  no  bric-a-brac  about,  no 
chair  or  seat  or  furniture  at  all;  the  room  contained  but  odor, 
light  and  air,  as  we  entered  in ;  and  as  the  sisters  worked  at 
replenishing,  I  watched,  to  learn  just  what  was  necessary,  before 
we  settled  down.  A  light  and  empty  table  was  first  brought  in, 
and  placed  near  the  only  window,  at  the  southern  side  of  the 
room ;  and  next  were  placed  three  common  chairs,  on  three  sides 
of  the  table,  the  east  and  west  for  them  and  the  northern  one 
for  me.  The  pastelles,  cards,  or  canvasses,  or  whatsoe’er  their 
name,  which  were  prepared,  or  stretched  or  mounted  on  wooden 
frame  or  rack,  were  next  brought  in,  some  six  or  eight ;  and  placed 
at  western  side,  and  northern  end  of  room.  There  were  no  spirits 
in  sight,  nor  smiling  “angel  forms,”  and  no  other  articles  in  view, 
save  a  dark  colored  curtain,  and  its  purpose  will  be  made  known 
soon.  So  the  work  of  preparation  was  now  nearly  through ;  and 
as  there  was  no  darkness,  and  therefore  vision  clear,  I  was  per¬ 
mitted  to  make  my  own  selection  of  the  necessary  two  canvasses, 
out  of  the  group  before  alluded  to ;  and  such  I  brought  as  I 
selected  them ;  and  the  bright  light  of  day  was  shining  in  on  them, 
and  also  through  them,  for  they  were  not  opaque.  The  position 
in  which  they  were  placed  may  be  thus  specialized. 


262 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  two  blank  canvasses,  clean  and  pure  white,  which  I  had 
selected  from  all  that  were  in  the  group  before  alluded  to,  were 
next  placed  on  the  table,  back  to  back,  the  two  frames  together 
meeting  in  their  whole  circumference ;  thus  with  the  canvasses 
completing  the  walls  of  a  cavity,  like  with  the  two  slates  for  spirit 
writing  is  produced  a  cabinet  of  small  degree,  on  the  same  prin¬ 
ciple  as  is  the  larger  cabinet  at  Jonson’s,  in  which  the  spirit  forces 
act ;  and  so  by  aid  of  this  unique  cabinet,  Hermes  is  able,  as  ruler 
of  the  power  of  levitation,  to  utilize  the  elements,  which  may  he 
rightly  called  the  pigments,'or  coloring  of  clay,  in  accord  with  the 
design  of  the  spirit-picture  artist,  architect  or  designer  Rembrandt. 

The  canvasses,  as  I  have  described  them  above,  were  placed 
between  the  window,  and  myself,  about  the  center  of  the  little 
table.  The  upper  corners  East  and  West  were  held  in  close  apposi¬ 
tion,  after  the  bottom  margins  had  been  so  placed  by  the  sisters. 
The  upper  corner  of  the  canvasses  on  my  right,  at  the  Western 
end,  first  placed  in  close  juxtaposition,  was  so  held  by  the  thumb 
and  finger  of  the  one  sister’s  dexter  hand;  while  the  other  used 
her  left,  and  did  the  same  at  corner  nearest  her,  while  she  sat  at 
the  eastern  end ;  so  that  each  of  them  had  one  hand  free,  but  in 
my  sight  were  both  of  them  quite  constantly. 

The  question  arises  in  the  mind,  as  tOi  why  this  is  done.  I  may 
answer  briefly  there  are  but  three  reasons  which  occurred  to  me, 
the  one  as  I  have  explained  was  to  keep  the  two  frames  in  apposi¬ 
tion,  thus  to  create  a  cavity  or  cabinet ;  another  to  keep  them 
both  erect,  for  it  was  evident  they  would  not  stand  alone ;  and 
as  to  the  second  hand  of  each,  it  was  constantly  within  the  angle 
of  my  vision.  By  some  it  is  asserted,  that  there  is  a  reason  third, 
which  is  claimed  to  be  important,  and  is  said  to  be  no  less  than 
a  psychic  current  force,  running  from  the  living  mediums  to  the 
inorganic  base,  on  which  appears  the  picture.  As  to  the  curtain 
I  referred  to,  I  have  this  to  say,  the  window  did  need  it  not, 
and  with  it  was  made  a  border  at  the  top  and  sides,  to  help  to 
concentrate  the  light  and  power  upon  the  base,  which  was  fitted 
to  the  frames ;  so  that  the  various  colors  of  the  pigments,  as  they 
came  in  waves  from  the  bottom  towards  the  top,  were  made  by 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


263 


contrast  so  much  more  clear  or  visible.  I  hope  the  reader  will 
comprehend  the  true  situation  of  the  sitting  psychics  to  the  small 
improvised  cabinet ;  and  I  wish  such  to  be  assured,  that  my 
description  is  a  truthful  delineation  so  far  as  I  am  concerned. 

I  learned  from  one  of  the  sisters,  that  the  spirit  artist  was 
alleged  to  be  no  less  an  one  than  the  famous  Rembrandt,  at  least 
most  generally;  though  at  rare  internals,  some  special  pictures 
were  said  to  be  the  work  of  Raphael. 

I  was  and  am  satisfied,  that  ’twere  quite  impossible  for  skilful 
conjuror,  or  artist  in  legerdemain,  to  work  a  chance  to  deceive 
my  experienced  eye  on  this  occasion,  for  I  may  enlighten  readers 
by  telling  them,  that  I  have  been  a  confidential  guest,  right  on 
the  stage  with  the  best  of  them,  to  witness  the  wizard  acts  devised 
by  them  and  am  not  therefore  a  “gullible.”  But  to  resume,  as 
there  appeared  to  be  no  more  to  do,  we  took  our  seats  in  the 
positions  I  have  specified.  The  room  was  light,  as  I  have  said, 
and  my  sight  was  clear,  and  believe  me  true,  that  I  always  was 
a  critic  most  skeptical,  and  never  credulous,  and  harbored  doubt, 
until  I  could  no  longer  entertain  it,  for  I  had  a  mind  my  own, 
and  quality  of  great  activity ;  and  now  was  my  supreme  opportunity 
to  detect  a  fraud,  if  such  existed. 

I  have  in  mind  the  one  I  want,  I  said,  for  such  can  read  my 
thoughts;  and  if  the  work  be  done  by  spirit  true,  ’twill  come  just 
as  I  now  desire;  and  so  I  looked  upon  these  two  sisters,  and 
quiet  sat,  with  watch  in  hand  to  note  the  time,  which  was  half¬ 
way  ’tween  one  and  two ;  and  gave  my  strict  attention  alternately 
to  hands  and  arms  of  sisters  both,  and  canvas  before  my  face; 
and  all  within  the  area  of  the  angle  of  my  central  fixed  vision; 
while  I  felt  a  glow  of  subconscious  knowledge  elevating,  which 
seemed  to  indicate,  as  if  by  intuition,  that  he,  my  friend  Stead, 
was  now  coming;  and  I  gazed  most  critically  upon  the  pure 
white  canvas,  with  full  light  of  day  on  front  and  back  of  it,  and 
watching  from  my  favored  position  each  change,  however  slight, 
in  motion  or  position  of  the  psychic  sisters ;  and  I  was  as  well 
extremely  quiet,  and  motionless  and  listening,  and  could  have 
almost  heard  the  flappings  of  the  wings  of  a  butterfly  in  air,  or 


264 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


the  breathing  of  a  humming  bird,  as  I  was  constantly  on  the 
qui-vive  of  great  expectancy;  and  so  anxiously  watched  for  the 
slightest  indication  of  the  work  of  spirit  artist,  no  matter  what 
moment,  nor  in  what  position  it  might  appear. 

Very  presently  just  two  feet  in  front  of  me,  I  noticed  beginning 
change,  from  clear  white  light  on  surface  of  the  canvas,  to  that 
less  clear,  and  on  from  that  to  faint  shadow,  slight  evidence  of 
waves  of  color,  mixing  with  the  shadow,  and  all  in  motion,  like 
small  wavelets,  or  ripples  on  an  almost  placid  lake ;  and  creeping, 
or  rather  rolling  upwards,  one  after  another,  in  orderly  succession, 
as  if  striving  slowly  to  attain  the  top ;  and  then  a  portion  in  one 
place  would  deepen  in  shade,  making  form ;  and  this  with  other 
delineations  came  into  view,  and  slowly  filling  in  with  light,  or 
darkness  here  or  there,  and  colors  more  and  more  in  evidence, 
along  with  apparent  movement,  and  eyes  forming,  as  if  closed 
in  sleep ;  and  as  the  picture  finished,  the  eyes  were  widely  open, 
as  in  wake  from  sleep,  or  to  emphasize  “Dawn  of  (his)  Awakened 
Mind,”  and  before  me,  as  natural  as  he  could  be,  I  saw  and  recog¬ 
nized  the  face  of  William  T.  Stead,  who  wrote  through  the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone,  near  Buffalo,  at  4.30  p.  m.,  18th  April, 
that  he  would  try  and  show  himself  to  me ;  and  who  that  same 
night  at  10  p.  m.  came  from  the  cabinet  at  Jonson’s  in  Toledo, 
western  side  of  Ohio  State ;  in  transient  body,  clothed  as  he  is  in 
this  spirit  picture  of  him,  and  crossed  the  room  to  me,  to  prove 
as  he  has  once  more  done,  that  he,  my  friend  and  co-worker,  in 
human  life,  still  lives  and  returns,  and  thus  proves  continuity. 
He  surely  fulfilled  his  promise  to  meet  me  in  Chicago. 

On  the  following  day  another  message  came  from  the  same 
source,  hundreds  of  miles  distant,  and  from  it  I  also  quote. 

“Well  brother  King  he  sure  I’ll  bring  you  every  proof  I  can” 

(prediction) . “I  am  glad  the  artist  of  Bangs  sisters 

pictured  me”  (prediction  fulfilled)  ....  “and  the  whole  of  us 
together  decided  that  my  picture  would  be  of  use  to  your  hook, 
as  it  would  go  to  show  that  it  is  true  that  I,  a  discarnate  spirit, 
known  through  press  to  many  men,  may  so  come  back  m  touch 
with  life,  and  show  my  face  to  them.  More  dreadful  than  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


265 


wave  that  struck  my  life  from  me  with  final  blow,  is  that  great 
hatred  of  this  truth,  that  we  dear  brother  King  are  trying  hard 
to  make  the  living  see  ....  but  smiles  of  God’s  approving 
son  will  be  with  us  who  suffer  most;  and  we  are  both  of  us  upheld 
as  by  an  angel  host;  and  naught  can  conquer  us  who  are  upheld 
by  truth’s  great  majesty.  In  all  thy  work,  I  am  with  thee.” 

Hypatia,  whose  form,  voice,  and  personality  have  been  observed 
by  many  hundreds  of  people  in  America,  as  well  as  by  a  well- 
known  author  in  England,  gave  me  her  views  regarding  the  spirit 
picture  of  Mr.  Stead,  by  utilizing  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone, 
and  those  views  are  recorded  here. 

“Beloved  one.  I’ll  try  to  tell  how  it  was  done.  Rembrandt  in 
spirit  paints  the  picture  here,  and  it  is  held  aloft  in  psychic  ray, 
and  on  the  canvas  is  repeated,  so  the  colors  come  to  stay.  Hermes 
the  lezntation  nder,  of  the  earthly  powers  to  do,  repeats  exactly 
on  the  canvas,  what  Rembrandt  tells  him  to.  It  is  done  by  a 
repeating  from  light  to  heavy  tone.  The  short  waves  become 

long  waves . Hermes  like  a  town  clock,  keeps  time  exact 

in  key  with  Rembrandt  like  a  Swiss  watch  held,  so  it  shows  to 
him.  Hermes  like  a  set  picture  of  fireworks,  does  so  attune  him¬ 
self,  that  he  can  be  repeater  of  the  thing  that  he  in  Rembrandt’s 
picture  sees.  It  is  like  clay-moulder,  copying  a  picture  shown  to 
him.  Rembrandt  the  composer,  and  levitation  key  ruled  by  this 
being  Hefmes,  at  once  responds  to  him.  ’Tis  process  very  beauti¬ 
ful,  and  much  admired  by  me,  and  I  encourage  you  to  say  ’twas 
free  from  fraud  in  every  way.  Let  critics  talk,  I  look  on  with 
pride,  and  aid  you  through  to  prove  to  men  that  it  was  true.” 

From  Hermes  (a  levitation  spirit). 

“Hermes  I  am,  Bangs  sisters  did  not  do  it.  The  artist  could 
not  do  it,  though  wise  he  be.  I  Hermes  help  the  labor,  I  do  it 
with  a  tone  of  heavier  octave  than  is  now  Rembrandt’ s  ozvn. 
Light  is  a  wave  of  substance,  and  I  from  nature’s  own  great 
kingdom  of  the  clay  kinds,  make  pigments  of  my  own.  I  do  it, 
as  Marconi  tower  I  make  myself  to  be,  and  what  Rembrandt 
suggests  as  best,  I  answer  real  to  him,  or  in  the  tone  of  painting 
that  is  preserved  by  thee.” 


266 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


At  2.15  p.  m.,  10th  June,  1912,  a  spirit  intelligence  who  signed 
his  name  as  Rev.  Theodore  Parker  wrote:  “I  wish  to  give  this 
word  to  you  that  I  believe  that  it  is  true  all  you  have  said;  and 
if  I  can,  I’ll  aid  to  so  enlighten  man,  that  men  abroad  in  every 
land  shall  look  at  it,  and  understand  what  had  been  as  mist  before, 
will  come  out  clear  and  plain ;  and  you  will  be  successful  in 
trying  to  explain.  Bangs  sisters  are  not  fraudulent.  I  stood 
where  I  could  see,  and  I  approve  of  what  you’ve  done  in  eveiy 
degree.  For  all  eternity  the  men  of  enlightened  thought  will 
proudly  speak  of  thee ;  and  as  I  feel  great  love  for  you,  receive 
this  word  from  me.” 

A  Criticism  of  William  T.  Stead’s  Spirit  Picture  by 
E.  J.  B.  Duncan,  a  Relative  of  Him. 

“Toronto,  23rd  February,  1913. 

To  John  S.  King,  M.D. 

Elliott  House,  Toronto. 

Dear  Sir:  —  You  are  authorized  to  use  my  letter  of  18th 
December,  1912,  to  you,  in  your  coming  book,  in  connection  with 
the  picture  of  William  T.  Stead,  giving  it,  or  rather  a  truthful 
copy  of  it,  and  without  making  any  change  in  its  wording. 

Yours  very  sincerely, 

E.  J.  B.  Duncan.” 

“Toronto,  18th  December,  1912. 

Dr.  John  S.  King, 

Toronto. 

My  Dear  Sir  :  —  I  have  now  before  me  a  large  picture,  pur¬ 
porting  to  be  one  of  my  cousin,  the  late  W.  T.  Stead ;  and  a 
photograph,  said  to  be  taken  from  same.  I  do  not  consider  either 
the  picture  or  photograph  to  be  a  faithful  likeness  of  my  late 
cousin,  although  there  is  a  very  strong  suggestion  of  his  face,  in 
both  of  them,  particularly  in  the  expression  about  the  eyes,  and 
in  the  firm  set  of  the  mouth.  I  may  further  say  that  the  moment 
I  saw  the  large  picture,  I  knew  at  once  it  was,  or  at  least  was 
intended  to  be,  one  of  my  late  cousin.  It  is  five  years  since  I 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


267 


last  saw  him;  and  I  further  understand,  the  picture  referred  to 
is  alleged  to  be  a  spirit  picture,  and  not  one  of  a  living  human. 

Yours  very  sincerely, 

E.  J.  B.  Duncan.” 

[Note:  —  On  the  occasion  of  Mr.  Duncan’s  view  of  the  spirit 
painting  of  Stead,  he  exhibited  a  photograph  of  Stead  procured 
some  five  years  previously  which  served  him  in  his  critique.  When 
Stead  came  to  me  accompanied  by  Julia  Ames,  his  guide,  in  the 
seance  held  by  Mrs.  Wells,  he  appeared  with  features  more  nearly 
resembling  the  photograph  than  the  spirit  painting;  while  else¬ 
where  in  the  book  he  (Stead)  especially  calls  my  attention  to 
the  fact  that  he  so  appeared  to  illustrate  that  his  features  at 
that  time  were  correct  on  the  photograph,  just  as  at  the  present 
time  his  features  are  equally  true  to  the  complete  spirit  painting. 
J.  S.K.] 


Julia  Ames,  Stead’s  Alleged  Guide. 

It  was  not  long  after  the  foregoing  letter,  and  our  conversation, 
that  Stead’s  alleged  guide,  Julia  Ames,  was  heard  from  as  follows : 

2  p.  m.  21st  Feby.  1913.  From  Julia  Ames.  “I  am  Julia  Ames. 
I  write  today  to  Dr.  King.  It  is  not\  a  very  desirable  work  to  he 
an  author.  It  islike  a  soldier  baring  his  brecLSt  to  his  enemy’s  lance. 
He  must  do  his  best,  and  wait  for  the  smile  or  frown  of  a  fickle 
public.  I  approve  of  the  remarks  you  have  made  regarding  the 
spirit  picture  of  Mr.  Stead.  It  is  true  to  his  appearance,  as  he  is. 
I  was  there  when  it  was  painted.  There  are  many  living  mortals 
with  psychic  gifts,  so  it  is  foolish  for  any  sensitive  to  say  I  am 
the  only  one  through  whom  this  individual  communicates.  It 
would  be  like  a  pen  saying  I  am  the  only  instrument  so  used. 
Psychics  are  to  us  instruments,  and  we  use  them  according  to 
their  capacity  to  serve  us,  be  they  black  or  white,  be  they  ignorant 
or  wise.  Wisdom  in  a  psychic,  especially  a  conscious  one,  is 
often  a  disadvantage,  because  their  wishes  interfere  with  zuhat 
the  spirits  may  desire  to  do.  I’d  not  use  a  psychic  at  all  if  I  had 
my  choice.  I  would  instead  communicate  directly  to  the  indiz’idual 
addressed  by  me;  but  we  are  limited  in  our  capacity,  and  all  we 
do,  is  aided  or  zvithheld  by  acts  of  men,  when  we  make  instru- 


268 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


merits  of  them.  You  'mil  do  much  to  aid  humanity  to  grasp, 
and  understand  this  truth,  that  we  the  souls  departed  come  again 
to  he,  by  aid  of  sensitives  in  touch  'with  thee. 

Health  and  good  mental  power  is  to  be  granted  to  you,  and 
angels  near  will  guide  you  through  to  what  you  really  •wish  to 
do.  Displeasure  may  be  aroused  in  small  degree,  but  most  of  it 
will  come  from  jealousy.  I’d  have  'written  when  Mr.  Stead  did, 
but  the  medium  was  too  ill  and  tired  to  “write  more  that  day. 

May  peace  and  joy  attend  thee,  all  the  way,  is  wish  of  me, 
guide  of  thy  friend,  stranger  to  thee.” 

[A  few  selections  from  messages,  from  over  seventy  received 
from  Stead,  will  be  found  in  Chapter  XXXI ;  while  some  direct 
communicating  will  be  found  recorded  in  Chapter  XXXIV.] 

Regarding  Mr.  Stead’s  picture,  each  reader  will  form  his  or 
her  own  opinion,  and  will  be  entitled  to  know  mine.  Had  he 
in  mortal  life  selected  the  best  two  artists  in  Europe  or  America 
to  paint  his  portrait  and  bust,  I  think  it  will  be  conceded  that, 
even  with  the  same  pose  for  each  of  them,  and  working  from 
the  same  point  of  view,  they  would  neither  of  them  be  an  exact 
duplicate  of  the  man,  nor  yet  a  perfect  duplicate  the  one  of  the 
other. 

I  think  it  will  likewise  be  granted,  that  no  artist  whosoever 
could  produce  his  second  picture  of  either  the  mortal  subject,  or 
the  original  painting  of  him,  doing  it  entirely  from  memory.  So 
too  it  will  be  readily  conceded  that  no  two  photographers  can 
produce  under  similar  circumstances,  a  picture  which  will  dupli¬ 
cate  the  other  photograph  in  every  detail.  But  the  similarity 
of  picture,  and  its  original,  constantly  undergoes  change,  so  that 
if  we  were,  a  year  or  two  later,  to  make  the  comparison,  this 
difference  would  be  more  apparent,  even  strikingly  so  with  the 
constantly  changing  original,  as  the  years  pass  away;  so  that  it 
is  in  ordinary  experience,  often  changed  to  so  marked  a  degree, 
as  to  cause  doubt  to  arise  in  the  observer’s  mind  as  to  whether 
two  pictures  represent  the  same  original. 

In  the  absence  of  two  such  pictures  of  the  late  Mr.  Stead, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


269 


while  a  mortal,  I  have  illustrated  this  assertion  by  giving  a  photo¬ 
graph  picture  of  myself  at  the  age  of  65  years,  which  will  be 
found  at  the  end  of  this  chapter;  and  another  one  at  the  age  of 
70  years,  at  the  beginning  of  the  book.  But  supposing  the  spirit 
picture  in  all  its  natural  coloring — from  which  this  half-tone 
photo-engraving  is  made  —  to  be  a  copy  of  another  painting,  or 
an  original,  then  challenge  its  production,  and  prove  my  state¬ 
ments  wrong.  Until  that  is  done,  I  rely  on  Stead’s  statement  that 
no  such  picture  is  in  existence.  The  pictures  everywhere  recognized 
as  Stead’s,  were  pictures  of  him  in  mortal  life,  at  different  times. 
Nor  am  I  aware  that  spirit  artists  ever  make  pictures  of  men  in 
earth  life;  or  if  so  I  have  not  knowledge  of  it  as  a  fact.  Stead’s 
picture  had  not  prior  existence  ;  but  it  was  produced  in  conformity 
with  a  promise  made  to  me  by  himself  as  a  spirit,  and  its  produc¬ 
tion  was  complete  in  my  presence  a  fortnight  after  he  passed  to 
spirit  life,  in  a  manner  already  described  by  me.  He  has  confirmed 
this  as  fact  through  the  trumpet  and  in  the  hearing  of  others. 

A  Brief  Synopsis  of  tpie  Author’s  Varied  Experiences  with 

THF  Spirit  Personality  of  Wm.  T.  Stead,  up  to  the  Close 

of  the  Year  1912. 

1.  Stead  began  to  give  messages  to  me,  through  the  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone,  on  16th  April,  1912,  in  New  York  State,  and 
up  to  the  close  of  the  year  1912,  I  had  received  many  messages 
from  him;  and  corroborative  testimony,  from  Julia  Ames,  his 
spirit  guide  and  control,  and  from  others. 

2.  Stead  sent  a  message  to  me  at  4.30  p.  m.,  18th  April,  1912, 
that  he  would  try  and  show  to  me.  He  materialized  to  me  that 
same  night  at  10  p.  m.  in  Jonson’s  seance  in  Toledo,  Western 
Ohio  State,  as  he  had  promised  me  from  New  York  State, 
between  five  and  six  hours  before,  although  I  did  not  receive  the 
promise  till  next  day  through  the  mail. 

3.  I  sat  for  spirit  pictures  in  Chicago,  Illinois,  and  Stead  met 
me  there  as  promised,  in  the  home  of  the  psychic  sisters,  on  the 
afternoon  of  the  27th  April,  1912;  and  his  picture  came  on 
canvas  clear,  and  was  finished  while  I  sat  a  little  less  than 
fifteen  minutes. 


270 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


4.  On  the  2nd  of  August,  1912,  through  the  psychic’s  hand  in 
New  York  State,  Stead  wrote  and  signed  his  name  to  the  state¬ 
ment:  “I  will  try  to  communicate  with  you  through  a  trumpet 
tomorrow  morning.” 

5.  On  the  3rd  day  of  August,  1912,  through  a  trumpet,  also 
in  New  York  State,  as  promised  the  previous  day,  but  in  a  new 
home,  and  in  the  presence  of  a  trumpet  psychic,  who  was  under 
the  control  of  Gray  Feather,  the  strong  Indian  control  of  Jonson, 
who  had  invited  me  by  a  letter  also,  to  come  there  (Lily  Dale), 
and  be  witness  of  what  he  (Gray  Feather)  could  do.  Of  the 
sixteen  spirit  voices  which  came  and  spoke  with  me  Stead  was 
one;  and  he  there  reminded  me  of  the  previous  promise  he  had 
made  the  day  before,  regarding  this  effort  of  his. 

6.  When  I  was  through  with  the  above  seance,  I  immediately 
returned  to  the  home  of  the  writing  psychic;  and  Stead  was 
again  present  with  me  there,  and  controlled  her  hand  to  write: 
“My  name  I  gave  to  you  through  the  trumpet  successfully,  did 
I  not?”  I  there  and  then  acknowledged  it  to  be  so. 

7.  In  Los  Angeles,  California,  on  20th  December,  1912,  a 
communication  was  written  me  by  Rev.  B.  F.  Austin,  A.M.,  B.A., 
D.D.,  and  forwarded  to,  and  received  by  me  through  the  mails, 
to  say :  “Dear  Brother  King :  I  am  going  to  give  you  in  detail 
the  circumstances  of  my  sitting  today  with  Mrs.  Inez  Wagner 
of  the  People’s  Church,  to  secure  an  answer  to  your  letter.” 
(Without  any  clue  contained.)  “Mrs.  Wagner  was  thoroughly 
blindfolded  by  me,  before  the  sitting  began.  Leather  pads  over 
the  eyes,  and  a  bandage  over  these,  and  about  the  head.  She 
first  read  a  letter  from  a  lawyer  in  Syracuse,  New  York,  and  it 
was  done  in  a  very  remarkable  manner.  Then  your  letter  was 
taken  up  and  extracted  from  the  envelope”  (addressed  to  him  at 
Rochester).  “It  had  been  opened  in  Rochester,  but  had  not  been 
opened  since  its  arrival  here,  as  I  wanted  to  guard  against 
telepathic  influence  on  the  medium’s  mind,  and  placed  between 
the  medium’s  palms.”  (His  family  lived  in  Rochester.)  “‘Why,’ 
she  exclaimed  at  once,  ‘Stead  is  here,  and  so  is  Julia.  Stead 
says  he  wishes  to  answer  this  letter.  He  has  written  to  Dr.  John 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


271 


S.  King  many  messages  himself.  He  says  ‘on  the  18th  of  last 
April  I  wrote  a  message,  and  presented  myself  to  Dr.  King.’  ” 
(My  records  prove  both  statements  true.)  “In  Julia’s  Bureau, 
England,  matters  were  given  pertaining  to  Dr.  King.’’  The  letter 
goes  on  to  report,  “King  had  communication  with  Stead  from 
the  Bureau  in  England,  and’’  (for  copy  of  minute  of  what  occurred, 
see  Chapter  VIII),  “Stead  now  says,  ‘I  wish  to  corroborate. 
I  will  come  again  and  give  more  messages,  and  these  I  will 
corroborate.’  At  the  close,  Mrs.  Wagner,  still  entranced,  said, 
‘Why,  here  comes  another  John  King,  but  no  relation  of  the  Mr. 
King  getting  the  message.’ 

You  can  judge  how  surprised  and  delighted  I  was  in  reading 
your  letter,  after  the  seance  was  over;  and  finding  many  if  not 
all  the  points  touched  on,  and  answered.  Doubtless  there  may 
be  some  slight  errors  in  writing  out  from  memoranda;  but  I 
think  you  will  find  the  main  points  answered  satisfactorily.  The 
medium  read  the  word  as  from  Stead’s  lips,  ‘corroborate/  which 
I  also  find  in  your  letter.  With  best  wishes. 

Fraternally, 

B.  F.  Austin.” 

8.  On  24th  December,  1912, 1  spent  an  hour  of  first  experience 
with  a  lady-psychic  in  Ohio,  who  is  a  non-professional  medium, 
and  while  there  some  twenty  forms  appeared  to  view  and  also 
spoke,  some  of  whom  I  had  known  in  earth  life,  and  others  by 
reputation.  But  the  phase  of  the  medium  was  to  me  quite  new, 
still  the  first  guests  who  came  were  —  and  of  this  there  could 
be  no  doubt  in  mind  —  my  own  spirit  wife  and  daughter,  and 
William  Stead  and  Julia.  What  was  most  peculiar,  the  psychic 
was  not  entranced,  and  conversed  with  me,  while  the  guests  were 
arriving  and  departing.  The  spirit  friends  came  to  me  in  what 
appeared  to  be  their  transient  bodies,  though  I  did  not  examine 
any  of  them.  Their  mode  of  coming  also  varied.  Some  walked 
out  from  the  cabinet,  some  arose  from  the  floor,  some  from  the 
walls  and  ceiling,  but  all  conversed  with  me ;  and  departed  like 
a  puff  of  smoke  or  steam,  on  a  frosty  morning.  One  who  came 
was  William  Stead,  who  simply  announced  “Stead  is  here.”  He 


272 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


was  accompanied  by  Julia  Ames,  his  guide;  and  when  I  saw  him, 
he  was  high  up  to  my  left,  where  the  wall  and  ceiling  meet. 
He  looked  his  natural  size,  and  his  face  and  bust  were  like  his 
photograph  of  five  or  six  years  ago;  and  he  spoke  to  me,  but 
when  he  ceased  to  talk,  went  with  a  whirl  across  the  room’s  space 
near  to  me ;  and  passed  on  through  the  right  hand  wall. 

9.  On  the  26th  December,  1912,  I  called  upon  a  doctor  in 
Toledo,  Ohio,  in  whose  office  I  had  never  been  before ;  and  while 
we  were  conversing  my  friend,  the  doctor,  said ;  “I  have  clair- 
audient  gift”;  and  he  wrote  what  follows  with  his  pencil  and 
handed  it  to  me:  “Well  I  am  William  Stead,  and  I  will  tell  you 
Dr.  King  you  are  mistaken ;  Professor  James  did  not  lack  con¬ 
fidence,  he  was  too  weak.  Myers  was  also  too  weak.  I  will  try 
and  write  for  you  the  first  opportunity  I  have.”  [The  efforts  above 
referred  to  were  made  in  a  Jonson  seance  on  the  23rd  December, 
1912.  Failure  to  write  I  called  want  of  confidence  in  their  power. 
The  intention  was  to  write  upon  my  office  pad,  with  my  fountain 
pen.] 

10.  On  the  27th,  28th  and  29th  December,  1912,  while  in  the 
home  in  New  York  State  of  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  Stead 
wrote  me  several  messages ;  and  conversed  by  aid  of  the  psychic’s 
hand;  and  his  spirit  guide,  Julia  Ames,  also  wrote  me  to  cor¬ 
roborate  the  evidence  regarding  Stead’s  picture,  and  his  many 
messages  to  me.  I  have  no  doubt  that  my  corresponding  friend, 
Wm.  T.  Stead,  who  has  sent  me  many  messages,  also  materialized 
to  me,  as  well  as  spoke  distinctly  as  a  natural  voice,  now  visits 
me ;  and  thus  writes,  talks  and  shows  himself  in  different  parts 
of  the  country  and  through  different  psychics,  in  accordance  with 
his  desires  as  expressed  in  a  written  message  which  is  one  of 
many  included  in  the  pages  of  this  book: 

“'Tis  zvell  that  relatives  and  friends,  and  mediums  of  every 
phase  shotdd  know  and  realize,  that  all  spirits  are  free  to  come, 
and  do  so  too,  through  more  doors  than  one;  as  they  know  no 
selfishness,  nor  jealousy,  as  humans  may,  but  have  the  good  of 
all  in  view.’* 

In  my  final  revision  of  this  book,  before  its  publication ;  and 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


273 


when  concluding  this  chapter,  I  felt  thei»e  was  much  additional 
evidence,  which  I  could  now  add,  as  secured  since  the  chapter 
was  written.  Such  evidence  corroborates  that  which  I  received 
through  various  communications  and  demonstrations ;  and  were 
spoken  through  the  trumpets  of  two  mediums,  strangers  to  each 
other ;  as  well  as  some  which  were  entirely  new,  through  an  auto¬ 
matic  writer,  I  have  not  as  yet  met.  My  private  sittings  were 
about  a  score,  at  which  Stead  talked  with  me ;  and  half  as  many 
more  at  least  when  he  talked  with  others  present  also,  as  well 
as  myself. 

Communications  purporting  to  be  Stead’s  will  be  found  in 
remaining  chapters,  together  with  his  handwriting  of  three  com¬ 
munications  on  slates,  which  I  held  in  my  hands,  felt  the  vibra¬ 
tions,  and  heard  the  sounds  as  he  was  writing  them ;  and  w'hich 
are  in  a  group  of  photo-engravings  in  the  “Independent  Slate 
Writing  Addenda,”  w'hich  embraces  over  a  score  of  such  writings, 
immediately  following  Chapter  XXXV. 

In  some  cases,  among  the  many  messages  signed  by  W.  T. 
Stead,  I  found  statements  which  bore  in  their  construction,  what 
impressed  me  as  probably  evidential  matter ;  but  owing  to  lack 
of  corroboration  from  any  source  I  did  not  include  them  in  the 
book.  As  examples  of  these  I  quote  briefly.  From  a  long  com¬ 
munication  (No.  17)  dated  15th  May,  1912;  "I  think  it  is  true, 
about  my  writing  through  Mrs.  Joslin’s  hand;  and  also  about 
my  appearing  in  the  seance  at  Rothesay,  as  I  threzu  my  condition 
over  the  medium  there.”  Again  in  the  same  communication  I  find 
this  sentence :  ‘T  did  not  tell  the  band  to  play  ‘Nearer  my  God  to 
Thee,’  but  they  did  plav  it;  and  that  tune  is  ever  present  with 
me  yet.”  Another  quoted  sentence  reads :  ‘‘I  had  no  premonition 
of  any  kind,  regarding  death  or  calamity.” 

In  the  evening  of  the  day  specified  in  the  foregoing,  I  sought 
to  reach  my  friend  Stead,  as  I  have  for  a  long  time  reached  my 
chief  guide ;  and  within  48  hours  I  received  through  the  mail  this 
written  message;  ‘‘Wafted  to  me  like  a  zephyr  is  this  thought 
now.  Brother  King,  8.15  p.m.  (15th  May)  1912.  I  feel  your 
presence  here.  W.  T.  Stead.”  Immediately  following  I  read  his 


274 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND, 


expressed  view  or  admonition,  which  is  as  follows :  “Regarding 
your  capacity  to  send  your  subconscious  out  of  your  body,  it  is 
interesting,  but  I  believe  it  is  unwise  to  practice  it.”  [This  was  of 
course  known  to  myself,  but  not  publicly  known  at  that  time. 
My  chief  guide  and  members  of  my  spirit  band  were  aware  of 
it  from  the  first,  and  consented  to  my  demonstrating  it  as  a  truth, 
in  the  presence  of  a  circle  of  Toronto  investigators,  all  of  whom 
knew  me ;  and  as  is  set  forth  more  in  detail  in  Chapter 
XXXV.] 


THE  AUTHOR— JOHN  S.  KING,  M.  U. 
(At  the  Age  of  65  Years.) 


I., 


THE  AUTHOR— JOHN  S.  KING,  M.  U. 
(At  the  Age  of  60  Years.) 


CHAPTER  XXXI 


An  Evidential  Chapter,  of  Strong  Testimony. 

A  Long  List  of  Volunteer  Witnesses. 

Evidence  for  Truth  of  Life's  Continuity, 

Return  and  Communication,  in  Perpetuity. 

Are  Not  My  Loved  Ones,  Who  Have  Proved  to  Me; 
And  My  Spirit  Guides,  and  Others  Near, 
Including  Noted  Ones,  Who  no  Longer  Fear, 
Bringing  to  Mankind  Good  Cheer? 

Are  Not  Work  and  Book  Endorsed  by  Them, 

As  Coming  from  the  Spirit  Sphere? 

The  Evidence  Bids  Strong  for  Coming  Change, 
From  Base  Desire,  and  Sordid  Greeds, 

From  Selfish  Wants,  and  Warring  Creeds, 

To  Waking  Minds,  to  Truth  and  Human  Needs. 
From  War,  Distrust,  Unrighteousness, 

To  Peace,  with  Knowledge,  and  Pure  Happiness, 
To  Trust  in  God's  Own  Fatherhood, 

To  Faith  in  Man’s  True  Brotherhood; 

When  All  Humanity  Will  Know  and  Realize, 
Immortal  Life  Awaits  Them  in  the  Skies. 


WHENCE  the  origin  of  all  the  thought,  which  herein¬ 
after  is  to  be  found,  clad  in  great  variety  of  expressive 
language  ?  It  courses  through  the  automatic  writing- 
hand  of  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  as  the  web  of  cloth, 
gathered  from  the  scattered  threads,  emerges  from  the  weaver’s 
loom.  Each  thread  would  seem  to  have  different  origin,  in  either 
carnate,  or  discarnate  mind. 

To  each  reader  is  left  the  solution  of  the  problems  of  whence, 
and  why.  From  the  hundreds  of  messages  received,  as  intended 
for  me,  either  in  my  presence  voluntarily,  or  in  quick  response 
to  my  questioning;  or  in  my  absence  from  the  psychic,  and 

275 


276 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


by  her  sent  on  to  me  through  the  mails,  containing  specific 
knowledge  which  she  could  not  possess ;  but  all  alleged  to  be 
from  discarnate  intelligences,  whose  signatures  are  attached  to 
them ;  and  I  reproduce  here  but  the  few,  leaving  others  for  the 
pages  of  other  books,  or  held  by  me  personally. 

Suffice  it  to  say,  that  when  any  alleged  intelligence  is  writing 
through  the  psychic,  it  will  promptly  respond  tO'  my  previously 
prepared  questions,  by  immediately  writing  answers ;  and  these 
are  frequently  a  test  of  personality ;  but  necessitating  an  infinite 
range  or  extent  of  personal  knowledge,  supremely  greater  than 
is  the  possession  of  any  single  individual  human  mind.  This 
holds  good  whether  I  am  present  to  receive  them ;  or  absent, 
and  they  are  sent  to  me;  and  this  likewise  applies  to  those  who 
passed  from  earth-life  before  the  psychic  was  born.  Universal 
knowledge  is  surely  not  the  possession  of  any  individual  human. 

The  messages  as  here  collated,  embrace,  as  I  verily  believe, 
great  variety  of  source ;  and  are  alleged  to  be  from  those  whose 
earthly  homes  in  life  were  found  in  countries  widely  separated 
in  both  time  and  place.  Some  were  of  recent  times,  and  some 
were  of  the  long  ago ;  some  were  near  and  dear  to  me,  such  as 
parents,  wife  and  child,  and  other  relatives,  as  well  as  former 
friends,  and  public  men  of  my  time ;  while  some  were  those  of 
ancient  dates,  and  long  sojourn  in  spirit  realm.  Again  some  of 
the  alleged  personalities  who  spoke  through  the  vocal  organs  of 
Mrs.  Piper  in  the  years  gone  by,  to  investigators  of  that  time, 
now  desire  to  communicate  with  me ;  as  those  same  investigators, 
gone  to  the  spirit  sphere,  wish  themselves  to  do  so  now  with 
me ;  and  the  solution  of  the  problem  as  thereby  presented  may 
engage  the  best  thought  and  judgment  of  the  supporters  of  the 
two  hypotheses.  The  claim  of  some  is  that  the  thought  and 
expressions  of  the  alleged  personalities  have  their  true  origin 
in  the  incarnate  mind  of  the  psychic  instrument  herself ;  while 
that  of  others  is  that  the  alleged  messages  have -in  truth  discarnate 
origin;  and  are  suggested  by  the  discarnate  spirit  to  the  subjective 
mind  of  the  psychic,  and  are  transmitted  in  the  same  way  as 
those  which  have  their  origin  in  the  mind  of  the  incarnate  psychic. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


277 


As  in  the  case  of  a  careless  stenographer,  what  may  be  spoken 
to  her  may  not  be  rightly  interpreted,  or  fully  comprehended, 
and  thus  results  error  of  record,  or  change  of  view  from  that 
sought  to  be  conveyed  —  so  in  the  conveyance  by  the  psychic’s 
operation  messages  are  sometimes  modified  or  changed  by  acci¬ 
dent  or  misinterpretation,  of  suggested  thought  by  psychic’s 
subjective  mind,  as  in  the  case  of  the  stenographer’s  objective 
mind ;  or  the  constantly  recurring  instances  through  the  receiver 
of  your  telephone,  where  the  organ  ear  ofttimes  conveys  an 
erroneous  suggested  thought  to  your  own  objective  mind.  All 
psychics  are  not  clairaudient.  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone’’ 
has  that  phase,  so  when  she  hears  a  message  by  her  spirit  ear, 
she  stops  writing;  and  while  she  writes  a  spirit  message,  she 
ceases  to  hear  it. 

I  leave  each  reader  to  decide  for  himself  or  herself  the  problem 
of  hypothesis,  first  bearing  in  mind  the  fact  that  of  these  same 
personalities,  some  of  them  have  materialized,  and  with  the 
vocal  organs  of  their  transient  bodies,  have  assured  me  that  they 
wrote  through  the  automatic  hand  certain  messages  to  me ;  and 
likewise  through  different  trumpets  conversed  with  me.  Some 
have  used  four  or  more  psychics,  in  as  many  widely  separated 
places,  utilizing  their  different  phases  to  convince  me  of  their 
personality.  In  the  case  of  Wm.  T.  Stead,  he  utilized  psychics 
of  seven  distinct  phases ;  and  communicated  with  me  through 
fourteen  different  instruments  or  mediums ;  the  evidence  through 
all  of  whom  harmonizes,  and  one  part  the  other  corroborates ; 
and  predictions  made  through  one  instrument  found  fulfillment 
through  another.  The  last  door  that  I  opened  for  him  to  com¬ 
municate  with  me  was  the  independent  slate-writing  door ;  and  he 
came  to  me  through  it,  three  times  in  two  days.  His  communica¬ 
tions  as  written  on  the  slates  have  been  photo-engraved  and 
reproduced  in  the  Addenda,  along  with  others,  at  the  end  of  the 
book.  His  purpose  throughout,  I  am  convinced,  has  been  to  give 
me  conclusive  evidence,  that  as  a  discarnate  spirit  he  could  return 
and  communicate  with  me,  and  fully  establish  his  human  per¬ 
sonality. 


278 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


These  are  the  dififerent  psychical  phases,  and  the  various 
instruments  or  mediums  utilized  by  the  spirit  Wm.  T.  Stead ; 
while  the  other  spirits  made  use  of  two  or  more  of  them,  and 
hence  they  are  listed  here  for  future  reference. 

A.  Automatic-Writers. 

1 .  Miss  Maud  Venice  Gates — Lily  Dale,  N.  Y. 

2.  Mrs.  Arnold — Scarboro  on  the  Hudson,  N.  Y. 

3.  Mrs.  Jennie  Crossley — St.  Louis,  Mo. 

B.  Materializing  and  Physical  Mediums. 

4.  J.  B.  Jonson — Toledo,  Ohio. 

5.  Mrs.  Harry  Wells — Toledo,  Ohio. 

C.  Trumpet  Mediums  —  for  spirit  speaking  and  singing. 

6.  Mrs.  Bartholomew — Lily  Dale,  N.  Y.,  and  Lake  Helen, 

Fla. 

7.  Dell  Herrick — Lily  Dale,  N.  Y.,  and  Boston,  Mass. 

8.  Hugh  Gordon  Burroughs — Chicago,  Ill. 

D.  Spirit  Painting. 

9.  Bangs  Sisters — Chicago,  Ill. 

E.  Clairaudience. 

10.  Dr.  U.  S.  Grant  Deaton — Toledo,  Ohio. 

F.  Trance  Speakers. 

11.  Mrs.  Inez  Wagner — Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

12.  Mrs.  Maggie  Turner — Lily  Dale,  N.  Y. 

13.  Mrs.  C.  Smith — Toronto,  Ontario. 

G.  Independent  Slate- Writing. 

14.  Pierre  L.  O.  A.  Keeler — Lily  Dale,  N.  Y.,  and  Wash¬ 

ington,  D.  C. 

For  particular  records  of  Wm.  T.  Stead’s  evidence,  consult 
Chapter  XXX,  and  also  the  Addenda,  and  other  chapters  devoted 
to  seances,  some  of  which  records  precede  and  some  follow  this 
statement. 

The  value  of  such  evidence  so  attainable,  is  enhanced  by  a 
knowledge  of  the  fact  that  some  of  the  messages  and  conversa¬ 
tions  were  spoken,  not  only  in  my  presence,  but  in  the  hearing  of 
others;  as  well  as  in  my  absence,  the  intelligence  making  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


279 


request  of  some  one  present  who  knew  me,  to  convey  certain 
information  to  me,  in  my  home.  (See  latter  part  of  Chapter 
VIII.)  From  Hypatia;  and  afterwards,  other  guides,  my  wife, 
Wm.  T.  Stead  and  others  did  likewise. 

In  the  foregoing  instances,  the  theories  or  hypotheses  of  mind¬ 
reading,  telepathy,  thought-transference  or  fraud  in  the  psychic’s 
mind,  cannot  account  for  it,  and  are  proven  untenable.  Besides 
other  persons  who  were  present  with  me  in  the  materializing 
seances  not  only  saw  the  forms  of  my  wife  and  daughter,  Hypatia, 
my  guide,  and  others  who  appeared ;  and  also  who  heard  our 
conversation ;  and  heard  them  refer  to  what  they  wrote  to  me 
through  the  writing  psychic ;  or  said  to  me  recently  through  the 
trumpet;  but  also  what  they  said  to  me  while  they,  my  friends, 
were  present  with  me,  when  speaking  through  the  trumpet.  This 
has  also  occurred  frequently  in  the  case  of  trumpet  seances. 

Assume  if  you  will  that  the  automatic  writer  is  not  only  a 
scholarly  person,  but  also  very  clever  as  well,  and  with  it  all 
is  fraudulent;  then  turn  to  Chapter  XXHI,  and  carefully  read 
each  question  which  I  had  previously  prepared  in  writing,  and 
read  separately  to  the  psychic ;  and  further,  note  each  answer 
which  follows  immediately,  in  rapidly  written  words  by  the 
psychic’s  hand ;  and  can  you  think  it  possible  for  her  to  evolve 
from  the  subjective  mind  of  her  carnate  self  the  thoughts  there 
embodied  as  her  own? 

.  Again,  refer  to  the  following  Chapter  XXIV,  my  questions 
to  the  alleged  philosophers  (likewise  prepared)  and  note  the 
profoundness  of  the  replies,  which  one  could  scarcely  credit  as 
being  instantly  recorded,  without  time  to  mature  thought;  and 
does  it  appear  reasonable  to  credit  those  answers  to  the  psychic’s 
own  mind? 

All  rendered  music  betrays  the  kind  of  instrument  through 
which  the  harmonious  sounds  are  evolved,  and  doubtless  the 
written  expressions  of  the  psychic  are  sometimes  mixed  with 
the  transmitted  thoughts,  impinging  upon  the  psychic’s  subjective 
mind,  as  the  smoothness  of  the  stream  is  modified  by  the  nature 
of  the  surface  of  the  channel  through  which  the  water  flows. 


280 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Again,  I  will  admit  that  where  the  psychic  may  have  a  motive 
in  view,  such  may  purposely  or  even  unconsciously  interweave 
her  own  thoughts,  with  a  view  of  making  them  appear  as  the 
thought  of  the  intelligence  who  is  writing  the  message,  but 
thoughts  so  committed  to  writing  are  usually  evident ;  as  is  the 
case  when  a  person  is  speaking  into  the  ’phone,  and  a  friend 
who  is  near  may  interject  a  word  or  sentence,  to  create  a  certain 
impression  upon  the  mind  of  the  listening  one  at  the  receiving 
’phone.  In  such  case  where  I  suspect  the  psychic,  when  feasible 
I  resort  to  other  instruments,  to  test  the  source  of  the  thought, 
and  question  the  intelligence ;  and  in  that  way  I  have  secured 
conclusive  evidence,  to  warrant  the  belief  that  both  of  these 
features  can  and  do  sometimes  occur. 

Comment  is  freely  made  by  spirits  who  have  used  “The  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone”  in  communicating  with  me  —  regarding  the 
expressions  by  the  instrument,  and  the  rhyming  tendency  of  the 
writing,  which  interferes  with  the  language  they  use  —  see  latter 
part  of  Chapter  XXI,  devoted  to  her  psychic  faculties ;  also  special 
and  extended  comment  by  Dr.  Richard  Plodgson ;  F.  W.  H.  Myers, 
and  others  in  this  chapter.  Prof.  Thompson  J.  Hudson  in  par¬ 
ticular,  refers  in  a  humorous  manner  to  this  exceptional  psychic. 

The  first  automatically  written  message  from  my  wife  was 
dated  December  26,  1911;  and  as  I  have  her  permission  to  use 
her  name  publicly  as  “May”  (her  home  name),  I  am  doing  so 
where  there  is  occasion  for  referring  to  her.  From  that  date 
until  the  closing  of  this  book,  I  have  communications  quite 
frequently,  indeed  I  may  say  scores  of  them,  but  not  included 
here,  as  well  as  a  written  chapter  by  herself  (See  Chapter  XXIX), 
in  fulfillment  of  a  post-mortem  promise. 

I  give  here  a  communication  made  through  the  psychic’s  auto¬ 
matic  hand,  written  under  date  of  January,  1912,  and  signed 
“May.”  Quotations  are  selected :  “Your  letter,  I  heard  her  read 
it  aloud.  She  is  not  impressed  by  my  thoughts,  but  her  hand  is 
governed  by  a  mind  (the  subjective)  that  is  intelligent  enough 
to  transcribe  what  I  dictate  by  words.  It  seems  to  me,  or  to 
my  conscious  mind,  very  much  as  if  you  could  step  to  a  telephone. 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


281 


and  talk  to  a  friend ;  and  as  you  spoke  the  message,  see  a  hand 

writing  it,  as  if  ruled  by  the  spoken  word . The  slavery 

of  your  work,  is  to  be  a  benefit  to  you.  The  constant  need  to 
do  will  make  your  hours  less  long.  .  .  .  We  will  be  reunited 
by  a  bond  or  key,  that  will  make  it  so  that  I  can  come  and  speak 
to  you;  ancbhave  you  know  that  it  is  true,  that  it  is  I,  and  this 
is  so.” 

12th  March,  1912. 

From  Mother:  “My  son,  be  sure  that  I  love  you  for  yourself 
alone,  and  often  stay  here  in  the  home  with  thee.  I  do  not  need 
to  hide  my  hands  for  they  are  well,  but  I  will  be  with  you,  my 
dear,  if  you  are  there,  if  you  are  here.  I  love  thy  work,  and  wish 
to  stand  beside  thee,  when  the  crown  is  won ;  and  I  foresee  it  to 
be  truly  a  great  success  to  thee.  I  feel  proud  to  write  to  show 
you  what  you  understand,  that  I  may  freely  use  my  hand. 

Margaret  King.” 

[The  foregoing  was  written  in  my  own  home  by  the  psychic, 
in  the  presence  of  her  mother,  my  stenographer,  and  myself. 
The  psychic  could  in  no  wise  have  known  the  facts.  In  human 
life  my  mother  had  Rheumatic  Arthritis,  and  hence  all  her  finger 
joints  were  enlarged  and  stiff;  and  she  named  them  hickory-nut 
joints.  Fler  habit  was  to  hide  them  by  wearing  gloves  or  mitts ; 
and  hence  the  foregoing  reference.  She  identified  herself  also 
at  the  Moss  seances  18  years  previously,  in  London,  Canada. 
(See  Chapters  IV,  V  and  VI.)  Also  in  Jonson  seances  of  more 
recent  date.  She  likewise  materialized  at  a  Moss  seance  at  Lily 
Dale,  where  a  friend  of  mine  received  from  her  lips  a  kindly 
message  to  be  given  me  on  that  friend’s  return  to  Toronto.] 

12th  March,  1912.  From  Father:  “Son  of  me.  be  assured 
that  I  thy  father  am  most  glorified  and  proud  of  you,  and  of 
the  things  you  now  do.” 

Stephen  King. 

(See  Chapters  IV,  V,  VI  and  the  Jonson  Seances.) 

12th  March,  1912.  From  Des  Asia:  "I  whom  you  have  named 
as  Asia,  stand  more  high  than  younger  minds ;  and  I  am  aiding 
you  in  all  you  try  to  do.  Be  not  afraid  of  failure,  for  we 


282 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


appreciate  the  earnest  heart  wish  to  benefit  the  human  race,  who 
look  at  death  as  lost  in  space.  Thy  book  will  awaken  many  a 
mind  to  this  exact  knowledge,  and  belief.  I  aid  thee  ever,  and 
do  all  I  can  for  thee.  To  aid  thy  fellow-man  is  wish  of  me.” 

This  giant  spirit  form  has  spoken  to  me  through  three  dif¬ 
ferent  trumpets,  one  in  Michigan,  one  in  New  York  and  one  in 
Toronto;  he  materialized  in  Ohio,  at  a  Jonson  seance,  in  view 
of  a  room  full  of  sitters ;  and  has  written  much  of  interest 
through  the  New  York  psychic,  which  will  appear  on  the  pages 
of  this  book,  and  of  my  future  publications. 

12th  March,  1912.  From  King  Edward:  “I  Edward  am  and 
as  a  man  I  with  this  man  agree,  for  death’s  mantle  has  made 
of  me  a  well  and  earnest  thinker  here ;  and  I  agree  with  what 
you  do,  and  give  my  signature  to  you.  I  had  a  confidence  in  the 
power  of  spirits  to  communicate ;  and  I  believed  in  the  power 
to  heal  in  this  way.  I  would  have  died  before  my  coronation, 
if  I  had  not  had  assistance  in  this  way.  Bedford,  he  was  to  me 
a  man  of  confidence,  and  we  often  tried  hard  to  pierce  the  veil 
of  future  state. 

We  will  give  further  tests  to  thee  when  you  are  with  a  proper 
instrument  (medium).  I  will  talk  to  thee  through  the  trumpet. 
I  have  been  told  that  it  (the  book)  will  be  of  benefit  to  earnest 
thinkers  everywhere;  and  it  will  be  translated  into  French  and 
German  also,  that  ■  students  of  those  nations  may  see,  and  with 
your  thoughts  try  to  agree.  All  sincere  thinkers  are  respected 
in  this  age.  I  respect  thy  sincerity.” 

14th  March,  1912.  From  Princess  Alice:  “Alice  am  I,  the 
daughter  of  the  Queen  of  England.  I  was  often  near,  so  I  could 
make  my  mother  hear  my  voice ;  and  also  see  that  it  was  I  that 
came  out  of  the  land  of  spirits.  Yes,  also  use  the  fact,  that  my 
brother  Edward,  also  England’s  King,  in  later  years  had  seen 
me  at  seance,  too.  We  were  able  to  show  ourselves  complete; 
and  Grandma  too,  the  mother  of  my  mother  Louise  Victoria, 
and  Francis  Charles,  two  other  names  of  Albert,  called  the  Consort 
of  the  Queen.  His  names  were  many  and  his  virtues  too.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


283 


Prof.  Thompson  Jay  Hudson’s  Views  Now.  He  Tests  “The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone’’  from  Spirit  Side  of  Life. 

In  a  previous  chapter  I  referred  to  a  mental  problem  I  had 
met  with,  in  a  psychic  whom  I  considered  to  be  a  mental  curiosity  ; 
and  with  her  written  consent  I  have  since  designated  “The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  with  automatic  action,  including 
movement,  writing  and  speech ;  as  having  also  both  conscious  and 
sub-conscious  minds,  each  with  independent  action;  and  I  stated 
that  I  considered  it  “a  poser,”  and  expressed  the  wish  that  Thomp¬ 
son  J.  Hudson  from  spirit  side  of  life,  would  see  how  he  could 
utilize  this  psychic  instrument,  and  give  his  views  concerning 
her.  My  wish  went  forth  and  brought  response  on  the  15th 
March,  1912,  the  day  set  apart  for  such  as  wanted  opportunity. 
Hudson’s  communication  is  produced  here,  from  the  automatic 
writing  of  that  date,  in  my  home,  and  in  my  presence. 

From  Thompson  J.  Hudson:  “I  hasten  to  thy  wish.  The 
more  I  tried  to  make  my  meaning  clear,  the  more  of  questions 
came  to  me,  and  so  I  am  of  those  like  you,  who  now  believe 
that  both  are  true;  that  is  I  believe  that  both  carnate  and  dis- 
carnate  minds,  may  impress  and  communicate  through  proper 
instruments.  I,  like  you,  have  studied  this  instrument  from  this 
side  of  life;  and  I  wish  to  especially  agree  with  you  in  the  fact, 
that  she  has  not  double  personality,  though  she  has  double  mental 
action ;  or  the  action  of  the  other  portion  of  her  mentality  is 
similar  to  the  normal  mental  action.  Therefore  if  she  has  dual 
personality,  it  was  born  twins.  I  authorize  you  to  use  this 
statement  over  my  signature.  I  started  out  with  a  certain  premise, 
and  I  tried  to  prove  it.  I  often  could  not.  This  one  case  is  most 
peculiar  of  all,  because  the  two  are  interchangeable ;  and  neither 
disturbs  the  other.  Also  she  is  well  and  strikingly  normal ;  and 
balanced  both  in  bodily  and  mental  action.  All  great  students 
will  do  well  to  read  your  book  from  cover  to  cover.  I  am  of 
these.” 

3.45  p.  m.,  March  31, 1912.  From  William  James  of  Harvard: 
“I  am  William  James  of  Harvard,  I  will  it,  that  you  shall  be  the 
one  to  have  the  secrecy  between  me  and  the  other  scientists.  It 


284 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


is  I  that  was  to  be  first  of  seven  to  read  it;  and  some  one  will 
know  what  I  mean  by  that.  It  is  a  truth,  and  it  will  win.  To 
look  into  it  was  no  sin,  and  I  am  glad  I  did  it,  though  I  did  not 
think  I  was  to  go.  I  have  so  many  friends.  I  love  the  truth 
wherever  it  is  found,  and  the  truth  only.  I  studied  a  trance 
medium  for  many  years.  I  do  not  believe  in  direct  communica¬ 
tion.  I  believe  a  medium  is  as  much  of  a  necessity,  as  is  a  pen 
in  a  written  letter.  If  I  had  not  this  hand,  I  could  not  write. 
Good  Night,  and  good  to  be  result  to  you,  in  this  the  work  you 
try  to  do.  I  was  and  am  an  earnest  thinker  too.” 

9.05  p.  m.,  9th  April,  1912.  From  Professor  Croft  of  Old 
Toronto  University:  “We  worked  together  in  the  long  ago; 
but  what  is  forty  years  but  a  short  span.  I  loved  you  as  a  student 
and  a  man.  I  was  with  William  James  of  Harvard  University 
when  he  used  this  hand  here  and  wrote  to  you.  It  is  a  shock 
sensation  to  a  busy,  active  teacher,  when  he  finds  himself  cut 
off  from  all  he  knew.  I  know  your  sterling  quality,  and  it  is  I 
who  taught  to  thee,  the  wonders  of  God’s  chemistry.  But  there 
is  chemistry  of  thought  I  know  nought  of,  and  you  have  under¬ 
taken  to  send  forth  an  acid  of  activity  that  will  bind  all  the 
restless  minds  of  men  into  a  salt  of  human  harmony.  To  prove 
that  we  communicate  is  hard  to  do;  but  I  like  method  of  the 
work  of  you.  ’Tis  not  a  narrow  creed,  but  to  all  human  souls 
a  need,  and  we  will  stand  beside  you  everywhere,  and  try  our 
best  to  aid  you  to  accomplish  what  you  try  to  do.  My  student, 
I  am  proud  of  you,  and  of  this  work  you  try  to  do.  I  give  you 
my  endorsement;  and  old  Toronto  University  is  still  in  memory 
dear  to  me.  Adieu,  I’ll  write  another  time  for  you.  I  have  not 
yet  gained  this  power,  so  I  be  at  ease  you  see.  Hypatia,  your 
guide,  is  aiding  me.” 

[I  studied  practical  chemistry  under  this  great  teacher  when 
a  youth ;  and  as  he  left  Canada  many  years  ago,  I  had  no  knowl¬ 
edge  of  his  location,  nor  any  word  from,  or  of  him,  after  his 
departure,  until  I  received  it  in  writing  through  the  automatic 
hand  of  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone.”] 

10  p. m.,  27th  April,  1912.  From  Wm.  T.  Stead  (No.  11). 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


285 


To  Dr.  John  S.  King.  “I  am  Wm.  T.  Stead.  I  did  not  select 
anyone  to  communicate  through.  I  was  in  too  much  woe,  but 
Hypatia  and  Otelleo  knowing  me,  came  to  help  my  band,  and 
with  them  I  went  to  you.  At  first  I  did  not  realize  that  I  was 
dead,  and  so  I  floated  in  an  atmosphere  of  health,  like  to  mortal 
warmth.  I  saw  Hypatia  use  this  hand  (the  psychic’s),  and  after 
she  was  through,  she  aided  me  to  also  do.  At  all  times  I  have 
been  in  touch  with  you ;  but  I  have  also  tried  to  demonstrate 
through  other  instruments.  I  went  to  see  Mrs.  Wriedt.  but 
Hypatia  stayed  with  me,  and  so  as  I  wished  to  aid  to  prove  spirit 
return  I  first  sent  messages  to  yon,  Dr.  King,  I  mean.  I  did  not 
exactly  know  what  was  happening  to  me  at  first.  Hypatia  and 
your  guides  aided  by  my  own,  assisted  me ;  and  when  I  found 
I  was  materialized,  I  looked  for  you,  and  knew  you,  but  could 
not  talk.  (See  Chapter  XXVHI.)  Yours  was  the  first  recogni¬ 
tion,  I  had  by  a  mortal.  Until  that  time  I  myself  was  uncertain, 
as  to  whether  I  was  dead  or  delirious,  and  in  power  to  again 
return  to  life  later.  I  was  one  of  many  who  floated  in  the  ice 
cold  sea,  but  a  short  time.  I  do  not  see  my  body.  I  try  to  shake 
off  the  earth  condition.  Hypatia  will  tell  you  or  let  me  tell  you, 
without  the  danger  of  return  to  that  most  awful  woe  of  water 
all  about,  and  nothing  near  to  cling  to.  Even  my  plight  was 
preferable  to  some,  for  I  was  hurt  by  something  like  a  blow, 
and  so  I  quickly  sank  below  the  surface  of  the  sea.  No  one  will 
find  my  body,  I  can  tell  it  now,  for  they  are  aiding  me  to  see  it 
as  a  picture ;  and  I  know  that  I  am  one  of  the  numerous  ones 
who  lie  below  the  surface  of  the  sea,  and  float  away  from  touch 
of  mortal  hand.  What  better  winding  sheet  than  the  great  sea, 
so  full  of  life  and  energy.  My  body  like  a  coral  shell  is  hidden 
in  the  mighty  well,  and  the  great  waving  throbbing  sea  as  living 
pall  has  covered  me.  I  listen  to  the  ocean’s  crone,  and  know 
that  this  is  meant  for  me,  for  I  am  truly  now  its  own,  and  as 
it  whispers  in  its  sleep,  it  names  me  in  each  living  sweep,  as 
member  of  the  mighty  deep.  I  sleep  Tn  ocean’s  heart,  and  if  it 
aches  I  do  not  know.  I  aid  to  fill  it  with  the  mystery  that  it  has 
held  since  long  ago,  when  the  great  continent  Atlantis,  called  by 


286 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


men,  sank  from  all  sight  and  ne’er  returned  again.  My  angel 
helpers  are  with  me,  and  on  this  bright  eternal  shore  I  bless  my 
God  for  evermore.  My  body  lies  beneath  the  sea,  my  body  once 
so  dear  to  me,  no  echo  reaches  either  shore,  no  man  will  see  it 
ever  more,  no  whispers  of  its  secret  be.  My  body  is  the  ocean’s 
prey  and  on  its  breast  will  sleep  for  aye,  till  angels  roll  the 
stones  away  from  all  man’s  ignorance  and  doubt.  Till  angels 
lift  the  shroud  of  me,  and  show  what’s  hidden  in  the  sea.  ’Twas 
fate’s  decree  and  I  believe  it  was  to  be.  Now  Brother  King 
believe  and  know  that  it  is  I  zvho  write  to  thee,  that  you  were 
first  one  here  below,  who  received  word  direct  from  me.  I’ll 
stay  in  touch  with  you  and  the  ones  who  aid  me  to  write  to  thee, 
and  when  the  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind”  is  seen  by  men, 
I  hope  to  be  with  others  there  to  prove  this  truth  to  men.  The 
spirit,  the  immortal  part  of  man  living  after  death  has  swept 
the  body  from  the  living  view,  and  I  am  living  now  in  harmony, 
and  it  is  I  who  write  to  you.  All  men  are  truly  brethren  when 
death  the  great  calamity  calls  for  their  breath,  and  I  am  one  of 
these,  and  find  myself  in  harmony  and  hope,  and  with  the  others 
reaching  loving  hands  to  clasp  the  hand  of  you,  my  brother  here. 
’Tis  beautiful,  and  glorious  to  be  free,  you’ll  hear  quite  often 
now  from  me.” 

9  p. m.,  28th  April,  1912.  From  Wm.  T.  Stead  (No.  12).  (To 
the  Instrument.)  “Your  Grandmother  has  gone,  and  I  want  to 
write  a  word  or  so.  Tell  John  Si  King  that  I  went  to  him  the 
first  of  all.  As  soon  as  I  recognized  Hypatia,  I  asked  her  to  take 
me  to  where  I  could  communicate  with  him.  She  brought  me 
here,  and  I  wrote,  she  took  me  to  Toledo,  and  I  showed  myself 
to  him.  (See  Chapters  XXVIII  and  XXX.)  I  was  so  new  I 
could  not  speak,  a  feeling  best  described  as  weak.  I  could  not 
do  a  thing  myself  as  free,  partly  from  my  anxiety  to  do  so  well. 
I  scarcely  had  the  time  to  show,  before  it  came  the  time  to  go. 

(To  Dr.  King.)  Well,  Brother  King,  be  sure  I’ll  bring  you 
every  proof  I  can,  and  I’ll  remain  near  you  and  help  you  in  this 
work  you  do.  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind”  is  to  reach  every- 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


287 


where,  and  maybe  I  will  be  a  means  of  teaching"  this  great  truth 
to  men,  that  though  I  am  in  spirit  life,  I  still  remain  in  touch 
with  them.  I  am  glad  the  artist  of  Bangs  sisters  pictured  me, 
but  it  was  not  done  by  them  so  much  as  by  my  band  (see  Chapter 
XXX)  ;  and  the  whole  of  us  together  decided  that  my  picture  would 
be  of  use  to  your  hook,  as  it  would  go  to  show  that  it  is  true, 
that  I,  a  discarnate  spirit,  known  through  press  to  many  men, 
may  so  come  back  in  touch  with  life,  and  show  my  face  to  them. 
More  dreadful  than  the  wave  that  struck  my  life  from  me  with 
final  blozv  is  that  great  hatred  of  this  truth,  that  we,  dear  Brother 
King,  are  trying  hard  to  make  the  living  see.  But  like  path¬ 
finders  we  must  be  prepared  for  opposition’s  key,  and  smiles  of 
God’s  approving  Son,  will  be  with  us,  who  suffer  most,  and  we 
are  both  of  us  upheld  by  an  angel  host,  and  nought  can  conquer 
us,  who  be  upheld  by  Truth’s  great  majesty.  In  all  thy  work, 
I  am  with  thee.  I  close  my  eyes  to  the  details  of  this  calamity. 
I  have  my  work  to  do  as  well  as  you.  Your  brother  in  love 
of  this  truth.” 

And  here  a  word  or  two  of  comment  I  wish  to  make  upon  the 
contents  of  the  two  preceding  messages,  one  bearing  date  of 
April  27th  and  the  other  of  April  28th.  The  former  is  regarding 
the  catastrophe,  and  the  latter  where  Stead  alludes  to  evidence. 
By  those  who  knew  Stead  as  a  writer  I  feel  it  will  be  admitted 
that  in  its  force  (though  not  wording  and  rhyming,  which  is 
psychic)  and  its  multum  in  parvo  composition,  and  comprehensive 
embrace  of  the  condensed  history  from  first  to  last,  with  vivid 
description  of  the  catastrophe  all  written  in  connection  with  the 
picture  demonstration,  on  27th  April,  1912,  intended  to  be  a 
confirmation  of  not  only  human  personality,  but  of  face  and 
feature,  and  natural  expression  of  the  man,  as  of  the  living  dead, 
whose  spirit  picture  will  henceforth  be  known  as  Wm.  T.  Stead ; 
and  which  was  placed  on  canvas  in  a  manner  described  in  the 
chapter  devoted  to  himself.  (See  Chapter  XXX.) 

10  a.m.,  12th  May,  1912.  From  Professor  James  of  Harvard: 
“James  of  Harvard  I  am.  I  want  to  write  to  John  S.  King  of 


288 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Toronto,  Ontario.  I  am  told  here,  that  his  book  ‘Dawn  of  the 
Awakened  Mind,’  is  to  be  a  great  success  in  every  way.  I  have 
been  shown  the  work,  and  I  approve  of  its  sentiments,  and 
I  hope  to  he  able  to  sign  my  name,  on  a  pad  he  holds,  at  a  future 
date.”  (To  Dr.  King.)  “It  is  too  bad  I  had  to  wait,  for  better 
opportunity  (See  Chapter  XXXIII)  ;  btit  I  will  do  this  thing 
for  you  Friend  King,  and  it  shall  be  one  means  of  proving  the 
spirits  of  the  living  dead,  return  to  men  again  (prediction). 
During  my  experiments  with  Mrs.  Leonora  E.  Piper  through  the 
years  that  she  was  under  the  observation,  of  the  Society  of 
Psychical  Research,  of  which  I  was  then  a  chief  officer,  I  could 
never  exactly  decide  from  whence  came,  all  of  the  peculiar,  and 
enigmatical  matter,  from  this  entranced,  and  perfectly  honest 
woman,  whom  I  was  obliged  to  call  a  white  crow,  or  an  exception 
to  the  normally  accepted  rule,  that  all  crows  are  black;  or  all 
mediums  dishonest.  My  brother,  Henry  James,  the  novelist,  and 
my  father,  Henry  James,  the  mystic,  had  founded  in  my  heart 
the  desire  to  know  more,  and  understand  more  fully,  the  wonders 
of  that  to  man,  intangible  part  of  him,  the  mind.  I  was  a  close 
student,  of  every  phase,  and  yet  I  could  not  at  the  end  of  many 
years  of  careful  study,  say  positively  ‘I  know,’  but  like  a  ship 
cast  out  at  sea,  without  a  chart  to  guide,  so  was  I  cast  upon  this 
to  me,  unknown  shore,  and  I  am  glad  to  say  with  thee,  the  spirit 
does  live  ever  more,  and  holds  its  interest  ivith  men,  after  it  is 
cut  off  from  them,  and  if  I  can,  I  will  do,  as  you  ask  of  me,  sign 
my  name,  on  your  pad,  as  I  have  promised  you,  that  I  would 
do,  in  my  own  signature  of  long  ago  (prediction).  I  see  wherein 
I  failed  to  see,  and  now  I  too  agree  with  thee  that  spirit,  the 
real  part  of  man,  fulfills  its  portion  of  God’s  plan,  in  this  frail 
earth  anatomy,  then  as  a  perfected  butterfly,  out  of  its  crysalis 
set  free,  enjoys  the  beautiful  of  God’s  Domain,  and  does  not 
wish  to  be  again,  in  its  more  limited  degree,  as  living  men  are 
forced  to  be.  I  with  the  wording  of  your  Pronunciamento,  quite 
agree,  it  is  also  at  present  time,  my  creed  indeed.  I  was  Professor 
of  Psychology  at  Harvard  University,  but  as  the  blind  I  led  the 
blind,  and  into  the  same  ditch  I  fell  with  them ;  but  now  I  come 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


289 


in  hope,  through  you  to  witness,  that  your  thought  is  true,  that 
spirits  may  come  back  to  you,  and  bring  their  personality,  and 
others  here  now  at  hand,  to  use  this  power  at  their  command, 
and  write  as  witness  through  this  hand.  My  brother  and 
co-worker,  Richard  Hodgson,  too,  would  like  to  be  a  witness 
here  with  me,  that  we  are  as  to  mortals,  free  from  pain  and 
need  of  gain,  and  so  can  follow  out  the  bent  of  thought  we  had 
in  life  below,  and  find  out  truths  we  did  not  know,  because  to 
us  it  did  not  show.  When  I  can  do,  I  will  do  all  I  can  for  you, 
to  prove  that  this  great  truth  is  true.” 

11  a. m.,  12th  May,  1912.  From  Richard  Hodgson:  “I, 
Richard  Hodgson,  standing  near,  would  like  to  write  to  make 
it  clear,  to  readers  of  this  book,  that  you,  John  King,  have  in  it 
spoken  true.  That  you  are  honestly  endeavoring  to  cause  men 
to  know,  and  understand,  that  this  the  truth  is  really  grand. 
I  am  assisted  by  your  band,  and  came  with  William  James  this 
morning  here,  to  make  my  thoughts  on  paper  clear,  while  yet  I 
have  time  in  this  your  first  book  written  so,  which  teaches  spirits 
come  below,  and  speak,  and  sometimes  to  men  show.  Free  am 
I  a  thinker  here,  to  write  a  word  or  so,  regarding  things  that 
while  in  life,  I  really  could  not  know.  I  had  no  thought,  that  it 
was  true,  but  hoped,  to  prove  instead,  that  those  who  were  believ¬ 
ers,  were  not  right  in  their  head.  I  hoped  to  prove  it  fraudulent 
in  some  phase  or  degree,  but  it  seemed  true  in  every  way,  as 
it  was  shown  to  me,  and  demonstrated  by  the  acts  of  Mrs.  Piper, 
who  made  me  convinced  that  these  are  facts  that  have  been 
shown  by  you.  It  is  a  quarter  of  a  century,  since  first  I  came 
across  the  sea,  to  make  this  truth  proved  false  to  be.  ‘The  phe¬ 
nomena  produced  by  her,  is  the  most  baffling  thing  I  know,’  so 
declared  Prof.  William  James  in  that  time  long  ago.  At  last  I 
thought  that  her  subliminal  self,  must  have  been  a  kind  of  a 
ghastly  appendage,  through  which  discarnate  spirits  might  com¬ 
municate  ;  and  from  my  study  of  her  case,  I  became  convinced, 
and  converted  to  the  belief  that  I  could  communicate  with 
departed  spirits  through  her.  In  this  hope  I  was  v.dien  from 
my  body  freed.  It  was  with  me  a  hope  only  and  not  a  settled 


290 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


creed.  I  had  a  thought  or  two,  attuned  to  the  correct  idea,  but 
when  as  spirit  I  could  see  from  this  exalted  view,  I  was  then 
sure  it  was  a  fact,  as  it  is  shown  by  you.  How  beautiful  and 
grand  it  is  to  be  able,  to  have  attunement  to  the  spirit  sphere, 
and  realize  in  life  that  spirit  friends  are  near.  We  have  not  yet 
an  open  door,  and  limited  is  every  human  power  to  do,  but  I 
with  other  thinkers  standing  here,  approve  of  this  the  work  you 
do,  to  prove  we  live,  a  truth  to  thee,  and  that  we  come  as  our¬ 
selves  too;  and  last  of  all  the  brightest  strain  is  that  we  may 
return  again,  and  aid  in  even  slight  degree,  to  prove  its  truth 
as  told  by  thee.” 

12  a.  m.,  12th  May,  1912.  From  Prof.  Thompson  Jay  Hudson  : 
“My  friends  Richard  Hodgson  and  Prof.  William  James  have 
just  written  to  the  doctor,  who  is  trying  to  prove  this  truth  true. 
(To  Dr.  King.)  Let  me  be  one  of  many  men,  who  say  I  know 
they  come  again.  I  studied  Mrs.  Piper  too,  as  these  two  did, 
who  wrote  today  to  you.  She  was  a  curiosity  who  was  of  perfect 
honesty,  and  I  was  one  who  studied  long,  and  tried  to  learn  mind 
like  a  song.  I  struck  in  truth  a  note  or  so,  and  then  it  was  my 
time  to  go.  And  here  I  am,  and  here  I  stay,  as  one  now  blessed 
in  perfect  day.  I  look  back  at  my  life  work  small,  and  see  I  did 
not  ‘know  it  all.’  As  author  of  the  Laws  of  Psychic  Phenomena, 
etc.,  I  wished  to  see  this  Mrs.  Piper,  out  of  curiosity.  I  found 
her  honest,  and  the  subnormal  power,  was  to  my  mind  accounted 
for,  on  purely  psychological  principles  and  thus  I  said  as  man 
has  a  dual  mind,  or  two  states  of  consciousness,  the  ‘objective 
and  subjective;’  an  entranced  psychic  is  dominated  exclusively  by 
her  ‘subjective’  mind,  and  her  reason  is  in  silence.  Hence  she 
is  controlled  by  suggestion  and  telepathy.  I  thought  I  made  it 
clear  to  men,  but  as  I  am  now  one  of  them  I  know,  that  spirits 
come  again,  that  we  float  out  of  our  frail  body  shell,  and  cannot 
even  answer  ‘All  is  well’  to  waiting  friends  upon  the  shore,  but 
we  go  forward  evermore,  learning  and  knowing  truths  more 
bright  that  are  not  yet  shown  to  the  mortal  sight.  So  write  it 
to  the  living  doctor;  who  is  proving  now  to  men,  that  spirits 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


291 


may  return  again,  and  tell  him  I,  a  living  witness  now  more  high 
in  thought  and  means  of  knowing,  say  I  wish  to  come  from  just 
‘across  the  way.’  The  silent  land  has  held  us  all  too  long,  let  us 
too  join  our  voices  in  the  song,  of  great  rejoicing  that  is  soon 
to  be,  when  men  with  this  truth  known  to  me,  a  spirit  from  my 
body  free,  at  least  agree.  Consider  me  at  one  with  you,  and  in 
a  wish  to  prove  this  true,  even  if  it  proves  what  I  said  in  life,  as 
not  the  truth,  I  look  at  life  as  at  my  youth,  I  spoke  what  I  believed 
at  then,  and  did  not  know  spirits  could  come  again;  but  now 
quite  free  I  clearly  see,  and  with  thy  statements  quite  agree.” 


My  strong  desire  to  know  just  how  my  guides  and  friends 
and  loved  ones  make  use  of  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone  to  write 
me  messages,  and  how  the  wonderful  evolvement  of  the  life¬ 
like  growing  features  of  my  friend  Stead  could  come  on  pure 
white  canvas  on  a  bright  sunshine  day  by  skill  of  spirit  artist 
Rembrandt,  brought  me  these  explanations  from  my  spirit  guide 
Hypatia. 

15th  May,  1912.  From  Hypatia:  “It  is  not  difficult  to  make 
this  subject  (the  Human-Psychic-Telephone)  write,  that  is  if  she 
is  active,  in  the  automatic  key ;  but  as  she  of  her  conscious  self 
does  neither  hear  nor  see,  unless  she  thinks  of  writing,  the  door 
is  closed  to  me ;  and  as  her  mind  sub-conscious,  is  our  instrument 
alone,  her  mind  aids  our  suggestion.  If  she  reads  the  words  your 
own,  it  causes  her  to  listen,  and  give  proper  time  to  me.  and 
then  I  write  to  answer,  as  ’tis  written  there  by  thee.  If  you  were 
present  near  her,  and  she  in  pose  to  write,  she  could  then  know 
your  question,  with  her  telepathic  sight.  Each  instrument  is 
different  in  every  tone  and  key,  and  Ides  of  levitation  are  as 
instruments  to  me,  in  all  the  different  phases  of  the  phenomena. 
Hermes,  who  wrote  the  letter,  a  giant  called  by  me,  is  like  a 
living  human  in  live  symbology.  He  is  the  thing  of  substance 
the  artist  uses,  so  to  paint  upon  the  canvas,  so  living  men  may 
know.  To  him  (the  artist),  he  is  a  servant,  although  of  high 
degree,  he’s  held  by  love  of  medium,  her  wish  the  law  of  him. 


292 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


He  is  to  Rembrandt  a  living  hand,  that  paints  upon  the  canvas 
as  you  stand,  or  sit  before  it  in  a  wish  to  be  served  by  his  Art’s 
capacity.  Like  man’s  subconscious  in  that  tone  or  key,  an  Ide 
is  often  spoken  of,  as  an  Ide  of  one  idea,  as  a  mind  that  follows 
in  one  thought  till  it  completed  be,  these  faithful  acting  servants, 
act  only  in  one  key,  they  follow  in  one  perfect  tone  until  its 
sound  is  all  their  own.  They  come  from  God’s  great  storehouse 
of  levitation’s  key,  and  are  like  warp  threads,  in  a  loom  in  any 
work  they  be  attached  to,  as  a  servant,  like  to  the  rays  of  light, 
they  change  it  to  a  picture,  what  was  the  canvas  white.  It  is  too 
complicated  for  you  to  understand,  but  when  they  work  together 
they  are  completed  band,  and  this  is  case  of  Bang’s  sisters,  and 
Hermes  as  you  will  see,  is  the  chief  work  mechanic  that  was 
there  used  for  thee,  by  Rembrandt,  a  great  artist,  who  was  human 
here,  but  follows  still  his  natural  bent,  though  now  in  spirit  sphere. 
Asia,  an  ancient  human  master,  a  friend  of  Hermes  Key  and 
Hermes  himself  assuming  proper  tone  wrote  through  her  hand 
to  thee.” 

The  next  to  communicate  was  a  friend  of  my  father’s  family, 
and  knew  me  from  childhood  days,  and  later  became  my  teacher, 
though  I  have  not  heard  from  him  before,  I  hope  hereafter  to 
hear  from  him  many  times. 

12.15  p.  m.,  17th  May,  1912,  From  Dr.  James  H.  Richardson  : 
“May  I  write  to  my  former  student  and  assistant.  Dr.  John  S. 
King  of  Toronto?  I  have  not  the  knowledge  of  the  spirit,  that 
I  had  of  the  anatomy,  that  wondrous  machine,  through  which 
the  spirit  moves,  and  serves  its  maker’s  purpose.  While  in  life, 
I  could  not  reach  the  goal,  of  how  to  know  of  the  beyond.  My 
mind  was  so,  that  it  clung,  wise  or  otherwise,  to  the  necessity, 
to  see  and  touch  and  know,  because  it  is  here  shown  to  be,  and 
was  like  a  law  to  me ;  or  was  thus  demonstrable  to  the  human 
sense,  of  power  to  see ;  but  wonderful  indeed  is  power  to  do, 
after  that  sight  has  gone  from  you,  and  you  have  added  senses 
three,  that  with  some  living  men  now  be.  The  power  to  sense. 


DAJVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


293 


and  also  know,  though  nothing  is  to  prove  it  so,  and  in  these 
later  days  to  me,  most  perfect  seem  these  added  three,  in  life 
called  clairvoyancy  and  spirit  power  to  hear  and  know,  and  be 
inspired,  by  the  flow  of  the  great  heart  throbs  of  the  spirit  ocean 
near,  that  aids  us  now  to  see  and  hear.  It  lifts  us  as  an  ocean 
warm,  that  with  responsive  wish  to  ours,  conducts  us  with  intelli¬ 
gence,  along  a  way  to  us  of  flowers.  Like  esculator  instrument, 
for  aiding  man  to  climb  up  buildings  tall,  so  we  in  spirit  go  to 
where  we  wish,  and  do  not  move  at  all ;  and  what  conducts  us 
is  the  flow  of  mind  completed,  in  perfection’s  key,  that  loving 
all,  and  having  all,  loses  its  selfish  personality,  and  does  as  aider 
to  the  ones  like  me.  Oh  brother  student  of  the  laws  of  life,  God 
has  deprived  you  of  your  loving  wife,  that  you  as  one  alone,  may 
be  of  service  in  a  high  degree,  to  aid  the  sufferings  of  humanity. 
For  each  one  loses  loved  ones,  like  to  thee ;  but  has  not  comfort, 
as  what  comes  to  thee,  from  loved  ones  from  the  other  shore, 
who  prove  they  live  for  ever  more.  Help  man  to  open  like  a 
shell,  God  shall  then  supply  him  well,  with  means  to  see,  and 
sense  to  know,  and  stronger  in  these  powers  to  grow.  I  leave 
thee.  Brother  King,  but  be  assured  you  have  the  love  of  me,  and 
that  I  hope  in  every  way  to  aid  you  in  your  hope  to  be  successful 
in  a  high  degree.  I  surely  much  approve  of  thee,  and  of  thy  work, 
as  shown  to  me,  and  I  am  also  an  M.D.” 

My  former  teacher  and  valued  friend,  whose  communication  is 
the  next  following,  has  spoken  with  me  on  more  than  one 
occasion  through  a  trumpet,  and  thus  identified  himself  to  me 
in  the  past.  What  I  present  here  however  is  his  first  communica¬ 
tion  through  the  writing  psychic. 

2.30  p. m.,  17th  May,  1912.  From  Dr.  James  E.  Graham: 
“My  beloved  friend  of  long  ago,  it  is  not  long  ago  to  me,  from 
where  I  stand  upon  the  higher  platform  of  the  known,  for  one 
may  prize  a  knowledge  small,  when  he  has  gained  from  it  new 
view,  of  how  to  see  and  know  to  do.  I  passed  the  portal  dreaded 
so,  and  entered  into  power  to  grow,  perfected  with  an  added 
sense,  and  it  is  ever  so.  When  one  has  learned  to  add,  he  then 


294 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


is  taught  new  jugglery  with  figures  small,  until  he  tries  to 
measure  all  the  length  and  breadth  of  space,  and  what  therein 
exists,  of  God’s  domain,  we  try  to  hold  it  in  our  mortal  brain, 
a  thing  of  circulation  and  of  cells,  that  be  of  ever  changing 
tendency ;  and  after  we  have  done  our  best,  we  then  leave  to  our 
God  the  rest,  and  like  to  children  on  our  final  pillow  lie.  Neither 
the  teachings,  nor  the  ideality  of  men,  has  aided  us,  at  all.  We 
enter  here  an  unknown  sphere,  we  do  not  know  at  all,  as  does  a 
child  at  birth,  and  learn  our  way,  as  he  does  on  the  earth.  Your 
book  is  a  good  book.  Its  teachings  are  all  true,  and  I  am  glad 
that  you  have  put  it  forth,  and  are  candid  and  honest  enough 
to  stand  by  what  you  believe  is  true.  I  believe  it  also,  and  I  know, 
because  I’m  here  and  do  it  so  communicate,  return  and  be  as 
specimen  I  am  to  thee,  to  place  with  others  in  the  alcohol,  of 
thy  approving  thought ;  and  from  the  study  of  us  glean,  the 
glitter  of  the  gold,  that  your  new  book  to  men  shall  hold ;  and 
I’ll  be  there,  in  pride  to  see,  and  say  to  listeners  here  by  me: 
‘He  was  my  student  thus  and  so,  before  I  from  earth  life  did  go. 
And  from  some  seed,  planted  by  me,  this  thought  has  sprung 
and  grown,  maybe.’  ” 

Cleopatra,  one  of  the  most  beautiful  guides  in  her  transient 
body,  and  grandly  gowned,  has  accepted  my  arm,  and  walked 
with  me  from  the  cabinet  in  the  materializing  seance  room,  in 
plain  view,  out  to  the  sitters  in  the  circle ;  and  again  returned, 
dissolving  from  view,  outside  of  the  curtains.  She  also  previously 
promised  me  through  the  trumpet,  to  thus  appear  on  that  special 
occasion.  She  sang  sweetly  for  me  on  one  occasion,  so  that  her 
voice  could  be  heard  in  the  street.  I  give  but  one  at  present,  of 
the  many  messages  written  by  her. 

3  p. m.,  17th  May,  1912.  From  Cleopatra:  “I,  Cleopatra, 
wish  to  write.  If  man  in  truth  is  like  a  shell,  we  love  him,  and 
we  treat  him  well,  from  every  point  of  view.  I  serve  as  aider 

here  today . We  of  your  band  across  the  way  are  like 

to  yourself  in  our  tone,  and  we  will  aid  you  with  new  capacity 
to  do,  till  it  shall  be  ended  by  you  in  such  a  way  to  give  you 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


295 


pride,  and  give  us  pride  as  well.  Your  power  to  analyze,  and 
exclude  from  attention  uninteresting  detail,  and  make  prominent 
that  which  is  the  central  thought,  is  wonderful ;  and  your  experi¬ 
ences,  as  a  writer  in  your  more  youthful  days,  are  all  as  stepping 
stones  to  thee,  that  make  thy  pathway  smooth  and  easy  quite, 
and  we  all  aid  you  as  you  write.  We  will  assist  you  in  the  things 
you  write,  till  angel  showers  of  love,  like  flowers,  shall  fall  upon 
thy  pathway  bright,  and  you  shall  be  assisted  in  the  thing  you 
wish  to  write.  Bondage  is  freedom,  when  ’tis  leash  of  love,  that 
ties  thy  body  to  the  work  of  stone ;  and  it  shall  be  a  resting 
place  for  thee,  of  pillow-like  softness,  as  the  years  go  by.  We 
will  provide  for  thee  in  every  way,  and  will  provide  the  things 
to  say.” 

3.20  p.  m.,  17th  May,  1912.  From  Dr.  I.  K.  Funk,  late  of 
Funk  and  Wagnalls  Company,  Publishers,  New  York:  ‘‘I.  Dr. 
I.  K.  Funk,  of  book  fame  in  the  past,  find  time  to  write  to  you 
at  last.  Like  one  who  enters  at  a  playhouse  door,  too  early,  or 
too  late,  so  it  has  been  with  me,  in  my  endeavor  to  use  this  hand, 
and  write  to  thee.  With  publishers  it’s  ever  so,  it  is  not  what 
men  write,  but  what  the  people  want,  and  need,  that  proves  a 
glory  in  their  sight.  This  book  you  write  is  as  a  wedge,  ’tis 
needed  like  a  key-stone  in  a  wall,  it  makes  what  other  men  have 
tried  to  teach,  but  could  not  reach,  in  a  convincing  way,  more 
plain,  and  interesting  to  the  reader’s  brain.  I  reached,  as  reaches 
growing  sprout  out  of  a  darkened  crevice  in  the  wall.  I  could 
not  tell  the  why,  I  knew  that  following  bent  I  would  come  soonest 
to  the  glowing  light;  but  somehow  in  the  heart  of  me,  was  that 
soul  hunger,  now  in  many  men,  that  made  me  feel  I  need  it  so ; 
I  simply  must  go  forward,  though  useless  is  argument  to  me. 
I  too  am  blind,  I  cannot  see,  I  told  my  reasoning  brother  near ; 
but  I  can  feel  and  sense  and  know,  and  I  believe  that  it  is 
so.  It  glorifies  the  life  of  me,  to  think  the  loved  ones  dear  to 
me,  are  in  a  sense  of  freedom,  so  that  they  may  come  and  also 
go,  and  wipe  the  weeping  from  my  eyes  grown  dim,  with  helpless 
hope,  and  prove  their  presence  real  and  true.  I  now  approve  of 


296 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


this  the  work  of  you,  and  try  in  every  way  to  roll  the  stones  of 
doubt  away,  between  men  and  the  tomb’s  grave  face,  that  coldly 
shuts  upon  the  loved  embrace  of  soul  to  soul,  for  evermore, 
imless  through  faith  we  ope’  the  door.  Be  thou  the  one  to  point 
the  way,  and  prove  the  best  you  can;  and  it  will  be  of  benefit 
to  every  living  man,  for  having  continuity,  and  power  to  touch 
in  distant  reach,  we  each  may  learn  more  perfectly,  and  then 
have  power  to  teach.  Like  to  the  blind  man  long  ago,  healed 
by  the  Saviour’s  touch  divine,  I  cannot  tell  the  way  it  be  that 
brought  this  blessed  truth  to  me,  but  whereas  I  was  blind,  I 
see,  and  am  now  blessed  the  same  as  he.  We  say,  I  do  not 
really  be  able  to  make  it  truth  to  thee,  from  your  own  point  of 
view  maybe,  but  brother  living,  through  this  woe  that  all  man¬ 
kind  must  undergo,  when  blessed  loves  are  taken,  be  blessed  in 
the  knowledge  that  to  me  has  been  a  blessed  remedy.  I  approve 
of  your  work  and  book.  Psychic  Research  is  the  only  true  way 
to  go  at  this  complicated  study.  Arguments  are  useless  to  those 
who  do  not  wish  to  know,  but  if  one  hungers,  in  his  soul  for 
knowledge,  proof  in  small  degree  will  prove  a  stepping  stone 
to  be.  Your  book  will  aid  to  lift  the  clouds  of  doubt,  and  turn 
the  darkness  inside  out,  until  the  silver  lining  be  as  shield,  to 
grief  a  remedy.  Our  spirits  live  for  ever  more,  and  we  may 
visit  from  the  unknown  shore,  and  prove  ourselves  alive  to  be. 
This  is  a  pleasure  great  to  me,  to  speak  on  continuity.  I  live,  I 
am  myself,  and  I  come  back  to  be  an  aider  and  a  writer  for  your 
book  that’s  soon  to  be.  Believe  that  they  have  told  me  true  who 
say  ’twill  be  success  to  you.  Of  New  York  City  once,  but  now 
of  spirit  life  to  thee,  but  to  myself  a  bird  set  free  from  narrow 
cage  to  fields’  bright  view.  In  endless  power  of  view  and  flight, 
I  will  now  say  to  you  goodnight.  I  bid  adieu  to  writer  and  to 
Doctor  too.” 


10  p.  m.,  17th  May,  1912.  From  May  :  “Do  not  let  me  be  cu^ 
off  in  my  love  of  thee,  because  she  (the  instrument)  has  so  much 
to  do.  I  live  in  every  thought,  and  heart  love  I  have  here.  My 
soul  with  your  soul  intertwines  till  we  are  one,  and  all  in  all, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


297 


and  I  am  here  a  spirit,  blessed  by  aiders  good,  and  kind.  Saphrona 
(her  guide)  and  my  brother,  who  is  often  spoken  of  by  you, 
are  dear  to  me.  Mabel  and  Gertie  and  May-Donna  are  here 
tonight  protected  by  an  angel  guardian’s  love,  aided  to  waft  me 
to  this  sunny  clime  above.  We  go  to  every  clime,  we  labor  all 
the  time,  to  bring  completed  harmony  in  any  way  thy  thought 
may  see.  I  love  the  ones  you  love,  and  you  are  good,  and  kind, 
and  fond  and  true ;  and  one  we  were,  and  one  will  be  completed 
in  eternity,  in  power  to  do,  but  not  at  then  more  near  to  you 
than  now  I  am,  and  am  to  be.  We  guide  thee  into  harmony. 
I  with  May  Donna  too,  are  doing  all  we  can  to  help  you  work 
it  out,  this  book  to  aid  your  fellow-man.” 

8.15  a. m.,  18th  May,  1912.  From  Dr.  I.  K.  Funk:  “Dawn 
of  the  Awakened  Mind”  is  strong,  as  well  as  true.  I  like  the 
book  as  it  is  now ;  also  the  proclamation  made  by  you,  and  if 
my  ‘widow’s  mite’  of  evidence,  is  found  of  use  to  thee,  I  who  am 
now  on  heaven’s  shore,  most  gladly  give  to  thee  my  signature 
of  an  approving  mind,  gone  on  before,  who  knocks  upon  your 
casement  to  prove  we  come  once  more.” 

On  the  sixteenth  of  November,  1911,  at  the  third  materializing 
seance  of  the  series,  at  J.  B.  Jonson’s  (See  Chapter  XVII)  there 
came  to  me  an  ancient-looking,  and  peculiar-visaged  spirit  form 
of  giant  size,  different  from  all  mortals  that  I  had  ever  seen ; 
and  who  alleged  he  was  a  spirit  guide  of  mine,  the  most  ancient 
of  all  my  guides.  Two  days  later,  in  the  seance  room  of  Mrs. 
Etta  Wriedt  in  Detroit  (see  Chapter  XVIII),  this  same  spirit, 
whom  I  designated  des  Asia,  came  and  spoke  through  the  trumpet. 
Since  then  this  same  personality  writes  through  the  New  York 
psychic  to  me  frequently,  and  the  following  is  one  of  his  com¬ 
munications.  Fle  has  thus  demonstrated  his  ability  to  use  each 
of  three  different  phases  of  mediumship.  His  contributions  are 
invariably  interesting. 

11.30  a. m.,  19th  May,  1912.  From  des  Asia:  “My  delight 
is  to  be  able  to  write  to  my  chosen  mortal.  My  home  was  on 


298 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


the  Himalayan  Mountains  long  ago.  What  now  is  a  great  desert 
capped  with  snow,  was  to  us  then  the  fertile  land ;  and  we  had 
power  to  command  our  spiritual  to  some  degree,  advanced  from 
what  the  present  mortals  be.  My  senses  were  as  humans  are 
at  now,  but  more  acute ;  and  I  had  other  senses  added  so  that 
I  could  sense,  and  also  see  my  loved  ones  at  a  distance,  ten 
miles  or  more  away,  and  tell  if  they  were  busy,  or  if  they  in 
danger  lay.  We  journeyed  with  our  footsteps  and  with  a  staff 
in  hand.  I  wandered  here,  I  wandered  there,  with  no  one  near 
me,  in  the  open  air.  I  sensed  the  second  sphere  most  plain,  and 
knew  that  spirits  came  again.  With  you  at  this  age  it  is  not  the 
same,  you  do  not  use  the  senses,  thy  Father  God  has  given  thee. 
Even  the  wisest  of  this  age,  is  as  a  child  on  this  first  stair  of 
learning  who,  and  where,  they  are,  who  live  outside  the  mortal 
shell ;  and  I  believe  you  have  done  well,  to  place  what  proofs 
you  have  before  them  plain,  and  let  the  present  living  race, 
use  judgment  of  their  brain.  When  I  was  living  this  your  native 
land  was  under  water,  as  you  understand,  and  only  heights  of 
mountains  now,  were  islands  in  the  sea,  and  that  was  why  my 
home-land  was  country  of  fertility.  There  was  a  chain  of  islands 
that  we  could  reach,  with  footsteps  not,  but  with  aid  of  rafts 
that  we  made  from;  growing  tree  upon  the  shore.  Weaving  we 
knew  in  some  degree,  and  also  how  to  use  the  animals  as  aids 
of  transportation  here,  and  there.  We  rode  upon  their  bodies, 
bare  of  leather  holds.  To  govern  them  our  voice  was  all  sufficient, 
we  trained  them  so  from  infancy,  and  prodded  them  to  cause  a 
little  pain,  or  make  impression  on  their  brain.  We  are  the  very 
ancient  race,  and  very  large  were  we,  ten  feet  in  height  or  more. 
We  were  so  powerful  in  anatomy  that  we  had  strength  of  present 
mortals  four  or  more.  Much  more  I’d  tell  thee  of  our  life  and 
race,  but  it  would  take  too  much  of  space.  Suffice  it  that  I 
Asia  am  to  thee,  and  was  a  member  of  the  human  race,  when 
this  your  continent  was  submerged,  and  only  islands  here  and 
there  would  show.  I  aid  your  work,  and  help  your  hand  to  write, 
and  try  to  bring  you  second  sight,  so  you  my  medium  shall  have 
the  power  to  see  us  clear.  I  try  to  wipe  away  each  tear.  Asia 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


299 


is  the  continent  I  was  born  in  and  as  you  could  not  spell  or 
pronounce  my  name,  with  your  symbology  of  sound  or  sight, 
let  it  in  silence  be,  and  Asia  I  will  stay  to  thee.” 

Otelleo  first  materialized  before  my  view,  at  the  seance  first 
attended  by  May,  when  Hypatia  convinced  her  that  spirits  do 
return.  He  claims  to  have  lived  in  Egypt  centuries  ago,  —  B.  C. 
8,000  years,  —  and  like  Hypatia  is  exalted  in  character.  He  has 
often  spoken  through  trumpets,  and  written  messages  for  me. 

3.30  p.  m.,  19th  May,  1912.  From  Otelleo  (to  the  instru¬ 
ment)  :  “My  child,  write  Dr.  King  that  I  who  often  visit  from 
the  sky  am  one  of  many  spirits  who  have  tried  to  write  through 
hand  of  you ;  but  duty  here  and  duty  there,  have  caused  my  time 
to  go  to  where,  I  cannot  know,  or  say,  but  it  is  gone,  and  gone 
to  stay.  (To  Dr.  King)  “Like  pebbles  glinting  in  the  shine 
of  sunbeams,  on  the  shores  of  time,  so  are  life’s  opportunities 
to  do,  take  those  at  hand,  while  your  frail  boat  is  moored  upon 
life’s  sand,  for  soon  your  chance  to  do  will  go,  and  you  will 
live  regretful...  So  would  I  feel  here,  if  I  was  not  a  writer  for 
your  book.  I  never  cease  to  do  for  you,  though  I  am  as  a  stoker, 
in  this  your  ship  of  fate,  and  have  more  power,  loved  medium, 
to  do,  than  I  have  time,  to  write  to  you.  I’ll  bring  some  others 
here  to  write  and  e’er  you  close  your  mortal  sight,  your  book 
will  be  a  beam  of  light,  to  point  to  mental  mariners  the  way. 
In  all  your  work  you’re  helped  by  me  like  cog  in  the  machinery.” 

12.50  p.  m.,  31st  May,  1912.  From  F.  W.  H.  Myers  (late  of 
London  Psychic  Research  Society)  :  “With  Tmperator,’ my  guide, 
I  come  to  be  the  writer  of  a  message  here,  in  a  book  they  will 
print.  I  studied  Mrs.  Piper  too,  and  she  was  of  much  use  to  me. 
I  tried  to  find  the  limitations  of  the  subliminal  self,  of  her  fas 
an  instrument).  I  loved  the  study,  and  I  thought  the  guide 
Tmperator’  her  own,  but  he  was  waiting  here  for  me  to  guide 
me  to  my  home,  and  since  I’m  of  the  living  dead,  I  find  this 
guide  my  own.  One  may  philosophize,  and  guessing  try  to  see, 


300 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


but  what  is  not  within  our  mental  reach,  is  very  difficult  to 
teach.  One  theory  is  made  of  God’s  domain,  but  like  a  bubble 
beautiful,  it  floats  up  for  a  day,  and  shows  upon  its  transient 
sides,  the  ray  of  sunlight  wonderful,  and  grand,  and  hard  for 
mortal  mind  to  understand.  I  did  not  wish  to  exceed  actual 
proof  in  any  way,  and  could  not  of  this  proof  quite  say  it  shows 
beyond  a  doubt,  but  he  who  studies  mind  is  often  like  the  least 
of  mortals  blind.  I  tried  in  every  way  I  could  to  prove  that 
laws  not  understood  govern  each  mind,  and  when  the  active  mind 
asleep  did  be,  the  subjective  or  subliminal  could  show  as  in 
eclipse  of  sun.  The  rays’  extension  men  can  see,  but  cannot 
tell  of  what  they  are.  With  Mrs.  Piper  in  a  sleeping  state, 
I  for  resultants  then  did  wait,  hoping  by  groping,  and  by  judg¬ 
ment’s  plan  to  find  the  limitations  of  a  man.  But  one  can  study 
wise,  and  study  long,  and  still  be  ignorant,  in  large  degree, 
and  this  condition  was  my  own,  as  I  from  higher  plane  now 
see.  The  continuity  of  life  is  proved  beyond  a  doubt ;  and  it 
is  to  me  natural  law,  that  lets  the  spirit  out.  The  body  like  a 
tuber  root,  supplies  the  need  to  mind,  till  it  reaches  its  upper 
air,  and  grows  to  its  perfection  there.  The  body  like  the  tuber 
root,  forgotten  quite  must  be,  and  fruitage  new  results  to  you, 
and  to  ourselves,  our  judgments  new,  eclipse  our  other  judgments 
so,  we  simply  say  we  did  not  know,  we  could  not  sense,  we 
could  not  see,  we  could  not  judge  aright,  though  we  were  climb¬ 
ing  steadily  to  light,  and  learning  slowly  of  the  right.  The 
Psychic  Research  Society  of  London  is  filled  with  earnest,  honest 
men,  and  I  am  very  proud  indeed  to  be  called  one  of  them; 
and  I  am  proud  indeed  to  have  the  earthly  doctor  call  for  me, 
to  write  through  mortal  hand  to  him.  This  book,  ‘Dawn  of 
the  Awakened  Mind,’  so  called  by  you,  is  to  be  beneficial.  The 
kind  of  work  you  do  is  earnest  work,  is  honest  work,  and  I 
approve  of  you.  I  communicate  this  message.  It  is  a  peculiar 
thing  to  do.  I  do  not  govern  this  hand.  I  speak  to  it  and  the 
hand  writes  my  words.  It  is  governed  by  my  words  as  was 
Mrs.  Piper’s  hand  in  long  ago.  You’ve  heard,  or  else  you  may 
not  know,  that  we  spoke  to  the  discanaate  spirits,  by  holding  her 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


301 


hand  to  our  Ups.  Now  in  this  case  I  stand  by  and  talk  what  I 
wish  to  say,  the  mortal  senses  me  not,  though  she  is  in  conscious¬ 
ness  I  am  told.  She  only  sees,  as  I  see,  what  the  hand  writes. 
I  see  it  is  not  my  handwriting,  but  her  own.  You  are,  dear 
Dr.  King,  a  help,  a  stool,  a  step,  to  aid  the  hungry  multitude 
of  thinking  men,  to  reach  the  fruit  your  active  thoughts  have 
gained.  You  culled  through  thorns,  of  climbs  and  falls,  but 
held  the  good  as  fast,  secure,  a  part  of  thee,  and  treasured  it 
as  farmer  treasures  grain,  and  never  let  it  go  again.  Now  on 
the  shelf  of  your  experience,  all  may  look,  with  aid  of  this  your 
coming  book,  and  you  the  farmer  standing  by,  will  let  the  seed 
at  broad  cast  go,  and  from  these  seeds  much  good  will  grow. 
I  Frederick  Myers  am,  as  much  as  if  in  life,  though  all  I  thought 
was  as  the  shaping  of  a  ball  of  clay,  that  I  did  then,  like  childish 
play,  it  seems  to  me.  I  tried  to  limit  to  my  idea ;  but  let  it 
pass  into  oblivion,  or  let  it  be,  like  a  loose  plank  at  sea,  a  means 
of  buoying  some  silent  swimmer  near,  till  he  shall  through  its 
aid  see  clear.  We  all  are  babes,  whate’er  our  wisdom  be,  and 
walls  of  limitations,  vi^ith  us  be  like  florists’  jars,  these  limita¬ 
tions  seem  to  be  to  man’s  best  blossoming  necessity.  We  come 
back  and  communicate,  and  also  we  continue  as  ourselves,  take 
this  from  me,  and  so  to  the  subliminal,  it  is  not  all,  in  all.  I 
hope  to  have  from  you  another  call.  I  hope  this  introduction 
will  be  but  the  beginning  of  more  that  I  may  say,  for  you,  dear 
Brother  King,  some  other  day.  Your  studies  are  of  interest 
to  me,  but  whereas  I  in  life  was  as  the  blind,  I  now  can  see 
and  realize,  and  love  to  hold. this  knowledge  like  a  pearl,  that 
I  now  give  in  writing  through  this  hand.  Our  living  knowledge 
is  small,  in  each  degree,  but  all  of  us  are  growing,  to  divine 
humanity,  when  the  spirit  as  a  portion  shall  be  recognized,  and 
know  when  we  make  the  portal  of  God’s  palaces  our  own.  The 
mind  of  man  awakened  will  lead  to  this  degree  of  humanized 
perfection,  that  I  hope  is  soon  to  be.  Listen,  brother,  at  thy 
casement,  and  from  the  hearts  of  men  will  come  to  thee  this 
answer.  Spirits  do  return  again,  and  we  who  swell  the  chorus, 
and  move  this  soul  song  so,  will  thank  you  for  enlightenment. 


302 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  for  telling  what  you  know.  Wm.  T.  Stead  is  with  me 
now.  I  will  go  away,  and  write  to  you,  co-worker,  upon 
another  day. 

F.  W.  H.  Myers,  of 

London  Psychic  Research  Society. 

12.15  p. m.,  1st  June,  1912.  From  Lombroso.  (Note:  Lom- 
broso  Cesare,  born  1836,  a  noted  Italian  criminologist) :  “Within 
an  area  small  are  all  mankind,  and  I  am  one  of  many  men  called 
wise,  but  what  is  wisdom  in  a  human  here?  One  life,  and  ten 
lives  added  to  its  span,  could  not  encompass  in  its  power  to  scan, 
the  thoughts  and  the  beliefs  of  man.  Let  us  as  one,  as  brothers 
be,  and  join  in  this  divine  degree,  that  we  the  dead  may  come 
to  you  is  truth ;  and  I  to  prove  it  true,  come  near  to  write  a 
word  of  truth.  I  was  a  student  from  my  youth,  and  hope  so 
high  in  heart  of  me,  expanded  like  growing  tree.  In  this  my 
present  life,  my  countrymen  will  wish  to  know,  if  this  philosophy 
is  so,  for  Catholic  is  the  land  of  me,  and  of  the  saints  I  now 
must  be,  in  wish  to  aid  humanity  I  am,  for  of  those  who  have 
been  in  life,  and  wished  to  know  if  this  was  truth  was  I.  I  am 
called  Lombroso  or  its  English  form.  Buffalo  instrument  (the 
medium  lives  near  Buffalo)  I  use  to  conduct  this  my  thought 
to  thee,  and  English  with  a  nasal  twang,  is  native  tongue  I’m 
told  of  her.  Let  us  be  like  the  flowers  most  sweet,  when  most 
in  silence,  we  the  least  say,  so  I  smile  at  all  the  teachings  of 
the  wise  in  earth  below.  Men  of  every  nation  are  gathered 
here  today,  and  so  I  step  aside,  to  let  them  have  a  word  to  say.” 

From  Guillaume  Guizot.  (Note:  1787  to  1874.  French 
Historian)  :  “I,  Guillaume  Guizot,  was  historian  of  France,  and 
I  would  write  if  I  but  had  the  chance,  for  I  approve  in  every 
way  of  what  the  living  doctor  does  say.  His  is  a  mission  to 
perform,  and  all  of  us  are  here,  to  prove  the  living  come  again 
from  out  the  spirit  sphere.” 

“I,  Gottlob  Hoose,  am  standing  near,  of  Germany  was  I. 
I  wish  to  give  my  witness  that  the  spirits  never  die,  but  come 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


303 


again  to  be  able  to  talk  to  mortals,  like  to  Dr.  King,  who  wishes 
us  so  to  do.” 

From  Labodie  Jean  and  De.  (Note:  Jean  Joseph  de  Labodie 
—  French  financier  and  philanthropist):  “Labodie  Jean  and  de 
was  name  that  was  attached  to  me.  I  tried  to  teach  the  multitude 
the  things  I  did  not  know,  and  with  great  leaders  it  is  often  so. 
I  lead  toward  good,  and  if  we  gain  the  goal,  we  all  must  try 
to  analyze  the  soul.  What  is  it,  Where  is  it?  And  what  is  it  to 
be,  when  death  has  claimed  the  frail  anatomy?  All  have  a  soul, 
and  all  must  die,  and  all  must  ask  the  reason  why  that  thing 
we  know ;  and  we  who  have  been  living  men,  and  come  to 
earth  to  speak  again  now  aid  to  shape  men’s  thoughts  again. 
Let  us  all  try  to  learn  the  way.  It  is  all  good,  the  words  you 
say  are  not  in  language  born  to  me,  but  I  approve  the  thought 
of  thee,  and  I  will  do  all  that  I  can,  to  help  convince  my  fellow 
man.  My  countryman  Francis  Marie  de  Voltaire  heard  of  by 
thee  is  standing  near,  and  he  would  say  a  word  or  two  to  you 
today.” 

From  Voltaire.  (Francois-Marie  Aronet  —  a  French  philoso¬ 
pher  and  versatile  author,  b.  1674)  :  “Like  golden  shells  upon 
the  sea,  nearness  makes  crudeness,  thus  with  me,  I  see  the  errors 
of  it  all,  and  must  class  myself  as  one  small  indeed,  but  glad 
I  am  to  come,  and  be  a  witness  of  approval  here.  My  name  was 
Aronet,  but  Voltaire  is  how  I  am  most  called  by  the  English- 
speaking  race  of  every  class  and  kind.  I  tried  to  see  and  tried 
to  help  mankind  to  be  of  thinkers  independent.  I  went  about 
it  anyway,  and  thinking  independently  was  one  thing  that  brought 
fame  to  me.  I  much  approve  the  words  you  say,  and  I  foresee 
success  to  thee,  and  much  good  to  humanity.” 

From  Francesco  Zabarella  (prelate  and  canonist)  :  “Fran¬ 
cesco  Zabarella  near  would  like  to  tell  you  he  is  here.  To  be  a 
Cardinal  to  me  was  what  I  wished  from  infancy.  I  gained  my 
end ;  and  so  I  see  you’ll  gain  the  end  in  view  of  thee.  Like  to 


304 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


my  sunny  Italy,  so  is  the  shore  of  mind  set  free.  I  love  those 
who  love  good,  and  gain  a  grand  contentment,  that  the  brain 
of  mortal  cannot  understand.  We  give  to  you  our  loving  hand, 
we  help  you  in  your  language’s  flow,  ’tis  not  so  very  long  ago 
since  I  was  here,  five  hundred  years  is  but  a  day,  and  I  have 
much  I’d  like  to  say,  but  most  of  all  I  wish  to  do,  is  give  approval 
to  the  work  of  you;  and  add  my  witness  to  the  fact  that  you 
give  forth  to  men  that  which  is  true.” 

5.15  p. m.,  3rd  June,  1912.  From  May:  “I  will  not  let  this 
letter  go  till  of  my  love  for  you  I’ve  said  a  word  or  two.  She 
(the  instrument)  has  to  work  to  get  it  done,  and  so  must  you, 
and  I  am  patient,  dearest  one,  and  help  you  all  I  can,  and  we 
will  be  together  as  one,  whate’er  you  do.  My  sister  Gertie,  and 
my  brother  John,  and  Mother  King  and  Father  too,  and  David 
spirit  brother  you  lost  in  the  long  ago.  We  will  each  write 
tonight.” 

8.30  a.  m.,  4th  June,  1912.  From  Otelleo:  “Triumphant 
like  a  conqueror  of  circumstances  small,  you  will  o’erride  your 
fellows  and  really  lead  them  all.  Under  each  flag  of  whatsoever 
clan  is  mortal,  with  the  heart  and  love  of  man ;  and  what  you 
have  with  your  earth  labor  won,  will  be  as  path  made  through 
a  tangled  wood,  a  traveller  coming  after  may  easy  find  his  way, 
for  it  is  marked  in  slight  degree  to  show  a  man  was  there  before, 
and  so  with  footsteps  toward  the  ‘other  shore.’  You  open  up  the 
path  to  show  this  is  the  where  to  which  we  go.  This  is  to  all 
men  final  goal.  This  is  the  thing  reached  for  by  every  soul. 
We’ll  aid  you  to  climax  it  well,  and  little  secrets  we  will  tell, 
that  you  will  know  and  understand.  Your  wish  at  heart  is  our 
command.  With  your  wife  and  mother  here  with  me,  I  who 
am  strong  write  this  to  thee ;  Otelleo  I  am  and  underneath  the 
feet  shall  be  all  of  the  thorns  and  brambles  that  retard  the  work 
of  thee.  May  started  in  to  write  to  you,  and  I  assisted  her  to 
do,  till  what  I  wished  to  say  to  thee  was  more  her  wish  that 
it  should  be,  than  what  her  heart  has  said  before.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


305 


4  p. m.,  4th  June,  1912.  From  George  Brown:  “George 
Brown  of  ‘The  Globe’  known  to  you,  and  much  I  love  to  have 
you  do  this  work  that  brings  success  to  you.  ‘The  Globe’  was 
name  of  paper.  I  was  editor  of  it  you  know,  but  you  will  rule 
the  mind  instead,  of  the  ‘Great  Globe,’  of  all  below.  Which  is 
the  wise  man  of  an  age?  The  one  who  brings  to  hand  of  men 
the  thing  that  gives  most  good  to  them  and  you ;  who  proves 
that  man  be  joined  to  his  loves  across  the  sea  of  that  oblivion 
to  men,  where  dead  are  never  known  again.  You  are  like  the 
lighter  of  a  torch  that  lights  the  lighthouse  ray.  You  send  forth 
an  enlightenment  that  on  the  earth  shall  stay,  and  really  never 
pass  away.  The  words  may  change  but  thought  of  you  will  never, 
never  pass  from  view.  You  open  up  a  brooklet’s  flow  down  arid 
mountain’s  side,  and  soon  the  waters  everywhere  come  forth, 
and  there  abide,  and  follow,  follow  in  the  pathway  new,  till 
brook  to  river  grow,  and  onward,  onward  evermore  continue 
in  its  flow.  ’Twill  sweep  all  opposition  from  its  way,  and  show 
this  thought  has  come  to  stay.  And  smiling  from  its  dimpled  sides, 
blossoms  and  fruits  will  grow,  that  had  been  silent  evermore, 
had  you  not  done  it  so,  like  landscape  in  a  desert  dead,  but  for 
the  rivers  flow.  Even  the  sun  of  opposition’s  key  is  beneficial 
to  this  work  of  thee,  for  you  will  start  enlightenment  in  men, 
by  causing  argument  maybe,  of  them.  What  you  have  done  is 
well  done,  and  will  in  end  prove  true,  and  I  who  was  your  friend 
on  earth  am  proud  indeed  of  you;  and  I  will  try  to  aid  you  in 
everything  you  do.’’ 


4.30  p.  m.,  4th  June,  1912.  From  Imperator:  “Imperator  I 
am.  If  my  beloved  Myers  can,  he’ll  later  write  to  you  and  I 
will  try  to  aid  him  in  the  work  you  wish  him  to  now  do  for 
you.  One  is  so  small,  and  God’s  great  light  so  bright,  that  why  ? 
and  how?  are  dim  indeed  to  every  mortal  sight.  If  you  a  mortal 
with  your  senses  five,  should  try  to  talk  to  one  alive,  who  had 
but  touch  alone,  what  would  you  do  to  make  him  understand 
what  other  four  have  brought  to  you?  Thus  limited  are  living 
men  from  our  enlightened  view,  and  it  is  hard  to  bend  our  rays 


306 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  power  to  know,  so  they  will  right  impress  your  mortal  power 
to  reach.  It  is  one  thing  to  know  a  thing,  but  one  who  is  to 
teach,  must  not  alone  possess  the  knowledge  he  has  wish  to 
teach,  but  also  be  able  to  bring  that  knowledge  to  the  tone  of 
thought  capacity  to  understand,  of  pupil  near.  So  with  the  senses 
at  our  own  command,  we  gain  and  gain,  and  then  we  find  it 
difficult  indeed  to  limit  them  again.  And  this  is  thing  we  all 
must  do,  when  we  come  near  to  talk  to  you.  We  change  this 
knowledge  true,  and  all  our  power  to  do,  till  it  fits  into  tone, 
to  come  again  to  you.  With  thought  communication  it  is  difficult 
for  one  like  me,  as  well  as  for’^the  mortals  just  departed  and 
who  come  again  to  thee.  We  work  as  one  in  caisson,  and  none 
of  us  can  say,  if  we  have  power  to  do  so,  when  we  try  to  do, 
the  way  you  ask  us  to.  I  am  to  F.  H.  Myers,  as  Hypatia  is  to 
thee,  and  will  try  to  do  the  thing  to  give  you  harmony.” 

4.10  p. m.,  12th  June,  1912.  From  F.  W.  H.  Myers;  “Myers 
I  am.  I  have  no  one  to  talk  of  to  you  today.  My  life  was  one 
of  care,  and  grave  anxiety.  To  pursue  this  study  was  to  me  as 
difficult  at  first,  as  ‘twas  for  you ;  but  broken  thread  in  my  own 
family,  soon  lead  me  to  the  light,  and  when  I  was  convinced  that 
it  was  right,  I  stood  up  for  it  as  now  you  do.  The  ones  I  love 
are,  I  cannot  name  to  thee  a  special  one  to  send  it  to,  but  when 
they  write  to  thee  you’ll  know,  and  be  able  to  think  as  I,  that 
he  who  took  the  place  of  me  should  not  be  forced  to  buy.  His 
office  is  his  signet  ring.  Let  him  receive  from  John  S.  King  a 
book  that  is  his  own ;  and  also  send  one  to  King  George,  who 
now  on  throne  of  England  is,  and  it  in  end  will  prove  to  be 
of  benefit,  dear  friend,  to  thee.  Hodgson  and  James,  and  oh! 
so  many  of  the  ones  who  worked  like  me,  are  of  the  liberated 
souls  set  free,  living  in  soul-life  here  with  me.  Let  us  all  be 
united  in  the  wish  to  prove  to  live  humanity  that .  mind  has 
continuity,  from  sphere  to  sphere  after  they’ve  left  the  living 
here.” 

7.20  a. m.,  19th  June,  1912.  From  Hypatia:  “Within  a  week 
that  which  you  seek  will  come  within  your  view,  and  you  .will 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


307 


realize,  and  know  that  we  are  leading  you  into  that  power  to 
understand  and  reach  us  with  thy  spirit  hand.  We  follow  thee, 
and  we  shall  be  able  to  do  as  you  command  us  to.  Live  as  a 
child  of  God,  for  underneath  the  stars  of  fame  you  are  to  stand 
as  one  alone.  We  lift  thee  nearer  to  the  throne.  We  climb 
ourselves  by  aiding  thee,  and  thus  the  continuity  of  spirit  is 
to  be  brought  forth  as  true,  and  proved  in  this  the  book  of  you. 

10  p. m.,  19th  June,  1912.  From  Jesse  King:  “My  father 
is  your  brother,  and  I  am  Jesse  as  you  think,  ’twas  true;  and 
I  at  Jonson’s  showed  to  you,  but  could  not  speak,  I  was  so  weak, 
or  it  was  all  so  new.  I  will  try  to  show  so  you  will  know  that 
it  is  truly  I,  and  that  I  look  like  you,  and  like  my  father  too. 
I  have  made  several  efforts  to  communicate,  with  my  father, 
and  through  him  with  you.  I’ll  visit  you  in  your  room  soon, 
because  I  want  to  see  if  it  is  possible  for  me.  I’ll  walk  about 
the  room  and  lift  the  paper  shade,  to  show  that  it  is  I,  the  one 
you  know,  or  think  of  lately.  It  is  to  me  a  difficult  power  to 
use,  and  I  am  careful  not  to  it  abuse.  Perhaps  I  act  with  too 
much  care,  but  it  was  I  whom  you  saw  there.”  (That  was  at 
Jonson’s  third  of  April,  and  is  thus  referred  to  by  my  stenographer: 
“In  all  there  were  eight  forms  which  appeared  for  the  doctor, 
one  of  whom  was  a  boy  who  was  not  recognized  by  him.”) 
See  Chapters  XIII,  XIV  and  XVII. 

10.30  p.  m.,  19th  June,  1912.  From  Sir  Oliver  Mowat: 
“The  silent  man  was  Sir  Oliver  Mowat  and  he  will  be  glad  to 
show  himself  to  you  in  your  own  room.  Keep  your  mind  silent 
like  to  reverie  and  when  you  see,  don’t  seem  to  see,  or  do  not 
lose  the  passive  state  of  your  mentality,  and  soon  I  will  show 
quite  plain  to  thee.”  (See  Chapter  XXVIII.) 

8.30  a. m.,  22nd  June,  1912.  From  Sir  Oliver  Mowat: 
“I  am  of  those  Jiving  in  the  heaven  of  love,  that  God  prepares 
for  men  above ;  and  I  am  of  those  who  know  that  spirits  come 
again.  In  all  the  stars  there  is  no  home  like  to  the  earth  to 


308 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


me,  and  I  am  very  glad  at  last,  that  I  may  write  to  thee.  My 
image  is  the  thing  you  saw,  when  in  the  seance  where  I  saw  you. 

“I  fell  into  a  restful  sleep,  when  angels  brought  me  here,  and 
when  I  was  awake,  to  me  it  normal  did  appear.  I  did  not  realize 
or  know  that  I  had  left  my  friends  below,  until  a  guardian 
told  me  so.  So  consciousness  is  held  in  its  own  state,  and  for 
the  change  they  slowly  wait,  till  we  in  our  minds  grow  to  sense 
and  see,  that  here  we  are  from  body  free,  and  yet  still  living 
happily.  So  mind  in  living  men  is  to  awake,  and  grand  will 
the  awakening  be,  and  we  are  of  those  who  like  you,  herald  the 
dawn  of  this  idea;  and  when  the  minds  of  men  awaken  from 
their  sleeping  state,  we  all  shall  be  in  joy  indeed,  for  this  glad 
time  we  wait.  I  too,  believe  as  you  in  your  book,  say  you  do. 
Your  work  and  book  will  prove  it  true,  for  now,  adieu  to  you.” 

(In  the  fourth  and  concluding  seance  of  the  April  series,  at 
Jonson’s  in  Toledo,  one  form  appeared,  who  did  not  speak,  it 
being  that  of  a  man  who,  according  to  this  letter,  was  Sir 
Oliver.) 


3  p.  m.,  26th  June,  1912.  From  Sir  Oliver  Mowat:  “I  have 
a  vivid  memory  of  all  that  was.  What  is  to  be  is  glorious  I’m 
told  for  thee,  as  a  bright  afterglow  that  follows  thee  along  thy 
sunset  way.  You  will  be  proud  at  seventy  that  you  have  had 
your  say ;  and  fame  to  follow  your  good  name,  shall  come  to 
stay.  Broad  is  the  way  ahead  of  thee,  and  though  it  leads  to 
good,  it  is  the  ‘narrow  way’  of  old,  not  as  yet  understood ;  but 
when  in  glorified  degree  men’s  friends  may  come  to  with  them 
be,  and  death  no  unknown  quantity ;  when  we  who  listen  here 
above,  may  come  again  to  those  we  love,  how  glorious  the  day, 
how  broad  and  perfect  then  the  heaven  way.  The  ‘narrow  way’ 
made  wide  by  modern  thought,  made  broad  and  smooth  in  every 
way,  with  angel’s  whispers  in  man’s  ears.  How  glorious  the 
day,  that  you  will  open  up  to  man,  when  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind’  fulfills  its  plan ;  and  I  of  many  standing  near,  look  for 
this  time  to  soon  appear,  when  narrowness  and  greed  shall  cease 
to  be  in  every  creed;  and  broader  life,  and  broader  scope  come 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


309 


to  each, soul  in  wider  hope.  The  loving  spirits  from  this  side, 
come  to  your  home  and  there  abide.  Under  no  flag,  under  no 
creed,  your  book  fulfills  a  human  need.” 

Practical  Psychological  Study  Profound  in  Character. 

Full  Recompense  for  Many  Years  of  Devotion  to  the 

Subject.  Satisfactory  Knowledge  Gained  Beyond  Every 

Doubt. 

In  the  psychic’s  presence  results  to  me  usually  prove  most 
satisfactory.  So  for  the  early  days  of  August,  1912,  I  arranged 
for  a  series  of  seances ;  and  likewise  secured  two  unexpected 
trumpet  seances,  with  another  psychic,  where  familiar  spirit 
guides  and  aiders  of  my  own  were  present ;  and  where  “Gray 
Feather,”  the  strong  Indian  guide  and  control  of  Jonson,  for 
my  satisfaction  and  benefit,  assumed  control  of  the  psychic, 
instead  of  the  one  claimed  as  her  own.  This  was  due  to  his 
long  acquaintance  with  me,  in  the  Jonson  seances,  and  his  desire 
to  serve  me,  and  the  cause  I  had  espoused,  which  of  itself  was 
gratifying;  and  I  was  also  enabled  to  engage,  as  previously  I 
did,  in  a  psychological  interview  with  Hypatia  (see  Chapter 
XXIII),  and  with  the  philosophers  (see  Chapter  XXIV)  in  the 
study  of  psychology.  I  have  not  been  a  student  with,  nor  disciple 
of  the  cults  which  have  been  teaching  it ;  but  have  followed  my 
intuitions,  and  exercised  my  reason ;  and  feel  that  by  the  aid  of 
spirit  intelligences,  I  have  built  my  foundation  firm,  and  on  it 
now  erect  a  fortress  cemented  throughout  by  truth. 

Prior  to  the  seance  with  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  I  had 
been  conversing  with  a  friend  who  was  also  there,  regarding  the 
various  hypotheses  of  the  mind  which  had  been  adopted  by  others 
to  account  for  the  psychic  demonstrations ;  and  I  read  to  her  my 
analysis  and  criticism  of  them. 

What  is  now  to  follow  will  be  more  of  variety  than  simply 
volunteer  messages,  and  will  embrace  question  and  answer,  date, 
time  and  place ;  and  explanation,  as  well  as  confirmation  in  the 
matter  of  evidence. 

The  instrument  for  use  (the  Human-Psychic-Telephone)  is  in 
her  own  home  in  New  York  State,  and  in  a  room  with  absence 


310 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


of  interruption ;  and  there  with  her  I  take  my  seat,  I  must  be 
honest  in  my  mental  attitude  towards  her,  as  well  as  with  myself ; 
and  try,  so  far  as  able,  to  make  conditions  favorable ;  and  exclude 
each  act  or  thought  or  thing,  which  may  tend  to  condition  of 
disturbance  of  harmony,  such  as  criticism  or  dispute.  I  must  not 
be  too  positive  or  anxious,  but  rather  quite  normal  or  fairly 
passive;  remembering  that  I  have  within  my  body,  myself,  a 
spirit,  which  I  have  attuned  to  spirit  realm ;  and  it  acts  as  motor 
which  operates  the  mind,  and  through  the  latter  in  my  subjective 
self,  the  discarnate  mind  of  a  discarnate  spirit,  can  read  my 
thoughts,  and  answer  them  by  using  as  an  agent,  the  subjective 
mind,  and  physical  machinery  of  my  psychic,  to  write  its  dis¬ 
carnate  thoughts  to  me,  and  in  this  way  substantiate  my  claim, 
of  the  possibility  of  psychical  communication. 

I  had  only  just  been  seated  when  the  psychic’s  hand  began 
to  write,  before  I  had  a  chance  to  question,  or  make  a  remark, 
and  this  is  what  she  wrote: 

9.45  a. m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  May:  “I  am  the  first 
of  right  to  come,  and  I  was  disappointed  too,  because  I  could 
not  speak  to  you  (that  was  last  night  at  a  trumpet  seance). 
Tomorrow  morning  I  will  try  to  give  to  you  through  a  trumpet 
some  test  complete,  so  you  will  know  that  it  is  I  who  visit  you 
from  out  the  sky.  My  name  is  public  property,  and  that  I’ll  give 
of  course  to  you,  but  I’ll  try  also  to  proceed  in  such  a  way  that 
you  will  be  convinced  that  I,  May,  talk  to  you.” 

J.  S.  K.  “I  will  be  pleased  to  talk  with  you  there.”  (Note: 
Another  trumpet  medium,  and  not  the  one  where  I  was  last 
night.) 

9.55  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Mother  :  “Mrs.  King 
I  am;  I  am  his  mother,  and  I  wish  to  speak  a  word  of  joy  to  you 
dear  boy,  before  Hypatia  comes  to  be  servant  to  wish  of  thee. 

Margaret  P.  King.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “To  the  instrument  I  speak  and  say,  before  I  ask  for 
anyone,  or  make  remark,  I  want  to  know  if  Hypatia,  my  spirit 
guide,  is  here?” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


311 


At  once  the  psychic’s  hand  begins  to  write  in  my  own  book, 
which  I  handed  her,  and  this  is  what  the  communication  said: 

10  a. m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Hypatia:  “I  hear  as  well, 
you  will  observe,  if  she,  the  psychic,  has  her  mind  quite  digressed, 
for  we  are  using  her  subliminal  entirely.  We  use  it  in  harmonious 
consent  of  her  awake,  and  present  consciousness,  as  you  a  guest 
would  use  a  room  that  is  her  property.  So  we  assume  the  power 
t^  rule  her  subliminal  consciousness.  She  as  a  hostess  in  her 
conscious  state  observes  that  we  have  harmony,  but  leaves  us 
quite  at  liberty.” 

J.  S.  K.  “Hypatia,  I  much  desire  to  have  present  here  certain 
ones  that  I  may  communicate  with  them,  regarding  the  psychic 
instrument,  and  my  conclusions  as  to  process  of  transmitting 
messages,  proving  personality,  and  my  analysis  of  mind  hypo¬ 
theses.  The  special  ones  that  I  most  desire  are  Frederick  W.  H. 
Myers,  late  of  the  London  Psychical  Research  Society,  Dr. 
Richard  Hodgson,  of  the  same,  or  its  branch,  the  American ; 
Prof.  William  James  of  Harvard  and  Prof.  Thompson  J.  Hudson, 
all  in  spirit  realms.” 

Hypatia  (through  psychic) :  “I  will  see  that  they  write  for 
you  for  publication  properly.  The  ones  you  have  named  are 
now  here.  They  came  here  with  you,  as  they  were  with  you 
before.  Their  interest  holds  them  here.  They  heard  your  con¬ 
versation,  and  what  you  read.  They  will  remain  until  you  go.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “Friends  and  Co-workers:  As  psychical  researchers 
in  earth-life,  you  were  more  or  less  co-workers  one  with  another, 
and  held  in  high  repute  by  those  who  knew  of  your  important 
labors;  as  well  as  by  one  (myself)  who  worked  silently,  and 
almost  alone,  but  still  with  confidence  that  in  time,  and  with  spirit 
help,  I  would  yet  reveal  my  work,  and  prove  the  truth. 

“What  you  each  had  done  in  human  life  encouraged  me  to 
seek  with  you  in  spirit  sphere  attunement,  and  your  quick 
vibration  of  response  in  messages  proved  that  I  had  struck  the 
key.  For  this  alone  I  am  thankful,  and  feel  indebted  for  your 
messages ;  but  I  further  wish  to  thank  you  one  and  all,  for  your 
proffered  aid  to  me,  and  now  wish  to  say,  the  compilation  of 


312 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


my  book,  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind,’  is  nearly  completed, 
still  I  desire  from  each  or  all  of  you,  your  judgment  of  the 
article  on  Mind  Hypotheses,  with  my  analysis  of  them,  which 
constitutes  the  major  part  of  Chapter  XVIII ;  and  likewise  your 
judgment,  and  your  testimony  to  the  truth,  regarding  the  name 
I  have  given  to  the  instrument,  together  with  the  manner  of 
transmitting  spirit  messages  through  her  to  me ;  and  also  have 
you  criticize  or  endorse  my  conclusions,  or  judgment  give  of 
what  I  have  seen  fit  to  say,  which  I  have  carefully  reasoned 
out,  from  what  I  know  from  study  of  the  mind  in  normal  state, 
and  also  by  aid  of  hypnosis,  aided  likewise,  it  seems  to  me,  by 
a  weak  sense  may  be,  of  intuition.  If  it  be  correct,  I  would  like 
to  be  assured  of  it  by  you,  and  I’ll  prize  your  endorsation ;  or  if 
I  be  incorrect,  I  wish  your  judgment  and  instruction,  as  to  the 
functioning  by  which  the  message  comes  from  you  to  me,  which¬ 
ever  way  it  be,  it  would,  I  feel,  be  greatly  prized  by  thinking 
men  throughout  the  world,  and  do  much  to  strengthen  the  work 
in  which  I  am  engaged,  as  well  as  that  of  others;  and  aid 
enlightenment  of  mind,  and  pave  the  way  for  proving  other 
truths  of  value  to  humanity. 

“My  friends,  this  is  my  explanation  of  the  modus  operandi 
of  dispatching  these  various  messages  from  the  sender  to  me; 
this  is  the  description  as  I  interpret  it,  or  as  I  now  make  it,  not 
absolute,  but  as  it  seems  to  me  to  be.  The  sender  speaks  the 
word  into  the  mental  ear  of  the  non  (to  her)  subjective  self 
of  the  living  psychic,  as  one  speaks  into  the  telephone  receiver. 
The  discarnate  spirit  is  not  seen  or  heard  by  psychic’s  objective 
self,  and  is  not  announced  by  her  non  (to  her)  subjective  mind 
to  its  fellow-occupant,  the  objective  mind,  because  elsewhere 
I  have  already  noted,  it  acts  independently ;  and  in  this  respect  is 
different  from  all  other  individual  ones,  so  far  as  known  to  me ; 
and  therefore  this  may  account  for  what  appears  to  be  the 
ignorance  of  psychic,  as  to  what  was  being  limited,  or  withheld 
(knowledge  to  the  objective  mind)  ;  and  not  being  subject  to 
its  former  master,  nor  acting  in  consonance  with  the  objective 
partner,  it  therefore  acts  on  its  own  initiative,  or  rather  when 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


313 


this  (to  her)  non-sub jective  mind,  or  independent  one,  hears  the 
suggestion  of  the  words  and  sentences,  which  the  discarnate 
spirit  speaks  to  it,  in  form  of  a  message,  and  name  announced 
as  if  in  signing,  by  such  discarnate  one,  it  then  of  course  adopts 
the  suggestion,  and  sets  in  operation  its  own  functioning  of 
nerve  energy,  and  puts  in  motion  the  machinery  of  muscular 
movements  with  which  it  is  quite  familiar ;  and  makes  the 
symbology  with  pen  to  represent  the  words  of  the  message,  which 
is  in  no  way  strange,  but  quite  familiar,  just  as  the  discarnate, 
now  bereft  of  the  physical,  used  to  do  itself,  when  it  had  similar 
machinery  to  operate  (the  human  body). 

“I  feel  that  my  solution  of  this  psychic  problem  is  correct, 
and  can  be  sustained.  All  of  it  can  well  be  illustrated  by  this 
fact,  that  by  hypnotic  influence  the  objective  mind  of  my  subject 
can  be  put  to  sleep,  and  thus  be  deprived  of  its  normal  power 
to  rule  or  control,  for  the  time  being,  the  subjective  mind;  and 
'  thus  we  gain  the  freedom  or  state  of  independence  of  the  sub¬ 
jective  mind,  by  artificial  means,  whereas  with  our  psychic  instru¬ 
ment,  her  subjective  is  constantly  independent,  or  non-subjective 
to  its  own,  and  can  no  longer  be  considered  abnormal,  as  such 
to  her,  although  a  most  wonderful  exception  to  the  normal  rule 
or  state,  for  it  has  at  length  become  from  long  existence,  to  her 
(the  instrument)  quite  normal.  At  this  point  to  which  I  have 
brought  my  hypnotic  subject  by  artificial  means,  I  can  proceed 
to  make  suggestions  to  him,  along  similar  lines  to  those  of  the 
discarnate  spirit  who  suggests  to  the  psychic,  and  ask  him  to 
speak  or  write,  and  leave  him  act  as  of  himself  he  chooses ;  but 
if  exact  knowledge  I  wish  to  gain,  or  otherwise  impart,  a  caution 
I  must  give,  that  it  must  be  true  and  right,  and  he  will  not 
swerve  from  it,  and  can  follow  me  in  repetition  of  what  I  say, 
for  an  whole  hour,  and  remember  in  his  subjective  mind  each 
word  of  all  I  spoke.  When  truth  is  spoken  in  his  ear,  and  he 
is  told  to  repeat  it,  by  word  or  message  made  in  writing,  he  will 
so  do  at  such  time  as  I  may  fix  for  him ;  and  so  with  suggestive 
direction  from  the  discarnate  to  the  independent  (to  her)  sub¬ 
jective  mind  of  this  psychic,  with  equal  results;  and  so  my 


314 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


argument,  as  you  can  understand,  is  that  the  machinery  of  the 
operation  of  the  subjective  mind  of  the  psychic  acts  in  accord, 
or  in  harmony  with  the  wish  of  the  discarnate  operator,  who 
desires  to  send  his  message  through  the  subjective  mind  of  this 
psychic  to  me. 

At  times  the  instrument  with  me  will  talk,  while  with  the 
hand  she’ll  write,  and  claims  not  to  know  what  is  written,  unless 
she  reads  it ;  but  now  her  hand  begins  to  write,  in  answer  to 
what  I  have  read,  and  as  she  writes  she  reads  it  out,  so  that 
her  interest  is  aroused,  and  I  am  entertained.  This  course  con¬ 
tinues  until  the  subject  is  completed.  The  writing  is  on  the 
pages  of  a  writing  book  I  handed  her,  and  date  and  hour  of 
each  message  is  recorded  with  all  the  messages,  and  here  are 
some  that  follow,  viz.: 

Responses  Come  from  Those  Addressed. 

10.30  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Dr.  Richard  Hodgson: 

“We  approve  the  name  (Human-Psychic-Telephone)  for  we 
the  extended  subliminal  in  her  case  can  see.  It  is  to  us  as  you 
have  said  a  means  of  communicating  to  you  directly  without 
the  formality  of  materialization.  I,  Richard  Hodgson,  and  the 
others  (Myers,  James,  and  Hudson),  have  listened  to  your  read¬ 
ing,  Brother  King,  for  we  are  brothers  true  in  this  the  work 
you  do,  and  I  was  one  who  often  tried  to  prove  that  man’s 
mentality  alone  could  sense  and  know  by  thoughts  of  men  living 
or  dead;  but  I  had  not  the  objects  at  my  hand  to  study  from 
hypnotic  view,  and  these  advantages  to  you,  have  given  knowl¬ 
edge  that  I  also  know,  at  this  time ;  and  it  proves  ’tis  so  that 
the  subliminal  must  be  suggested  to,  either  by  its  co-worker 
the  conscious  mind,  or  by  the  conscious  mind  of  another,  either 
living  or  dead.  Discarnate  is  a  better  word,  for  a  dead  man 
would  hardly  talk.  But  being  of  these  discarnate  now,  I  stand 
beside  the  instrument  of  you,  and  talk  with  my  mentality.  I 
think  the  words  exact  as  you  would  think  them,  if  you  read 
a  speech.  The  hand  of  her  at  once  responds  and  writes  them 
in  the  words  that  she  in  childhood  learned,  or  the  subconscious 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


315 


like  a  piano  player  at  once  repeats  the  record  of  my  thoughts 
although  the  instrument  is  quite  complete  if  no  record  is  used. 
Ripe  is  the  fruit  upon  the  tree  of  knowledge,  and  you  have  the 
advantage  of  a  college  education,  and  much  thought  in  each 
line  of  psychology,  and  so  we  all  salam  to  thee.  I  must  admit 
that  it  is  true,  as  stated  on  the  pages  read  by  you. — Richard 
Hodgson." 

10.35  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Frederick  Myers  : 
“Frederick  Myers  I  am.  I  was  so  interested  in  it,  I  forgot 
formality,  and  crowded  in  as  you  can  see.  What  Dr.  Hodgson 
said  was  also  sentiment  of  me.  In  fact  on  this  side,  we  all  quite 
agree  with  what  is  now  belief  of  you.  To  state  in  simple  words, 
I  would  say  the  subconscious  is  like  the  exalted  mentality  of 
animals  like  to  a  good  horse,  it  will  obey  a  master,  and  preferably 
its  own  master;  but  it  will  never  reason  why.  In  this  case  the 
master  rides  conscious  beside  each  driver;  and  if  necessary 
speaks  the  word  of  command.  In  case  I  could  not  use  the  rein 
the  hand  of  the  owner  draws  it  taut.  It  works  in  such  com¬ 
pleted  harmony,  that  I  am  left  in  pleasure  and  in  joy,  after  each 
driving;  instead  of  feeling  I  am  unable  to  express  completed 
thoughts  to  you.  There  are  other  mentalities  who  assist  us  like 
to  servants  in  a  well  regulated  home.  In  fact  the  tendency  to 
rhyme  is  fault  in  some  degree  of  one  of  these  zvho  near  her  {the 
psychic)  stand,  and  aid  us  in  our  least  command.  Like  to  a 
megaphone  they  he  to  my  completed  thought  to  thee.  They 
confirm  and  direct  it  to  its  best  service,  but  suggest  not. 

“I  was  president  of  the  London  Psychical  Research  Society. 
I  studied  every  instrument  I  could,  and  tried  like  you  to  know, 
and  I  am  living  glorified  because  you’ve  done  it  so.  You  have 
a  good  knowledge  of  the  normal  functions  of  the  human 
mentality,  and  so  can  recognize,  when  a  wire  is  crossed,  or  an 
instrument  is  imperfect.  The  arguments  you  make  in  regard 
to  Pansy,  an  Indian  maid  (See  Chapter  XVIII),  are  to  me  very 
convincing.  I  like  plain  distinct  terms  of  expression,  for  the 
mind,  even  to  scientific  thinkers,  is  a  very  illusive  problem  If 


316 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


you  could  take  a  mind,  as  you  can  take  a  watch,  and  place  it 
in  front  of  you  for  observation,  you  would  find  its  peculiar 
necessities  and  complications  more  intricate  by  far  to  understand, 
and  so  you  like  a  jeweller  are  trained  by  education,  and  long 
study  to  understand  each  working  part,  and  I  endorse  your 
labor  from  my  heart.  I’ll  listen  to  the  words  of  you  and  write, 
for  it  is  blessed  to  my  sight  to  see  all  prepared  for  print  by  you. 
I  much  approve  of  what  you  do. — Frederick  W.  H.  Myers.” 

10.45  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Professor  William 
James;  “William  James  I  am,  Professor  I  was  of  Psychology, 
and  as  an  earnest  student  I  spent  years  in  observation  of  different 
psychics.  I  eulogized  Professor  Myers  when  he  died,  for  I  was 
living  then,  but  now  I  am  as  he  is,  and  we  come  back  to  you 
again.  I  wanted  to  get  hold  of  proofs  that  no  one  could  gainsay. 
I  did  not  think  that  I  had  them,  so  I  would  not  sign  my  name 
among  the  convinced.  A  man  may  believe  in  a  hell,  but  it’s  hard 
to  produce  it  on  a  lecture  platform.  Hodgson,  he  was  convinced 
before  he  left  the  earth,  but  I  was  still  looking,  for  more  light, 
when  the  windows  of  heaven  opened  and  took  me  to  the  broader 
view,  and  I  am  now  convinced  like  you.  Hudson’s  theory  was 
like  that  of  the  ancients  who,  believing  the  world  was  flat,  sailed 
forth  to  prove  it,  and  found  it  a  globe.  Columbus  believed  it 
round,  but  he  thought  it  much  smaller  than  it  is.  So  with  us 
who  study  into  psychological  problems.  We  all  learn  some  truth 
that  is  new,  from  our  persistently  different  points  of  view,  and 
like  the  globe  the  truth  is  plain,  and  when  ’tis  known  to  many 
men,  they’ll  all  agree  as  I  with  thee,  that  spirits  come  again; 
that  they  communicate,  and  I  as  one  of  these  am  glad  ’tis  true, 
and  I  approve  of  present  work  of  you. — William  James  of 
Harvard  University.” 

10.50  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Thompson  J.  Hudson  : 
“I,  Thompson  J.  Hudson,  am  here  to  communicate  with  Dr. 
John  S.  King,  the  author  of  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind.’ 
J  was  like  you,  believer  in  the  acts  of  two  parts  of  the  mind,  but 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


317 


I  could  not  make  a  definite  border  to  either.  I  wrote  my  'Laws 
of  Psychic  Phenomena’  with  the  belief  and  hope  to  start  a  stone 
to  rolling,  so  that  later  students  with  advantages  not  given 
me,  would  be  able  to  clearly  see.  A  widow’s  mite  was  my  gift 
to  men,  and  it  was  all  I  had  for  them ;  and  I  was  like  to  I.  K. 
Funk  unable  to  tell  the  law  that  tips  the  table.  It  was  not 
explained  by  any  theory  that  I  could  advance.  Your  mind 
analysis  (see  Chapter  XVIII)  is  good.  Your  thinking  is  an 
open  book  to  Hypatia,  and  others  near  to  you ;  and  they  record 
like  bulletin  for  us,  the  things  you  do,  especially  a  theory  that 
would  appeal  to  one  like  me.  The  facts  I  knew  as  well  as  you, 
but  what  to  say  to  make  them  be  in  rhyme  with  my  philosophy, 
I  did  not  know,  and  so  like  genealogist,  I  could  not  tack  them 
to  my  family  tree,  and  so  I  mentioned  them  in  slight  degree. 
What  you  said  (in  Chapter  XVIII)  in  regard  to  the  communica¬ 
tion  of  Pansy,  an  Indian  maid  not  known  to  you,  communicating 
through  an  instrument,  unfamiliar  with  facts  not  in  your  own 
mind ;  and  telling  the  truth  which  you  afterwards  confirmed, 
would  surely  tend  to  prove  that  she,  the  disembodied  spirit,  knew 
and  actually  communicated  with  you,  as  a  living  mortal  might 
have  done  under  similar  earthly  conditions.  I  think  you  have 
given  to  many  of  my  pet  theories  a  knock-out  blow,  by  doing 
so.  I  confirm  that  I  a  disembodied  spirit  now  communicate  to 
you,  regarding  things  you  did  not  know  I  knew.  That  would 
confute  the  telepathic  theory  at  present.  Man  is  a  creature  of 
habits  both  mental  and  physical.  The  telepathic  theory  will  not 
account  for  the  incident  you  state.  Neither  will  the  mind-reading 
theory. — Thompson  J.  Hudson.” 

11.00  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  the  foregoing  four  con¬ 
jointly,  we  will  all  write  again  for  you,  and  state  as  you  require 
us  to. 


11.02  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  FromT.  K.  Funk:  “I  of  the 
‘Widow’s  Mite’  want  you  to  know,  that  with  me  here  are  many 
minds  like  you,  who  wish  to  be  able  to  teach  humanity.  Water 


318 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


will  run  down  hill.  That  is  a  law  you  say,  but  it  will  never  do 
it  so  without  a  rainy  day.  The  drouth  condition  in  the  hearts 
of  men  is  past  in  large  degree;  and  you  are  one  of  the  few 
thinkers  who  have  knowledge  of  the  mind  from  a  physician’s 
view,  and  so  the  ordinary  critic  cannot  laugh  and  say  no  more; 
instead  he  is  as  cornered,  and  the  solid  2  by  4  of  the  foundation 
of  the  arguments,  the  braces  here  and  there,  will  make  the 
thinkers  wonder,  and  say  T  do  declare.’  I,  Funk,  was  of  this 
belief  too  the  same  as  you.  It  is  one  thing  to  know  and  another 
to  teach.  ‘Widow’s  Mite’  of  me,  was  good  in  its  way.  Each 
man’s  thoughts  are  as  planks,  and  each  is  of  a  different  wood, 
but  each  is  useful  to  aid  thinkers  in  building  up  their  own  especial 
theory.  The  strength  of  your  oak  sentiment  is  such,  that  the 
foundation  of  your  theory  as  expressed  in  this  completed  work 
of  you,  will  combat  every  other  view.  Mice  may  gnaw  holes  in 
planks  of  wood  of  soft  degree,  so  that  they  soon  sink  in  the  sea, 
and  lose  their  interest  in  popularity ;  but  critics  cannot  gnaw 
through  the  principles  as  defined  by  thee,  is  the  judgment  of 
your  friend  and  co-worker  for  the  uplift  of  man.  If  I  was  alive 
I’d  enjoy  to  publish  your  work,  and  push  it  through  to  great 
success  in  every  land,  you  understand. — I.  K.  Funk.” 

When  Funk  had  signed  his  message  the  psychic’s  hand  then 
ceased  to  write,  and  I  exhibited  to  her  a  photo-engraving  of  her¬ 
self,  for  use  in  my  book;  and  also  another  one  made  from  the 
spirit  picture  which  I  obtained  of  Wm.  Stead,  by  sitting  with  the 
psychic  sisters.  When  she  had  finished  viewing  them  she  handed 
them  back  to  me,  and  began  again  to  write,  and  this  is  what 
was  recorded. 

11.52  a.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Wm.  T.  Stead  (No.  24) : 
‘T  was  glad  to  have  her  see  my  picture  as  prepared  by  you.  I  like 
it  most  exceedingly.  I’ll  try  to  communicate  with  you  through 
the  trumpet  tomorrow  morning. — Wm.  T.  Stead.” 

4.40  p.  m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Revd.  Theodore  Parker: 
‘‘I  think  you  have  done  it  best  of  all  the  writers,  who  have  tried 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


319 


to  demonstrate  the  facts  that  you  and  all  of  us  believe  are  true. 
I  made  my  teachings  too  creedal  I  now  think.  Spirit  return  and 
power  to  communicate  after  death,  applies  to  all  mortals  of  what¬ 
soever  nation  or  belief.  Let  it  be  proved  as  true,  and  then  the 
other  conclusions  will  as  a  consequence  follow.  It  is  a  high  and 
lofty  view  to  take,  and  the  great  and  good  of  the  past  ages 
are  gathered  near  to  see  and  hear,  and  help  whene’er  they  can, 
so  you  may  be  of  service  to  help  your  fellowman. 

8  p. m.,  2nd  August,  1912.  From  Queen  Victoria:  “I  am 
here,  dear  subject  of  mine.  The  wonders  of  this  truth  were 
known  to  me  in  life,  and  you  —  through  losing  of  your  wife  — 
but  undergo  the  constant  woe  that  I  went  through,  when  I  lost 
my  beloved  consort,  and  Alice  too.  The  belief  in  spirit  return 
was  strengthened  in  me,  and  as  my  reign  was  lengthened  to  its 
close,  and  sunset  of  the  heavens  near  began  to  be  so  near  to  me. 
I  had  no  woe  nor  grief,  but  felt  instead  relief ;  and  I  believe  that 
what  I  said  was  like  a  growing  seed  in  many  a  heart,  that  will 
find  in  this  knowledge  a  relief  from  woe,  like  what  we  both  have 
had  to  undergo.  The  mention  of  the  fact  that  I  believed,  and 
the  heart  wish  of  you,  triumphant  stand  the  leader  of  this  thought 
in  every  land ;  and  I  your  Queen  with  you  agree  that  it  as  truth 
was  known  to  me,  before  I  touched  this  unknown  shore  I  sensed 
my  loved  ones  near,  and  I  was  but  delighted  when  I  grew  to 
see  them  clear.  My  consort  was  the  first  of  those  who  clasped 
me  as  his  own,  and  we  are  both  together  now  in  our  bright  spirit 
home.  My  wish  is  with  yours  on  this  subject.  Stead’s  tragic 
ending,  and  the  fact  of  his  defending  this  truth,  will  be  a  means 
of  arousing  curiosity  at  first,  and  then  an  interest  like  to  you, 
from  arguments  that  prove  it  true.  To  proclaim  it  without  fear, 
was  to  me  in  the  years  of  prejudice  a  woe,  but  I  believed  that 
it  was  true,  and  so  made  sacrifice  as  you  often  in  past  years 
had  to  do.  Pretended  belief  in  anything  is  not  required  in  this 
age  of  modern  candor.  Each  man  respects  his  countryman  who 
is  honest  in  his  convictions,  whatsoe’er  these  convictions  may  be. 
I,  Victoria,  will  write  to  you  before  you  go,  and  often  so.  She 


320 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


(the  psychic)  need  not  wait.  We  all  ai'e  near  in  private  state, 
and  it  is  rest,  as  well  as  you,  to  know  that  this  belief  is  true. 
— Victoria.” 


Second  Day  of  the  August  Series,  1912.  My  Second 
Trumpet  Seance,  and  Different  Psychic. 

An  hour  I  took  from  the  early  morning  of  my  second  day, 
August  3rd,  and  spent  it  in  a  seance  of  a  trumpet  medium,  as 
the  same  was  arranged  for  me  by  Gray  Feather,  the  control  or 
guide  of  Jonson,  and  by  my  guides  and  aiders ;  not  by  the  psychic 
nor  her  usual  control.  The  room  was  darkened  at  9  a.  m.  and 
forty-five  minutes  were  consumed  in  my  conversations  with  six¬ 
teen  spirit  callers,  of  whom  one  was  Stead,  or  claimed  so  to  be. 
The  Indian  race  are  said  by  some  to  be  most  near  to  nature,  and 
have  great  magnetic  power  to  harmonize  conditions  at  a  seance; 
and  have  also  knowledge  before  the  body  dies  that  they  as  spirits 
can  come  back  again.  That  this  is  so  to  me  seems  true,  for  when 
at  Jonson’s  in  Toledo,  Gray  Feather  greets  me  through  Jonson’s 
vocal  organsy  while  Jonson  is  in  a  trance.  On  Thursday  night, 
August  1st,  I  sat  in  a  trumpet  seance  where  I  was  not  expected, 
and  the  psychic  was  a  stranger  whom  I’d  never  met,  and  the 
first  to  speak  to  me  in  tones  familiar  was  Jonson’s  control.  Gray 
Feather.  He  said  he  had  sent  me  a  letter  to  come  —  which  I 
received  and  so  admitted  —  and  he  said  he  wanted  to  get  me 
there  (in  New  York  State)  for  a  purpose.  He  would  bring 
others  with  him  to  make  conditions  good,  so  I  would  have  May 
and  others  talk  with  me,  through  the  trumpet  of  another  psychic. 
Sure  enough  he  took  control  of  the  trumpet  seance  on  Saturday 
morning,  3rd  of  August,  1912,  from  start  to  finish,  as  was 
manifest  by  his  native  voice,  and  this  is  the  order  in  which  each 
spirit  caller  spoke  with  me,  viz.:  1.  Gray  Feather,  2.  May,  3. 
May  Donna,  4.  Hypatia,  5.  Electra,  6.  Brother  David,  7.  Father, 
8.  Revd.  Dr.  Parker,  9.  Wm.  T.  Stead,  10.  A  nephew,  Jesse, 
11.  Prof.  James  of  Harvard,  12.  Dr.  Richard  Hodgson,  13.  Gott¬ 
lieb  Hoose,  14.  Emperor  Wilhelm  of  Germany,  15.  Sir  John  A. 
Macdonald  and  16.  Bismarck,  and  I  received  them  all  alone. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


321 


Again  with  Human-Psychic-Telephone. 

From  this  trumpet  seance  I  went  direct  and  met  the  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone  in  private  sitting  at  10.30  a.  m.  August  3rd. 
Today  again  the  evidence  appears  to  corroborate,  for  some  who 
have  already  written,  talked  through  the  trumpet  with  me  today ; 
and  others  said  they  would  try  and  write,  when  opportunity 
presented.  Noi  sooner  were  we  seated  than  the  automatic  hand 
began  to  write,  and  messages  arrived  without  intermission. 

10.30  a.  m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  M.vy  :  “My  dear  husband, 
I  call  you  that  today.  Gray  Feather  helped  me  so  today,  that 
I  was  enabled  to  talk  to  you  through  trumpet ;  and  it  gives  joy 
to  me  to  have  you  here  and  to  me  near,  the  possibility  to  do. 
— May.” 

The  following  conversation  or  communication  viva  voce  by  me, 
and  in  writing  through  the  psychic  hand  of  the  instrument  by 
Stead,  is  really  personal  in  character,  and  still  will  prove  of 
interest  to  all  readers,  and  especially  such  as  knew  my  friend 
and  co-worker  Wm.  T.  Stead  in  life.  It  is  also  evidential  in 
character,  as  it  corroborates  or  endorses  his  conversation  through 
the  trumpet  this  very  morning  (August  3rd).  So  as  a  witness 
he  has  made  every  effort  to  prove  his  identity ;  and  certainly 
exhibited  his  personality  to  all,  by  his  various  demonstrations  to 
me;  and  in  his  several  efforts  has  successfully  accomplished  what 
he  sought  to  do.  He  wrote  me  several  messages,  at  the  beginning 
of  his  efforts,  the  first  one  through  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone, 
the  first  day  after  the  “Titanic”  "boat  went  down,  which  was 
dated  p.m.,  IBtfi  April  or  38  hours  and  25  minutes  after 
his  body  sank,  and  these  messages  were  forwarded  to  me  in 
Toledo.  But  the  seventh  one  was  dated  If-30  p.m.  of  18th  April, 
predicting  his  appearance  to  me,  and  zuas,  so  I  am  informed, 
mailed  on  the  train  at  6  p.m.  It  had  not  reached  me  in  Toledo 
till  the  morning  after  Stead  showed  himself  to  me  at  Jonson's  at 
10  p.  m.,  the  close  of  seance,  when  several  others  recognized  him. 
This  was  a  physical  proof  of  his  identity,  and  somewhat  of  his 


322 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


personality ;  while  on  the  27th  of  the  month,  he  met  me  at  Chicago, 
by  appointment,  at  the  psychic  sisters’ ,  while  I  sat  with  white 
canvas  or  portrait  board  before  me,  and  the  psychic  sisters  right 
and  left  of  it,  at  an  unshaded  window,  where  I  watched  some¬ 
what  skeptically  for  his  promised  appearance  to  me,  as  a  picture 

—  particulars  of  which  are  elsewhere  given  (Chapter  XXX)  , 

—  until  he  came  into  my  critical  view  in  a  trifle  less  than  fifteen 
minutes,  similarly  dressed  as  he  was  in  the  Jonson  seance,  thus 
offering  physical  and  permanent  proof  of  his  human  personality, 
and  personal  identity,  and  lastly  this  very  morning  conversed 
with  me  through  a  trumpet,  giving  his  name,  and  then  conversing 
upon  a  matter  regarding  which  he  had  written  before,  of  which, 
however,  the  trumpet  medium  could  not  have  had  any  knowledge. 

I  feel  like  saying  here  to  the  scientist,  the  psychical  researcher 
or  critic  great  or  small,  that  had  you  been  with  me,  and  seen 
and  heard,  and  experienced  what  I  have,  you  would  be  dumb¬ 
founded  to  produce  a  reason  or  an  hypothesis  that  would  or 
could  account  for  it  all,  in  its  variety,  other  than  the  one  I  have 
after  careful  investigation  and  ripe  thought  adopted. 

10.50  a.  m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  Wm.  T.  Stead  (No.  27) : 
“My  name  I  gave  to  you  through  the  trumpet  successfully.  Did 
I  not?” 

J.  S.  K. :  “That  is  correct,  you  did. 

Wm.  T.  Stead:  “I  am  an  investigator  still,  and  I  listened 
in  interest  to  what  you  said  regarding  the  moral  standing  of 
the  intrument  used.  I  am  grateful  to  you  for  affording  to  me 
this  opportunity,  for  I  will  so  be  enabled  to  decide  for  myself 
when  I  have  done  well,  and  not  depend  so  much  on  a  guardian’s 
judgment. 

“My  presence  here  is  with  my  son,  or  I  have  him  with  me, 
and  Julia  Ames  and  others  here  are  trying  to  appear  to  you,  or 
give  to  you  the  knowledge  true  that  we  are  able  to  convey  across 
the  sea,  the  truth  of  what  in  thought  you  said,  and  laid  out 
printed  (typewritten)  on  your  bed.  The  thing  I  as  a  man,  like 
you,  am  trying  earnestly  to  do  is  to  get  proof  exact,  that  I  am 
myself,  though  I  had  to  die. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


323 


“I  will  tell  it  to  someone,  so  it  will  come  and  you  will  know. 
— Wm.  T.  Stead,” 

11.20  a.  m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  Sir  John  A,  Mac¬ 
Donald:  “As  one  benighted  I  have  often  stood  and  wished  that 
I  might  be  in  touch  with  proper  instrument  so  I  could  talk  to 
thee.  It  is  a  pride  to  me,  this  work  you  have  in  view ;  and  I  am 
glad  that  England’s  Queen  believed  that  it  was  true.  I  wish  to 
give  my  signature  of  faith  and  hope,  to  be  an  aid  to  prove  the 
questions  that  you  have  marked  as  three.  Especially  the  third 
one,  that  is  the  joy  to  me,  or  is  the  final  giant  in  path  of  those 
who  try  to  combat  all  theories  and  reach  the  truth  most  high.” 

11.30  a. m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  Bismarck:  “Corre¬ 
spondence  of  you  is  to  lead  to  far  better  power  to  distribute, 
and  reach  humanity  as  a  whole,  than  would  have  been  result  to 
you  if  your  first  plan  had  worked  out  true.  Horatio  at  the  bridge 
you  stand;  and  we  as  soldiers  are  at  hand  in  armor  quite  com¬ 
plete  and  strong;  and  we  will  aid  you  before  long  to  touch  the 
proper  target,  so  of  this  great  truth  the  world  shall  know.  I, 
Bismarck,  was  a  fighter  too,  and  to  combat  was  to  me  joy,  if 
I  had  right  as  I  believed  leading  me  forward.  Let  all  of  us  be 
aiders,  and  follow  in  your  wake,  and  your  book  shall  accomplish 
all  that  you  undertake.  That  which  you  undertake  to  prove  is 
hard  indeed  to  do;  and  I  am  glad  your  standard  high  is  well 
upheld  all  through.” 

8.35  p. m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  Samuel  Hess:  “What 
you  have  said  regarding  me  I  hear,  and  that  I  was  successful  in 
even  small  degree  of  bringing  a  true  test  is  pride  to  me,  and  I 
your  ‘Daddy’  called  by  you,  and  still  respected  in  your  view  to  be. 
Or  I,  though  old,  am  now  in  spirit  free,  and  young  I  am  com¬ 
pared  to  thee.  (He  spoke  at  the  third  trumpet  seance.)  You 
will  be  old  yourself  before  you  knock  upon  our  heaven’s  door, 
and  I  am  told  that  though  I  lived  until  one  hundred  came  in 
view,  I  did  not  live  so  long  as  you  will  do.  You  will  retain 
vitality,  and  added  spirit  power  will  be  given  to  you  till  I  young 


324 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


man  in  your  view ;  or  I  as  young  compared  to  you,  I  cannot 
now  exactly  see  how  long  you  live  after,  to  me  my  dying  day, 
but  I  am  told  you  are  to  stay  a  little  longer  on  life’s  way,” 

The  foregoing  message  was  written  through  the  hand  of  “The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone”  by  my  mother’s  alleged  father, 
Samuel  Hess,  one  of  the  small  group  of  United-Empire-Loyalists, 
who  settled  in  the  section  now  known  as  the  city  of  Hamilton, 
and  the  township  of  Barton,  where  he  was  known  by  everybody 
for  many  long  years,  as  “Grand-Daddy  Hess,”  and  who  passed 
from  earth-life  at  the  age  of  97  years,  when  I  was  a  youth,  some 
sixty  years  ago.  In  July,  1912,  there  was  printed  in  The  Pro¬ 
gressive  Thinker  of  Chicago,  a  message  from  “Daddy  Hess,” 
which  came  through  the  well-known  medium  Maggie  Waite,  and 
addressed  to  me,  in  which  each  name,  relationship  or  other  state¬ 
ment  was  absolutely  correct,  (See  Chapter  XXIX,) 

5,45  p. m.,  3rd  August,  1912.  From  Emperor  Wilhelm:  “I, 
Emperor  Wilhelm,  father  of  the  present  ruler  there,  come  in  the 
seance  to  advise  with  you ;  and  I  with  Queen  of  England  quite 
agree  that  it  is  truth  as  shown  by  thee.  Some  of  my  people 
believe  it  is  true,  and  so  I  come  to  write  for  you,  to  confirm 
what  you  say  and  do.  I’ll  aid  in  this  the  wish  of  you.  To  have 
my  countrymen  peruse  the  book,  is  wish  of  me,  for  they  are  as 
advanced  in  thought,  as  now  the  English  be.  I  have  learned  that 
this  is  the  truth,  and  come  to  so  proclaim  to  men,  for  I  a  spirit 
am  of  those  who  truly  come  again.  I  spoke  today  through 
trumpet,  I  write  it  now.  The  trumpet  was  used  by  my  voice  to 
thee ;  and  now  I  write  to  make  it  plain  that  no  mistake  can  be. 
(He  spoke  through  trumpet,  as  one  of  the  sixteen  in  the  early 
morning  seance  of  today,) — Wilhelm,  Late  Emperor  of 
Germany.” 

Third  Day  of  the  August  Series  1912,  Third  Trumpet 

Seance,  Second  One  at  the  Same  Time  and  Place;  and 

Same  Control  and  Psychic  as  Yesterday. 

By  arrangement  with  the  trumpet  psychic  yesterday  it  was 
agreed  that  the  seance  would  be  held  at  the  same  time  and  place 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


325 


today,  and  so  I  was  on  hand  at  9  a.  m.,  the  time  specified.  The 
psychic’s  own  control  was  nowhere  in  evidence,  but  in  his  stead 
the  noble  Red  Man  Gray  Feather  again  held  command  with  his 
aiders,  and  brought  a  royal  lot  of  guests  for  my  benefit.  And 
first  of  all  to  come  was  the  Manager  Gray  Feather,  who  had 
yesterday  promised  me,  that  he  would  do  his  very  best  to  afford 
me  every  satisfaction,  with  the  promise  added,  that  I  would  get 
information  of  moment  and  would  be  very  pleased.  Another 
was  Egyptia,  my  guardian  spirit,  who  first  appeared  to  me  in 
MacRoberts’  home  in  London,  Canada,  some  18  years  ago,  and 
many  times  thereafter  in  her  transient  form,  and  always  spoke 
to  me,  so  her  voice  was  normal  and  familiar.  May  Donna  was 
next  to  use  the  trumpet,  with  which  she  was  familiar,  for  she 
learned  its  use  in  November  of  1911  in  an  Etta  Wriedt  seance. 
My  own  spirit  wife  May  followed  the  daughter,  and  her  conversa¬ 
tion  was  as  life-like  as  when  in  her  earthly  form,  and  she  was  as 
pleased,  as  she  could  be,  that  the  proofs  and  tests  she  had  given 
others  as  well  as  me,  were  entirely  satisfactory,  and  she  would 
yet  give  others.  May’s  sister  Gertie  gave  me  in  conversation 
the  best  of  evidence  of  her  personality.  After  that  Hypatia, 
my  spirit  guide,  spoke  with  me,  and  as  she  had  so  frequently 
proved  herself  in  great  variety  of  ways,  she  spent  her  time  in 
encouragement  of  me,  and  in  helping  my  loved  ones.  After  her 
there  were  others  who  alleged  themselves  to  be  Asia  the  Ancient, 
so  named  by  me;  I.  K.  Funk  of  Funk  &  Wagnall ;  our  beloved 
Queen  Victoria,  who  has  frequently  written  me ;  Wilhelm,  late 
Emperor  of  Germany ;  Swedenborg,  who  attained  to  fame ; 
Aristotle  and  others. 

The  trumpet  seance  concluded,  I  went  direct,  as  on  the  previous 
day,  to  the  writing  psychic,  and  my  first  greeting  came  from  May. 


10.40  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  May;  “I  am  reunited 
by  this  creed  that  was  so  long  a  woe  to  me.  I  feel  in  joy  of 
sympathy  in  this  the  added  power  that  he,  the  psychic’s  Eberling, 
and  guides  of  you,  have  promised  me  that  they  will  do.  The 
change  in  your  capacity  to  sense  so  you  will  hear  from  me,  in 


326 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


heaven  now  to  stay,  but  really  just  across  the  way.  I  am  to 
unite  with  you  in  all  this  thinking  strife,  and  what  soe’er  you  do 
or  say  I  am  with  you  as  here  today.  Your  talk  last  night  was 
heard  by  me,  and  I  was  glad  that  you  could  know  that  it  was 
true,  I  come  into  the  atmosphere  of  you,  and  feel  at  home;  and 
so  I  am  delighted  when  I  can  make  you  know,  that  with  my 
child  and  others,  I  am  so  I  may  hear  and  realize  with  you  the 
things  that  are  so  true.  As  a  test  I  say,  Maud  Gates  you  are  the 
one  with  us  where  we  sat  on  piazza  there,  two  years  ago.  I  am 
myself  here,  Mrs.  King,  and  John  is  sitting  here.  (One  of  scores 
of  little  tests  given  me  from  time  to  time  by  May  and  correct.) 
I  will  not  go,  but  I  will  stay  by  you  here,  and  listen  and  give 
sympathy  of  thought  in  every  way  to  what  the  other  writers  say, 
through  this  her  writing  and  today.  Your  spirit  wife  now  living 
in  the  other  life,  May  King.” 

10.50  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Mother:  “Mother  of 
you  I  am,  and  I  want  you  to  know  that  I  was  there  at  trumpet 
seance,  though  I  did  not  speak.  May  and  May  Donna,  and 
Gertie  were  three  of  the  loved  ones;  and  then  the  exalted  ones 
advised  that  information  be  given  to  you  on  subjects  to  you 
new. — Margaret  P.  King.” 


10.55  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Daughter,  May  Donna: 
“Papa,  don’t  think  that  I’ll  ever  neglect  you,  or  leave  you  alone. 
We  are  trying  to  help  you  when  you  are  at  home,  and  when  you 
can  listen  and  know  we  are  near,  ’twill  be  a  great  blessing ;  but 
later  you’ll  hear,  and  then  I  will  sing  in  songs  that  are  sweet, 
and  those  you  admire,  Fll  after  repeat,  so  Fll  be  a  real  little 
daughter  at  home,  though  the  angels  soon  took  me,  and  carried 
me  home.”  (She  died  in  birth  over  twenty  years  ago.  J.  S.  K.) 

11.10  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Yama:  “Destiny  points 
to  you,  as  one  who  going  forward  in  his  latest  span  may  be  used 
by  the  spirit  forces  near,  to  bring  this  blessing  to  each  living 
man.  Be  thou  a  standard-bearer  high,  and  what  you  try  to  do. 


.  DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


327 


we  will  assist  in  every  way,  and  bring  success  to  you.  As  one 
who  digs  a  little  trench  upon  a  mountain  side  to  teach  a  sweet 
spring  where  to  go,  the  added  drop  beside,  added  to  what  you 
yourself  know,  will  form  a  river  in  its  flood,  to  that  great  ocean 
of  the  power  to  do,  that  is  sword  sensed  by  you.  And  God  in 
matter  is  to  be  made  nearer  to  humanity ;  and  that  which  some 
would  dread  or  fear,  will  be  made  glorified  by  thee,  and  will 
bless  all  humanity.  The  psychic  sense,  the  psychic  power  that 
touches  mortal  man  each  hour,  will  be  as  friend  to  many  men; 
and  proof  that  spirits  come  again  will  by  this  treatise  be  made 
plain,  but  yoil  will  write  a  book  again,  and  in  it  make  some  matters 
clear  that  in  this  one  do  not  appear.  I  am  also  an  Atlantis  seer, 
Yama  by  name,  I  come  to  you  to  make  your  wife’s  prayer  to 
come  true  and  I  am  like  to  him  the  one  who  ^ave  his  name 
(Yerma)  to  thee.  (At  the  trumpet  seance.)  The  power  to  come 
to  men  is  to  me  possible;  but  if  no  one  of  them  appeals  to  me, 
I  stay  in  what  is  home  of  me.  But  what  you  have  done,  and 
now  do,  attracted  me  to  aid  you.” 

11.20  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Yerma  (of  Atlantis  16,000 
years  ago)  :  “What  are  the  ages  that  are  past  to  one  who  through 
the  epochs  walk  with  ease !  (  Here  follows  a  long  communication 
personal  and  of  much  interest  to  me.)  Remember  I  usurp  no 
way,  I  simply  aid,  and  always  stay. — Yerma.”  (He  previously 
conversed  with  me  through  the  trumpet.  J.  S.  K.) 

11.30  a.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Hypatia:  “I  too  rejoice 
that  the  great  teacher  found  a  voice,  and  adds  his  interest  to  me, 
in  glorified  fraternity. — Hypatia.” 

12  noon,  4th  August,  1912.  From  des  Asia:  “Hypatia  is  held 
by  me  as  flower  in  vase ;  and  I  a  powerful  Ancient  Master  will 
aid  you  as  you  try  to  fulfill  your  own  destiny.  I,  Asia,  will 
remain  with  you.  This  afternoon  I  will  bring  the  others  who 
will  be  prepared  to  write  for  you.  I  also  aid  Egyptia,  Electra, 
Cleopatra,  Omar  and  Otelleo ;  or  we,  Hypatia,  myself  and  these 


328 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


five,  your  band  of  seven,  are  as  one  completed  strand,  of  what 
is  to  be  made  completed  by  added  forces  new,  attracted  by  the 
life  and  work  of  you. 

After  a  Recess  of  Two  and  a  Half  Hours. 

2.35  p.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Judge  Rose  of  Toronto: 
“I,  Judge  Rose,  won  out  in  the  desire  of  my  heart  to  talk  to 
you  that  first  night.  (Thursday  night,  1st  August.)  I  kept 
saying  ‘Rose,’  and  after  you  spoke  I  gained  power,  so  I  too  could 
talk.  I  would  have  spoken  since,  but  others  had  so  much  to 
do,  I  did  not  interfere.  I  saw  the  exalted  masters  gathered  near, 
that  first  night,  and  I  said,  exalted  spirits  will  assist  you  in  the 
second  great  book  that  you  are  to  write.  I,  Judge  Rose  of 
Toronto,  not  known  to  the  writer  or  the  trumpet  medium,  assisted 
by  Gray  Feather,  demonstrated.  Did  I  not?” 

J.  S.  K. :  “You  certainly  did,  and  I  heard  you  distinctly,  every 
word  you  spoke.” 

Judge  Rose:  “Was  not  that  of  itself  a  test?” 

J.  S.  K. :  “Your  name  and  occupation,  and  your  conversation, 
as  given  through  a  trumpet  of  a  medium  I  had  never  met, 
together  with  your  present  writing  through  this  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone,  all  combined,  does  satisfy  me  as  to  your  identity.” 

Judge  Rose:  “My  name  indicated  a  flower  only  to  the  others, 
and  li  was  not  in  your  thoughts  till  I  mentioned  my  name.  Fll 
demonstrate  to  you  again,  at  some  future  seance  near  at  hand. 
Something  you  do  not  understand  is  shaping  itself  into  a  reality, 
and  it  will  prove  of  use  to  you,  and  to  us  in  our  power  to  do 
so  I  am  told,  and  tell  to  you.  Judge  Rose  of  Toronto  I  am. 
I  want  you  to  do  it.  I  had  fear  lest  youi  should  consider  it  too 
trivial  for  comment.  I  wanted  to  call  your  attention  to  the  fact, 
that  I  had  really  added  my  one  demonstration,  in  proof  of  spirit 
return.  I  was  a  respected  person,  my  judgments  were  looked 
up  to;  and  I  believe  and  know,  that  what  you  say  is  true  of  me 
in  every  way.  I  continue  as  myself,  I  return  as  myself  among 
strangers  to  me,  I  communicate  and  prove  my  identity,  as  far 
as  possible,  in  my  limited  opportunity, — ^Judge  Rose.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


329 


J.  S.  K. :  “I  had  a  conversation  with  the  normal  self  of  this 
Human-Psychic-Telephone  regarding  the  many  difficulties  of  a 
psychical  researcher,  in  obtaining  true  tests,  or  proofs  of  human 
personality  or  personal  identity;  and  the  great  expenses  of  time 
and  money  for  the  little  proof.  I  had  fared  better  than  many 
men,  for  I  was  absolutely  satisfied  that  my  wife  had  kept  her 
promise,  and  in  many  ways  had  proven  her  ability  to  return  to, 
and  communicate  with  me ;  and  identify  herself  beyond  all  cavil, 
and  prove  her  human  personality,  by  speaking  and  conversing 
through  the  trumpet;  using  her  vocal  organs,  while  present  in 
her  transient  body,  and  writing  through  the  automatic  hand  of 
you,  as  psychic. 

On  this  very  point  I  should  like  to  get  some  evidence  from  the 
psychical  researchers  and  psychologists  in  spirit  sphere,  especially 
the  four  which  I  named  the  other  day.  Even  though  it  might 
not  prove  conclusive  to  me,  it  might  be  accepted  as  such  by  the 
close  associates  of  each  of  them,  in  earth  life;  and  yet  I  hope 
to  receive  it,  in  time  to  be  presented  in  my  book  as  evidential 
in  character.” 


3.20  p.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Professor  James  of 
Harvard:  “I,  William  James,  am  near  and  hear,  but  I  had  a 
‘doubting  Thomas’  ear,  and  through  life,  even  my  wife,  or  any¬ 
one  departed,  could  not  do  the  very  thing  to  prove  to  me  life’s 
truth  of  continuity.  I  had  a  wife  in  heaven,  so  this  is  a  thing 
you  do  not  know.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “My  wife  was  a  member  of  our  Psychical  Research 
Society,  and  I  arranged  with  her  in  life  to  come  back  as  spirit 
if  she  could,  and  how  to  prove  to  me  her  human  personality, 
and  this  she  did,  as  is  recorded  in  my  book.”  (Chapter  XH.) 

Professor  James  of  Harvard:  “Yes,  I  heard  what  you  said, 
and  as  you  say  I  could  but  prove  it  by  mind-reading.  But  that 
would  not  clear  the  personality,  or  careful  interest  in  the  details 
of  care  given  by  her  in  talk.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “Do  you  not  think.  Professor  James,  that  my  wife 
has  given  to  me  good  proof  of  her  human  personality?” 


330 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Professor  James:  “I  think  she,  your  wife,  has  given  to  you 
good  and  sufficient  proof,  in  every  detail.  The  earnestness  and 
candor  of  your  speech,  the  education  of  experience,  and  observa¬ 
tion,  added  to  your  education  as  a  medical  man,  give  you  great 
strength  of  power  to  do,  and  so  I  as  a  living  brother  near,  am 
very  proud  of  it,  this  work  of  you.  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind’  is  a  good  title,  and  the  way  that  you  treat  every  part  is 
strong  and  true.  I  as  one  who  knows,  stand  strong  for  the 
way  that  you  lead  up  clear  and  slow,  from  one  thought  to 
another;  and  I  as  earnest  thinking  brother,  uphold  you  in  your 
effort  to  prove  this  truth  to  men.  It  was  tO'  me  beyond  my  own 
capacity,  and  so  I  would  not  say  I  do  believe,  though  I  was 
open  to  receive.  I  believed  much  that  I  could  not  prove,  and 
when  I  was  in  life,  I  received  much  information  which  I  classed 
as  problematical,  because  it  had  no  foundation  beyond  my  own 
sensation  and  beliefs.  This  is  the  fountain  pen  I’m  told?”  (My 
own  pen,  now.  used  by  the  psychic.) 

J.  S.  K. :  “Yes,  I  had  it  and  office  pad  with  me  at  Jonson’s, 
for  you  to  try  and  write  your  signature,  when  I  was  there  in 
April  last.” 

Professor  James:  “I  could  not  do  it.  I  will  yet  do  it.” 

4.05  p.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  William  Stead  (No.  28)  : 
“Yes,  brother,  I,  William  Stead,  will  also  do  it  if  I  have  power, 
this  act  for  you.  I  think  the  things  we  cannot  do  often  prove 
more  beneficial  in  the  end.  The  sums  you  could  not  do  remain 
in  memory  of  you,  while  others  soon  forgotten  be,  and  thus  it 
is  with  James  and  with  me,  who  am  writing  now.  I  feel  it  like 
a  solemn  vow,  and  I  will  it  fulfill  if  possible.  Be  sure  to  take 
this  pen,  and  a  pad  too,  and  I  will  try  my  best  to  do.” 

4.10  p.  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Hypatia  :  “I,  Hypatia, 
think  I  used  this  instrument  (the  Human-Psychic-Telephone)  and 
gave  an  aiding  test  to  you,  when  I  caused  her,  the  instrument, 
to  speak  to  you  in  public  view  before  the  other  members  of  a 
circle,  before  that  trumpet  seance,  when  Mrs.  King  was  with 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


331 


you  here.  I  spoke  through  her  vocal  powers  and  said  as  you 
and  she  now  remember,  ‘I  will  come  back  again  to  you,  and  bring 
the  rose  and  ribbon  too.’  Later  (in  the  second  year  thereafter) 
at  Jonson’s  I  came  and  fulfilled  what  I  had  promised,  through 
a  stranger  then  to  me,  and  you,  that  I  would  in  the  future  do.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “What  you  have  said  I  now  confirm  as  true,  and 
record  make  of  it,  as  one  of  very  many  proofs,  of  your  spirit 
identity.” 


4.15  p  m.,  4th  August,  1912.  From  Aristotle:  “I  a  philosopher 
of  long  ago,  worked  on  the  problem  of  the  power  of  thought, 
and  how  the  mind  Divine  and  mind  of  man,  could  be  so  placed 
in  unison  by  certain  laws  of  behavior  and  speech,  and  so  your 
‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  appeals  to  me.  I  had  to  shape 
each  dart  of  thought  as  from  my  heart  it  flew,  and  I  am  interested 
in  this  careful  work  you  do.  This  carving  out  of  stepping- 
stones  up  cliffs  of  known  degree,  that  lead  to  flights  above  the 
stars,  it  much  appeals  to  me,  and  so  as  a  philosopher  I  came  and 
spoke  to  you  (in  trumpet  seance) ;  and  I  will  aid  you  all  I  can 
in  this  work  that  you  do.” 


8.20  a.  m.,  5th  August,  1912.  From  Emanuel  Swedenborg  ; 
“As  an  expounder  of  philosophy  I  was  a  noted  man.  I  was 
looked  up  to  in  my  day,  and  I  was  aided  too  by  intuition,  and 
in  large  degree  this  intuition  guided  me  in  all  I  said.  My  earnest¬ 
ness  of  purpose,  was  the  thing  that  caused  my  brothers,  living 
men  about  me  everywhere,  to  say:  ‘If  he  says  so  ’tis  true!  and 
this  will  be  the  way  with  you.  So  many  minds  are  as  a  clock 
not  set  in  any  way,  and  need  a  leader  always  to  point  the  time 
of  day ;  and  after  they  are  started  they  go  in  that  one  way. 
Your  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  does  much  appeal  to  me, 
and  I  will  stay  and  write  for  you  whenever  well  I  may,  and 
when  I  cannot  aid  or  write.  I’ll  stand  at  ease  at  hand,  ready  to 
learn  and  listen  and  better  understand  the  wonders  of  the  teaching 
of  these  masters  who  are  new,  and  tell  me  they  are  shaping  your 
path  ahead  of  you.” 


332 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


8.30  a.  m.,  5th  August,  1912.  From  Hypatia:  The  one  you 
called  for  as  above  came,  and  I  let  him  write  lest  his  attention 
might  be  digressed,  and  leave  you  disappointed.  (He  had  talked 
with  me  through  the  trumpet  on  Sunday  morn.  J.  S.  K.)  His 
interest  in  living  men  is  not  attuned  to  all  of  them,  and  so  he 
goes  with  purpose  high  to  follow  masters  of  the  sky,  or  rather 
of  the  unknown  sphere,  for  up  and  down  are  equal  here.  We 
have  not  bodies  that  to  men  are  as  real  necessity,  that  is  we  are 
not  ruled  at  all  by  laws  of  gravity.  I  may  go  up,  I  may  go  down, 
and  I  may  go  here  or  there,  and  of  the  law  of  gravity  I  need 
not  be  aware.  A  ponderable  body  from  that  view  the  mind  is 
not,  but  what  to  you  are  senses  five  oft  added  to  in  man  alive, 
are  added  to  in  large  degree  after  man  enters  spirit  key.  What 
I  would  now  explain  as  our  necessities  are  not  the  same,  and 
when  I  try  to  teach  I  must  use  thoughts  within  your  reach.  To 
give  a  slight  impression  clear,  how  would  you  tell  to  blind  man 
near,  the  wonders  that  your  sight  to  you  gives  you  ability  to  do? 
With  fingers  crude  he’d  touch  each  flower  and  nothing  in  them 
know,  but  just  the  wonders  of  their  shape,  and  coloring  would 
be  beyond  his  comprehension  in  every  degree,  and  yet  its  added 
radiance  is  everything  to  thee.  So  with  the  spirit  senses  they 
are  to  us  so  new,  so  much  beyond  the  others  that  God  has  given 
you,  that  when  I  try  to  tell  you,  I  am  at  a  loss  you  see  to  find 
in  your  mind,  power  to  grasp  a  means  of  teaching  thee.” 

J.  S.  K. :  “I  wish  to  ask  May  another  question  before  I  go: 
Shall  I  place  your  picture  at  head  of  Chapter  XII,  where  I 
describe  the  key  that  unlocked  the  mystery  ?  Or  shall  it  be  before 
Chapter  XXIX,  the  one  you  as  a  spirit  wrote  for  my  book, 
for  me?” 

8.40  a.  m.,  5th  August,  1912.  From  May  :  ‘T  believe  it  is 
best  to  place  it  before  the  first  one  for  the  reason  that  it  then 
introduces  my  features  to  the  mind  of  the  reader;  and  from 
that  time  on  they  are  able  to  picture  me  when  I  am  spoken  of 
by  you.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


333 


Interesting  Voluntary  Messages. 

I  left  the  psychic’s  home  on  the  morning  of  the  fifth  of  August, 
and  hence  the  messages  of  later  date  which  came  through  the 
psychic’s  hand  came  on  then  by  mail  to  me,  and  in  proper  order, 
and  are  made  part  of  the  record. 

3.15  p.  m.,  23rd  August,  1912.  From  Queen  Victoria: 
“Beneath  the  flag  of  England’s  King  you  were  born  subject  true, 
and  so  the  former  rulers  are  now  drawn  near  to  you,  and  this 
is  why  they  gather,  they  are  told  you  are  to  be  the  teacher  of 
this  thought  to  men,  and  it  was  wish  of  me,  when  I  was  Queen 
Victoria,  to  aid  some  one  to  teach,  and  bring  this  truth  so  blessed 
within  the  public  reach.  The  continuity  of  life  applies  to  every 
one,  and  it  is  to  be  aid  I’m  told  to  many  a  living  man.  The  form 
of  arguments  you  use  appeal  to  everyone,  and  you  will  be  a 
pride  to  me,  as  worthy  England’s  son.  Eor  though  you’re  of  a 
colony,  your  interests  in  heart  of  me,  are  very  near  indeed,  and 
you  are  right  in  what  you  do,  to  leave  alone  each  creed.  The 
continuity  of  life  applies  to  every  man,  and  we  all  may  do  our 
part  in  God’s  perfected  plan ;  and  if  we  may  continue,  and  live 
beyond  the  grave,  and  even  come  again  to  men,  ’tis  knowledge 
we  all  crave.  If  life  keeps  on  its  rolling  to  a  more  completed 
ball ;  and  if  it  is  continuous  ’tis  glory  to  us  all.  I  loved  it  when 
my  Alice,  and  my  consort  Albert  too,  were  taken  by  the  dreaded 
fate,  that  took  your  wife  from  you.  I  suffered  and  I  hungered, 
to  reach  their  spirit  key,  and  I  found  rest,  and  some  content, 
when  they  came  back  to  me,  through  instruments  imperfect,  and 
yet  with  proof  most  strong.  You’ll  set  a  ball  to  rolling  that  will 
push  this  truth  along.  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  is  what  is 
needed  sore,  by  many  types  of  thinking  men,  on  this  and  Eng¬ 
land’s  shore.  Your  years  of  education,  and  observation,  will  bring 
about  conditions,  that  will  aid  to  prove  this  true.  I  watch  you 
at  your  labor,  and  I  feel  this  added  hope,  that  the  exalted  spirits, 
will  aid  you  so  to  cope  with  every  type  of  hardship  and  every 
form  of  woe,  so  that  you  will  prune  it  properly,  e’er  it  to  public 


334 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


go.  The  readers  are  so  careless,  and  few  will  think  as  you,  and 
so  with  heart  approval,  we  watch  the  things  you  do.  Albert  and 
Victoria,  for  I  have  him  here  with  me,  though  I  alone  dictate 
the  words,  that  she  now  writes  to  thee.” 


1.10  p.  m.,  26th  August,  1912.  From  Dr.  I.  K.  Funk:  “I  was 
of  those  who  listened  to  the  reading  of  your  Analysis  of  Mind 
Hypotheses,  and  I  appreciated  it  greatly.  It  was  to  me  a  thing 
incomprehensible  of  analysis,  like  to  the  universe.  I  was  but  able 
of  this  truth  to  say  to  myself  or  another,  this  is,  or  this  seems 
to  me  to  be.  But  I  could  not  its  substance  show,  or  give  the 
proofs,  that  made  me  know.  I  was  as  the  one  who  could  see, 
after  his  blindness  was  removed  by  miracle.  I  could  not  tell 
the  processes  by  which  I  reached  the  change  of  view,  and  so  I 
followed  what  was  said  by  you,  with  view  to  see  how  in  my  life 
it  had  appeared  to  me,  and  I  believe  you  make  it  plain,  as  far 
as  possible  for  men  to  know.  You  are  not  satisfied  to  say  simply 
this  thing  is  true,  or  that  it  thus  appears  to  you,  but  you  go 
forward  by  a  process  slow,  and  tell  the  how  you  gained  each 
point  of  view,  and  so  you  aid  each  candid  follower  to  come  to 
a  conclusion  like  to  you.  Telepathy  does  not  explain  it  quite,  nor 
does  the  power  of  second  sight,  or  mind-reading,  or  anyway ; 
but  that  the  spirit  passed  away  may  come  to  those  who  certain 
laws  obey,  and  by  attunement  of  some  kind  or  tone  learn  to 
become  able  to  do  as  have  the  ones  described  by  you.  I  wrote 
the  ‘Widow’s  Mite’  as  all  that  I  could  give  and  so  I  hoped  that 
some  one  would  later  be  able  to  do  as  you  now  do,  explain  in 
a  minute  detail,  the  how  you  did,  the  why  you  know,  for  it  is 
more  convincing  so.  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  is  most 
conclusive  of  its  kind,  and  we  are  proud  of  you,  and  of  the  work 
you  are  to  do,  to  better  all  your  fellow-men,  and  I  will  aid  you 
in  this  plan,  and  stand  with  others  who  have  gone  before,  trying 
to  help  you  from  this  farther  shore.  I  was  a  well-known  worker 
for  the  Cause  of  Truth,  and  hope  to  be  restored  to  power  to  do 
through  you,  assisted  by  exalted  guides.  I  stand  near  guides  of 
you,  and  profit  by  the  words  you  read,  and  by  the  teachers  too.” 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


*  335 


9  p. m.,  26th  August,  1912.  From  Prof.  James  of  Harvard: 
“I  am  William  James  of  Harvard,  and  heard  what  was  read. 
I  cannot  think  how  you  could  better  do  than  you  have  done, 
explain  the  two,  and  then  go  forward  one  step  farther,  so  to 
prove  that  spirits  come  and  go.  The  wonders  of  the  mind  com¬ 
plete,  are  studied  but  by  few,  and  to  have  this  great  privilege 
the  fates  have  granted  you ;  and  after  normal  men  are  shown 
to  have  such  functions,  we  are  proved  to  be  alive  by  you  through 
added  functions  we  add  to  the  living  psychics,  and  demonstrate 
to  thee.  I,  William  James,  intend  to  do  as  yon  request,  write  on 
the  printed  pad  of  you,  while  I  stand  there  completed  so  at 
Jonson’s  seance  (Prediction).  Then  it  will  be  printed  I  see. 
'Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  is  wonderfid  indeed,  and  we 
are  glad  you  go  with  care  over  each  act  and  deed;  and  it  will 
be  a  jewel  rare,  that  all  men  are  to  be  informed  about.  Future 
work  you  are  to  do  for  I  am  told  a  man  is  old,  only  as  he  is  frail 
and  weak  and  you  are  strong.  We  all  are  here  to  help  you 
every  way  we  can,  and  my  now  present  chief  regret  is,  that  you’re 
not  ‘a  Harvard  man,’  the  college  long  agO'  so  dear  to  me,  but 
I  have  hope  to  come  to  you  in  Jonson’s  seance  anyway,  as  I  said 
I  would  before,  but  could  not  do.  At  present  I  am  ‘after  you,’ 
as  toasters  say,  but  I  am  not  so  long  away  from  the  now  mortal 
plane,  and  I  would  like  to  see  it  proved  that  spirits  come  again.” 


How  often  we  hear  the  uninformed  say,  why  do  the  spirits 
require  a  medium?  Why  cannot  spirits  come  to  us  here  and 
now,  if  they  can  really  come  at  all  ?  Why  do  they  need  condi¬ 
tions  if  there  is  no  fraud?  I  have  anticipated  these  questions,  and 
dealt  with  them  in  my  chapter  on  ‘Relationship  Between  Con¬ 
ditions  and  Results’ ;  but  the  reader  should  fully  realize  that  it 
were  folly  to  assume  that  human-made  conditions  will  adapt 
themselves  to  spirit  requirements.  The  reason  simply  is,  that 
absence  of  what  is  requisite  for  spirit  purpose  of  demonstration, 
is  beyond  the  knowledge  of  the  mortal.  A  better  evidence  of 
this  cannot  be  had  than  what  will  be  found  in  the  following 
message  or  communication,  as  the  experience  of  an  incarnate 


336 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


spirit  once  a  noted  investigator  along  the  lines  of  psychical 
research,  and  thus  has  a  knowledge  gained  by  the  double 
experience  terrestrial  and  celestial,  in  practical  psychology,  the 
well  and  widely  known  Dr.  Richard  Hodgson,  who  deals  with 
the  difficulty,  of  communicating  through  another  party  with  me, 
and  shows  that  the  difficulty  increased  when  I  am  absent  alto¬ 
gether,  and  thus  makes  plain  certain  truths,  one  that  suitable 
conditions  are  necessary  to  the  production  of  psychical  demonstra¬ 
tion  ;  another  that  conditions  vary  according  to  results  required ; 
and  still  a  third  that  even  advanced  spirits  cannot  of  themselves 
command  or  produce  the  requisite  conditions,  in  all,  if  in  any 
single  case. 

5.30  p.  m.,  2nd  September,  1912.  From  Dr.  Richard  Hodgson  : 
“I  wish  to  write  that  spirits  when  discarnate  be  in  a  disturbed 
mentality,  was  what  I  thought  would  best  explain  the  fact,  that 
they  at  times  remain  and  say  they  are  the  ones  called  dead,  and 
yet  the  words  that  they  have  said  are  not  distinct  or  even  true. 
This  is  observed  dear  friend  by  you.  If  I  am  here  why  cannot 
I  do  as  I  try  to  do,  would  be  asked  by  the  mind  of  you  —  because 
I  am  assisted  by  the  spirit  guides  of  you,  and  what  I  sometimes 
fail  to  make  you  know,  I  let  her  (Hypatia)  aid  to  do  it  so  that 
what  is  done  when  quite  complete,  is  like  a  medley  more,  than 
work  of  me,  or  like  to  talking  in  a  dreaming  state ;  some  things 
are  clear,  and  some  must  be  repeated  in  a  thought  degree  till 
often  it  would  cease  to  be  in  my  own  personality ;  but  what  I 
think,  and  what  I  do,  is  carried  in  the  thought  to  you,  through 
other  thinkers’  aid,  until  it  strike  the  mortal  hand,  and  there  is 
written  as  my  wish  command,  though  in  the  process  it  might  be 
distorted  or  changed  entirely.  I  know  your  thought  transference 
argument.  It  is  good,  the  message  in  this  case  is  not  changed 
materially.  For  us  to  communicate,  it  is  more  like  telepathy 
from  living  minds  might  prove  to  be ;  what  I  say  is  repeated,  so 
that  into  pictures  it  must  go,  and  from  these  pictures  back  to  the 
power  of  the  mortal  language  key.  So  if  it  come  without  a 
break,  I  conquer  what  I  undertake,  but  if  like  notes,  some  notes 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


337 


have  silent  key,  I  fail  in  what  I  wish  to  do,  express  my  thought 
to  you.  You  might  ask  here  why  must  it  first  into  the  pictures 
go?  I  answer  ’tis  recorded  so,  and  must  pass  through  that 
censor’s  fate,  and  for  this  change  I  stand  and  wait.  I  wish  I 
could  come  near  to  you,  and  talk  without  this  rhyme ;  but  we 
must  wait  in  proper  state,  so  to  abide  our  time.  I  could  not  when 
in  life  believe  that  if  a  friend  was  near,  he  could  not  talk  direct 
to  me,  but  now  I  see  more  clear.  I  write  this  message  as  I  say, 
but  I  am  helped  in  every  way,  and  so  it  may  not  sound  like  me 
according  to  the  wish  of  you ;  but  I  am  hoping  it  will  be  a  means 
of  helping  you  to  know  the  how  and  why  of  what  is  so.  My 
mind  is  clear,  and  I  stand  near,  and  yet  I  cannot  do ;  and  what 
I  write  is  my  thought  bright,  repeated  here  for  you.  One  is  the 
guardian  of  me,  the  other  is  the  one  by  her  who  writes  for  thee. 
They  give  with  changes  seeming  slight,  but  so  it  does  not  sound 
as  if  I  do  it,  though  I  do  the  best  I  can  for  you.  Myers  and 
Hudson  and  I  heard  the  paper  read.  I  think  you  are  an  accurate 
thinker,  and  have  done  well  indeed,  in  your  analysis  of  each  of 
the  different  theories.  You  make  the  mind  a  more  tangible 
thing  than  the  others  who  have  done  in  past  a  work  like  you. 

“We  with  your  explanations  agree,  although  we  do  not  agree 
with  each  other  even  here.  I  think  one  thing,  and  keep  thinking 
it  till  I  am  convinced  of  my  error  by  proof,  not  argument.  I 
believe  every  human  soul  either  carnate  or  discarnate  must  work 
out  his  own  best  enlightenment.  I  solved  the  problem  of  mis¬ 
information,  from  the  spirit  side.  I  said  the  spirit  mentality  is 
disturbed  or  unsettled.  I  was  right  in  the  effect  but  not  as  to 
the  cause.  A  discarnate  spirit  is  as  powerless  to  communicate 
as  is  a  living  human  with  a  blow  on  the  head.  If  he  cannot  use 
his  brain  he  cannot  let  his  loving  family  and  attendants  know 
his  thoughts.  The  body  is  to  the  mentality  as  is  a  pen  to  the 
hand  of  a  writer.  Except  we  have  some  instrument  attuned  to 
our  use,  we  cannot  communicate  no  matter  how  brilliant  our 
thoughts.  Though  all  the  keys  of  a  piano  are  in  tune,  if  other 
mechanism  of  the  instrument  is  at  fault  it  will  not  play,  so  with 
the  human  instruments  called  mediums,  our  minds  may  play 


338 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


upon  their  mental  strings,  though  they  are  merely  human  things. 
Faults  of  complete  control  give  us  silence  here  and  there,  so  our 
best  efforts  are  but  fair,  and  not  to  be  compared  to  the  efforts 
we  made  when  here  in  life.  I  have  been  here  some  time  you 
know,  and  now  I  cease  to  write  and  go.  I’ll  live  with  you  and 
try  to  be  of  future  use  somehow  to  thee.  Your  book  is  to  be 
something  new,  and  will  lead  men  to  broader  view.  ’Twill  be 
indeed  a  ‘mental  dawn’  for  those  who  read  it  through.  For 
present  now,  adieu  to  you. — Richard  Hodgson.” 

An  Invocation  and  Address  by  the  Exalted  Spirit  Yerma. 

In  the  record  of  the  fourth  of  August,  1912,  which  includes 
the  trumpet  seance  of  the  morning,  there  will  be  found  a  brief 
reference  to  two  spirits  of  the  long  ago  as  human,  whO'  claimed 
that  their  terrestrial  home  was  on  the  lost  continent  Atlantis. 
One  of  these  wise  seers  of  time  remote,  gave  his  name  as  Yerma, 
and  as  one,  if  not  the  most  exalted  one  at  that  seance,  offered 
up  an  Invocation  to  Deity,  and  spoke  on  behalf  of  an  angel  host, 
as  if  by  authority  to  me,  in  a  voice  that  was  loud,  deep  and  strong 
and  afterward  did  both  speak  and  write  much  that  was  personal 
to  me,  and  unavailable  for  publication.  My  interest  was  keen 
for  further  knowledge  from  the  spirit  sphere,  and  I  felt  a  growing 
inspiration ;  but  I  subsequently  craved  that  I  might  have  repeated 
through  the  psychic,  the  Invocation  to  the  Deity;  and  so  much 
of  the  address  as  might  be  given  publicity,  in  the  pages  of  this 
book.  I  awaited  in  silence,  after  my  return  home,  the  consumma¬ 
tion  of  the  answer  to  my  prayer,  and  it  finally  came  to  me  through 
the  psychic’s  automatic  hand,  and  through  the  mail,  and  .bore 
date  of 

9.30  p.m.,  13th  September,  1912.  Yerma’s  Invocation:  “Oh 
Thou  Exalted  Ruler  of  all  Good,  called  by  the  name  of  God  by 
Christian  men,  allow  me  as  an  infant  yet,  in  power  to  understand 
compared  to  Thee,  to  reach  my  helpless  mental  arms,  toward 
Thy  protecting  hand.  Even  a  child  may  need,  may  reach  in  vain 
for  what  may  not  be  for  its  good,  and  I  so  reach  with  brain. 
Aid  me  to  reach  before  I  teach  that  power  Divine  to  me,  where 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


339 


I  may  sense  and  understand,  and  act  as  aid  tO'  Thee,  I  bless 
this  thinker  here  and  try  to  make  it  be  to  him,  as  possible  to  do, 
what  is  the  wish  of  me.  Give  me,  I  pray,  the  right  to  be  in  touch 
with  him  eternally,  to  aid  his  present  human  work,  on  to  com¬ 
pleted  plan.  Bless  him  I  pray  upon  his  way,  till  he  is  lifted  into 
power  to  do,  by  myself,  aided  by  you.  Eternal  Good,  shine  on 
my  way,  and  light  my  wish  to  be,  till  I  gain  broader  knowledge, 
of  how  to  help  and  be  of  use  in  this  great  work,  that  he,  the 
mortal,  tries  to  do  for  men.  Aid  me  to  aid,  to  prove  this  truth 
that  spirits  may  return  again.  Awake  great  dawn  of  brighter 
thought,  and  aid  us  till  this  thing  is  wrought. — Yerma."' 


8.30  p.  m.,  17th  September,  1912,  From  Yerma:  “I  with  the 
exalted  rulers  near,  oft  try  to  whisper  in  the  ear  of  John  S.  King. 
I  breathed  the  invocation  from  my  heart,  and  may  but  give  to 
you  in  part  the  things  I  said ;  but  now  I  say  may  angels  roll  the 
stones  away  between  you  and  the  dome  of  fame.  May  you  receive 
from  living  men  a  most,  exalted  name.  May  I  be  of  those  gone 
before,  who  help  you  everywhere,  and  guide  you  even  unaware 
into  the  great  and  perfect  power,  to  give  expression  to  the 
thoughts  that  you  now  feel,  and  know  are  really  true.  I  pray 
the  father  part  of  me  to  help  me  in  my  power,  on  earth  to  do 
the  very  thing  required  of  you.  Oh,  Most  Exalted  Unknown 
Power,  whom  men  call  Deity,  aid  me,  I  pray,  to  roll  away  the 
stones  and  make  the  blind  to  see  all  that  is  true  regarding  the  — 
to  most  men  —  unknown  quantity.  Leave  us  not,  whatever  is 
our  fate,  but  help  us  here,  and  help  them  there,  until  the  mind 
of  man  enlightened,  like  a  lotus  bloom,  shall  ope  in  loving  thought, 
in  earnest  hope,  and  show  itself  as  capable  of  the  attainment 
of  this  new  capacity.  All  of  us  hold  this  work  as  flower,  and 
try  to  aid  it  every  hour  to  its  completed  state.  Let  all  things 
hasten  so  that  no  one  wait.  I  clasp  my  hands  in  constant  prayer, 
to  aid  the  living  over  there,  to  join  with  you  the  living  here, 
and  cause  your  doubts  to  disappear.  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind’  is  logical  and  clear,  and  it  will  cause  much  doubt  and  woe 
to  lift  as  cloud,  and  then  to  go.” 


340 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Again  with  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone. 

From  the  afternoon  of  the  21st  to  the  forenoon  of  the  24th  of 
September,  1912, 1  again  spent  the  time  in  the  home  of  the  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone,  where  I  continued  my  investigations  of  this 
exceptional  psychic,  and  pursued  the  profound  study  of  practical 
psychology,  and  secured  further  evidence,  in  support  of  what  I 
contend  for;  and  can  now  with  confidence  and  satisfaction  affirm 
that  I  know,  what  I  was  formerly  confidently  taught  by  the 
teachers,  was  unknowable  according  to  their  belief. 

These  records  are  chiefly  personal  and  instructive,  yet  otherwise 
varied;  but  the  major  part  thereof  will  not  be  included  in  the 
present  book. 

My  thought  wish,  on  September  23rd,  being,  to  have  the 
presence  of  Hypatia,  she  responded  by  writing  her  name  through 
the  hand  of  the  psychic  instrument.  I  had  noted  in  a  general 
way,  in  writing,  the  various  matters  for  a  conversation  with 
Hypatia,  my  loved  ones  and  others,  asking  information  or  advice, 
all  of  which  was  fully  dealt  with  in  a  regular  way ;  and  each 
request  or  wish  was  answered  according  to  its  necessity.  These 
had  to  do  with  the  evidence,  and  also  with  the  matter  of  publish¬ 
ing  the  book,  as  well  as  matters  personal  to  me,  and  not  suitable 
for  publication. 


1  p.  m.,  23rd  September,  1912.  From  Frederick  W.  H.  Myers: 
“Polite  refusal  is  better  than  an  unfulfilled  promise.  What  you  say 
in  your  book  in  regard  to  the  mind  hypotheses  interests  me  in 
two  ways,  first  as  a  thinker  or  philosopher  I  endeavored  to  solve 
the  question  put  by  skeptical  thinkers,  the  same  as  you  in  your 
book  do.  Imperator,  through  Mrs.  Piper,  the  entranced  psychic, 
gave  me  much  information  regarding  soul  life,  and  the  develop¬ 
ment  of  power  to  do.  I  am  now  a  spirit  free,  and  in  my  now 
return  to  thee,  I  find  out  where  I  failed  to  teach ;  or  what  the 
points  I  failed  to  reach ;  or  how  the  truths  expressed  to  me  by 
Imperator  and  Rector,  failed  to  hit  the  target  impression  in  my 
then  human  mind.  Even  a  scientist  is  often  blind,  or  biased  in 
his  opinion,  by  the  especial  ‘hobby’  he  has  selected  to  ride.  It  was 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


341 


so  with  Hudson ;  and  to  some  degree,  I  find  out  now  ’twas  so 
with  me.  I  could  not  comprehend  or  understand  what  was  then 
written  through  that  hand.  Eels  are  not  more  slippery  than 
are  the  threads  of  thought  into  the  realms  unknown ;  and  thus 
with  you  in  your  own  home,  you  reach  and  reach,  and  try  and 
try,  and  seeming  slow  it  comes  to  you,  though  it  is  good,  the 
thing  you  do.  Brother  King,  I  much  approve  of  this  way  of 
treating  the  mind  hypotheses.  It  is  to  me  the  best  of  several 
attempts  by  others.  I  like  your  thought.  Here  and  there  we 
work  and  trace  something  of  moment  to  the  human  race ;  and 
when  we  mount  to  realms  unknown,  we  find  we  are  not  here 
alone;  but  up  the  stairs  of  thought  we  climb,  aided  and  aided 
all  the  time,  until  we  see  most  clear,  and  all  the  former  dimness 
disappears.  ‘Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’  will  mark  the  dawn 
indeed,  of  liberal  endeavor  to  try  to  cope  with  truth ;  and  I  am 
glad  in  all  of  it  you  have  attacked  no  creed ;  for  it  becomes  more 
classic  so,  and  will  forever  onward  go,  in  its  ability  to  do.  We 
scientists  approve  of  you,  and  I,  F.  W.  H.  Myers,  — ■  last  but  not 
least,  in  power  to  know,  for  in  earth  life,  I  studied  so,  and  had 
advantages,  and  also  ability  to  do,  —  come  here  and  write  that 
I  approve  of  you,  and  also  of  the  work  you  do.  My  signature, 
I  too  will  try  to  give  you,  upon  your  office  pad  at  later  date, 
when  Jonson  is  in  the  proper  state  (prediction).  I  am  a  listener 
at  the  keyhole  of  her  (the  psychic’s)  consciousness.  I  will  be 
able  to  hear  what  you  may  say  to  me  today.  I  shall  not  once 
go  far  away.  I  express  it  in  writing,  as  I  see  she  heard  my 
expressed  thought.  It  was  this,  I  feel  it  a  privilege  to  be  of 
those  who  are  permitted  to  listen,  and  also  to  be  in  touch  with 
you,  beloved  thinker.  I  will  follow  you  to  your  home,  and  be 
in  touch  with  your  spirit  guide  Hypatia.  Imperator  is  of  her 
order.  When  in  end  the  book  is  complete  ’twill  be  as  laurel 
wreath  to  you,  and  later  added  power  to  do  will  bring  your 
secret  wish  to  you.  You  climb  unaided  up  this  stair,  and  seem 
to  be  alone ;  but  many  an  angel  unaware  is  with  you  there.” 


A  TABLET  PAGE. 


To  Honor  Those  Gone  on  Before  —  Though  in  Another 
‘  Sphere,  They  Are  Co-workers  Here,  in  Establishing  Con¬ 
tinuity,  Return  and  Communion. 


As  a  humble  mortal  in  this  my  first  attempt  to  publish  some 
of  my  psychic  records,  I  wish  to  thank  the  very  many  men  of 
note,  and  prominence,  while  mortal  life  and  labor  was  their 
privilege,  for  their  contributions  to  my  book  from  spirit  realm; 
which  is  rendered  of  great  value  from  the  wisdom  of  the  words 
they  wrote ;  and  more  especially  do  I  desire  tO'  single  out  those 
who  were  co-workers,  and  students  of  psychic  matters  during 
life,  and  since  they  became  discarnate  spirits  have  entered  into 
my  work,  and  with  me  engaged  in  discussing  the  problems  of 
the  mind,  and  aided  me  in  demonstrating  the  study  of  practical 
psychology,  they  from  the  spirit  view,  and  I  from  the  human. 
I  further  crave  their  co-operation  in  the  future,  and  I  shall  as  a 
psychical  researcher  contribute  to  their  memory  my  meed  of 
personal  appreciation,  and  trust  through  the  pages  of  this  book 
to  assist  in  some  measure  to  perpetuate  the  names  of  Myers, 
James,  Hodgson,  Hudson,  Stead  and  Funk ;  because  of  my 
personal  knowledge  of  their  concurrent  work ;  and  because  I 
seemed  to  sense  the  presence  of  each  one  of  them  at  times,  while 
I  was  engaged  upon  the  problems  of  the  mind  and  soul. 

John  S.  King, 


342 


CHAPTER  XXXII 


After  twenty  years  of  honest,  earnest,  careful  study  of 
psychical  subjects,  which  I  investigated  fully,  without 
fear  or  favor  of  any  man ;  and  determined,  so  far  as 
I  was  able,  to  lay  bare  the  truth  of  continuity  to  mortal  view,  I 
feel  that  I  am  justified  in  asking  any  reader  of  my  book,  to  be 
honest,  unbiased,  impartial  and  sufficiently  judicial  to  not  select 
one  single  statement,  fact  or  phenomenon,  and  on  it  alone  base 
an  argument  in  support  of  any  hypothesis,  or  to  strengthen  a 
critical  attack;  but  wait  until  you  have  most  critically  examined 
every  part  of  it,  and  sifted  the  evidence  as  a  whole,  on  which 
to  base  your  conclusions ;  or  if  you  could  have  followed  in  my 
footsteps  to  where  the  various  psychics  are,  and  taken  part  in  the 
various  investigations  of  the  phenomena  described,  your  con¬ 
clusions,  I  feel  quite  sure,  would  be  in  harmony  with  mine. 

It  were  not  the  act  of  a  wise  man  to  claim  that  his  conclusions 
are  correct,  unless  his  investigations  have  been  most  exactingly 
conducted,  and  with  a  degree  of  frequency,  as  well  as  under  very 
different  conditions  of  existence,  environment  and  variation,  as 
to  time,  place  and  method  of  observation.  If  after  scores  of 
investigations  extending  in  each  case,  over  years  of  time,  and 
along  particular  lines,  with  a  single  object  in  view,  I  gain  the 
same  results,  no  matter  what  the  phase  of  mediumship;  no  matter 
who  the  individual  psychic  may  be ;  no  matter  when  or  where 
I  may  be  researching;  whether  I  am  known  or  unknown  as  a 
man,  to  the  psychic ;  no  matter  whether  materializations  come 
from  the  door  of  an  improvised  cabinet,  or  from  the  ceiling, 
walls  or  floor ;  or  levitated  between  the  ceiling  and  the  floor ; 
and  when  finished  talking,  like  a  whirl  of  steam,  from  a  loco¬ 
motive  engine  on  a  frosty  winter  morning,  passed  through  the 
walls  to  the  outer  air ;  or  if  it  be  the  familiar  tone  of  a  loved 
one’s  voice,  or  that  of  former  friend,  who  speaks  with  an  inde¬ 
pendent  voice  in  the  atmosphere  about  me;  or  if  through  the 

343 


344 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


aid  of  a  psychic  with  clairaudient  gift,  or  one  who  can  see  clair- 
voyantly ;  and  further  still  with  that  other  condition  known  as 
trance,  where  the  vocal  organs  of  a  psychic  instrument  are  used 
by  spirit  power  other  than  the  psychic’s  own  to  speak  in  language 
which  conveys  evidence  of  some  other  human  personality,  which 
most  usually  announces  itself  by  name,  to  the  one  addressed ;  and 
lastly  suppose  it  be  the  writing  psychic,  whom  I  have  named  the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone,  who  seems  to  be  quite  different  from 
all  other  automatic  or  psychic  writers,  I  hold  or  claim,  that  if 
through  all  these  channels  there  come  messages  from  the  same 
personalities ;  and  if  identified  as  such,  it  must  needs  be  accepted 
as  evidential. 

The  feature  to  which  I  now  call  the  reader’s  attention  is,  that 
through  all  the  various  psychics  of  different  kinds  and  phases, 
at  different  times,  and  widely  separated  places,  I  hold  conversa¬ 
tions  and  receive  messages  from  the  same  intelligences  or  per¬ 
sonalities,  which  facts  or  evidence  can  be  supported  on  oath,  by 
many  witnesses,  and  cannot  be  controverted ;  —  and  it  comes,  as  I 
am  thoroughly  convinced,  from  my  spirit  wife  and  other  relatives, 
from  my  spirit  guide  Hypatia,  and  others  of  my  band,  and  from 
former  friends  of  earth,  as  well  as  other  men  interested  with 
me  as  spirits  desirous  of  proving  continuity  of  life,  and  spirit 
return,  —  there  is  no  mention  of  creed. 

There  is  then,  I  claim,  good  reason  to  accept  what  I  have 
selected  as  evidential  of  spirit  power  and  continuity ;  and  I  may 
further  add  that  if  you  desire  to  advance  an  attack  or  criticism 
of  the  psychic  situation,  you  will  do  well  not  to  destroy,  nor 
remove  the  pontoons,  over  which  you  proceeded,  lest  you  may 
have  further  need  of  them  when  retreating. 

I  shall  attempt  to  abbreviate,  and  thus  include  in  the  few 
remaining  chapters  my  last  ten  days  of  research  experience,  at 
the  close  of  the  year  1912. 

First  Trumpet  Seance  of  December,  1912,  Series. 

I  reached  Detroit  on  Friday  afternoon,  December  20,  1912. 
I  ’phoned  Mrs.  Wriedt,  and  secured  a  sitting  for  8  o’clock  p.  m. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


345 


Her  house  was  the  one  I  visited  before,  but  I  had  to  reach  it 
by  a  new  car  route.  While  on  the  car  a  coincidence  presented. 
While  standing  in  the  aisle,  because  the  seats  were  occupied,  I 
asked  a  passenger  who  sat  near  to  me,  and  whose  eye  I  caught, 
“Can  you  tell  me  where  this  car  meets  Baldwin  Avenue  ?”  He 
replied  by  first  asking  me,  “What  number  do  you  want  to  find 
on  Baldwin  Avenue?”  and  when  I  told  him,  he  then  said,  “That’s 
where  I  am  going  now  myself,  and  I  will  show  you  if  you  leave 
the  car  when  I  do.”  He  did  so,  and  found  that  he  and  another 
man  along  with  us  were  booked  for  the  seance.  The  one  who 
entered  the  house  with  me  had  had  about  one  year’s  experience 
at  intervals  of  seances ;  while  the  third  man  whom  we  met  there, 
and  who  helped  to  form  our  semi-circle  in  the  seance  room,  had 
only  sat  once  or  twice  before ;  and  who,  though  fleshy,  large  and 
strong,  was  nervous,  which  he  preferred  to  call  anxiety.  In  this 
seance  I  received  but  a  few  demonstrations  strictly  intended  for 
me,  but  had  a  few  friendly  talks  with  loved  ones,  and  a  guide 
or  two ;  and  my  interests  were  otherwise  divided  between  the 
efforts  of  inexperienced  spirits,  and  the  “anxiety”  of  the  inex¬ 
perienced  man. 

Second  Trumpet  Seance  of  December,  1912,  Series. 

This  seance,  by  appointment,  was  held  for  me  alone,  on  Satur¬ 
day  morning,  December  21st.  It  was  a  lengthy  sitting,  and  to  me 
satisfactory,  as  my  lone  sittings  usually  are.  As  soon  as  the 
electric  light  was  turned  off  in  the  room,  the  spirit  lights  appeared 
to  view;  and  the  demonstrations  in  the  room  were  beautiful. 
Lights  in  all  parts  of  the  room  appeared  to  view ;  and  then  a 
spirit  brought  the  trumpet  to  me,  and  asked  me  to  examine  it; 
and  as  I  looked  into  it,  at  the  expanded  end,  I  could  see  all 
through  to  where  the  mouthpiece  was,  and  the  whole  of  it 
illuminated,  while  I  held  it  so  that  I  could  see  the  whole  inside 
from  end  to  end,  aglow  with  light. 

Hypatia,  my  spirit  guide,  was  the  first  to  come;  and  she  told 
me  that  my  band  of  guides,  and  several  of  my  loved  ones  were 
present  with  me ;  and  that  while  May  and  some  of  my  loved  ones 


346 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


would  talk  with  me,  the  guides  would  either  talk  with  or  sing 
for  me.  Hypatia  was  the  first  one  tO'  sing,  and  she  gave  a  stanza 
or  two  of  song,  so  loudly  that  she  could  be  heard  out  in  the 
street,  Mrs.  Wriedt,  the  medium,  meanwhile  remarking,  “Oh, 
isn’t  that  wonderful.”  Then  the  ancient  guide  des  Asia,  as  I 
have  named  him,  came.;  He  was  on  earth,  as  he  alleges,  nearly 
twenty  thousand  years  before  the  Christian  Era,  at  which  time 
he  claims  North  America  was  under  water.  Electra,  sister  of 
my  guardian  Egyptia,  and  an  alleged  member  of  my  band,  came 
and  spoke  and  sang.  She  sang  loudly  and  distinctly,  as  did 
Cleopatra  also.  All  three  of  these  alleged  themselves  to  be 
members  of  my  spirit  band.  Then  there  also  came  Otelleo,  and 
so  there  were  in  all  six  out  of  seven  of  the  alleged  members  of 
my  spirit  band,  each  one  of  whom  spoke  as  loud  as  I  do  when 
I  am  speaking  to  other  persons.  All  these  alleged  guides  have 
materialized  for  me  at  the  Jonsons  on  several  occasions,  and  two 
or  three  with  other  mediums ;  and  conversed  with  me  while 
presenting  to  me  in  their  transient  bodies.  Each  one  of  them 
has  also  written  messages  to  me,  through  the  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone.  Both  Egyptia  and  Electra  appeared  to  me  materialized, 
at  the  seances  held  by  Effie  Moss  at  London,  more  than  twenty 
years  ago;  and  some  fourteen  years  thereafter,  they  again 
appeared  in  form,  when  Mrs.  Moss  was  holding  seances  at  Lily 
Dale.  Both  of  these  spirits  also  came  together  and  walked  around 
the  circle  of  relatives  and  friends,  to  whom  I  introduced  them. 
This  was  at  a  seance  held  by  Nichols  at  Lily  Dale,  some  years 
ago  (in  1908)  ;  when  some  members  of  the  Canadian  Society 
for  Psychical  Research,  and  a  few  other  selected  friends,  held  a 
seance  under  test  conditions ;  one  of  which  was  that  the  medium 
lay  on  his  back,  upon  the  floor  within  the  cabinet,  while  the 
heavy  vice-president  stood  astride  of  him,  as  the  various  forms 
materialized,  including  Egyptia,  and  Electra,  who  claim  to  have 
been  my  guardian  spirits  from  the  time  I  was  born,  and  were 
familiar  to  the  view  of  May,  my  spirit  wife,  while  still  in  her 
mortal  life ;  and  since  then  they  now  attend  upon  her  necessities, 
as  she  herself  tells  me  in  her  messages  through  the  writing 


DAJVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


347 


psychic  to  me,  though  on  the  first  occasion  that  Electra  was 
materialized,  she  was  brought  into  the  seance  at  Jonson’s  by 
Hypatia  in  the  presence  of  the  selected  company.  Gray  Feather, 
the  strong  Indian  control  of  J.  B.  Jonson,  materializing  medium 
of  Toledo,  came  and  spoke  with  me  at  this  trumpet  seance  to  tell 
me,  that  Jonson  was  coming  home;  and  he  wanted  me  to  come 
down  there  on  Monday  afternoon.  This  same  Indian  control 
Gray  Feather,  in  my  presence  in  a  former  Jonson  seance  in  April 
last,  announced  the  arrival  of  Stead  in  spirit  land ;  and  told  the 
listeners  who  were  present  there  with  me,  'that  he  had  visited 
and  talked  with  Stead  in  life  in  Julia’s  Bureau,  in  England. 
Gray  Feather  also  on  his  own  initiative  wrote  through  the  hand 
of  a  writing  psychic,  and  urged  me  to  meet  him  on  a  certain  day 
and  at  a  certain  place,  in  New  York  State,  of  which  a  record 
appears  elsewhere;  and  when  I  did  so  he  brought  the  late  Judge 
Rose  of  Toronto  to  speak  to  me,  which  was  the  first  and  only 
time  that  Judge  Rose  had  thus  spoken  with  me,  though  he  wrote 
a  message  on  a  slate  for  me,  and  signed  it.  I  have  it  also  recorded 
in  a  previous  chapter  that  he.  Gray  Feather,  controlled,  on  two 
separate  days,  another  trumpet  medium  instead  of  her  own 
acknowledged  control.  He  not  only  spoke  through  that  trumpet 
himself,  but  brought  on  those  occasions  thirty-one  spirit  person¬ 
alities  to  speak  with  me.  May  has  acknowledged,  when  sending 
messages  to  me,  that  this  noble  Indian  spirit  has  often  been  a 
strong  helper  to  her. 


Third  Trumpet  Seance  of  December,  1912,  Series. 

I  remained  in  my  room  at  the  hotel  till  nearly  noon,  the  22nd 
day  of  December,  then  I  went  by  invitation  to  a  friend’s  home 
for  dinner;  and  finally  reached  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  at  3.30  p.  m.,  the 
time  appointed  for  my  seance.  I  had  my  sitting  not  alone,  but 
with  one  gentleman  whom  I  never  met  before. 

MacRoberts,  at  whose  home  in  London  the  Moss  seances  were 
held  over  twenty  years  ago,  came  at  this  seance  and  talked  on 
several  subjects  with  me.  The  communication  was  interesting 


348 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  among  other  things  he  said  to  me,  “Doctor,  you  have  out¬ 
lived  most  of  the  boys.” 

It  will  be  noted  that  this  and  other  two  of  the  four  seances 
were  what  is  known  as  mixed  circles,  where  both  time  and  interest 
are  divided  between  the  sitters;  and  the  share  is  lessened  which 
comes  to  each  one,  though  opportunities  are  all  the  time  presenting 
for  investigating  and  considering  conditions ;  and  estimating  the 
relationship  of  conditions  presenting  and  results  obtained ;  as  well 
as  observing  the  effect  of  harmonious  conditions. 

One  unexpected  caller  from  the  spirit  land  was  a  man  well 
known  in  my  city,  and  likewise  a  man  of  wealth,  who  lost  money, 
caste  and  influence,  on  account  of  acquired  habits  undesirable 
in  character;  and  his  language  and  tone  of  speech  were  sad 
when  he  spoke  with  me,  as  he  was  aware  that  I  knew  his  habits. 

Among  others  who  came  and  spoke  with  me,  on  matters  of 
personal  interest,  or  benefit,  but  not  specially  of  public  interest, 
was  des  Asia,  my  alleged  ancient  guide  of  the  very  long  ago, 
who  came  and  talked  in  English  language,  and  told  me  much 
that  I  was  pleased  to  know.  And  so  it  was  with  others  of  my 
guides,  especially  my  chief  spirit  guide  Hypatia,  and  also  another 
one,  Cleopatra. 

May  Donna,  my  daughter,  who  passed  to  spirit  life  at  birth 
more  than  twenty  years  ago,  also  made  her  presence  known  and 
now  told  me  that  when  I  reached  Toledo  she  would  again 
materialize  and  talk  to  me  there. 

May  came  to  me  as  usual,  for  she  always  does  whenever  I 
am  with  a  psychic,  and  proves  herself  by  calling  me  according 
to  our  ante-mortem  agreement,  by  the  test  name  “Johnnie.”  I 
had  a  good  talk  with  May  about  her  personal  possessions,  and 
what  she  suggested  I  had  better  do  with  everything,  and  she  gave 
me  her  directions  explicitly.  May  talked  with  me  this  time,  I 
believe,  without  a  trumpet,  and  said  she  had  no  suffering  now, 
and  I  must  try  and  be  cheerful  and  enjoy  myself;  and  that  she 
was  told  I  was  to  have  splendid  health  and  strength  and  live 
to  be  very  old,  and  had  most  important  work  before  me  to 
accomplish.  She  also  wished  me  Merry  Christmas  and  a  Happy 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


349 


New  Year.  Before  she- bid  me  good-bye  she  told  me  that  she 
was  going  home  tonight  to  see  her  mother,  but  would  be  here 
again  with  me  at  the  morning  seance  at  8  o’clock. 

I  may  here  add  that  when  the  spirits  assume  the  transient 
bodies  formed  for  them,  they  look  as  natural  as  in  life,  though 
the  garments  which  are  upon  them  may  or  may  not  resemble 
those  worn  by  human  ones;  and  they  claim  they  are  creations 
of  their  own  desires. 

The  Fourth  Trumpet  Seance  of  December,  1912,  Series. 

In  the  early  morning  of  the  23rd  of  December,  1912,  I  had 
my  sitting  with  another  gentleman  in  the  last  trumpet  seance 
of  the  season,  which  will  be  the  last  one  also  to  be  recorded  in 
the  book,  which  will  go  forth  to  the  world  as  an  expositor  of 
truth,  and  upholder  of  the  spiritual  philosophy. 

The  reader  will  remember  that  as  reported  in  the  seance 
preceding  this  one,  that  May  said  to  me  through  the  trumpet, 
that  she  was  going  to  her  mother’s,  after  the  seance,  but  would 
be  back  in  time  to  meet  me  in  the  seance  this  morning. 

I  entered  the  seance  room  feeling  slightly  chilly,  and  Mrs. 
Wriedt  brought  me  a  cup  of  hot  coffee,  remarking,  “You  are  the 
man  who  drank  the  first  cup  of  coffee  in  my  seance  room.”  When 
the  coffee  cup  was  empty,  and  the  light  turned  off,  a  man’s  voice 
loud  and  natural  said  “Good  morning,”  and  I  enquired,  “Who 
is  this?”  when  May  answered  me,  “Why,  it  is  Pa.”  I  then 
remarked,  “Your  coming  is  a  great  surprise,  for  this  is  the  first 
time  I  have  heard  from  you  since  you  left  your  body  many  years 
ago,”  after  which  he  gave  through  the  trumpet  his  full  name, 
as  if  to  corroborate  what  May  had  said,  and  seemed  to  be  over¬ 
joyed,  at  this  his  new-found  mode  of  conversing.  May  was  also 
very  pleased  on  account  of  my  surprise,  as  I  did  not  know  why 
she  was  going  home,  and  something  prevented  my  asking  her. 
She  probably  knew  that  his  inclinations  would  most  likely  take 
him  there.  All  of  this  seemed  very  natural,  and  I  had  a  good 
talk  with  both  of  them  (father  and  daughter).  May,  while  she 
was  talking  with  me  there,  cried  a  most  life-like  cry,  and  said, 


350 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“Oh,  it  makes  me  feel  so  sad,  to  see  you  all  alone,  and  no  one 
about  you  to  do  or  care  for  you,  when  you  were  always  so  good 
and  kind  to  me,  and  did  everything  you  could  for  my  benefit. 
I  am  near  to  you  nearly  all  the  while,  though  I  cannot  seem  to 
impress  you,  by  myself  alone.” 

Asia  and  Hypatia,  two  of  my  guides,  came  again,  and  Dr. 
Sharp,  control  of  Mrs.  Wriedt,  told  me  that  Gray  Feather,  J.  B. 
Jonson’s  strong  Indian  control,  was  busy  gathering  spirit  bands, 
and  forces,  so  that  I  might  have  the  very  best  results  along  the 
lines  I  had  in  mind,  especially  so  because  Jonson  was  not  strong 
in  vitality. 

May  Donna,  my  daughter,  humorously  remarked  to  me,  “Some 
time  while  you  are  at  Jonson’s,  I’ll  walk  out  from  the  cabinet 
and  kiss  you.” 

Cleopatra,  as  she  alleges  herself  to  be,  and  also  claims  to  be 
a  guide  and  aider,  told  me  during  the  seance,  that  she  would 
try  and  find  an  opportunity  to  materialize  while  at  Jonson’s. 
Stainton  Moses,  as  he  claimed  to  be,  and  whose  name  and  fame 
are  known  to  Englishmen,  also  made  a  call  at  this  morning  seance, 
and  spoke  quite  unreservedly  to  me.  I  told  him  I  would  be  glad 
to  hear  again  from  him,  and  communicate  any  message  which 
he  might  have  for  his  fellow-countrymen. 

Mrs.  Effie  Moss,  the  physical  medium,  I  first  met  in  London, 
Canada,  at  the  MacRoberts  home,  was  pleased  once  more  to 
come  from  spirit  sphere  and  talk  with  me,  and  thanked  me  for 
all  I  said  and  did  for  her,  and  for  her  manager,  at  the  time  they 
had  their  trouble  there  some  twenty  years  ago. 

MacRoberts’  alleged  guide,  Cynthia,  also  came  and  talked 
with  me. 

Dr.  Sharp,  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  control,  then  spoke  a  word  or  two, 
before  he  closed  the  seance,  and  in  doing  so,  said,  before  you 
leave  Toledo  I  will  be  down  to  show  myself,  as  I  always  admire, 
and  like  to  honor  you. 

One  feature  of  this  seance,  as  well  as  of  some  others,  has 
developed  a  circumstance  of  importance,  inasmuch  as  it  has 
helped  to  unfold  a  secret  which  has  been  withheld  for  many  years. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


351 


and  establishes,  beyond  any  doubt,  all  the  three  contentions 
claimed  by  me,  viz.:  1st,  Continuity  of  Life;  2nd,  Spirit  Return, 
and  3rd,  Spirit  Communion ;  and  to  this  may  now  be  added 
Prophesy.  The  personalities  concerned  will  in  no  way  be  dis¬ 
closed,  but  the  circumstances  I  will  now  relate  in  support  of  my 
repeated  contention  made  in  tripartite  as  above.  Many  years 
ago,  there  resided  in  my  city  a  man,  his  wife  and  family,  together 
with  a  sister  of  the  wife.  His  means  were  ample,  and  occupation 
and  reputation  were  both  good.  The  wife  and  family  were  sent 
to  the  summer  residence,  while  the  husband  and  father  remained, 
as  did  the  sister  of  his  wife.  The  time  was  fast  approaching 
when  an  event  of  importance  and  of  anxiety  was  due  to  most 
certainly  transpire.  It  came  and  so  did  I  as  doctor,  and  I  was 
therefore  present  at  the  birth  of  a  son  to  the  father,  this  well- 
known  citizen,  and  the  mother,  who  was  a  sister  of  his  wife.  In 
brief,  the  boy  was  illegitimate,  and  had  come  to  stay ;  and  what¬ 
soe’er  was  said  or  done,  it  must  be  kept  a  secret  by  the  doctor 
and  the  two  concerned.  A  foster-mother  was  soon  found,  and 
the  boy  was  well  cared  for.  Everything  ran  quite  smoothly,  and 
the  secret  was  not  divulged.  A  few  years  elapsed,  and  then  the 
father  of  this  growing  lad  took  ill,  and  passed  out  of  the  body 
to  spirit  realm. 

On  two  or  three  occasions  prior  to  the  present  seance,  the  spirit 
of  that  father  came  and  conversed  with  me  through  a  trumpet, 
about  his  anxiety  of  mind  regarding  the  past  and  the  future  of 
this  illegitimate  son.  He  told  me  that  he  had  made  provision  for 
the  boy’s  education  and  advancement,  and  had  placed  it  with  the 
mother  of  the  boy  to  be  administered ;  but  she  did  not  evince 
an  interest  of  earthly  mother  character,  but  preferred  that  he 
would  go  to  heaven.  He  has  not,  however,  gone  to  that  place, 
in  accordance  with  her  wish,  as  will  be  realized  by  further  read¬ 
ing.  At  the  present  seance,  the  spirit  of  the  father  again  came 
and  spoke  with  me,  and  told  me  exactly  where  I  could  find  his 
boy,  and  how  and  where  he  was  employed,  and  that  he  had  grown 
to  be  a  man.  He  asked  me  to  divulge  the  secret  to  the  boy  of 
his  true  parentage,  and  let  him  know  of  what  was  placed  with 


352 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


the  mother  for  his  benefit,  before  he,  the  father,  had  gone  out  of 
the  physical.  He  also  said  that  he  would  try  and'  bring  the  boy 
and  me  together,  and  let  me  know  the  address  of  the  mother. 
The  latter  part  of  this  strange  foregoing  communication  was 
made  to  me  in  the  seance  room  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  in  Detroit  on 
the  morning  of  23rd  December,  1912. 

Developments  are  promised,  and  will  climax  very  shortly,  and 
if  they  are  presented  in  time  will  be  added  to  this  chapter. 

Fulfillment  of  a  Spirit  Prophecy. 

While  in  my  office  this  afternoon  ’tween  2  and  4,  a  tall  young 
man  of  over  six  feet  high  was  shown  in,  and  requested  to  take 
a  seat ;  and  as  my  eyes  were  cast  on  him,  I  was  so  strongly 
impressed  that  I  called  him  by  his  name,  as  when  I  knew  him 
as  a  child  of  five,  but  who  was  now  a  man  of  over  24  years  of 
age.  As  his  spirit  father  told  me,  he  was  a  resident  of  a  western 
city  in  the  United  States ;  and  I  questioned  him  as  to  his  visit 
to  Toronto,  and  this  one  to  me.  He  proceeded  without  delay  to 
answer,  and  told  me  also  that  about  one  year  ago,  while  at  a 
trumpet  seance,  his  father  came  and  spoke  to  him,  and  said, 
“I  want  you  to  go  whene’er'  you  can,  and  have  a  talk  with  Dr. 
John  S.  King,  Toronto,  who  will  corroborate  all  that  I  have  told 
you  and  more ;  and  what  I  have  done  for  you ;  and  will  reveal 
the  secret  of  your  life,  and  will  give  you  necessary  advice.” 

The  time  and  place  and  privacy  were  all  opportune  for  me  to 
tell  this  man  what  his  father  had  requested  me  to  make  known 
to  him.  On  his  part  he  also  assured  me  that  his  father  had 
instructed  him  to  come  to  me  to  learn  just  what  I  had  to  say. 
Suffice  it  to  briefly  state,  that  though  this  man  has  not  seen 
his  mother,  nor  can  have  recollection  of  her ;  nor  does  the  mother 
know  aught  of  him,  nor  retain  remembrance  of  his  face  since 
baby  days,  and  later  has  no  trace  of  him,  still  this  young  man 
now  knows  her  name,  and  who  she  is,  and  what  she  does,  and 
where  she  lives,  and  will  shortly  go  to  her,  and  introduce  himself 
to  her,  and  let  her  know  he  has  not|  yet  gone  to  heaven,  and  is 
now  prepared  to  receive  what  was  left  for  him  in  trust  with  her; 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


353 


and  expects  for  some  time  at  least  to  be  a  resident  of  earth, 
similar  to  herself.  This  record  is  of  course  abbreviated.  I  have 
divulged  only  what  I  had  authority  to  divulge,  but  I  have  pre¬ 
served  each  one’s  identity. 

If  I  had  no  other  proof,  I  feel  that  what  is  contained  in 
particulars  of  this  case  suffices  to  establish  my  contention. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII 


Four  seances  in  Detroit,  Michigan,  with  the  trumpet  on 
the  20th,  21st,  22nd  and  23rd  December,  1912,  together 
with  four  seances  in  Toledo,  Ohio,  on  evenings  of  the 
23rd  and  26th,  with  materializations  at  Jonson’s;  one  afternoon 
at  a  private  psychic’s,  with  materializations  and  features  new ; 
and  also  one  with  a  well-known  physician,  who  claims  to  hear 
clairaudiently,  and  who  commits  to  writing  what  he  alleges  he 
hears,  on  this  trip  so  far  occupied  all  my  time  for  a  full  week; 
and  following  this  three  days  devoted  to  practical  psychology, 
and  messages  which  were  sent  to  me  through  the  human-psychic- 
telephone  while  I  was  in  her  home  in  New  York  State  and  resting. 
I  am  thus  enabled  to  complete  my  book  up  to  the  closing  of  the 
year ;  but  in  doing  so,  have  had  to  have  recourse  to  abbreviation 
of  the  cases,  and  the  chapters  as  I  approached  the  latter  pages. 

When  I  reached  Toledo  on  the  afternoon  of  the  23rd  December, 
1912,  and  got  myself  located  in  a  comfortable  room,  I  ’phoned 
to  the  home  of  the  Jonsons  and  secured  a  sitting  for  a  seance 
that  evening.  When  I  reached  there  and  was  seated  in  the  seance, 
I  found  that  with  me  there  were  five  others ;  and  I  realized  also 
that  Jonson  and  his  wife  were  a  pair  of  sick  ones,  fit  subjects 
for  a  hospital.  There  was  no  question  but  that  both  were  sick, 
having  only  reached  their  home  on  Sunday  after  an  absence,  he 
of  four  months,  and  she  of  two.  But  with  generous  consideration 
and  with  personal  sacrifice  of  rest  and  comfort,  rather  than  have 
their  patrons  disappointed  after  the  distances  travelled  and  the 
corresponding  expense  incurred,  together  with  the  lingering  doubt 
existing  as  to  whether  there  would  be  many  or  even  any  more 
seances,  owing  to  the  worn-out  condition  of  both  man  and  wife, 
but  especially  the  former,  who,  acting  on  the  advice  of  the  writer, 
has  determined,  for  this  winter  time  at  least,  to  abandon  his 
sittings  and  to  try  and  improve  his  health.  This  compromise  to 
be  in  effect  after  the  present  week  had  terminated. 

354 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


355 


It  was  then  to  all  present,  medium  and  sitters,  a  question 
whether  it  could  be  possible  to  have  a  successful  seance,  but  it 
was  agreed  to  try,  taking  our  sittings  and  Mrs.  Jonson  set  the 
music  in  operation ;  and  notwithstanding  lack  of  the  best  con¬ 
ditions,  we  saw  and  realized  much  that  was  interesting  and  very 
convincing,  along  the  lines  of  spiritual  phenomena.  I  note  that 
when  in  a  Jonson  seance,  whether  the  sitters  be  few  or  many, 
that  there  is  most  usually  a  fairly  equal  distribution  to  the  sitters 
all,  although  a  few  seem  to  be  favored  with  more  than  the  average 
to  the  rest,  while  now  and  then  I’ve  noticed  some  have  no  guest 
at  all.  My  stenographer  for  instance  was  paid  to  come  with  me 
to  work,  and  I  also  paid  for  her  admission,  yet  still  she  was 
present  at  each  seance,  and  there  were  four,  but  no  guest  came 
to  her,  while  for  me  there  were  no  less  than  eight  at  one  sitting 
of  the  four  which  we  attended,  on  the  occasion  to  which  I  refer ; 
and  usually  from  four  to  six  each  time,  if  others  were  with  me 
sitting.  The  foregoing  fact  did  not  affect  the  general  average 
to  each  in  the  circle. 

But  to  resume  my  record  at  this  seance,  I  had  my  third  call 
from  the  late  Mr.  Hill  of  Toronto,  who  simply  came,  and  showed 
himself  again,  but  was  not  able  this  time  to  speak.  The  results 
as  a  whole  in  this  seance,  as  well  as  in  the  next,  were  not  up 
to  the  standard  of  seasons  gone  by,  nor  of  others  before  the 
power  weakened,  'evidently  much  less,  and  the  conditions  not  as 
favorable  for  the  reasons  which  are  referred  to  elsewhere. 

Cleopatra,  who  had  conversed  with  me  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s  through 
the  trumpet,  and  gave  me  her  promise  to  materialize  when  I 
would  be  in  seance  at  J.  B.  Jonson ’s,  kept  her  promise  as  will 
now  be  seen,  and  talking  with  me  through  the  vocal  organs  of 
her  transient  body,  walked  from  the  cabinet  out  into  the  room. 
She  told  me  in  the  presence  and  hearing  of  the  other  five  that  she 
was  helping  others,  to  create  such  conditions  as  would  enable 
May  to  appear  and  talk  with  me,  when  in  my  home  alone.  May 
herself  came  again,  and  brought  along  with  her  May  Donna,  our 
daughter.  They  each  stepped  out  from  the  cabinet,  or  room 
where  they  formed  transient  bodies  and  stood  in  front  of  the 


356 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


curtains,  and  while  there  they  both  kissed  me  (my  daughter, 
through  the  trumpet  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s,  told  me  she  would),  so 
that  all  present  could  both  see  and  hear  them,  then  and  there. 
May  talked  quite  as  clearly  as  ever  before,  while  in  seance, 
through  the  vocal  organs  of  the  transient  body  in  which  she 
appeared.  May  Donna,  who  resembles  in  some  respects  both 
May  and  me,  had  ringlets  hanging  down  each  side  of  her  head, 
and  wore  a  pleasant  smile.  She  took  her  mother’s  left  arm,  and 
the  mother  took  mine,  and  we  stepped  forward  a  pace,  and 
stood  in  a  row  in  front  of  where  the  curtains  separate;  and  the 
sitters  came  up  and  viewed  their  faces  and  raiments,  while  Mrs. 
Jonson  was  spoken  to  by  May,  who  knew  her  in  life.  Having 
backed  up  to  the  opening,  they  kissed  me  again,  and  said  “Good 
night”  quite  as  naturally  as  any  humans  could  do.  My  descrip¬ 
tions  are  confined  to  my  own  guests,  as  much  space  would  be 
needed  if  I  described  all  that  were  there,  for  an  average  seance 
will  bring  eighteen  to  twenty-five  guests,  or  even  more,  if  too 
much  time  is  not  consumed  in  talking,  and  walking  here  and 
there. 

I  will  now  ask  my  readers,  to  try  and  remember  the  prophesies 
or  promises  in  preceding  chapters  of  Professor  James,  F.  W.  H. 
Myers  and  other  two  or  three  to  try  and  write  their  signature 
on  my  office  pad  with  printed  heading  for  me,  by  using  my 
fountain  pen,  at  a  Jonson  seance,  in  time  to  be  included  in  my 
book,  if  possible  it  be,  and  there  be  good  conditions.  If  so  you 
will  realize,  that  with  conditions  now  impaired  —  not  only  by 
the  sickness  and  depletion  of  Jonson’s  vitality,  but  by  several 
reasons  otherwise  than  by  the  cause  referred  to,  which  is  itself 
to  me  more  or  less  alarming,  having  reference  to  both  health 
and  mediumship,  —  results  could  scarcely  be  successful,  but  what 
there  were  I  give  you.  Professor  James  of  Harvard,  as  he 
alleged  himself  to  be,  and  who  has  been  communicating  messages 
to  me  in  writing,  with  his  name  attached,  through  the  hand  of 
the  Human-Psychic-Telephone  in  New  York  State,  desired  to 
establish  his  human  personality,  and  on  one  occasion  wrote  to 
say  that  he  would  try  to  write  his  usual  signature  as  in  life,  and 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


357 


would  meet  me  for  that  purpose,  in  a  Jonson  seance,  when  I 
would  visit  Toledo.  He  kept  his  promise,  or  at  least  tried  so 
to  do.  The  seance  I  am  now  recording,  and  possibly  another 
one,  would  be  his  last  opportunity  for  his  signature  to  be  pro¬ 
duced,  and  to  be  incorporated  in  my  book,  as  well  as  his  promise. 
The  very  fact  that  I  was  anticipating  this,  would,  along  withi 
the  sickness  of  the  medium,  and  also  with  that  of  his  wife ;  and 
the  depletion  of  the  medium’s  nervous  energy  and  psychic  power ; 
and  the  absence  from  the  house  for  several  months,  allowing 
magnetic,  electric  and  psychic  forces  to  more  or  less  disperse, 
would  materially  depreciate  the  value  of  conditions  for  demon¬ 
strations.  With  a  knowledge  of  these  various  facts,  I  naturally 
felt  considerable  anxiety,  which  could  not  in  any  way  assist  to 
make  harmonious  conditions,  which  are  essential  to  success.  I| 
had  no  picture  or  photo  of  Professor  James ;  I  have  no  recollec¬ 
tion  of  having  seen  his  face ;  and  therefore  on  this  occasion  I 
waited  between  hope  and  doubt  for  some  personality,  who,  when 
he  appeared,  would  prove  himself  to  be  the  man  that  I  did  want ; 
and  the  one  who  was  desirous  of  proving  himself  to  be  the  pro¬ 
fessor  of  Harvard  University.  I  had  not  long  to  wait  until  a 
form  materialized,  and  in  some  way  which  I  have  not  noted, 
impressed  Mrs.  Jonson  to  call  me  to  the  cabinet.  I  spoke  to  the 
form  and  said,  “Is  this  spirit  now  for  me?”  and  with  a  gentle 
inclination,  or  bow  of  head,  he  thus  answered  the  question.  Again 
I  asked,  “If  you  are  for  me,  please  tell  me  your  name.”  His 
answer  followed  in  one  word,  “James.” 

Though  I  had  nothing  to  guide  me  as  to  his  appearance  or 
feature,  except  that  he  exceeded  my  age  by  a  trifle  more  than 
a  year,  I  felt  a  degree  of  disappointment  when  I  took  a  general 
glance  at  him,  for  I  expected  to  see  an  older-looking  man.  He 
appeared  to  be  a  man  of  medium  stature  and  build ;  but  had  no 
beard  or  whiskers,  but  a  heavy  moustache ;  and  extending  over 
his  head  from  back  to  front,  and  meeting  the  line  of  his  forehead, 
he  wore  his  hair  in  parallel  locks  with  wavy  ends  which  in  the 
light  in  which  I  viewed  him,  seemed  to  be  the  color  of  a  shade  of 
red,  the  same  as  was  his  moustache,  and  his  features  were 


358 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


younger  than  his  years  would  permit  them  to  be.  He  had  a  com¬ 
manding  countenance,  an  elevated,  broadened  forehead  and 
scrutinizing  eyes.  He  was  neither  fleshy  nor  very  thin,  and 
seemed  to  have  assumed  the  middle  age  or  younger,  —  as  most 
forms  presenting  appear  younger  than  in  life,  —  but  looked  very 
wistfully  at  me,  as  I  drew  from  my  pocket  my  office  pad,  and 
exhibited  my  fountain  pen.  The  form  then  spoke  as  if  dis¬ 
appointed,  while  I  extented  the  pen  to  him,  and  these  are  the 
words  I  caught;  “I  fear  I  cannot  do  it  now.”  No  further  effort 
was  made,  and  the  transient  body  melted  from  view.  This  was 
the  first  time  he  materialized  for  me.  I  tried  to  encourage  him 
to  make  another  effort,  if  not  now,  then  at  some  future  sitting. 

As  this  form  disappeared  another  came  into  view  rising  up 
from  the  floor,  where  the  curtains  of  the  cabinet  divide,  to  full 
height  in  front  of  the  cabinet.  This  was  also  the  form  of  a  man 
whom  I  never  saw  in  life,  nor  did  I  know  his  features,  but  the 
name  received  from  the  other  form  led  me  to  suspect,  that  this 
caller  now  before  me,  was  F.  W.  H.  Myers,  late  President  of 
the  London  Society  for  Psychical  Research,  for  in  a  communica¬ 
tion  through  a  reliable  source,  he  promised  over  his  own  name 
that  he  also  would  try  his  best  to  meet  me  here,  and  give  his 
signature.  Though  never  seen  or  known  by  me  in  life,  or  in 
picture,  he  was  born  the  same  year  as  myself.  I  will  describe 
the  appearance  o'f  this  form  in  outline  at  least,  as  it  presented 
to  me.  He  had  more  hair  on  his  head  than  Professor  William 
James,  and  it  divided  in  the  centre  of  the  top  of  his  head,  and  it 
was  dark  in  color,  and  was  mixed  with  gray ;  he  had  a  full  beard 
and  moustache,  both  of  which  were  iron  gray  and  also  curly. 
His  forehead  was  high  and  features  indicated  intelligence,  but 
for*  some  reason  I  did  not  get  a  good  view  of  his  eyes.  When 
he  announced  himself  as  “Myers,”  I,  without  delay,  asked  him, 
if  he  desired  to  write,  and  gracefully  bowing  his  answer  affirma¬ 
tive  to  my  question,  I,  without  hesitation,  held  my  pad  with 
the  top  of  it  resting  midway  up  my  left  chest,  meanwhile  I 
steadied  it  with  my  left  hand.  I  next  offered  my  fountain  pen, 
and  the  form  responded  to  my  expectancy,  and  my  delight;  and 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


359 


with  a  prompt  and  emphatic  eiTort,  with  his  right  hand  he  reached 
for  and  took  from  me  my  pen,  and  placed  its  point  upon  a  leaf 
of  the  pad.  That  was  about  as  far  as  he  was  able  to  demonstrate 
for  when  he  made  a  second  effort  to  grip  the  fountain  pen  tighter, 
his  fingers  relaxed,  and  the  pen  slipped  from  them  and  rolled 
on  the  pad,  and  was  not  recovered  by  him.  I  interpreted  the 
event  as  an  evidence  of  partial  success,  sufficient,  however,  to 
encourage  my  belief  that  with  good  conditions  and  renewal  of 
his  effort  he  will  yet  succeed.  When  he  failed  to  write  his 
signature  I  felt  perhaps  it  was  want  of  confidence,  for  he  quickly 
stepped  back  to  the  cabinet,  and  sank  from  view,  at  the  entrance 
where  he  first  appeared.  I  then  walked  back  to  my  seat,  and  said, 
“I  really  believe  that  was  Myers,”  when  three  loud  raps  were 
heard  in  the  cabinet  room  to  affirm  it.  I  then  spoke  and  said, 
“You  made  a  good  start,  and  perhaps  if  you  try  again,  before 
the  seance  closes  you  may  then  succeed.”  One  very  loud  rap 
was  then  heard,  which  I  interpreted  to  mean  most  emphatically 
“No.”  I  next  suggested  that  he  try  again  at  some  future  seance, 
but  that  my  presence  in  Toledo  at  this  date  would  be  the  last 
opportunity  to  secure  his  signature  for  my  present  book. 

As  I  have  other  seanceg  with  other  mediums  in  view,  I  have 
every  hope  that  I  will  yet  hear  from  both  James  and  Myers 
regarding  their  effort  here,  and  learn  the  probabilities  of  this 
and  other  experiments  in  the  future. 

It  will  be  seen  that  I  had  thus  six  presentations  at  this  seance, 
the  foregoing  two  having  special  interest  to  psychical  researchers. 
The  other  four  forms  which  came  were  Mr.  Hill,  whom  I  knew 
in  Toronto,  May,  my  spirit  wife.  May  Donna,  my  spirit  daughter, 
Cleopatra,  one  of  my  spirit  guides,  who  spoke  so  I  could  hear 
distinctly  every  word ;  and  these  latter  three  all  walked  with  me 
from  the  cabinet  into  the  circle,  the  wife  and  daughter  walking 
side  by  side  on  my  left,  for  a  distance  of  a  few  feet,  while 
Cleopatra  walked,  later,  out  with  me  a  little  farther.  The  two 
psychical  researchers  James  and  Myers  have  had  double  experience 
as  to  the  difficulty  of  communication,  and  may  yet  possibly 
explain  through  some  channel  why  they  were  not  successful  in 


360 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


giving  me  their  signatures,  or  rectify  any  errors  which  may 
have  arisen  in  some  of  their  many  communications. 

Wonderful  Experiences,  New  Phases,  and  Some  Surprising 

Results,  with  a  Private,  or  Non-Professional  Psychic. 

On  the  afternoon  of  Tuesday,  24th  December,  1912,  I  secured 
the  valued  privilege,  through  a  letter  of  introduction  to  a  private 
lady  medium,  or  non-professional,  location — for  reason  expressed 
to  me — not  indicated.  During  all  of  the  many  long  years  of  my 
interesting  ventures,  and  investigations,  it  has  never  fallen  to 
my  lot  to  participate  in  more  wonderful  developments  of  unusual 
phenomena.  The  note  which  I  carried  was  a  brief  one,  and  simply 
stated  that  I  was  a  friend  of  the  writer,  and  from  Canada,  and 
that  the  note  would  be  a  sufficient  guarantee  of  my  integrity 
of  purpose.  She  had  no  further  knowledge  whatsoever  of  me, 
and  though  very  busy  getting  ready  for  Christmas,  sat  herself 
quietly  down  for  a  minute  and  then  unreservedly  consented  to 
give  me  a  seance.  The  seance  lasted  for  an  hour,  beginning  at 
3  o’clock  p.  m. 

The  seance  room  had  the  appearance  of  a  back  parlor,  separated 
from  the  front  and  large  one  by  sliding  doors.  Nothing  what¬ 
soever  appeared  unusual,  or  that  would  or  could  arouse  suspicion 
of  any  mechanism  or  device,  or  suggest  an  idea  of  trickery  or 
conjuring,  nor  in  her  personal  attitude  or  speech,  which  could 
be  construed  to  suggest  chicanery  to  the  senses  or  comprehension 
of  a  psychical  researcher,  of  long  continued  experience.  I  found 
the  frame  and  curtains  of  the  cabinet  similar  to  many  others 
I  had  seen,  and  it  occupied  six  feet  square  in  the  south-east 
corner  of  the  room,  while  the  psychic  herself  during  the  seance 
occupied  a  seat  on  my  left,  and  was  engaged  with  myself  in 
conversation,  or  with  the  spirit  guests  who  called  on  us  during 
the  sitting,  and  never  for  a  moment  was  she  entranced,  and  in 
this  respect  entirely  at  variance  with  other  materializing  mediums 
I  have  met.  Another  marked  feature  was  the  fact  that  when 
the  psychic  pulled  down  the  blinds  and  darkened  the  room  so 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


361 


as  to  exclude  all  light,  the  spirit  callers  each  began  to  come, 
and  they  each  as  they  entered  produced  the  light  by  which  they 
could  be  perceived. 

I  was  welcomed  as  a  guest  by  a  personality  which  claimed  to 
be  the  control  of  the  medium.  I  did  not  see  his  form,  nor  could 
I  designate  the  location  from  which  he  spoke,  but  it  sounded 
to  me  like  an  independent  voice  in  the  air.  The  cabinet  did  not 
seem  to  be  the  exclusive  place  of  origin  of  the  various  forma 
presenting,  in  fact  it  seemed  to  be  used  by  only  the  few,  for  my 
attention  would  be  drawn  to  a  light  above  me  in  the  air,  and 
there  I  would  see  the  transient  form  of  a  spirit  coming  from 
the  ceiling,  or  rather  as  I  was  in  darkness,  it  had  the  appearance 
as  if  coming  from  the  sky.  Places  and  directions  were  all  utilized 
in  this  respect,  for  the  spirit  forms  would  come  and  go  not  only 
from  the  cabinet,  but  from  the  walls  and  floor,  and  it  seemed 
as  if  I  were  in  a  dark  cloud  up  in  the  air,  meeting  the  various 
spirits  in  their  transient  bodies  there.  As  I  am  crowded  for  both 
time  and  space  I  will  abbreviate  and  say  that  at  this  seance  no 
light  was  burning,  and  each  and  every  spirit  brought  their  own 
with  them ;  and  thus  being  in  the  dark,  made  each  stand  out  like 
a  picture  in  a  frame  more  clear,  or  like  a  sculptured  image  with 
a  dark  background,  though  the  features  of  the  face  in  the  seance 
I  attended  were  not  as  distinct  as  usual,  in  the  materializing 
seances  which  I  had  been  accustomed  to,  but  were  in  every 
instance  darker  than  natural  face,  yet  at  the  same  time  their 
voice  and  language  were  clearer  and  more  distinct,  as  I  can 
always  hear  them  when  they  speak  to  me  when  I  have  a  solitary 
seance,  or  one  in  which  I  sit  alone. 

The  control  who  gave  his  name,  and  claimed  to  once  have 
been  a  doctor,  kindly  greeted  and  welcomed  me.  Each  spirit 
presenting  seemed  to  be  happy  and  contented,  and  spoke  a  word 
or  two  with  me.  I  made  a  list  of  the  alleged  personalities  of 
each  and  all  who  spoke  to  me,  and  that  itself  was  most  interesting 
in  more  respects  than  one. 

The  first  and  second  forms  to  present  were  my  spirit  wife 
May  and  my  spirit  daughter  May  Donna,  who  both  seemed  to 


362 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


come  together,  and  greeted  me  as  usual,  and  in  appearance, 
manner,  voice,  with  which  I  was  so  familiar,  varied  but  little. 
That  little  was  the  darkness  or  shadow  over  the  features  and 
the  color  of  the  textures  which  were  worn,  and  these  remarks 
applied  to  all.  So  I  criticized  the  color,  and  said  I  preferred  the 
lighter,  when  my  loved  ones  returned  to  the  cabinet,  and  very 
shortly  after  came  back  again  with  both  features  and  apparel 
brighter.  Confirmation  then  I  have  once  more,  without  any  doubt, 
in  the  case  of  my  wife  and  daughter,  as  I  have  had  before  at 
different  materializing  seances,  with  different  mediums,  in  dif¬ 
ferent  places,  and  on  different  dates ;  and  in  a  manner,  and  with 
conditions  similar  regarding  seances,  with  trumpets  and  with 
automatic  writing.  My  two  loved  ones  came  from  the  cabinet 
and  returned  thereto  as  they  were  accustomed  to,  in  other  seances. 
The  spirit  form  number  three,  which  came  with  an  apparent 
rush  to  me,  from  the  region  of  the  ceiling,  was  in  life  the 
materializing  medium  Mrs.  Effie  Moss,  whom  I  first  met  at  the 
MacRoberts  home  in  London  in  the  year  1894.  She  thanked  me 
for  my  kindness  and  sympathy  at  London  when  they  needed  it 
many  years  ago ;  and  completed  a  promise  made  in  life,  which 
will  be  again  referred  to  below ;  and  then,  like  some  of  the  others, 
seemed  to  leave  me  with  a  whirl,  or  like  a  puff  of  steam  from 
an  engine,  or  from  the  pipe  of  a  smoker  on  a  frosty  morning, 
and  in  a  second  the  transient  body  which  stood  before  me  and 
conversed  like  a  woman,  had  gone  like  a  puff  of  smoke,  from 
her  position  off  to  my  right  and  through  the  wall.  No.  4  was 
a  girl  whose  name  I  could  not  catch,  but  she  told  me  that  she 
died  from  trouble  in  her  throat.  No.  5  was  an  old  man  whom 
I  failed  to  recognize.  After  he  had  likewise  vanished  at  a  tangent 
down  through  the  floor  I  heard  a  voice  mention  me  by  name  and 
no  one  standing  near  me.  I  began  to  peer  about,  and  as  I  looked 
up  where  the  ceiling  and  the  wall  met,  I  saw  a  head  and  face 
and  bust  quite  familiar  to  me,  smiling,  and  he  said:  “Stead  is 
here.”  I  had  no  conversation,  nor  heard  more  from  him,  and 
like  a  flash  of  pale  light  he  went  from  view  across  in  front  of 
me  right  through  the  northern  wall.  No.  7  was  a  female  form 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


363 


who  only  remained  long  enough  to  announce,  “I  came  with  Stead. 
I  am  Julia.”  No.  8  was  my  spirit  guide,  who  showed  herself 
to  let  me  know  that  she  was  also  there,  and  uttered  only  one 
word,  “Hypatia.”  No.  9  was  a  boy  who  gave  the  name  of  Will, 
but  I  was  unable  to  identify  him  at  the  time.  No.  10  was  Gertie, 
the  sister  of  May,  who  came  and  went  as  did  her  sister,  from 
and  to  the  cabinet.  No.  11  claimed  to  be  Ex-President  McKinley, 
and  No.  12,  he  said,  was  his  wife,  who  had  travelled  much  with 
him,  adding  that  for  years  she  was  an  invalid.  I  thanked  them 
both  for  their  call  on  me.  No.  13  was  a  female  that  I  failed  to 
recognize.  No.  14  was  the  ancient  giant  spirit  guide  Asia,  who 
filled  the  room  with  sonorous  vibrations  of  great  depth  and  power, 
and  sang  for  us  a  stanza  or  two  in  his  own  language,  as  he  after 
explained  in  English  to  us.  No.  15  and  16  were  my  own  father, 
Stephen,  and  mother,  Margaret  P.,  who  always  in  one  way  or 
another  are  quite  able  to  identify  themselves  to  me.  No.  17  was 
the  spirit  of  a  man  who  alleged  himself  to  be  Dr.  Burroughs, 
late  of  Detroit,  a  former  friend,  I  think  he  was,  of  a  present 
friend  of  mine,  or  possibly  a  fellow-student  of  mine  during  college 
days ;  but  whose  whereabouts  for  some  years  past  have  been 
unknown  to  me.  No.  18  came  and  with  sweet  voice  and  manner 
said,  “I  am  a  little  Indian  girl,  my  name  is  Silver  Star,”  and 
the  light  she  made  resembled  one,  but  only  for  a  moment,  and 
then  with  a  flicker  it  shot  upwards  and  away  through  the  ceiling. 

No  forms  appeared  again  for  a  short  space  of  time,  and  in 
their  absence,  the  lady  psychic  made  the  remark  that  “sometimes 
spirits  from  other  planets  call  here,  and  show  themselves  and 
talk,”  and  she  went  on  to  speak  of  their  size  and  peculiarities. 
She  also  mentioned  that  some  of  the  people  of  Bible  times  would 
return  here  and  converse,  and  named  a  few,  of  which  one  was 
King  Solomon,  when  I  remarked  that  it  was  a  matter  of  interest 
for  me  to  learn  that  fact,  as  one  of  the  several  she  had  mentioned, 
viz.:  King  Solomon  had  written  me,  or  at  least  I  had  received 
some  messages  signed  by  that  name  and  addressed  to  me  through 
a  writing  psychic,  and  I  wondered  if  it  could  be  really  and  truly 
a  fact,  that  King  Solomon  of  old  had  interest  here  now  or  no. 


364 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  cabinet  control,  responding  to  my  thought  and  wish  to  know, 
announced  that  King  Solomon  had  written  me  some  messages 
but  would  write  me  many  more,  as  he  was  helping  me  because 
I  was  to  be  his  medium,  though  King  Solomon  himself  did  not 
appear  to  my  vision  here.  When  I  subsequently  enquired  of 
Hypatia  she  told  me  that  he  did  not  speak  or  show  today,  but 
that  it  was  truly  so  that  King  Solomon  wrote  the  messages  signed 
by  him  and  sent  to  me. 

No.  20  Lily,  the  bright  and  intelligent  little  cabinet  control 
with  the  late  Mrs.  Moss,  materializing  medium,  who  has  been 
seen  and  heard  by  thousands,  during  the  many  years  of  Mrs. 
Moss’s  mediumship,  and  who  never  seemed  to  look  older,  nor  to 
get  any  larger,  at  least  that  was  my  experience  of  some  eighteen 
years,  announced  herself  unexpectedly,  in  her  doll-like  cheerful 
way,  by  laughter  of  the  giggling  kind.  Lily  promised  me  in  1894 
in  London,  Ontario,  that  in  case  of  the  death  of  Mrs.  Moss,  she, 
Lily,  would  connect  herself  with  my  band.  At  the  first  when 
Lily  came  I  did  not  see  her,  and  no  word  of  her  was  spoken, 
nor  any  reference  made  by  another,  but  when  she  giggled  and 
laughed,  I  spoke  and  said,  “That’s  Lily,  I’m  sure  that’s  Lily,” 
and  so  it  proved  to  be.  To  my  remark  Lily  replied  by  saying,  “I 
promised  you  long  ago  in  London,  Ontario,  that  when  Mrs.  Moss 
passed  to  spirit  life,  that  I  would  come  to  you,  and  today  Mrs. 
Moss  brought  me  here,  to  stay  with  your  band.”  And  I  then 
added  words  of  welcome. 

Thus  was  a  promise  made  many  years  ago  confirmed  today. 
Thus  also  more  evidence  has  been  created  confirmatory  in 
character  regarding  wife,  daughter,  wife’s  sister,  Hypatia,  my 
parents  and  Wm.  Stead.  After  the  psychic’s  control  had  closed 
the  seance  and  bid  me  good-bye ;  but  before  the  light  was  admitted 
Lily  came  back,  and  while  not  visible  seemingly  had  power,  and 
had  a  brief  conversation  with  the  psychic  and  me. 

At  some  future  time,  or  in  another  book,  I  may  explain  the 
kind  of  spirit  Lily  is,  and  so  of  the  cabinet  and  levitation  spirits 
generally,  which  differ  materially  as  a  class  from  the  others,  quite 
as  much,  in  fact,  as  different  men  in  the  human  race. 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


365 


A  Claiiiaudient  Message  Received  and  Written  in  My 
Presence  by  a  Physician. 

I  had  only  met  the  doctor  once  before,  and  that  was  in  Toledo ; 
and  after  our  acquaintance  was  formed,  he  had  given  me  a 
letter  of  introduction  to  a  private  lady  psychic  who  did  not  give 
public  seances.  The  seance  held  for  me  by  that  lady,  I  have 
described,  and  now  only  refer  to  it,  as  I  promised  the  doctor 
to  call,  and  let  him  know  my  experience  while  at  the  seance ; 
and  what  I  thought  of  her  and  it.  This  call  I  made  on  Thursday 
afternoon,  and  while  I  sat  chatting  with  him  regarding  the  new 
phase  of  materialization,  he  kept  telling  me  of  things  he  heard 
clairaudiently  and  then  he  ceased  speaking  and  began  to  write 
what  he  alleged  was  said  to  him  for  me;  and  he  grasped  his 
pencil  and  paper,  and  as  he  wrote  he  handed  it  to  me,  and  as 
I  have  it  now  before  me,  I  will  copy  a  part  of  it,  which  says ; 
December  26,  1912,  5  p.  m.  (No.  37).  From  Wm.  Stead.  “I  will 
tell  you.  Dr.  King,  you  are  mistaken,  James  did  not  lack  con¬ 
fidence,  he  was  too  weak.  Myers  also  was  too  weak.  I  will  try 
and  write  for  you  the  first  time  I  have  the  opportunity.  Good¬ 
bye. — W.  T.  Stead.” 

The  foregoing  refers  to  what  I  thought  or  said  regarding  the 
failure  of  James  and  Myers  to  write  their  signatures  upon  my 
office  pad. 

Last  Seance  with  J.  B.,  Jonson,  26th  December,  1912.  Seven¬ 
teen  Sitters  in  the  Circle.  The  Author  Has  Three 
Callers. 

J.  B.  Jonson  and  his  wife  have  both  been  away  for  a  season, 
and  therefore  held  no  seances,  but  they  came  home  again  on 
Sunday,  22nd  December,  and  of  course  held  a  seance  on  Monday 
night,  though  both  man  and  wife  were  sick,  and  the  report  of 
it  is  given  in  this  chapter,  and  shows  a  degree  of  success.  But  they 
both  felt  the  strong  draught  on  their  supply  of  energy,  and 
psychic  force,  and  felt  the  withdrawal  or  exhaustion  of  vitality. 
They  cancelled  their  invitations  and  would  make  no  appointments 


366 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


unless  there  should  be  improvement  in  both,  of  their  conditions, 
and  so  three  days  went  by,  Tuesday,  Wednesday  and  Thursday, 
and  the  evenings  of  both  Tuesday  and  Wednesday,  and  thus  they 
were  enabled  to  make  a  little  gain,  and  by  Thursday  afternoon 
arrangements  were  entered  into  for  another  seance  on  that 
evening,  which  perhaps  may  prove  to  be  his  last,  for  he  has 
changed  his  occupation  and  will  go  away  and  free  himself  for 
this  winter  at  least,  and  maybe  altogether,  of  holding  seances, 
which  are  without  a  doubt  a  very  heavy  drain  upon  his  physical 
and  nervous  vitality,  and  will  undoubtedly  shorten  his  life. 

I  was  privileged  to  be  present  at  the  seance  on  Thursday  night, 
26th  December,  1912,  which  may  prove  to  be  my  last  with  him. 
The  demonstrations  were  truly  wonderful  considering  conditions 
presenting.  The  sitters  numbered  seventeen,  old  and  young,  and 
everyone  had  one  or  more  callers,  for  there  were  some  tweny-five 
in  all ;  but  the  interviews  were  short  and  it  was  evident  that 
the  power  required  was  weakening.  I  may  note  in  passing,  that 
there  was  nothing  to  report  different  from  other  seances,  or  in 
addition  to  what  was  recorded  before,  and  will  conclude  with 
a  reference  or  two  to  my  own  experience. 

May  came  to  me  again  and  seemed  inclined  to  try  again  and 
better  walk.  Touching  my  left  arm  she  stepped  out  from  the 
cabinet  five  or  six  feet  so  all  could  see  her  well  and  seemed  to 
have  gained  strength,  and  was  now  able  to  both  walk  and  talk 
better  than  on  some  previous  occasions,  though  she  has  not  yet 
been  able  to  speak  as  loud  and  clear,  as  when  she  used  the 
trumpet. 

Cleopatra  the  beautiful  again  presented  herself  to  our  view, 
and  at  my  request  touched  my  .arm  and  walked  with  me  out  in 
the  circle,  where  the  sitters  were  able  to  approach  near  enough 
to  obtain  an  excellent  view. 

I  wish  here  to  conclude  my  reference  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jonson 
and  their  psychical  demonstrations,  by  acknowledging  my  fullest 
appreciation  of  their  uniformly  courteous  attitude  and  good  will 
extended  me  continuously,  during  eight  years,  as  well  as  to  my 
wife,  when  she  with  me  conducted  critical  investigations ;  and 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Z67 


where  since  passing  to  spirit  realms,  she  now  returns  to  meet 
me,  and  corroborate  from  both  points  of  wiew  the  facts  I  strive 
to  demonstrate,  and  prove  as  true.  I  hope  and  trust  that  Jonson 
and  his  wife  may  live  to  enjoy  many  years  of  human  life;  and 
that  each  year  may  be  well  filled  with  health,  happiness  and 
prosperity.  I  wish  also  to  thank  Gray  Feather,  the  strong  Indian, 
with  such  noble  character,  who  takes  the  control  of  Jonson  in 
the  seance,  for  uniformity  of  his  kindness  and  friendship,  not  only 
in  the  home  of  Jonson,  but  elsewhere,  and  for  his  repeated  acts 
of  bringing  messages  to  me ;  but  likewise  for  some  advantages 
which  he  has  shown  to  me,  by  his  control  of  other  mediums, 
one  especially,  where  he  could  speak  himself  through  trumpets 
to  me,  and  also  bring  loved  ones,  friends  and  others  to  talk 
with  me. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 


Again  I  had  a  valued  opportunity  while  resting  for  a 
day  or  two,  during  the  closing  week  of  December,  1912 ; 
^  for  in  accordance  with  an  understanding  between 
Hypatia,  the  psychic  and  myself,  on  my  first  arrival  as  a  guest 
at  the  home  of  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  it  was  agreed  that 
time  for  communication  should  be  divided  into  parts,  so  as  to 
afford  my  loved  ones,  guides,  and  the  group  of  friends,  scientists 
and  researchers,  all  a  fair  opportunity  to  communicate  with  me, 
and  I  with  them.  My  loved  ones  came  and  our  communings 
were  a  joy  to  all;  but  this  feature  was  mostly  personal,  and  not 
available  for  publication,  with  one  or  two  exceptions;  but  to  me 
as  well  as  to  them,  was  very  gratifying. 

So  too  with  my  guides,  who  encouraged  me,  and  gave  me 
information,  and  instruction ;  but  here  I  make  exception,  and 
share  with  the  reader,  the  pleasure,  knowledge  and  the  advantages 
I  gained,  from  communications  held  with  Hypatia;  and  a  part 
of  this  I  have  already  given  in  a  chapter  by  itself,  devoted  to 
some  questions  of  moment,  and  of  deep  interest,  which  I  com¬ 
mend  to  the  reader’s  thoughtful  consideration.  (See  Chapter 
XXHI.) 

I  now  desire  as  before,  on  a  previous  visit,  where  my  presence 
alone  with  the  psychic  seemed  to  improve  conditions,  to  ask  viva 
voce  questions,  and  have  my  spirit  friends  answer  me,  as  well  as 
to  commune  or  converse  through  the  automatic  hand  and  pen, 
I  now  speak  to  the  instrument,  and  wish  to  say,  that  as  this 
is  my  final  levee  here,  for  my  spirit  friends,  before  I  close  my 
book,  I  wish  especially  to  afford  early  opportunity  to  all,  and 
will  myself  be  ready  when  you  are  at  ease. 

The  Instrument.  —  I  am  now  free  to  be  continuously  at  your 
service,  for  the  remainder  of  your  time  here.  Your  loved  ones, 
and  also  Hypatia,  are  here,  as  well  as  others. 

J  S.  K.  —  Hypatia,  I  would  among  the  first  desire  to  hear 

368 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


369 


from  some  of  those  with  whom  I  held  converse  before.  I  expect 
to  hear  from  Professor  James  and  F.  W.  H.  Myers.  And  I  also 
expect  to  hear  from  Wm.  Stead,  regarding  some  matters  on  either 
side  of  the  Atlantic  which  are  in  the  minds  of  us  both. 

Hypatia.  —  The  three  you  name  are  now  here,  and  will  remain 
until  you  go  away.  And  there  are  others  also  from  whom  you 
will  be  pleased  to  hear, 

11  a.  m.,  28th  December,  1912.  (No.  38.)  From  Wm.  T.  Stead. 
—  My  dear  friend,  I  remember  it  all  in  spirit,  if  not  in  detail. 
I  will  be  here  and  listen.  It  is  plain  to  me  that  jealousy  is  to 

be  cause  for  silence . I  feel  assured  that  it  will  be  all 

straightened  out  eventually. 

J.  S.  K.  —  Friend  Stead,  your  spirit  picture  does  not  fully 
coincide  with  your  photo  taken  a  few  years  ago. 

Wm.  Stead.  —  It  is  my  picture  that  you  have,  and  as  I  told 
you  it  is  copy  of  no  other.  If  you  cannot  print  it  you  can  describe 
it,  and  tell  how  it  was  obtained.  Your  description  of  the  picture 
coming  into  view  is  remarkably  concise,  and  direct,  and  at  the 
same  time  readable,  or  presented  in  a  way  to  arouse  interest  of 

the  casual  reader . It  is  like  me  to  some  degree.  I  think 

my  desire  to  have  it  differ  from  all  other  pictures  of  me,  may 
have  caused  the  assistants  to  change  it  too  materially.  I  will 
remain  here  most  of  the  day,  and  while  you  sleep  I’ll  go  away. 

J.  S.  K.  —  You  will  remember  the  error  in  your  message, 
where  you  said,  “My  son  and  wife  are  with  me  here,”  and  that 
some  one  at  home  had  condemned  the  messages  as  not  genuine 
on  that  account,  and  then,  I  wrote  an  explanation  for  the  book, 
showing  how  errors  creep  in,  and  how  easily  I  accounted  for  it, 
by  using  the  word  “your”  before  wife,  as  that  had  occurred 
frequently,  for  both  she  and  you  had  told  me  so ;  and  now  I 
feel  I  want  to  know  if  what  I  added  is  to  your  mind  quite 
satisfactory  ? 

Wm.  Stead.  —  What  you  have  said  is  true,  attended  by  the 
wife  of  you,  I  always  am,  when  I  am  here,  for  when  the  hand 
is  writing  she  (your  wife)  is  near;  and  if  she  thought  it  proper 


370 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


space,  her  thought  with  mine  the  pen  would  trace,  as  mixed 
photography  could  be  without  design,  but  carelessly.  A  person 
speaking  loud  in  the  same  room  when  telephone  is  used,  might 
be  heard  at  a  distance  so.  This  is  a  mental  instrument  of  similar 
degree,  and  often  by  an  accident  a  message  mixed  may  be. 

,  J.  S.  K.  —  I  understand  that  a  certain  medium  known  to  you 
and  me,  was  first  to  hear  that  you  had  gone  to  spirit  sphere,  the 
fact  being  made  knoivn  to  her  through  her  guide;  and  that  I 
was  first  to  receive  word  direct  from  you,  through  the  hand 
of  this  present  instrument,  which  was  dated  on  the  16th  of  April; 
and  that  I  zvas  the  first  human  that  you  recognized,  and  that 
recognized  you  when  you  first  appeared  in  your  transient  body, 
at  J.  B.  Jonson’s,  April  18th,  10  p.  m. 

Wm.  Stead.  —  I  think  she,  refers  to  the  fact  that  I  told  you, 
that  this  hand  was  the  first  that  I  wrote  through  but  it  was  not 
a  case  of  favoritism  on  my  part  at  all.  Your  guide  Hypatia, 
capable  and  strong,  came  to  me  in  my  need  and  woe,  and  held 
me  to  my  harmony,  tilt  I  grezv  free  from  earth  conditions!  woe 
in  me.  What  she  says  is  true  to  this  extent,  that  she  was  the 
first  trumpet  instrument  used  by  me,  but  I  came  here  with 
Hypatia,  and  wrote,  assisted  by  her  and  Julia.  It  is  of  small 
moment  anyway.  I  was  too  zveak  to  use  a  trumpet  at  first,  and 
had  to  be  assisted  every  zvay  to  write  or  talk. 

Your  explanation  regarding  interjection  of  words  in  error,  is 
to  me  wonderfully  exact  description.  Like  to  that  which  I  just 
wrote,  a  person  speaking  in  a  room  when  telephone  is  being  used, 
might  have  his  or  her  voice  conveyed  to  distant  listener,  without 
design,  or  desire  to  interfere  with  what  was  being  done  by 
speaker  at  the  ’phone.  We  all  are  in  a  state  of  harmony,  and  no 
deceiving  evil  thinker  is  allowed  at  hand.  This  is  attended  to 
by  her  (the  instrument’s)  small  elemental  servants  known  to 
thee  as  “Mike”  and  “Lala  Lee.”  Outside  are  strangers,  inside 
are  friends  in  harmony,  as  your  guides,  her  guides  and  such  ones 
as  James  and  Myers,  and  others  who  work  for  good  of  all  human¬ 
ity  like  you  are  trying  now  to  do.  Serving  spirits  may  be  crude 
in  some  degree,  but  they  all  love  and  serve  in  harmony . 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


371 


The  description  of  my  picture  is  remarkable  and  assists  your 
scientific  endeavor  to  prove  the  fact  of  continuity  of  life. 

J.  S.  K.  —  You  know  the  attitude  assumed  by  a  certain  inex¬ 
perienced  one,  that  the  messages  over  your  name  were  not 
genuine. 

Wm.  Stead.  —  The  messages  were  written  by  my  dictation. 
This  is  true,  the  same  as  it  is  true  that  I  was  sitter  for  the  picture. 
I  would  like  to  have  them  published  as  far  as  I  myself  am  con¬ 
cerned,  but  if  you  know  of  any  serious  reason,  why  they  should 
not  be,  do  with  them  as  you  think  it  best.  I  do  not  see  what  harm 
’twould  be  if  it  should  be  proved  true,  that  I  communciate  through 
many  men.  Does  it  not  also  prove  I  come  again?  If  you  were 
spirit  free,  zvith  all  your  thinking  life  and  energy,  would  you 
not  go  to  every  open  door,  and  use  each  power  at  hand,  and  then 
feel  sad,  to  see  so  little  was  your  power  to  do?  It  is  that  case 
with  me.  I  think  and  argue  too.  Why  cannot  you  be  blessed 
with  psychic  power  to  touch  and  see  and  hear  the  loving  spirits 
near,  when  others  who  do  not  make  use  of  it  like  you  would 
do,  are  blessed  indeed.  I  also  tried  in  every  way  to  teach  man¬ 
kind,  but  often  found  them  most  perverse  and  blind. 

J.  S.  K. — ^Friend  Stead,  if  you  know  its  wording  do  you 
approve  of  my  Pronunciamento  on  the  first  page  of  my  book? 

Wm.  Stead.  —  I  do  indeed,  ’tis  stated  like  a  creed,  and  semi¬ 
prayer,  or  dedicatory  benediction. 

J.  S.  K.  —  I  would  like  to  have  your  opinion  as  to  whether 
law  or  public  sentiment  would  be  opposed  to  the  publication  of 
the  contents  of  the  messages  from  members  of  the  Royal  Family, 
which  is  in  no  way  disrespectful? 

Wm.  Stead.  —  It  would  not  seem  to  me  to  be  in  any  way  a 
harm  to  Royalty.  It  is  well  known  that  our  good  Queen  was 
student  of  this  thought,  and  thinkers  of  this  age  have  liberal 
grown,  so  they  allow  a  man  to  think  quite  free,  and  all  the  state¬ 
ments  you  have  made  have  come  to  you  through  medium’s  aid, 
and  what  you  think  is  what  you  say.  I  think  it  is  a  book  of 
experience  and  belief;  and  will  so  impress  any  reader.  You  do 
not  use  the  names  of  Royalty  in  any  but  respectful  way;  and 


372 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  believe  no  word  they’ll  say,  I  do,  and  I  believe  it  would  apply 
for  even  a  law'  court  could  not  question  that  you  so  received  it, 
and  that  to  you  it  seemed  acceptable  and  true.  To  me  it  seems 
a  readable  interesting  description  of  mind  in  normal  and  sub¬ 
normal  consciousness,  and  I  fail  to  see  wherein  it  is  not  right 
or  free  from  stain.  I’ll  write  to  you  today  again.  I’ll  step  aside 
and  let  Hypatia  be  writer  instead  of  me. 

2.30  p.  m.,  28th  December,  1912.  From  Hypatia.  —  I  wish 
to  say  that  I  have  been  with  you  the  whole  week  through,  and 
I  with  you  believe  ’twill  be  beyond  question  of  law  or  creed, 
and  you  will  feel  quite  glad  in  end ;  and  realize  your  woe  was 
friend ;  for  it  has  armed  you  for  a  fight  that  is  ahead,  you  fear, 
but  as  I  see,  no  fight  will  be.  The  danger  has  passed.  Near 
to  you  is  good  indeed,  and  you  will  be  made  proud  and  strong, 
and  what  you  pray  will  come  to  you  this  very  day. 

J.  S.  K.  —  Thank  you,  Hypatia,  for  what  you  say. 

2.45  p.  m.,  28th  December,  1912.  From  Wiluam  James. — We 
are  listeners,  interested  ones  indeed.  I  am  William  James  who 
write.  It  was  to  me  a  grief  and  woe  that  I  could  not  use  your 
pen  so  to  write  upon  your  pad ;  and  here  I  wish  to  say,  that  I 
will  yet  do  that  act  for  you. 

J.  S.  K.  —  I  never  met  you  in  human  life,  and  when  you 
materialized  for  me,  I  felt  somewhat  disappointed,  as  I  expected 
to  see  an  old  man,  with  gray  hair,  and  instead,  it  appeared  to 
me  as  shade  of  red. 

William  James.  —  After  we  are  in  spirit  for  a  time,  we  go 
back  to  our  youth  or  prime,  and  so  I  do  appear  since  I  am  living 
here,  like  to  a  man  of  forty-five  or  fifty  at  the  most.  It  was 
myself  at  best,  and  you  will  find  it  true  that  it  was  I  who  so 
appeared  to  you.  My  idea  was  that  the  picture  of  me  as  gray 
were  common  to  humanity,  and  might  be  in  your  memory,  there¬ 
fore  I  showed  myself  to  you  as  myself  whom  you  never  knew. 
My  hair  was  reddish  blonde,  and  later  it  was  mixed  with  gray 
and  nearly  white  when  I  was  free  from  my  own  frail  anatomy. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


373 


From  F.  W.  H.  Myers.  —  I  gave  to  Professor  James  first 
opportunity,  as  it  was  understood  by  you ;  and  when  he  failed, 
I  thought  now  I  will  wait  till  I  have  strength  to  try  and  surely 
do;  and  this  I  did  in  sight  of  you.  It  seems  divulged  to  be  to 
you,  the  fact  of  my  appearance  true.  We  have  been  talking 
here  today ;  and  wondering  why  we  cannot  with  this  hand  give 
our  personality.  The  laws  of  God’s  domain  are  strange  beyond 
compare,  and  it  was  myself  who  was  there  to  view  of  you.  I 
took  the  pen  in  hand  and  thought  that  I  might  it  command,  but 
after  second  effort,  the  power  of  support  was  gone  from  me,  and 
I  was  spirit  only  without  power  to  rule  the  pen.  I  now  intend 
to  try  again  at  future  day,  and  hope  to  be  successful  in  the  view 
of  you,  upon  your  office  pad  to  sign  my  name,  as  I  did  when 
on  earth.  My  appearance  to  you  was  not  so  very  plain,  but  what 
I  tried  to  do  was  write  to  you. 

J.  S.  K.  —  Friend  Myers,  can  you  not  write  for  me,  something 
of  such  a  character  as  will  prove  your  own  personality? 

Myers.  —  I  will  answer  the  question  when  I  may,  perhaps 
some  other  time  today. 

From  Queen  Victoria.  —  My  beloved  subject,  I,  Victoria, 
have  listened  to  your  thought  and  prayer,  and  woe,  and  I  for 
one  cannot  see  why  it  should  not  be  produced  in  print,  what  I 
have  written  so,  through  psychic  hand.  It  is  the  truth  and  many 
living  men  knew  I  believed  that  spirits  come  again,  and  if  I  have 
not  won  the  prize  by  speaking  words  I  promised  you,  it  is  not 
fault  of  me.  I  surely  thought  I  did  it  so,  that  it  made  living 
mortals  know.  There  is  a  mental  tension  there  (at  Julia’s  Bureau), 
that  jars  capacity  to  do;  but  it  is  to  me  quite  enigmatical,  the 
same  as  it  has  been  to  you.  It  is  like  a  repellant  force,  and  jars 
us  from  our  plan  and  course. 

My  son  Edward,  and  my  consort  Albert,  both  believe  that  it 
will  not  be  cause  of  harm  or  injirry  to  you,  but  we  may  err,  so 
talk  with  man  of  law,  if  you  believe  it  wise.  In  other  books  we 
have  been  mentioned  so,  at  least  myself  and  Albert  good  and 
true,  and  loved  by  me  the  same  as  wife  to  you.  Alice  also  to 
me  very  dear,  and  I  found  comfort  in  a;  way,  because  of  words 


374 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


that  I  believed  came  from  the  dear  ones  through  the  different 
psychic  instruments  that  I  had  opportunity  to  use  and  see. 

Yes,  I  would  have  signed  on  the  pad  for  you,  if  there  had  been 
sufficient  power.  I’d  have  given  my  home  signature  familiar 
to  the  family,  and  others  too ;  and  I  still  hope  this  thing  to  do. 
Hypatia  is  wide  awake  and  tries  in  every  way  to  fulfill  prayers 
of  you. 

The  medium  new  (private  lady  psychic  in  Toledo)  and  doctor 
psychic  too,  gave  to  you  hope  of  future  promise  in  case  of  Jon- 
son’s  silence  or  death. 

J.  S.  K.  —  At  this  point  the  psychic’s  hand  ceased  to  write  for 
Her  Majesty,  but  did  so  for  another,  and  hence  I  enquired  by 
speaking,  is  Queen  Victoria  still  here?  If  so  I  wish  to  say  I  am 
grateful  for  her  encouragement. 

From  Victoria.  —  Yes,  I  Victoria  remain,  but  wishing  a  slight 
rest,  I  let  a  stranger  to  me  speak,  till  I  should  be  in  readiness 
to  write.  You  will  sleep  well  tonight.  It  is  a  wise  thing  for 
you  to  fast,  for  you  have  not  a  need  of  food.  I  was  of  your 
temperament  in  some  degree ;  and  I  will  stay  near  you,  and  be 
able  to  write  at  future  date  upon  a  pad  you  hold  in  your  own 
hand.  I  will,  if  possible  to  me,  fulfill  what  I  have  promised  you 
that  I  would  do. 

Etherializations  will  appear  to  your  mortal  view,  life-like  but 
transparent.  I  say  it  because  I  remain,  but  it  is  given  to  me  by 
another.  I  will  go  now  and  let  your  spirit  brother  David  write 
to  you,  my  subject  true.  Goodnight. 

11.22  a.  m.,  29th  December,  1912.  From  Hypatia.  —  I  am  pre¬ 
pared  to  write  for  you  in  any  way  you  ask  me  to.  It  is  as  easy 
for  me  to  write  in  one  order  as  another. 

I  have  with  me  at  present  time  your  wife  and  spirit  brother, 
and  Jesse  too,  nephew  of  you,  your  daughter  also  is  with  May, 
and  will  write  later  in  the  day. 

From  Wm.  T.  Stead.  (No.  39.)  la  listener  am,  to  what 
you  say  to  me  today.  I  am  also  studying  the  features  of  this 
cut  before  me.  I  believe  that  I,  a  spirit  bereft  of  earthly  clay,  do 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


375 


really  look  more  like  to  the  picture  received  by  you  at  Bangs 
sisters. 

When  I  appear  to  you  in  seances,  do  I  not  in  some  degree 
appear  as  in  the  picture  here? 

J.  S.  K.  —  The  picture  which  came  into  view  at  Chicago  on 
April  27th,  was  certainly  a  true  picture  of  your  form,  and  clothed 
appearance,  as  you  came  from  the  cabinet  in  a  transient  body 
to  me  in  the  Jonson  seance  on  the  18th  of  April,  the  difference 
in  time  being  only  nine  days. 

Wm.  T.  Stead.  —  /  told  you  true  it  was  not  a  fake,  or 
fraudulent.  It  is  my  opinion,  and  this  opinion  is  founded  on 
experience,  and  observation,  that  the  spirit,  or  soul,  if  you  prefer 
that  word  to  designate  that  ivhich  departs  from  man,  zuhen  life 
goes  out,  is  personally  engraved  and  impressed,  and  truly  is  the 
man,  and  I  myself  believe  I  look  like  this  the  picture  here.  If  you 
were  kicked  or  battered  in  the  face  —  to  human  view  the  scar 
would  show;  but  when  you  were  a  spirit  free,  the  normal  face 
would  show  to  thee,  or  to  the  ones  like  you  in  spirit  free.  Old 
age  and  circumstances  of  my  life,  would  change  my  face  and  hair 
in  some  degree,  but  when  at  ease  my  spirit  free  comes  forth 
to  view,  it  would  appear  more  like  this  cut  to  you.  In  the  private 
lady  psychic’s  seance  (on  December  24th)  I  made  a  special  effort 
to  appear  as  I  was  known  or  remembered.  At  Bangs  sisters  I 
had  it  in  view,  that  I  should  give  a  picture  true  of  me,  as  glorified 
by  being  spirit  free,  and  thus  remove  all  thought  of  trickery  of 
these  the  sisters  gifted  with  this  power.  Why  is  it  that  it  cannot 
be  published  as  what  you  received  at  Bangs  sisters,  I  myself 
cannot  see?  It  was  so  received  by  you,  and  if  it  looks  like  me 
even  in  slight  degree,  it  does  as  well  as  much  of  human  effort 
in  that  line.  Take  this  one’s  photo,  is  it  like  to  her  (the  psychic) 
and  if  it  may  go  forth  as  artist’s  work,  I  see  no  reason  why  the 
same  privilege  cannot  be  granted  to  me.  If  relative  of  mine 
(a  cousin)  unbiased  by  affection’s  jealousy,  can  see  in  this  my 
looks,  improved  may  be,  why  should  it  not  go  forth  to  show 
the  general  public  what  to  you  is  interesting,  as  a  view  of  spirit 
face  as  shown  to  you. 


376 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


J.  S.  K.  —  I  think  I’ll  act  on  the  suggestion  of  Hypatia,  in 
regard  to  publishing  two  pictures  of  myself.  The  one,  side  view 
at  age  of  65,  will  appear  at  the  end  of  Chapter  XXX,  devoted 
to  yourself,  while  the  one,  full  face  view,  at  age  70,  will  face 
my  declaration  at  the  first  of  the  book,  and  though  they  both 
are  pictures  of  myself,  which  many  might  discredit,  because 
there  are  so  many  points  of  difference,  and  still  they  both  were 
photographic  pictures  of  me.  Though  the  earlier  one  is  65  it 
looks  older  than  the  one  at  70,  and  so  in  your  case,  with  a  greater 
range  for  difference  between  the  human  and  the  spirit  pictures; 
and  hence  whate’er  the  doubt  of  others,  we  both  know  that  your 
picture  and  my  picture  are  each  genuine. 

Wm.  Stead.  —  I  like  the  idea  also.  The  first  one  is  presented 
(in  side  view)  in  a  view  that  cuts  off  natural  look  of  you.  If 
you  so  do,  and  say  the  question  arises,  are  we  as  spirits  free, 
changed  in  our  looks  in  some  degree.  And  was  it  not  the  truth 
that  Stead  so  wrote  to  me  by  written  words  at  a  distance,  saying 
the  picture  thus  presented  was  a  view  of  him  at  then,  and  alto¬ 
gether  new.  It  is  my  intention  to  sign  my  name  on  your  pad 
too,  when  it  is  held  in  hand  of  you. 

J.  S.  K.  —  Hypatia,  do  you  approve  of  my  having  the  picture 
of  Stead  published? 

Hypatia.  —  I  favor  it  because  my  opinion  is  in  the  line  that 

you  present . I  also  favor  it  because  if  I  had  not  favored 

it,  I  would  not  have  allowed  you  to  have  the  cut  made. 

J.  S.  K.  —  You  intimated  the  last  time  I  was  here,  that  I  would 
have  another  sitting  with  Jonson,  but  that  it  would  not  be  as 
successful  as  some  in  the  past,  and  this  I  since  found  to  be  true. 
Still  I  feel  satisfied  to  have  the  evidence  from  James  and 
Myers,  even  though  it  was  incomplete,  it  was  partially  successful, 
for  they  materialized,  and  made  the  attempt  to  write;  and  I  am 
encouraged  to  anticipate  greater  success  at  some  future  day, 
with  favorable  opportunity,  and  thank  them  both,  for  the  effort 
at  fulfillment  of  a  previous  promise,  made  to  me  at  another  time 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


377 


and  place,  namely  through  this  psychic  here,  other  than  the  one 
through  whom  they  materialized  to  me. 

From  F.  W.  H.  Myers.  —  I  felt  the  need  of  effort  strong, 
for  I  was  told  ‘twas  my  last  opportunity  to  get  my  signature, 
in  public  view  presented  in  the  first  book  of  you.  His  (Jonson’s) 
vital  force  is  low.  His  winter  work  is  ended  quite,  and  I  am 
glad  that  you  appreciate  my  effort  strong  to  write.  I  presented 
myself  as  more  youthful  than  pictures  taken  at  the  last,  but  how 
I  looked  as  shown  to  you  is  in  your  memory  fast. 

From  Prof.  William  James.  —  I,  William  James,  listen  with 
earnestness  to  what  you  say,  the  why  this  one  cannot  tell  you 
how  Myers  looks  is  because  her  (the  psychic’s)  guides  do  not 
allow  him  to  tell  it.  She  don’t  see  him  and  if  she  could,  she 
could  describe  him.  It  is  true  as  you  say,  but  in  a  way  the  little 
guides  depend  upon  her  conscious  knowledge  in  the  matter.  They 
hold  a  private  censorship  over  it.  In  the  message  in  which 
“Martha,”  your  first  wife,  was  mentioned,  the  instrument  had 
never  heard  that  name  associated  with  you,  and  she  did  not 
know,  if  it  was  right  or  not.  It  slipped  in,  and  as  she  sent  the 
message  to  you  as  her  hand  wrote  it,  you  received  it,  thus,  but 
if  she’d  copied  it,  she  might  have  left  it  out,  for  fear  of  error. 
Her  little  guides  do  not  judge,  except  by  her  judgment  or  past 
experience.  It  is  a  peculiar  thing  that  you  are  working  out,  dear 
Brother  King,  and  if  I  can  in  any  way  at  any  future  time  complete 
or  compete  in  effort  to  write  my  name,  I  will  do  so. 

In  regard  to  the  description  of  Myers  it  is  like  this  hand  not 
being  permitted  to  write  in  imitation  of  my  own. 

We  have  been  about  here,  since  you  came.  In  fact  we  attended 
you  here,  and  at  the  other  seances  (in  Toledo)  and  I  have 
contended  with  the  ancient  guides  at  her  side,  or  managers  of 
her  capacity  to  do,  and  I  have  argued,  if  it  is  her  wish,  and  your 
wish,  and  Hypatia’s  wish,  why  can  I  not  be  permitted  to  use 
these  pliable  muscles  in  giving  my  signature  to  you.  It  produces 
no  effect  beyond  their  permission  to  let  her  know  that  I  so  wish 
to  do. 

From  Dr.  Sharp  (Guide  of  Etta  Wriedt).  —  Your  book  is 


378 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


shown  to  me  in  symbol  of  a  book  upon  a  cloud,  and  by  its  aid 
you’ll  lift  the  shroud  of  death  in  large  degree  from  readers,  or 
humanity.  It  is  my  opinion  that  your  book  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened 
Mind”  will  be  a  standard  of  its  kind. 

My  medium  is  not  exhausted,  and  she  enjoys  the  work,  and 
she  will  feel  proud  of  the  words  you  say  regarding  work  of  her. 
Yes,  it  will  please  her.  She  don’t  want  pictures  of  her  in  print. 
I,  Dr.  Sharpe,  want  you  to  decide  yourself  what  to  do  regarding 
the  picture  painted  by  the  spirit  hand.  It  is  my  opinion  its  better 
left  out,  but  my  opinion  does  not  coincide  with  what  Hypatia 
and  your  band  believe  is  best.  I,  too,  admire  how  you’re  dressed. 
It  climaxes  your  dignity  in  very  marked  degree. 

As  the  words  were  spoken  out,  as  they  were  written,  they 
provoked  a  humorous  remark  or  two,  from  those  sitting  in  the 
room,  and  provoked  as  well  a  quiet  titter  of  laughter  among 
them,  when  Dr.  Sharpe  quickly  responded  as  here  follows : 

“Oh,  I  don’t  question  your  dignity,  or  respected  position.  I 
was  simply  remarking  on  your  choice  of  plumage.  I  believe  the 
selection  of  chapters  or  pictures  in  your  book  is  truly  a  matter 
of  choice,  like  your  selection  of  apparel,  really  none  of  my  affair. 
The  season’s  greeting  to  you.  Doctor  dear;  I  am  delighted  too, 
to  see  you  here,  in  happiness  and  rest.  It  is  for  you  the  very 
best  you  can  do.  As  to  the  spelling  of  my  name,  /  think  it  should 
be  signed  with  an  “e”  added  after  the  “p”,  it  is  as  I  have  used 
it  so. 

I’ll  give  your  respects  to  Etta,  Doctor  King.  It  is  to  me, 
speaking  seriously,  a  joy  to  have  met  and  respected  you,  so  many 
years  of  this  your  mortal  life.  Your  statements  regarding  her 
work  will  please  and  delight  my  medium,  Etta  Wriedt.  She 
likes  and  respects  you,  and  I  also  do.  Your  Professional  brother. 
Dr.  Sharpe.  [The  way  he  wrote  his  own  name  in  human  life, 
others  omit  the  e  now.] 

From  Julia  Ames. — Gains  are  like  golden  grains  of  sand, 
and  what  your  book  is  here,  is  like  a  mountain  made  of  precious 
stone.  Each  statement  has  a  beauty  of  its  own,  but*  all  together 
it  is  good  and  strong.  I  wish  to  help  this  work  along,  and  help 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Z79 


my  medium  William  Stead  to  be  able  at  later  date  to  prove  that 
this  is  true  what  he  has  written  through  this  hand  for  you. 
I  also  like  the  picture  too. 

From  Clegg  Wright.  —  To  Dr.  King  I  wish  to  say  that  when 
my  spirit  went  to  stay,  I  was  for  a  time  clairaudient  like  in  power 
to  sense  the  earth  and  spirit  sphere.  I  was  transferred  to  the 
other  end  of  the  tube  of  my  consciousness.  I  myself  was  complete 
where  my  consciousness  was  accustomed  to  be  taken  when  I  was 
entranced.  After  I  was  there  by  a  similar  process  my  conscious¬ 
ness  was  allowed  to  return  to  the  vicinity  of  my  dead  body.  I 
could  sense  it  at  a  distant  point,  and  yet  be  conscious  of  my 
spiritual  surroundings.  I  saw  William  Stead,  and  Julia  Ames, 
who  by  the  way  are  here  now  —  and  many  of  the  noted,  advanced 
thinkers,  that  I  have  met  from  time  to  time.  Of  course  my  wife, 
of  whom  I  was  deprived  for  year  or  so,  was  at  my  side,  and  with 
me  during  my  transition  from  ill  body,  into  consciousness  of  this 
the  glory  of  eternal  life.  The  mind  set  free,  I  was  an  analytical 
thinker,  and  I  often  wondered  too,  the  same  as  you,  and  so  I 
make  a  picture  of  the  way  that  I  was  taken  from  this  life  to  stay. 
It  was  like  going  into  a  trance  state,  except  that  state  in  my 
case  was  an  unconscious  one,  except  my  own  consent  to  have 
it  done.  But  in  transition,  I  was  broad  awake,  and  knew  my 
friends,  and  felt  the  break,  that  set  me  free.  Oh,  life  is  not  the 
wonder  or  the  good,  that  men  believe  it  is.  To  me  before  I  died, 
I  felt  that  I  so  wished  to  live,  and  gain  my  health,  so  that  I  might 
work  do,  but  after  I  was  free  I  felt  and  realized  and  knew,  the 
wonders  of  the  spirit  view,  and  wondered  how  I  could  have  felt 
content  to  live  and  suffer  as  I  had  to  do,  in  body  frail,  and  thin 
and  pale. 

My  guides  Rushton,  John  Shaw  and  others  are  with  me  here, 
and  help  me  all  they  can.  I  am  told  this  the  work  you  do,  will 
benefit  your  fellow  man.  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind”  is  a  fit 
name  and  strong,  and  you  will  feel  the  benefits  of  years  of 
study,  now  before  so  verjf  long.  Your  contention  is  proved  in 
many  a  way.  Spirits  do  come  to  earth  to  stay,  and  to  assist  men 
on  their  way.  I,  Clegg  Wright,  am  here,  and  I  am  just  as  real, 


380 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  just  as  much  in  life  as  when  I  was  a  visitor  at  Lily  Dale 
before.  I  see  you  too,  I  also  see  why  I  was  shifted.  I  am 
nearer  and  beyond  the  rhyming  necessity.  Eberling,  the  instru¬ 
ment’s  guide,  in  accordance  with  the  expressed  wish  of  my  guides, 
permitted  me  to  be  shifted  beyond  the  rhyming  zone. 

It  is  a  great  privilege  indeed  to  be  a  teacher  of  teachers,  and 
I  am  told  that  you  will  cause  much  discussion,  but  it  will  be  of 
a  friendly,  or  argumentative  type.  What  a  frail  thing  a  man  is 
anyway.  It  is  my  condition  that  the  medium  gets,  but  is  it  not 
a  comfort  to  be  able  to  write  like  myself,  and  not  rhyme?  I  am 
glad  she  is  protected  so  she  don’t  feel  the  condition  I  went 
through.  I  suffered  more  than  people  knew.  Yes,  I  want  to 
be  of  those  who  try  to  give  characteristic  signatures  to  you. 

I  see  Myers  here.  If  I  get  into  the  knack  of  entering  this 
central  zone,  I’ll  give  description  of  him  to  you,  some  time  when 
censorship  is  off  its  guard. 

J.  S.  K.  —  This  description  by  Clegg  Wright  has  proved 
wonderfully  interesting,  and  brings  to  my  view  something  new 
in  the  operation  of  this  wonderful  instrument. 

From  John  Shaw,  Guide  of  Clegg  Wright.  —  Yes,  it  is  a 
most  peculiar  mediumship.  Dr.  King.  I,  John  Shaw,  his  guide 
and  speaker,  am  a  student  from  this  view,  and  state  this  fact  to 
you.  Rhyming  again  you  say,  well  that  is  true,  I  will  now  take 
Gegg  Wright  away,  and  he  will  come  another  day. 

J.  S.  K.  —  Hypatia,  I  have  heard  from  each  of  those  whom 
I  expected,  and  therefore  am  free  to  give  attention  and  reception 
to  others,  who  have  or  have  not  shown,  spoken  or  written  to 
me;  and  before  I  could  give  verbal  expression  to  this  idea,  I 
am  greeted  by  Clegg  Wright,  whom  I  did  not  expect,  but  whom 
I  always  considered  genuine  as  a  psychic,  though  not  investigated 
or  studied  as  others  were.  His  presence  here,  and  his  description 
of  his  former  trance  condition,  and  his  experience  in  departing 
from  his  mortal  tenement,  and  passing  through  different  phases 
of  soul  condition,  with  his  psychic  experience,  and  his  wonder¬ 
fully  clear-cut  differentiation  of  the  conditions  existing  in  and 
actions  of  the  subjective  self,  during  the  unconsciousness  of  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


381 


trance  state,  and  the  consciousness  of  the  passing  hence,  once  the 
cord  of  connection  broke,  and  the  spirit  gained  the  greater  free¬ 
dom,  without  regrets  regarding  his  separation  from  his  poor 
worn-out  body  or  home  of  clay,  were  each  and  all  exceedingly 
interesting  and  instructive,  and  were  given  in  his  natural  way, 
through  the  psychic,  without  the  usual  rhyming,  which  of  itself 
is  most  exceptional.  To  his  guides  as  well  as  to  himself  I  am 
very  thankful  for  this,  to  me,  new  knowledge  gained,  and  for 
all  that  he  has  been  pleased  to  communicate  today. 

The  order  of  communications  having  been  completed,  if  there 
be  any  who  have  a  further  word  to  say,  well  and  good,  I  await 
your  pleasure,  and  will  greet  you  with  heartfelt  welcome. 

I  cannot  print  all  the  communications,  it  would  make  the 
book  too  large,  but  I  select  those  which  to  me  appear  more 
evidential ;  and  it  should  be  remembered  that  I  have  intimated 
previously,  that  this  book  will  soon  be  followed  by  another  of 
equal  or  even  greater  interest  than  this  one. 

From  May.  —  I’ve  waited  long  for  you  to  get  time  to  write, 
or  have  her  write  for  me  to  you.  It  is  a  little  careless  what 
you  do  with  that  scarf  pin  (and  unusual  also,  for  I  am  careful  of 
it).  If  you  would  pin  it  on  the  tie,  and  lay  the  tie  in  your  valise, 
in  haste  of  need,  there  would  not  be  a  danger  of  its  loss  maybe. 
It  would  be  to  you  a  great  woe,  to  lose  that  pin.  You  see  and 
know  I’m  looking  after  you.  It  may  be  that  her  hand  (the 
psychic’s)  will  be  allowed  to  write  in  signatures  at  later  date. 
Editor  Brown  is  here,  he  calls  you  “Son,”  also. 

From  George  Brown.  (This  honored  man,  with  whom  I  was 
employed  as  long  ago  as  1870,  was  kind  to  me  and  fatherly,  and 
called  me  “Son.” — J.  S.  K.)  — A  “babe”  of  you  (the  wife’s  pet 
name)  is  here  with  me,  and  she  is  comely  too.  I’ll  stay  beside 
her  here,  for  she  ag  wife  of  you,  my  relative  may  be.  Editor  I 
was,  of  the  “Globe,”  and  what  I  had  in  view  was  to  present 
a  symbol  of  it  in  some  way  to  you,  but  your  guides,  and  exalted 
spirits,  from  on  high,  tell  me  to  wait,  and  soon  or  late,  I’ll  be 
able  to  give  this  “test”  to  you. 


382 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


From  May.  —  Did  you  change  the  grammar,  dear,  at  where  I 
first  spoke  to  you?  Yes,  do  it  so.  Don’t  let  it  go. 

From  Des  Asia  (The  Ancient  Guide).  —  I,  Asia,  giant  strong, 
walk  in  a  pace  ahead  of  you.  A  beautiful  name,  a  worthy  cause, 
a  lifetime  of  experience  and  research.  Do  not  fear,  I,  Asia,  see 
a  glorious  success  to  thee. 

From  Dr.  Sharp.  —  I  see  Stead’s  point  of  view  regarding 
publication  of  his  picture.  He  thinks  let  the  public  judge,  if  that 
might  be  a  wise  course.  It  will  arouse  discussion  to  be  sure, 
but  no  one  can  deny  that  you  so  received  it  for  a  price. 

From  May.  —  I  would  not  have  you  careless  be  of  any  small 
details  of  the  protection  of  this  book,  a  work  of  years  that  you 
have  struggled  for  in  hope  and  tears.  I  rhyme  because  it  is 
easier  to  so  do.  If  I  let  it  rhyme  it  sort  of  runs  itself  like  to 
a  pianola  or  piano-player;  but  in  the  case  of  Mr.  Wright,  John 
Shaw  and  Rushton  served  instead  of  rhyming  guides. 

The  whole  of  it  is  good ;  and  when  ’tis  understood  how  you 
obtained  Stead’s  picture,  and  what  view  you  take  of  it,  ’tis  wise 
to  do  as  you  have  thought  of  late  you  would.  What  harm  can 
it  be  if  the  picture  of  Stead  is  reproduced  in  your  book..  It  was 
his  wish,  it  is  your  property,  let  it  arouse  discussion  as  it  will. 
It  will  but  sell  more  copies  so.  It  will  arouse  attention  in  the 
two  lands  of  France,  and  Germany;  and  Italy  and  Spain  in  less 
degree.  They  all  have  spirits  that  will  be  set  free  in  time.  May 
I  am  and  guides  assist  me  some  in  this  my  last  dictation  to  the 
hand,  for  this  time.  Mr.  Stead  is  trying  hard  to  gain  the  power 
to  write  his  name  in  signature  for  you.  Mother  King  is  a  great 
comfort  to  me  here.  Gertie,  May  Donna,  John  and  father,  and 
several  relatives  and  friends  besides  are  often  together  near  to 
you.  Mabel  Kelly  was  here  with  me  today,  and  Martha  King 
was  too.  Widower  you  are  not  this  time,  but  with  me  more 
and  more  till  angels  lift  you  from  this  life  up  to  my  heaven 
shore.  A  road  well  trod  it  is  to  be  and  so  you’ll  travel  easily. 
Don’t  weep,  my  dear,  for  it  is  best.  To  be  deprived  of  me  is 
hard  indeed,  but  what  is  done  can  never  be  undone.  No  vascilat- 
ing  in  a  death  decree.  No  power  can  give  me  back  to  you  in 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


383 


home  life,  as  I  used  to  do  ;  but  I  am  growing  beautiful,  and  in 
a  way  content,  and  I  would  like  to  have  you  rest  and  realize, 
that  I  with  arms  entwined  about  your  neck,  will  follow  every¬ 
where  no  matter  what  you  do,  or  who  are  there.  As  to  Mrs. 

C - ’s  photographic  work,  be  it  good  or  bad  there  will  be  other 

opportunity,  where  I  will  stand  beside  you  in  a  photo  picture 
as  I  have  promised  you  that  I  would  do.  And  like  medium  new, 
will  photograph  me  for  you.  I  was  there  too.  (Where  I  was 
taking  part  in  a  discussion.  J.  S.  K.)  I  like  to  see  you  give  it 
to  them  too.  I  like  to  have  justice  done.  Don’t  omit!  to  change. 
It’s  me  to  It’s  I,  a  slip  made  in  grammar,  when  I  first  spoke  to 
you  through  the  trumpet  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s.  (See  Chapter  XIII.) 

J.  S.  K.  —  I  will  attend  to  that.  I  also  think  that  as  a  test, 
that  is  most  remarkable,  for  that  occurred  in  November,  1911, 
and  the  chapter  is  a  record  of  that  date,  while  this  is  the  29th 
December,  1912. 

From  King  Solomon  of  Israel.  — ■  Rake  the  hay  into  piles 
and  stock  it  to  your  purpose.  I,  King  Solomon,  greet  you, 
brother  of  the  Lodge  of  God.  Let  me  proceed  to  say,  that  I 
am  with  you  in  this  work,  and  hope  to  be  able  to  prove  a  master 
of  most  high  degree.  “Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind’’  is  to  be 
a  success,  in  spite  of  what  may  have  been  said,  or  what  the  future 
ones  may  say.  A  bright  star  in  your  crown,  is  to  be  its  renown. 
Why  the  picture  came  will  later  be  to  you  apparent.  When  one 
has  enough  to  prove  a  point  he  should  be  satisfied,  and  I  believe 
you  have  enough  and  to  spare.  You  are  deprived  of  her  you 
love,  but  you  have  years  and  health ;  and  fame  will  come  from 
book  to  you,  and  guidance  will  be  given  you  from  time  to  time 
through  psychics  new,  and  this  one  too.  In  regard  to  the  rhyme, 
it  may  be  a  little  tiresome  at  times,  but  it  is  at  least  quaint  and 
peculiar,  and  I  think  it  would  be  difficult  to  fake  it.  It  shows 
a  subnormal  power,  and  what  that  power  is,  is  what  you,  as  well 
as  the  reader,  are  endeavoring  to  find  out.  It  is  her  own  or 
voluntary,  that  you  have  carefully  observed.  It  is  also  practically 
limitless,  for  you  have  tested  that  well.  It  does  not  diminish. 
It  does  not  exhaust.  It  changes  materially  from  one  individual 


384 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


message  to  another.  I  likei  your  method  of  describing  it  like  a 
plow  shaping  a  furrow.  When  Clegg  Wright  wrote,  the  plow 
was  straightened.  How  was  that  done,  you  ask?  Clegg  Wright 
wished  it.  He  accomplished  it.  What  did  he  do  ?  And  why  don’t 
we  all  pursue  the  same  course?  Are  questions  that  arise  in  mind 
of  you.  Well  it  is  not  easy  to  answer  questions  in  regard  to 
an  unknown  quantity.  Mind  is  what?  to  begin  with.  It  comes 
from  where  ?  etc.  Oneness  of  purpose  we  all  have  in  our  endeavor 
to  help  you  along  this  path  to  fame.  To  your  taste  fix  it.  You 
are  the  doctor,  and  this  is  your  dose,  that  you  prepared  for  the 
patient  (the  public).  The  palatable  part  you  have  fixed  well. 
The  good  it  will  do  is  endless,  or  will  continue  through  the 
century  after  you  are  dead.  Broaden  a  stream  and  go  your  way. 
Another  one  can  never  place  again  the  stream  within  the  course 
it  would  have  gone,  without  your  aiding  hand.  Broaden  the 
thought  of  many  men,  and  what  a  myriad  of  thinkers  gain  by 
following  the  thought  of  you,  that  you  have  placed  in  public 
view.  I  dream  no  more,  I  hope,  I  see  that  good  completed  it  is 
soon  to  be.  And  the  exalted  ones  from  highest  shore  will  help 
you  onward  evermore,  until  your  time  of  life  is  through,  and 
angels  lift  you  into  final  sleep.  Don’t  worry,  brother  Mason 
true.  A  crown  of  glory  is  awaiting  you.  I’ll  do  more  for  you 
at  the  next  opportimity.  I  have  to  do.  Otelleo  tells  me  to  let 
you  know  that  he  is  Mason  of  a  high  degree  also.  The  medium’s 
judgment  is  not  necessary.  She  does  not  really  care  if  we  in 
message  err.  Oh  we  will  do  all  we  can  to  help  you  aid  your  fellow 
man.  Otelleo  and  Asia  and  I  are  often  together. 


CHAPTER  XXXV 


I  HAVE  already  dealt  with  earlier  evidence,  in  my  argument 
as  presented  in  Chapter  XX,  as  having  reference  to  my 
wife  in  spirit  life,  and  the  proving  of  her  human  personality ; 
and  will  deal  with  some  evidence  which  has  presented  since, 
including  that  which  pertains  to  Wm.  T.  Stead,  and  a  few  among 
the  many  others ;  and  will  ask  the  reader  to  synthetically  gather 
evidence  from  the  varied  individual  messages ;  and  exercise  your 
faculty  of  reason,  while  searching  for  the  truth. 

Be  it  first  remembered  that  there  were  many  guides  and  loved 
ones,  friends  and  men  of  note,  some  of  whom  I  never  knew, 
but  who  from  interest  in  the  work  and  book  volunteered  their 
services,  and  offered  evidence  to  prove  the  after  life.  As  I  have 
said  elsewhere,  the  book  is  full  of  cobweb  evidence,  that  is  to  say, 
the  evidence  connects  in  many  ways,  as  different  as  with  time 
and  place,  medium  and  phase,  through  which  one  spirit  person¬ 
ality  can  demonstrate,  as  for  example  I’ll  state  that  my  guide 
Hypatia,  while  near  my  side  at  home,  would  see  me  write  a  note 
or  letter  with  my  pen  and  leave  it  on  my  table  through  the  night, 
to  mail  it  on  the  morrow  to  my  friend  and  co-worker  Wm.  T. 
Stead,  across  the  sea  in  London ;  and  though  I  was  alone  and 
no  human  saw  or  heard  or  read  or  knew  it,  still  Hypatia  at  my 
request  could  carry  its  contents,  and  deliver  them  through  the 
trumpet  at  Julia’s  Bureau  and  to  Wm.  T.  Stead,  for  whom 
intended,  before  reading  my  letter.  (See  Chapter  VIII.)  Some¬ 
what  later,  at  my  request,  Hypatia  met  a  Quebec  friend  of  mine 
at  Jonson’s  in  Toledo,  Western  Ohio,  while  in  her  transient  body 
as  materialized,  and  conversed  with  him ;  and  sent  by  him  a 
message  to  me.  (See  Chapter  VIII.)  Again  on  one  occasion  a 
skeptic  friend  doubting  her  personality  and  date  and  place  of 
origin,  undertook  by  quizzing  to  find  out  and  got  all  the  informa¬ 
tion  asked  for,  and  something  more,  of  personal  nature,  and 
found  himself  in  an  unpleasant  plight. 

385 


386 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


I  gave  a  public  address  in  Toronto,  during  which  I  stated, 
that  I  frequently  conversed  with  Hypatia  while  in  her  transient 
body.  Two  Chicago  gentlemen  were  present,  and  neither  would 
believe  it  to  be  true.  Shortly  after  these  same  two  men  attended 
a  Jonson  seance  in  Toledo,  on  which  occasion  Hypatia  material¬ 
ized,  called  them  each  by  name,  and  asked  them  if  they  would 
write  to  Dr.  King  and  tell  him  that  Hypatia,  his  guide,  had 
materialized  and  introduced  herself  to  them ;  and  requested  them 
to  write,  and  so  inform  him,  which  they  did ;  and  the  letter  was 
attested  by  all  the  sitters  in  the  seance,  and  forwarded  to,  and 
received  by  me. 

Again,  take  the  evidential  messages  in  connection  with  her 
various  appearance  at  Jonson’s,  and  at  other  dates  and  places 
when  she  also  talked ;  and  by  use  of  trumpet  at  Detroit  and  other 
places,  auditors  could  hear  her  voice  and  conversation ;  also  by 
using  vocal  organs  of  trance  mediums;  likewise  by  controlling 
the  hand  of  psychics  to  write.  So  all  the  time  from  first  to  last, 
her  spirit  personality  shows  forth  in  evidence,  as  everyone  can 
see  and  appreciate.  After  reading  the  book  through,  the  interested 
reader  and  investigator  can  take  up  her  case  only,  and  follow 
it  all  carefully ;  and  so  in  a  similar  manner,  with  each  or  all  or 
any  particular  one,  among  the  many  personalities,  in  everything 
they  do.  The  words  and  demonstrations  of  each  are  interesting, 
but  time  and  space  prevent  my  dealing  with  the  bulk  of  them, 
in  argument  by  summing  up  the  evidence  to  establish  both  spirit 
and  human  identity  as  well  as  personality  of  each ;  but  it  will 
prove  most  interesting,  and  also  more  or  less  conclusive,  to  follow 
up  consecutively  the  message  maker  or  demonstrator,  and  see  the 
termination;  and  also  trace  out  the  intercommunication  one  with 
the  other,  and  that  one  with  another,  by  co-operation  and  cobweb 
connection,  with  the  act  or  word  or  sight  or  sound  producing 
evidence. 

So  also  there  were  many  acts  and  references  by  words  and 
messages 'by  wife,  which  friends  and  others  can  verify  at  home; 
and  others  still,  which  other  persons  can  verify  as  evidential  in 
seance ;  and  I  need  only  mention  a  few  of  them,  which  may  prove 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


387 


interesting  to  readers ;  and  is  most  conclusive  to  me ;  and  of  date 
subsequent  to  the  November,  1911,  establishment  of  her  human 
personality ;  and  which  also  connect  with  it,  as  per  example : 
In  November  she  requested  me  to  take  her  single  diamond  ring 
out  of  the  safety  deposit  vaidt,  and  carry  it  to  a  jeweller,  and 
have  it  wrought  into  a  “safety”  scarf-pin;  and  this  I  complied 
with  on  my  return  to  Toronto.  So  zvhen  again  I  visited  a  lonson 
seance  in  Toledo,  in  April,  1912,  and  stood  looking  at  and  talking 
with  both  my  spirit  daughter  and  her  mother,  my  spirit  wife  May, 
the  latter  reached  for,  and  withdrew  my  scarf  from  within  my 
vest,  and  turned  it  round  and  hunted  for  and  found,  and  then 
tested  the  pin  with  her  own  fingers,  that  I  had  thus  made,  to 
prove  to  her  own  satisfaction  that  I  had  not  only  complied  with 
her  wish,  but  that  the  pin  was  positively  “safety”;  and  then 
replaced  it  where  it  belonged,  and  smiling  said,  “You  used  to 
be  so  proud  of  me  when  I  was  wearing  it,  and  so  I  am  most 
glad  to  know  you  wear  it  now.”  “It  makes  it  easier  for  me  to 
come  to  you.”  This  is  but  one  evidence  of  many,  and  this  is  truly 
of  the  most  convincing  kind  to  me. 

For  a  few  moments  I  ask  the  reader  to  note  a  few  facts  in 
addition  to  those  already  referred  to,  which  compel  the  conviction 
in  me,  that  none  other  than  May  could  have  so  presented  them. 
In  her  communication  through  the  writing  psychic  on  February 
15,  1912,  there  is  the  suggestion  and  approval  of  the  compilation 
of  the  evidence,  and  that  of  its  publication.  Again  she  makes 
her  selection  of  the  photograph  of  the  book’s  author,  two  of 
which  were  at  that  very  time  on  my  desk ;  and  clearly  expressed 
her  preference  as  to  which  should  appear  in  the  book.  “I  see 
the  picture  too  at  the  age  of  sixty-five  years,  and  I  am  proud 
of  it  and  you.  I  like  the  other  one  at  the  age  of  seventy,  the 
best  by  far,  for  in  it  I  see  you  as  you  are;  and  even  if  I  write, 

it  is  to  me  a  sorry  sight  to  see  you  all  alone . Your  latest 

picture  (at  70)  pleases  me  the  best.” 

And  further,  the  design  for  the  book’s  cover,  and  the  other 
one  symbolical,  intended  for  the  book,  and  brought  to  me  for 
my  selection,  attracted  her  attention,  and  brought  this  communica- 


388 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


tion  of  April  8,  1912,  through  the  writing  psychic,  which  is  in 
part:  “I  have  watched  the  works  of  art  as  they  were  made  for 
view  of  you,  and  we  are  of  those  near  to  you,  and  have  aided 
you  to  wise  selection  with  regard  to  what  was  brought  to  you 
to  see.  The  beauty  of  it  all  is  as  we  wished  it,  dear.  It  emphasizes 
carefully  what  they  will  see  and  hear  about  in  written  text  before 
them  spread  regarding  living,  and  their  living  dead.” 

[Note:  —  The  message  came  from  New  York  State  through 
the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  and  via  postal  route,  while  the 
developed  sketches  were  made  for  me,  from  my  suggested  pictures 
by  pencil  drawn,  and  these  all  lay  on  my  office  table  in  my  home 
in  Toronto.] 

In  Chapter  XII  I’ve  carefully  explained  the  ante-mortem 
agreement  between  us.  I  also  explained,  following  the  November 
series,  how  May  redeemed  her  promise ;  and  now  in  order  to 
establish  in  the  minds  of  thinking  men,  what  our  agreement  has 
accomplished ;  and  how  in  thought  and  soul’s  desire  or  prayer, 
that  May  might  confirm  what  she  and  I  both  said  and  did,  as  I 
had  noted  in  Chapter  XII,  she  on  the  16th  day  of  April,  1912, 
t’nrough  the  hand  of  the  Human-Psychic-Telephone,  sent  this 
message  on  to  me :  “I  am  glad  to  be  the  one  so  dear  to  you, 
and  so  the  key  that  opened  up  the  truth  to  thee.  “I’ll  write  it 
all  as  you  request  of  me.  (See  Chapter  XXIX.)  Hearts  are  not 
easily  divided;  and  I  shall  love  and  love  you  more  though  death 
has  entered  through  the  door.” 

And  now  I  wish  to  say  to  the  reader,  if  still  you  doubt,  turn 
back  and  read  just  what  May  wrote,  the  whole  of  Chapter  XXIX, 
and  surely  then  you’ll  be  convinced,  for  every  statement  in  it 
relating  to  the  earthly  portion  of  it  is  to  my  knowledge  true ; 
and  I  now  thus  confirm  it. 

Of  May’s  messages  to  me,  or  her  conversations,  not  only  those 
which  are  included  in  my  book,  but  the  many  private  ones,  which 
deal  with  matters  of  my  daily  concern,  which  could  only  be  known 
by  her  from  her  spirit  presence  with  me  constantly,  are  of  them¬ 
selves  of  such  exactness  of  detail  as  to  be  to  me  entirely  con¬ 
vincing.  And  then  again  the  voice  and  conversation  by  the  aid 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


389 


of  a  trumpet,  is  so  natural  to  life,  and  no  two  voices  are  exactly 
alike,  that  it  were  impossible  to  doubt  them,  or  to  be  mistaken ; 
and  she  made  herself  known,  and  talked  with  a  Toronto  man 
and  wife,  friends  of  hers,  at  Jonson’s,  and  sent  a  message  home 
by  them  to  me. 

I  ask  any  man,  be  he  skeptic  or  critic,  to  deny  if  he  can,  the 
assertion  that  no  substitute  in  all  creation  could  duplicate  the 
voice  and  conversation  of  your  wife  successfully,  with  both  of 
which  you  were  daily  familiar  for  quarter  of  a  century.  But  when 
these  features  are  added  to  by  the  presentation  of  her  transient 
form,  together  with  its  operation  as  a  perfect  duplication  of  her¬ 
self  in  human  life,  in  all  its  varied  circumstances,  which  you  can 
call  to  mind ;  and  further  that  these  conditions  are  presented 
correctly  no  matter  when  the  time,  nor  where  the  place,  nor  who 
the  instrument  by  whose  presence  it  is  made  possible  to  occur, 
will  not  all  this  kill  the  prejudice,  the  fraud  or  substitution 
hypothesis,  along  with  all  other  suggested  hypotheses ;  and  point 
to  the  necessity  for  an  awakened  mind  to  comprehend  as  I  do, 
a  demonstrated  truth?  In  concluding  my  reference  to  my  wife, 
I  now  assert  that  the  accumulated  evidence,  from  first  to  last, 
is  so  profoundly  convincing  to  my  senses,  intelligence,  my  intui¬ 
tion  and  my  reason,  that  I  now  declare  that  I  am  quite  as  sure 
of  her  continuity,  return,  communion,  identity  and  human  per¬ 
sonality  as  I  am  of  my  own  existence;  and  this,  so  far  at  least, 
I  have  been  constantly  able  to  demonstrate. 

Again,  for  an  instance  of  evidence,  in  proof  of  my  mother’s 
human  personality  I  refer  the  reader  to  the  demonstration 
recorded  in  Chapter  IV  in  a  Moss  seance,  at  MacRoberts’ 
residence  in  London,  Ontario,  in  1894,  and  which  is  there  num¬ 
bered  7.  My  mother  had  crippled  fingers  with  rheumatic  arthritis, 
which  she  designated  “hickory-nut  joints;”  and  covered  them 
with  loose  silk  gloves  or  mitts,  and  held  them  out  for  sitters  in 
the  seance,  to  see  and  feel  and  examine  them,  for  the  purpose 
of  proving  to  me  and  to  them,  her  personal  identity  and  human 
personality;  and  later,  on  March  12th,  in  1912,  in  message  sent 
through  Human-Psychic-Telephone  to  me,  while  she  was  in  my 


390 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


home,  and  while  I  watched  the  hand  while  she  (the  psychic)  wrote, 
and  this  was  what  she  said,  “My  son,  be  sure  that  I  love  you 
for  yourself  alone,  and  often  stay  here  in  the  home  with  thee. 
I  do  not  need  now  to  hide  my  hands  for  they  are  well,  and 
beautiful  to  see,  but  I  will  be  with  you,  my  dear,  if  you  are  there, 

if  you  are  here . /  feel  proud  to  write,  to  shoiv  you  what 

you  understand,  that  I  may  freely  use  my  hands.”  And  then 
again  in  April  of  1912,  when  she  came  to  me  at  Jonson’s  some 
eighteen  years  after  her  first  demonstration,  and  there  she  let  me 
see  and  feel  of  them  to  prove  she  had  no  bad  conditions  now. 

What  could  be  more  natural  and  reasonable  for  my  mother 
with  restricted  opportunities,  than  to  utilize  three  different 
mediums,  at  intervals  of  years,  and  long  distances  apart,  to  satisfy 
me,  her  own  son,  by  reasoning  out,  and  demonstrating  and 
proving  her  personality  to  me,  in  what  would,  perhaps,  be  the 
very  best  way  ?  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say,  it  is  all  quite  true ;  and 
as  strong  as  any  evidence  I  can  offer,  and  it  convinces  me  ?  What 
meaneth  all  this,  and  much  more  through  the  passing  years, 
produced  in  this  connected  way,  if  it  be  not  my  mother  seeking 
communication  with  me?  Would  it  not  otherwise  be  useless 
quite,  and  no  purpose  served? 

And  now  another  instance,  but  not  the  last.  My  spirit  wife 
May  told  me  in  message  of  February  20,  1912,  that  when  I 
would  go  to  Jonson’s,  at  such  time  as  Hypatia  advised  me  to 
go  thither,  that  our  spirit  daughter  May  Donna  would  sing  for 
me.  So  when  I  got  there  I  saw  and  spoke  with  her  in  her  material¬ 
ized  form,  and  asked  her  if  she  coidd  now  sing  for  me?  She 
replied,  “Not  tonight,  dear  papa,  but  before  you  leave  Toledo;” 
and  at  my  last  seance  of  that  series  there  she  zvalked  out  from  the 
cabinet  into  the  circle,  and  sang  as  she  had  promised  me  a  sweet 
and  inspiring  selection  zvkich  all  applauded.  (See  Chapter 
XXVIII.)  Before  we  parted  she  promised  me  to  write  me  many 
messages  which  she  has  since  done,  and  through  “The  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone”  in  New  York  State ;  and  also  conversed  many 
times  through  trumpets. 

I  will  ask  another  question.  Is  this  case  not  either  confirmatory, 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


391 


circumstantial,  or  direct  evidence;  or  all  of  evidential  character? 
Can  the  reader  explain  how,  and  why,  it  happens  thus,  if  it 
be  not  the  discarnate  spirit  of  my  daughter  brought  back  to 
earth,  to  help  to  prove  my  contention,  that  to  all  humans  there 
is  granted  1st,  Continuity  of  life;  2nd,  Spirit  return;  and  3rd, 
Spirit  communion? 

I  had  an  old-time  friend  when  I  was  in  my  youth,  who  was 
then  my  instructor  in  practical  chemistry  at  old  Toronto  Uni¬ 
versity,  more  than  forty  years  ago,  I  mean  Professor  Croft.  He 
must  have  been  for  many  years  in  the  other  life,  for  he  was  old 
and  gray  at  that  time,  but  he  still  remembers  me ;  and  he  too 
writes  through  psychic  to  identify  for  me  his  human  personality. 

Lily,  the  cabinet  spirit  of  Mrs.  Moss,  and  who  materialized 
at  my  first  seance  in  London  in  1894,  did  so  again  with  self¬ 
same  feature,  mannerism  and  name,  fully  eighteen  years  later; 
and  had  the  same  appearance  and  voice  and  conversed  with 
myself  and  wife,  at  Lily  Dale,  in  1907 ;  and  again  conversed 
with  me  in  1912 ;  and  was  present  when  both  Mrs.  Moss  and 
my  wife  May  materialized  in  Mrs.  Well’s  seance.  She  had 
promised  at  London,  that  she  would  join  my  band  after  Mrs. 
Moss’s  passing  over,  and  did  so  at  this  seance. 

A  form  also  presented  the  same  time  as  Lily  in  London,  which 
claimed  to  be  a  brother  member  in  a  secret  society.  He  took  me 
in  the  cabinet  with  him  and  there,  in  our  seclusion,  proved  him¬ 
self  by  signs  and  words  and  grip  to  me ;  then  with  cabinet  after 
lighted  up ;  and  in  the  circle  later,  was  further  known  and 
recognized  and  spoken  with  by  several  who  knew  him  well  in  life. 

My  father  showed  himself  to  me  in  1894  at  the  Moss  seance, 
London,  as  record  No,  8,  in  form  and  feature  and  voice,  and 
spoke  loud  and  clear  his  name,  and  relationship  to  me ;  and  also 
showed  his  swollen  hands  as  evidence  of  his  disease;  and  in  the 
hearing  of  the  circle  said,  a  note  of  which  I  made,  “I  still  live 
and  am  able  to  bring  to  you  proof  of  my  continued  existence,” 
and  also  gave  this  message  to  me  for  his  favorite  grandson, 
“Tell  Robbie  that  grandpa  still  lives.”  He  also  there  told  me, 
that  some  of  the  views  I  had  held  regarding  future  life,  when 


392 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


he  was  with  me,  he  had  since  found  out  were  right,  and  eighteen 
years  later  for  the  first  time  through  Jonson  came  again,  and 
showed  himself  to  me,  expressing  his  pleasure  and  his  approba¬ 
tion  of  the  work  which  I  was  engaged  in,  the  compilation  of 
evidence  for  this  book.  The  reader  may  ask  me  now,  how  can 
you  be  sure  it  was  your  father?  and  I  answer  just  as  I  could  in 
life  by  seeing,  hearing  and  conversing  with  him,  as  I  always 
did  in  life,  and  by  the  aid  of  my  senses  and  my  reason,  as  also 
by  the  evidence  of  swollen  hands,  message  to  grandson  Robbie 
and  reference  to  my  views  of  the  after  life,  which  he  had  found 
nearer  the  truth  then  the  orthodox  views  he  expounded  in  the 
pnlpit.  Had  the  reader  been  similarly  situated  as  myself,  could 
he  or  she  not  say  it  was,  or  it  was  not  his  or  her  father,  or 
mother,  brother,  sister  or  child  with  whom  he  or  she  was  con¬ 
versing  ;  and  had  lived  daily  an  earth  life  of  many  years ;  and 
further  not  limited  to  a  single  interview,  but  extending  over  a 
period  of  years ;  and  not  only  presenting  through  a  single  phase, 
but  by  the  aid  of  different  instruments  or  mediums  of  each  of 
several  phases,  they  become  as  familiar  as  the  earthly  friends 
we  similarly  meet  at  intervals  of  time  under  changing  conditions. 

Facts  as  Communicated  to  Me  by  Members  of  My  Own 
Family,  All  in  Spirit  Life. 

My  mother  passed  to  spirit  life  in  1886,  my  father  in  1894,  my 
wife  in  1911,  and  my  daughter  at  the  time  of  her  birth.  I  had 
a  special  sitting  with  the  automatic  writer  —  the  rhyming  medium 
—  at  Lily  Dale,  N.  Y.,  beginning  at  10.20  a.  m.,  October  24, 
1913.  My  questions  each  and  all  were  previously  prepared  at 
my  home  in  Toronto,  and  retained  by  me  all  the  time  while  there. 
The  answer  to  each  question  was  written  with  my  fountain  pen 
by  the  medium  in  a  blank  book,  which  I  took  with  me,  for  the 
purpose,  to  her  home  and  which  book  she  returned  to  me  at  the 
close  of  the  seance.  I  also  made  it  plain  at  the  beginning  that 
both  questions  and  answers  would  be  made  public  by  their 
inclusion  in  my  book.  So  soon  as  each  question  was  read  aloud 
by  me,  the  psychic’s  automatic  hand  recorded  the  response  thereto. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


393 


J.  S.  K.  1.  I  thank  you,  Hypatia,  for  all  the  information  you 
have  imparted  to  me,  and  for  your  encouragement;  and  as  you 
say  you  will  remain  while  I  am  here,  I  will  have  further  oppor¬ 
tunity  to  commune  with  you.  First  and  foremost  I  wish  to  hold 
communion  with  my  spirit  wife  and  daughter  for  a  little  time; 
and  then  other  relatives  to  follow  during  our  first  sitting  today. 

Response  by  “May,”  My  Spirit  Wife.  It  is  to  me  a  joy  to 
be  here  with  you,  and  “Johnnie  Boy”  you  are  still  to  me,  though 
I  am  where  you  cannot  see  me  when  I  come  in  robe  of  white. 
I’ll  also  hold  the  pen  and  write  my  signature.  May  Donna  is 
with  me  present  now. 

J.  S.  K.  2,  There  are  many  things  I  wish  to  ask  about,  and 
much,  no  doubt,  you  can  tell  of  interest ;  but  we  can  only  occupy 
a  part  of  the  time  during  my  present  visit,  as  I  want  to  gather 
important  material  for  publication  in  my  second  book.  I  com¬ 
muned  with  Hypatia,  as  you  heard,  and  will  hear  again ;  and 
I  will  also  probably  hear  from  other  guides  and  teachers  who 
may  be  selected  to  impart  important  information.  What  would 
you  like  to  talk  about  now? 

Response  by  May.  I  have  not  changed  for  the  worse,  I  can  tell 
that  to  you ;  and  I  can  also  say  in  truth  I  am  trying  all  I  can 
to  aid  you  in  your  second  book;  and  I  will  try  to  come  in  view 
in  spirit  pictures  as  ’twas  promised  you  that  I  would  be  able 
to  do. 

J.  S.  K.  3.  Referring  to  a  trumpet  seance  in  Mrs.  Wriedt’s 
seance  room  in  Detroit  in  December  of  last  year,  as  reported 
earlier  in  my  book,  you  told  me  there  you  were  going  home  to 
see  your  mother  that  night,  but  would  be  with  me  again  at  my 
morning  seance  next  day.  You  did  not  tell  me  why  you  were 
going  home,  but  gave  me  a  surprise,  by  bringing  back  with  you 
your  father,  it  being  the  first  occasion  since  he  passed  to  spirit 
life,  over  twenty  years  ago.  Now  I  want  to  ask  you  what  guide 
or  guides  accompanied  you  and  did  you  find  your  father  at  home? 

Response  by  May.  It  was  to  me  granted,  and  Otelleo  and 
Omar  from  your  spirit  band  were  with  me  on  the  journey  to 
mother.  Father  was  and  is  with  her,  and  at  her  death  they  will 


394 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


be  reunited.  I  was  in  wireless-like  communion  with  Hypatia 
during  the  process,  and  capable  master-like  spirits  not  to  me 
known  shifted  the  scenes  and  made  it  possible  for  me  to  bring 
my  father  to  the  reach  of  you,  as  he  then  spoke  through  the 
trumpet  with  you. 

J.  S.  K.  4.  What  did  your  father  think  of  that  experience, 
or  was  he  surprised  to  find  it  both  strange  and  true?  Was  John, 
your  spirit  brother,  there? 

Response  by  May.  John  was  the  one  who  stayed  with  mother 
during  the  absence  of  father,  so  that  father  might  know  he  could 
return  to  her  as  soon  as  he  had  talked  to  you  through  the 
trumpet.  John  and  father  will  write  for  you  if  they  can. 

J.  S.  K.  5.  In  what  sphere  is  your  spirit  home  at  present  time? 
and  who  shares  that  home  with  you? 

Response  by  May.  My  spirit  home  is  like  to  a  bower  of 
vegetation  in  draperies  of  flowers  and  vines.  I  do  not  seem 
to  be  shut  in  by  walls,  but  draperies  of  white,  closed  by  my  wish, 
seclude  me  from  publicity.  My  father  and  brother  come  near, 
but- my  sister  Gertie,  and  daughter  May  Donna  are  with  me 
often,  so  I  am  never  alone.  One  may  be  absent,  but  if  both  are 
absent,  Hypatia  or  my  teachers  beautiful  and  new,  now  known 
to  me,  but  not  to  you,  lead  me  with  care,  and  grant  to  me 
every  prayer. 

J.  S.  K.  6.  Does  the  guide  introduced  to  you  in  your  life  by 
Hypatia  when  we  were  together  at  Jonson’s  as  recorded  by  me, 
have  aught  relationship  to  you  now? 

Response  by  May.  Yes,  Saphrona  is  my  immediate  guide 
or  personal  attendant  like  to  a  servant  of  superior  attributes  to 
my  wish,  as  a  trained  nurse  is  to  a  babe,  so  is  she  to  me. 

J.  S.  K.  7.  If  Hypatia  is  agreeable,  and  also  you,  I  wish  to 
make  of  these  communings  with  Hypatia,  you  and  other  relatives 
a  special  allotment  by  itself,  so  it  can  be  readily  referred  to. 

Response  by  May.  Yes,  I  will  aid  you,  and  will  also  write 
with  care  a  chapter  clear,  distinct  and  new,  to  occupy  a  part  of 
the  book  “After  the  Dawn  a  Clearer  View.” 

J.  S.  K.  8.  Have  the  members  of  your  family,  and  of  mine, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


395 


in  spirit  life,  each  separate  homes?  And  are  they  all  assigned 
to  one  sphere? 

Response  by  May.  We  are  all  in  one  plane  or  neighborhood¬ 
like  surrounding,  but  each  is  in  power  to  be  alone,  cast  off  for 
rest  or  meditation.  I  may  also  call  to  anyone,  and  with  great 
ease  they  come  to  me,  not  by  walking,  which  at  first  seemed 
strange  to  me,  nor  governed  by  the  law  of  gravity;  but  with 
a  sweeping  ease  of  entrance,  something  like  to  the  materializations 
in  the  private  seance  (with  the  private  lady  medium)  but  without 
delay  or  effort.  I  have  things  to  do,  so  have  they.  If  busy, 
cause  for  their  delay  would  be  by  telepathic-like  message  told 
I  to  me.  I  do  not  need  any  loved  one  with  me,  because  of  the 
superior  comfort  of  angel  attainments. 

J.  S.  K.  9.  When  I  pass  to  spirit  realms  will  I  have  a  separate 
home  from  you,  or  will  the  home  be  jointly  ours?  Do  all  spirits 
enter  each  and  pass  through  all  spheres,  from  earth  plane  advanc¬ 
ing  like  steps  of  a  stairway?  In  what  sphere  did  you  stop,  when 
first  you  passed  over  there,  and  what  sphere  is  your  home  in 
now? 

Response  by  May.  When  you  die  I  shall  be  with  you  at  the 
time  of  your  death,  and  from  that  time  on  we  shall  be  in  a  home 
together,  but  I  shall  know  things  you  have  not  attained ;  and  I 
shall  wish  to  go  to  places,  when  you  will  wish  to  rest,  but  where’er 
I  am  you  will  be  able  to  speak  to  me,  and  as  one  we  are  to  stay, 
no  matter  what  the  changes  be  in  your  life,  or  the  life  of  me. 
I  am  in  the  necessity  to  believe  objects  necessary  to  my  harmony; 
and  while  I  remain  in  this  earth-bound,  or  earth-like  mental  state 
in  desire  to  have  earth-life  appearance,  and  earth-life  objects, 
etc.,  I  will  truly  be  of  the  first  sphere  or  growing  state  of  soul ; 
and  when  I  am  in  readiness  to  cease  to  need  these  things,  then 
and  then  only  will  the  change  to  third  state  be.  It  is  not  a 
necessity  to  change  at  all.  I  love  my  home  too  much  to  leave 
it  now,  and  birds  and  animals  and  objects  dear  and  near  make 
it  my  own,  and  so  it  will  be  till  I  grow,  and  I  wait  for  you  and 
to  have  it  be  the  home  of  us  eventually.  It  is  possible  for  us  to 
be  together  as  long  as  we  are  interested  in  the  same  things.  My 


396 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


baby  (May  Donna)  is  in  truth  of  an  advanced  sphere,  for  to 
her  earth  objects  are  not  a  necessity.  She  was  adopted  by  an 
angel  mother  and  so  can  readily  do  and  be  contented  in  advanced 
state,  not  yet  to  me  possible.  They  are  advanced  and  so  I  if 
the  sphere  is  subdivided  in  proportion  of  seven  as  has  been  done 
to  indicate  development,  I  would,  at  this  time,  be  of  fourth 
attainment.  May  Donna  may  stay  with  me  indefinitely,  but  she 
may  also  dematerialize  to  me  and  disappear,  as  I  would  do  in 
seances  to  you.  Gertie  (sister)  never  does  this,  in  fact  she  cannot 
do  it,  so  she  is  like  to  myself  in  fourth  degree,  and  will  not  like 
May  Donna  be  for  many  a  year  of  living  here. 

J.  S.  K.  10.  Can  you  name  those  who  met  you  when  you 
passed  through  the  gate  of  death,  and  accompanied  you  to  your 
heavenly  abode? 

Response  by  May.  Father  and  Gertie  (sister)  and  John 
(brother).  May  Donna  (daughter),  Hypatia  and  Saphrona 
(guide)  were  the  principal  ones;  though  others  like  to  David 
(author’s  brother)  and  Jesse  (author’s  nephew)  were  near.  I 
did  not  sense  it  all.  The  process  of  change  causes  the  mentality 
to  be  blurred  in  consciousness  of  detail.  I  wanted  you,  and 
wanted  to  return,  and  so  was  left  at  rest  until  I  could  be  made 
to  know  that  I  was  dead  and  had  to  go. 

J.  S.  K.  11.  How  far,  in  our  miles,  do  you  suppose  you  are 
from  the  home  in  which  I  live ;  or  do  you  know  how  long  it  took 
you  tO'  go  from  your  body  to  where  you  were  left  to  repose? 

Response  by  May.  We  are  not  limited  by  distance  and  I 
cannot  tell  it.  Like  to  Marconigrams  we  are  conveyed,  like 
through  tubes  of  proper  magnetic-like  attunement.  I  was  told 
while  you  were  at  Mrs.  Wriedt’s,  I  might  bring  my  father  and 
surprise  you.  I  did  not  go,  I  was  conveyed,  and  it  was  done  for 
me.  I  do  not  realize  the  details  of  how  it  was  done.  To  my 
senses  the  scenes  shifted.  I  was  with  mother,  and  my  father 
came,  I  rested  and  was  then  with  you  in  the  seance  room. 

J.  S.  K.  12.  Will  you  bring  your  grandmother  to  talk  through 
the  trumpet  with  me?  Does  she  still  stay  around  the  old  home 
ignorant  of  the  fact  that  she  has  experienced  bodily  death? 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


397 


Response  by  May.  Yes,  and  it  is  often  so  with  spirits,  and  so 
they  stay  till  angels  roll  the  stones  away  between  them  and  the 
clearer  view  which  fact  is  already  known  to  you.  A  farmer 
farms,  a  churchman  preaches,  and  followers  listen  to  the  words, 
and  talk  and  argue  as  they  did  before  they  came  across  to  the 
unknown  shore. 

J.  S,  K.  13.  When,  where,  and  how  did  you  find  our  spirit 
daughter?  Was  it  soon  after  you  reached  spirit  realms? 

Response  by  May.  I  felt  her  loving  touch  before  I  left  my 
body,  and  in  silent  loving  way  she  told  me  I  was  soon  to  better 
be,  and  it  would  be  so  I  could  see  you,  and  return  to  our  home ; 
and  so  I  never  felt  alone.  I  floated  out  for  several  days  and 
so  the  final  step  of  change,  was  not  to  me  severe.  I  simply  knew 
that  it  was  through  and  grieved  because  cut  off  from  you. 

I  J.  S.  K.  14.  Can  you  see  and  read  what  I  write  here  and 
also  in  my  home?  Can  you  hear  my  human  voice  as  well  when 
I  read  my  questions  aloud,  as  you  could  hear  it  when  I  spoke 
with  you  at  Jonson’s,  while  you  were  in  your  materialized  body 
and  used  your  sense  of  hearing  and  your  vocal  organs  there 
to  speak  to  me?  Which  of  the  two  methods  do  you  prefer? 

Response  by  May.  Sometimes  I  seem  to  be  quite  near  and 
what  you  say  and  read  I  hear.  At  other  times  I  do  not  know 
all  that  you  do,  I  simply  sense  that  it  is  you.  Some  things  are 
needed  to  make  clear,  and  when  not  there  you  disappear;  and  I, 
like  to  a  person  blind,  must  feel  in  darkness  till  I  find.  I  hear 
today  the  words  you  say,  I  also  see  the  room  and  you,  and  that 
at  present  there  are  two,  but  who  the  writer  is  I  cannot  see.  I 
am  but  conscious  that  a  writing  hand  is  putting  down  what  I 
now  say.  I  cannot  always  read  your  writing,  but  often  or  some¬ 
times  ;  but  like  to  clear  or  stormy  weather  these  changes  are 
produced  by  conditions  external  to  my  volition.  I  like  to  hear 
your  voice,  I  then  realize  it  is  your  own  self  so. 

J.  S.  K.  15.  Is  there  anything  special  which  you  would  like 
to  say  that  I  can  publish  as  a  chapter  in  my  second  book? 

Response  by  May.  I’ll  write  an  essay-like  chapter  for  you. 
I’d  like  it  if  you’d  write  something  for  me  to  respond  to. 


398 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


J.  S.  K.  16.  When  you  want  to  talk  or  write  about  any  personal 
or  private  matter,  either  through  the  trumpet,  while  in  your 
materialized  body,  or  when  dictating  to  the  subjective  mind  of 
this  psychic  with  her  automatic  hand ;  or  any  automatic  writer, 
say  this  is  personal,  and  I  will  so  consider  it;  though  my  judg¬ 
ment  has  usually  guided  me  in  this  matter. 

Response  by  May.  I  will  so  do,  but  as  you  say  your  judgment 
is  enough  for  me  no  matter  what  I  say  to  thee.  I’ll  be  here  all 
your  visit  through  to  listen  or  to  write. 

J.  S.  K.  17.  Now  I’m  waiting  in  the  hope  that  I  shall  hear 
from  my  spirit  daughter,  who  gave  a  surprise  to  the  sitters  in 
a  Jonson  materializing  seance  in  Toledo  by  singing  in  the  circle 
the  grand  anthem  “Holy !  Holy !  Holy !  Lord  God  Almighty”  in 
a  manner  to  merit  the  great  applause  she  received,  just  a  few 
minutes  before  Wm.  T.  Stead  for  the  first  time  materialized 
and  tried  to  walk  across  a  large  room  to  me. 

Response  by  My  Daughter.  My  dear  father,  I  am  glad  to 
say  I  sang  for  you.  I  will  do  it  again  at  any  time,  as  I  now 
write.  It  was  to  us  a  joy  to  hear  the  music  sweet  which  was 
rendered  here  for  you ;  and  it  has  the  advantage  that  you  may 
it  all  repeat ;  but  with  the  seances  it  is  not  so,  but  if  it  were 
we’d  be  with  you  as  company  your  life  time  through ;  and  when 
’tis  so  you  find  or  know  the  very  thing  to  do,  then  you  may 
depend  upon  us  here,  at  least  upon  mama  and  me. 

J.  S.  K.  18.  Will  my  angel  daughter,  now  a  young  woman, 
tell  me  who  was  foster-mother  to  you  while  as  an  infant  only 
in  heaven ;  and  who  is  your  present  guide  ? 

Response  by  My  Daughter.  My  mama  here  is  not  to  me 
the  same  as  human  mama  is ;  but  like  to  a  flower  transplanted 
to  a  bed,  with  beauty  I  was  clothed  and  fed  and  loving  mortals 
who  had  babies  none  at  times  to  us  soul  flowers  may  come  and 
gather  one  with  love  and  care  and  carry  it  to  here  and  there ;  but 
we  then  are  returned  to  be  in  sunlight  of  the  smile  of  God ;  the 
while  we  grow,  and  who  we  are,  we  are  taught  to  know  at  times. 
I  saw  my  father  and  mother  at  times,  and  I  felt  myself  to  be 
like  growing  bird  hovered  by  thee ;  but  I  was  not  cut  from  love 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


399 


of  you  by  anything  that  I  did  do.  In  cases  where  no  love  is 
there  for  the  soul  flower  so  small,  the  childless  woman  is  allowed 
to  own  it  all.  I  was  taught  music  in  a  class  and  often  angel 
sweet  conducted  me  through  many  a  hall,  and  often  would  repeat 
the  lessons  I  must  learn  for  ma,  and  was  an  aid  in  each  degree, 
but  she  was  not  my  own  alone,  and  never  took  me  to  her  home. 
We  grow  like  children  in  a  ward  or  hospital,  till  we  have  reached 
a  stage  of  independent  thought,  and  we  are  shown  our  loving 
parents,  so  that  when  they  die  we  to  them  go  like  children  of 
a  higher  sphere,  but  always  held  by  loving  here. 

J.  S.  K.  If  my  father  is  present  now  I  wish  to  commune 
with  him. 

Hypatia.  Your  father  is  here. 

J.  S.  K.  19.  I  wish  to  say  to  you,  father,  that  when  I  was 
a  boy  in  my  early  teens  you  preached  the  gospel  in  the  old 
Presbyterian  stone  church  out  in  the  country  —  only  a  few  yards 
from  which  your  earthly  remains  now  lie  —  and  you  spoke  so 
frequently  about  the  devil  and  hell  and  everlasting  punishment 
with  torment,  that  I,  who  otherwise  was  considered  a  brave  boy, 
was  really  afraid  to  be  out  alone  on  a  dark  night  lest  the  devil 
would  catch  me,  and  take  me  away  to  that  dreaded  burning  lake 
of  fire  and  brimstone,  a  place  of  never-ending  torture,  if  I  failed 
to  go  to  church  every  Sunday  morning  and  night,  and  to  Sunday 
school  in  the  afternoon,  nO'  matter  how  much  I  needed  rest  on 
Sunday;  or  if  I  failed  to  memorize  a  certain  set  lesson  in  the 
Bible  or  Testament  assigned  me  by  you. 

All  such  teaching  made  me  fear  rather  than  love  God.  As 
you  may  now  judge  me  in  a  different  light,  so  I  now  hold  a 
different  view  from  that  of  those  early  bo}’hood  days,  when  I 
often  sat  brooding  over  my  present  and  possible  future  lot,  and 
many  a  time  I  wished  most  truly  that  I  had  never  had  a  beginning 
if  there  was  a  possibility  that  I  would  never  have  an  ending, 
and  meanwhile  suffer  everlasting  punishment  with  torture, 
because  I  could  not  live  a  perfect  life  if  every  little  fault  of  mine 
were  counted  a  sin. 

As  you  now  have  altogether  different  views,  and  entirely  new 


400 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


experiences  over  there  in  spirit  realms,  as  you  have  at  dit¥erent 
times  told  me  when  meeting  me  in  seances  in  and  since  the  first 
one  in  the  Moss  series  of  seances  at  London,  Ontario,  in  1894, 
you  ought  to  be  well  able  now  to  make  a  statement  founded  on 
your  experience,  observation  and  knowledge,  gained  in  spirit 
during  many  years,  as  to  the  reality  of  which  you  presumed  to 
speak  from  the  pulpit  in  human  life,  without  exact  knowledge 
(just  as  will  the  critics  probably,  who  will  criticize  what  I  in 
my  book  say),  I  feel  that  you  now  owe  it  to  your  son,  and  other 
boys  and  girls  of  my  time,  still  in  their  mortal  tenements,  as 
a  duty  as  well  as  a  pleasure  to  tell  us  what  you  have  learned 
regarding  rewards  and  punishments,  since  residing  in  the  spirit 
world,  and  experiencmg  the  after-life  these  many  years.  I  trust 
you  will  make  your  statement  as  clear  at  the  present  time  for 
publication,  as  you  formerly  made  them  from  the  pulpit,  when  I 
was  a  very  credulous  son  in  the  years  of  long  ago.  I  ask  you 
to  grant  me  the  privilege  of  publishing  your  statement  in  an 
alloted  portion  of  my  book;  as  you  can  write  it  briefly  here  and 
now,  by  dictating  it  to  the  subjective  mind  of  the  psychic  whose 
automatic  hand  will  reproduce  it  with  my  fountain  pen,  as  you 
speak  it  to  her. 

Response  by  Father.  Stephen  King  I  am.  Tell  my  son  John 
that  I  am  here  to  do  as  he  may  wish  me  to  do.  I  was  myself 
so  taught,  and  I  to  you  taught  what  my  father  taught  to  me  of 
future  punishments.  I  have  not  learned  if  any  be  like  those  of 
which  I  spoke  to  tfiee.  In  certain  realms  are  beings  who  have 
not  yet  learned  the  way  to  do,  and  so  are  held  and  not  yet  free, 
but  kindness  is  the  law  of  spirit  life ;  and  in  the  need  of  sorrow 
and  of  pain  some  souls  would  seem  to  he,  hut  earth-like  suffering 
is  all  that  any  soul  is  forced  to  undergo:  such  as  the  sorrow 
of  a  severed  mate,  or  an  unjust  act,  but  never  punishment  of 
hate.  No  fiery  furnace  is  prepared  for  erring  hoys;  and  I  am 
sorry  now,  I  taught  you  so,  but  you  have  grown  to  he  a  pride 
to  me  in  spite  of  it,  and  all  that  you  and  I  your  father  have 
been  through,  I  found  it  altogether  different  from  all  of  my 
ideals  or  habitual  thoughts.  I  was  a  child  in  soul  development 


DAPVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


401 


when  I  came  here,  and  so  began  again,  not  cut  off  from  the 
memory  of  earth,  but  like  a  child  in  second  birth  or  like  a,  man 
in  language  new,  I  began  here,  and  thus.  I  grew  to  know  and 
wish  to  know  like  you. 

Beauty  surrounds  us  here,  and  love  in  radiant  -whiteness  from 
above  illumes  our  path  on  every  side;  and  if  we  cannot  walk 
we  all  may  ride,  or  be'  assisted  to  the  end  by  many  a  listening 
angel  friend. 

Mother  is  with  me  now,  and  she  is  listener  here  to  what  to 
you  is  effort  or  your  task  to  do. 

J.  S.  K.  20.  To  mother  most  boys  look  for  protection  and 
sympathy  when  father  is  displeased  with  their  conduct  or 
expression,  and  such  was  the  case  with  me,  for  as  I  grew  older 
and  did  some  thinking  for  myself,  I  showed  at  times  my  inde¬ 
pendence  of  mind  and  speech,  which  provoked  father  to  severity ; 
but  father  never  did,  nor  could  he  make  me  believe  all  that  he 
taught,  and  hence  there  was  more  fear  of,  than  love  for,  my 
father,  especially  on  Sunday ;  and  hence  I  was  quite  inclined  to 
appreciate  the  sympathy  of  my  mother,  when  father  made  rules 
fast  and  hard  regarding  my  beliefs  and  practices. 

Now,  mother,  no  one  in  the  world  knew  better  than  you  that 
father’s  insistence  that  I  should  adopt  both  theory  and  practice, 
as  he  taught  his  boys,  would  not  prove  to  be  a  grand  success, 
and  naturally,  mother,  you  tried  to  temper  my  spirit  to  father’s 
cold  breezes,  or  shall  I  say  the  hot  breezes  of  his  speech?  Now 
I  would  like  to  know  from  my  mother  in  heaven,  if  I  always 
was  as  a  boy,  and  am  as  a  man,  so  wicked  as  to  deserve  ever¬ 
lasting  punishment ;  and  whether  you  are  convinced  that  such 
punishment  was  intended  by  God  for  your  son,  or  any  other 
mother’s  son  or  daughter ;  and  whether  such  kind  of  punishment 
is  ever  inflicted,  or  not.  Please  make  your  statement  clear  and 
plain,  so  I  may  with  your  consent  publish  it  in  my  book  as  an 
allotment  in  a  suitable  place. 

Response  by  Mother.  Like  to  you,  my  son,  was  your  father 
in  his  earnestness  of  thought,  and  act,  and  the  severity  of  his 
rules  grieved  me,  as  well  as  you ;  and  so  I  did  the  best  I  could ; 


402 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  I  believe  I  softened  some,  the  natural  instinct  in  you  to  quite 
rebel,  or  be  set  free.  I  love  you  now,  and  ahvays  shall,  you 
zvere  so  very  good  to  me;  and  hell  is  not  for  you,  my  son,  for 
any  acts  that  you  have  done. 

My  fingers  are  well,  and  the  rheumatic  tendency  in  you  is  to 
be  lifted  from  now  on ;  and  lithe  and  limber  bow  you  are  to 
grow,  and  in  a  year  or  two  you  will  be  free  from  all  care  and 
necessity. 

I  am  your  mother,  Margaret  P.  King. 

I  introduce  here  what  to  me  appears  to  be  in  accord  with  the 
view  that  variety  of  source  of  evidence  in  any  given  case 
strengthens  it.  It  is  a  quotation  from  Wm.  T.  Stead’s  message 
to  me  (No.  33)  through  the  hand  of  the  automatic  writer:  “I 
realize  that  the  proof  of  continuity  of  life  depends  largely  upon 
the  same  personality  presenting  through  dififerent  and  widely 
separated  instruments”  (mediums).  The  reader  will  have  noted 
in  an  early  page  of  Chapter  XXXI,  a  tabulated  record  of  my 
experiences  with  the  spirit  personality  of  William  T.  Stead,  and 
it  will  there  be  evident,  that  he  has  been  endeavoring  to  demon¬ 
strate  in  the  very  way  suggested  in  the  extract  quoted. 

This  view,  however,  harmonizes  with  my  own,  and  has  appealed 
to  me  in  very  many  cases,  among  the  scores  to  be  found  in  these 
records.  The  majority  of  all  the  intelligences  communicating, 
have  done  so  through  more  than  one  instrument,  some  through 
several,  and  some  have  used  the  same  kind  of  instrument  several 
times.  This  might  of  course  be  tO'  make  their  personality  better 
known.  Variety  of  instruments  have  been  utilized  by  me  in  test 
cases.  And  of  course  spirits  communicating,  just  like  humans, 
have  preference  in  the  use  of  instruments.  As  every  musical 
instrument  has  an  intonation  characteristic  of  its  make-up,  and 
by  wTich  it  can  be  distinguished  from  all  other  kinds  of  musical 
instruments,  without  seeing  it,  so  alsO'  every  medium  or  psychic 
instrument  dififers  from  all  others,  even  those  of  the  same  phase, 
in  some  measure  or  quality  of  psychic  force,  combined  with  the 
psychic’s  individual  spiritual  personality  as  evinced  in  results 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


403 


produced,  modified  perhaps  by  the  psychic’s  control,  consciously 
or  unconsciously. 

This  seems  to  be  recognized  as  a  rule  by  communicating  spirit 
intelligences.  To  substantiate  this  view,  which  has  always 
impressed  me  strongly,  I  again  quote  the  following  from,  a  com¬ 
munication  from  my  chief  guide  Hypatia,  and  which  appears 
elsewhere  several  times  in  the  book:  “You  must  consider  that 
messages  that  come  from  the  spirit  world,  are  more  or  less  tinged 
with  the  medium’s  personality,  through  whom  they  are  given. 
The  clearness  of  the  message  depends  on  the  spiritual  status  of 
the  instrument.  A  cheap  piano  will  give  out  musical  sounds,  but 
cannot  give  the  tone  and  richness  that  comes  from  the  more 
finished  instrument.” 

Another  feature  usually  —  and  in  my  own  case  nearly  always  — 
met  with  in  the  automatic  psychic  writers  is  that  of  the  with¬ 
holding  from  me  a  valued  feature.  I  now  refer  especially  to  my 
unsuccessful  efforts  to  secure  either  evidential  description  of  the 
writer’s  human  personality,  or  the  writing,  so  far,  by  the  spirit 
in  a  fac-simile  of  its  human  handwriting.  In  the  case  of  Miss 
Gates,  the  automatic-writing-psychic,  my  guide  Hypatia,  the 
philosophers  and  other  advanced  spirit  intelligences,  could  not 
wholly  overcome  the  introduction  of  rhyming  words.  Dr.  Richard 
Hodgson,  Frederick  Myers,  Wm.  T.  Stead,  and  my  spirit  wife 
and  others  allude  to  this  peculiarity,  some  with  regret,  but  with¬ 
out  casting  blame  on  the  instrument;  and  knowing  the  reason 
for  it,  attribute  the  cause  to  her  ancient  spirit  control.  There  was 
only  one  exception  of  not  rhyming  in  the  writing  I  received, 
through  this  psychic,  and  that  was  when  Clegg  Wright,  the 
once  noted  medium,  wrote  for  me ;  and  through  him  we  learn 
the  reason  why  he  did  not  rhyme  in  his  writing.  Flis  message 
appears  at  length  in  the  preceding  chapter;  and  from  it  I  quote 
his  own  evidence  on  this  point,  viz.:  “I  Clegg  Wright  am  here; 
and  I  am  just  as  real,  and  just  as  much  in  life,  as  when  I  was 
a  visitor  at  Lily  Dale  before.  I  see  you  too,  I  also  see  why  I  was 
shifted.  I  am  nearer  and  beyond  the  rhyming  necessity.  Eberling, 
the  instrument’s  guide,  in  accordance  with  the  expressed  wish  of 


404 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


my  guides,  permitted  me  to  be  shifted  beyond  the  rhyming  zone.” 
That  would  tend  to  exonerate  the  instrument  from  fault.  He 
also  adds  another  exception,  which  is  embraced  in  the  sentence : 
“It  is  my  condition,  that  the  medium  gets,  but  is  it  not  a  comfort 
to  be  able  to  write  like  myself,  and  not  rhyme?  I  am  glad  she 
is  protected  so  she  don’t  feel  the  condition  I  went  through.” 
Then  as  to  the  difficulty  that  Frederick  Myers  had  in  trying  to 
give  me  his  personality,  Clegg  Wright  writes:  “If  I  get  into 
the  knack  of  entering  this  centfal  zone,  I’ll  give  description  of 
him  to  you,  some  time  when  censorship  is  off  its  guard.”  Clegg 
Wright’s  guide  considered  it  a  most  peculiar  mediumship;  and 
I  may  add  that  it  is  the  only  case  of  its  kind  I  ever  met  with, 
or  heard  of. 

For  long  it  was  my  strong  desire  to  secure  as  evidence  the 
handwriting,  especially  the  signature,  as  in  human  life,  as  evidence 
of  the  spirit  loved  ones  and  friends  who  communed  with  me. 
Having  failed  in  the  quarter  where  I  might  reasonably  expect 
it,  I  suggested  that  a  few  of  the  many  who  desired  to  accomplish 
it  might  try  and  write  a  short  message  together  with  their 
signature,  while  in  the  materialized  form  of  the  earthly  expression. 
Soon  I  had  on  my  waiting  list  of  those  who  promised  to  try, 
several,  which  included  Professor  James  of  Harvard,  Frederick 
Myers,  Wm.  T.  Stead,  my  wife  and  others. 

With  the  close  of  the  year  approaching,  and  with  the  conclusion 
of  gathering  of  evidence  for  this  book,  there  remained  time  only 
for  one  or  two  seances  with  Jonson,  as  my  final  opportunity.  To 
this  was  added  the  misfortune  of  an  unfavorable  condition  of 
health  and  strength,  and  a  weakening  of  the  psychic  power  in 
Jonson.  Still  notwithstanH^ing  I  attended  with  my  office  or  pocket 
pad  with  printed  heading  and  my  fountain  pen,  all  as  promised, 
the  writers  ready  for  use.  I  first  had  Professor  James  (see 
Chapter  XXXIII)  in  his  transient  (materialized)  body  approach 
me,  and  while  I  was  hoping  for  his  successful  effort,  he  said, 
“I  fear  I  cannot  do  it  now.”  He  then  dissolved  from  view. 

Myers  next  presented  as  described  in  the  same  chapter;  but 
did  make  an  effort,  which  raised  my  expectations,  by  accepting 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


405 


my  pen  from  me,  and  placing  its  point  on  the  pad,  but  failed  to 
write,  as  he  lost  his  grasp  and  the  pen  dropped  from  his  hand. 

My  concluding  seance  with  Jonson  was  not  held  till  the  lapse 
of  three  days,  and  was  a  large  mixed  assembly  numbering 
nineteen  sitters;  and  though  I  had  some  five  callers,  James  and 
Myers  did  not  again  appear. 

From  Toledo  I  went  to  Lily  Dale,  where  I  had  another  valued 
opportunity  of  hearing  from  relatives  and  friends,  through  the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone.  Among  those  who  wrote,  were  Pro¬ 
fessor  James  and  Frederick  Myers;  and  both  of  them  referred  to 
their  appearance  at  Jonson’s  ;  and  their  statements  are  of  peculiar 
interest.  It  was  made  clear  by  Myers  that  he  still  hoped  at  some 
future  date,  to  write  and  sign  his  name  for  me ;  and  likewise 
expressed  the  thought  of  complying  with  my  request  for  evidence 
of  his  human  identity  and  personality.  In  the  pages  of  Chapter 
XXXIV  are  statements  from  James,  Myers  and  Stead  that  the 
reader  will  do  zuell  to  remember,  for  I  am  quite  as  satisfied  that 
all  their  promises  will  be  fulfilled,  as  I  am  that  other  promises 
made  were  —  such  as  the  promise  to  meet  me  at  Jonson’s  and 
try  to  write  on  my  office  pad  —  which  were  kept,  and  partially 
fulfilled  by  them.  Though  this  chapter  is  the  closing  one,  as 
my  guide  Hypatia  informs  me  that  the  selected  time  is  now 
approaching  to  publish  this  book ;  so  if  the  predictions  made 
are  fulfilled  before  that  date,  they  will  appear  as  Addenda. 
7  have  full  confidence  that  I  shall  receive  the  human  signatures 
of  Professor  James,  Frederick  Myers,  Wm.  T.  Stead,  my  near 
relatives  and  perhaps  others;  but  not  even  when,  or  through 
what  medium,  none  of  the  spirit  ivriters  zvill  venture  to  say 
zvith  certainty,  as  all  zvill  depend  upon  existing  conditions  at 
the  time. 

D’Asia,  so  named  by  me,  as  that  was  the  place  of  his  nativity, 
is,  so  far  as  I  know,  the  most  ancient  of  all  my  guides  that  have 
evinced  great  interest  in  my  research  work.  So  also  other  exalted 
spirits  from  advanced  spheres  have  manifested  and  spoken  in 
no  uncertain  tones  of  the  great  mental  and  spiritual  awakening; 
and  the  ushering  in  of  a  New  Era.  I  shall  not  presume  to  state 


406 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


anything  I’m  not  authorized  to  say ;  but  have  authority  to  make 
public  the  sayings  and  writings  of  the  alleged  speakers  and  writ¬ 
ers,  and  by  them  assured  that  all  they  state  is  true. 

Spirits  can  read  our  thoughts  and  sense  our  desires.  This  I 
have  proven  scores  of  times.  The  first  time  my  spirit  wife  spoke 
with  and  to  me  through  the  trumpet,  she  told  me  this;  and  at 
once  I  put  her  to  the  test. 

Another  test  that  I  imposed  on  her,  as  well  as  more  frequently 
upon  Hypatia,  my  guide,  was  that  of  reading  my  questions  or 
my  requests,  as  I  had  written  them,  with  either  pen  or  lead  pencil, 
and  then  responding  to  them  in  reply,  through  trumpet  speaking; 
through  their  own  vocal  organs  while  materialized  at  Jonson’s; 
and  through  the  writing  psychic. 

I  am  also  pleased  to  state  that  there  are  living  witnesses  in 
Toronto,  who  can  verify  the  statement  I  make  regarding  the 
first  and  second  phases  mentioned  above.  I  am  free  to  state  on 
spirit  authority  that,  if  a  man  is  fortified  by  right  principles,  and 
has  proper  soul  desires,  he  need  have  no  fear  of  evil  spirits. 

I  would  that  all  could  realize  that  spirits  experience  as  great 
difficulty  in  finding  avenues  open  (properly  developed  mediums) 
for  communicating  with  earth’s  inhabitants,  as  the  latter  find  in 
trying  to  communicate  with  them ;  some  mortals  even  loch  their 
mental  doors  against  their  spirit  friends,  with  the  key  of 
prejudice. 

We  are  assured  that  life  in  the  spheres  is  as  natural  and  real 
to  them  there,  as  earth  life  was  while  here ;  that  when  they  pass 
from  the  mortal  habitation  they  are  met  and  conveyed  by  spirit 
guides  to  a  place  of  rest  assigned  them  for  a  brief  repose,  and 
then  to  the  sphere  of  activity  for  which  their  human  life  has 
qualified  them ;  that  in  spirit  realms  all  is  activity  and  progress, 
as  earned  by  consistent  desires  and  efforts,  and  is  attainable  at 
some  time  even  by  those  who  on  their  arrival  as  earth-bound 
spirits  are  "held,”  some  in  mental  darkness  for  long  years,  until 
they  have  atoned  for  wrong-doing  in  earth  life,  and  become 
imbued  with  proper  motives,  and  wholesome  desires  to  secure 
light  and  knowledge  that  qualifies  for  progression  and  service. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


407 


Efforts  are  aided  when  towards  a  higher  status ;  spheres  are 
numerous  for  those  of  like  attainment ;  nurseries,  graded  schools, 
colleges,  libraries,  lecture  halls,  brotherhood  societies  and  places 
of  amusement  of  an  instructive  character  are  ample ;  so  are  foster- 
mothers  for  babes,  nurses  for  young  children,  teachers,  lecturers  ; 
there  are  avenues  for  investigators,  authors,  inventors,  etc.,  for 
such  as  have  special  ambitions  to  enter  them;  many  earthly 
experts  in  various  earthly  vocations  are  aided  or  inspired  by 
spirits. 

The  spirit  world  is  a  second  earth  plane  many  times  more 
beautiful  and  grand,  with  its  duplicate  of  water  and  land,  streams, 
rivers,  lakes,  forests,  hills,  fields  and  flowers,  all  vastly  more 
beautiful  than  can  be  conceived ;  travel  is  as  rapid  as  thought 
from  the  mind ;  unison  and  harmony  exist  instead  of  creed  and 
contention;  gardens  and  parks  surpassingly  beautiful,  and  trees, 
and  birds  and  other  animals  in  the  primary  spheres ;  no  allotted 
place  called  Heaven,  nor  the  Hell  of  torture,  both  of  which  are 
described  by  them  as  conditions  rather  than  places ;  not  one  of 
hundreds  who  have  communicated  with  me  ever  expressed  a 
desire  to  again  become  a  resident  of  the  earth  plane.  One  spirit 
thus  clearly  expressed  his  view  on  this  subject:  “Oh,  life  is  not 
the  wonder  or  good,  that  men  believe  it  is.  To  me  before  I  died, 
I  felt  that  I  so  wished  to  live  and  gain  my  health,  so  that  I 
might  work  do ;  but  after  I  was  free  I  felt  and  realized  and 
knew  the  wonders  of  the  spirit  view;  and  wondered  how  I  could 
have  felt  content  to  live  and  suffer  as  I  had  to  do  in  body  frail, 
and  thin  and  pale.”  (See  Chapter  XXXIV.) 

Spirits  in  my  experience  with  them  express  the  desire  to  aid 
mortals  all  they  can.  All  are  greatly  pleased  to  have  the  oppor¬ 
tunity  of  communicating  with  mortals  through  any  instrument 
or  medium.  This  I  have  been  repeatedly  assured  is  true.  If  it 
be  true  that  error  and  false  belief  have  led  to  eternal  divisions 
on  the  earth  plane,  then  may  not  this  the  greatest  of  all  world 
wars  be  a  means  of  chastening  and  improving  the  conditions  of 
nations  and  peoples,  for  angel  communicants  assure  ns,  that 
following  in  the  wake  of  the  war,  there  will  be  violent  commo- 


408 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


tions  of  both  earth  and  water,  earthquakes,  floods,  pestilence, 
famine  and  great  calamities  among  the  people  of  earth,  as  a 
purging  before  the  New  Era  will  be  ushered  in  of  an  awakened 
mind;  and  conditions  of  peace  on  earth,  and  truth  and  righteous¬ 
ness  prevail  with  nations,  and  with  individuals. 

There  is  of  course  a  limit  to  all  human  investigation,  and 
means  of  proving  to  others  that  which  to  each  investigator  is 
convincing. 

In  my  later  years,  my  soul’s  desire  to  learn  more  regarding  the 
spirit  realms,  has  been  and  is  being  granted. 

As  this  my  first  publication  is  already  voluminous,  and  intended 
for  the  minds  of  neophyte  psychical  researchers  or  investigators, 
I  will  after  briefly  referring  to  two  or  three  matters  defer  until 
a  future  publication,  some  of  the  revelations  made  to  me  by 
spirits  of  men  of  the  long  centuries  ago. 

As  each  spirit  withdraws  from  its  mundane  home  —  the  mortal 
body,  which  is  left  behind  on  the  earth  plane,  and  changed, 
reduced  or  disfigured  by  disease  or  accident  —  it  is  granted  a  brief 
repose,  and  awakens  to  realize  it  has  an  astral  body  or  boundary 
of  the  then  present  dimensions  of  the  earthly  one,  but  more 
etherial  than  its  former  one ;  and  which  is  entirely  void  of  the 
markings  of  its  former  birth,  disease  or  accident  conditions ;  and 
while  in  the  sphere  to  which  assigned,  it  continues  so  to  be;  but 
at  the  time  of  its  advancement  to  its  next  succeeding  sphere, 
its  body  or  boundary  undergoes  change  in  its  density  becoming 
still  more  etherial  and  spiritual  before  its  new  activities  begin  in 
its  new  sphere.  Each  promotion  in  some  degree  affects  the 
spirit’s  limitation ;  though  the  spirit’s  mind,  consciousness,  indi¬ 
viduality  and  personality  continue  from  sphere  to  sphere;  and 
added  senses  new  are  found  functioning.  Advancement  of  pro¬ 
bationers  in  the  earlier  spheres  is  unequal.  Some  are  “held” 
therefrom  for  long  years,  or  until  such  probationer  has  fully 
served  the  probation,  and  secures  its  reward  of  merited  advance¬ 
ment.  Spirits  can  return  from  any  sphere  to  which  they  have 
attained,  to  any  sphere  less  advanced,,  or  to  the  earth  sphere, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


409 


though  at  first  only  with  the  assistance  of  guides,  and  of  aides 
assigned  to  them,  and  are  taught  how  to  make  themselves 
apparent  or  heard,  by  making  use  of  the  conditions  existing  in 
the  sphere  they  enter.  This  is  also  requisite  to  enable  those  from 
any  more  advanced  sphere  who  seek  communion  and  desire  to 
demonstrate  their  presence  to  spirits  less  advanced,  or  to  mortals 
of  the  earth  plane.  They  can,  when  conditions  are  favorable, 
manifest  in  a  transient  physical  body,  which  is  a  duplicate  of  that 
formerly  possessed,  at  any  particular  stage  of  existence,  and  is 
utilized  when  occupied  by  such  as  wish  to  demonstrate,  and  can 
speak  with  the  vocal  organs  of  such  body ;  as  well  as  by  entering 
the  body  of  a  living  mortal  instrument  entranced  and  using  such 
instrument’s  vocal  organs  for  operating  with.  In  such  case  the 
spirit  of  the  medium  gives  place,  or  withdraws  itself  from  the 
body  and  remains  adjacent,  or  in  some  cases  may  go  to  a  distance. 
An  alternative  to  this  is  the  spirit  wishing  to  speak  through  the 
medium’s  vocal  organs  suggests  the  thoughts  and  words  to  the 
subjective  portion  of  the  mind  of  the  medium  to  make  use  of 
through  his  or  her  objective  mind  ;  though  meanwhile  the  medium 
is  unconscious  of  what  he  or  she  is  uttering  as  in  the  case  of  a 
hypnotized  person  delivering  a  speech  in  response  to  the  sugges¬ 
tion  from  the  hypnotizer  to  do  so;  and  is  under  the  control  or 
influence  of  the  hypnotizer  while  doing  so ;  but  has  no  conscious 
memory  of  a  word  that  was  spoken,  after  restored  to  normal  con¬ 
dition,  neither  has  a  medium  so  utilized.  The  spirit  of  some 
individuals  who  are  quite  normal,  indulges  during  the  period  of 
sleep,  in  astral  flights,  or  the  going  out  of  the  spirit  without  the 
individual  really  knowing  it,  except  in  rare  cases,  but  afterward 
relate  their  wonderful  experiences,  that  at  the  time  seemed  real, 
but  were  regarded  as  a  remarkable  dream.  In  such  cases,  they 
cannot  always  return  and  succeed  in  re-entering  their  body,  which 
may  not  have  been  protected  by  advanced  guides  qualified  to 
assist  them  to  re-enter  their  body ;  and  that  is  one  of  the  causes 
of  death  in  the  case  of  “found  dead  in  bed”  in  the  morning  — 
cause  of  death  unknown  —  but  supposedly  “heart  failure.”  I  have 
frequently  taken  such  flights,  but  more  often  without  my  knowl- 


410 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


edge,  until  afterwards,  when  told  by  Hypatia,  or  by  Otelleo,  one 
of  the  ancient  Egyptian  guides,  and  aiders.  He  claims  to  belong 
to  the  Brotherhood  of  Light.  My  astral  flight  is  explained  else¬ 
where  by  those  who  participated  in  the  matter,  as  to  how  it  was 
accomplished.  Otelleo  with  two  others  escorted  me  to  a  gathering 
or  assembly  for  instruction  and  preparation  for  certain  work 
when  I  pass  over  the  boundary  permanently  and  become  a 
sojourner  in  the  spirit  realms,  so  he  thus  explained  the  object 
sought. 

Whether  in  the  physical  body  or  out  of  it,  as  in  the  astral 
body,  everything  seen  or  heard  or  done,  forms  a  part  of  the  “life 
record,”  retained  in  the  subjective  portion  of  the  mind;  and 
hence  what  is  recorded  during  the  astral  flights,  including  the 
instruction  given,  is  retained,  and  may  or  may  not  be  reproduced 
in  the  objective  portion  of  the  mind,  before  reaching  the  spirit 
realms. 

I  will  here  make  a  brief  digression  from  the  subject  now 
engaging  the  mind  of  the  reader,  while  I  refer  to  some  of  my 
findings  during  my  primary  investigation  of  hypnotism;  and  will 
only  revert  to  some  of  the  knowledge  gleaned  during  several 
years  of  that  investigation  which  induced  me  to  pursue  my 
psychical  knowledge,  which  will  always  outweigh  belief,  and  is 
by  far  more  valuable.  In  my  practice  as  a  physician,  surgeon 
and  accoiicher,  I  found  that  as  a  satisfactory  therapeutical  agent 
in  many  cases  it  had  no  rival.  In  surgical  cases  it  stopped  the 
flow  of  blood,  the  pain  of  the  injury,  and  superseded  anaesthetics 
during  minor  operations.  It  banished  the  pangs  of  child-birth, 
and  caused  the  phantom  of  fear  to  depart.  It  is  wonderful  how 
the  subject  can  diagnose  the  abnormal  conditions  existing  within 
the  limitations  of  the  human  abode. 

The  following  facts  are  but  a  few  of  the  many  I  have  estab¬ 
lished  as  such,  viz. :  The  mind  of  man  is  a  duality  in  its  function¬ 
ings.  The  one  portion  of  mind,  I  designate  the  “objective  por¬ 
tion,”  while  the  other  is  the  “subjective  portion,”  and  they  are 
each  in  harmony  one  with  the  other.  The  objective  portion 
acquires  knowledge  through  the  five  senses  which  it  governs, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


411 


when  awake  and  functioning.  It  is  the  location  of  intelligence. 
It  discovers,  devises,  plans  and  invents  and  exercises  reason ;  and 
having  will  power  commands  the  subjective  portion  to  a  limited 
degree  or  extent.  The  subjective  portion  of  the  mind  is  the  store¬ 
house  of  memory,  and  withall  never  sleeps  as  does  its  copartner; 
and  is  ever  active  and  alert,  like  a  faithful  sentinel  on  duty ;  and 
at  times  acts  independently  when  necessity  exists.  Its  constant 
duties  are  the  guarding  and  regulating  of  the  various  physiological 
functionings,  continuing  without  any  cessation  ;  even  including  the 
assumption  of  the  objective  mind’s  responsibilities,  made  neces¬ 
sary  by  that  partner’s  repose,  disorder,  or  incapacity ;  and  at  the 
same  time  continues  its  own  activities  pertaining  to  the  temple 
of  the  soul  or  spirit,  the  human  body,  its  heart’s  action,  circulation, 
digestion,  assimilation,  secretion,  excretion,  etc.  Further, 
together  they  serve  as  supreme  authority  in  the  soul  or  spirit 
which  is  enthroned  within  the  body  and  in  its  every  part ;  and 
of  this  embodiment  the  mind  is  the  executive,  while  the  subjec¬ 
tive  portion  is  the  keeper  of  the  soul’s  human  life  record,  which 
the  spirit,  when  it  withdraws  from  its  human  habitation  carries 
with  it,  as  it  passes  to  spirit  realms;  and  it  there  becomes  its 
passport  to  be  seen  and  read  by  spirit  personalities,  as  it  enters 
the  sphere  for  which  it  is  qualified. 

Consent  and  Suggestion  are  lock  and  key  to\  mind  in  hypnosis. 

The  reader  will  now  be  .better  able  I  trust  to  comprehend  that 
when  my  hypnotic  subject  is  ready,  I  by  concentrated  mind  and 
will  power  directed  to  the  objective  portion  of  my  subject’s  mind, 
aided  by  suggestion,  capture  that  mental  fort,  and  his  objective 
mind  is  a  prisoner;  and  thus  is  out  of  action,  and  becomes  dor¬ 
mant  ;  that  is,  asleep.  I  can  now  commune,  or  talk  with  his  incar¬ 
nate  spirit  by  means  of  its  subjective  mind ;  and  the  use  of  its 
copartner’s  sense  of  hearing  (which  while  asleep  is  of  no  use  to 
it)  ;  and  the  subjective  in  like  manner,  in  response  to  my  sug¬ 
gestion,  makes  use  of  my  subject’s  vocal  organs  (now  that  his 
objective  partner  is  not  using  them,  because  asleep)  ;  and  thus 
the  subjective  mind  of  the  incarnate  spirit  of  my  subject  car. 


412 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


answer  my  questions,  and  has  no  motive  to  serve ;  is  truthful  in 
what  it  speaks ;  can  tell  me  anything  it  has  ever  recorded  in  the 
life  record,  though  the  subject  in  normal  state  could  not  remember 
it  all.  This  subjective  portion  accepts  what  emanates  from  my 
objective  mind,  just  as  it  did  from  the  objective  mind  of  its 
copartner,  and  records  it  as  part  of  the  continued  life  record. 
All  of  which  is  concluded  before  I  restore  the  subject  to  his  normal 
condition,  otherzvise  confusion  of  mind,  would  result,  followed 
by  disordered  action. 

The  foregoing  detailed  description  may  aid  the  reader  to  under¬ 
stand  how  a  spirit  can  entrance  or  control,  and  make  use  of  a 
sensitive  human,  by  speaking  through  his  or  her  vocal  organs ; 
and  yet  the  sensitive  can  have  no  recollection  of  any  word  spoken, 
simply  because  the  objective  portion  of  his  or  her  mind  was  over¬ 
come  with  sleep,  or  rendered  inactive. 

Astral  Flights. 

I  have  also  learned  among  other  matters  of  psychical  interest 
to  myself,  and  possibly  to  others,  that  by  strong  concentration  of 
mind,  and  exercise  of  will  power,  I  can  withdraw  myself  from 
my  physical  body,  at  a  given  fixed  time,  and  thereupon  present, 
in  my  astral  body,  at  a  place  I  desire  to  reach,  and  be  recognized 
there ;  though  apparently  debarred,  or  at  least  am  unable  to  exer¬ 
cise  connected  and  detailed  memory  of  what  I  saw  and  heard 
during  my  presence  in  my  astral  body ;  and  this  psychic  demon¬ 
stration  has  been  verified  verbally,  in  writing,  and  in  a  printed 
'  book,  after  its  accomplishment. 

Before  making  an  astral  flight  in  recent  years,  I  have  received 
assurances  from  my  guides,  whom  I  have  frequently  tested,  and 
in  whom  I  have  confidence,  that  my  body  would  be  protected,  and 
my -flight  aided,  as  well  as  myi  re-entry  of  my  physical  body  on 
return. 

I  so  stated  on  the  public  platform  in  St.  George’s  Hall,  Toronto, 
on  Sunday  evening,  28th  November,  1915 ;  and  there  promised  I 
would  demonstrate  it  to  be  a  fact  sometime  in  Toronto.  Three 
evenings  later  I  did  so,  before  a  private  circle  for  trumpet  voices 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


413 


(everyone  present  knowing  me).  It  was  my  first  ef¥ort  for  that 
particular  phase.  On  the  afternoon  preceding  the  evening  seance, 
I  sent  a  brief  intimation  to  the  place  for  the  circle,  simply  stating, 
“I  hope  to  be  at  the  seance  tonight ;  but  don’t  wait  for  me.  You 
will  hear  from  me  later.” 

Full  particulars  have  been  published  by  Herbert  G.  Pauli,  in  a 
booklet,  “The  Voice  of  the  Spirit.”  Chapter  V  or  the  fifth  seance 
will  verify  my  statement,  and  my  demonstration  through  a  trum¬ 
pet,  and  that  I  was  reported  by  the  spirit  control  of  the  medium  as 
present  in  my  astral  body.  However,  my  astral  was  escorted  to 
and  from  the  place  by  spirit  guides  who  had  me  in  my  home  in 
time  to  reply  to  the  spokesman  over  the  ’phone,  who  cross-exam¬ 
ined  me,  and  gave  my  replies  to  others  present  with  him.  My 
arrival  at  the  seance  was  a  sudden  surprise,  and  my  demonstra¬ 
tion  produced  the  conviction  of  “proven.” 

As  promised  over  the  ’phone,  I  prepared  a  written  explanation 
of  my  experiences  of  the  evening,  a  copy  of  which  was  called  for 
the  next  day,  and  appears  along  with  the  records  of  particulars, 
at  the  seance  in  question,  which  is  numbered  V  in  the  booklet.  I 
include  here  all  that  I  had  then  to  say,  viz. ; 

“Sitting  in  the  occult  circle  of  seven,  comprised  of  the  Toronto 
“Bureau  Committee,  listening  to  discamate  spirits’  voices,  at  a 
“recent  seance  with  Hugh  Gordon  Burroughs,  trumpet  psychic, 
“I  was  spoken  to  and  questioned,  by  his  control.” 

“Dr.  King,  why  are  you  so  quiet  tonight?”  “  I  replied,  I  am 
“thinking.” 

“This  was  true,  for  I  was  cogitating  the  trial  of  another  new 
“experiment,  which  if  successful,  could  be  confirmed  by  my  col- 
“league  sitters,  and  thus  prepare  further  evidence  of  value  to 
“prove  what  I  had  previously  asserted  several  times  regarding 
“astral  flights.” 

“Two  features  I  had  listed  as  proven  already,  viz.:  my  flight 
“to  New  York  State,  where  my  spirit-picture  appeared  on  a  pho¬ 
tograph  along  with  a  mortal  one  of  my  brother’s  wife.” 

“Again  another  psychic  phase  I  had  succeeded  in,  by  making 
“an  astral  flight  and  appearing  along  with  other  personalities  at 


414 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“a  materializing  seance  held  by  the  “Intellectual  Circle”  in  Kansas 
“City,  on  the  night  of  January  25th,  1910.  On  that  occasion  my 
“astral  body  was  visible,  and  my  voice  was  audible  to  Judge  Dill, 
“and  the  other  sitters.  I  there  told  them  I  was  Dr.  John  S.  King 
“of  Toronto,  and  I  would  make  another  visit  and  would  then 
“have  sufficient  strength,  I  thought,  to  sign  my  name  for  them. 
“What  I  here  affirm  has  been  verified  in  writing,  and  can  be  cor- 
“roborated  by  Judge  Dill  and  others  among  the  then  sitters.” 

I  introduce  another  similar  instance  to  the  above  here,  as  a 
matter  of  convenience  and  preservation  of  a  more  recent  experi¬ 
ence,  viz. :  On  May  14th,  1916,  I  appeared  at  a  seance  held  at 
J.  B.  Jonson’s,  Toledo,  and  noticed  present  a  Toronto  gentleman 
friend,  James  Poole,  a  well-known  business  man  to  whom,  owing 
to  conditions  being  unfavorable  (a  thunder  storm  had  been  pre¬ 
vailing)  I  could  not  speak,  but  as  I  had  promised  him  before  he 
left  home  that  I  would  meet  him  there  in  my  astral  body,  by 
walking  from  the  cabinet  during  the  seance  as  others  do.  I  did 
so  and  tapped  him  on  his  thumb  with  a  small  stick  I  carried,  just 
to  remind  him  that  I  had  kept  my  promise  to  him. 

Hypatia  and  des  Asia,  two  of  my  guides,  and  my  wife  May 
were  there  also  and  materialized.  I  was  present  in  my  astral 
body.  The  sitters  signed  a  written  declaration  affirming  my  presence 
and  demonstration.  This  ends  the  new  demonstration  added,  which 
did  not  appear  in  the  written  record  promise  over  the  ’phone,  and 
handed  out  the  following  day,  and  occurred  nearly  four  and  a  half 
months  later.  I  now  resume  the  statement  as  handed  out  the  day 
after  my  first  experience  of  speaking  through  the  trumpet;  “My 
“thinking,  alluded  to  in  the  beginning,  resulted  in  my  decision  to 
“absent  myself  from  a  seance,  and  then  surprise  my  colleague 
“sitters  by  coming  in  my  astral  body  and  trying  to  talk  with  them 
“through  the  trumpet  if  conditions  permitted.” 

“My  preparations  consisted  in  turning  out  all  my  front  lights 
“at  8  p.m.,  then  retired  to  my  bedroom  and  lay  on  my  bed,  when 
“I  remembered  that  the  instructions  of  my  spirit  guide  that  our 
“spirit  party  would  reach  the  seance  room  somewhere  near  nine 
“o’clock.  I  lay  awake  thinking,  but  could  not  then  sleep,  and 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


415 


“when  the  time  was  nearly  9  o’clock,  I  got  up  and  closed  my  bed- 
“room  door  to  shut  oflf  the  light  from  the  adjoining  hall,  and 
“hurrying  back,  spoke  aloud:  “This  is  just  about  the  time  for 
“my  spirit  friends  to  call  for  me.”  Then  with  my  head  on  the 
“pillow,  I  closed  my  eyes,  still  having  many  proofs  of  my  per- 
“sonality  in  mind  to  use.  I  quickly  became  asleep.  I  soon  awak- 
“ened  suddenly,  and  felt  satisfied  I  had  just  returned,  turned 
“on  the  light,  and  found  the  time  9.35  p.  m.,  and  so  went  forward 
“to  my  office,  and  with  my  telephone  near  at  hand,  felt  sure  it 
“would  ring.  Presently  it  rang.  ‘Hello !’  and  I  recognized  the 
“voice  I  had  expected.  ‘What  are  you  doing,  doctor?’  ‘I  have 
“been  asleep  and  have  only  been  seated  here  a  few  minutes,’  I 
“answered.” 

“Mr.  Pauli  then  told  me  I  had  been  at  the  seance  room  in  my 
“astral  body,  and  that  the  sitters  were  greatly  surprised.  He 
“jocularly  charged  me  with  having  been  playing  a  sharp  trick  on 
“them.  He  wanted  me  to  tell  him  my  experience.  I  mentioned 
“briefly  a  few  incidents,  which  appeared  to  be  correct  from  his 
“acknowledgement  (and  concluded  to  go  into  the  matter  more 
“fully  next  day).  As  it  was  getting  late,  he!  said  he  would  call 
“  and  see  me  in  the  morning;  and  I  promised  to  write  for  him 
“a  description  of  my  experiences,  but  told  him  I  was  not  per- 
“mitted  to  tell  him  everything  I  knew.” 

“When  he  called  the  next  day,  it  seemed  to  me  as  if  a  curtain 
“had  been  drawn  in  front  of  my  memory;  and  I  could  not  comply 
“with  my  promise  made  to  him  to  give  my  experience  of  the 
“experiment. 

“Did  you  ever  have  a  most  wonderful  experience  in  a  dream, 
“and  fully  realized  at  the  time  that  it  was  only  a  dream,  but  worth 
“telling  at  the  breakfast  table  next  morning;  but  when  you  tried 
“to  relate  the  incidents  they  had  most  of  them  vanished  from  your 
“memory?  This  is  the  situation  in  which  I  find  myself,  with  a 
“very  few  exceptional  incidents.” 

“The  modus  operandi  of  my  ‘astral  flights’  as  described  in  my 
“book  by  my  guides  will  be  interesting  reading.  Whether  or 
“not  I  succeeded  in  this  my  first  effort  to  speak  as  a  carnate  spirit 


416 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


“through  the  trumpet,  I  leave  the  decision  to  those  of  my  col- 
“leagues  present  in  the  seance  room  on  Wednesday  night,  1st 
“December,  1915,  as  they  were  purposely  kept  in  ignorance  of  my 
“intention  so  as  not  to  disturb  conditions. 

“Notwithstanding,  I  am  informed  that  so  very  anxious  were 
“they  to  verify  something  said,  that  the  light  was  turned  on  (to 
“see  the  time),  conditions  were  affected,  and  I  was  unfortunately 
“prevented  from  presenting  further  proofs,  and  thus  not  com- 
“pleting  what  I  have  earnestly,  and  honestly,  contemplated  accom- 
“plishing ;  but  I  am  hoping  that  I  shall  next  time  be  more  success- 
“ful.”  Thus  endeth  the  statement  handed  out,  and  known  in  the 
booklet  as  my  explanation. 

After  the  ’phone  conversation  was  concluded  all  repaired  to  the 
seats  they  had  vacated,  lights  were  turned  off  and  the  seance 
resumed.  As  to  what  most  immediately  followed,  I  quote  from 
the  booklet’s  record: 

“Spirit  Murphy  (the  control  of  the  medium)  :  ‘There,  ladies 
“and  gentlemen,  I  did  all  i  could  to  help  that  manifestation.’ 

“Spirit  Black  Hawk  (an  Indian  who  can  also  control  the 
“medium)  :  ‘Say,  everybody,  wasn’t  that  a  good  idea  of  the  doc- 
“tor’s  —  ain’t  he  funny.’ 

“Spirit  Hypatia  :  ‘I  give  you  greeting,  friends,  tonight.  I 
“am  pleased  to  be  here,  my  dear  ones,  especially  to  please  my 
“friend  the  doctor,  and  help  in  his  interesting  experiment.  We 
“have  done  this  for  a  purpose,  and  I  must  say  I  am  pleased  and 
“gratified  at  the  result.  It  will  have  two  distinct  influences,  as 
“it  represents  before  the  world  the  distinction  between  the  physical 
“and  the  spirit  side  of  life;  and  proves  demonstrably  that  there 
“is  an  astral  body,  which  can  and  does  leave  at  times  the  physical 
“temple  —  I  leave,  and  I  greet  you  all,  dear  ones,  with  a  message 
“of  help  and  love  —  goodnight.” 

Having  thus  demonstrated  an  important  psychic  fact  in  my 
home  city,  as  well  as  in  four  different  places  in  the  United  States, 
I  concluded  that  even  though  I  had  done  so  and  that  my  guides 
were  agreeable  to  my  doing  it,  they  were  compelled  to  prevent  me 
from  seeing,  hearing  and  remembering  too  much,  in  case  that 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


417 


I  might  not  wish  to  return  to  my  body ;  and  they  would  encounter 
difficulty  in  inducing  me  to  do  so. 

As  the  psychic  fact  had  been  well  established  in  the  presence  of 
sufficient  credible  witnesses,  and  my  object  attained,  I  shall  aban¬ 
don  further  efforts  in  the  future ;  but  am  fully  convinced  that 
after  I  have  passed  to  spirit  realms,  and  spent  a  short  season 
there,  as  a  free  spirit,  I  shall  be  permitted  by  the  Infinite  Spirit  — 
and  aided  by  his  ministering  spirits,  who  act  as  my  guides  —  to 
return  and  demonstrate  through  some  of  the  good  mediums  of 
earth  —  as  scores  of  my  relatives,  friends  and  strangers  have 
done,  to  convince  me.  And  if  so  be  that  I  may,  the  reader  can 
rest  assured  that  I  shall,  beyond  every  doubt,  do  so ;  and  still  try 
to  prove  to  the  skeptic  and  disbelievers  in  the  spiritualistic  creed 
that  they  are  still  in  error,  as  I  again  prove  by  my  presence,  when 
they  recognize  me  in  a  transient  body  speaking,  or  hear  my  voice 
through  a  trumpet,  or  hear  me  as  a  spirit  writing  independently 
on  a  slate ;  or  through  some  person’s  hand  automatically  these 
words;  7,  Dr.  John  S.  King,  have  kept  my  promise  as  made  in 
“Dawn  of  the  Awakened  Mind,’’  for  I  have  proven,  and  do  now 
prove.  Continuity,  Return  and  Communion,  all  true. 

Reincarnation. 

I  am  asked,  “Do  you  believe  in  reincarnation?”  I  answer,  I 
have  no  belief  regarding  anything  of  which  I  have  no  conception ; 
and  for  the  same  reason  I  have  no  knowledge  concerning  reincar¬ 
nation.  As  defined  by  some  individuals,  I  interpret  it  as  meaning 
—  the  re-entry  of  an  individual  discarnate  spirit  into  a  babe  before 
birth,  which  particular  spirit  has  already  undergone  birth  and 
physical  life  experiences,  of  perhaps  an  adult  man  or  woman; 
and  passed  through  the  gateway  of  physical  death,  and  there¬ 
after  underwent  change  through  evolution  in  the  spirit  spheres 
for  perhaps  centuries.  And  now,  either  from  its  own  choice,  or 
because  so  directed,  again  enters  a  new  infant,  before  its  birth, 
not  as  it  entered  on  its  (the  spirit’s)  first  experience  as  an  ema¬ 
nation  from  spirit  Infinite ;  while  now,  if  at  all,  by  a  process  of 
retrocession  from  such  sphere  as  it  occupied  by  merit  of  attain- 


418 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


merit,  and  with  much  attained  knowledge  and  its  attained  adult 
spirit  proportions,  must  by  its  retrocession  become  reduced  to 
the  diminutive  form  of  the  newly  conceived  infant,  which  is  to 
become  its  physical  abiding  place,  and  its  physical  body  growth  be 
ever  subject  to  the  requirements  of  the  spirit  which  occupies  it 
during  a  second  earth-life  experience. 

Is  the  first  life  record  still  preserved  in  the  subjective  mind  as 
that  of  Wm.  Smith,  together  with  what  was  added  in  the  years 
spent  in  the  spirit  spheres,  and  are  these  now  further  to  be  added 
to,  by  Wm.  Smith’s  second  life  record  as  made  by  John  Brown, 
into  whose  body  Wm.  Smith  entered  in  order  to  gain  a  second 
human  life  experience,  with  a  second  spirit  life  experience  to  fol¬ 
low,  which  indeed  is  somewhat  perplexing  for  the  ordinary  mind 
to  comprehend,  to  say  nothing  as  to  the  motive  which  prompts 
its  enactment,  and  the  results  to  be  attained? 

To  me  it  appears  that  there  is  reason  for  the  belief  that  the 
retrocession  will  be  found  to  prove  unsatisfactory,  with  no  evi¬ 
dence  to  prove  that  the  second  human  life  is  any  improvement 
upon  that  of  the  first  human  life. 

/  have  not  discovered  any  natural  law  with  provision  made  for 
such  an  exception;  and  were  it  to  he  the  rule,  or  a  natural  law,  it 
would  he  self-evident  to  all. 

Having  no  tangible  evidence  in  support  of  reincarnation,  I 
questioned  some  of  the  alleged  advanced  spirits  regarding  it. 
Among  others  questioned  were  the  alleged  spirits  of  the  philoso¬ 
phers  Socrates,  Plato  and  Aristotle,  brought  to  me  by  Hypatia. 
By  reference  to  Chapter  XXIV,  the  reader  will  learn  what  each 
of  them  had  written  in  reply  to  my  question,  at  least  Plato  and 
Aristotle  did  so. 

The  gist  of  the  several  responses  to  my  plea  for  some  knowledge 
regarding  reincarnation,  is  briefly  embodied  here.  It  was  pro¬ 
nounced  to  be  “chimerical.”  All  affirmed  it  was  not  true.  One  of 
the  philosophers  said,  “Nor  was  it  intended  to  be  so  understood.” 
Another  said  such  a  conception  is  inconsistent  with  natural  law, 
and  with  the  evolution  of  discarnate  spirit ;  and  that  literal  minds 
so  interpreted,  in  error,  the  sayings  of  ancient  psychics. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


419 


Moreover,  the  Infinite  Spirit,  the  Grand  Architect  of  the  Uni¬ 
verse,  nowhere  alludes  to  it  in  any  of  His  plans. 

Conclusion. 

Man  is  an  emanation  from  spirit  Infinite,  and  after  the  experi¬ 
ence  of  building  his  earthly  physical  body,  in  which  he  lives, 
moves,  and  has  his  mortal  existence  and  experience  for  a  period 
of  years,  finally  withdraws  with  his  astral  or  spirit  body,  and  is 
immediately  met  and  escorted  by  ministering  spirits  to  an 
appointed  place  of  rest,  where  he  secures  a  brief  period  of  repose, 
is  enabled  to  realize  that  he  is  no  longer  a  mortal,  but  one  who 
henceforth  will  be  a  sojourner  in  spirit  realms  —  but  not  in  idle¬ 
ness,  though  as  a  probationer  he  will  voluntarily  work  his  way 
from  sphere  to  sphere  in  a  capacity  for  which  he  was  primarily 
qualified  by  motives,  desires  and  acts  while  forming  his  human 
personality.  He  soon  learns  that  belief  alone  does  not  save,  nor 
dependence  on  any  one. 

Spirits  known  to  me  in  their  earth  life,  after  they  have  passed 
to  spirit  realms,  on  their  return  affirm  that  each  and  all  must 
work  out  their  own  redemption  in  the  spirit  spheres.  Each  and 
everyone  who  reach  there  have  to  undergo  a  schooling,  and  work 
their  way  to  secure  merited  attainment. 

Christ  (the  Nazarene).  He  exemplified  in  his  earth  life  the 
true  soul  personality,  which  man  by  his  motives,  desires  and  acts, 
should  establish.  He,  like  all  other  men,  emanated  from  spirit 
Infinite;  and  to  the  realm  of  spirit  returned,  after  an  earthly 
physical  experience,  and  is  still  seen  by  other  spirits  from  different 
spheres ;  and  continues  his  good  work  while  going  from  one 
sphere  to  another,  exemplifying  duty  and  teaching  others.  He 
is  known  to  all  in  the  celestial  spheres  from  the  humble  to  the 
most  exalted  spirit,  for  his  radiance  is  everywhere  apparent  in 
its  opalescent  hue.  He  will  not  again,  as  man,  come  upon  the 
earth  plane,  where  his  spiritual  teachings  were  distorted,  and 
his  body  crucified ;  but  assurance  from  spirit  sources  is  given  that 
the  Christ  principle  will  continue  for  ever,  which  is  so  accepted 
by  all  orders  of  spirit. 


420 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


God  or  “Deity’’  is  unknowable,  for  not  one  among  all  the 
spirits  who  have  communed  with  me,  acknowledge  the  existence 
of  a  personal  God;  while  the  more  exalted  ones  define  God  as 
Spirit  Infinite,  Omnific,  Omnipresent,  Omnipotent  and  Omniscient 
—  All,  and  in  all — ^thus  constituting  the  universe  as  a  whole. 

As  a  humble  mortal  I  cannot  but  admit  that  at  times  in  my 
mental  application  I  have  felt  the  inspiration  of  unseen  intelli¬ 
gences  prompting  or  compelling  the  thought  committed  to  writ¬ 
ing;  but  nevertheless  in  the  work  of  the  magnitude  of  the  subject, 
the  years  for  the  accumulation  of  facts  and  evidences,  it  must 
needs  be  that  errors  in  some  degree  may  have  been  made,  but 
not  knowingly  or  willfully;  and  as  I  now  draw  it  to  a  close, 
and  send  it  forth  to  the  thinkers  of  the  world,  with,  as  I  am 
assured,  the  approbation  of  a  strong  spirit  band,  I  do  so  with 
the  hope  that  my  soul’s  desire  —  that  “it  will  be  a  benefit  to 
humanity”  —  will  be  realized. 

Before  attaching  my  signature  to  my  closing  page  of  this 
great  volume  of  evidence,  I  desire  to  express  a  full  measure  of 
my  gratitude  and  appreciation  of  Hypatia’s  work  and  inspirations, 
and  other  valuable  aidings,  including  the  securing  of  capable 
witnesses  to  testify,  or  to  bring  evidence  worthy  of  introduction 
in  this  book.  From  first  to  last  Hypatia  has  been  my  earnest 
collaborator  of  the  book’s  compilation.  I  therefore  feel  that  it 
is  but  fitting  —  while  remembering  also  the  fact  that  the  book 
was  her  own  suggestion,  as  was  its  title  —  that  she  give  her 
concluding  expressions  to  its  readers,  as  to  her  view  regarding 
its  mission. 

In  conclusion: 

Here  are  the  things  that  I  have  won  as  I  climbed  with  care, 
till  I  attained  this  comfort,  in  the  sunset  of  my  years.  I  have 
now  ceased  to  feel  the  doubt,  and  the  attendant  fears,  that  come 
to  most  of  men  below. 

I  feel,  I  sense,  and  think  ’tis  true,  all  that  I  state  as  facts 


to  you. 


DAIVN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


421 


Hypatia  Contributes  the  Concluding  Sentences. 

“Every  mortal  here  or  there  has  the  earnest  desire  to  know ; 
and  I,  too,  once  living  on  the  earth  plane,  sufifered  for  the  truth 
as  revealed  to  me,  even  to  death;  and  since  I  was  set  free  I  have 
searched  for  an  instrument  through  which  to  come  in  better 
touch  with  humanity,  and  teach  them  what  I  have  learned  of 
truth. 

Each  human  soul  must,  as  an  atom  of  the  whole,  reach  forth 
for  itself,  in  accordance  with  the  will  of  the  Heavenly  Father, 
who  has  provided  for  each  one,  whether  they  climb  or  fall ; 
however,  like  vines,  we  eventually  climb  to  the  great  light  of 
Oversoul.  We  start  as  parts  of  the  great  whole;  and  we  attain 
along  our  paths  through  effort  the  things  for  which  we  pray. 
As  vines  creep  up  along  a  wall,  so  we  climb  by  knowledge,  the 
pathway  of  life,  overcoming  obstacles  and  thereby  gaining  that 
altitude  of  hope,  where  we  feel  the  Oversoul  or  Father  giving 
us  truths  we  can  understand. 

Our  souls  like  vines  reach  out  tendrils  that  entwine  the  truth 
we  find  along  the  way,  and  thus  add  to  our  power  to  attain  a 
higher  plane.  Our  longings  for  knowledge,  our  desire  to  know, 
are  steps  by  and  through  which  we  receive  support  from  the 
Guides. 

This  book  is  to  be  a  guide  to  the  inquiring  mind.  “Dawn  of 
the  Awakened  Mind”  is  a  wall  of  facts ;  and  as  such  is  sent 
forth  to  the  thinkers  of  this  age.  As  you  peruse  each  page,  it 
will  tell  you  how  to  find  the  path  to  knowledge  that  God  or 
the  Infinite  Spirit  hath  given  to  all  mankind,  to  learn  how  your 
own  soul  may  reach  out  for  the  truth  that  teaches  you  this 
great  fact,  that  man  is  not  within  his  brain.  The  soul,  the 
blossom,  the  fruit  of  life,  grows  within  the  human  body  until 
its  journey  on  earth  is  completed,  and  it  is  ready  to  cross  through 
what  is  termed  death,  into  that  larger  life  where  it  has  more 
power  to  do  good  to  all. 

I  have  written  this  truth  through  you,  my  dear  instrument ; 
and  have  manifested  my  presence,  through  many  mediums  of 


422 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


different  phases,  and  in  many  different  places,  in  order  to  demon¬ 
strate  this  truth. 

I  pray  the  great  and  exalted  ones  of  spirit  life,  to  help  me 
to  be  with  the  great  thinkers  that  I  may,  with  the  great  thinkers 
—  whose  writings  appear  on  these  pages  —  be  of  use  to  men  of 
earth,  by  proving  that  spirits  come  back  to  earth. 

I  pray  that  the  darkness  of  doubt  may  float  away  as  “Dawn 
of  the  Awakened  Mind”  brings  truth  and  light  to  those  who 
were  born  blind  in  their  minds,  to  this  great  truth. 

Continuity  of  life  makes  all  life  complete,  and  proves  that 
spirits  can  and  do  come  back  and  write  to  all  mankind. 

I,  the  leader  of  the  band  around  this  physician,  who  has  written 
this  book,  send  you,  through  him,  my  earnest  prayer  that  all 
the  darkness  of  ignorance  shall  fade  eternally  away. 

HYPATIA. 


INDEPENDENT  SLATE  WRITING. 


ADDENDA. 

These  addenda  become  a  connecting  link  between  this 
book,  and  further  revelations  by  some  of  the  exalted 
spirit  intelligences  named  herein.  They  comprise  brief 
greetings  and  intimations,  from  relatives,  friends  and  intelligences 
in  the  higher  spheres.  These  slate  writings  of  the  “Independent” 
phase  were  secured  through  the  kind  co-operation  and  influence 
of  Hypatia,  my  chief  guide  and  teacher,  as  per  my  written 
request  left  on  my  desk  for  her  to  read ;  and  which  —  as  will 
be  seen  later  —  she  complied  with  in  its  entirety.  It  will  prove 
of  deep  interest  all  through. 

I  concluded  that  these  independent  slate  writings,  for  the  first 
time  for  me,  as  an  unparalleled  test,  so  far  as  I  know,  would 
corroborate  or  strengthen  former  evidence  already  recorded, 
especially  so  much  as  could  be  produced  here  by  the  aid  of 
the  photo-engraving  of  the  slates  containing  the  written  evidence 
thereon,  over  each  writer’s  own  signature.  My  own  comments 
follow  at  the  close  of  each  sitting. 

As  the  work  of  compiling  my  book  was  ended,  I  determined 
to  give  its  readers  in  the  addenda  the  details  of  three  sittings, 
or  individual  experiences  with  independent  slate  writing.  I  selected 
for  that  purpose  medium  Pierre  L.  O.  A.  Keeler,  with  whom 
I  had  never  hitherto  had  a  sitting ;  but  as  he  is  generally  acknowl¬ 
edged  to  be  America’s  best  in  that  phase  or  class,  I  made  choice 
of  him  for  a  good  test;  and  it  proved  afterwards  to  be  an 
unusually  good  and  satisfactory  one;  and  at  the  same  time  a 
surprise,  even  for  this  experienced  medium,  as  he  expressed 
himself  to  me  at  the  close  of  my  third  half-hour  sitting;  when 
he  realized  what  the  final  total  results  were. 

The  Details  of  Preparation  While  Still  at  My  Home. 

I  first  wrote  out  a  list  of  those  I  chiefly  desired  to  hear  from, 
and  who  would  probably  require  the  time  of  three  sittings,  of 

423 


424 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


half  an  hour  each,  and  numbered  them  in  order  from  1  to  20. 

I  selected  those  twenty  from  among  hundreds  of  spirit  intel¬ 
ligences  of  different  spheres,  with  whom  I  have  held  communion 
in  the  years  that  are  past,  and  at  different  times,  at  different 
places,  and  through  different  phases  of  mediumship,  covering 
a  period  of  about  twenty-five  years  in  all. 

Everyone  in  the  list  —  save  and  except  my  son  —  had  utilized 
more  than  one  medium,  some  as  many  as  five  or  six  different 
ones,  with  as  many  different  phases ;  while  all  my  loved  ones, 
my  psychical  research  friends,  and  my  guides  —  constituting 
fifteen  of  the  twenty  selected  —  have  each  met  me  face  to  face 
in  their  earthly  expression,  some  of  them  several  times,  in  the 
materialized  yet  transient  body,  and  spoken  with  the  vocal  organs 
of  such  body. 

But  of  them  all  my  Chief  Guide  and  Teacher  Hypatia  has 
made  herself  known  in  England,  Canada  and  United  States  of 
America.  On  the  Western  side  of  the  Atlantic  she  has  been  both 
seen  and  heard  by  scores  of  people,  including  a  number  of 
relatives  and  friends  of  my  own  city  and  province,  and  else¬ 
where,  including  also.  Col.  N -  of  the  Province  of  Quebec; 

and  has  dictated  messages  to  a  few  of  them  —  including  my 
Quebec  friend  —  with  the  request  to  them,  in  each  case,  to  take 
such  message  back  with  them  to  me. 

Having  completed  my  list  of  twenty,  I  next  wrote  my  request 
to  my  Chief  Guide,  Teacher  and  Co-worker,  as  any  student  in 
earth  life  would  naturally  do,  when  requiring  that  teacher’s 
co-operation. 


Written  Request  to  Hypatia. 

“Toronto,  Tuesday,  p.  m.,  21st  August,  1917. 

To  Hypatia, 

My  Spirit  Guide,  Teacher  and  Aider. 

Following  on  the  accompanying  list,  are  my  loved  ones,  friends, 
spirits  guides,  co-workers  and  exalted  ones  from  the  higher 
spheres,  that  I  hope  to  have  greetings  from  by  writing  on  slates 
to  me,  independently  of  a  medium’s  direct  hand,  when  I  am 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


425 


at  Pierre  L.  O.  A.  Keeler’s  house  in  Lily  Dale,  while  I  am  at 
that  Spiritualistic  Summer  Resort. 

Will  you  kindly  invite  them  to  meet  me  there  and  comply  with 
my  request?  Will  you  please  likewise  request  George  Christie 
(Keeler’s  Control)  to  grant  me  the  sittings  with  Keeler  sufficient 
for  them  to  do  so? 

I  fully  realize  how  indebted  I  always  am  to  you,  in  my  psychical 
investigations,  and  my  experiences,  for  your  most  valuable  co¬ 
operation.  I  will  be  thankful  to  you,  and  to  George  Christie,  if 
this  privilege  is  granted  to  me. 

A  personal  friend  of  my  own  in  this  city  (Prof.  S.)  once 
expressed  himself  as  doubting  the  fact  of  your  being  the  identical 
Hypatia,  the  Neoplatonic  philosopher  of  Grecian  and  Egyptian 
historical  reference ;  and  as  having  suffered  martyrdom  at 
Alexandria;  and  before  he  would  be  convinced,  he  said  he  would 
like  to  be  satisfied  that  you  could  read,  write  or  speak,  in  the 
Greek  language  of  that  time.  So  as  the  coming  occasion  is 
one  for  independent  slate  writing,  I  shall  be  very  glad  to  have 
you  write  something  that  I  may  show  him  and  others,  written 
in  the  Greek  writing  of  the  time  you  were  in  earth  life,  and 
active  as  a  teacher.  That  may  possibly  convince  him  and  them. 

I  have  endeavored  —  while  compiling  my  book  —  to  prove  that 
all  I  have  stated  therein  regarding  psychical  matters  is  correct 
and  true. 

Independent  slate  writing  greetings  or  communications  are 
therefore  requested  by  me  from  each  of  the  twenty  I  am  naming ; 
and  all  of  whom  as  you  are  aware  have  written  (save  and  except 
my  son)  through  the  hand  of  Miss  Gates,  whom  I  have  —  with 
her  concurrence  —  named  or  designated  “The  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone  and  in  addition,  as  readers  of  my  book  will  have 
observed,  communicated  through  several  phases  of  mediumship, 
chiefly  materializing,  trumpet  speaking,  automatic  writing  and 
trance  condition,  in  brief,  coming  to  me  when  any  psychic  door 
was  open  for  them. 

I  anticipate  that  the  result  of  all  these  invited  ones  writing 
their  greetings  on  the  slates  and  signing  their  names  to  what 


426 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


they  write,  will  be  generally  accepted  by  readers  as  a  most  unusual 
test;  and  at  the  same  time  most  convincing  evidence  that  spirits 
can  and  do  commune  with  those  on  the  earth  plane ;  while  doubt¬ 
less  it  will  prove  to  be  an  exceptional  surprise  to  even  the 
experienced  Mr.  Keeler,  the  psychic,  himself. 

Sincerely  and  with  confidence. 

Your  Charge, 

John  S.  King  ” 


The  Invitation  List. 

Here  follows  the  entire  list  of  invitations,  though  I  here  and 
now  personally  extend  the  first  one  immediately  to  you,  my  Chief 
Guide,  Teacher  and  Co-worker,  throughout  the  many  past  years 
of  my  psychical  investigations. 

No.  1 .  Hypatia,  Chief  Guide  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 

No.  2.  Egyptia,  Guide,  Guardian  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 
No.  3.  Asia,  Guide,  most  ancient,  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 
No.  4.  “May,”  Wife,  passed  to  Spirit  Realms  29th  Sept.,  1911. 
No.  5.  G.  H.  S.  King,  Son,  passed  to  Spirit  Realms,  14th 
November,  1916. 

No.  6.  “May  Donna,”  passed  over  to  Spirit  Realms  as  infant, 
and  so  named  by  Angels. 

No,  7.  Stephen  King,  my  father,  passed  to  Spirit  Realms  in  1894. 
No.  8.  Margaret  P.  King,  my  mother,  passed  to  Spirit  Realms 
in  1886. 

No.  9.  Frederick  Myers,  England’s  Psychical  Researcher. 

No.  10.  Prof.  James  of  Harvard  University. 

No.  11.  Wm.  T.  Stead,  pen-friend  in  life,  Aider  now. 

No.  12,  Otelleo,  Guide  and  Aider  of  Spirit  Band. 

No.  13.  Omar,  Guide,  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 

No.  14,  Electra,  Guide,  Guardian  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 
No.  15,  Cleopatra,  Guide,  Aider  and  member  of  Spirit  Band. 
No.  16.  Eldemar,  Advanced  Spirit. 

No.  18.  Edward,  a  King  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 

No.  19.  Victoria,  a  Queen  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


427 


No.  20.  Hon.  George  Brown,  Editor,  and  Publisher  of  The  Globe. 
He  called  me  son,  while  on  his  staff,  1869-70. 

Sincerely  and  with  confidence. 

I  await  the  response, 

John  S.  King. 


I  next  placed  my  written  request  and  the  invitation  list  side 
by  side  on  my  office  desk  before  me,  for  Hypatia  to  read,  and 
be  cognizant  of  what  I  wished  to  further  establish;  and  that 
was  really  all  that  was  necessary  to  do. 


Some  Further  Preparations  which  I  Made. 

I  had  learned  from  some  of  the  patrons  of  this  medium 
incidentally  from  time  to  time,  each  their  own  experience  at  a 
sitting,  the  directions  they  received,  and  what  they  were  required 
to  do ;  and  found  that  the  routine  was  very  simple.  Having  this 
information  I  utilized  an  office  pad  of  blank  leaves  of  equal  size. 
On  each  of  twenty  leaves  I  wrote  one  of  the  twenty  names  on 
the  invitation  list,  so  that  each  leaf  differed  from  all  the  others. 
In  addition,  in  a  few  instances,  I  added  below  the  name  a  ques¬ 
tion;  on  some  of  the  remainder,  I  simply  wrote,  “Write  what 
you  wish  me  to  know while  others  were  left  to  write  anything 
they  chose  without  suggestion  of  any  kind  from  me.  So  when 
I  had  finished  my  writing  I  folded  each  of  the  twenty  leaves 
separately  with  a  single  fold  each ;  and  placed  them  in  the  order 
of  their  number  on  the  list,  one  upon  another,  and  tied  the  twenty 
with  a  small  cord ;  and  put  the  package  in  an  envelope,  which 
I  placed  in  a  deep  inside  pocket  of  my  vest,  on  the  right  hand 
side  of  my  body.  In  another  envelope  I  placed  the  written 
request,  and  the  invitation  list,  for  Hypatia ;  and  it  in  turn  was 
deposited  in  a  similar  pocket  of  the  vest  on  my  left  side,  both 
envelopes  in  a  safe  place,  there  to  remain  until  required,  and 
become  meanwhile  magnetized  from  my  body,  and  thus  be  ready 
for  the  magnetized  slates  of  the  medium. 


428 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Off  for  Lily  Dale. 

On  Thursday,  23rd  August,  at  9.30  a.  m.,  my  valued  and  con¬ 
fidential  friend  —  himself  a  neophyte  —  called  for  me  with  his 
automobile  for  two ;  and  we  left  at  a  leisurely  gait  on  our  health 
and  pleasure-giving  trip  of  about  170  miles,  reaching  our  destina¬ 
tion  —  Lily  Dale,  the  spiritualistic  summer  resort  —  among  the 
water-shed  hills  of  Western  New  York  State,  at  a  height  of 
about  1,200  feet  above  Lake  Erie,  at  10.30  a.  m.,  24th  August, 
1917. 


Interviewing  Pierre  L.  O.  A.  Keeler. 

In  a  few  minutes  after  our  arrival,  we  were  both  in  the  presence 
of  this  independent  slate-writing  medium,  through  whose  psychical 
make-up  most  wonderful  experiences  are  to  be  secured.  Our 
primary  object,  at  the  moment,  being  the  securing  of  our  assign¬ 
ment  of  desired  sittings  for  these  phenomena,  before  acquiring 
acceptable  lodgings,  and  a  food  supply  depot.  Conversation  was 
inaugurated  when  I  proffered  Mr.  Keeler  a  small  parcel,  addressed 
to  him  by  one  of  his  patrons  in  Toronto,  which  had  been  entrusted 
to  me  to  deliver  to  him.  Having  completed  that  act,  I  at  once 
suggested  that  my  friend  and  myself  each  desired  assignment  of 
sittings.  I  said,  “Speaking  for  myself,  I  desire  three  separate 
sittings  to  be  assigned  to  me,  and  at  as  early  a  time  as  possible, 
while  my  friend  is  here  and  can  speak  for  himself.” 

Mr.  Keeler’s  response  was,  “I  cannot  give  either  of  you  a 
sitting  before  next  Sunday  afternoon,  26th  August,  at  2  p.  m. 
One  of  you  can  follow  the  other  immediately  after  the  first 
one  is  through.” 

I  then  said,  “This  is  Friday,  a.  m.,  and  I  personally  want  three 
sittings  in  all,  and  I  desire  all  three,  as  soon  as  you  can  assign 
them  to  meF 

To  my  remark  Mr.  Keeler  replied,  “Most  people  do  not  get 
more  than  three  or  four  writings  at  a  sitting,  though  some  get 
five,  six  or  seven;  hut  I  do  not  remember  any  one  getting  all 
they  asked  for  or  expected.”  This  to  me  was  his  gentlemanly 
score  for  my  presumption. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


429 


Mr.  Keeler  focussed  on  me  a  look  of  surprise  at  my  persistence 
in  asking  that  three  sittings  be  arranged  for;  while  I  from  my 
standpoint  was  studying  his  facial  expression,  with  a  view  of 
determining  whether  his  control  was  clairaudiently  telling  him, 
or  impressing  his  mind,  what  the  arrangement  would  have  to 
be;  or  had  already  been  arrived  at  by  his  own  control  (George 
Christie)  and  my  guide  and  teacher  Hypatia.  Having  recovered 
himself  from  his  surprised  look  my  request  had  apparently  cre¬ 
ated,  he  said,  “You  are  expecting  more  than  you  are  likely  to 
get”  and  ventured  to  ask  me,  “Have  you  ever  had  a  sitting  with 
me  for  slate-writing  before?” 

“Never!”  was  my  prompt  reply. 

This  reply  was  as  promptly  followed  by  his  intimation,  “You 
may  not  receive  any  message  at  all,  and  I  cannot  guarantee  any¬ 
thing.”  This  was  further  supplemented  by  the  suggestion  that 
“It  is  quite  probable  that  those  you  are  expecting  will  not  write ; 
while  others  unexpected  may  come  and  write  instead.  In  any 
event,  it  is  equally  probable  that  one  sitting  only  will  prove  suf¬ 
ficient  for  all  who'  will  write  for  you.” 

I  then  made  a  somewhat  bolder  statement  in  our  friendly  parley, 
by  telling  him  that  “I  confidently  expect  the  ones  I  have  in  mind ; 
and  further,  I  feel  sure  that  they  will  consume  the  time  of  three 
sittings.” 

Mr.  Keeler,  the  good-natured  man,  that  he  really  appears  to  be, 
then  straightened  himself  up,  and  enquired  of  me,  while  present¬ 
ing  a  “doubting  Thomas”  attitude,  “How  many  writers  do  you 
expect  will  write  on  the  slates  for  you?” 

I  modulated  my  answer  to  this  question  as  follows :  “I  have  a 
list  of  twenty  names  in  my  pocket,  that  I  wish  to  hear  from; 
and  I  confidently  expect  that  every  one  of  the  twenty  will  write 
for  me  on  the  slates.” 

On  his  countenance  I  interpreted  his  thought  that  I  was  a 
very  presumptious  man,  and  he  vocalized  what  indicated  his 
unbelief  in  my  prediction.  But  he  little  knew  —  with  all  his 
experience  —  what  influence  was  at  work  in  my  behalf;  whereas 
my  confidence  in  Hypatia  and  her  spirit  band  is  as  steadfast  as 


430 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


a  rock,  for  I  was  aware  that  she  and  her  band  could  and  would 
bring  about  the  full  accomplishment  of  the  purposes  as  expressed 
in  my  written  request  made  three  days  before,  for  I  had  long 
since  proved,  beyond  peradventure,  Hypatia’s  capacity,  power, 
reliability  and  influence ;  and  therefore  no  longer  entertain  doubt, 
when  she  co-operates  with  me  in  my  efforts  to  prove  to  humanity 
the  truths  of  life,  and  intercommunion  of  those  of  the  earth 
and  spirit  spheres. 

JJ  noticed  Mr,  Keeler’s  mien  changed  after  my  emphatic  reply 
to  his  last  question,  and  with  few  words  he  remarked,  while 
turning  the  pages  of  his  engagement  book,  “Suppose  you  wait 
and  see  what  you  get  at  your  first  sitting,  for  I  cannot  now 
assign  you  but  one  sitting  each,  for  yourself  and  your  friend. 
I  will  enter  your  name  for  2  p.  m.,  Sunday,  26th  August,  and 
your  friend  immediately  after  the  conclusion  of  your  own  sitting.” 

After  thanking  him  for  the  assignment,  my  friend  and  I  left, 
and  did  not  again  see  him  until  the  time  allotted  for  my  sitting 
had  arrived. 


Independent  Slate  Writing. 

My  First  Sitting. 

Before  the  hour  had  arrived  for  my  first  sitting,  it  occurred 
to  me  there  were  others  who  had  frequently  communicated 
through  the  automatic  writer,  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,” 
and  through  trumpets  also,  whose  names  were,  in  earth  life, 
familiar  on  either  side  of  the  Atlantic ;  and  who  might  by  chance 
be  present  at  this  great  concentration  meeting  place,  although 
not  on  my  list  of  invited  ones,  —  and  not  purposely  ignored  — 
I  did  not  ask  Hypatia  to  include  them  in  the  invitation,  never¬ 
theless  if  time  and  opportunity  presented,  they,  with  the  others, 
would  be  equally  welcome. 

When  the  names  evolved  from  my  subjective  to  my  objective 
mind,  I  did  not  hesitate,  but  prepared  three  more  leaves  containing 
each  one  a  name,  and  they  were  the  following  three,  viz. : 
Prof.  Thompson  J.  Hudson,  William  Stainton  Moses  and  Dr. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


431 


Richard  Hodgson.  These  were  then  added  to  the  packet,  making 
twenty-three  names  in  all. 

With  the  Psychic  Alone.  First  Sittiing. 

I  was  promptly  on  hand  at  the  time  assigned  me.  The  room 
was,  as  judged  by  the  eye,  12x14  feet,  or  thereabouts.  There 
were  two  doors  and  both  open ;  as  also'  two  windows,  that  on 
the  west  open,  and  through  jt  good,  pure  air  was  entering,  as 
well  as  the  rays  of  the  sun,  when  not  interrupted  by  passing 
clouds.  The  other  window  on  the  south  being  of  stained  glass, 
presented  all  of  color  I  discovered  within  the  four  walls ;  and 
may  possibly  have  supplied  the  coloring  matter  incorporated 
in  the  signatures  of  some  of  the  Advanced  spirits  who  wrote 
for  me.  (This  is  only  a  conjecture,  for  there  are  other  sources 
from  which  Levitation-Kingdom  Spirits  bring  coloring  matter 
of  the  clay  kinds.) 

On  the  south  side  of  the  table  sat  the  medjum  while  I  was 
accorded  the  empty  chair  on  the  north  side ;  and  thus  we  faced 
each  other,  with  an  ordinary  table  between  us,  on  one  end  of 
which  was  a  stack  of  slates,  which  he  claimed  had  been  mag¬ 
netized.  The  time  occupied  for  a  sitting  is  usually  half  an  hour, 
more  or  less,  for  which  a  fee  of  $2.00  is  exacted ;  and  all  slates 
written  on  are  paid  for  at  the  rate  of  ten  cents  each  and  are 
carried  away  by  the  sitters. 

The  slates  on  the  table  were  all  of  the  same  size,  and  appar¬ 
ently  new,  and  unwritten  upon.  Mr.  Keeler  volunteered  the 
statement  that  “all  slates  are  sjmilar  in  size  in  each  lot  ordered.” 
The  surface  for  writing  on  measured  5x7  inches.  In  a  small 
dish  adjacent  to  the  slates  were  the  nibs  or  points  of  soft  and 
light  colored  slate  pencils,  each  about  one-quarter  inch  long,  and 
softer  in  grade  than  the  slates;  and  are  for  use  by  the  spirit 
writers. 

A  soft,  wet  sponge  was  also  adjacent  to  the  slates  for  use  in 
cleaning  their  surface. 

Mr.  Keeler  directed  me  to  “clean  a  couple  of  the  slates,  and 
then  examine  them”;  and  I  complied  with  his  direction,  for  I 


432 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


rubbed  their  surface  with  the  wet  sponge,  to  remove  any  dust  or 
marks,  but  found  none;  but  incidentally  while  conversing  con¬ 
tinued'  my  operating  until  six  slates  were  so  treated;  and  I  was 
satisfied  they  were  new  and  devoid  of  all  marks  or  other  device 
or  contrivance,  even  for  conjuring,  to  develop  evidence  of  the 
particular  kind  that  I  anticipated  receiving.  On  that  score  I 
may  here  add,  I  am  absolutely  convinced,  for  conjurors  can  never 
successfully  compete  with  spirit-power. 

Mr.  Keeler  further  directed  me  to  write  each  name  of  those 
I  expected  on  a  separate  slip  of  paper,  and  then  fold  once  each 
of  the  papers  written  on.  I  -was  a  receptive  student,  but  for  the 
moment,  when  I  suggested  that  I  had  learned  this  part  of  the 
routine  from  one  of  his  patrons  jn  the  city  of  Toronto  ;  and  had 
so  prepared  them  accordingly  before  I  had  secured  the  present 
sitting;  and  enquired,  “Will  they  do?” 

His  reply  —  as  I  withdrew  the  packet,  now  containing  the 
original  twenty  and  the  added  three  papers  —  was,  “Yes,  they 
will  do;  hut  take  the  string  off  the  packet,  and)  scatter  the  papers 
loosely  in  a  group  on  the  table  between  us  (which  I  did),  and 
some  among  them  may  come  and  write.”  I  looked  at  my  watch 
and  by  this  time  the  half  hour  was  being  rapidly  exhausted ; 
and  yet  not  a  single  sound  had  been  heard,  or  any  vibration  felt 
in  the  slates  that  would  indicate  the  presence  of  a  writer. 

Mr.  Keeler  ventured  to  say,  while  looking  straight  into  my 
eyes:  “There  don’t  seem  to  be  anyone  here,  ready  to  write  for 
you  on  the  slates” :  but  while  placing  the  strong  rubber  band 
around  the  two  slates  between  us  on  the  table,  the  writing  at 
that  very  moment  started,  and  he  said  hurriedly,  “Take  hold  of 
the  slates  as  I  do  with  both  hands,  and  press  the  frames  together 
to  exclude  the  light,”  which  I  did.  The  writing  was  evidently 
being  done  very  rapidly  on  the  under  slate,  and  the  vibrations 
were  felt  by  the  fingers  beneath  the  under  slate,  then  came  a 
distinct  tap,  as  if  by  a  pencil,  which  signified  “slate  full.”  The 
two  slates  were  immediately  reversed,  the  writing  continuing  on 
the  now  under  slate,  until  another  tap,  signifying  “slate  full,” 
and  both  of  the  slates  were  laid  down.  Quickly  inserting  another 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


433 


pencil  point  between  a  second  pair  of  the  six  slates  I  had 
cleaned,  without  adding  the  rubber  band,  still  around  the  first  pair 
and  there  to  remain ;  we  held  this  second  pair  as  in  the  first 
instance,  the  writing  beginning  the  moment  we  grabbed  the 
slates,  and  in  a  few  seconds  tap,  reversal,  more  writing  on  the 
under  slate,  tap,  slates  down.  A  third  pair  in  a  moment  or  two 
and  writing  more  rapid  as  time  progressed,  a  tap,  followed  by 
reversal,  and  that  by  silence  —  five  slates  written  on.  Time  of 
writing,  less  than  five  minutes. 

The  writing  concluded,  the  five  slates  were  in  proper  order 
arranged  by  myself,  as  they  had  been  written  on  and  signed  by 
each  writer,  of  whom  there  were  ten,  as  that  many  signatures 
were  counted.  When  I  read  those  names  over  and  with  sub¬ 
dued  expression  simply  remarked,  “Well,  Mr.  Keeler,  these  are 
already  ten  messages,  each  signed  by  the  ones  expected  so  far, 
and  that  satisfies  me.” 

"It  is  wonderful,’’  he  exclaimed  as  he  gave  them  a  passing 
glance,  though  he  did  not  examine  them. 

Although  the  slate  writing  for  the  present  was  concluded,  I 
made  no  reference  to  what  Hypatia  said  or  did  in  the  matter. 
I  did  not  even  hint  that  she  had  had  her  interview  with  Mr. 
Keeler’s  control,  nor  intimate  that  the  latter  had  instructed 
Mr.  Keeler  as  to  the  two  remaining  sittings,  though  it  was  evi¬ 
dent  in  her  own  writing  in  the  English  language,  as  made  on 
the  slate  during  the  sitting,  that  she,  Hypatia,  was  summoning 
the  guests  for  3  and  5  o’clock  p.  m.  tomorrow,  Monday. 

I  proceeded  to  wrap  up  the  slates,  and  when  ready  to  leave 
again  asked  Mr.  Keeler  if  he  would  be  able  to  assign  me  the 
other  two  sittings  I  so  much  desired. 

Without  hesitation  he  opened  his  little  book  and  at  once 
entered  me  for  sittings  at  3  and  5  o’clock  the  next  day  —  Monday. 

I  then  passed  out  and  took  with  me  my  five  slates  in  a  pack¬ 
age  wrapped  up  in  paper.  I  also  returned  the  23  folded  papers  — 
each  with  a  guest’s  name  written  on  —  to  the  envelope  and  to 
the  pocket. 


434 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


My  friend  went  in,  and  after  half  an  hour’s  sitting  came  out 
satisfied  with  the  results  he  obtained. 

Now  examine  the  evidence  provided  by  the  slate  writing  on 
four  of  the  five  slates,  reproduced  here  by  photo-engraving,  and 
see  if  it  proves  anything. 

My  Comments  on  the  Writings. 

The  first  guest  to  respond  was  No.  8  on  the  list  for  Hypatia 
to  read  —  that  of  my  mother,  who  first  returned  to  me  as  a  spirit 
in  her  materialized  body  at  London,  Ontario,  in  1894,  some  eight 
years  after  “passing  over” ;  and  conversed  with  me  then,  and 
many  times  since,  in  a  similar  manner ;  and  has  also  spoken 
through  trumpets;  and  likewise  wrote  through  “The  Human- 
Psychic-Telephone,”  as  will  have  been  noted  in  the  book.  The 
same  holds  true  regarding  my  daughter,  who  is  No.  6  on  the 
invitation  list.  They  each  were  writing  at  the  same  time,  both 
beginning  at  the  center  of  the  slate  and  writing  lengthwise  on 
it,  and  parallel  with  its  sides,  but  both  finishing  as  they 
approached  the,ir  own  side  of  the  slate.  What  each  of  them 
wrote  was  of  an  affectionate  character.  The  daughter  also  drew 
a  flower  in  bloom,  which  bore  relation  to  what  she  told  me  a  few 
months  previously  through  a  trumpet,  viz. :  That  I  would  take 
a  trip  while  the  flowers  were  in  bloom;  and  would  have  a  sur¬ 
prise,  and  which  came  true  on  the  occasion  of  my  meeting,  on 
the  floor  of  the  large  aud|itorium,  a  medium  with  whom  I  had 
sat  many  years  ago,  but  for  long  time  I  had  the  belief  that  she 
had  “passed  over.”  The  surprise  wa.s  of  a  pleasurable  character, 
and  led  tO'  a  renewing  of  former  experiences. 

The  third  guest  to  respond  on  the  slate  was  No*.  20  on  the  invi¬ 
tation  list ;  and  by  photo-engraving  the  writing  is  reproduced 
here.  Hon.  George  Brown,  leader  of  the  Reform  Party  of  Upper 
Canada  before  confederation,  and  editor  and  publisher  of  the 
Daily  Globe,  who  was  chief  editor  and  employed  me  on  the  staff 
in  1869  and  1870;, and  designated  me  “son”;  and  from  whom  I 
received  fatherly  consideration.  Those  who  are  yet  living  and 
familiar  with  his  writing  can  compare  his  former  signature  with 


FIRST  SITTING  — SECOND  SLATE. 
No-  3 — Hon.  George  Brown. 


FIRST  SITTING— THIRD  SLATK. 
No.  4 — Stephen  Kin^,  Author’s  Father. 
No.  n — Hypatia,  ('hief  Guide. 

No.  (5 — Win.  T.  Stead. 


FIRST  SITTING— FOURTH  SLATE. 
No.  7 — William  Stainton  Moses. 

No.  8 — Eldemar,  Advanced  Guide. 

No.  9 — Yerma,  Advanced  Spirit. 


y 


•} 


FIRST  SITTING— FIFTH  SLATE. 

No.  10 — Frederick  Myers,  President,  Psychical  Research  Society, 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


435 


that  on  the  slate  and  will  find  satisfaction  in  so  doing.  This  I 
have  done  and  am  satisfied.  He  has  written  me  before  through 
the  hand  of  a  psychic  writer,  while  on  the  slate  it  is  independent 
writing,  audible  to  the  ear  while  I  had  hold  of  the  slate. 

My  fourth  guest  was  my  father,  who  listed  as  No.  7,  wrote 
on  the  third  slate,  or  on  the  second  one  reproduced  here ;  and 
as  in  the  case  of  my  mother,  first  made  himself  known  to  me  on 
the  same  occasion,  and  in  a  similar  manner  to  her  —  see  early 
chapters  of  the  book.  He  refers  to  his  former  efforts  in  life, 
to  instil  in  my  mind  the  orthodox  views,  which  I  well  remember, 
for  he  was  a  recognized  minister  of  the  Presbyterian  denomina¬ 
tion  and  often  held  parley  with  me  regarding  creeds  and  dogmas. 

My  fifth  communication  was  No.  1  on  the  original  list,  and  is 
my  Guide  Hypatia’s  intimation  in  English  language,  that  she 
had  arranged  for  my  second  and  third  sittings,  with  Keeler’s 
control,  though  Mr.  Keeler  had  not  up  to  the)  close  of  the  sitting, 
told  me  when,  if  at  all,  I  would  he  assigned  my  second  and  third 
sittings.  This  note  was  written  to  acquaint  me  that  she  was 
carrying  out  what  I  had  requested  of  her;  and  to  satisfy  me, 
that  I  would  not  be  disappointed. 

My  sixth  guest  was  my  former  pen-friend  and  present  aider, 
Wm.  T.  Stead,  who  was  No.  11  on  the  list.  His  call  was  a  brief 
one,  but  he  promised  he  would  call  again  tomorrow,  so  that 
Stead  must  also  have  known  of  the  arrangement  between  Hypatia 
and  George  Christie,  Keeler’s  guide. 

The  one  who  came  next  as  my  seventh  guest  was  not  one  of 
the  original  twenty,  but  of  the  added  three  names  that  I  put  in 
the  packet  I  spread  out  on  the  table  as  the  sitting  began,  and  was 
evidently  pleased  to  know  that  his  friends  in  old  England  would 
be  interested  in  scanning  a  letter  from  him,  written  as  an  inde¬ 
pendent  writer,  without  using  a  psychic’s  hand.  This  should 
prove  of  interest  to  the  society  which  made  him  one  of  its  hon- 
orded  officers,  although  belonging  to  the  spirit  spheres.  He  intro¬ 
duced  himself  to  me  on  the  first  occasion  through  a  trumpet  in 
1911,  and  afterward  used  as  an  instrument  “The  Human-Psychic- 
Telephone’’  for  further  communication  with  me. 


436 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  eighth  caller  on  me  was  the  sixteenth  on  the  invitation 
list.  He  is  a  guide,  teacher  and  helper  from  advanced  spirit 
spheres  and  a  member  of  the  “Brotherhood  of  Light.”  His  inter¬ 
est  in  my  work  is  to  be  continued.  What  he  wrote  was  in  red 
color.  I  have  the  English  translation  of  his  message. 

The  ninth  on  the  slate  is  No.  17  on  the  original  list;  and  its 
briefness  is  an  intimation  to  me  of  what  he  intends  to  do,  for 
I  have  a  previous  promise  he  made  to  me,  regarding  important 
communications,  which  are  yet  to  be  made.  He  has  communi¬ 
cated  through  trumpet  and  through  a-utomatic  writer  several 
times. 

The  one  who  wrote  next  was  No.  10  at  the  first  sitting,  though 
No.  9  on  the  original  l,ist;  an  honored  name  in  England  as  a 
psychical  researcher;  and  has  been  much  with  me  during  the 
compilation  of  my  book,  in  which  he  has  several  times  expressed 
his  deep  interest.  Someone  in  England  should  be  able  to  compare 
his  writing  on  the  slate  with  his  production  while  in  the  mundane 
sphere. 

The  reader  is  invited  to  take  note  of  the  fact  that  of  the  orig¬ 
inal  twenty  invited,  nine  of  them  came  in  response  to  my  invita¬ 
tion,  at  the  first  sitting,  while  the  tenth  one  was  one  of  the  three 
subsequently  afforded  an  opportunity;  for  which  I  am  exceed- 
ingly  gratified,  and  heartily  thank  them. 

Independent  Slate  Writing. 

My  Second  Sitting. 

Before  dealing  with  the  seance,  the  reader  will  excuse  me  if 
I  narrate  a  personal  experience  I  underwent  —  before  going  to 
keep  my  3  o’clock  engagement  with  Mr.  Keeler  —  as  evidence 
from  a  distinguished  man,  over  his  own  signature,  refers  to  it 
in  the  sitting  I  had  in  the  course  of  two  hours  after  its  occur¬ 
rence. 

The  trip  to  Lily  Dale,  combined  with  the  pure  atmosphere  and 
other  salutary  conditions  were  together  responsible  for  inducing 
a  vigorous  appetite,  which  was  developing  rapidly  at  the  end  of 
three  days.  So  when  I  had  partaken  of  my  lunch,  which  included 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


437 


a  tempting  bit  of  cold  roast  pork,  which  was  not  very  well  taken 
care  of  by  my  unreasoning  stomach,  because  not  accustomed  to 
it,  I  soon  began  to  feel  that  abnormal  conditions  were  present 
and  suggested  to  my  friend  that  we  take  a  walk  out  in  the  woods 
to  what  was  known  as  “the  old  camp-meeting  ground  of  the  old- 
time  spiritualists,”  and  see  and  hear  what  was  going  on  there  ;  and 
I  would  show  him  the  stump  of  a  great  forest  tree,  which  formed 
the  platform-  for  speakers  from  all  points  of  the  compass,  includ¬ 
ing  the  Canadian  then  speaking  to  him.  To  this  proposal  he  at 
once  agreed,  and  we  started  without  delay.  As  we  were 
approaching  the  place,  I  suffered  more  and  more  severely  from 
what  is  generally  termed  “acute  indigestion,”  and  with  some 
difficulty  soon  reached  a  seat  in  the  circle  of  people  who  were 
interested  in  a  Pennsylvania  farmer,  who,  under  the  control  of 
an  Indian,  was  healing  the  sick.  This  farmer,  and  non-pro¬ 
fessional  psychic,  approached  the  group  where  my  friend  and  I 
were  seated;  and  while  in  his  normal  condition,  I  asked  him, 
“Can  a  Canadian  Indian  control  you?”  He  replied,  “Yes.”  I  at 
once  called  to  my  aid  Chief  Tecumseh,  whO'  led  the  Indian  forces 
as  an  ally  of  the  British  army  in  the  war  with  the  Americans, 
and  who  fell  in  an  action  near  Chatham,  Ontario,  where,  to 
honor  his  services,  a  monument  stands  today  in  that  city.  His 
spirit  I  have  talked  with,  he  using  a  trumpet  more  than  once, 
during  which  time  he  informed  me  that  he  was  one  of  several 
who  composed  my  Indian  band  of  aiders.  I  also  summoned 
Gray  Feather,  control  of  J.  B.  Jonson  of  Toledo,  who  in  the  past 
had  frequently  conversed  with  me,  and  had  controlled  a  trumpet 
medium  on  two  occasions  for  me.  The  first  to  arrive  and  control 
the  farmer  psychic  was  Tecumseh,  who  shook  hands  with  me 
first,  and  then  placed  them  over  my  epigastric  region,  and  soon 
I  felt  improvement.  I  introduced  him  to  my  friend.  Immedi¬ 
ately  after  Gray  Feather  arrived  and  controlled  the  farmer 
psychic.  He  went  at  once  to  my  friend,  whose  hands  he  shook 
heartily,  for  he  was  already  acquainted  with  him.  He  then  said 
in  his  own  way  of  speaking  English,  “Me  so  glad  to  see  you 
here  with  my  friend  the  doctor,”  and  then  came  direct  to  me, 


438 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


and  did  as  Tecumseh  had  done.  They  both  deserved  and 
received  my  thanks,  for  distress  had  left  me  and  I  was  able  to 
keep  my  appointment  with  Mr.  Keeler  at  3  p.  m. 

The  slate  writer,  Prof.  James  of  Harvard,  referred  to  the 
cause  of  my  suffering,  when  he  wrote  on  the  slate.  All  of 
which  goes  to  establish  the  fact  that  spirits  of  those  who  once 
were  as  we  are,  now  are  around  and  about  us  as  ministering 
spirits,  and  know  all  about  everything  we  are  engaged  in. 

This  narrative  may  prove  tO'  be  a  good  condiment  in  the  rich 
psychical  food  which  is  for  the  minds  of  those  seeking  the  truth, 
supplied  from  the  vast  realm  of  spiritual  knowledge. 

I  was  promptly  seated  for  my  second  sitting  at  3  p.  m.,  27th 
August,  according  to  my  assignment,  which  was  made  after  the 
intimation  I  got  from  Hypatia’s  note  on  the  slate  of  the  first 
sitting. 

I  first  placed  once  more  my  prepared  papers  on  the  table  a 
trifle  to  the  left  of  front  of  me,  but  minus  those  which  had 
brought  the  responses  at  the  first  sitting.  The  same  routine 
was  followed,  save  and  except  the  strong  rubber-band  was  dis¬ 
carded  as  an  impediment,  for  with  the  slates  more  conveniently 
placed  in  pairs,  and  pencil  tips  in  their  place,  I  was  ready  when 
the  signal  of  writing  began,  to  be  quite  responsible  that  my  grip 
of  one-half  of  the  slate  frames  was  much  stronger  than  that  of 
a  rubber-band ;  and  better  able  to  keep  the  frames  in  a  firm  and 
unshifting  state  of  apposition  and  to  continue  it  until,  and  even 
during,  the  reversal  of  each  pair  of  them ;  and  prevent  all  light 
from  entering  between  them.  The  half  hour  was  nearly 
exhausted  before  this  feature  was  undertaken. 

There  was  no  exchange  of  views  or  opinions  between  the 
medium  and  myself,  for  I  quite  realized  that  as  an  instrument 
he  was  not  the  primary  source  of  the  knowledge  I  was  seeking, 
and  likewise  was  quite  aware  that  my  own  thought  questions 
could  be  read  by  such  spirits  as  were  expected  when  the  con¬ 
ditions  at  the  moment  were  favorable.  I  passively  waited  with 
confidence  what  I  expected  would  soon  be  made  manifest;  and 
at  the  same  time  realized  that  the  psychic  forces  and  magnetism 


SECOND  SITTING— FIRST  SLATE. 
No.  11— Electra,  Guide,  Advanced. 
No.  12— Otelleo,  Guide,  Advanced. 


'v 


■r 


SECOND  SITTING— SECOND  SLATE. 
No.  13 — Wni.  T.  Stead,  Aider. 

No.  14— Omar,  Guide,  Advanced. 


SECOND  SITTING— THIRD  SLATE 
No.  15 — Prof.  James,  of  Harvard. 

No.  16 — Egyptia,  Guardian  and  Guide. 


I. 


■ 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


439 


were  being  utilized,  my  own  with  those  of  the  medium ;  and  that 
meanwhile  the  routine  of  arrangement  for  the  exact  order  of 
writing  was  being  carried  out.  Any  special  interest  at  the 
moment  centered  on  the  intimations  I  received  from  Hypatia  in 
her  first  note  yesterday,  which  justified  my  expectation  that  a 
portion  of  my  guides  would  greet  me  today.  Then  my  pen- 
friend  in  life  and  present  aider,  Wm.  T.  Stead,  wrote  yesterday, 
“We  shall  have  more  to  say  tomorrow.”  So  I  expected  that  he 
would  prove  true  to  his  promise  at  this  sitting.  Of  other  friends 
invited,  some  of  them  surely  would  respond  also.  And,  per- 
adventure,  opportunity  presenting,  other  one  or  two  unexpected 
might  also  write.  And  very  naturally  as  the  minutes  sped  away 
my  expectant  interest  increased. 

Of  a  sudden  the  writing  began,  and  the  medium  and  myself 
grabbed  each  our  own  end  of  the  slates  and  held  them  tightly 
and  securely  till  tap,  signifying  slate  full ;  and  being  more  famil¬ 
iar  with  the  rapid  turn,  I  occasioned  no  delay.  The  rapidity 
seemed  to  accelerate ;  tap  again  and  both  slates  down ;  and  the 
second  pair  were  in  hand  in  an  automatic  action,  with  another 
tap  and  reversal,  followed  in  a  few  seconds  by  a  tap,  and  both 
slates  down.  Silence  followed,  as  no  signal  was  given.  Time, 
three  minutes,  and  four  slates  written  on. 

I  spread  the  four  slates  out  in  their  proper  order  and  found 
but  eight  signatures ;  and  glancing  rapidly  I  saw  that  these  were 
names  on  the  ^invitation  list,  and  so  informed  Mr.  Keeler,  who 
made  no  response. 

I  wrapped  up  the  slates  and  said  my  next  assignment  is  five 
o’clock,  which  will  soon  find  me  here  again. 

When  I  reached  my  lodgings  and  placed  my  slates  again  in 
proper  order,  I  found  that  my  first  guest  to  respond  was  No.  14 
on  the  invitation  list  of  those  Hypatia  so  kindly  notified  at  my 
request  and  this  was  Electra,  a  guide  who  first  materialized  for 
and  conversed  with  me  in  the  year  1894,  and  several  times  since ; 
and  has  privately  sang  for  me  through  trumpets ;  and  has 
appeared  publicly  at  seances  of  three  different  materializing 
mediums.  She  is  now  and  will  continue  to  be  closely  associated 
with  me  in  my  work. 


440 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


The  next  in  this  list,  and  No.  12  in  the  original  one,  is  Otelleo, 
who  first  mater, ialized  and  made  himself  known  to  me  on  the 
occasion  referred  to  in  the  book,  when  Hypatia,  at  a  seance  in 
Lily  Dale,  convinced  and  converted  “May”  to  a  knowledge  of 
the  truth  that  spirits  can  and  do  commune  with  mortals.  He  is 
a  member  of  a  powerful  band  of  spirits,  and  will  be  heard  from 
in  the  future.  He  wrote  h,is  greetings  in  his  native  language, 
and  in  red  color,  but  gave,  subsequently,  the  English  translation. 
He  wrote  in  English  through  the  “Human-Psychic-Telephone,” 
as  will  be  seen  in  Chapter  XXXI. 

The  next  to  write  at  this  sitting  was  Wm.  T.  Stead,  who  wrote 
yesterday  promising  that  he  would  have  more  to  say,  and  he  by 
writing  now  fulfils  that  promise. 

Omar,  who  next  follows,  writes  his  message  in  green  on  the 
slate.  He  is  also  one  of  the  guides  associated  with  Otelleo  in 
the  spirit  band. 

The  next  in  order  of  writing  is  Prof.  James  of  Harvard  Uni¬ 
versity,  who  refers  to  the  trouble  I  described  in  the  narrative, 
which  reference  in  the  slate  writing  becomes  interesting  in  view 
of  existing  circumstances.  This  note  was  written  as  will  be 
noted  on  my  return  from  the  woods  where  I  had  suffered. 

No.  16,  the  next  after  the  professor,  was  Egyptia,  the  second 
on  the  invitation  list.  She  is  one  of  my  guides,  and  claims  to 
have  been  my  guardian  spirit  from  the  moment  of  my  birth. 
She  has  promised  to  write  me  her  own  earthly  history  as  an 
Egyptian  princess.  Her  materialization  at  London,  Ontario,  in 
the  MacRoberts  home  in  1894  was  her  first  for  me,  and  the 
first  one  of  all  my  guides.  She  has  presented  at  all  such  seances 
as  I  have  attended  since  that  date  and  hence  oftener  than  any 
other  guide  except  Hypatia,  who  was  present  at  a  seance  with 
a  private  lady  psychic  when  none  of  the  other  guides  appeared. 
She  has  written  through  an  automatic  writer’s  hand.  She  has 
talked  with  me  through  trumpets  and  has  also  sang  through 
trumpets  many  times  when  I  .  was  alone.  I  have  had  many  con¬ 
versations  with  her,  and  tested  her  as  to  dates  and  events  in  my 
personal  history  from  boyhood  up;  and  she  convinced  me  of  the 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


441 


correctness  of  her  claim  from  the  accuracy  of  the  information 
in  her  replies  to  each  and  every  question  of  fact  regarding  sundry 
events  of  my  life.  Refer  back  to  early  chapters  for  her  first 
appearance  and  statements.  Her  writing  on  the  slate  was  a  slight 
shade  of  green  color.  Her  message  “Co-operation,”  and  that 
applies  all  the  time,  and  all  along  my  life’s  journey,  as  well  as 
the  present  time ;  but  some  day  my  readers  are  likely  to  hear 
more  about  my  guides,  and  probably  many  will  both  see  and 
hear  them,  for  there  is  a  new  and  better  time  coming  for  all 
seekers  after  this  truth. 

The  next  two  numbers  on  the  slate  are  from  my  wife  and 
daughter,  whose  communications  have  appeared  throughout  the 
book,  and  are  chiefly  of  the  home  kind,  full  of  affection,  which 
proffers  no  feature  of  special  interest  to  readers.  For  sixteen 
long  years  my  wife  was  in  opposition  to  me  on  orthodox  views ; 
but  the  last  four- years  of  her  earth  life  she  became  an  associate 
with  me  in  psychical  research,  and  was  converted  to  spiritual 
knowledge  by  Hypatia.  Her  history  since  passing  over  is  to  be 
found  on  the  pages  all  through.  Read  Chapter  XH  regarding 
my  wife  and  myself  having  a  mutual  agreement;  also  Chapter 
XXIX,  written  for  the  book  by  her,  through  the  “Human- 
Psychic-Telephone,”  since  passing  to  spirit  realm. 

My  daughter,  who  also  wrote  on  the  slate  independently,  has 
come  to  me  through  every  open  door.  She  will  long  be  remem¬ 
bered  by  a  large  circle  of  sitters  in  a  materjalizing  seance  at 
J.  B.  Jonson’s,  Toledo,  on  the  occasion  of  her  appearance,  and 
singing  all  through  of  the  anthem,  “Holy,  Holy,  Holy,  Lord  God, 
etc.,  etc.,”  while  in  her  transient  body. 

Both  my  wife  and  daughter,  when  writing  me,  but  not  for 
publicity,  do  so  as  any  wife  or  daughter  in  earth  life  would  write 
to  husband  or  father  when  not  for  publicity ;  that  is,  they  do 
not  when  writing  private  messages  maintain  the  same  degree 
of  reserve,  but  display  a  natural  affection. 

I  am  not  photo-engraving  nor  making  public  what  appears  on 
their  slates,  because  their  slates  are  not  for  publication ;  but  what 
is  on  them  is  written  by  them,  and  that  I  am  sure  of. 


442 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


Independent  Slate  Writing. 

My  Third  Sitting. 

My  third  and  final  sitting  began  promptly  at  5  p.  m.,  27th 
August,  1917,  with  conditions,  the  period  of  waiting,  and  the 
routine  similar  to  those  of  the  two  preceding  sittings.  Time  of 
the  writing  two  minutes. 

When  the  writing  was  finished,  the  medium  with  a  pencil  wrote 
on  a  slate,  “The  friends  you  expected  have  all  written  for  you.” 
This  was  then  read  from  the  slate  by  Mr.  Keeler  to  me. 

When  I  enquired  how  he  knew  that,  his  reply  was,  “It  was 
spoken  in  my  ear.”  (Clairaudience.) 

He  then  added  voluntarily,  “It  is  wonderful  that  everyone  of 
the  twenty  you  asked  for  came  and  wrote.  I  do  not  remember 
ever  having  such  an  experience  before.” 

The  foregoing  admission  made  by  the  medium  counter¬ 
balanced  all  the  effects  of  his  discouraging  remarks,  when  I  was 
seeking  on  the  first  occasion  to  secure  the  three  assignments  of 
sittings.  He  will,  however,  probably  understand,  if  he  reads 
this,  that  with  me,  at  the  very  time  of  our  parley,  it  was  a  fore¬ 
gone  conclusion,  that  I  would  have  the  three  sittings  I  asked  for, 
and  will  by  now  understand  why. 

However  I  wrapped  up  my  slates  in  paper,  bid  him  respectful 
“good  bye”  and  returned  to  my  lodgings  with  a  realization,  that 
my  desires  were  entirely  satisfied. 

My  Final  Notes  and  Comments. 

Readers  will  remember  the  fact  already  recorded  that  I  added 
three  names  to  those  in  my  original  packet.  One  of  the  three 
wrote  at  my  first  sitting,  the  remaining  two  did  not  write  at  all 
at  any  sitting,  for  which  there  may  have  been  a  good  reason ; 
but  in  their  stead  other  two  wrote,  from  whom  I  had  never 
heard  before  through  any  medium.  They  wrote  and  it  appears 
on  the  first  slate  of  the  four  made  use  of  at  my  third  sitting; 
and  these  are  numbered  in  their  order  of  writing,  as  19  and  20. 
The  former  bore  the  brief  greeting,  “Votre  Sincere  et  Fidele  — 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


443 


Josephine  Le  Reine.”  The  latter  note  read :  “I  very  much  Sir, 
admire  your  book.  I  should  like  a  copy  of  it.  Francisco  I. 
Madero,  President  of  Mexico.”  [Madero  must  have  read  my 
manuscript  for  the  book  as  it  lay  on  the  office  table,  at  the  very 
time,  awaiting  a  future  transfer  to  the  printer,  for  I  did  not 
carry  it  with  me  to  Lily  Dale.  My  guide,  my  wife,  Frederick 
Myers,  Wm.  T.  Stead  and  others  I  know  have  done  so,  and  I 
have  often  proved  their  ability  in  this  respect.  As  examples, 
Hypatia  must  either  have  read  my  request  to  her,  while  I  was 
writing  and  folding  the  papers  containing  the  names  of  my 
invited  guests,  or  afterwards  in  the  envelope  containing  it  in 
my  pocket  for  nearly  a  week ;  or  thirdly  by  mind  reading.  In 
the  case  of  my  wife  she  has  told  me  through  a  trumpet  exactly 
what  I  wrote,  and  what  she  read,  while  it  lay  on  my  table.  Again 
in  the  case  of  Wm.  T.  Stead  this  also  occurred,  when  sitting  with 
a  trumpet  medium  in  New  York  State  (Mrs.  B.,  now  in  spirit 
sphere)  I  had  some  written  questions  in  my  pocket,  to  ask  him, 
and  was  taking  them  out  to  spread  them  open  where  he  could 
see  and  answer  them,  without  my  asking  them  vocally.  While 
doing  so  he  said,  “Friend  King,  keep  them  in  your  pocket;  I  can 
read  them  there”  —  and  proceeded  to  answer  them.  Frederick 
Myers  once  informed  me  through  a  writing  psychic  that  while 
I  was  revising  my  manuscript  for  the  book  he  was  with  me  much 
of  the  time  and  was  therefore  farpiliar  with  its  contents.] 

The  third  message  on  my  slate  read,  “You  shall  have  the  help 
from  Edward  and  me,  you  desire.  —  Queen  Victoria.” 

This  particular  slate  cannot  be  reproduced  here.  The  lettering 
in  the  lines  has  been  accidentally  blurred,  and  hence  would  not 
come  out  in  the  photographing  process,  and  is  whhheld. 

Both  King  Edward  and  Queen  Victoria,  however,  have  written 
to  me  through  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  the  latter  several 
times.  See  Chapter  XXXI  and  XXXIV.  While  she  has  also 
spoken  through  a  trumpet  in  an  occult  seance  in  Toronto  when 
six  Toronto  people  were  present,  including  myself ;  and  there  gave 
as  one  of  three  reasons  for  her  attendance  that  evening,  as  printed 
on  page  103  of  a  report  written  by  the  publisher  thereof  and 


444 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


reads :  “and  also  to  say  that  I  have  given  confirmatory  evidence 
more  than  once,  to  Dr.  King  for  his  book.”  Etc. 

No.  22  on  the  slate,  which  is  No.  3  on  the  invitation  list  comes 
on  the  second  slate  at  this  the  third  sitting,  being  a  greeting  from 
the  most  ancient  of  all  my  guides  Asia  (so  named  by  me)  of 
prehistoric  times ;  whose  previous  writings  in  English  language 
through  “The  Human-Psychic-Telephone,”  can  be  found  in 
Chapter  XXXI ;  and  on  a  flyleaf  at  the  front  of  the  book.  The 
slate  writing  is  a  greeting  in  his  native  writing  but  now  extinct. 
He  will  himself  give  an  English  translation  of  it,  for  he  can 
speak  and  write  in  that  language,  but  wished  to  gratify  my 
desire  for  a  specimen  of  his  native  language  and  writing.  He 
was  a  priest  of  high  order  of  a  church  and  religion  that  nowhere 
has  longer  existence.  From  what  he  has  told  me,  he  must  have 
been  a  great  seer  in  his  time.  When  he  is  fully  materialized 
he  stands  about  9  feet  6  inches  tall.  New  revelations  are  promised 
from  him  in  the  near  future. 

No.  23  on  the  slate  ,is  the  third  one  written  by  my  pen  friend 
in  life,  and  present  aider  Wm.  T.  Stead.  He  wrote  for  me  at 
each  sitting,  making  the  record  effort.  I  will  a  little  further  on, 
again  refer  to  the  writing  and  to  him. 

On  the  third  slate  of  the  third  series  is  the  second  writing  by 
Hypatia,  this  time  in  Greek.  Here  Prof.  S.  of  Toronto  will  find 
Hypatia’s  response  to  my  request,  where  I,  on  the  first  page  of 
the  request,  referred  to  a  desire  expressed  by  the  Professor  on 
one  occasion.  I  also  secured  from  her  a  day  later,  her  own 
English  translation  of  it.  Greek  professors  will  here  find  a  good 
test.  The  original  over  her  own  signature  in  photograving  is 
reproduced  here  along  with  others.  (Her  translation  is  retained 
by  me.  Prof.  S.  or  any  professor  of  Greek  as  of  Hypatia’s  time 
can  readily  translate  it,  and  thus  establish  the  fact  of  her  being  the 
personality  of  that  period). 

The  next  writer  is  Cleopatra,  another  guide.  She  makes  a  clear 
and  definite  statement  on  27th  August,  1917.  Keep  the  statement 
in  mind. 

My  son  by  my  first  wife  follows  Cleopatra. 


THIRD  SITTING— SECOND  SLATE. 
No.  22 — .4sia,  Ancient  Guide  (Prehistoric) 
No.  23— Wm.  T.  Stead. 


THIRD  SITTING— THIRD  SLATE, 
jvjo  21 — Hypatia,  Chief  Guide  (Sccmd  Time). 
No.  25 — Cleopatra,  a  Guide  and  .\ider. 


THIRD  SITTING— FOURTH  SLATE 
No.  26 — G.  H.  S.  King,  Author’s  Son. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


445 


No.  26.  This  is  the  last  of  the  independent  slate  writings  and 
it  is  that  of  my  son.  He  was  the  most  recent  of  all  the  writers 
to  pass  into  the  realm  of  spir^it.  He  lived  in  the  mundane  sphere 
until  he  passed  his  fiftieth  year.  He  had  a  good  education,  and 
possessed  natural  gifts  for  drawing,  painting  and  music;  and  for 
many  years  was  a  deep  student  of  the  Bible,  and  well  versed  in 
every  part  of  the  Scripture.  He  was  a  man  of  bright  intellect, 
but  was  greatly  held  in  check,  in  all  his  undertakings  by  an 
infirmity  (epilepsy).  He  loved  controversy,  but  more  for  his 
love  of  reaching  the  truth.  His  belief  was  that  at  the  death  and 
burial  of  the  body,  the  soul  or  spirit  begins  a  deep  sleep,  and  so 
continues  until  the  general  resurrection  day ;  when  he  would 
arise  and  with  a  vast  multitude  be  present  on  the  great  Judgment 
Day,  when  the  few,  of  all  who  had  ever  lived  on  the  earth,  would 
ascend  to  a  new  and  everlasting  life,  while  the  many  (all  the 
remainder)  would  be  earth-bound  and  sleep  eternally.  He  did 
not  believe  in  a  Hell  according  to  the  orthodox  view  of  it. 

He  also  believed  that  I  his  own  father  was  losing  my  reason, 
which  he  considered  was  good  evidence  of  insanity,  without  any 
doubt  in  his  mind,  and  which  he  sincerely  deplored ;  and  as 
evidence  of  that  condition,  often  referred  to  my  attitude  regarding 
spiritual  philosophy,  together  with  the  accounts  that  I  gave  of 
seeing,  hearing  and  conversing  with  the  spirits  of  those  who  had 
once  been  men  on  earth  as  we  are  today. 

Finally  all  controversy  between  us  ceased,  as  he  passed  out 
of  his  carnate  body,  on  14th  November,  1916,  and  his  mortal 
remains  were  deposited  in  a  grave  in  one  of  the  city  cemeteries, 
there  to  lie  until  nature  disintegrates  it  into  earth  elements. 

My  son  did  not  realize  his  candid,  honest  belief  and  his  faith 
was  not  justified  in  regard  to  it,  for  he  entered  not  upon  his  long 
sleep  ’till  Gabriel’s  trumpet  should  sound  to  awaken  him ;  but 
meeting  his  mother  and  other  loved  ones,  who  were  awaiting  him 
in  spirit,  was  welcomed  by  them,  as  he  has  since  told  me  and 
others  through  a  trumpet ;  and  so  was  made  to  realize  that  there 
is  no  death  for  the  spirit;  and  that  life  in  the  spirit  realm  js  as 
natural  to  those  there,  as  earth  life  is  to  mortals  here.  He  also 


446 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


learned  that  he  like  them  could  pass  through  any  door  that  was 
opened  to  him  by  those  he  left  behind  in  the  earth  sphere,  and 
commune  with  them  ^in  a  voice  audible  to  their  ear;  so  he  was 
permitted  to  speak  through  one  of  the  identical  trumpets  that 
these  relatives  had  themselves  spoken  through  (Mrs.  Etta 
Wriedt’s)  ;  and  which  while  on  earth  —  as  many  others  still  do  — 
he  considered  impossible ;  but  when  assured  that  it  was  true, 
he  also  would  try.  On  January  7th,  1917,  his  spirit,  or  rather 
himself  as  a  spirit  Ego  came  to  me  while  I  was  sitting  with  the 
trumpet  alone,  though  I  had  expected  his  wife  to  join  me  at 
that  time. 

One  of  the  very  first  vojces  to  greet  me  said:  “Well,  father, 
this  is  Herbie  speaking.  Mollie  was  early  called  away  to  her 
brother’s  home  in  the  country,  as  there  is  sickness  there.  The 
sickness  is  not  serious,  and  she  will  return  and  meet  you  here 
at  a  future  sitting.  I  want  to  tell  you  that  I  am  quite  right  now, 
and  have  no  trouble  like  I  had  so  many  years.  The  funeral  was 
appropriate,  the  flowers  beautiful,  and  my  body  in  a  good  new 
wooden  overcoat.”  (He  was  in  earth  life  humorous.)  His 
wife  had  gone  unexpectedly.  She  returned  and  joined  me,  at 
a  future  sitting  twenty  days  later.  She  met  and  conversed  with 
her  spirit  husband,  and  he  with  each  of  us.  All  three  conversed 
with  each  other  as  naturally  as  jn  the  home.  This  time  he  also 
alluded  to  the  funeral  and  service  in  his  former  home;  as  well 
as  to  his  former  opposition  to  my  views,  and  to  what  I  claimed 
I  had  proven  true.  He  would  try  and  make  amend  for  the  past ; 
and  would  come  through  any  open  door,  when  opportunity 
offered.  But  in  doing  so  he  would  not  frighten  “Mollie”  in  the 
home  by  his  coming,  as  he  had  done  so  many  times  during  his 
infirmity  (epileptic  convulsions).  His  reference  was  in  a' 
humorous  tone,  meaning,  “as  a  ghost  visiting.”  He  thanked  her 
for  all  her  kindness  and  patience  with  him. 

During  the  same  month  I  attended  a  private  circle  of  a  few 
friends,  with  Mrs.  Wridt,  trumpet  medium  present,  when  my 
son  through  the  trumpet  announced  his  presence,  and  was  wel¬ 
comed;  and  while  present  aided  a  gentleman  sitter  to  solve  a 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


447 


difficulty  he  had  experienced  recently  with  regard  to  the  absence 
of  a  chemical  he  needed,  but  had  been  unable  to  secure  on  account 
of  the  war.  His  problem  was  solved  by  the  aid  of  my  son,  on 
that  occasion.  All  the  members  of  the  circle  heard  every  word 
that  was  spoken. 

Having  a  knowledge  of  the  truth  of  spirit  return  and  com¬ 
munion;  and  wishing  to  convey  it  to  others,  I  included  the  name 
of  my  son  in  the  invitation  list  of  twenty,  that  more  evidence, 
through  another  phase  of  mediumship,  would  corroborate  or 
discredit  the  evidence  I  give  above,  as  writing  independently  of 
a  psychic’s  hand  on  a  slate  in  a  room  with  doors  and  windows 
open,  and  the  sun  shining  in.  He  came  as  I  expected,  and  so  did 
the  whole  twenty ;  and  what  my  son  wrote  is  reproduced  here 
by  photoengraving  and  with  others  on  other  pages  of  this  book 
will  stand  inspection  everywhere. 

Do  I  hear  some  skeptic  father  quest,ion  me,  “How  do  you  really 
know  that  writer  to  be  your  son?”  I  answer,  at  the  trumpet 
seance,  held  in  the  dark,  I  knew  his  voice,  his  manner  of  express¬ 
ing  himself  when  talking  about  something  that  had  transpired ; 
when  his  wife  had  gone,  of  whom  he  spoke  as  he  always  addressed 
her  in  the  home ;  not  only  where,  but  why  she  had  gone  to  her 
relatives  in  the  country;  when  she  would  return  and  meet  me, 
and  we  three  would  converse  together;  the  whole  of  which  was 
corroborated  at  another  sitting  with  his  wife  present.  Then 
again  in  the  case  of  the  independent  slate  writing  in  the  light, 
he  corroborated  some  of  the  ^identical  things  he  conversed  about 
at  the  trumpet  seance;  and  again  wrote  of  his  wife  “Mollie,” 
as  he  had  spoken  of  her  on  the  former  occasion.  Again  his  writ¬ 
ing  I  consider  is  a  fac-simile  of  that  in  life,  and  quite  as  natural 
to  me  as  his  face  was.  The  style  of  it  and  the  manner  of 
expressing  himself,  interlarded  with  humor,  as  familiar  as  can 
be.  Dependent  on  more  than  one  phase,  by  corroboration  through 
several,  one  cannot  but  reach  a  conclusion  with  pro  and  con  effort 
or  reasoning  where  all  doubt  is  excluded. 

Let  me  ask  any  father  or  any  intelligent  man.  How  do  you 
know  any  friend  or  relative  at  any  time  or  place?  Is  it  not  by 


448 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


seeing,  hearing  and  conversing  with  him  or  her?  Yes  and  a 
son’s  letter  from  the  front  in  wartime  is  by  the  writing  recog¬ 
nized  as  his  and  h^is  only,  for  no  two  people  write  exactly  alike, 
each  is  by  a  different  personality.  But  suppose  you  entertained 
doubt,  how  long  would  you  be  in  clearing  up  that  doubt?  Con¬ 
firmative  and  corroborative  evidence  through  trumpet,  by  mani¬ 
festation  of  the  earthly  expression,  as  ^in  a  materializing  seance ; 
or  on  slate  at  different  times  and  in  different  places,  one  or 
another  establishes  a  fact.  If  you  shut  your  eyes,  or  are  standing 
in  the  dark,  and  listen,  while  your  relative  or  friend  speaks, 
at  that  moment  you  know  who  it  is;  just  as  a  dog  knows  his 
master’s  voice,  and  face,  no  matter  how  many  other  men  are 
about.  Evidence  confirming  or  corroborating  is  readily  secured 
through  many  different  phases. 

I  have  known  my  son  more  than  fifty  years.  His  voice  alone, 
or  his  writing  alone  are  equally  conclusively  convincing 
to  me. 

Throughout  this  book  there  exists  a  veritable  cobweb  of 
corroborative  evidence  in  support  of  nearly  every  personality 
named ;  for  instance  in  the  case  of  Wm.  T.  Stead  alone,  for 
hitherto  he  had  come  to  me  through  sjx  or  seven  different  phases 
of  mediumship ;  and  more  than  a  dozen  mediums ;  and  now  he 
comes  through  another  door  I  have  opened  for  him,  the  phase  of 
independent  slate  writing,  and  writes  at  three  different  sittings. 
Ye,  who  knew  Wm.  T.  Stead  in  earthly  life  give  answer.  Is  not 
that  fact  of  forging  ahead  at  every  opportunity ;  and  his  effort  to 
make  doubly  sure  of  something  he  wishes  to  attain,  characteristics 
of  the  man?  He  was  in  earth  life  a  pen-friend  of  mine,  and 
well  I  knew  his  signature,  and  he  wants  the  readers  to  know  he 
is  yet.  But  in  spirit  life  his  first  efforts  through  automatic  writer’s 
hand,  were  not  generally  accepted  as  his  own  —  though  later 
ones  were  convincing.  This  was  doubtless  owjng  to  the  rhyming 
tendency,  or  the  psychic  influence,  which  every  medium  pos¬ 
sesses,  of  modifying  in  some  degree,  more  or  less  the  tone,  as  does 
every  musical  instrument,  betray  by  its  tone  what  instrument 
it  is  recognized  to  be,  even  in  the  simplest  melody  rendered. 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


449 


Though  in  the  first  instance  with  Wm.  T,  Stead  the  thoughts 
as  conveyed  were  evidential  to  me  of  his  own  personality. 

However  Stead  wanted  to  offer  still  more  proof  and  so 
accepted  my  invitation  to  come  again  and  meet  me,  where  he 
could  write  without  the  aid  of  a  psychic’s  hand  independently 
on  a  slate.  He  likewise  wants  me  tO'  know,  and  the  readers  also, 
that  he  knows  something  about  my  psychic  pen,  which  to  me  is 
confirmatory  evidence.  If  you  are  familiar  with  his  writing  as  a 
mortal,  what  are  your  thoughts  about  his  letter  forming,  his 
strokes  and  his  dots,  are  they  not  readily  recognizable?  He  is  in 
a  pleasant  mood,  and  writing  rapidly. 

To  me  the  first  effort  of  my  son,  Wm.  T.  Stead  and  others  to 
commune  with  me  by  independent  slate  writing  js  a  success. 

But  have  you  another  question  in  your  mind  to  ask,  and  is  it 
this?  “Can  you,  the  recipient  of  these  messages,  be  sure  that  the 
writers  were  really  your  son,  your  friend  Stead,  and  the  other 
friends?” 

Again  I  answer  you,  quite  as  sure  as  you  are  of  the  senders 
of  the  messages  you  receive  and  are  signed  by  any  relative,  friend 
or  business  man,  by  aid  of  your  mediums  of  the  phase  of  cable¬ 
grams,  phase  of  telegrams,  phase  of  Marconigrams,  phase  of 
phonograms,  or  the  more  universal  phase  of  government  postal 
delivery  of  letters. 

I  cannot  hope  to  convince  all  others.  Each  and  all  who  follow 
my  example  will  have  to  gain  results  for  themselves. 

That  we  can  communicate  with  those  in  the  spheres,  or  next 
state  of  continued  existence,  I  have  convinced  myself  by  facts 
and  by  proofs,  that  it  is  so,  for  I  have  opened  doors  of  com¬ 
munication,  and  angels  have  come,  and  continue  to  come  through 
them  to  me.  You  may  follow  my  example  and  prove  it  to  your 
own  satisfact,ion.  The  friends  will  come  to  all  who  open  the  door 
and  welcome  them  —  not  otherwise. 

The  last  door  I  opened  for  twenty  of  them  I  most  immediately 
desired  to  receive  greetings  from  or  messages ;  and  I  publish  to 
the  world  the  results  I  obtained.  The  last  door  I  opened  during 
the  26th  and  27th  days  of  August,  1917,  was  the  independent 


450 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


slate  writing  door;  and  these  added  pages  of  the  book  contain 
the  evidence  of  what  I  got,  together  w^ith  full  particulars  in  every 
detail  from  first  to  last  of  how  I  succeeded. 

John  S.  King. 

Summary  of  the  Independent  Slate  Writing. 

On  August  21st,  p.  m.,  1917,  I  made  a  written  request  to  my 
Chief  Guide  Hypatia  to  invite  each  spirit  on  a  submitted  wr^itten 
list  of  twenty  names  of  relatives,  friends,  guides  and  exalted 
spirits,  whom  I  had  selected  from  hundreds  from  whom  I  had 
already  heard,  to  write  greetings  or  messages  to  me  while  at 
Lily  Dale,  and  to  do  so  on  slates  independently  of  a  psychic’s 
hand.  These  papers  I  la,id  on  my  office  desk  for  her  to  read. 

Five  days  later,  at  2.30  p.  m.,  26th  August,  1917,  in  my  pres¬ 
ence  and  on  new  slates,  cleaned  and  examined  by  me,  the  writing 
at  my  first  seance  was  completed.  My  sitting  began  at  2  p.  m. 

The  second  and  third  sittings  began,  the  one  at  3  p.  m.  and  the 
other  at  5  p.  m.  on  27th  August,  1917. 

At  5.30  p.  m.,  the  close  of  my  third  sitting,  all  of  the  original 
20  invited  had  complied  with  my  request,  as  well  as  three  addi¬ 
tional  spirit  friends. 

Each  of  the  three  sittings  lasted  30  minutes. 

The  actual  time  occupied  in  writing  by  the  23  writers,  who 
wrote  26  messages  or  greetings,  was  ten  minutes  in  all  the  three 
sittings;  at  the  first  5  minutes,  at  the  second  3  minutes,  and  at 
the  third  2  minutes. 

All  the  writings  were  on  one  side  only  of  the  slates ;  and  thir¬ 
teen  slates  were  required. 

Everyone  of  the  twenty  invited  responded. 


Of  those  who  wrote  separately  there  were .  18 

Two  wrote  a  note  jointly,  making .  1 

One  of  the  added  three  names  while  there  wrote .  1 

Two  who  never  before  communed,  each  wrote .  2 

Wm.  T.  Stead  wrote  at  each  sitting,  extra  two .  2 


My  Guide  wrote  one  message  in  English  and  one  in  Greek. .  1 


DAWN  OF  THE  AWAKENED  MIND 


451 


My  Daughter  wrote  twice,  one  extra .  1 

Total  writings .  26 

Total  time  of  writing  in  minutes .  10 

Total  different  writers .  23 

Average  time  of  each  of  the  twenty-six  writings,  in  seconds  23^^ 


LiBHAR  V 

B'^wapsychology  laeoratok^ 

»UKE  UNIVERSITY 


i 

I 


